ted Lae ee set a) HW ie Ww Wah 4 Saga! ate My i Oy me Av a he ¥ ik iN, REPORT OF THE THIRTY-EIGHTH MEETING mnie ] Z\\2 4 = MLN La = > ‘ ~“ OF THE \F LS BRITISH ASSOCIATION ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE; HELD AT NORWICH IN AUGUST 1868. LONDON: JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET. 1869. PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. ALERE FLAMMAM. CONTENTS. Oxszects and Rules of the Association.......sseeecscerecscences i Places of Meeting and Officers from commencement .............. x Presidents and Secretaries of the Sections of the Association from com- rE GGA ed ETE N Ele HUW a 08 oe lh Cue ME XXV MEE IPOGUE Goo ale ice ocd sic xe carecu\s soos wah Maeda mates XXXV ener (MnO TSCS—G9 sks oh chia nupetomies Ge sees Hees agian XXXV1 Bemere ae ecetiotial Cominittees:. 6 6. as ssa map ag sie nis clea sense 3 XXXvVil Report of the Council to the General Committee ..........0..005 XXXVill Report of the Kew Committee, 1867-68 ........ cc eeee se eenees XXx1x Recommendations of the General Committee for Additional Reports im dnenearches in Science: «cede cercescccebeewcunds. VO ues xly Syngnsieor Money Grants 2.00. viv ides ec uidis duvneeee sci. hes 1 General Statement of Sums paid on account of Grants for Scientific AT SS eee ee eee Te Wil eyeehant aicee li Extracts from Resolutions of the General Committee ...........- lvii Arrangement of the General Meetings ...............eceeeeees lvii Address by the President, Dr. Joseph D. Hooker, F.R.S. ........ lyiii REPORTS OF RESEARCHES IN SCIENCE. Report of the Lunar Committee for Mapping the Surface of the Moon. Drawn up by W. R. Brnz, at the request of the Committee, consisting of James Guaisuer, F.R.S., Lord Rossz, F.R.S., Lord Wrorrestry, F.R.S., Sir J. Herscner, Bart., F.R.S., Professor Purtzies, F.R.S., Rev. C. Prircnarp, F.R.S., W. Hucerns, F.R.S., Warren Dz LA Ror, F.R.8., C. Brooxn, F.R.S., Rev. T. W. Wess, F.R.AS., J. N. Lockyer, F.R.A.S., Herr Scuanpr, and W. R. Brrz, F.R.AS....... 1 iv CONTENTS. Page Fourth Report of the Committee for Exploring Kent’s Cavern, Devon- shire. The Committee consisting of Sir Cuartes Lyett, Bart., Pro- fessor Puriuirs, Sir Joun Luszocx, Bart., Mr. Joun Eyans, Mr. Epwarp Vivian, Mr. Grorce Busx, and Mr. Witiiam PeEnceiy RC POCLEL Mrs cle es we dc thle clei ee oe oe cbs SO ek ss 45 On Puddling Iron. By C. W. Sremens, F.RS............-020-ee- 58 Fourth Report on the Structure and Classification of the Fossil Crustacea. By Henry Woopwarp, F.G.S., F.Z.8., of the British Museum ...... 72 First Report on the British Fossil Corals. By P. Marri Duncan, M.B. hod RS, 8 G.8., Sec. Geol. Sie... . one as =< Re eee 75 Report of a Committee appointed to investigate Animal Substances with the Spectroscope. By HE. Ray Lanxmusven ..........0.000-d000 se 113_ Second Report of the Committee on the Condensation and Analysis of Pables of Steamship Perko’ 5.5... 6... Fa unas tle selene 6 114 On the Results of Spectrum Analysis as applied to the Heavenly Bodies ; a Discourse delivered before the British Association at Nottingham, on August 24,1866. By Witt1am Hues, F.R.S., Hon. Sec. to the Royal Aptronomical ocieby, yc x. 62%. w+ + aisle iw wise, wee oe as TL 140 On some. further Results of Spectrum Analysis as applied to the Heavenly Bodies. By Witt1sam Hueerms, F.R.S., Hon. Sec. to the ioyal A stronbiniied! Someiy IT nis SS eee mie eee 152 On Stellar Spectromotry. «By Padre Seccnr .......... <. cine oon 165° Report on the Physiological Action of the Methyl and allied Com- - pounds. By Brensamry W. Ricwarpsoy, M.A., M.D., F.R.S. ...... 170 Report of the Edinburgh Committee on the Action of Merctiry on the Biliary Secretion. By J. Hueues Benyert, M.D., F.R.S.E., Chairman nd Meperten |e e.e.s/+,-.50e5>,*.*, 4,000.0 157 RR > ee a ist = Last Report on Dredging among the Shetland Isles. By J. Grwy ARN eres) LESS EOS 8 Song So 6 ROR EMAG SP Rates 232 Shetland Final Dredging Report.—Part II. On the Crustacea, Tunicata, Polyzoa, Echinodermata, Actinozoa, Hydrozoa, and Porifera. By the Rev. Anremp Muriz Norman, M.A, .............00cc0ns oohiems 247 Report on the Annelids dredged off the Shetland Islands by Mr. Gywn Jeffreys, 1867-68. By W. C. M‘Ivrosn, M.D., F.LS. .......... 336 Report on the Shetland Foraminifera for 1868. By Epwarp Wattzr.. 340 Addenda to the Rev. A. M. Norman’s Report .............cceeees 341 Report on the Chemical Nature of Cast Iron.—Part I. Account of some Experiments made to obtain Iron free from Sulphur. By A. Mar- THIESSEN, F'.R.S., and 8. Prus SzczEPANOWSKI. ..........-.000020- 342 Interim Report of the Committee on the Safety of Merchant Ships and their Passengers 4.000% vcttens ‘TRAV URE alee te tibiae 344 CONTENTS. Report on Observations of Luminous Meteors, 1867-68. By a Com- mittee, consisting of Jamps Giarsnmr, F.R.S., of the Royal Obser- vatory, Greenwich, President of the Royal Microscopical and Meteo- rological Societies, Roperr P. Gru, F.G.8., E. W. Brayzey, F.R.S., Atexanprr S. Herscuet, F.R.A.S., and Cuartes Brooxr, F.R.S., Secretary to the Meteorological Society .........-se eee ee eee eens Preliminary Report on Mineral Veins containing Organic Remains in the Carboniferous Limestone. By Cuartes Moors, F.G.S, ... Report of a Committee, consisting of General Sir Annrew 8. Waven, Sir Arrnur PHarre, General G. Barrour, General Sir Vincent Eyre, Captain Suerarp Ossory, Mr. Groner Camrsert, and Dr. Tomas Txomson, appointed for the purpose of waiting on the Secretary of State for India to represent the desirability of an Exploration being made of the district between the Brahmaputra, the Upper Irawadi, and the Yang-tse-Kiang, with a view to a route being established between the navigable parts of these rivers .......-+-..e+ee eee Report of the Rainfall Committee, for the year 1867-68, consisting of J. Guatsuer, F.R.S., Prof. Parues, F.R.S., J. F. Bareman, F.R.S., R. W. Mrryz, F.RB.S., C. Brooxs, F.R.S., T. Hawxstry, C.E., and NST IEMONE, MECKELATY = -.-)-. a ciscee « ajs aycy oe aegeee eos + ea ainneiia ‘Report of Synthetical Researches on Organic Acids. By Atrrep R. Page 43 2 Carron, M.A., F.R.S.E., Fellow of St. John’s College, Cambridge.... 475 Report on the best means of providing for a uniformity of Weights and Measures, with reference to the Interests of Science. By a Committee, consisting of Sir Jonn Bowrrne, The Rt. Hon. C. B. Appertry, M.P., Mr. Samvet Brown, Mr. W. Ewarr, M.P., Dr. Farr, Mr. J. Franx Fetxows, Prof. Franxianp, Prof. Hennessy, Mr. James Herwoop, Sir Rozerr Kann, Prof. Leonz Levi, Prof. W. A. Mitrer, Prof. Rankine, Mr. C. W. Sremens, Col. Syxus, M.P., Prof. A. W. Winttamson, Mr. James Yares, Dr. Groner Grover, Mr. Josern Wurrworrs, Mr. J. R. Narrer, Mr. H. Drecxs, Mr. J. N. V. Bazat- cere, Mr. W. Surrn, Mr. W. Farrsarry, Mr. Joun Rosryson :— Prof. Leone Levi,-Secretary ...........00ecececneerreeceeres Committee for the purpose of promoting the extension, improvement, and harmonic analysis of Tidal Observations. Consisting of Sir Wm11am Tomson, LL.D., F.R.S., Prof. J. C. Apams, F.R.S., The Astronomer Rovat, F.R.S., J. F. Bareman, F.R.S., Admiral Sir Epwarp Betcuer, K.C.B., T. G. Boyz, Staff-Commander Burpwoop, R.N., Warren Dr La Roz, F.R.S., Prof. Fiscuer, F.R.S., J. P. Gassror, F.R.S., Prof. Haveuron, F.R.S., J. R. Hin, F.R.S., Prof. Kerranp, F.R.S., Staff- Captain Mortarry, C.B., J. Orpam, C.E., W. Parxzs, M. Inst. C.E., Prof. B. Pricz, F.R.S., Rev. C. Prircnarp, LL.D., F.R.S., Prof. Ray- Kinz, LL.D., F.R.S., Captain Ricnarps, R.N., F.R.S., Dr. Rosrson, F.B.S., Lieut.-General Sasryn, President of the Royal Society, W. Stssons, Prof. Sroxrs, D.C.L., F.R.S., T. Werster, M.A., F.R.S., and Prof. Furrer, M.A., and J. F. Isrrrn, M.A., Secretaries—Report by SHAE ROMSON TENE Hoe comer ets lclar sees ste cere weirs aon Shela e eres t 4 vl CONTENTS. Page Report of the Committee for the purpose of investigating the rate of : Increase of Underground Temperature downwards in various Loca- lities, of Dry Land and under Water. Drawn up by Professor Evz- reETr, at the request of the Committee, consisting of Sir Win11Am Txomsoy, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. E. W. Buyyey, F.R.S., F.G.S., Principal Forsrs, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. Arncurpatp Germ, F.R.S., F.G.S., Mr. James Gratsuer, F.R.S., Rev. Dr. Granam, Mr. Frremine Jenxin, C.E., F.R.S., Sir Cuartes Lyetz, Bart., LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. J. Crerx Maxwett, Mr. Grorcz Maw, F.L.S., F.G.S., Prof. Pamures, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. Pencrtty, F.R.S., F.G.S., Professor Ramsay, F.R.S., F.G.8., Mr. Batrovr Stewart, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. G. J. Symons, Prof. Jams Tromson, C.E., Prof. Youne, M.D., F.R.S.E, and Prof. Kyat, .D-CLL., F.B.8.B, Beeretary 21 .. oo) ae ae 510 Changes of the Moon’s Surface. By Baron Von Miprrr .......... 514 Report on Polyatomic Cyanides. By Tuomas Farruny.............. 519 NOTICES AND ABSTRACTS OF MISCELLANEOUS COMMUNICATIONS TO THE SECTIONS. MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS. Address by Professor Tynpauu, LL.D., F.R.S., &c.; President of the Section Lieut.-Col. A. Srrance on the necessity for State Intervention to secure the Progress of Physical Science ise. eee wer ceeded i cad dace eeees MATHEMATICS. Mr. W. Barrett Davis’s Historical Note on Lagrange’s Theorem ........ Mr. T. Dozson on a new Correction to be applied to observations made with PURVES DORCAS ah cela + chautsr ain © petals a aiacle oa Selele indies slo mia wengarises 4 Professor J: D. EvERETT’s résumé of Experiments on Rigidity ............ P gidity Mr. Arnruur Grartwe’s Examples of Ocular Demonstration of Geometrical PE FOPORMODS 0.0.6.5, 0\n.s.aj0.+/0) = mie «0 1n.0rm ple ene ee Hon. J. W. Srrurr on a permanent deflection of the Galvanometer-needle by a rapid series of equal and opposite Induced Currents ..........-...000 Mr. F. H. Vartery on the construction of a Galvanometer for the Detection of Wweakrblecic OUITONt ts. csces eet ces eccn ce cont: SAR cine rere ae Professor C, ZENGER on a new Automatic Telegraphic Apparatus .....+.+++ MeEtTEoROLOGY. Mr. Ropert James Mann onthe Resemblance and Contrasts of the Climates Obie Ma TrEVGTAB ANG INGE. coc. ccc occs< wssre eis e's ein «ers > Corereeielatelotnn atte Dr. Mann’s abstract of Meteorological Observations made at Pietermaritz- burg; Natal < PARTE See aoe eee Ae SY ee oh ee Mr. CHARLES Meitprum on Synoptic Weather-Charts of the Indian Ocean. . on Storm-Warnings in Mauritius..............6. Padre Srccur on some Meteorological Results obtained in the Observatory SGMELOMG ~ <7. .)e's tn a's “a vate toes toe etch fs seen ee eeeeeteesereveceens CHEMISTRY. Address by Professor E. Frankianp, F.R.S., President of the Section...... Mr. F. A. Apex on the Chemical Composition of the Great Cannon of Mu- hammed II., recently presented by the Sultan Abdul Aziz Khan to the British Government’ 71.0200. pecs Cog os 6s Se rinitao Gicsia Page 14 15 31 CONTENTS. P. Mr. ALFRED R. CattTon’s Note on Loéwie’s Researches on the Action of to} sodium Amalram’on Oxalic Wither 4).).)0.. 0000). icc. vee eele ts oaie slacte aude ——— on Mitscherlich’s Law of Isomorphism, and on the so-called cases of Dimorphisy 0.88 oo atears os. 90 Dr. Hucu Cirenorn on the Distribution of the principal Timber Trees of India, and the progress of Forest Conservancy ............ceeceeeceees 91 Dr. ALEXANDER Dickson on some of the Principal Modifications of the Receptacle, and their Relation to the “ Insertion” of the Leaf-organs of the TSUNEO Ra ep ee RO RE. SES SOMO GAR OR Meee Boer semero ain 94 Professor H, Farvre’s Experimental Studies on Annular Incisions on Mulberry BEREAN. @, F470 Ui siales ON al Seats asa! (Fh wie Mia Me Oeb ata ata PDD NLRC SHLD ALT SNG LETRA WEL Ok 95 Mr. Joun Fraser on a new Bfitish Moss, Hypnum Bambergeri............ 96 Mr. Rospert Garner’s Notice of a Male Octopodous Cuttlefish and some other UMOUNONEE.! Sot ciate Sect tote Ce Nea MoMA LAR oe A 96 Mr. T. B. Grierson on Education in Natural Science in Schools .......... 97 Mr. T. E. Gunn’s Notice of Rare'Fishes occurring in Norfolk and Lothingland 97 Professor Hennessy on the possible introduction of South-European Plants in me Wenn ach South of Freland: 2 ooo). < cclaisalesdats! did'e' sie! stele dates doe 98 Mr. Joun Hoge on the Wellingtonia gigantea, with remarks on its Form and Rate of growth, as compared with the Cedrus Libant oo... ccc cece eee 100 —————" Notes on Two British Wasps, and their Nests, illustrated by Photographs ....... ELE earn eerebe eh oink OSLER Ph =f ds ste) ie ete POLL ster 101 Professor T. H. HuxtEy on some Organisms which live at the bottom of the t. North Atlantic, in depths of 6000 to 15,000 feet .......... 0.0. cece eas 102 Dr. Karu Koc on the Necessity of Photographing Plants to obtain a better knowledge of them PEELE ety OTE EEE On Ree ee ite aas/ 102 on the Specific Identity of the Almond and the Peach...... 102 on the Classification of the Species of Crocus.............. 102 Mr. M. A. Lawson’s Notes on the Flora of Skye .......0.seeeeeeceuee pasar on the Discovery of Buxbaumia aphylla near London .... 104 Mr. Bensamin T. Lowne on Type Variation and Polymorphism in their rela- tion to Mr. Darwin’s Theory of the Origin of Species ...........0.00ees 104 xll CONTENTS. Mr. W. C. M*Inrosu on the Proboscis of Ommatoplea ..scesee esses eeees 1 5 on the Boring of certain Annelids .............. ee. OD Mr. GrorGr Maw on the occurrence of Lastrea rigida in North Wales...... 105 Mr. M. Mocerrpce on the “ Muffa” of the Sulphur Springs of Valdieri in PPABUTHONG te reeinite cis ciete niece te ccicles sive cele eis es 0 8 cece sisal Rion 106 Mr. A. G. Morr’s Discovery of Scirpus parvulus in Ireland ..........00000. 106 Rey. F. O. Morris on the Difficulties of Darwinism .:...........200eee ee 107 Professor ALFRED Newton on the Zoological Aspect of Game Laws........ 108 Mr. C. W. PEAcH on a new Eschara from Cornwall .............sesceeces 109 Professor RADLKOFER on the Structural Peculiarities of certain Sapindaceous LEY ye oacar gta INGE ead sie hese ra Pros ose ess sey alr 109 Mr. H. Stevenson on the Extinction of the Great Bustard in Norfolk and Sirlitell te Swarr a eeReR Ota aioe pci aeea ee Aira herr pathetic atass Rec UME Dr. Orro TorRE tu on the Tusks of the Walrus .........0.eesevececeres 111 Professor E. PercevaAL Wricut’s Notes on the Flora and Fauna of the Sey- es CTE ARIATIGS hs fs io tin biginss clypib ace nie tua minis, is nls 7p le Sys RE Lut ANATOMY AnD PHyYsronoey. Mr. Francis E. ANSTIE on certain Effects of Alcohol on the Pulse ........ 111 Dr. Brenter on the Generation of White Blood-corpuscles ...........+.... 112 Mr. W. Kencety Brmpeman on Electrolysis in the Mouth .............. 112 Dr. A. Crum Brown on the Connexion between Chemical Constitution and Phymolopics! Activity 29-20 0.6.0 ce ape eae ewe eens 115 Professor CLELAND, Is the Eustachian Tube Open or Shut in Swallowing ?.. 113 Dr. Copsoxp on Flukes from the Indian Elephant ...............0eeeees 113 Mr. Epwarps Crisp on the Relative Weight and form of the Eye and Colour of the Iris in Vertebrate Animals............ SioT ye. by 2, 0acds eee be eee 114 on some Points relating to the Visceral Anatomy of the TUUWUCUS. 000 ee cece nese env ener ecwceceoeecseevete ces sits weil 114 on the Intestinal Canal and other Viscera of the Gorilla 114 Dr. Taompson Dickson on Vitality as a Mode of Motion ................ 114 Mr. R. Dunn on the power of Utterance in respect to its Cerebral Bearings and (RRINES Mea re eine cee esis site s-¢ bee fovea cielits c Bun seacadiche atte Canteen 114 My. W. H. Frower on the Homologies and Notation of the Teeth of Mam- RTASULEY «= vx lu coe sto sehw s eGerolentte cae letndl serait abetegsrefel svapeueielsovars. Oe haraiay ake itera 115 Mr. Ropert GARNER on the Anatomy of the Carinaria Mediterranea ...... 116 Professor Hrynsivus on the Albuminoid Substances of the Blood-corpuscles.. 117 Mr. E. R. Lankester and H. N. Mosery on the Nomenclature of Mammalian Teoth and. the Wee vos bine WOle Merete s satel atotatede fe leletenaieiw > elataislete le ate taie nate 117 Mr. ALEXANDER MacauisTER’s Notes on the Homologies and Comparative Anatomy of the Atlas and AXiS......... 00s cece cece ence e eee eee e nee 117 Dr. R1cHARDSON on the Transmission of Light through Animal Bodies...... 118 — on Effects of Extreme Cold on Organic Function .......... 119 Professor G. Ro~iEesTon on the Pectorales Muscles ............+-0eeseee 120 on the Physiology of Pain... ....03 22. sens wees 120 Professor TRAQUAIR’s additional researches on the Asymmetry of the Pleuro- UO GELS «tice ov shat or eVatiet ot ave ole hale ose ale elarciete Wleltietshs Je ole tadmmd he tae Ieee Mette 120 CONTENTS. Xiil Professor Pau Broca on the Seat of the Faculty of Articulate Languages. . 130 Dr. Hueuurimes Jackson on the Physiology of Language ............0005 120 Professor GrorGcr RoxiEsTon on sixteen Eskimo Crania ............006+ 120 Mr. Epwarp B. Tytor’s Remarks on Language and Mythology as Depart- ACRE RO EOLOPICHU SCICHCO: 615, o's, s.6)0;4 \ole)aie cn4 sre! ahaye's. abn cceloler el e'die\ shay olt) spy exe 120 GEOGRAPHY ayy ETHNOLOGY. Address by Capt. Rrcuarps, R.N., F.R.S., President of the Section........ 121 Mr. T. Bayes on the Victoria and Albert Rivers, North Australia ........ 1380 Dr. H. Buanc'on the Native Races of Abyssinia ...........sceeeeeeveees 180 Commander Liyprsay Brine on the Past and Present Inhabitants of the Ma TGILeOt iy Refers cists « 6) =:o]5 PoRfahass tia cars B's alors) gabe Sora wielakn Mitlcjele ames «Wie take 181 Mr. R. Brown on the Physical Geography of the Queen Charlotte Islands .. 185 —— on the Formation of Fiords, Caions, Benches, Prairies, and MURAI RGVERS Ts. . don Site cee oe eed leads CMTE RK cetaceans Les 184 Mr. W. Hepworru Drxon on the Great Prairies and the Prairie Indians..,, 184 Sir Watrer Exxiot on the Sepulchral Remains of Southern India ........ 154 Rey. F. W. Hottanp on the Peninsula of Sinai, and its Geographical Bearings ooh (De abe AD AEM DS OUU eRe Mpa bee She UE Gk oC on ob bce DUO anenOnen OE 135 Mr. H. H. Howorru on the Nomade Races of European Russia .......... 136 Mz. T. J. Hurcurson on the Rivers and Territories of the Rio de la Plata.. 137 ——___————— on the Tehuelche Indians of Patagonia............ 137 Mr. J. Loaan Losey on the Topography of Vesuvius, with an account of the Mes eUEVEL TAP ULOIL coats javeyehs 6! cha 2 aie) sp slalslai «sie! dispeleiags,aiata aualehaldidiag hs, «oid shal Tiejalsiettys 137 Dr. Mann on the Gold-field of South Africa ......0..ccccseeceeeeeeeeaes 137 Mr. Crements R. Marxuam on the Physical Geography of the Portion of Abyssinia traversed by the English Expeditionary Force................ 138 Mr. W. Girrorp Paterave on the North-East Turkish Frontier and its 2ST ss SIRE 6 oa ok Me Or ea ee rae Seay ea 140 ‘Mr. GRANVILLE SHarp’s Description of Hong Kong...........seseeeenaee 141 Beemer as VAMBERY On the Uisuts ... 06) cee ese ccc aesceeverleneunnas 141 Mr. A. WappineTon on the Overland Route through British North America 141 Mr. Epwarp Wuymper’s Explorations in Greenland ..........eseseeevee 145 Professor E, PercEvAL WriGut on the Seychelles Islands........ naoten .. 143 ECONOMIC SCIENCE anv STATISTICS. Address by Samvet Brown, F.S.S., President of the Institute of Actuaries, PDE MERBS INES SPCC TS Sas Set cet vette etter eas node cares dae 144 Lypra E. BEcKER on some supposed Differences in the Minds of Men and Women with regard to Educational Necessities............cceeeveeeees 155 Sir Joun Bownrine on the Moral and Pecuniary Results of Prison Labour .. 156 Dr. Hypr Ciarke on the Progress of Turkey Mr. F. 8. Corrance on the Past, Present, and Future of the Wage-paid RTOS) 5 a5 cst SPAM MPES A ooh c clas! «sh aysuay ahahesl eta Ouag S axoiiee ci thew asasceecete 4 157 Mr. Epwanrps Crisp on the Statistics of Pulmonary Consumption in 623 Di- stricts of England and Wales..... br Vertaal Nano Oielalistet sacral tae anal ebeye! LOC XIV CONTENTS. Page Mr. Henry Drrcxs on Patent Monopoly as aflecting the encouragement, im- provement, and progress of Science, Arts, and Manufactures.......... sacs 169 Mr. Frank P. Fettows on the New Scheme of Mr. C. Seely, M.P., and Mr. F. P. Fellows for Admiralty Estimates, and “ Finance,” ‘“ Expense,” “ Ma- nufacturing,” and other Accounts, &c., recommended for adoption by the Committee of the House of Commons on Naval Monies and Accounts, and. ETO DUA ANTE CALE CL ale gov ctctel speibun oe i esnyevelicdoss ¢/ a¥ossioteka| Molen eke lel ete eRen nee 159 Mr. J. G. Frrcx on Educational Endowments .......seseeeseseeeceeeees 163 Mr. G. Bett GatLoway on Inventors and Inventions ............eeeee ees 165 The Rey. Epwarp GrrpLEsTone on the Condition of the Agricultural La- bourer, specially in the West of England..........sseseseee aie eb ele dso 165 Mr. W. D. Harprye on the Drainage of the Fens of Cambridgeshire, Hun- tingdonshire, Norfolk, and Suffolk. .......cseesscvsareccesnts Gd Gotnienrisk 6S My. James Heywoop on the Sanitary state of Indians in the Settlement of anyeareh, Canada, VES o/c. akja's's qulnaisinsiet) dacieeslds ooleene Creat Mr. Henry Jevna’s Brief Statement of the Recent Progress and Present © Aspect of Statistical Inquiry in relation to Shipping Casualties .......... 168 Sir WitLovucHBy Jonzs on the Arterial Drainage of Norfolk.............4 168 Professor Lronz Levi on the Progress of Learned Societies, illustrative of the Advancement of Science in the United Kingdom during the last Thirty Eee eee Ane Uo ey srstes ea aeh tre ne 5 1G 40 Abe Sra nate aes 169 — on the Present State of the Question of International ORI S a rues hese bat aah hela akbiatine: « haas hese Lhe 178 Mr. Horacz Mann’s Statistics relating to the Civil Service .............. 174 Mr. Francis G. P. Nrtson, Jun., on the Influence of Occupation upon Health 174 Mr. JosrpH Paynz on the relation between Learning and Teaching ........ 175 Mr. Henry J. Ker Porter on the Extension of the Contagious Diseases Act 175 Mr. C. 8. Reap on the Recent Improvements in Norfolk Farming .,........ 177 Mr. W. Smiru’s Statistics of the Progress and Extermination of the Cattle Piague in Norfolk ......... SRR hl Sy ore Seer aetna ae ay Aa Mr. G,. JounsTonr Stoney on the Natural System of Coinage ........+.+5 bes CCE Mr, F. Winson on Classification of Labour........ccccevercsesccesereves LED MECHANICS. Address by Grorcr Parker Bipprr, C.E., F.R.G.S., President of the RICRLADHL slag te clatetets tie eiviene bre 9x (0158ncpe ea ais Cin cy +Vesehoe oe eee 180 Mr. C. J. AppLeBy on the Mechanism for utilizing and regulating Convict Labour na.sijtenutae sees cd 5106 bor dor ikedmace oda oneaaqdcas Aamo ste) Professor ARCHER on R. W. Thomson’s Patent Road Steamer ............ 188 My. C. Buyrx on an Improved Machine for Drawing-off, Measuring, and Cut- ting Cloth and other Materials for Manufacturing Purposes...... eee uit .. 188 Mr. H. Brieur on London Street Tramways .........0000s € cntaniin +) asa dee Mr. E. CuarteswortH on the substitution of Hand- for Shoulder-guns, illustrated by an explanatory exhibition of an Elevator Hand-gun made on the Breech-ldading Principie.,\22 fo dive ses wde> > s+ cass os cage 19 eens 189 Mr, Latimer Crark on the Advisability of obtaining a Uniform Wire-Gauge 189 Mr. W. J. Cooper on an Improvement in Watering Roads ......++1++++++ 189 CONTENTS. XV Page Mr. G. Fawcvs on Improvements in the Packing of Boats, Lifeboats, and ELIGIE) 6 LAR B RBC SRS 0 DDO DED OBADOORODDDEDBOCE eCnmOrOneOnABDE Ic. 189 Mr. Lavineron E. Frercuer on the Unsatisfactory Character of Coroners’ Inquests consequent on Steam-Boiler Explosions ............-+ese ee eee 190 Mr. P. Le Neve Foster, Jun., on the Irrigation of Upper Lombardy by New Canals to be derived from the Lakes Lugano and Maggiore............4 190 Capt. D. Gatron’s Description of a Ventilating Fireplace, with Experiments upon its Heating Power as compared with that of ordinary Fireplaces .... 191 Mr. R. B. Grantuam on the Broads of East Norfolk, having reference to the Water-supply, Stowage, and Drainage ...........secesesececcetteccees 191 Mr. J. H. Gwynne on an Improved Centrifugal Pump .............eeeeeee 192 Mr. 8. Jenxrns on the Noted Slate-veins of Festiniog ..........0.eeeeeees 192 Mr. Joun Jonzs on some Points affecting the Economical Manufacture of Iron 192 Mr. Ferprvanp Kougn on the recent Progress of Steel Manufacture........ 195 Mr. T. Loern on the Abrading and Transporting Power of Water .......... 193 Mr. Cuartes W. Merrirrerp on the Necessity for further Experimental Knowledge respecting the Propulsion of Ships .........csseeeeeeeeaees 193 Mr. A. Nopet on Dynamite, a recent Preparation of Nitro-glycerine, as a LLLOSILG? AGT ages IBRD cag olor SEIN Tn cey Ta aOR CI ES: MeOoG Oromia mnie cd 194 Professor W. J. Macquorn RankInE on a Probable Connexion between the Resistance of Ships and their Mean Depth of Immersion ........... sic se9 104 Mr. W. TuHorotp’s Auxiliary Railway for Turnpike Roads and Highways passing through Towns 195 wd ata d. 6.) .6) aie, ©] hain a e60@) a ees) s wiu) Ola 6) 6) 6.0) 0.6 «6 a) #. vim 0/6)'ape's The Rey. Professor WILLIs on the Arrangements employed for the distribution of Water to towns and dwellings in the Middle Ages ...........00eeeee 195. Mr. Josep Wuirworrtu on the Proper Form of Projectiles for Penetration BRAM EEANVALCET, oho 520 Pea 2 ual hs REET a LAU Be Silas ae wR IMGs Maer 195 Mr. Henry Dircxs on Patent Monopoly as affecting the Encouragement, Improvement, and Progress of Science, Arts, and Manufacturers ...... é» 198 LIST Creer Awe: PLATE I. Illustrative of the Report of the Lunar Committee for Mapping the Surface of the Moon. PLATE II. Illustrative of Mr. Henry Woopwarov’s Fourth Report on the Structure and Classification of the Fossil Crustacea. PLATES IL, £Y., Ve _ Illustrative of Mr. Wrir11am Hveais’s papers on the Spectrum Analysis of the Heayenly Bodies. OBJECTS AND RULES THE ASSOCIATION. ——<——— OBJECTS. Tue Assocration contemplates no interference with the ground occupied by other institutions. Its objects are,—To give a stronger impulse and a more systematic direction to scientific inquiry,—to promote the intercourse of those who cultivate Science in different parts of the British Empire, with one an- other, and with foreign philosophers,—to obtain a more general attention to the objects of Science, and a removal of any disadvantages of a public kind which impede its progress. RULES. ADMISSION OF MEMBERS AND ASSOCIATES. All persons who have attended the first Meeting shall be entitled to be- come Members of the Association, upon subscribing an obligation to con- form to its Rules. : The Fellows and Members of Chartered Literary and Philosophical So- cieties publishing Transactions, in the British Empire, shall be entitled, in like manner, to become Members of the Association. The Officers and Members of the Councils, or Managing Committees, of Philosophical Institutions, shall be entitled, in like manner, to become Mem- bers of the Association. . All Members of a Philosophical Institution recommended by its Council or Managing Committee, shall be entitled, in like manner, to become Mem- bers of the Association. Persons not belonging to such Institutions shall be elected by the General Committee or Council, to become Life Members of the Association, Annual Subscribers, or Associates for the year, subject to the approval of a General Meeting. COMPOSITIONS, SUBSCRIPTIONS, AND PRIVILEGES. Lirz Memerrs shall pay, on admission, the sum of Ten Pounds. They shall receive gratuitously the Reports of the Association which may be pub- lished after the date of such payment. They are eligible to all the offices of the Association. Aynvat Sunscrizers shall pay, on admission, the sum of Two Pounds, and in each following year the sum of One Pound. They shall receive gratuitously the Reports of the Association for the year of their admission and for the years in which they continue to pay without intermission their Annual Subscription. By omitting to pay this Subscription in any particu- lar year, Members of this class (Annual Subscribers) lose for that and all future years the privilege of receiving the volumes of the Association gratis : but they may resume their Membership and other privileges at any sub- sequent Meeting of the Association, paying on each such occasion the sum of One Pound. They are eligible to all the Offices of the Association. Assocrares for the year shall pay on admission the sum of One Pound. They shall not receive gratuitously the Reports of the Association, nor be eligible to serve on Committees, or to hold any office. 1868. b Xvill RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. - The Association consists of the following classes :— 1. Life Members admitted from 1831 to 1845 inclusive, who have paid on admission Five Pounds as a composition. 2. Life Members who in 1846, or in subsequent years, have paid on ad- mission Ten Pounds as a composition. 3. Annual Members admitted from 1831 to 1839 inclusive, subject to the payment of One Pound annually. [May resume their Membership after in- termission of Annual Payment. | 4. Annual Members admitted in any year since 1839, subject to the pay- ment of Two Pounds for the first year, and One Pound in each following year. [May resume their Membership after intermission of Annual Pay- ment. | 5. Associates for the year, subject to the payment of One Pound. 6. Corresponding Members nominated by the Council. And the Members and Associates will be entitled to receive the annual volume of Reports, gratis, or to purchase it at reduced (or Members’) price, according to the following specification, viz. :— 1. Gratis.—Old Life Members who have paid Five Pounds as a compo- sition for Annual Payments, and previous to 1845 a further sum of wo Pounds as a Book Subscription, or, since 1845, a further sum of Five Pounds. New Life Members who have paid Ten Pounds as a composition. Annual Members who have not intermitted their Annual Sub- scription. 2. At reduced or Members’ Prices, viz. two-thirds of the Publication Price.—Old Life Members who have paid Five Pounds as a composition for Annual Payments, but no further sum as a Book Subscription. Annual Members who have intermitted their Annual Subscription. Associates for the year. [Privilege confined to the volume for that year only. | 3. Members may purchase (for the purpose of completing their sets) any of the first seventeen volumes of Transactions of the Associa- tion, and of which more than 100 copies remain, at one-third of the Publication Price. Application to be made (by letter) to Messrs. Taylor & Francis, Red Lion Court, Fleet St., London. Volumes not claimed within two years of the date of publication can only be issued by direction of the Council. Subscriptions shall be received by the Treasurer or Secretaries. MEETINGS. The Association shall meet annually, for one week, or longer. The place of each Meeting shall be appointed by the General Committee at the pre- vious Meeting ; and the Arrangements for it shall be entrusted to the Officers of the Association. GENERAL COMMITTEE. The General Committee shall sit during the week of the Meeting, or longer, to transact the business of the Association. It shall consist of the following persons :— 1. Presidents and Officers for the present and preceding years, with authors of Reports in the Transactions of the Association. 2. Members who have communicated any Paper to a Philosophical Society, which has been printed in its Transactions, and which relates to such subjects as are taken into consideration at the Sectional Meetings of the Association. RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. xix 3. Office-bearers for the time being, or Delegates, altogether not exceed- ing three in number, from any Philosophical Society publishing Transactions. 4, Office-bearers for the time being, or Delegates, not exceeding three, from Philosophical Institutions established in the place of Meeting, or in any place where the Association has formerly met. 5. Foreigners and other individuals whose assistance is desired, and who are specially nominated in writing for the Meeting of the year by the Presi- dent and General Secretaries. 6. The Presidents, Vice-Presidents, and Secretaries of the Sections are ex-officio members of the General Committee for the time being. SECTIONAL COMMITTEES, The General Committee shall appoint, at each Meeting, Committees, con- sisting severally of the Members most conversant with the several branches of Science, to advise together for the advancement thereof. The Committees shall report what subjects of investigation they would particularly recommend to be prosecuted during the ensuing year, and brought under consideration at the next Meeting. The Committees shall recommend Reports on the state and progress of particular Sciences, to be drawn up from time to time by competent persons, for the information of the Annual Meetings. COMMITTEE OF RECOMMENDATIONS. The General Committee shall appoint at each Meeting a Committee, which shall receive and consider the Recommendations of the Sectional Committees, and report to the General Committee the measures which they would advise to be adopted for the advancement of Science. All Recommendations of Grants of Money, Requests for Special Re- searches, and Reports on Scientific Subjects, shall be submitted to the Com- mittee of Recommendations, and not taken into consideration by the General Committee, unless previously recommended by the Committee of Recom- mendations. LOCAL COMMITTEES. Local Committees shall be formed by the Officers of the Association to assist in making arrangements for the Meetings. Local Committees shall have the power of adding to their numbers those Members of the Association whose assistance they may desire. OFFICERS, A President, two or more Vice-Presidents, one or more Secretaries, and a Treasurer, shall be annually appointed by the General Committee. COUNCIL. In the intervals of the Meetings, the affairs of the Association shall be managed by a Council appointed by the General Committee. The Council may also assemble for the despatch of business during the week of the Meeting. PAPERS AND COMMUNICATIONS. The Author of any paper or communication shall be at liberty to reserve his right of property therein. ACCOUNTS. The Accounts of the Association shall be audited annually, by Auditors appointed by the Meeting. 62 PIR anje\a\e Bisigiaial x pis (MsAjala/a,@’8e,e)ple]s\ a): sin SRR ain er Sy mMooinyy GN "M "AD seen eee eee eee eeeeeeneeseenrenes some GrTegec “bso ‘Auprre yy eeyeA “PEST ‘oz roquieydag ‘30% ‘SW HM “tosMorg pred Us “dll ‘AIO MA Wungg uyor uo ayy f *** "SUA “(ATT JO Uo) ‘a'd ‘MOOOVAd ‘DD ‘ATU PL Sree eeeeee sens sguyeor yadso yy FUNOISTA SMA UUM [COL “bsg “489A\ WHRTTTEAN *s'a'd “a TT ‘Aqsaroog * AA *A0rT ‘oT “bsq ‘yaudoy svumoyy, ‘sod “bsg ‘playpen Wen “a” « . . . a’ ‘wosmqoy “HVE ‘A sppet HELA? slesem ie se sie ia eles TAT s Boel CLOG UALS TY EL MUANUCIRY Pipl efcale «ele wlaate oiafe a'els ois te entre Le neeceeeeercereseceeseeeees QUUDY 4UNOISIA *JaMuysU'T JO [UG S'U'a “ASSOU AO TUVA 41 “UNINC “ONL ‘Wosteg ‘sop ‘Aa 4) *7** "WIN ‘A[foaezg wyor 1ossajorg ‘s'u'a “bsg ‘poomAozy somes "CW ‘Surar9py * AN ‘Sw “bsq ‘oro wed ‘SPS ‘ec oUNG ‘UALSAHONV]T * . in 6K . . Cauye 6 fa) 3 . "AC Sad “CW “Aer 'O "MM "SUA “VIN OlMspas “y -40u setreeeeeemcro ‘NOLIIIG SIONVUA CUOT UL *bsy favarg "uA, “bsg StoyaToy or aaa ear te “S'1'a “equa “AA *Aeu pur ‘uo ‘Sada “TO'd “woyed uyor sentence cece sere eco. seeececesesscsecoess sing & oomfayy ururefuag. a1g a P Lees i bsq “unl ‘ropfuy, pavyont “Dsop xo ota AA 910q 03 sees cia aie le "Ua ale lag CA Us Fo tesa : ete : 2 (as ne act Roh MN eet amaniilelee'sie-siv'y Sr einisiaidale arma bias Wa. tasealos ona ‘ ae : J OWXT sei ae ge Rael ad HUE ‘UOWOT “O38 Foes 9 Megane ‘TEMMAM HOSSALOUd “ATH ML ‘Sua “bsg ‘suey moug * Ah S ‘ a OUD PLOT *AdTLOYT JO [AVG OUT, 5 ss ‘bsq ‘Bueys sy Gs ‘-oqumnoasSpa JUNOT JO [Vy IL ‘Ss uw a “weg ‘ounqsug ‘WL 1s “OFSE ‘ZT aaquiagdag ‘MoDSVIH ‘a'TT ‘TOON ‘af ACW «“Dsq “EpPYT Aerpuy Ug “eysMorg pred AIS ‘TSU ‘yooueary psovy [eaouary-10le py treeeees sour “ONVEATVAVAUE JO SINDUVIM ULL “bsg “12180 HOTT "SU ‘ “bsp ‘wospoH eee aie afat'e hee o ree A tees anes . “OUBpTeFOBTAL yedioung *Aaw sa) ‘Gest ‘ga asnSny wv HONINUTE ‘a UO STYB[_ wozyAogy "***"""* ‘Ss Wt Sot sop uYyor "('C SWOSUIGO “ML 40H OULD Pigag Cocege yr Coy nr 74 . TAN ‘sou “bsg ‘tayieg 081005 se seecersesees ss ouqnoULyIE(, JO LUG -uojdueyqaon Jo stubavyy J 28 “SH AWW ‘LULOOUVH NONUAA 'M ‘ADU PUL ‘sad “VW HONE beh tarts args Rg oe eas a a paint “SPS COE SORA] *SE81 “06 qsndny ‘INA .-NO-TTLSVOMIN ‘s'o'y ‘uoyN "urs tt 320g 1 OF. ‘Sw ‘ganooie HH uoUIOA "AA “ANY ALL : ‘op “gy a ‘uosmepy uyoy | -**: cis ‘W's'a “S'U'a ‘weqing yo doystg auLs aes’) ASU ANVIYAINOALYUON 40 AHN OL *jood one hebeensevaueeesion ce seen paweveuseene Swat “TOMOTAA “AN “AOU ‘Lest “11 taqmaydog ‘1oOaaTAVT yoarT ‘uoynzysuy pefoxy *sarg “TOMICAL SINT TGORO eye nit ne nisinie se's n init, 9 eT se slaty ay egy Wa‘ “ued “u0j103q AME) OP iCiyicey ALS oe yee Eee uopuory jo Ajisxaatuy] ayy JO JOTTIO ‘bsgy ‘OWIND ddUTTE AL "WA "TAL “TIAL to ssajorg ae Ae = e {wont uyor "Soa “ST'd ‘yormsony jo doysig ay) -uryo “SOA “S'U'd “NOLONITUNA JO TUVA UL “bsg “uapueaorHy “A ‘S'O'a “Sa ‘arwaqhuog ‘( * AN ‘A \ “QEST ‘Za ysnsny “TOLSIUg ‘oy “Sa “AW ‘Aueqneq sossajoig +e sour ‘uoyduenjyaoyy Jo smnbavyy oy, S +0239 “Saad “'T'0'd “ANAMOCSNV'I AO SINOUVAL POUL ‘Sua ‘poy IOSSIJOIg “ANY - wee ie i ee aN Sonar gy TEMot AL "M *ADYW “CEST ‘Ol qsnsny ‘NITIAG ‘ony ‘puryary jo pesoy “MO.4sy “UOTE “AA TS 'SWU' CSU ‘umozuBsuxG gunoasia J tet soreesoscrrid “GAOL LSOAOUd ‘ADH MUL . . ‘ "T'S ‘99g ‘uosUIqoY uyor = SSRIs aba a) aint Sim Pea Sing Sis) ii @ 9: 86 6 KR eases asic eeecrs qsmOsMiqoy “i 1 Pat BR sais eine pinkie ye 3 ain gare be “Sra . for . “Oo . 6 ee eee eee eee ee eee feo . . . oy “OWT ‘SW A ‘Seqtog 1ossayorg OR SUA SMUT PMU US | eqeo.g “gory ‘aNvasrud TIVOQOGOVIN “LUIS ‘Sw ‘TTaMay AA "” "ADV ed eee eee Bur mann iy sa id oda “091 e¢ I uyor "ees Zz 9une ‘a9 a1uaWvo 'S'O'a COSTA CVI ‘Molsuay dossajorg ‘aay Losses Sat es ‘ory ‘qedoy aomouoysy “Sa “Auvy-a pS sp'd' A “Sad AV" Kn MOIMPNCUS WVCV ‘AGU UL ‘oR “SUA ave IW ‘TOMOg IOssajorg *A0yyT ence mere ewer eenesses 606 1095 ‘BU “SUT “TOMOTAN “AL *A9TT ¢ “GeBI ‘“6r oun ‘auoaxo ‘Oy og a a‘ ‘a ‘fuaqueq IOSSIJOIg Peer Hecc capes ccnnseseccasne SLY 3) oom RL Sua “19}SMOIGT pir 1g “on Sop ‘om Waaat anvisona "M ‘ATU ouL "lest ‘Ze toqmieydag ‘x10 XZ ‘SD “SU * "vIn ‘sdiyiya tossajorg ‘sora Sunt ser ere S'D'ad “S'u'd CVI “moore WoUrOA * AV sot { rox Soom Smad “Tod ‘WWVITTIMZLIA TUVA UL *SSINWLAYOSS 1WIOT *“SLNAGISAYd-JDIA “SLNAGISSudd "JUIMIIMO AULD) SII WOT “SotLIVJaIVIG [VIO] pue ‘syUApIsorg-o1A ‘SUOPISTg YIM “UOILIOOSSY YSYUG oy} JO CuNoopY Jo soully, pue sooeyg oT} SULMOYS 9[qQ@ J, *s ‘a ‘ Ss‘ ‘AR US' Uy “VM ‘purfjoy 10ssoyorg “AQT ee “Ow ay UT A Ce et ‘Solgq “aa ‘uosuIqoy W OF "AD ‘t ss qsujjag ‘edal[0p S,uvent ‘sorg “q'q ‘Aiuoyy *S ‘gq ‘Ay i aa a a8 Oe ff “Oa ‘syourpy paenpoy "AI eee omar aT ‘ayoogvpad +, Asua 1g 4 “A Sd “VLU ‘ASsoy Jo [reg oy, BOO OL OOO MIMO OCT ‘'T'O'a ‘uaT[Rpstuugy Jo eg ont 'S'T'a “bsg ‘omosunyy me trtteesseserscescess bsor UasoM EL ‘AW “bse ‘proqqog ‘9 | "WOSTTAA ‘d “MA IOSSOJOIg “C'W 995, A wer “bsg ‘uoyty ‘Of “MN ‘SSL ‘I aaquiaydag ‘asvatag sre Sie Ce. # 61818) ele ined esisiel = cle) Se RARE OS eho ayy jo "aA 2B svany ‘AoTTy1y [AoW “ANIGVS GUVMGA TANOTOO teeeeeeseeeucrtry ‘A1[9A0}S IOSSOZOIg 'S'U a ‘SaN0Ig "yD “DN | ‘rest ‘o Ang ‘morMsat ee ee a ee yesoyy somo -onsy “Saad “Tod “bsa ‘AUIV TIAGdIA ADUOAD “bit ‘Hopp AMTAY ofi09H | “MPT MOMIMPHN CA MIAN IS “ST Chavet snvaqiog “a wyor sts Lan 983009 PTDPHNG “ak a MUTANS SL “aval ‘meoqoKt ed WHOL SS ‘SVU “bse Key sapey wee ee SW Wh ‘orma pag ALOSSIjOL "ADI Ce (MON Jo doyste proy ay, “AW “WeYsa[puey pso'T OL, sere PSA “CM “WOstTy ‘d "AN dOssajorg §—*YS.anquipa Jo Apssoatuy, ayy Jo pudoung “es wa'A Sad aT uyor ‘Ady ATO, ‘oest ‘1a Ajup ‘Hox ANIA ee ee Maipuy 4g ‘paenoary IQ put LojvAleg 4g Jo aZaljog poytugQ oy} Jo pedwung “A RT'S ud “AIT “HM ‘UGLSMAUE CIAVG UIs "aS wa “beg ‘poy, seme ee tee ee ; ‘C'S Wa “CCM ‘nojfeg rossojorg WSU Sad “Sad “TO “eg ‘ounqsug "yy svu0y.y, Ig [edouay 7 sree eseess “OSU ‘([etouey-aousne piovT) asog parce ‘wor 9y ST co ssarad Tord LM ‘Aaoqasoy Jo jae oy, Petters eeeeeeeeeeee seers sorGer ag SST ‘soqIOg ‘Cf IOssIJoIg x OS “MOM “WvoyyND Jo [leg ay, treteeeesereeeeeeeecereees GBIMGUIP JO OAC POT] OY} *UOP WIN aE ihoenesttee ee ee ee ee a ee er es ‘SU Urpeyer ‘Aupuarr yy LOSSOJOIg a bay foe dt sl “gin oag Sarat “WHT “bsg ‘urmanq sapien "NU uputy, urnjydeg oar oT Od CaN “MU ‘2d WOqQOY Ag ‘uoH WYINT ae streeeseeseseeeesGurer Kopsaz01A\ ploy ops, ‘Aqmoravpy Jo peg oy "6PST ‘al raquieydag ‘WV HONIWUIG SVU “VIWW “a'd ‘NOSNIDOU “UM LADY OL Std “bsg aor ar AN ‘gaa “bsop ‘udmttg “AA stavary "Sua “Bepuryy jo uvaqy aga soy AoA ayy, Sy sald “Sud ‘eyegrped LH US sees eececess scuare gd ‘QIBpY JUNODSTA “L'u ‘ong jo smbavyy ayy, ‘PSI ‘6 ysndny ‘vVaSNVMS Stee ee eee e eee e ee eeeseeedereecesens agp ‘Qawog yesoxy ay} JO JUepIsAid ‘NOLANVHLUON AO SINDUVA UL “TW ‘TOOIN “a “bsg ‘oSpussoyy moyjyeyy | ***'s plang “3g Jo doystg priory ogg, = "Sata “at “bsg ‘uemta *H EP N ‘P81 ‘ez ounr ‘a1r0axo eee eee eee ee ey PlOjxQ JO AjIssoatu() ay} oy Pe a 16 “SU “TO'd “utd ‘SITDNI AUUVH LUAAOU WIS Wea “bso ‘purpy yyr0que Ay EH SU CVI Saxe Ay roqoy ‘aay ) 3° ABSALOM AOF I TO" “bsop Ginooysg_ [euyong *H seUTOYT, Peete a Nee teeeieu aes cve rv eres AISTOATUG OU} JO LOTeouvy-a01 A, aL sreerees Sern ‘ployxo Jo doyste prory oy, *S"W"W ‘assoy Jo [wey oy, 4 ee sew eecennereuaror “TaOmog Tossaolg ‘Sra “A'W “wang a ‘bsg ‘oouryg some (SW SVN ‘STA Jr “AO "ST CTT HM “tersMorg pravq i" SW COW ‘TeMog ‘Jord “ANT em "saa “aw ‘Auaqneq tossayorg seers secre Sard Saysmiuaysa Ay Jo uracy ayy *Aoy AtoA —"pslozxO, YIM OO a PAID A aE I aT as vue ‘paojxQ Jo doystg ploy 941 shes eisie's iare))) leis (exer sire “Tod oa “qv ‘uoyuneys ey ad1005 11g eres ss aT Braga] AwYS SopivyO "woH INT “AW ‘Uojssoueg yunoastA "7T'O'd “WOJANQYSy poy seeeceerecurTey™ ‘qsnosoqiv x Jo [weg ey, ‘AoIsoyourA, jo sinbavypy ay, RIR(G\S psi IRIs. sieininse SPIO Srigs eis so tava own ‘yornSpag IOSSIJOAT *AOY ist . ‘bs ‘Spoon *9 'H * "OFST ‘OL taqmajzdag ‘NOLAWVHLAOg "CW “Yae[O A1u9 77 ‘S'W'A"'S'9S'0'D ‘NOSIHOUNM ADAWI MOlUACOU AIS ‘sa own ‘poysuy sossajorg ) * 4 mish. tear Spor “wnt “bso ‘ry gt +9 “CEST “61 anne ‘aDaINAWVO ‘SU “WW “bsg ‘surjdoy Wen | * cs arg aysury “yp Ant ‘ad “weytry faa (tet oR “SU “HUG “IGHOSUAH ‘AA ‘A NHOL UIS a weteeececeeeeecesess s+ UOIMION JO doystg aU. *‘APIMpAVHY JO [eT oy, ee ee eee ee ‘bsg ‘oT AN ‘A UYyOL “WII ‘19][Nyq 1ossajorg *S'D'd “O'S'U' ‘TOON *£ Lossayorg *s'O'a “bsq ‘pavay saydg *M “Vd ‘Syourpy svuory, ‘soy, "ATT “yoooury UOsTION * AL "“Q'O'L'A “94°19 L IOssajotg *Aoy ‘bsq ‘aj300q4 ‘q ApunT ‘bs ‘TreSnyy 389A, uyor "seu'a “bsg ‘ystmesg pavyony ‘V'U ‘uosuiqoy 4dup "d'IW ‘Uuosiopuy seuoy.y, 10ssajorg ‘aT ‘duryg uyor "aI ‘ueuruy semory, ‘sta “CW ‘uosurprq ydesor ‘4suy ,solueyooyy [IN ‘sorg “bsq ‘sqoove +Aq9100§ "1d 23 IVT “TMH “dA “" “todo09 Aroo yy | *SalyVLadDaS 1V5071 own “bsg ‘aos, 1 \ ‘bsq “ormoy aa *uaapraqy jo Ayun0D 943 JO JouaAUOD “Sty “q'IT “bsg ‘uosmoyy, ‘vy HOT IS ODOC NOD AC OE AIBORS HOUR aC 1 eA aoa a Saosuiqoy "WL ACW OU eRe sic haere pone Pts ea antne ot ater a “est “PI soquiaydag ‘Nazauaay Hitt gana Sro'd SW UE “PUDSIOH “AN “al UNOS 31g LYOSNOO AONIUd AHL SSAUNHDIH IVAOU SIH Se ei +++ -ugapraqy Jo A419 ay Jo JSOAOLg PlO'T OUT, eee rt Std “Lt “oe Sarr ‘uaapseqy Jo [eg aU, Co ‘Sr ef ay) M ‘puowyony jo aynd au esr de wa dun Osa “beg § SOUT, UOJPOUOTT “AY ox Peis “s'p'a CW “bsg ‘Teysieyy yey sauer poeje(eiateje'sicsis sis espuquiep ‘aZaq]09 APU, JO 10488 fT *segt ‘zz toquiajdag ‘saamT oe: Vv’ a" a “S'D PRS 21 "uo ‘sw cad TeMo AL “M ‘Ady ONL, Hee ee teen eens tree eeeseees TINOSN YSYME Oy “s'D" ‘a * Sw’ “da ‘ ‘Weg ‘uoqiesg Aorg sudyeyy ap dyiqg ag [jo sjuawjinvdaq ALO} B Ee Tenjzeny 949 Jo. juepuajuuadng at Sipe a ‘a “VW SoU e “L‘WUOH WANT UL | “SDS TA Ss'a'd AY T'O'O “CM SNAMO CUVHOIN “S'9 "aa “d'IM ‘Weapon yunoost, ploy oy, ee ee rir swa ‘Q13va, U0 paory ou. SOM CaS Wad OWN CATT “sor TMD pacyort poche cera rae SHH CTT OM H “WOOstTT [>UO|O)-N] Puryear] Jo pedo sot0uoSy “s! Vwa “ait “WOMBAT “A WPUTLAL AIS 5 Fete ne ch ere UTANG ‘Mow JOM POT AUL (oo .e.ceeeeeeee ence eet OO MANY ‘NITEAG, : ea ay “*** PUBfoaT JO LOTOULYD PLOT FUL (owes org “qed & Yes see ck Re “ apIIeENK ap OAT, PIT “auHpIY Jo smbweyy ang, | ‘SUA VLOG “ad ‘GOTT AMUHANAH ‘ATH OWL aieeje\aomsiele.cicinaicsinad uygna ‘adejog Ajuty, Jo ysoAorg ayy, isl sie beingelne a ulyqng jo ode py paory ayy apquanouoy 4yySry ayy, eh an /\G ‘98010 spouBNY "AO OUT, “bs ‘ TAT pAopy youieg sewmory, SW “T'O'd “S'98'9"D “Uoswpmyy "T YWEpoy as ‘ocst ‘9 IsnSny ‘WVHNGLTANO . 2 ae tresses projxg jo Ajistaatuy) ayy ut AuLz0g Jo IOSsaz * [0JSLIgT puw JayseonoTyH Jo doysig poy oy, [ _ Ceara eee acon oe eielelein ofanlen/sistestet lanier tae S'O'a “Sg “o1onqg jo pee 2th fo Od “Sw “a 1T “a'W ANGENVG “Ad “DY SATUVHO Cee meee eee eee n eee teen eees oar SV pT ‘aosuoyy, TWBYTTAA 1Ossajorg vreeeeee aur pedoy oy} Jo Jase “Sud “WIN “bsq ‘weqeig semoyy, i ee ee i i iri) “OW “Dbsa ‘unig raqeM . ¢ a ‘ Serereeaete veeveeseses gt ap MT Bat “BOM UNOS SOUR bo. seacenae one OT OL MMMUERIDE ROBHWRD: araiotaleynrete pret serene soared SET “Wnt ‘Tadry sapeyg ag a i i ‘Sowa “qe ‘gurpavs We 1S . ia ONS ah is ‘a’ ‘auvpivjoeyy pedioung ‘aay AiaA ou, ‘ A tence ee eeeeeee S'O'U'a “V'S'a ‘sex syoorg ydasor : SVs “a yy" cu a “bag Tresser merry min/e/e aaa e7eteicisTaisisiuieléielala sta Maixio}etais) acne re ery azpuqmes ‘e8aqjoo Aqua, 4 qtee Daeay i$ jo Jose] fa SO. Sarre et WW’ uo os! i Ars ‘aa “TOMOTLAN AIOSSIJOIg “AIT cc cececeeccse Let Rider teiey erp, a TUMVA ULL Pia RSS VES Die IT: a “Sw CA'TT “CW “UeMo sossajorg Toston “sa “av “qed ‘uowedg Sorp sudjeyy ap dyiqd 1s Ce i ie ‘SVU “Su acy Ww ‘Ka]saq}01A\ Ploy auL Beene eee eee teeter ween eens SOOO 0) .0 *Moore, Mr. C.—Veins containing Organic Remains in the Mountain Limestone of the Mendips and elsewhere...... LOs20)-°0 *Bryce, Dr.—Earthquakes in Scotland (renewed) .......... 14 0 0 Woodward, Mr. H.—Sections of Mountain-Limestone Fossils 25 0 0 Biology. Jukes, Professor —Kiltorcan Fossils, Kilkenny............ 20 0 0 *Carruthers, Mr.—Fossil Flora of Britain ...............- Dh! OSe0 *Richardson, Dr.—Physiological Action of the Methyl Series.. 30 0 0 Foster, Dr.—Products of Digestion...............0000005 OO Brown, Dr. Crum.—Relation between Chemical Constitution and Phymelopicnl Metion Se. ty oy ae a ae 15 0 0 *Lankester, Mr. E. Ray.—Investigation of Animal Substances with the Spectroscope (renewed) .............000ee0% 5 0 0 Wright, Dr. E. P.—Dredging on the coast of Lisbon ...... 20 0 0 *Lubbock, Sir J., Bart.—Record of the Progress of Zoology.. 100 0 0 Statistics and Economic Science. *Bowring, Sir J.—Metrical Committee.............00. 0005 2. 0° +O Mechanics. *Russcll, Mr. J. Scott—Analysis of Reports on Steam-ship PSrLCMaH OG Lc See EEE EELS oc. avn ee agave aoe 30 0 0 *Fairbairn, Mr. W.—Manufacture of Iron and Steel (renewed) 100 0 0 Grantham, Mr.—Treatment and utilization of Sewage ...... 10.10 0 Totals: ts... £1696 0 0 * Reappointed. , GENERAL STATEMENT. hi General Statement of Sums which have been paid on Account of Grants for Scientific Purposes. aie fai a. 1834. Tide Discussions ...sccsecrsrverve 20 0 0 1835. Made DISCUSSIONS ...:.2.c0.eeccesee 62 0 0 British Fossil Ichthyology ....-- 105 0 0 £167 0 0 1836. Tide Discussions .......... Reccases LOOT UL O British Fossil Ichthyology ...... 105 0 0 ‘Thermometric Observations, &c. 50 0 0 Experiments on long-continued Heat ..:... so hecheceeeass Aaa UY neh PUHIM= GASES. . 0.0.22. ..ccc eee eeeee 913 0 _ Refraction Experiments ........ ele Oo Lunar Nutation...............+ cee) OUP GU BIERIMOMUELETS .10,;orecccccascoo cee 15 6 0 £434 14 0 1837. Tide Discussions .....2...00....0. 284 1 0 Chemical Constants .........++000+ 2413 6 Lunar Nutation..................00. 70 0 0 Observations on Waves.........+++ 100 12 0 MGR SAL ETIStOle.:......0c00ceccoens too 0.0 Meteorology and Subterranean Temperature ...... meaeeateraaseege OO c= D Vitrification Experiments......... 150 0 0 Heart Experiments ..........+. a. 8 4 6 Barometric Observations ......... 30 0 0 BSMEMIMELETS. “acceccccscssescesecences 1118 6 £918 14 6 1838. Tide Discussions .........- AaEPA 29. 0,0 British Fossil Fishes ............ 100 0 0 Meteorological Observations and Anemometer (construction)... 100 0 0 Cast Iron (Strength of) ......... 60 0 0 Animal and Vegetable Substances (Preservation of) ............... 19° 10 Railway Constants ...........0+6- 41 12 10 BAIIBEETOCS . 55. .....0cecececssceese 50 0 0 Growin of Plants .....,.......0.... 75 0 0 PPEOMMIAPELAVETS. se .cccecetess-secves 3.6 6 Education Committee ............ 50 0 0 Heart Experiments ............... 5 3 0 Land and Sea Level............006 QETNNEP eT Subterranean Temperature ..... + SiGe” 0 Steam-vessels............sesscseeeees 100 0 0 Meteorological Committee ...... SLO -5 Thermometers ..,.....++ Seuesebasns 16 4 0 £956 12 2 1839. Fossil Ichthyologv............s0000 TIO OO Meteorological Observations at BetyaOUiLhin. eee cceseenvewseeceso ss 63 10 0 Mechanism of Waves ............ 144 2 0 Batre OUNGeS wy idstiveank avedeesese OOP LE 206 FS ey Meteorology and Subterranean Temperature ......+0++06- eossesee 2lJk 0 Vitrification Experiments...... ee ee Cast-Iron Experiments.........++ 100 0 0 Railway Constants ....... reo 2 28s ib. 92 Land and Sea Level.........+++.. 274 1 4 Steam-vessels’ Engines......++.... 100 0 0 Stars in Histoire Céleste ........ . 381 18 6 Stars in Lacaille .....sc0.s..ess=s- 1 aT Stars in R.A.S. Catalogue......... 616 6 Animal Secretions....... eee ee t0),10).).0 Steam-engines in Cornwall ...... 50 0 0 Atmospheric Air .........++eseeeee a a Cast and Wrought Iron............ 40 0 0 Heat on Organic Bodies ......+++ 3.0 0 Gases on Solar Spectrum .......+. 22, 01.40 Hourly Meteorological Observa- tions, Inverness and Kingussie 49 7 & Fossil Reptiles ......scesecesesseees 118 2 9 Mining Statistics ...... pyascsesanss 50 0 0 $1595.11 0 — 1840. Bristol Tides...cec.c.ccacsaercces 31.000) wOn 0 Subterranean Temperature ...... 13 13 6 Heart Experiments .....0.....00+ 18 19. 0 Lungs Experiments ......- eee aae scten Bede 10 Tide Discussions .......seseeeceees 50 0 0 Land and Sea Level............04+ GelDetd Stars (Histoire Céleste) ......... 242 10 0 Stars (Lacaille) ....+....+ Aor silo i ES ed Stars (Catalogue) ........0. oeeeete 264 0 0. Atmospheric Air ........+. Pere ea ot] Water on Iron ......... senssacceses 10 0 0 Heat on Organic Bodies ......... omar 0 Meteorological Observations...... 52 17 6 Foreign Scientific Memoirs ...... L1QicgllaG Working Population .....+.......2- 100 0 9 School) Statistics........s.0002...00: 50 0 0 Forms) of: Vesselstaesstees: deewesee 184 7 0 Chemical and Electrical Pheno- TENE. ceoeeeeceeeeee sawed seenel 40 0 0 Meteorological Observations at Plymouth .....0...seeeeeeee asst 0, Oink O Magnetical Observations .,......- 185 13 9 £1546 16 4 1841. Observations on Waves...... Seabees 30 0 0 Meteorology and Subterranean Temperature .......sceceeeeeeeese 8 8 0 Actinometers......ss+.sessseecsavere 10 0 0 Earthquake Shocks .......s000+++- PALE 0 Acrid Poisons: 2).2.os: saeeasheveete = 6 0 0 Veins and Absorbents ............ 341050 Mud in Rivers! 2.020.200 2. d.cecseer oro? 0 Marine Zoology......cccccessceeeee . 15°12 8 Skeleton Maps: .......cscocsseeees ~ 20" 0. 0 Mountain Barometers ...........- 618 6 Stars (Histoire Céleste).........- 185 0 0 d2 _ wpreosco So ocooune — oocooQqorconto o £1235 10 11 hi £ Stars (Lacaille) .....s.sesceeeee enees ND Stars (Nomenclature of) ....+.... 17 Stars (Catalogue of) ...........+++8 40 Water on Iron ..........d. eee eee ee 50 Meteorological Observations at Inverness .........scecceesceeneee 20 Meteorological Observations (re- Guction Of) .ssceccsesseceeeeeees 25 Fossil Reptiles ......ccssseeeeeeeeee 50 Foreign Memoirs .......-+...see00+ 62 Railway Sections .......ccssessseee 38 Forms of Vessels ....ceceesseseeeee 193 Meteorological Observations at Plymouth ......-0...eeeeeeeeeeeee 55 Magnetical Observations ......... 61 Fishes of the Old Red Sandstone 100 Tides, at Leith~....cccce..cceeeceeee 50 Anemometer at Edinburgh ...... 69 Tabulating Observations ......... 9 Races of Men csessssesseeeeeeveree 5 Radiate Animals ............+0+++) 2 1842. Dynamometric Instruments ....+. 113 Anoplura Britannize .......++...+++ 52 Tides at Bristol............s0+6 see Ny Gases on Light ..........0++-eeeeeee 30 Chronometers .......+++- yacseens' 26 Marine Zoology......-+sessse++ eae. wt British Fossil Mammalia ......... 100 Statistics of Education .........+++ 20 Marine Steam-vessels’ Engines... 28 Stars (Histoire Céleste)............ 59 Stars (Brit. Assoc. Cat. of) ....- Sty Railway Sections ........sseseeeeee 161 British Belemnites.......0+.....2+++ 50 Fossil Reptiles (publication of FREPOrt)’...--ceceseceservnseecsssss 210 Forms of Vessels .se....sseeceeeeee 180 Galvanic Experiments on Rocks 5 Meteorological Experiments at Plymouth .......-..ceeeeeeeeerens 68 Constant Indicator and Dynamo- metric Instruments .........+66 90 HoreeiO Wind -cnc.ns..cccnseesncc0s 10 Light on Growth of Seeds ...... 8 SVitell IS CAISEICS peewegennnsiocans eossme 50 Vegetative Power of Seeds ...... 108 Questions on Human Race ...... 7 £1449 1843. , Revision of the Nomenclature of SEALED... tac ncanaaanenetasmmacaseeee 2 Reduction of Stars, British Asso- ciation Catalogue ....++......++ 25 Anomalous Tides, Frith of Forth 120 Hourly Meteorological Observa- tionsat KingussieandInverness 77 Meteorological Observations at Plymouth, .oc......000 sececessees » 55 Whewell’s Meteorological Ane- mometer at Plymouth ....... 10 o a; om Oooo ccoocoocooantoow REPORT—1868. it Same Meteorological Observations, Os- ler’s Anemometer at Plymouth 20 0 0 Reduction of Meteorological Ob- ervatiOns .......00. ovsesleneeenaes 30°» .0,550 Meteorological Instruments and Gratuities *sisccctstecnenstenen eee 6) Construction of Anemometer at TRVEEneSS _.. <0 ss0cacnee eae cane oO? 2 Magnetic Cooperation 10 8 10 Meteorological Recorder for Kew Observatory, ccs. ..cussesseeeameee 50 0 0 Action of Gases on Light ........ 18: 16-4 Establishment at Kew Observa- tory, Wages, Repairs, Furni- ture and Sundries ........0+<0..- 133. 4 7 Experiments by Captive Balloons 81 8 0 Oxidation ofthe Rails of Railways 20 0 0 Publication of Report on Fossil Reptiles. .-scaes. -secckeaneeeeeeee 40 0 0 Coloured Drawings of Railway NECHONSeteereesen cas caseee eee 147 18 3 Registration of Earthquake Shocks! veessceserewsse eaeenesceeae 30 0 0 Report on Zoological Nomencla- PURE! Sun cocecseseasencenns= can adnan LOPE SOME: Uncovering Lower Red Sand- stone near Manchester .......+« 4 4 6 Vegetative Power of Seeds ...... 5 3 8 Marine Testacea (Habits of) ... 10 0 0 Marine Zoology.......sssecssscecses 10 0 0 Marine Zoology.....-..sscsceseeeese 214 11 Preparation of Report on British Fossil Mammalia ........ss..000 100 0 0 Physiological Operations of Me- dicinal Agents <...:..sccsesnes oo ee) Oes0 Vital Statisties! i: ccdcestoe-.snvene 86 5 8 Additional Experiments on the Forms:of Vessels gccspeesesscsee 10) 0270 Additional Experiments on the Forms of Vessels .........0«s00e 100 0 0 Reduction of Experiments on the Forms Of Vessels’ (..-2-..setcassa 100 0 0 Morin’s Instrument and Constant Indicator occcccnrovepenaea tees = 69 14 10 Experiments on the Strength of Materials §casesasesuscnnstenceenes 60 0 0 £1565 10 2 1844, Meteorological Observations at Kingussie and Inverness ...... 12 “ORT Completing Observations at Ply- MUOUH Mis ascnccenecesshvans Serene sp oo HOO Magnetic and Meteorological Co- Operation , ..-.5..secseaceboaeesken 25 8 4 Publication of the British Asso- ciation Catalogue of Stars...... 35 0 0 Observations on Tides on the East coast of Scotland ......... 100 0 0 Revision of the Nomenclature of StaYs en: saa vabapgebnccteeen 1842 2 9 6 Maintaining the Establishmentin Kew Observatory sseneseoeseeeee 117 17 3 Instruments for Kew Observatory 56 7 3 GENERAL STATEMENT. eS, 45 Gb Influence of Light on Plants...... LO 0) 0 Subterraneous Temperature in BSE Mawis= co.ccscscatsctacesedeee o #00 Coloured Drawings of Railway MEBMOUS tewadie accsasceeseceradacie 15 17 6 Investigation of Fossil Fishes of the Lower Tertiary Strata 100 0 0 Registering the Shocks of Earth- RRRAIEHD need dccscdacvenscere 1842 23 11 10 Structure of Fossil Shells ......... 20 0 0 Radiata and Mollusca of the igean and Red Seas.....1842 100 0 0 Geographical Distributions of Marine Zoology............ 1842 10 0 0 Marine Zoology of Devon and BUPAUW ALONE sativSaanastsscascscases 10, 0. 0 Marine Zoology of Corfu ...... Foe tlie ol) ad Experiments on the Vitality of RE SIME Ge asehicsicc ous ss isesiase sees 9 0 3 Experiments on the Vitality of BRUM Msinccsassascscsrecoceue 1842 8 7 3 Hrxotie Anoplura) ......c.c.ceccere > lo. 0) 0 Strength of Materials ........... - 100 0 0 Completing Experiments on the Forms of Ships ...............000 100 0 0 Inquiries into Asphyxia ......... 10) 0" 0 Investigations on the Internal Constitution of Metals ......... 50 0 0 Constant Indicator and Morin’s MSETUMMENE <2 .0c0.cecesses 1842 10 8 6 £981 12 8 1845. Publication of the British Associa- tion Catalogue of Stars ...... ee 351 14 6 Meteorological Observations at BPRTECH ESS ls heseasdisieest eae) tus 30 18 11 Magnetic and Meteorological Co- PRELUDE co aclcouasbioweex ok toua ot 1616 8 Meteorological Instruments at PREDIC oie cawawenacacedsss ace USieldhe9 Reduction of Anemometrical Ob- servations at Plymouth ......... 25 0 0 Electrical Experiments at Kew WORSERVALOTY, , civcscscsc.cdacceseee 43 17 8 Maintaining the Establishment in Kew Observatory ..........cc008 149 15 0 For Kreil’s Barometrograph ...... 25 0 0 Gases from Iron Furnaces ...... 50 0 0 iieemetinoagraph ..........0. 6 4 Influence of Solar Radiation...... 30 0 0 Ethnological Inquiries ...........+ 12 0 O Researches on Annelida ......... 10 0 0 £391 9 7 1852. Maintaining the Establishment at Kew Observatory (including Mbalance of grant for 1850) ... 233 17 8 Experiments on the Conduction MPILERC Merete vccscserenserciecssen 5°29 Influence of Solar Radiations ... 20 0 0 Geological Map of Ireland ...... 15 0 0 Researches on the British Anne- Line eet athens’ sp van tora csaatvs20 19 0 O Vitality of Seeds ..........s0cs0e0 TO" TG: Sz Strength of Boiler Plates ......... 10) UL £304 6 7 1853. Maintaining the Establishment at Kew Observatory ..........s00s6 165 0 0 Experiments on the Influence of Solar Radiation............ss000. 1 0 0 Researches on the British Anne- ASA eetrsswiistin tse coe aee ne set ses LO. 10) 3cG Dredging on the East Coast of EUAN Uesecnsesenessecnes es tesa ads 10 0 0 Ethnological Queries ............ > 0 0 £205 0 0 1854. Maintaining the Establishment at Kew Observatory (including balance of former grant) ...... 330 15 4 Investigations on Flax ............ 1 UX) Effects of Temperature on Wrourhtilron’ tcc. .c..cse.cscrces 10 0 0 Registration of Periodical Phe- NOMMED AEs sesiee ences vee cegcnaaaane 10 0 0 Bitish “AMNCMGs | os2,csctccecss ames 10 0 0 Vitalityief Seeds’ s.c.e-ceescascucss 5 2 3 Conduction of Heat. ...... bat ens ee ean £380 19 7 1855. Maintaining the Establishment at Kew Obssrvatory ........ aieenc 425 0 0 Earthquake Movements ......... 10 0 0 Physical Aspect of the Moon...... Li) Sap Vitality of Seeds ........ssccseceee 10 7 11 Map iof theiW orld...,...0sc1vsesevs I> O40 Ethnological Queries............ soe S00 Dredging near Belfast ............ 4 0 0 “£i50 164 fs Maintaining the Establishment at Kew Observatory :-— 1854.....5 75 0 0 we 1855...4.£500 0 a SE ee Strickland’s Ornithological Syno- THY DOS 6 d.5s2sn0 osndbeeesquemades «- 100 0 0 Dredging and Dredging Forms... 913 9 Chemical Action of Light ......... 20.0 0 Strength of Iron Plates ........ aed Vol On aDrend Registration of Periodical Pheno- IMENA lowes vde¥asecaccegansey NOOPIION) O Insect Fauna, Palestine ...:..... 30 0 0 British) Rainfall. £02 0sicvencersseete 50 0 0 Kilkenny Coal Fields ...... Peri 25 0 O Alum Bay Fossil Leaf-Bed ...... 25 0 O Luminous Meteors ..............+ 50 0 0 Bournemouth, &c. Leaf-Beds... 30 0 0 Dredging, Shetland ............64 75 0 0 Steamship Reports Condensa- VION: Aeccondtseacdustees sceeesaveel 100 0 0 Electrical Standards......... sess WLUOMRAUMEO Ethyle and Methyle series ...... 25 0 0 Fossil Crustacea ........-seeesses- 25 0 0 Sound under Water ............... 24 4 0 North Greenland Fauna ......... 75 0 0 Do. Plant Beds... 100 0 0 Iron and Steel Manufacture 25 0 0 Patent Laws ...... Shseeses eassesawes 30 0 0 £1739 4 0 Lannea eneinaiietettiad 1868. Maintaining the Establishment of Kew Observatory............ 600 0 0 Lunar Committee:..........000... 120 0 0 Metrical Committee............... 50 0 0 Zoological Record .........260++ 100 0 0 Kent’s Hole Explorations ..... - 150 0 0 Steamship Performances......... 100 0 O British Rainfall .......... socom 50 0 0 Luminous Meteors ............068 50 0 0 Organic Acids .......... reneeee ence 60 0 0 Fossil Crustacea ....c.e0000.s.... 20 0 0 Methyliseries: (Ooc- N.B. The arrow ans * * Map x = & OF is a ee ah iol For illumination :—Longitude of terminator = 2 Inclination of terminator to meridian = North pole enlightened. a This map is not intended to be a perfect or complete Lunar Map, but only a guide to observers in obtaining data for the construction ofa complete map. Ho 6-1 E. 6-6 8. REPORT—1868. For season :— O—8 =133 40-4. Lunar summer in the northern hemisphere. For position :—N. and §., Moon’s latitude = 4 54:88. EK. and W., Moon past perigee 200 hours. Moon less apogee 150 hours. Objects are south and east of their mean places. For size :—Moon’s semidiameter 15’ 12-9; mean semidiameter 15’ 32:3. A circle of one degree in diameter at the centre of the moon’s disk is seen under an angle of 16":277; at 5° of longitude W. or E. the degree is fore- shortened in a radial direction, z.¢. on the equator by 0”:061, the shortest diameter being 16-216. At 10°, the N.W. angle of area IV A®, or N.E. of III A&, the foreshortening amounts to 0'"247, or nearly a quarter of a second, the shortest diameter being 16'030. The number of English feet subtending an angle of 1':0 at the centre of the moon’s disk at mean distance is 6116-7. This value is increased in receding from the centre in the proportion of the secants of the angular distances from the centre ; consequently at the middle point of each area the value of 1-0 is greater than at the centre of the moon’s disk ; for, by reason of the spherical surface of the moon, 1:0 covers a greater portion of the surface at a point removed from the centre than at the centre. At the middle point of IV A‘, or 2° 30' W. long., 2° 30'S. lat., the angular distance from the centre=3° 32’, which gives 6128°3 English feet for the value of 1-0. At the middle point of IV A’, or 7°30’ W. long., 2° 30'S. lat., the angular distance from the centre =7° 54’, which gives 6175°3 English feet for the value of 1-0. This is also the value for the middle point of IV A’. At the middle of IV A”, or 7° 30’ W. long., 7° 30’ S. lat., the angular distance from the centre=10° 35’, which gives 6222-7 English feet for the value of 1':0. While the values of 1'0 vary in the proportion of the secants as we recede from the centre of the disk, the objects themselves remain of the same extent, and are seen at mean libration, either under the larger angle produced by the moon passing her perigean point, or under the smaller as she passes her apo- gee. Taking 6116-7 as a standard quantity, expressing the diameter of a circle seen under an angle of 1:0 at mean distance, this quantity is seen at the centre of the disk, mean libration, moon in perigee, under an angle of 1-059 +, moon in apogee 0-941. At perigee, mean libration, at the middle point of IV A*, the foreshortening of an object of this extent is given by the following numbers :—Longest diameter 1”:059, shortest 1-057. The differ- ence is perfectly inappreciable ; it is therefore presumable that we see very nearly the true forms of the objects on this area. At apogee, mean libration, the proportions are—0":941 longest diameter, 0':939 shortest. For the middle points of TV Af and IV A¢ we have:—longest diameter 1-059, shortest 1-049, moon in perigee ; and 0-941 longest diameter, 0-932 shortest, moon in apogee. At the middle point of IV A” the foreshortening is greater, but still small :—moon in perigee, longest diameter 1-059, shortest 1-041 ; moon in apogee, longest diameter 0'°941, shortest 0-925. All the objects situated in areas IV A* and IV A® are so affected by libration that we see alternately more or less of their N. and §. sides. From the ele- ments of Rutherford’s photogram already given, it is easy to perceive that although the places are laid down on the areas for mean libration, the N. sides ) of the objects are presented in that photogram more directly to the eye; and this will to some extent affect the outline, inasmuch as the measures, more ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 9 particularly of the mountain-slopes, must necessarily include the larger angle under which they are seen on the photogram. It is only such objects as the orifices of craters, rings, and generally surface-markings, that are foreshort- ened to a greater degree as they are removed further from the eye by the effect of libration. The angle under which a mountain-slope, or any object which is elevated above the surface, is seen, is increased by libration as it is earried further from, and decreases as it is brought nearer to the eye; for if we take a mountain-range lying E. and W, on the equator, moon in node, we see the N, and 8. slopes under the smallest angles. As the moon attains a greater N. latitude, the mountain-range is seen N. of its normal position, and we see more of its S. slope and lose its N. slope, the reverse taking place as the moon attains S. latitude. The degree of visibility of mountain-slopes or objects that are more or less elevated above the surface within the areas above mentioned is dependent more or less upon three conditions :—1°, the angle which the crest or longitudinal direction of an object makes with a Junar meridian ; 2°, the angle which the slope makes with a vertical perpendicular to the moon’s surface; and,3°, the angle through which it is moved by the effect of libration. In each case there is a maximum effect, determined by the posi- tion and direction of the object. The visibility of objects within a zone of 1° 32' 9" N. or 8. of the moon’s equator is also affected by another circumstance, viz. the direction in which the sun’s rays fall upon such objects at different sea- sons of the lunar year ; for example, a mountain-range lying E. and W. on the moon’s equator will have its N. slope illuminated while the sun is N. of the moon’s equator, and its S. slope during the opposite season. The lunar sea- sons are easily found. When the sun’s longitude, as seen from the moon (which does not at the utmost differ more than 8’ from the longitude as seen from the earth), is equal to the longitude of the moon’s ascending node, the sun is vertical to the moon’s equator, passing from 8. to N. When the differ- ence between the longitudes of the sun and node equals 90°, the N. pole is enlightened, and the season is summer in the northern hemisphere. When the longitudes of the sun and node differ 180°, it is the autumnal equinox in the northern hemisphere, and when the difference amounts to 270° it is winter, the 8. pole being illuminated. These quantities may be thus expressed for the northern hemisphere :— O-—8= 0°+ Sun in equator ascending. ©O-—R8= 90+ Sun in tropic, N. pole illuminated. ©O— g=180 — Sun in equator descending. O— 8 =270 — Sun in tropic, 8. pole illuminated, Tn order to find the season, and consequently the illumination due to it of an object in the tropical zone 1° 32’ 9” N. and S. of the moon’s equator, nothing further is requisite than to find from the Nautical Almanac the longitudes of the sun and node: the quantity © — g will give the season as above. Tf the sine of the angle @ — g be multiplied into the sine of 1° 32! 9”, the inclination of the moon’s equator to the ecliptic, we obtain the sine of an angle which represents respectively the following quantities:—1°, the sun’s decli- nation as seen from the moon ; 2°, the inclination of the equator of illumina- tion to the moon’s equator ; and, 3°, the inclination of the terminator to the lunar meridian which it intersects. From the above considerations it follows that in the three areas now issued, and also in the corresponding areas in Quadrants I., II., and III., we see lunar objects of very nearly their true forms, and that libration does not materially affect either their forms or magnitudes. 1868. c ed 10 REPORT—1868. The visibility of objects generally is affected in a much greater degree by the morning and evening illuminations. Shortly after sunrise the slopes of mountains facing the W. are so illuminated that their detail may be well and satisfactorily made out. It is only a little before sunset that the E. slopes are similarly illuminated. Most of the apparent changes in the appearance of objects are due to these illuminations. It is, however, manifest that Jow and flat objects are less affected than high and sloping ones. We have already indicated (letterpress, areas IV A*, IV AS, p. 7, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, p- 243) the mode of finding epochs of similar illumination ; still the changes which some objects undergo as the sun rises above their horizons are so re- markable that it may in some measure assist the observer in endeavouring to refer these changes to their legitimate sources, if we give for the limits of each zone of 5° the sun’s altitude for intervals of 12 hours during the period elapsing from sunrise to meridian passage, which will also be applicable to the decline from meridian passage to sunset. The epoch of sunrise at any particular spot with © — § =0° or 180° is manifestly that at which the lon- gitudes of the spot and terminator are equal; with © — & =270° the sun is slightly above the horizon, and with © — g& =90° as slightly below in the southern hemisphere. The longitude of the terminator may be found by the following formule :— Calling the longitude of terminator /,, the moon’s mean longitude /,, the sun’s true longitude ©, west longitude on the moon’s equator W, and E longi- tude E, then for the morning terminator we have W1=-(270°+1,), EL =@70°+1,)-0, and for the evening terminator W 1,.=O—(90°-+1,), E1,=(90°+1,)—O. TABLE OF SOLAR ALTITUDES AT THE Moon. Equator. Int. Hour-angle. | Winter Solstice. Equinoxes. |Summer Solstice. h fe) ] a ° 1 u“ oO 1 u“ ° 1 a“ 0 JOR On ae Or) 0 0 0 0 0 O 12 83 54 15 Co SA 6 5 46 6 5 37 24 77 48 30 12 10 34 12) 150) 12 10 34 36 71 42 45 18 16 49 18 16 18 16 49 17 48 65 37 0 24 22 27 24 23 0 24 22 27 60 59 31 15 30 28 0 30 28 48 30 28 0 72 53 25 30 36 33 35 36 34 29 36 33 35 84 47 20 0 42 38 52 42 40 0 42 38 52 96 41 14 15 48 44 19 48 45 44 48 44 19 108 35 8 30 54 49 46 54 51 30 54 49 46 120 29 2 45 60 55 4 60 57 13 60 55 4 132 22 57 0 67 0 5 67 3 0 67 0 56 144 16 51 15 73 4 40 73 8 40 73 4 40 156 10 45 30 79 7 50 79 14 25 79 7 50 168 4 39 45 85 5 20 85 20 20 85 5 20 Mer, Osh OrO 88 27 51 909 0 0 88 27 51 108 120 132 156 168 Mer. ON MAPPING-THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. TasiE or SoLtaR ALTITUDES AT THE Moon. Hour-angle. 99 6 0 83 54 15 77 48 30 71 42 45 65 37 0 59 31 15 53 25 30 47 20 0 41 14 15 35 8 30 99 92 45 22 57 0 16r5t 15 10 45 30 4 39 45 000 Latitude 5°. Winter Solstice. ~ aon SCOOk OR Oo: bo IO 81 58 30 83 27 51 83 9 45 8 0 0 86 32 9 Taste oF SorAR ALTITUDES AT THE Moon. Latitude 10°. Hour-angle. ° 1 u 90 0 O 83 54 15 77 48 30 71 42 45 65 37 0 59 31 15 53 25 30 47 20 0 41 14 15 35 8 30 29 2 45 22°57 0 16 51 15 10 45 30 4 39 45 0 0 0 Winter Solstice. 64 24 23 69.38 16 74 15 34 77 33 51 78 27 51 Equinoxes. 75 21 9 78 58 36 80 0 0 Summer S§lstice. ll The above Table has been computed from formule obligingly communi- cated by J. R. Hind, Esq., Superintendent of the Nautical Almanac. the Altitudes,— c2 For 12 REPORT—1868. Nat sin of alt = nat sin of mer alt minus ver sin hour-angle x cos lat x cos dec and checked by Ver sin zen dist = yer sin (lat + dec) plus ver sin hour-angle x cos lat x cos dec. One or two trials for obtaining the longitude of the terminator will be quite sufficient for finding the altitude for any given interval. In the case of the morning terminator, if its longitude is east of and differs from the longitude of the spot a few degrees only, the altitude will be found between interval 0 and 12 hours. It will, however, be best to compute a longitude of the terminator as near as may be to that of the spot, from the epoch of which intervals of 12 hours to meridian passage may very readily be found. In addition to the period of similar phase, 594 1" 28", we have a still closer one of 442¢ 235 0™, or 15 lunations. The numbers in the column on page xx of each month of the Nautical Almanac, headed “ Days elapsed of the Julian Period,” will greatly facilitate the application of this longer period. Changes arising from season and libration may, in consequence of comparing observations at epochs so distant, become more strikingly manifest. Area IV AB, Introduction. A few remarks upon the classes of objects found on this area and one or two other points may not be inappropriate; they are given under the following heads :—Points of the first order. Extent of surface. General features. Mountain-chains. Faults. Levels. Craters. Sequence of objects. Points oF THE FIRST OrpER.—The determination of one or two points of the first order in this area would be very advantageous for correcting the positions of objects in this and the neighbouring areas. For the mode of observing and computing, with an example, see Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, pp. 233 to 238. There are no isolated objects near the centre that would be suitable for this purpose; but IV Af 19 is well situated for areas IV A*, IV AS, and LV A”, and the crater [TV Af * for the N.W. part of area IV AF. Extent or Surrace.—This is the same as area lV A*, viz. 8877-925 square miles English, but, in consequence of foreshortening (see ante, p. 8), it does not appear to be so. The difference, however, is slight ; for 1V A* occupies on the moon’s equator 0872 parts of the moon’s radius considered as unity, and LV Af ‘0865 such parts. Greyerat Freatures.—This area consists principally of an elevated district bordering upon the lower surface of the W. part of Hipparchus. It is not marked by any very bold features, except the W.N.W. border of Hipparchus, which presents apparently a steep slope towards the lower land. This slope may be well studied under the evening illumination, at about 19 or 20 days of the moon’s age. With this exception, the surface is slightly irregular, dotted here and there with low mountains. The N.W. angle contains the central portion of what appears to be the remains of a large walled plain, but so altered by subsequent changes of the surface as to be scarcely recognizable. (See IV Af 2, p. 16.) Acomparatively undisturbed tract extends across the area from N.E. to S.W. ewternal to the 8.E. portion of the ancient ring sur- rounding the plain IV Af?, IV A’®, This tract is situated entirely on the high land N.W. of Hipparchus, and separates two regions of considerable disturbance, viz. that marked by the cliffs which extend from the plain IV A®?, TV A’3, to the ancient ring, and that characterized by the three | | ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 13 largest craters on the area, [V A*16, TV A®14, and IV Af1%, It appears to have some relation to the ancient ring in its curvilinear direction. Movnrarn-Cuarms.—This term is employed to designate long series of mountains, either in unbroken lines or, it may be, detached mountains occur- ring in lines. A portion of such a mountain-chain just crosses the S.W. angle of the area. It commences at the junction of the 8. border of Ptolemcus with the W. border of Alphonsus, and rises into high peaks on the 8.W. border of Ptolemeus: it forms the N.E. border of to TV A®9%, They are inserted in the catalogue upon their authority ; but, not haying seen them, I haye not yet inserted them upon the map. There are no traces of them upon Rutherford’s photogram. B. & M. speak of them as being like a string of pearls. It is probable they may be detected a short time after sunrise. At the western end of IV A! another break in the boun- dary occurs. This is succeeded by the range IV Af18, TY AY’ 1—the two ranges LV Af! TV Af, and IV A”! forming a gentle curve, which is con- tinued by the depression IV A’4, This depression completes the boundary— the plain IV A*?, IV A” being quite open towards the 8. W. 1864, Dec. 5, 6" 30™ to 7° 55™, this region was carefully observed with the Royal Society’s achromatic of 43-in. aperture, power 230. The details recorded then mostly agree with the features as seen on the photogram. A few have not been recognized, of which the principal are as follows :—‘ The western part of the boundary was seen to consist of three detached rocks, of which the southern one was rather elongated. The mountain-arm IV Af *9 was observed to end in an irregular boss or club-shaped elevation, of less brightness than the mountain-arm.” **2(x). The E. part of the plain enclosed on the W. by the depression IV A” 4, on the N. by the mountain-ranges IV AY}, IV Af 18, on the E. by IV A®! and IV A®4, and on the S.E. by IV AF 39, This plain is quite open towards the S.W., and has upon it the following objects :—The crater IV A® 3, which is the most conspicuous; a somewhat short elevated ridge, probably Lohrmann’s 61 of his Sec. I., which I do not recognize on the photogram ; and two minute hillocks between the ridge and crater. These hillocks are recorded in Obs. Bk. p. 164, No. 315, 1864, Dee. 5, 7.15 G.M.T. They are neither inserted in the map nor symbolized, as I do not find a seeond observation of them, and, not having made a sketch at the time, I am uncertain as to their position. I have the following note :— *‘ With the exception of 60 and 61, Lohrmann gives the surface of this forma- tion smooth. At present I do not see any other inequalities than the two minute hillocks.” On Rutherford’s photogram I find two objects to which the hillocks observed in 1864 may answer—IV A® %, described as a “hillock on the plain, and IV A® 91, a shallow depression.” It is probable I saw only the slope of the depression, which I regarded as that of a hillock. This plain on Rutherford’s photogram has greatly the appearance of a large ancient crater which has suffered from irruption and become nearly filled. If such has been the case, the wall has been broken through on the 8.W., the open portion facing a somewhat smooth tract, agreeing in this respect with the numerous ruined craters (as they appear to be) on the borders of the Maria. The plain is interestingly situated with regard to Godin and Agrippa. The crater TV Af, as well as the cliffs between IV Af3 and IV Af ™, are probably of more recent origin than the plain. The depressions IV A’ 4 and IV A* 41 at the extremities of the N.W. and S.E. ranges are remarkable. The occurrence of mountains standing in shallow depressions is not uncommon in some parts of the moon; it is a curious feature, and deserves careful con- sideration as well as observation. A very remarkable and interesting feature is connected with this plain, ers ieee ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 17 yiz. a kind of “ circumvallation”’ (consisting either of low mountains or, at some parts, of depressions) surrounds it, at an average distance from the centre of 35':24, not very unlike the second rampart of Iheticus (see letter- press, areas IV A*, LV AS, p. 12, and Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866, p. 248), or the cliffs surrounding IV A*¢ (see ibid. pp. 18, 249). A portion of a similar circumvallation exists on the N.W. of Agrippa. The circumvallation sur- rounding IV Af? is best traced on the N. in the mountains W. and E. of Godin, including the 8. border of that crater. The depression IV A? 4 and the mountain LV A& “ are situated upon this line of circumyallation. Here it becomes obscure, but can be traced passing between LV Af 4 and LV Af %, and continued in the mountain-chain extending from the junction of Ptole- meus and Alphonsus towards Sabine and Ritter (see ante, p. 13). From this mountain-chain the curve is continued to its junction with the 8. of Godin. The area enclosed by this ‘ circumvallation ” is about equal to that of the floor of Ptolemeus. Is this the remnant of a large walled plain which in- cluded a crater, nearly central, within it? Its position with regard to Ptole- meus is interesting, especially as the diverse groups on and near Hipparchus intervene. Its ancient character may be inferred from its being traversed by more than one “ fault :’—first, a “ray from Tycho,” which passes across its eastern segment; second, by the “fault” IV A* #2, which also crosses this segment. The “fault” IV A”* LV A®® orazes the E. edge of the ancient wall. The following passage from the Rev. T. W. Webb’s notice of Chacornac’s ‘Theory of Lunar Physics’ is so much to_the purpose that I quote it at length. «*‘ Among other characteristics of the primitive surface, we notice immense rings, whose crests alone project above the surrounding plain by some hundreds of yards—circular ramparts, the last visible vestiges of great buried craters ; and these are cut through by considerable breaches, which permit us to follow the level of the maritime soil, where it penetrates their interiors, and to re- mark the absence of the slightest difference in surface or structure.’’—Jntel- lectual Observer, No. xlvii. Dec. 1865, p. 373. The surface of the area included within the line of circumvallation is in striking contrast with that of Ptolemeus. If it has ever been in the same state as that magnificent plain, the changes it has undergone must have been considerable. From a smooth level surface, surrounded by a rampart of mountains, the remains of which we are now only able to trace imperfectly, it must have passed into a state during which the central parts have been elevated, and the surface attained a degree of subdued irregularity very diffe- rent from the surfaces of the great walled plains. While nearly every vestige of the characteristics of a walled plain has disappeared, the surface included by the circumvallation possesses a certain uniformity of aspect which gives an individuality to it, and which clearly separates it from the features external to it, It is singularly free from craters, two only of any magnitude being found upon it, viz. [V A?3, and the crater 8.S.E. of Godin, I A®5. Should the conjecture be correct that we have here the remains of a large walled plain, the intermediate changes that it has undergone indicate it to have been very ancient, perhaps among the most ancient of lunar forms. Hipparchus may be regarded as intermediate in character between this for- mation and Ptolemeus. We shall have to direct attention (see post, p. 37) to the probability that at some anterior epoch the depressed floor of Hipparchus and the higher land ‘W. of it were at the same level, and that the whole of the district W. of Hipparchus, including the plain under consideration, has since been elevated. If so, from the appearance which this walled plain now presents, it is probable that the rampart was nearly filled prior to the general 18 REPORT—1868. elevation of the district of which it forms a part. This also points to its great antiquity, especially as the “ fault” separating Hipparchus from the district appears to be comparatively recent. **3(x). A crater on the E. part of the plain IV A*? IV A” }, position second order x 3, ‘0103 8.W. of photogram, M of B. & M., who mark it 7° of bright- ness. Lohrmann gives it 8°. It is 60 of his SectionI. Hede- Ag. 9. scribes it as small, and very deep. Its E. interior slope forms the W. slope of the mountain-range IV A*4, which is the first é | of a series of short mountains connecting [VY A*? with TV Af l4, It, as well as IV A*14 and IV A®!9, is very deep, the shadow being still gibbous when the morning terminator has just passed Copernicus. The proportion of shadow to illuminated interior, when the longitude of the morning terminator=21° E., is as 1 to 1-833. See fig. 2. In the following engravings, representing the proportion of shadow to illuminated interior, the extent of shadow in all cases is equal to 1, but not upon the same scale, neither are the craters given on the same scale. IV A? is the fourth crater in order upon area IV Af, Diameter 6°25; longest dia- meter on a line passing through IV A*#9 8”:02, mag. 0°42. It appears as a white spot under a high illumination. 1868, May 1° 8" 0" G. M. T., I observed with the Crossley equatorial a white spot S. of IV A®#, which was also seen with the Royal Astronomical Society’s Sheepshanks telescope, No. 5, aperture 2°75 in., power 100, on May 304 9" 30™ G. M. T., 1868.—[W. R. B.] *4(x). A short mountain-range forming part of the E. boundary of the plain ITV Af? TV A’3, The N. end of this mountain-chain is \ of B. & M., whose measures give 6177 English feet, or 1883 French metres, for its alti- tude. Length of crest 8-48. The breadth of base includes the depth of the crater IV A £3, and is accordingly difficult to measure. Its E. slope appears to be very gradual. t5. The 8.E. of B. & M.’s five peaks on IV Af! N. of IV AF4. See ante, p. 16. +6. A peak between IV A*5 and IV A&7. 7. A peak between IV A*® and IV Af 8, +8. A peak between IV A®7 and IV AP ®. +9. The N.W. of B. & M.’s five peaks on IV A? 1. See ante, p. 16. *10(x). A short mountain-range parallel with IV A**. Length of crest 6"-25. It is situated near the point of intersection of two “ faults,” IVA” 73 TV Af ®, and IV Af *, the latter of which, although not so well marked as the “fault” IV A” 1! TV A&?0 TV A*”, can be easily traced as parallel with it on Rutherford’s photogram. It is difficult to determine whether Lohrmann really intended the S. ex- tremity of his 63, Sec. I., to represent IV A* 1°. Ifhe did, then he has an addi- tional range between 63 and 60, which is not apparent on the photogram. Ifhe did not, then his range 63, Sec. I.,is much longer than it ought to be. The cliffs between IV A*? and IV Af !* are very indifferently shown by Lohrmann. The boldest are certainly in the neighbourhood of [V Af*, His 59, See. I. (IV A ®°), which he has made the boldest, is certainly the lowest, as well as the last of the chain connecting TV A** with IV Af14. The direction of this chain is S.E—N.W. See also IV Af *4, post, p. 32. *11(x). A formation somewhat of the character of a circular hill with a depression of the nature of a crater nearly central. The E.N.E. boundary consists of a high mountain-range, IV Af *?, which, with IV A*9, form a rampart parallel with the W.S8.W. wall of Rheeticus. The interior of [TV Af 1 a ae ee — ee a ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 19 dips on the E.N.E. from the W. edge of IV A* to the W.S.W. foot of IV Af*; the ridge IV Af ® crosses [LV Af 1! from S. to N. Lohrmann describes and figures this formation as an enclosed plain, J of See. I. with central mountain, the surrounding mountains being 62 (IV Af ®), 63 (LV A®*4), and 64 (1 A*?5) of his Sec. I. He also speaks of two low rows of mountains between them. He says that in the midst of the interior plain a small central mountain is elevated. There is certainly nothing of the kind on Rutherford’s photogram, March 6, 1865, neither plain nor central mountain. On the W. of IV Af! is a hollow, IV A? 49, communicating with a semicrater, neither of which are shown by Lohrmann. The boldness with which the formations IV A?! and IV A** appear on the photogram is quite absent in B. & M.’s large map. IV A?" is more distinct in the small map, 1837, but shown as a plain without a central mountain. 1867, Dec. 3, 10". Royal Astronomical Society’s Sheepshanks telescope, No. 5, aperture 2°75, power 100. Identified TV A’ 29 and IV Af ®, the E. mountainous boundary of the two formations IV A*"™, TV Af 49, answering to Lohrmann’s 62, Sec. I., which are laid down correctly byhim. Also TV Af 57 and IY Af 4, the W. boundary answering to his 63, Sec. I. The two low mountain-chains spoken of by Lohrmann I failed to identify, but I saw on the moon a mountain, between the two mountain-boundaries above specified, which is not the central mountain of J, Sec. I., but the mountain-ridge IV Af of IV AF, It is probable that the mountain-ridge of IV Af ! is the E. of Lohrmann’s two low ridges; and between this and his 63, Sec. I., is the depression IV A* 4, not shown by him, and, instead of a plain and central mountain between the ridges IV Af ® and IV Af 29 TV A852, the 8. part of the space is filled with the crater IV Af, and the N. part dips to the N. angle of the formation IV A*" I Af 30._/W. R. B.] 1868, May 1° 8" 45" G. M. T.; Crossley equatorial 7-3 inches, power 122. Crater-row pretty well defined; IV AS! very distinct, with the crater IV A® upon it. The surface of the hill is in the form of a tableland, TV Af?) and IV Af rising higher on the E., the W. slope of IV Af & descending to the hollow. It is very possible that Lohrmann regarded the tableland as an enclosed plain. The question now is whether the crater IV A* 2 was regarded by him as a mountain. I do not see an exterior shadow on the E.; fig. 3 is too dark on the E. and N.E. The shading is not intended to indicate shadow, but the slope of the mountain on the N.E.—[W. R. B.] As in the case of Linné, it may possibly be considered that both Lohrmann and B. & M. are in error. It does not appear that B. & M. mention the formation. The following is a translation by the Rev. T. W. Webb. of Lohr- mann’s notice (Topographie der sichtbaren Mondoberfliche, erste Abtheilung, . O1):— ar ($ 47. 1.) This landscape lies under 7° of W. longitude upon the equa- tor, and is circularly encompassed by the high mountains 62, 63, and 64. Between these mountains, however, are also found two lower rows of moun- tains, going parallel with 63, that more closely encompasses I. In the middle of the inner plain a small central mountain raises itself.” *12(x), The central craterlet in IV A® 4 4-47, mag. 0:26. The ninth in order upon area IV AF, position second order x 12 on W. rim. This crater- let appears to be destitute of a raised wall, and is more of the cha- Fie. 3 racter of a dimple at the summit of the circular hill composing ~ S>— IV Af, With a morning terminator advanced a little beyond Q Copernicus the shadow is crescentiform ; proportion to illuminated 20 REPORT— 1868. interior as 1: 1°75 (see fig 3), breadth of shadow 1°61 +, illuminated inte- rior 2"-89+. *13(x). A mountain-range forming the N.W. portion of the boundary of the partly enclosed plain IV A®? IV AY 3; it is gently curved. Its W. por- tion is IV A’1!. The central part is hollowed interiorly ; length 13": rer breadth of base, the E. part, 7!:18, the central part 6"-71, the W. part 6”: 71. Pe la(x): The northern of three very conspicuous cr aters, W. of Hipparchus, which are seen under every variety of eater ne the second in order on area IV Af, 11”-19, mag. 0°66, E of B. & M. 7° of brightness, G of Lohr- mann, Sec. a, 8° of brightness. Position eae order x 14, b -0138 W.S.W. of photogram. It is N.W. of Horrov, and Fig. + has a small shallow crater, IV A* }, adjoining it on the S.E. A It is situated very nearly on the border of the high land form- Y ing the W. border of Hipparchus. It appears from the pho- Wow togram to be very deep. With a morning terminator ad- vanced beyond Copernicus, long. 21° E., the interior shadow of the W. rim is still gibbous, the E. interior sloping upwards from it tothe E.rim. At this stage of illumination the proportion of shadow to illuminated interior is as 1: 1-667 (see fig. 4). Breadth of shadow 4':20, of illuminated inte- rior 6-99. 15(x). A small shallow crater adjoining ITV A* ! on the 8.E., the sixth in order upon area IV A*. It is shown by B. & M. and Lohrmann. Longest diameter 6:25, shortest 5°31, mag. 0°32. It is situated on the very border of the high land W. of Hipparchus, and on the “ fault” TV A” 12 TVA B20 TH ASE. **16(x). Horrox’.—The largest crater on area TV A’. It is marked 6 on B &M.’smap, 232 on Lohrmann’s, and F on Lohrmann’s Sec. I. Position second order x 16, :0204 W. of [LV A®” on photogram. Longest diameter E. by N.- W. by 8. (nearly) 19”:67, shortest N. by W.-S. by E. 17-43, mag. 1:17. B. & M. record a brightness of 3° for the interior, and 5° for the border, when seen under favourable circumstances. Lohrmann’s value is from 4° to 5°. Its form consists of a semiellipse on the east side, and two nearly rec- tilineal walls on the W., which are inclined to each other at an obtuse angle. It has a low central hill, [V Af 7, but not a very level floor, on which are two hillocks, IV Af? and IV Af 24, The interior is probably bowl-shaped. The E. interior slope rises from this floor, and with a morning terminator advanced beyond Copernicus is brightly illuminated; the KE. y,, 5 boundary of the shadow of the W. border is nearly rectilinear. a Proportion at this stage:—shadow to illuminated portion as 1:1-509 (see fig. 5); breadth of shadow 7’':84, of illuminated interior 11:83. There are two ridges on the interior W. slope. ‘3 Horrox appears as an isolated crater on the lower level of the N.W. part of Hip- parchus. The space between the N.W. wall of Horrow and the fault TV A” ! TV A#20 TV A*? is mentioned by Lohrmann as a narrow valley (Topographie der sichtbaren Mondoberfliche, sec. i. p. 50). This appears to be the mouth of the valley IV A* #! IV A* 7, in which is the depression IV AF 78, 17. Hieparcuvus?.—Lohrmann’s Map 233. The north-western part. Jhis formation is described in the letterpress to areas IV A*, IV AS, pp. 12, 138, and in the Report of the Brit. Assoc. 1866, pp. 248, 249. As itis only seen a Named in commemoration of Mr. Horrox, who computed and observed the transit of Venus in the year 1639. > Named by Riccioli in commemoration of Hipparchus, who compiled the first catalogue of the fixed stars in the second century before our era. ae ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 21 to advantage shortly after the time of sunrise and a little before sunset, and is lost to view as a separate formation under a high illumination, to mark more clearly the territory of which it forms the western part, and which is of a much more individual character than Hipparchus, it is proposed to group the various objects which this territory contains under the general designation of “ Terra Astronomica,” as suitable for the district, a portion of which is com- memorated by the name of the greatest astronomer of his time, and which is surrounded by walled plains and craters, named in commemoration of cele- brated ancient and modern astronomers. The term is also suitable as a com- panion to the region in the south, which has been named “ Terra Photogra- phica,” to commemorate the labours of De La Rue in Celestial Photography. See Report, 1865, p. 305. Terra AsTRONOMICA. An extensive formation situated on the following areas :— mera” 6 LY Af IIT As ipvoar. “TV-A*. Tit A* It is N. of Albategnius, N.W. of Ptolemceus, and extends from these walled plains as far N. as the equator. This interesting region may be described under the heads of * Boundaries ” and “ Interior Formations.” Bovunparres. — Commencing at the angle formed by the junction of the walls of Alba- tegnius and Ptolemcus, at which point we find the crater [TV As}2, and proceeding W.N.W. as far as the small crater IV A$ 33, along the crest of a range of hills on which IV A$ 36 is situated upon the highest point, we traverse the common boundary of Terra Astronomica and Albategnius. At the point IV A$3 we leave Albategnius, and proceeding along IV A¢26, we arrive at the mountain IV A¢ 29, on the EK. of Halley, which is a fine crater just exterior to the S.W. border of Hippar- chus. From the N. angle of Halley, the cliff IV A” 14, terminating the high land from IV A“? to IV A"® facing Hipparchus and forming the continua- tion of its §8.W. border, proceeds in nearly the same direction as IV A$ 6 towards the depression IV A”®, This cliff terminates with the peak IV A”), a of B. & M. and 29 of Sec. I. of Lohrmann ; but the range of mountains of which it forms a part preserves its nearly rectilineal direction from the junction of the 8.W. border of Ptolemeus with the N.W. border of Al- phonsus to Ritter and Sabine (see ante, p. 13). It is between this cliff and IV A®™ that we meet with certain valleys which break through the wall of Hipparchus, viz. IV A"18 and IV A"®, N.W. of IV A"6 is the peak IVA", 30 Sec. I. of Lohrmann, immediately adjoining which on the N.W. is the long narrow valley IV A" 41, described by Julius Schmidt as a crater-rill (cleft) in his Catalogue of Rills, No. 362. The openings of these valleys to- 22 REPORT—1868. wards Hipparchus impart a somewhat curvilinear form to the boundary here- about. From the N.E. end of IV A” 4, which lies in the depression IV A” 21, as far as the E. edge of the crater IV Af 4, the boundary is nearly rectilinear and nearly coincident with the “fault” IV A"", IV A® 20, TV A* ?, which, probably originating in the crater IV A”?, has either elevated the surface on the W. or depressed the surface of the W. portion of Hipparchus, so that it is considerably below the high land; between IV A® 1 and LV A* !4 this high land rises into the peaks IV A? #8 and IV Af 47, At the crater IV A | this portion of the boundary forms a very obtuse angle with the valley [TV A8*! Ty A* 77, which extends as far as the N. end of IV A*1°. Here the boundary becomes indistinct. Beer and Midler, who do not give the “ fault” nor the valley, show the boundary as turning E. at TV A 4, passing the cliff or mountain IV A“ at the S. end of IV A*%!°, and passing along the depressions [TV A* ? and ITV A*}3 (neither of which they show), proceeding to the crater IV A*7, and further continued parallel with the W. mountainous border (LY As 47) of IV A¢24, Lohrmann’s W, Sec. I., through the crater IV A¢® to or near the small crater [V A¢*3. The dotted line shows the approximate direction of the N. and §.E. boundaries as given by B. & M. and Lohrmann. Lohr- mann in Sec. I. indicates, although not very distinctly, the “fault” and valley. The N. and §.E. boundaries of Hipparchus, as laid down by B. & M. and Lohrmann, are by no means so distinct on the photogram as shown on the map and section. The natural boundary of the large formation Terra As- tronomica appears to be continued from the junction of the valley TV A*%t TV A“ 77 with the “fault” IV A" TV A8 20 LV A*”, along the higher land between the valley and Rheticus, through the 8.E. mountainous border of Rheticus to the N.E. angle of Rheticus N. of the equator; it then trends E.S.E. along the S.W. border of the Sinus Medii to the N. border of the little plain N.E. of Reawmur. From thence it trends E. to the mass of high land on the N.W. border of Lohrmann’s U, Sec. I., IIL A*!, the W. border of which carries it on to the circular “ tableland” III A* °, N. of Herschel; the W. edges of this “‘ tableland” and Herschel bring us to the N. of Ptolemeus, the N.W. border of this walled plain being common to Ptolemceus and Terra Astro- nomic. Within the boundary now traced out, a more or less individualized forma- tion will be found; and as no part has received a distinct name except the S.W. (“ Hipparchus”’), the whole may not inappropriately be termed “ Terra Astronomica.” Inrertork Formatrons.—These may be characterized as Cliffs, Lines of Upheaval, Mountains, Plains, Depressions, Faults, and Craters. Cliffs—Two well-marked lines of cliffs cross the Terra Astronomica in divergent directions from the N.W. angle of Rheticus. They are both di- stinct on the photogram. The W. line of cliffs from the N.W. angle of Rheticus, along its W. border, passes W. of IV A*!, through the W. part of Hipparchus, past the prominent cliff [TV A$ ®8 (where the curved chain IV A$ ®* branches from it) towards the space between LV A$ 27 and IV AS 28, through the middle of TV As, to TV As %6, on the N.E. border of Albatcgnius. Leaving Hipparchus, this line of cliffs crosses the N.E. part of Albategnius, and terminates on the E. border of the crater IV A+, on the E. of Albategnius. The faces of these cliffs are of a 4 The lines of upheaval and depression upon areas IV A%, TV AS are tabulated and de- scribed in the letterpress to those areas, pp. 33 to 39, and Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866, pp. 269 to 275. ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 23 gently sloping character, are directed towards W. by N., and in “ Full Moon” the line is seen as a “ Ray” from “ Tycho.” See letterpress, areas IV A‘, IV AS, pp. 31 and 32, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, pp. 267, 268. Neither B. & M. nor Lohrmann give this line of cliffs. The N.E. line of cliffs (direction N.W.—S.E.) is a portion of a somewhat in- terrupted line which extends from the EK. border of Ptolemeus to a mass of high land E. of Agrippa. In crossing the Terra Astronomica from the W. border of Herschel, it is slightly curved, the convexity being towards the §.W. and the faces of the cliffs towards the N.K. The altitude may be about equal to the lower portions of the mountainous border of Ptolemeus. It is very imperfectly represented on B. & M.’s and Lohrmann’s maps, but it may be traced on Lohrmann’s Sec. I., although the character of a range of cliffs is not given. Passing along the range from Herschel towards the N.W., we find it first cut through by the valley III A*? IIT A$?; and parallel with this valley on the N.W. is a short mountain-arm, which springs from the line of cliffs, and probably forms the highest part of the boundary of the valley on the N.W. Itis next cut by a “fault,” IIT A%8 and III A$, which will be hereafter described. Just W. of this “fault” is the crater IV A*® III A* 1, which is situated on the line of cliffs and appears to be its culminating point. From thence the line is continued to the 8. edge of Reawmur, and merges into the S.W. and W. border of Reaumur, of which IV A%5 is the highest point. From the W. border of Reawmur the crater IV A*4 appears to connect it with the short mountain-chain IV A*", which joins the S.E. border of Rheticus. This line of cliffs is more strongly marked on the photogram than the boundary of Hipparchus, as shown by B. & M. and Lohrmann. Mountains.—The isolated mountains on this formation are but few; the most important are [V A¢ 8° and IV A$! on the subformation IV A$ 25, The remainder are either cliffs or mountain-borders of depressions and plains. Plains.—Three distinct plains may be specified as occurring on this forma- tion—Lohrmann’s W, Sec. I., Reawmur, and the small plain N.E. of it. They are all surrounded by mountain-borders. To these may be added the S.W. part of Hipparchus, W. of the westerly line of cliffs, which is the most level part of the formation. Depressions.—The most remarkable and important of these is the valley Til A*? IIT A¢?, N.W. of Herschel, crossing the N.E. line of cliffs ; and next is LY A*10, which is fully described under the symbols IV A*!°, TV A*# in letterpress to areas IV A*, IV AS, pp. 14 & 17, and Report, Brit. Assoc. 1866, pp. 250 and 253. IV A*!, IV A*!5 may also be included. In addition a large depression, IV A‘ !*?, is found between two ridges, which extend from TV A*7 and IV A*?S to TV A$ *°, It is well shownin De La Rue’s photogram of Feb. 22, 1858, and another, [V A¢ 9, between the crater IV A$1 and the mountains IV A¢ *7 and IV A$ &, The most remarkable subformation on Terra Astronomica is ITV A$ %, a careful description of which will be found under its symbol in letterpress to areas LV A“, IV AS, pp. 24 and 25, and Report of British Association, 1866, p- 261. Faults.—In addition to the “fault”? on the W.N.W. boundary, a remark- able one, III A*® Til A$15, extends from the N.W. border of Ptolemeus to the E. border of Reawmur. It crosses the space between Ptolemeus and the plain IV A*® IIT A*7 TIT AS 14 IV As *4 (W, Lohr. Sec. I.), grazes the S.W. extremity of the valley III A*? III As 2, N.W. of Herschel, and then traverses the plain, just grazing the E. edge of the crater III A*!, where it cuts the 24, REPORT—1868. line of cliffs ITI A¢ 8, JIT A*5, ITV A*8. From thence the “ fault ” extends to the E. edge of Reaumur ; its face is towards the E. This “fault” is not unlike, but lower in altitude than, Straight Wall. It is not so prominent an object as Straight Wall, which, occurring throughout its entire length on a plain, is very easily seen, whereas the “fault ” now under notice traverses a variety of surface, and is moreover surrounded by striking and conspicuous objects, among which it may readily be overlooked. It is nevertheless an interesting object. Craters.—The following is an enumeration of the craters and craterlets at present recorded as existing on or within the boundaries of the Terra Astronomica, as now described. Area IV AS. TGV AS...) Inthe S.Boangle 20... s.0u.5. B. & M.G.| L. | Ph. ZV AS°,..| On SH. portion S.W..of LY AS! |. oe ernie L.. |-Ph. SALVE CAG 2 nl) 55 bus’ mh POOL EASS: Ara elVEAS * oh | sas. 55 » &.W. of LV AS!..| B. & M. 1B fei. Bg MLA Ns ie Sr SEU rae Seen tent B. & M.._ |Lx).| Ph. (GI fel LAV NCS A A oN. of LV AS). . | Bi dy Mek ai eh ea LY (NS CPL es at 57a els OL WVCASS Seb wave Sov: ASe24. Wiloa uss 55. WV 6 08, DVLAS%, 3; |, Boaccall. These seven craters form a fine and conspicuous group. 9.| IV As}3 ..| Between LV A$! and Ptolemeeus. .| B. & M. 10.) IV As!4 .. i 98 FA 35 B. & M. 11.| IV Ag35 ., 3 53 x a B. & M. 12.| IVAS$18 .. ae op a e B. & M. 13.| IV A$}9 .. os BS oe a B. & M. These five craters form a “row” connecting IV A¢! with the N.W. border of Ptolemzus. B. & M. give sia. See letter- press, areas LY A“, TV AS, p. 23. IV As}9, The “ crater-row” ap- pears as a lucid streak on the photogram, but is easily re- solvable in the telescope. 14,| IV A¢!2l..| N. of IV Ag 28, 15.| IV Ags. .| N. of IV Ao}4. 16.| IV As 49 ..| On the 8. end of IV A¢ 47, 17.| IV A¢®9 ..| A crater? W. of the mountain- arm, [IV As 47, 18.| ITV Ag12,.| S.S.W. of IV A$ 389, 19.| IV Ag U8. .| S.E. of IV As 2, a This crater is one of a class which has been but recently suspected to exist on the moon, and of which the crater Zinné in the Mare Serenitatis was probably the first observed. ‘The principal characteristic of this class of objects consists in the occasional obscuration of the crater-form, nothing being seen but a white spot, which is very often indistinct and undefined in its outline. In the case of Linné this white spot has been observed to present itself rather suddenly. See Astronomical Register, No. 60, Dec. 1867, p- 254. The observations of TV A$®9 will be found in the same work, No. 62, Feb. 1868, p. 43, and also in the Proceedings of the Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society, vol. vii. p. 73. ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON, Area IV AS (continuzd), ~ oO 20.| IV As 103. .| BE. of TV AS 12 and IV A$ 13, 21.| IV As® ..| A conspicuouscrater W. of LV A¢!, | B & M. i. |L.35] Ph. 22.| IY AS” ..| Between the N.E. border of Alba- tegnius and IV A¢4, On the AViieelimet ok elitisy es eae) cS ccsll'emmeaen Motes sel elle 23.| IV AS 43 ..| Between IV A¢ #2 and IV A$4...|..........1.. So ieh. 24.) IV AS . .| N.W. of IV AS 43. 25.| IV A$ ..| N.W. of IV A$ 93, 26.| IV Ag ..] N.W. of IV AS 9%, 27.| IV AS ..| 8. of LV Ag 9, 28.| IV As 9 ..| On W. line of cliffs S. of IV A$ 6. VAS 2 oI WES: W..Of DV ASS ,. 2... eclos nen een ..| Ph. Prema.) 2 NOW of EV AGO ee te ie BAMA eee ye Phe commie Ac 45" | NON.W. of. DV ASS OP I te ed Se ere 32.| TV As 100. .| In the lineofancient wall of LY A¢58 33.| IV A¢® ..| N. of IV Ag 29, 34.| TV A¢®& ..| N.E. of IV A$ ®, 35.| TV As & ..| N.E. of IV A$ 8, Area IIT A*. | 36.| ITT A*10,.| On N.E. line of cliffs .......... B. & M. A. |L.92) Ph. Area IV A“. 37.| IVA*4 ..| Central in the depressed tract HIRV PAN ey om cert seams yo bass. cece B.& M.H./L. | Ph. 30.}| LV A*5 ..| N. of LV A“4. 39.| ITV A*% ..| W.N.W. of Reaumur. 40.| IV A*59 ..| On §.S.W. border of Reaumur. 41.| IV A“ 57 ..| On the S. border of Reaumur ..|........,.|.. Palpebe 42,| IV A“6 ..| The W. part of the crater III A“! B. & M.A. |L.92! Ph. 43.| IV A*7 ..) Between Horrox and IIT A*™ ..| B.& M.F./L. | Ph. 44.) 1V A“ 17 ..| The N. part of the crater ITV Af89|........../... {| Phy ee Nea RE OL DVCAS TL ak os ce felts ee alee Ph. BamemeVeNce Oo Bs Of hy At 22 = 2 a Ao 8a er Coan A am - |) Phe emmivene 2) | NONE. of PV ATE. oe re a er, Ph. ee Ae NW. of TV Ant B. & M eee he 49.| ITV A*% ,.| E. of IV A* 24, Pmipeny AMIS 2 Subs of Morrox <5... 2s. cel Onc. ene .| Ph. d1.| IV A*78 , .| In the angle between IV A* 33 and IT \Y/ gina ses MN Me EER ie ee a aie aati Bslicucesi Ph. 52.) IV A* #4 ..| The southern craterlet on ithe TRG OVA AC Seer ssi ge ee ok QOS SE OIE .| Ph. -o3.| TV A** ..| The middle craterlet on IV A“43..]..........).2.. Ph. 54.| TV A*46 ,.| The northern craterlet on [LV A%43|........../.. Yi leas ee Ly AM Omer) Atte? Ni. endlofbVy AM 58" .<°, etal ey Bees ces < .| Ph. 56.| ITV A*% ..| The southern craterlet in TV A%58|..........]....| Ph. 57.| [IV A*% ..| The northern craterlet in TV A%55|..........]. Pe ue 1868, D 26 ‘ REPURT—1868. Area LV A&. 58.| IV A®16 ..| Horrox.—The most conspicuous crater on Terra Astronomica, TA Fes 1517 9 seh. ae aa B. & M.b. | L.F.| Ph. The initials B. & M. signify that the crater is to be found in Beer and Miidler’s Map, L. in Lohrmann’s Sections, and Ph. on De La Rue’s and Rutherford’s Photograms. 18(x). A depression W. of Horrow and the W. border of Hipparchus, nearly midway between LV Af 14 and IV Af 19%, It is very irregular in form, and filled with a mountain-mass which gradually ascends from the W. and N. to the very border of Hipparchus. This mountain-mass rises from the W. foot of IV Af 18, and culminates in the peak IV A* *5, which is the highest point in the W. border of Hipparchus. It has upon it a white spot, IV A* *7, just where the rise commences towards Hipparchus. This spot is probably the small crater given by B. & M. and Lohrmann*, It presents an appearance analogous to that of Zinné, both on the photogram and as seen in 1867, and should be watched attentively from time to time. It spreads gradually from a bright centre, and degrades in brilliancy as the valley at the foot of the mountain-mass is approached. The brightness of IV A& #7 scarcely equals that of Zinné on Rutherford’s photogram, 1865, March 6. A mountain-crest crosses [TV A* 18 from N.W. to 8.E., the N.E. side being filled with the mountain-mass IV Af 47, which also culminates on the border of Hipparchus. Between TV A**8 and IV A 47 is an inlet, [V A* 45, in the mountain-border facing the plain W. of Horrow. IV A*®!§ appears as a somewhat large bright spot in full moon, but is not a very conspicuous object at other times. **19(x). The middle of three very conspicuous craters W. of Hipparchus(see TV Af 14), Itis G of B. & M., who record it as of 7° of brightness, and E of Lohrmann’s Sec. I. It is the third crater in order upon area IV A®. Its longest diameter measures 9'-42, and shortest 8-48, mag. 0°53. This crater is very deep, and has a small crater, [V A®*!, adjoining it on the Fig. 7. N.E. It is situated on the sloping edge of the high land W. of Hipparchus, ard in the angle formed by the intersection of the fault IV A” TV A&2%0 TV A’? with the fault TV A’? IV Af & (see letterpress to azeas IV A*, IV AS, pp. 19, 20, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, pp. 255, 256). With a morning terminator advanced beyoad Copernicus, the interior shadow of the W. rim is decidedly gibbous (see fig. 7), the E. interior sloping upwards from it to the E. rim. Breadth of shacow at this stage of illumination 3-78, of illuminated interior 4°71. The proportion of shadow to illuminated interior of the E. slope is as 1: 1:25. This is not so small as the proportion of shadow to the bright interior of the crater IV Af; and this, with the shadow of IV Af !9 being more gibbous than that of IV A’ 4, indicates that IV A*! is the deeper crater. Po: The form of IV Af departs very considerably from that of a circle ; the 2 1868, May 149» 45m G.M.T., it was seen with the Crossley equatorial, 7-3-in. aper- ture, most unmistakeably as a crater with gibbous interior shadow of about ‘33 of the dia- meter. On May 24 7h 25™ G.M.T., it exhibited some approximation to the class of“ light- centres.” See Brit. Assoc, Report, 1866, p. 218. : ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 27 8.W. edge is nearly but not quite straight. It is slightly curved, with the convexity towards the centre of the crater. This edge measures 5-78. The curvatu~e of the remainder of the rim is much greater, and the convexity outwards. 20(x). Part of the “ fault” from IV A’? to Rheeticus. This fault is fully described under IV A*”? in letterpress to areas [VY A*, IV AS, pp. 19, 20, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, pp. 255, 256. 21(x). A craterlet opened on the S. slope of the mountain IV A** and adjoining IV Af 19 onthe N.E. It is shown by B. & M. but not by Lohrmann, and is the eighth in order upon IV A*. Longest diameter (which aligns with N.W. angle of IV Af 19, and §. angle of [TV Af 16)—5’"-31, Diameter at aright angle to the normal line, viz. a line joining N. edge of Diony.ius and the 8. edge of Agrippa, =3'"-54, mag. 0-26. With a morning terminator advanced beyond Copernicus, the interior shadow of the W. rim is crescentiform, the chord being at aright angle to the direction of the longest diameter ; breadth of shadow 2”-70, of illuminated interior 3-17. Proportion of shadow to illu- minated interior as 1:1:174. It is deeper than the somewhat similarly situated crater IV A® 15, This craterlet is well situated for observing the effect of libration on the precipitous W.N.W. wall of Hipparchus. This wall, which has a direction 8.8.W.-N.N.E., is at times brought by libration into such a position that the eye looks along its E.S.E. slope; but when the roon is in the opposite part of her orbit, it is so situated with regard to the eye that the slope is more readily seen, and probably a portion of it lower than the craterlet may be detected. In the latter case it would rea!ly be further from the eye; but the slope would be seen under a larger angle, while the craterlet would by fore- shortening be seen under a smaller angle ; the difference, however, would be but slight, and scarcely appreciable by the eye. 22(x). A small eminence nearly central in IV A#16(Horroa), diameter 3-17, 23. A small hillock in IV Af 16 N.N.E. of IV Af 22, 24, A small hillock in IV Af 16 §.8.E. of IV A %, 25(x). The lower part of the E. interior slope of TV A*16, The upper part is IV A* 5, Bibi 26. A mountain N. of Horrow;. length of crest 4-94, breadth of base 35. This mounta‘n is elevated on the N. slope of IV # 16, 27. Amountain W.N.W. of IV A826; length of crest 4-01, breadth of base 4"-01. The crest of this mountain is a continuation of that of TV Af 7, witha slight break between them. The W. end is separated from the E. exterior slope of IV A®1*by a narrow valley which lies in the line of fault IV A* ”%, and opens into the broader valley IV A* #1! (see TV Af #1). 28. A crateriform depression on the N.W. slope of Horrow ; diameter 5'"13, mag. 0°30. _ **29(x). A mountain W. of Rheticus. Well shown by Lohrmann, 8. of his 62, Sec. I., but indifferently by B. & M. Length of crest 6°71, breadth of base 8"-02. This mountain, with IV A*® (Lohrmann’s 62, Sec. I.), forms the W. part of the secondary rampart around Rheticus (see letterpress to areas IV A*, IV AS, p. 12, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, p. 248). 30(x). A depression N. of IV Af “5; length E.—W. 10:25, breadth N.-S. 6-25. This depression, which is very shallow, lies in the valley IV A* 31, and also in the line of cliffs IV A* W.N.W.-ES.E., No. 1 (see letterpress, areas IV A*, IV AS, p. 34, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, p. 270). The fault LV A”! TY Af *° TY A*” appears to have dislocated this depression, as there is the appearance of the W. part on the higher level west of D2 28 REPORT— 1868. the “fault.” It is not a little remarkable that while a range of cliffs somewhat of the same nature as ITV A* W.N.W.-E.S.E., No. 1, extends from IV Af towards Horrow, the craters [VY Af and LV Af with Hor- vox forming its §.E. portion, the crater IV A**, and the cliffs IV A? 4, TV Af 10, TV Af 43, and IV A & “ lie in the prolongation of [LV A* W.N.W.- E.S.E., No. 1. Does this point to a focus of wpburst in the neighbourhood of Horrox, contemporaneous with the fault IVA’"! IV Af 20 TV A*?, and marked by the three large openings, Horrow, IV AP 4, and IV Af 19? If so, the line of cliffs extending from IV A**! to TV A? 18 would probably be more ancient than the “fault,” the upburst occurring 8. of the line of cliffs. It is to be remarked that on the line of cliffs a few small craters only are found, of which IV A*? and IV Af? are the principal, scarcely exceeding 8” in diameter, and at a considerable distance from each other. In describing the fault (see letterpress, areas IV A*, IV AS, p. 20, and Re- port. Brit. Assoc. 1866, p. 256), we suggested that it might be more recent than the “ray from Tycho,” on which the steep and rugged W. border of Albategnius occurs. On the parallel ray to the E. we noticed two points of upburst, one near IV A¢**, the other near IV A¢*? (see letterpress, areas IV A*, IV AS, p. 39, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, p. 275), the activity of which might be more ancient than that of [LV A”?. Should these considera- tions at all approximate to the truth, then we have a probable recent epoch for the production of the group of craters near the W. portion of Hipparchus. The close similarity, both in form and direction, of the valleys IV A**? and TV A"18 on opposite sides of Hipparchus also points to the priority of age of the line of cliffs in which IV A“*? occurs, as compared with the floor of Hip- parchus, which appears to be more recent. 31(x). The 8.8.W. part of the valley IV A* 7, This valley is interrupted but not obliterated by the fault [IV A” 1! TV A8 20 IV A*7?. At first, in the neighbourhood of IV A*%8, it is wide; but as the fault is approached it becomes much narrower. The W. side of the crateri- form depression IV A?! appears to be part of the W. slope of this valley, on which the E. rim of the crater [V Af 4 has protruded, which indicates a more recent epoch for the production of IV Af 14, Beyond the group connecting TV Af l4 with IV A 16, the valley IV A*77_ LV A8& 2! can be traced as a narrow dark cleft through the ascent to the bright spot [V A® ®7._ This cleft is not in Schmidt’s catalogue. 32. A craterlet 8. of TV AF, E. of [LV Af, 2”-70, mag. 0-16. The fifteenth in order on area LY AB, 33. The W. part of the 8. portion (IV A* 4°) of the second wall of Rheticus (see letterpress to areas IV A*, LV AS, p. 12, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, p. 248). It has been dislocated by the fault TV A”! TV A820 TY At ?, 34, A pit S.S.E. of IV Af} adjoining IV Af 8, This pit is surrounded by a broad hilly border ; longest diameter of border =7"-18, shortest=4'-94. It, with the E. border of IV Aé 5, is situated very exactly in the line of ‘fault IVA") LY AP 20 War m, TY Af 45; TY A 34, and TV A’ 28 form a connexion between IV Af 4 and IV AB 16, 35(x). A mountain W.N.W. of IV Af 19, on the line of fault IV At IV A® ®, also on the “ ray from Tycho ” on which Besselis situated. The two intersect at this mountain, which appears to have been thrust forward in the line of cleft” IV A#%, 36, The mountain-peak at the W. angle of IV A? 18, 37. The bright white spot (crater) on ae W. slope of TV Af 38, the twelfth crater in order on IV A8, ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 29 This spot should be assiduously watched. The spot IV A¢*° TV A*17, de- scribed in letterpress to areas [TV A*, IV AS, pp. 15 and 26, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, pp: 251 and 262, as a bright spot, has been seen by the author and by the Rey. W. O. Williams as a crater—on one occasion (Oct. 18, 1867) by Mr. Williams conspicuously so with a central cone casting a shadow. In the December lunation Mr. Williams was unable to detect any trace of a crater; but on January 3, 1868, the succeeding lunation, Mr. Baxendell saw it as a shallow crater about ? of the diameter of IV A*’. Mr. Williams has steadily continued his observations on this spot, from 1867, Oct. 7, to 1868, May 7, which I have arranged in the order of the sun’s altitude above it ; and as this arrangement illustrates the use of the Table on pp. 10, 11, it may be well to introduce it here, both as an example of referring observations to solar altitudes, and also as indicative of the changes of appearance dependent on the angle of illumination. OssEryations or TV A*!7 [VA$3; Larrrupe 5° §., LonerrupE 2° Wrst. Morning Illumination. Autho- | ©’s |Bright- No. Date. G.M.T. : Character. rity. alt. ness, 1. |1867,May 11. | 83 | Birt 6-6 | ...2.. | A shallow crater. 2. | 1868, Feb. 1. 5-6 | Williams| 6-12) ...... Crater well seen. 3. | 1868, Mar. 31. 7k Birt 62121) Si. ee Crater well defined. 4. | 1868, Jan. 3. 5-6 Williams | 12-18} ...... Discerned central cone,not certain. 5. | 1868, Jan. 3. Baxendell| 12-18 | ...... Well-marked shallow erater. 6. | 1867, Nov. 5. 9-10 | Williams | 18-24) 7 | Very bright, streak of interior sha- dow on the west. 7. | 1868, April 1. 5-G | Williams | 18-24 4 | Whitish patch of light. 8. | 1867, Dec. 5. 6-8 | Williams | 24-30 5 | Whitish spot; no crater. 9. | 1868, May 1. 10-11 | Williams | 24-30} ...... | Whitish patch, line of interior sha- dow on the west. 10, | 1867, Oct. 7. 83-10 | Williams | 24-30} ...... A very bright spot. 11. | 1867, Nov. 6. 8-10 | Williams 30-386; 6 | A bright patch of light; streak of shadow scarcely discernible, 12. | 1868, April 2. 5-6 | Williams | 30-36) 4 Whitish patch of light. 4 13. | 1868, April 2. 8h Birt 30-36 Very shallow crater with interior shadow. 14. | 1867, Dec. 6. 9-10 | Williams | 36-42 5 Whitish spot ; no crater. 15. | 1868, May 2. 63-10 | Williams | 36-42) ...... Long patch of light to east. 16. | 1868, May 4. | 103-112) Williams | 48-54! ...... Two bright spots. 17. | 1868, May 5. | 103-113) Williams | 60-66) ...... Two bright spots nearly equal and circular. 18. | 1868, May 6. | 93-102 | Birt 72-78| 65 | Two bright spots. 19. | 1868, May 7. | 113-12 | Williams | 83-€5) ...... Two bright spots; E. spot largest. ; Evening Illumination. 20. | 1867, Nov. 15 | 18-20 | Williams | 36-30; 10 | Very bright. 21. | 1868, Feb. 12. 204 | Williams | 30-24| 6,4 | Crater very conspicuous; with east peak very bright; 6°. 22. | 1867, Oct. 17. | 13-15 | Williams | 30-24 ...... Crater very conspicuous. 23. | 1867, Oct. 17. 132 | Ingall 30-24] ...... Drawn as a crater. 24. | 1867, Oct. 18. | 17-19 | Williams | 18-12} ...... Crater very conspicuous; small central cone casting ashadow. 25. | 1868, Jan. 15. 201 | Williams }12- 6] ....... | The crater conspicuous, with inte- rior shadow on east, fully equal to that of IV A*’. 380 REPORT—1868, The desideratum connected with spots of this nature is not so much the detec- tion of physical change as the ewvact determination of the value or extent of apparent change dependent upon variations of distance, libration, and angle of illumination; for until such determinations are reduced to numerical values, we are not in a position to decide upon the absolute fiaity of such objects ; nor can we be certain that there is more than apparent change until a large number of observations are discussed with especial reference to the elements above named. The Rey. T. W. Webb, in contrasting his seeings of Hratosthenes with the description of that crater by Beer and Miidler in ‘ Der Mond,’ has the following very important remarks. Speaking of the appearance which Hratosthenes pre- sented on the evening of Noy. 8, 1867, he says, “ Hratosthenes now all in local colour; from point of junction of Apennines round the E. semicircle, the out- side glacis of wall shows a curious dark-grey border, This is penetrated in two places by the streaks of Copernicus, which extend perhaps across Hratosthenes itself. Curious as to chronological sequence . . . It is just possible, however,” Mr. Webb continues, “that some process affecting the reflective power of the surface may at this time be working here; for B. & M. say that this crater is ‘in full moon not very distinct’*: we only see a very undefined faint light spot in a vicinity almost equally luminous. No mention is made of any darker portions, or of their being so situated as to indicate the position of the ring; and the description certainly does not tally well with present appearances. This is a peculiarly suitable spot for examining the question whether the Full- moon markings are unchangeable. Fixity, of course, if established by a long course of observation here, or anywhere else, would be no argument for its universal prevalence, since a state of quiescence in this respect might be attained at’very different epochs in different regions; but should the reverse be clearly ascertained in a single well-marked, even though minute, case, it need not be mentioned that one distinct, incontrovertible affirmation weighs down any number of negative instances, and merely throws back the date of their change to a prehistoric period.’’—Intellectual Observer, vol. xii. pp. 435, 436. **38(x). A mountain-peak on the W. border of Hipparchus, the culmi- nating point of the mountain-mass in IV Af 15, The high mountain-border on which IV Af *8 is situated, extends from the mouth of the valley IV A” *!, in the depression IV A” *, to the N. part of the peak IV A? 47 (see ante, p. 22). *39(x). A mountain-arm lying in the shallow depression TV A* 41, which it scarcely fills. Its direction is N.E.-S.W.; it springs from the 8. end of the depression IV A 4°, between IV A*4 and IV Af ?°; its highest point is the N.E., from which it gradually declines in altitude to the 8.W. part of the depression IV A*4!, Length of crest 8'"95, breadth of base 6-25 (see ante, pp. 15, 16). 40(x). A depression having somewhat of the crater character, between Ty Af4 and IV Af 1°, which rise to a considerable elevation on the W.N.W. and E.8.E. It is closed on the N. by lower hills, and on the 8. by the N.E. extremity of the mountain-arm IV A? 9, 41. The shallow depression in which IY A* *9 is situated. 42. A “fault” passing through IV A® ®, the K. foot of IV Af 74, grazing the E. foot of TV Af 73, along the axis of TY A*!°, and the W. mountain-border of IV AF 49, * Tt is necessary to bear in mind that Mr, Webb’s aperture is much larger than the one with which B. & M. observed ; it would nevertheless be important for gentlemen possessed of smaller apertures to examine Hratosthenes with the view of making out the details — recorded by Mr. Webb. ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 31: This “fault” is the westernmost of three that are nearly parallel and equi- distant, viz. [V Af #2, TV A®*l, and IV A% 20. These agree more or less in the steeper escarpments of the mountains found on them facing the E.8.E., their general direction being 8.8.W.—-N.N.E. Of the three, the fault IV A” ll Ly Af 20 TV A*” (see letterpress, areas IV A*, IV AS, p. 19, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, p. 255) is the longest and most distinctly marked as well as the easternmost. It is situated on the W. border of Hipparchus, and sepa- rates an elevated from a depressed tract of surface. If the parallelism of these faults points to a contemporaneity of origin, may we not recognize here the simultaneous operation of the upheaving force over a comparatively large area? It may be remarked, in connexion with this suggestion, that the two mountain-ranges forming the 8.8.W. and N.N.E. boundaries of the depressed portion E.S8.E. of the main fault IV A”! TV A*?o TV A“? have their steep escarpments towards depressed surfaces, With regard to the comparative ages of these faults, we have already sug- gested (letterpress, areas LV A*, IV AS p. 20, and Report Brit. Assoc. 1866, p. 256) that the fault IV A”"™ IV A#20 TV A*” is more recent than the “ray from Tycho” which it intersects; this suggestion is founded upon the fact that the “fault” is continuous throughout, but the “ray” is interrupted at the point of intersection. *43(x). A somewhat low mountain-range between IV A? 1° and IVAF 44, **44(x), A mountain-range §.E. of IV A* *%, situated on the line of cir- cumyallation around [TV A&? IV A’3, The short mountain-ranges [VY Af 4, TV Af 1, TY Af 43, and TV Af #4, with the crater IV A* ? and the intervening depressions, nearly form a radius from the centre to the circumference of the supposed ancient walled plain in which LY Af? IV A’* is situated. There are but few irregularities on the remaining portion of the plain. Itis probable these mountains are posterior in date to the plain. 45(x), The crateriform depression between IV Af 1° and ITV Af 48, 46, The valley between IV Af # and IV Af #4, _ This valley can be traced in a serpentine direction from between IV A* 43 and IV A* #4, past the W. end of [V A**, which slopes towards it, also past IV A® 7, which slopes towards the fault [IV A* *, through which IV Af 46 passes. **47(x). A mountain-peak on the W. border of Hipparchus, N.N.E. of TY A®%8. It is also on the fault IV A"! [TV Af 20 TV At? 48, A wide opening or inlet in the mountain-border of Hi ipparchus, between the two mountain-peaks TV Af 38 and IV A®& 47, *#49. A depression W. of [TV Af", and between it and ITV Af*4, It is situated on the line of “circumyallation” around TVA 2p EAS: 50, A shallow depression or crater on the S.W. border of IV Af}, diameter 8':02, mag. 0°47, which includes a rela of the depres- sion northwards (see TV AP 59 51. A fault parallel with and between IV Ae”? and IV Af *0, This fault is the shortest of the three nearly parallel (see IV A* #2). It extends northward as far as the smooth surface on which Triesnecker is situated, and passes between LY A* 9 and LV Af ®2, along the W. border of IY Af** and the low ridge [LV A®7", towards the crater ITV A* ©, where it meets the line of fault TV A” LV AF 63, **52, A mountain-range forming the E.N.E. border of TV A®4, and part of the second wall of Aheticus on the west. It is 62 of Lohrmann’s See. I. *53(x). A semicrater on the “fault” TV A**1,S.8.E. of IV AS", Length 32 REPORT—1868. of W. arm 4’-47, of E. arm 5°78, opening between the arms 8-02. Not shown by B. & M. but by Lohrmann. This semicrater appears to have been modified by the “fault” TV Af ®*!, by which a kind of buttress has been thrown up in the interior against the N.W. rim. It has a craterlet, [V A? %, on the S. end of the buttress. 54, The S.W. end of the mountain-range I Af *5(?), forming the W. mountain-border of IV Af *. On Rutherford’s photogram, ITV Af !! and TV A® 4 are enclosed by moun- tains, of which IV A** is on the E. and TV A 4 on the W. TY Af = is clearly Lohrmann’s 62, Sec. I. The mountain in area I Af forming the N. edge of TV A 49, most probably is Lohrmann’s 64, Sec. I., although it does not oceupy the position which Lohrmann assigns it. TV A®®4 occupies the position of the N. end of Lohrmann’s 63, Sec. I. Lohrmann appears to be in error here, inasmu chas he makes the chain 63, Sec. I., continuous from a point S. of the latitude of IV Af 3 (60, Sec. I.) to a point a little N. of the latitude of the N. edge of J, Sec. J. On the photogram IV Af! and IV Af 4 are disconnected, IV A occupying the position of the 8. end of 63, Sec. I., and TV A®54, as before mentioned, the N. end. The valley IV Af * passes between them. See ante, p. 18, IV AP 1°. The direction of Lohrmann’s chain is also greatly in error; he makes it align with E and B of Sec. I. (IV A*19, and Hind). The true alignment is yery different, viz. the line of fault IV A® ®. 55. A low mountain running E, and W.; length of crest 10':26, breadth of base 4°48, This mountain is situated between IV A? #4 and IV Af1!; its base approaches in form toa parallelogram, the crest forming the diagonal. 56. A small hillock on the line of fault [TY A®®!, between IV Af and TV Af 58; it is close to the 8.E. foot of TV Af", 57. A low mountain N.N.E. of the depression IV A* ; length of crest 6''-71, breadth of base 7°18. 1867, Dec. 3, 10", with the Royal Astrono- mical Society’s Sheepshanks telescope, No. 5, aperture 2-75 inches, power 100, I identified TV Af 47, IV AP 4, and I A®*8 as Lohrmann’s 63, See. I. T also proved the inaccuracy of Lohrmann in continuing the chain to TV Af), See IV AF 54, 58. A low mountain between IV Af! and IV Af*®; length of crest 7°18, . breadth of base 7-18. Thethree mountains [TV A? >, TV Af 7,and TV Af 45 mark an area of subordinate elevation between the faults TV A*# and TY Af 51, 59. A shallow depression on the W. slope of [TV A® 11, N. of TV A#°. 60. A craterlet on the E. slope of IV A*!° between the crest and the fault TV Af 42, It is situated on the higher land W. of the “ fault,” and is in this respect somewhat similar to the craters TV Af 15, TY Af21, and TV AP ®; 2-7, mag. 0-16, the fourteenth in order upon IV A*, 61. The ridge crossing IV Af! from §. to N. This ridge was discovered on Dec. 3, 10%, 1867, with the Royal Astrono- mical Society’s Sheepshanks telescope, No. 5, aperture 2°75 inches, power 100. The observation is thus recorded :—, Additions to Area IV AS. TV Af 115. A depression or crater N. of IV AS and IV As; estimated diameter 2"-0, mag. 0°12. ~ It is recorded as sketched on map 1867, April 11, and was afterwards seen 1867, May 11, with the Royal Society’s 43-inch achromatic, power 230. It is shown by B. & M. The Rey. W. O. Williams ascertained in October 1867 that the mountain- - range LY A$ 48 presented the form of a stem with two branches in the form of a “ fork.” Restricting the designation IV A¢ 48 to the northern part or stem, we have :— 116. The east branch of IV A‘ 48 from the fork. 117. The west branch of IV As 48 from the fork. 118. The valley between TV AS 26 and IV As 127, These objects were discovered independently by the Rey. W. 0. Williams and Herbert Ingall, Esq., on October 18, 1867. ' 119. The depressed surface between IV A$} and IY A¢ 6, with which the valley LY As ® communicates. 40 REPORT—1868. Mr. Grover (1867, Nov. 5) describes the opening from the valley as sloping to a point about halfway between IV A¢*! and IV A¢37 on the N.W., and TV AS! on the 8.E. This depression is very marked in the photograms. 120. A ridge forming the W. side of the valley IV A‘ %, discovered by the Rey. W. O. Williams, 1867, Nov. 15. 121. A craterlet N. of IV As }%, discovered by the Rev. W. O. Williams, 1867, Oct. 18. IV A$ 45 and IV As! are shown on Rutherford’s photogram. 122. A large depression between two low ridges, viz., 123. The east ridge, and 124. The west ridge. The following objects occur on IV A$}3, viz, TV A“17, TV As 39, and TV Agu, The following objects occur on IV A$ 24, viz. [LV A*7 and IV As 102, Both ridges converge to the mountain IV A$ **, For the northern portions of the depression and ridges see IV A* ™ to IV A*, ante p. 38. 125, A ridge between IV A$59 and IV A115, This ridge was identified by the Rev. W. O. Williams, 1868, Jan. 2. 126. The 8. part of the depression in which IV A*1!7 IV AS *9 is situated (see TV A* 10, ante p. 39). Identifications. The identifications of objects are arranged in subzones, as being the most convenient for comparison with the sequence of objects in each. (See Report, 1866, pp. 241, 242, and ante, pp. 14, 15.) _ The small index figures, as 632, indicate that the object has been identified by as many observers, in this instance by two. Zone II. Subzone No. 2. Lat. 0° to 2°S. Area IV A* 15, 40, 48, 47, 58, 632, 652, 12; B67, Oe, Area IV AP 12%, 22, 32, 42, 10?, 112, 122, 18, 20, 292, 392, 40+, 432, 442, 452, 46, 52, 532, 782. Subzone No. 4. Lat. 2°to 4°S. Area IV A®% 42, 16, 41. Area IV Af 14, 15, 16,18, 20, 30, 31, A7, 96. Subzone No. 6. Lat. 4° to 5° 8, Area IV A* 6, 72, 9, 18, 22, 23, 24?, 28, 51, 718, 76. Area TV Af 19, 21, 22, 35, 38. Zone IV. z)1 © No.2. Lat. 5° to 7°S8. Area TY At 242, 37, 398+, 478, 49%, 582, 96, 103, 104, 105, 106, 108, 109, 110; ais ee 113, 114. * IVA®!, Mr. Walker appears (1868, Sept. 7) to have obtained a glimpse of the difficult objects TV AP® ®& % & and 9 on this mountain-range, but he could not dis- tinguish them as separate peaks or count them; the mountain-range he describes as haying a serrated edge, like hillocks close together. Oct. 7, 1868, he found 4 or 5. + IV A®*°, 1868, May 4. The colour of this depression was a dark grey, probably the darkest in the immediate locality. It is recorded as 2°°5, IV A® 47 being 1°°5. t{ IVA*!” IV A$. ‘This object is variable, sometimes appearing as a crater, at others as a white spot. With high illuminations two spots haye been seen (see ate, p. 29). 1868, April 4, Mr. Baxendell discovered a small crater on the site of the eastern spot, which is not yet inserted in the catalogue, as its exact locality is undetermined, , ani dA ees be ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 4] Subzone No. 4. Lat. 7° to 9°S. Area IV As 13, 3, 44, 54, 62, 72, 82, 92, 134, 144, 154, 184, 194, 21, 22, 43?, 44, 45, 483, 61, 71, 77, 95, 1072, 1152, 121. Subzone No. 6. Lat. 9° to 10° 8. Area IV AS 34, 50, 51, 53, 122. The lunar objects to which the above designating numbers in each area are appended have been examined since the construction of the maps of the areas, and may be regarded as testifying to the character of each object as it ex- isted at the time of examination, which in most cases agree with the descrip- tion in the catalogue. TII.—LINNE. Observations of this object continue to be made by gentlemen in concert with the Committee. In the last Report (Report, 1867, pp. 3 to 24) three essential features were described, viz. a large shallow crater, containing within it a small crater, both being replaced by a large ill-defined white spot under an increase of solar altitude. On the 26th of June 1868 Linné was observed under very favourable circumstances by Messrs. Huggins, Pen- rose, Birt, Webb, Carpenter, Joynson, and Williams, from 8.30 to 11.30 G.M.T. During the earlier observations nothing was seen but a small cone, which cast a shadow to the east. This cone was not situated upon a ridge, the sixth of Schroter, as he states his spot v to be (see post, p. 44, and Report, 1867, p. 4), but appeared as if isolated, standing upon a slightly raised portion of the Mare Serenitatis, having Schroter’s sixth ridge to the south, the cone being in the line of prolongation of this ridge to the north. On the west a curvilinear ridge of lower altitude (given by Beer and Midler was seen, from the east foot of which the surface rose very slightly to the base of the cone. There was not the slightest indication of a shallow crater, nor was there the least appearance in the surface around the cone which might be considered indicative of its becoming a white spot, as the sun rose above it. The terminator was a little east of the cone, and the next ridge beyond the cone towards the east was becoming visible. Mr. Carpenter was the only observer who saw on the cone the crater- opening. From the drawings and descriptions of this object, it would appear to be very similar to a terrestrial volcanic cone, the eastern side being broken down. Messrs. Joynson and Williams record the cone as “a bright point,” an appearance it would present in telescopes of smaller aperture than those in which it was seen as a cone with crater-opening. During the earlier period of the observations the altitude of the sun was less than 1°, but as it became higher a change was observed, which will be described presently. The great importance of determining the true nature of this change is obvious. Was it actual, or was it optical? So far as the observations from 1866 (Oct. 16) to 1868 (Sept. 7) testify, this change takes place, more or less constantly, with /ow solar altitudes (see post, p. 45, points of contrast 7th and 8th). It is consequently of importance to ascertain by future observation whether the transition from the visibility of the lunar surface to that of a white spot, by orin which the character of the surface is no longer rendered apparent, is constant for solar altitudes and azi- muths of the same value. If the change be purely optical and dependent upon the two conditions following, viz. the nature of the lunar surface on the one hand, and the incidence of the solar rays on the other, as soon as the sun attains the requisite altitude and azimuth, the altered appearance 1868. E 42 REPORT—1868. supervenes ; but if the surface itself should at any time be altered so that with the same incidence of the sun’s rays the former altered appearance should be no longer observed, the change, of whatever nature it may be, could not in that case be referred to a purely optical source, some real change, either of a temporary or lasting character, must have transpired. While the change about to be described is constant for constant solar alti- tudes and azimuths, the question whether it is purely optical, or whether it is connected with a temporary but real diurnal change cannot be resolved ; but as soon as the character of the surface, as seen at sunrise and sunset, is also clearly perceptible with solar altitudes higher than those at which the white spot now appears and disappears, the phenomenon is at once removed from the category of optical to that of real change,—it may be temporary as referred to the luni-solar day, or of a more lasting nature if the surface itself should undergo a physical change. This will to a great extent pre- clude the expression of opinion, which is generally founded more or less on insufficient evidence ; observation alone can guide us to a safe conclusion in connexion with the questions raised on Linné. While refraining from expressing an opinion, we ought not to relax in collecting, arranging, and discussing evidence, as the only means by which we can obtain such an acquaintance with the phenomena of the moon’s surface as may enable us finally to dispose of such questions as are at present agitated respecting them. The change above alluded to is best elucidated by the following records of observation. The first notice of change occurs in the following extracts from Mr. Birt’s note-book :— «10.30. During the last half-hour a decided change has occurred in the appearance of Linné * * * The cone is no longer visible, nor the shadow, but a somewhat bright white spot, larger than I E’ 3 [the southern of the three craters to the N.W.], and nearly as large as I EH?!” [the middle of the three craters |. Lhave received from Mr. Gorton a drawing of Zinné made by Mr. Wil- liams of Liverpool, on the evening of June 26, at 11 p.m., in which Linné is represented as a white spot. This differs so very materially from the earlier observations that a correspondence ensued, of which the following is the result :— «‘ Although the drawings [Mr. Huggins’s, Mr. Carpenter’s, and Mr. Wil- liams’s] were made on the same evening, and differ amongst themselves, there does not appear to be any contradiction. Some observers saw the cone, another the opening, and others the bright white spot, the formation of which appears to have been actually witnessed. Mr. Joynson places the observa- tions of Mr. Birt and those of Mr. Williams in conjunction with his own in juxtaposition, thus :— 1868. Mr. Birt reports. Messrs. Joynson & Williams report. June 25, 10.0 Cone-shadow well marked. A bright point. 10.30 Cone disappeared; asome- Spot duller and flatter. what bright white spot. 10.45 Spot as drawn [7. e. the ordi- to dinary white spot]. Moon 11.80 low.” Mr. Joynson adds, “I think it is quite clear that the cone or bright point gradually took the aspect of a spot, and as it enlarged it became duller and flatter.” ee ON MAPPING THE SURFACE OF THE MOON. 43 The transition, to which allusion has been made, was seen on the evening of the 26th of June by three observers. The next favourable opportunity for seeing Zinné near the terminator occurred on the 24th of August 1868. The following is a record of observa- tions by Mr. Walker, of Teignmouth :— 1868, August 2447" 45™, Linné: crater on the top of a gently rising ground (conical shape), wall to right (east) in stronger illumination; below to left appearance of depression. Definition good. Could not make out any thing inside the erater ; crater looked clean ; no appearance of white cloud or haze.” Subsequently Mr. Walker furnished the following explanation :— “The gently rising ground I spoke of was exterior to Linné, nothing of the interior or floor of which was visible, the illumination not being yet high enough. By a conical shape (not a well-chosen phrase) I meant that the ground rose in all directions around Linné, which thus presented the aspect of a shallow crater on the summit of a rising ground. The impression of shal- lowness was conveyed by the thinness of the illuminated circuit of the cra- ter, and I think also. by the shade of darkness of the interior of the crater. Of the cone I saw nothing.” Mr. Walker’s observation very fairly agrees with those made on June 26. The rising ground appears to be the surface between the ridges upon which the cone or crater is situated. Mr. Walker speaks of the thinness of the cir- euit [ Qy. rim] of the crater, from which he inferred that it was shallow ; he is decisive upon the absence of the white cloud or spot. Under the evening-illumination of the same luni-solar day, on Sept. 7, 1868, 11.30 to 12.0 L.M.T., Maresfield, Sussex, Capt. Noble recorded the following observation :— “With powers of 154, 255, and 394, Linné, which is now tolerably near the terminator, suggests the idea of being a mammillariform object. Isome- times seem to glimpse a darker (though by no means black) spot near the middle ofit, giving it the aspect of a thick ring ; but as the shading is in the opposite side to the sun, and is moreover faint, it is just possible that it may be the result of the convexity of this wonderful object.” Two hours later, viz. Sept. 7, 1868, 14", Mr. Walker, of Teignmouth, re- corded as follows :— “ Endoxus on terminator. Linné. Hill on east side of the crater bright. Crater dark inside. Curved ridge, N.W. cut by the terminator. Two other ridges S., the east one sweeping up to Sulpicius Gallus, which was very marked, round, and has higher walls than Linné, which is rather the larger perhaps of the two, and oval-shaped. Fancied the hill or elevated portion of the crater E. had a crater on it.” Mr. Walker's observation is accompanied by a sketch, from which it ap- pears that the portion designated as the crater is the surface between the ridges, the rising ground of the morning illumination, and that the hill on the east is the cone on which Mr. Walker thought he saw a crater (the cra- ter-opening) ; this hill occupies the precise position of the cone in the observa- tions of June 26. The observations of Mr. Walker and Capt. Noble, on Sept. 7, bear the same relation to each other as the earlier observations on June 26 do to the ob- servation of Messrs. Joynson and Williams on the same evening. In one case we have the topographical features of the district near Linné replaced by the white spot ; in the other the white spot is first seen, but in a short time it has disappeared, and the features of the district have become visible. ; E2 44, REPORT—1868. The change to and from the white spot in each case is well marked; and it now remains to ascertain if this change always takes place with the same solar altitudes aud azimuths. To observe the topographical features and witness the transition, it is necessary that Linné should be very near the terminator. Herr von Midlor has obligingly communicated the following memorandum respecting Linné :— «The insrument I made use of to produce drawings of the moon was a refractor of 33 feet of focal length and 43 lines of aperture. Commonly I employed a magnifying-power of 300, but the trigonometrical measurements have been executed with a magnifying-power of 120, which allowed me to reach to the edge of the moon.” “Respecting the crater Linné, it was a principal point in my trigonometri- cal network, and consequently I have observed it very often. «‘T remember that this crater did occupy the greatest part of the diameter of the circular wall, so that if a 6 extended over 1-4 Ger- eorn as, man mile (6:4 English), a’ b' was at least 0-9. AR «‘ T have never seen any real change, only optical ones. alter fe «‘ Only in or near the full moon it was a white spot, almost i il as white in the middle as on the edges; these edges were = SS...’ not wholly distinct, but always circular and fit for measure- r= ment. «The deepness of the crater must have been considerable; for I have found an interior shadow when the sun had attained an altitude of 30°. I have never seen a central mountain in the interior. (Signed) “«« MiprEr.” Without expressing the slightest opinion on the questions of change or fixity derived from a comparison of the above with recent observations, it may be permissible to notice the points of contrast between the earlier and more recent observations of Zinné which the statements of the Baron Madler afford. Such a comparison and contrast is essential if we desire to arrive at a true conclusion. The following appear to be the most important. Points of contrast between earlier delineations and recent observations of the lunar crater Linné :— 1st. The earliest authentic delineations and records of Zinné represent this object as a crater, assign to it a diameter of about six English miles, and speak of it as being very deep. 2nd. Recent observations, 7. e. from 1866, Oct. 16, to 1868, Sept. 7, are decisive as to the existence of a small cone, with crater-opening on the por- tion of the Mare Serenitatis surrounded by ridges. 3rd. It has been assumed that the white spot v in Schréter’s Tafel ix. represents Linné as seen on Noy. 5, 1788, and that its present state is nearly similar. 4th. Capt. Noble pointed out,*at a Meeting of the Royal Astronomical So- ciety, that a line drawn from Plinius through Bessel will fall on Linné. This line on Schréter’s drawing falls very nearly on the dark spot, which is very unlike the appearance of Linné at present. 5th. Herr von Midler has very recently recorded that in 1831 the crater- opening occupied 0-9 of the diameter of the external wall, which measured about 6:4 miles English. 6th. The diameter of the base of the cone recently observed is less than three English miles, and the crater-opening still smaller. ON KENT’S CAVERN, DEVONSHIRE. 45 7th. In the year 1831 (authority Herr yon Midler) the white spot was seen only near the time of full moon, almost as white in the middle as at the edges. Sth. In the years 1867 and 1868 the white spot appeared shortly after sunrise and disappeared a little before sunset, and was frequently observed to have a brighter nucleus, instead of being almost as white in the middle as at the edges. 9th. In the year 1831 (authority Herr von Midler) the interior shadow was perceptible until the sun attained an altitude of 30°. 10th. In the years 1867 and1868 the small crater-opening has been seen as a small black spot, rather west of the centre of the white spot, long after the terminator has passed Linné, but the usual interior crater-shadow has not been seen except with comparative low solar altitudes. Fourth Report of the Committee for Exploring Kent’s Cavern, Devon- shire. The Committee consisting of Sir Cuartes Lye, Bart., Professor Puinuirs, Sir Jonn Lussock, Bart., Mr. Joun Evans, Mr. Epwarp Vivian, Mr. Grorce Bus, and Mr. Witiram Pxn- GELLY (Reporter). In their Third Report, presented to the Association in 1867, the Committee stated that the Cavern consists of two parallel series of chambers and gal- leries, having, approximately, a north and south direction; that their re- searches had been confined to the Eastern Series, in which the North-east Gallery, the Vestibule, the Passage of Urns, the Great Chamber, and the Gallery had been completely explored to the depth of 4 feet below the base of the Stalagmitic Floor ; that the investigation of the Lecture Hall had been begun, but that the greater part of it, as well as the entire South-western Chamber and the North and South “Sally Ports,” remained untouched. The year 1867-68 has been devoted to the Lecture Hall and South-west Chamber. The exploration of the former has been completed, and, so far as an estimate can at present be formed, the latter will have been thoroughly investigated in about two months from the present time. There is, however, some uncertainty on this question, since the further end of this Chamber is now closed with an enormous accumulation of stalagmite ; and it is not im- probable that when this is removed the apartment may prove to be much larger than is at present supposed. The Superintendents of the work incline to the opinion that a gallery will sooner or later be laid open here, which will lead into the Western Series of Chambers and Galleries. There is at present but one known channel of communication between the two series— that leading westward out of the Vestibule, near the opposite or northern end of the Cavern. The Committee continue to follow the mode of exploration laid down at the commencement of the work, and described in detail in their First Report, presented in 1865. The deposits are excavated in successive foot-parallels, and each parallel is removed in foot-levels, to the depth of 4 feet beneath the lower surface of the Stalagmitic Floor. In no instance has anything like a continuous limestone bottom of the Cavern been reached; but a depth greater than 4 feet would be incompatible with convenient, economical, trust- worthy working, as it would be necessary to be continually putting up and 46 REPORT—1868. taking down scaffolding or working-platforms, and there would be a great liability for the deposit to “cave in,” which, by rendering it impossible to determine their exact positions and associations, would deprive the objects found of much of their interest, as well as of their value as evidence. The workmen still follow the practice of first examining the deposits in situ, and of re-examining them by daylight at the entrance of the Cavern; the lines described in the First Report (1865) are still employed in order to fix the precise position of every object found; the specimens, as at the beginning, are all carefully cleaned and labelled, those found in each “yard” (mass of deposit a yard long and a foot square in the section) are kept together in a separate box; the Cayern is visited daily by the Superin- tendents; the Secretary continues to keep a daily journal of the work; Re- ports, signed by both Superintendents, are, at the end of each month, for- warded to Sir C. Lyell, Chairman of the Committee; and well-defined and satisfactory arrangements exist for the admission of visitors accompanied by the Superintendents, so as at once to keep alive a healthy interest in the exploration and to prevent inconvenience from their visits. Amongst the numerous visitors during the past year, the Superintendents had the pleasure of receiving Dr. Hooker, President of the British Associa- tion. The Lecture Hall.—tIn their Third Report (1867), the Committee stated that researches, probably on a somewhat large scale, had been carried on in the Lecture Hall by Mr. M‘Enery and the other early explorers, who, in- stead of taking out of the Cavern that portion of the deposits which they had examined, simply threw it on one side. On the removal of this dislodged material, the Committee found that they had considerably over-estimated the extent of the old working, and that by far the greater portion of the deposits in this Hall remained indubitably intact. The objects met with, not only in the broken ground, but in every locality about which there was the least uncertainty, were carefully kept distinct from those found in undoubted virgin soil. Without at present entering into details, it may be stated that in the Lec- ture Hall the deposits were of the same general character and order as in those parts of the Cavern which the Committee had previously explored and reported on,—Red Cave-earth of unknown depth, completely sealed up with a Stalagmitic Floor, which, in its turn, was covered with a layer of Black Mould. The objects found in the overlying Black Mould were less numerous than, but similar to, those described from the same accumulation in former Reports. Amongst them may be mentioned several pieces of pottery, a spindle-whorl, a roughly shapen piece of New Red Sandstone, a portion of a bone comb, -part of a small vase, a small red earthenware pan, marine shells, a small piece of smelted copper, the entire lower jaw and an almost complete skull of a badger, part of a human upper jaw with eight teeth, of which four are still in their sockets, and the internal cast of a fossil shell. The potsherds do not require detailed description, most of them are of black coarse clay mixed with small stones, some of them are ornamented, whilst others are plain, and, in short, they closely resemble those described in the former Reports. The spindle-whorl is of clay-slate, measures an inch in diameter and half an inch in depth, and is ornamented with a series of curvilineal and straight lines, both on its curved and flat surfaces. It is, perhaps, worthy of remark that, though the Cavern has yielded spindle-whorls formed of different kinds ee ee ee © ON KENT’S CAVERN, DEVONSHIRE. 47 of stone, the best made, the most highly finished, and the only ornamented specimens are fashioned in slate. The piece of red sandstone was perhaps a spindle-whorl marred in the making. Good specimens formed of the same material have been found in the Cavern in previous years. It is rudely of the required form, about the size of a rather large whorl, but is imperforate. But for the more or less perfect specimens found in former years, it would not have been easy perhaps to identify the fragment of bone comb. It is but a portion of what may be called the shaft, both ends having been broken off. It must have been of the same type as those described in previous Re- ports, all of which had their teeth at one end; but it differs from all those found before in being ornamented with well-drilled, small, circular punctures, which traverse the shaft obliquely in two parallel series, the direction of one set being at right angles to that of the other. The red earthenware vessel is no doubt a pan of the kind used for flower- pots to stand in, and is clearly modern. The marine shells are chiefly those of the Oyster, Cockle, and Pecten. One of the last has, near its anterior margin, a small elliptical hole, which is probably artificial. The human jaw and teeth may be comparatively modern. They were submitted to Messrs. Rodway, the eminent dentists of Torquay, who stated that “several of the alveoli possessed peculiar irregularities, which confirm other unmistakeable evidence that the whole of the teeth belonged to the same individual; that the loose teeth were considerably worn away, parti- cularly the canine, at the end of which is exostosis, which was caused by the whole, or the greater part, of the mastication of later years being performed by the canine; that they were the teeth of an old person, probably a man ; and that they would be likely or certain to preserve their freshness of aspect for an indefinite period.” The cast of the fossil shell is apparently from the Oolite, and was perhaps lost in the Cavern by some geological tourist just arrived from the neighbour- ing Jurassic district of Dorsetshire. With the exception of the ground broken by the early explorers, which has been already mentioned, the Stalagmitic Floor was everywhere continu- ous. It varied from 2 to 32 inches in thickness, but rarely measured less, and commonly more, than 6 inches. It was generally of granular structure, but occasionally crystalline, and sometimes made up of alternate crystalline and granular layers. It contained numerous blocks of limestone and of old stalagmite ; the former had no doubt fallen from the roof from time to time, and some of them measured as much as 4 feet in length. In addition to such as were completely incorporated in the Floor, there were many, as in other branches of the Cavern, which were lodged in and rose above it, whilst others projected from it downwards into the Cave-earth. The imbedded masses of stalagmite were invariably of a structure unlike that of the floor in which they were lodged. In all cases, they were, at once, finely laminated and highly crystalline, the latter character being dis- played in a columnar or fibrous structure at right angles to the lamine, whe- ther the latter were plane or curvilinear. In some cases, these blocks, like those of limestone just mentioned, projected above or below the Floor into the Black Mould or Cave-earth respectively, whilst others were completely in- vested. It cannet be doubted that they were fragments of an older Floor, _which, as stated in previous Reports, and especially the third (1867), had been at least partially broken up at a comparatively early period in the 48 REPORT—1868. Cavern’s history. It will be convenient thereforeto speak, in future, of the floor represented by these blocks as ‘‘ The Older Floor,” and of that which the Committee found spreading in an unbroken sheet through all branches of the Cavern as “The Modern Floor.” As in former years, bones were occasionally found in the Modern Floor of Stalagmite in the Lecture Hall. Amongst the most important are a fine molar of Rhinoceros, a premolar of Hyzna, two or three molars of Bear, a large part of a humerus, probably of Bear, and an os calcis of some large animal. The teeth of Rhinoceros and Hyzna were found, in the presence of one of the Superintendents, September 21, 1867, lying together very little below the upper surface of the Stalagmite. Since the times of Rhinoceros tichorhinus and Hycena spelea in Devonshire, therefore, the increase of thickness of the Stalagmitic Floor, in that particular part of the Cavern, has been barely suf- ficient to cover these interesting relics. A few examples of charred wood were found in the same Floor. In most cases, the composition of the Cave-earth was of the ordinary typical character—about equal parts of red loam or clay, and of compara- tively small angular fragments of limestone. In this condition it almost in- variably contained bones, but when there was any marked departure from it, by either loam or stones being greatly in excess, bones were extremely rare. In a few instances, the deposit was a mixture of fine earth and sand, resem- bling ordinary road-washing, and contained no trace of bone. The Cave-earth contained a considerable number of fragments of Devonian grit, huge blocks of limestone, large masses of old stalegmite, and loose lumps of rock-lke breccia. The grit fragments could not have been derived from the Cavern-hill, but were probably furnished by neighbouring loftier eminences. They have assumed subangular or well-rounded forms indicative of the rolling action of water, but their transportation into the Cavern by this agency would require that the district should have a surface-configuration very unlike that which now obtains. In addition to the grit pebbles, there were found mingled with them sub- angular and rounded pieces of quartz and flint, and also a small angular piece of “erystalline schist, such as is not found in any part of the Torbay district, but is characteristic of the southern angle of Devonshire, or what may be called the Start and Bolt district. A pebble believed to have been derived from the same locality was mentioned in the Second Report (1866). The blocks of limestone occurred at all levels in the deposit ; they were all quite angular, and some of them many tons in weight. The masses of old stalagmite were of the same structure as those in the Modern Floor, and were found everywhere in the Cave-earth; they were all in the form of huge cuboidal blocks, with sharp unrounded edges, The Older Floor, of which they are obviously remnants, appears to have been broken up by being fractured along planes at right and other high angles to its upper and lower surfaces. There appears to have been no instance of division in planes even distantly approaching parallelism to these surfaces. Many of them contained teeth and bones, all, so far as they were identified, the remains of the Cave-bear. The loose lumps of rock-like breccia were of a more or less rounded form, and were composed of red earth, angular pieces of limestone, and rounded and subangular pieces of Devonian grit; they differed from the Cave-earth in being invariably cemented together like a firm mass of concrete, and in containing a considerably greater proportion of fragments of grit. Almost ON KENT’S CAVERN, DEVONSHIRE. 49 all of them were crowded with teeth and bones, which, so far as is known, are those of the Cave-bear. No teeth-marks have been detected on any of them, nor were there any traces of frecal matter. Many of the canines and molars were of great size, and some of the former were so much worn as to suggest that they had belonged to old animals whose molars had become in- capable of performing their functions. These lumps of breccia had not the appearance of being portions of the ordinary Cave-earth agglomerated in situ. Their aspect was rather that of remnants of a deposit older than that in which they were incorporated,—the deposit, in fact, which the Older Floor of Stalagmite had covered, and on which it had been formed. To a large extent, this opinion received confir- mation in the fact, already mentioned, that the osseous remains in the lumps of breccia as well as in the blocks of old stalagmite were, at least mainly, those of the Cave-bear, the other members of the Cave-fauna being unre- presented. The Cayve-earth in the Lecture Hall contained teeth of Horse, Rhinoceros, Hyena, Bear, Fox, Deer, Mammoth, Lion, Ox, and Badger ; their prevalence being indicated by the order in which their names are given, those of the Horse being the most, and of the Badger the least abundant. The teeth were accompanied by a considerable number of bones, many of which were deeply scored with teeth-marks, others were split longitudinally, and several were invested with thin films of stalagmite, irrespective of the depth at which they were found. These different conditions of the bones are inter- esting and significant,—the first implying the presence of the living hyena, the second the operations of man, and the last the slow and intermittent accumulation of the Cave-earth, since each bone must have lain on what was the upper surface of the deposit for a considerable period, during which it was exposed to the action of the lime-laden drip from the roof of the Cavern. The statement, in the Third Report (1867), that fecal matter was met with almost exclusively in the Great Chamber, requires considerable modifica- tion. During the year 1867-68 a greater quantity of this material was found in the Cave-earth, in the Lecture Hall, than had been met with previously in the adjacent Chamber just spoken of; it occurred at all levels, and some- times in masses a foot high. Occasionally individual coprolites were en- countered which had undergone no change either of place or of form since they were originally dropped by the hyzena—a fact which goes far to show that the Cave-earth was neither all introduced at one and the same time, nor by violent agency, such as a great rush of water. This branch of the Cavern was not very productive of flint tools, or, with the exception of split bones, other evidences of human existence. Omitting mere chips and doubtful flakes, it yielded no more than five imple- ments, all of which are very inferior to the fine specimens discovered in former years. Two of them were found in the first foot-level, two in the second, and one in the third. One of them is formed of grey cherty flint, of a kind which the old men of Kent’s Hole frequently employed; the others are of a finer variety, and of the prevalent white colour. They all belong to the Lanceolate type of implement. The best of the series is that composed of chert ; it was found in the first or uppermost foot-level, October 18th, 1867. Its point had been broken off before it was met with. At present it measures 2°8 inches in length, and 1-3 inch in greatest breadth. There does not appear to have been much skilled labour expended on it, and its edges are considerably broken. South-west Chamber.—The “ Lecture Hall” opens on its south-western 50. REPORT—1868. side into an apartment, which, on account of its position in relation to the other branches of the Eastern Series, has been termed the “ South-west Chamber.” It is at present comparatively smal], but, as has been already remarked, it may prove when completely emptied to be much larger. At the junction of the two apartments, the space between the opposite walls of the Cavern is inconsiderable ; and this, before the workmen commenced their excavations, was much diminished by an enormous mass of limestone which had fallen from above, and was estimated at upwards of 100 tons. Its base was buried from two to three feet deep in the Cave-earth, and its summit reached a height of fully six feet above the Modern Floor of Stalagmite. On account of its form it was commonly known as the “ Pulpit Rock,” but it not unfrequently received the appellation of the “ Lecturer’s Rostrum,” mainly because, when lectures were delivered within the Cavern on its his- tory and formation, the speaker always took his stand on this rock, his au- dience being assembled in the adjacent Lecture Hall. The removal of the Pulpit absorbed a considerable amount of time, but it was quite indis- pensable in order to the excavation of the South-west Chamber, the entrance of which it guarded. In the South-west Chamber there was no trace of the overlying Black Mould, This accumulation had presented itself in every other branch of the Eastern Series of chambers and galleries, with the single exception of the inner portion of the Gallery in the western wall of the Great Chamber, where it gradually thinned out. It covered the entire Floor of the Lecture Hall to a depth as great as in any other part of the Cavern, but it terminated abruptly at the Pulpit Rock, and was not resumed southwards. In 1846, a Subcommittee of the Torquay Natural-History Society, con- sisting of Dr. Battersby and the Superintendents of the present work, com- menced a search in this Chamber, when they broke up the Modern Floor of Stalagmite over a rudely circular area about 6 feet in diameter. They ex- cavated the underlying Cave-earth to the depth of about 2 feet, when, having found nothing, they abandoned the search, leaving the pit empty and the materials dug out of it lying in a heap near. Probably no part of the Cavern is in wet weather more exposed to drip than this ; hence it might have been expected that here, if anywhere, twenty-two years would have produced a film of stalagmite of appreciable thickness, especially as it was known that the Modern Floor attains an average thickness considerably surpassing that in any other part of the Cavern which the Committee have explored. Yet not a film was to be found either at the bottom of the pit, on the section made in digging it, or on the Cave-earth thrown out of it. This remote part of the Cavern was very rarely entered by visitors, and the operations of nature went on without check or interference; but everything was found precisely as it was left upwards of twenty years ago. The form of the South-west Chamber, as well as the huge accumulation of stalagmite on its western side, rendered it expedient to excavate the de- posits it contained in two distinct “ Divisions” or series of workings—an eastern and a western, the working direction in the former being southward, and in the latter westward. The first has been completed, and considerable progress has been made in the second. With the exception of the ground broken by the Torquay Natural-History Society, the Modern Floor of Stalagmite was everywhere perfectly continuous throughout this Chamber. In the Eastern Division it averaged 28 inches in thickness ; in one instance only it was no more than 6 inches ; it was very seldom so little as a foot, and it several times attained to 5 and even ON KENT’S CAVERN, DEVONSHIRE. 51 6 feet. In its structure it was commonly granular, except at and near its junction with the walls of the Cavern, where it frequently consisted of thin erystalline lamine, and was extremely hard and tough. Numerous angular masses of limestone were found in it, and some of them were of great size; but there were no incorporated blocks of old stalagmite. Tn the northernmost or first eight foot-parallels in this Division, the Cave- earth occupied each entire section, from the bottom of the Modern Stalag- mitic Floor to the base of the lowest or fourth foot-level. It was of the ordinary type, and, like that in every other branch of the Cavern, contained large blocks of limestone and of old stalagmite, as well as lumps of breccia, such as had presented themselves in the adjacent Hall. In the more southerly parallels there was found at the base of the section, and extending quite across it from end to end, a deposit, in situ, of a new type, on which the Cave-earth at once rested. This proved to be a rock- like breccia composed of red earth, angular pieces of limestone, subangular and rounded pieces of grit in considerable numbers, blocks of crystalline stalagmite, and bones, all cemented into a firm and hard concrete; in short, with the single exception of its being undisturbed, it was of precisely the same character as the loose lumps previously met with in the Lecture Hall. In each succeeding parallel it rose higher and higher in the section, the overlying Caye-earth gradually thinning out. Six feet south of its first appearance, this Breccia was found to be imme- diately overlaid by a Floor of Crystalline Stalagmite nearly 2 feet thick, which separated it from the Cave-earth above ; in short, there were in this parallel, in the same vertical section, two Floors of Stalagmite, each imme- diately overlying the accumulation of detritus on which it had been formed. From this point to the end of the Eastern Division of the Chamber every parallel disclosed the two Floors; but with every additional foot southwards, the intermediate band of Cave-earth became thinner and thinner, until, before the southern wall was reached, it altogether disappeared, and the Modern Floor rested at once on the Older one. These two accumulations of stalagmite were commonly distinguishable by their different structures,—the upper being granular except when near the wall of the Cavern, the lower invariably crystalline. In a few of the southernmost parallels, the materials at the bottom of the sections were not cemented, and there were but few bones mixed with them. In all other respects they were identical with the concrete immediately above. It has been already stated that the Modern Floor of Stalagmite was every- where continuous. Instead of this being the case with the Older Floor, it usually extended from each end of the section several feet towards its centre, but in all cases terminated more or less abruptly, leaving an interspace, sometimes as much as 7 feet wide. In this branch of the Cavern, where the conditions were at once so novel and so variable, the work was watched with the utmost care, and accurate measurements and descriptions were frequently made. The following sec- tions from different parts of the Chamber will show in a general way the succession of the deposits, in descending order :— Sxcrron I. Near the northern end of the Eastern Division of the South- west Chamber. Length 21 feet at the top, and 11 feet at the bottom. Di- rection from W. 5° N. to E. 5° S. (mag.). First, or uppermost: Modern Floor of Stalagmite, granular, continuous, contained large masses of limestone; thickness varied from 28 to 36 inches. | Second: Caye-earth, typical, contained a considerable number of large 52 REPORT—1868. blocks of limestone and a few pieces of crystalline stalagmite ; thickness un- known, but more than 4 feet. Secrron II. Near the middle of the Eastern Division of the South-west Chamber. Length 15 feet. Direction from W. 5° N. to E. 5° §. (mag.) First, or uppermost: Modern Floor of Stalagmite, granular, continuous, no incorporated stones; thickness varied from 17 to 29 inches. Second: Cave-earth, typical, contained large pieces of limestone and crys- talline stalagmite ; thickness varied from 3 inches at the ends of the section to 12 inches in the middle. Third: Older Floor of Stalagmite, crystalline, discontinuous, there being a considerable hiatus near the middle of the section ; thickness 14 inches. Fourth: Rock-like Breccia, composed of red earth, small angular pieces of limestone, subangular and rounded pieces of grit, large angular masses of limestone and of crystalline stalagmite, cemented into a strong concrete; thickness unknown, but more than 31 inches. The Cave-earth rested im- mediately on it near the middle of the section. Secrion III. Near the southern end of the Eastern Division of the South- west Chamber. Length 8 feet. Direction from W. 5° N. to E. 5°S. (mag.) First, or uppermost: Modern Floor of Stalagmite, generally granular, con- tinuous, no incorporated stones ; thickness varied from 18 to 21 inches. Second: Older Floor of Stalagmite, crystalline, discontinuous ; thickness varied from 8 to 38 inches. Third: Rock-like Breccia, in all respects like that of the 2nd section ; thickness 2 feet. Fourth: Uncemented Breccia, differing from the overlying mass only in being uncemented and in containing but few bones. The Modern Stalagmitic Floor in this Division of the Chamber, as else- where in the Cavern, was found to contain a few bones and pieces of charred wood. Of the former, the most important are part of the upper jaw of the Cave-bear, containing both canines and two molars, none of which are much worn. With this fine specimen, which was extracted in the presence of the two Superintendents, several loose molars of bear were found, and also a claw of some large carnivore. Besides the foregoing, there were found elsewhere in this Floor a fine canine of Ursus speleus, which does not appear to have seen much service, and an os calcis of some large animal. The Cave-earth, too, no matter how thin the band to which it had dwin- dled, continued to the last to yield remains of its characteristic fauna. In this deposit there were found, in the Division of the Chamber now under notice, teeth and other relics of Bear, Fox, Horse, Hyzena, Rhinoceros, Mam- moth, Hare,and bird. The frequency with which they were met with, rather than the aggregate number of specimens in each case, is indicated by the order in which the names stand, the remains of Bear being most prevalent, whilst those of bird were found once only. In the same branch of the Cavern was found the femur of a Bear, having the distal end perfect, but the proxi- mal extremity wanting. This is the largest bone found during the present exploration ; it was lying, with the anterior portions of the two rami of the lower jaw of a young Hyena spelea, in the fourth or lowest foot-level. As elsewhere, many of the bones were well scored with teeth-marks, and some were split lengthways. Lumps of fecal matter also were occasionally met with. A few flint chips were likewise found. They are probably of artificial origin, but are not of sufficient value to require description. Though fragments of stone which the Cavern hill could not have supplied ON KEN’’S CAVERN, DEVONSHIRE. 53 were much more abundant in the rock-like Breccia than in the Cave-earth, none of them were of very distant derivation: no pieces of granite from Dartmoor, or of crystalline schist from the Start and Bolt, or even of slate from the more immediate neighbourhood, all of which have been found in the Cave-earth. The Breccia was so extremely hard and difficult to work as to render it necessary to split it out with chisels, which frequently played sad havoc with the bones it contained. These were sometimes so abundant as to form fully 50 per cent. of the entire accumulation. To use the language of one of the workmen, “they lay about as if they had been thrown there with a shovel.” The progress of the work, as in most other cases, has rendered it necessary to qualify somewhat the first impressions respecting the bones and teeth. Instead of “exclusively the remains of bear,” it may be said that ‘ almost exclusively ” they are so ; for recently there have been found amongst them a tooth of some cervine animal, a tooth of a Fox, and one or two bones of a bird. Moreover, some of the bones are apparently too large to have formed part of the skeleton even of Ursus speleus. Nevertheless, it remains to be a fact that in this deposit there have not been identified any relics of Rhinoceros, Horse, Ox, Mammoth, Badger, Lion, or Hyena, all of which were so frequently exhumed from the Cave-earth; nor are there any traces of faeces, or, with one solitary exception, of gnawed bones to indicate the presence of the last- named animal. The bones found in the Cave-earth are divisible into two classes with respect to their colour. The first includes specimens of an almost chalk-like whiteness, and are very numerous; the second those of a dark tinge, and are very few. The dark hue of the second class is merely a surface discolora- tion. Beneath a thin superficial film, the bones of this group are just as white as those of the other. The colour of the specimens found in the Rock- like Breccia differs from that of each of the foregoing series; all of them are characterized by the same somewhat light coffee-coloured tinge, which, more or less, penetrates their entire substance. None of these older fossils appear to have been rolled, or to have been fractured before they were lodged in the place in which they were found. Fragments of jaws are numerous, and many of them contain teeth; but, with this exception, the relics lie together without the least reference to their anatomical relations. In many respects their condition is precisely the same as that of the spe- cimens in the Cave-earth. Thus, those found beneath large fallen blocks of limestone are crushed, the severed parts remaining in position, and com- monly held together by some firm cement. Again, other specimens are covered with a film of stalagmitic matter. Further, the bones from the older deposit adhere to the tongue just like those found in the Cave-earth, and no distinction can be drawn between the two series on this quality alone. These facts show, first, that the older formation, like the more modern one, was compact, firm, unyielding, and capable of offering resistance to a heavy falling block ; second, that, as has been already remarked in the case of the Cave-earth, the bones had successively lain exposed on the surface for a long period, and that the materials of the Breccia were introduced into the Cavern at many different times, with protracted intermittences ; third, that the fact that bones found in the same Cavern will adhere to the tongue with equal tenacity is not, in itself, trustworthy evidence that they are of equal antiquity. 5A REPORT— 1868. Up to this time, the Rock-like Breccia has been utterly silent on the ques- tion of the existence of Man; it has given up no tools or chips of flint or bone, no charred wood or bones, no bones split longitudinally, no stones sug- gesting that they had been used as hammers or crushers. But whilst they have before them the lessons so emphatically taught by their exploration of the Cavern, the Committee cannot but think that it would be premature to draw, at present, any inference from this negative fact. In the Western Division of the South-west Chamber, the very difficult exploration of which is now in progress, the thickness of the Stalagmitic Floor surpassed everything previously met with. Up to this time it has averaged more than 7 feet, in two instances only and over very limited spaces it was so little as 3 feet, and it has reached so much as 123 feet. Cave-earth presented itself at the northern end of each section in the first seven foot-parallels only, where it was rapidly thinning out, both southwards and westwards. It was covered with its own Modern Floor of Stalagmite, and rested on the Older Floor of the same material, beneath which lay the Rock-like Breccia. This, so far as is at present known, was the termination of that great deposit of Cave-earth which, in unbroken continuity, has been followed from the entrances of the Cavern, which has yielded so many thousands of bones of extinct animals, and at least hundreds of Man’s flint and bone implements and their concomitant chips, and which in other still larger branches of the Cavern awaits exploration. It will be shortly seen that to the last it was true to its character. As in this Division the Modern Floor rested at once on the Older one and assumed a crystalline structure, especially beyond the line at which the Cave- earth disappeared, it is sometimes not easy to say how much of the great thickness just spoken of is to be ascribed to the period which separated the era of the Rock-like Breccia from that of the comparatively modern Cave- earth, and how much to the time which has elpased since the introduction of the latter deposit terminated. In the upper part of this enormous accumulation some examples of charred wood have been found; and several stalactites, which no doubt had dropped from the roof above, have been met with lodged in the mass. There are a few peculiarities in the structure of this Stalagmite which have not been noticed elsewhere. It sometimes has a honeycombed or cellular structure, and in other places it is traversed in various directions by a series of tubular cavities, both of which have greatly contributed to the difficulty which the workmen have experienced in breaking it up; for whilst the cavities do not appear to diminish the strength of the mass, they allow the ignited gun- powder room to expand, and thus render it almost impossible to excavate it by blasting. When it is added that the Stalagmite is not traversed by great divisional planes, as almost all rocks are, and that it nearly fills the Chamber to the roof, it will be seen that at present, at least, the exploration requires very pertinacious and skilful labour. It has been already stated that but few flint implements were found in the Lecture Hall, that these were much inferior to those brought to the Association in previous years from other parts of the Cavern, and that the Eastern Division of the South-west Chamber yielded a few chips only. It was, perhaps, not unreasonable to ascribe this paucity to the comparative remoteness of the branches of the Cavern in which the researches have been carried on during the year 1867-68. Be this as it may, the Superintendents had but little hope or expectation that better fortune was awaiting them so long as the work was day by day carrying them further on in the same ewe ON KEN’’S CAVERN, DEVONSHIRE. 55 direction. Scarcely, however, had the exploration of the Western Division of the South-west Chamber commenced, when the spell was broken. On June 25, 1868, a good implement was found 2 feet deep in the Cave earth, in a small recess in the wall of the Chamber, and sealed up with the Modern Floor of Stalagmite 80 inches thick. Jt was found broken, appa- rently into four pieces, three of which have been recovered. Some of the fractured edges are coated with Stalagmite. It lay with a fine almost un- worn molar of bear, a molar of horse, and a few other teeth, one of which probably was that of a fox. On July 4, a second implement was found. This also was 2 feet deep in the Cave-earth, over which the Stalagmite was 32 inches thick. With it there were a few bones, and immediately below it, thirteen molars of horse, a canine of hyena, and a gnawed bone. ‘This specimen is of the Lanceolate type, and is one of the finest implements the Committee have found in the Cavern. It is barely 4:2 inches long, 1:2 in greatest breadth, and °5 inch in greatest thickness. It is strongly carinated, sharply pointed at one end, chisel-shaped at the other, and has a keen edge all round its perimeter. A great amount of labour appears to haye been expended in making it, but it probably had never been used since it was last “retouched.” It is of piebald flint, being partly white, and partly a dull drab. It was dug out in the pre- sence of one of the Superintendents, On July 10, a third implement presented itself. “This was 3 feet deep in the Caye-earth, over which was 24 inches of Stalagmite. It is a fine specimen, but scarcely equal to the second, which, excepting that it is not quite so broad, and that its wider end is not chisel-shaped, it resembles in size andin form. It is made of an almost uniformly white flint. On July 25, a fourth was met with in a recess in the wall of the Cavern, 1 foot deep in the Caye-earth, having over it upwards of 7 feet of Stalagmitic Floor. It does not appear to have been so good a specimen as either of the two last mentioned, but on this point there is some uncertainty, as it was unfortunately broken by the workmen, who, notwithstanding a careful search, were unable to recover all the fragments. Judged from the exterior only, it would have been pronounced white flint ; but in consequence of the fracture it is seen that this colour is merely superficial, extending to a depth of about 05 inch only, the interior being uniformly black. It was lying with eleven molars of horse, a sectorial tooth of hyzna, several bones and bone fragments, and a few small lumps of fecal matter. Judging from the character of its point, this implement was a “ borer.” Thus, within about a month, four flint implements, all of them good, and two of them very fine specimens, were found within a space of 5 feet, and from 140 to 150 feet from the nearest of the external entrances of the Cavern. They were attended by the usual accompaniments, and with the last of them the Cave-earth terminated in that direction, so far as is at pre- sent known. The Rock-like Breccia in this Division of the Chamber presented the ordi- nary characteristics, and calls for no special remark. In their Third Report (1867) the Committee called attention to the facts which, successively and slowly discovered, had led to the conviction that there was a Chapter in the history of the Cavern earlier than that represented by the Cave-earth. It has been already stated, and at some length, that further and most conclusive evidence on the point has presented itself during the year 1867-68. The case is of so much interest, so characteristic of Cavern researches, and so full of instruction and encouragement, that it 56 REPORT—1868. may be worth while to give a brief recapitulation of the facts from the be- ginning :— 1st. The Committee had been at work upwards of five months when cuboidal blocks of Stalagmite first appeared in the Cave-earth and in the overlying Stalagmitic Floor. After much deliberation, it was concluded that they were fragments of an older Floor, which had covered a deposit of still higher antiquity, and had been wholly or partially broken up before or during the introduction of the Cave-earth in which the blocks were lodged. To this conclusion, there was the great objection that there were no bones or stones either within or attached to the blocks. 2nd. After the labour of six further months, during which every day dis- interred additional blocks, but with the same negative characters, a large portion of an old Floor was actually found zn situ, but without having beneath it any trace of a deposit which it had once sealed up. Though the probable interpretation was that the deposit had been washed out, or had sunk away from the floor through failure of support at its base, it seemed reasonable to suppose that, in either case, stones or other remnants of it would be found attached to the lower surface of the Floor. Instead of presenting such relics, however, this lower surface was a beautiful cream-coloured plate of stalag- mite, bristling with short stalactites of the same colour. 3rd. In order to determine whether the so-called “‘ remnant of old Floor” was really stalagmitic throughout, several holes were bored through it, which not only decided the question affirmatively, but caused a portion of its nether surface to scale off, and to disclose the fact that the “‘ cream-coloured plate” was but a modern veneer formed on what had been the original surface ; and this, when thus laid bare, proved to be soil-stained and crowded with small particles of detrital matter—relics of the missing mechanical deposit. 4th. After this, seventeen months passed, and though in the meantime blocks of stalagmite were found everywhere, and some of them of great size, and though the workmen purposely broke them into small pieces, still no bone or stone was found within or projecting from them. At length, at the end of the time just mentioned, one of them was broken and a bone was found within it. After this, ossiferous blocks of stalagmite were dug out frequently, and some of them were found to contain stones also. 5th. Within the compass of another month, loose round lumps of Rock-like Breccia were met with in the Cave-earth, and, from their composition and external form, were regarded as dislodged remnants of the older deposit which had so long been seen by the mind’s eye only. This opinion was strengthened by the fact that the bones with which they were crowded did not appear to represent precisely the same fauna as did those met with in the Cave-earth. 6th. At the end of six additional months, the workmen came upon the old deposit in situ, having all the characters of the lumps just mentioned, but not separated from the Cave-earth above it by any Floor of Stalagmite. 7th. At the close of a further period of six weeks, or after three full years of daily research, there was found, in one and the same vertical section, the Old deposit of Breccia capped by its Stalagmite, on which lay the Cave-earth, protected, in its turn, by tts Stalagmitic Floor also. The early inference from the blocks alone was justified ; not a link of the evidence was missing. The entire chain was presented to the eye at one yiew. The case was at length complete. The following fact may be appropriately mentioned in connexion with this case. As has been already stated, a Subcommittee of the Torquay Natural- History Society, in 1846, broke through the Modern Stalagmitic Floor in the ON KENT’S CAVERN, DEVONSHIRE. 57 South-west Chamber, and excavated the Cave-earth to the depth of 2 feet, when, having found nothing, they abandoned the work. Had they continued their labours but another half hour, had they dug but 2 inches lower, they would have entered the richly ossiferous Breccia, and, in all probability, caught sight of the earlier chapter of the history of the Cavern. It has been already mentioned that the Rock-like Breccia contains, amongst other things, considerable pieces of stalagmite. There can be no doubt that the same interpretation applies to these as applied to those found in the Cave-earth. If the latter were correctly regarded as evidence of a floor older than the deposit in which they were lodged, the former must be held to indicate the existence of a floor still older than the Breccia—a floor of the third order of antiquity, which, in harmony with the terminology hitherto used, may, for the present at least, be termed the “ Oldest Floor of Stalag- mite.” If the present state of the evidence be trustworthy, the Cavern, during the era of the Rock-like Breccia, was almost exclusively a mausoleum for Ursus speleus. Up to this time, no trace of Hyena spelea, Felis spelea, Hlephas primigenius, Rhinoceros tichorhinus, Equus fossilis, or of several other well-known cavern species has been found in the old deposit. Though he was subsequently their contemporary in Devonshire, the Great Cave-Bear, so far as the present evidence goes, seems to have had his home there very long before them. The Committee have again to state that they have not yet had the good fortune to discover any remains of Hippopotamus major or Machairodus latidens, either in the Cave-earth or in the Breccia. Whilst it must be admitted that the labours of the past twelve months have not added anything to the kind, or very greatly to the amount, of evi- dence of the antiquity of Man in Devonshire, it must also be admitted that the continued and careful researches of three and a half years have utterly failed to detect a single fact having even a remote tendency to invalidate the conclusion to which the early Cavern researches had led. Up to this time, the various kinds of evidence are in the most complete accord; there is nothing conflicting. No comparatively modern object has been found below its place, and no ancient one has been met with in a modern niche. The Modern Floor of Stalagmite has kept the two apart and perfectly distinct. There is nothing incongruous in the belief that the ancient Cave-Men made and used unpolished flint implements, split the bones of animals, and cut and seraped the fragments into pins and fish-spears, employed fire in the prepa- ration of their food, and selected some stones for hammers or crushers, and others to rub down the asperities on their bone tools; and this belief ap- parently embraces all the Cavern Anthropology which up to this time has been discovered. The researches of 1867-68, however, have been by no means barren or unimportant. They have, as has been pointed out, established the existence of two Chapters in the Cavern history during the times of the extinct mam- mals, and haye given a glimpse of a third and still earlier one; they have solved one problem, and, in doing so, have suggested several others ; they have given an increased stimulus to research by prompting the following questions :— Ist. What were the conditions which at three different and widely sepa- rated times allowed detrital matter to be carried into the Cavern? 2nd. How was the introduction of this material suspended during, at least, two protracted periods, in which thick floors of Stalagmite were formed ? 1868. F 58 REPORT—1868. 3rd. By what agency were these floors partially and largely broken up ? and why, where they have been removed, have they left no scar on the walls of the Cavern ? Ath. Since, heretofore, Suspension has been followed by Excavation and Re-introduction, may this recur at some future time ? 5th. Had the Great Cave-Bear any speleean contemporaries at first? and, if so, What were they? and was Machairodus latidens or Hippopotamus major amongst them ? 6th. How, during the era of the Breccia, were the remains of the Caye- Bear carried into the Cavern, seeing that none of them are rolled, broken, or gnawed, yet they lie together without the least reference to their anatomical relations ? It may be hoped that future researches may furnish solutions for at least some of these questions. On Puddling Iron. By C. W. Stemens, F.R.S.* Norwirnstanpine the recent introduction of cast steel for structural pur- poses, the production of wrought iron (and puddled steel) by the puddling process ranks among the most important branches of British manufacture, representing an annual production exceeding one and a half million of tons, and a money value of about nine millions sterling. Although the puddling process must be admitted to be of great commercial importance, and involves most interesting chemical problems, it has received less scientific attention than other processes of more recent origin and infe- rior importance, owing probably to the mistaken sentiment that a time- honoured practice implies perfect adaptation of the best means to the end, and leaves little scope for improvement. The scanty scientific literature on the subject will be found in Dr. Percy’s important work on iron and steel. Messrs. Crace-Calvert and Richard Johnson of Manchester+ have supplied most valuable information by a series of analyses of the contents of a puddling-turnace during the different stages of the process. These prove that the molten pig metal is mixed intimately, in the first place, either with a molten portion of the oxides, (or fettling,) which form the lining or protecting covering to the cast-iron tray of the puddling-chamber, or with a proportion of oxide of iron in the form of * Ordered to be printed in extenso among the Reports. + Phil. Mag., September 1857. The following Table from Messrs. Calvert and John- son’s paper includes the chief results of their investigations :-— Time Carbon. Silicon. Pig iron charged ..........20.0000- 12- 2-275 2720 Sample IN OF eet oitec deecees 12°40 2-726 0-915 a yee 1-0 2°905 0:197 ” ” 3 15 2:444 0-194 se eign Aotas 1-20 2°305 07182 < BA As: 1-35 1-647 0-183 - = U6 1:40 1-206 0163 $5 sy aant 1:45 0:963 0-163 ‘“ gat Ob ecodee facass 1-50 0-772 0-168 Buddled har 2.90 eseteeeee ays cli! 9) ihre. 0-296 0:120 Wire iron ys Ue Ree Gece. sbeb os 0111 0-088 ON PUDDLING IRON. 59 hammer-slag or red ore, thrown in expressly with the charge, that the silicon is first separated from the iron, that the carbon only leaves the iron during the “boil” or period of ebullition, and that the sulphur and phos- phorus separate last of all while the metal is “ coming to nature.” The investigations by Price and Nicholson and by M. Lan confirm these results, from which Dr. Percy draws some important general conclusions, which have only to be followed up and supplemented by some additional chemical facts and observations in order to render the puddling process per- fectly intelligible, and to bring into relief the defective manner in which it is at present put into practice, involving, as it does, great loss of metal, waste of fuel and of human labour, and an imperfect separation of the two hurtful ingredients, sulphur and phosphorus. Silicon.—In forming (by means of the rabble) an intimate mechanical mixture between the fluid cast metal and the cinder, the silicon contained in the iron is brought into intimate contact with metallic oxide, and is rapidly attacked, being found afterwards in the cinder in the form of silicic acid (combined with oxide of iron). The heat of the furnace is always kept low during this stage of the process, and the flame is maintained as reducing as ossible. 4 Carbon.—The disappearance of the carbon from the metal is accompanied by the appearance of violent ebullition and the evolution of carbonic oxide, which rises in innumerable bubbles to the surface of the bath, and burns (in an ordinary puddling-furnace) with the blue flame peculiar to that gas. In puddling in a regenerative gas-furnace this blue flame cannot be observed, because the flame of this furnace is strictly neutral, and there is no free oxygen present to burn the carbonic oxide rising from the fluid mass—a cir- cumstance which by itself explains the superior results obtained from the gas furnace. It is popularly believed that the oxygen acting upon the silicon and carbon of the metal is derived directly from the flame, which should, on that account, be made to contain an excess of oxygen ; but the very appearance of the pro- cess proves that the combination between carbon and oxygen does not take ~place on the surface, but throughout the body of the fluid mass, and must be attributed to the reaction of the carbon upon the fluid cinder in separating from it metallic iron ; while as the removal of the silicon is still more rapid, and is effected under a reducing flame, there is strong evidence that it also is oxidized rather by the oxygen of the cinder than by the flame*. But it has been argued that, although the reaction takes place below the surface, the oxygen may, nevertheless, be derived from the flame, which may oxidize the iron on the surface, forming an oxide or cinder, which is then transferred to the carbon at the bottom, in consequence of the general agita- tion of the mass. This view I am, however, in a position to disprove by my recent expe- rience in melting cast steel upon the open flame-bed of a furnace, having invariably observed that no oxidation of the unprotected Jud metal takes place so long as it contains carbon in however slight a proportion. But being desirous to ascertain by positive proof what is the behaviour of silicon and carbon in fluid cast iron when contact with the atmosphere or the flame of the furnace is strictly prevented, I instituted the following ex- _ periment at my Sample Steel Works at Birmingham ;— * At the end of this paper is appended a Table showing the comparative quantities of carbon in various kinds of iron and steel. F2 0 REPORT— 1868. Ten ewt. of Acadian pig metal and 1 ewt. of broken glass were charged upon the bed of a regenerative gas furnace (usually employed for melting steel upon the open hearth). The bed of this furnace was formed of pure siliceous sand, and one object in view was to ascertain whether any reaction takes place between silica and fluid cast metal, it being generally supposed that metallic silicon is produced under such circumstances by the reducing action of the carbon in the metal upon the silica or silicates present. The cast metal employed in this experiment was Acadian pig containing MILiCOne ne eit 1:5 per cent. Carbon. rie. e AOR Aas In the course of an hour the metal and glass were completely melted. A sample was taken out, containing SUNCOM sca) -yshaiiaye 1:08 per cent. 9-90 ‘6 per cent. combined carbon. # ae “A graphite. At the end of the second hour another sample was taken out and tested, the result being, ’ Carbon . Silicon cea Saateied: -96 per cent. Carbon sway We 2:40 ,, combined. The physical condition of the metal had now undergone a decided change ; the carbon having wholly combined with the iron, rendered it extremely hard. The amount of silicon having steadily dimimished, these results prove that no silicon is taken up by fluid cast metal in contact with silica or silicates. The reduction of the amount of silicon in the metal might be accounted for by the presence of minute quantities of oxides of iron, produced in melting the pig metal, which oxides were now increased by the addition of hematite ore in small quantities. At the end of the third hour another sample was taken, containing Silicon ...... ..) °76 per’cent: Carbone. tee 240! 5; combined, the metal being extremely hard as before. Additional doses of red ore were added gradually without agitating the bath, and the effect upon the fluid metal was observed from time to time. At the end of the fifth hour the samples taken from the fluid bath assumed a decidedly mild temper, when the addition of ore was stopped, and exactly six hours after being charged the metal was tapped and run into ingots; it now contained Silicon........ °046 per cent. Carbone ueeaen aa) eaes Thus both the silicon and the carbon had been almost entirely removed from ~ the pig metal by mere contact with metallic oxide, under a protecting glass _ covering. f The quantity of red ore added to the bath amounted to 2 cwt., and the — weight of metal tapped to 10 ewt. 5 lbs., being slightly in excess of the weight of pig metal charged. But the pig metal had contained Silicon... :..... 1:5 per cent. WAT DOME hia sa. 6.c 40 ,, Total... ... 35:5iaae ON PUDDLING IRON. 61 whereas the final metal contained only +296 of silicon and carbon, showing a gain of metal of 5°5 —:296 =5-204 per cent., or, including the 5 lbs. of increased weight, a total gain of 5-7 per cent. of metallic iron. Supported by these observations, I venture to assert that the removal of the Silicon and Carbon from the pig iron in the ordinary puddling or “ boiling” process is due entirely te the action of the fluid oxide of won present, and that an equivalent amount of metallic iron is reduced and added to the bath, which gain, however, is generally and unnecessarily lost again in the subsequent stages of the process. The relative quantity of metal thus produced from the fluid cinder admits of being accurately determined. The cinder may be taken to consist of Fe* O* (this being the fusible com- bination of peroxide and protoxide), together with more or less tribasio sili- cate (3 FeO, SiO*), which may be regarded as a neutral admixture, not affecting the argument, and silicic acid or silica is represented by Si 0°, from which it follows that for every four atoms of silicon leaving the metal, nine atoms of metallic iron are set free; and taking the atomic weights of iron = 28, and of silicon= 22:5, it follows that for every 4 x 22°5=90°0 grains of silicon abstracted from the metal, 9 x 28 = 252 grains of metallic iron are liberated from the cinder. Carbonic oxide, again, being represented by CO, and the cinder by Fe’* 0%, it follows that for every four atoms of carbon removed from the metal three atoms of iron are liberated; and taking into account the atomic weights of carbon=6 and of iron=28, it follows that for every 6x4=24 grains of carbon oxidized, 28 x 3=84 grains of metallic iron are added to the bath. Assuming ordinary forge pig, after being remelted in the puddling-furnace, to contain about 3 per cent. of carbon and 2 per cent. of silicon, it follows from the foregoing that in re- moving this silicon 252 : 2 90 * 2=5°6 per cent., and in removing the carbon 84 9g X3=105 per cent. of metallic iron is added to the bath, making a total increase of 56410'5—5=11'1 per cent., or a charge of 420 lbs. of forge pig metal ought to yield 466 lbs. of wrought metal, whereas from an ordinary puddling-furnace the actual yield would generally amount to only 370 lbs. (or 12 per cent. less than the charge), showing a difference of 96 lbs. between the theoretical and actual yield in each charge. This difference, amounting to fully 20 per cent., is due to the enormous waste by oxidation to which the iron is exposed after it has been “ brought to nature” (by the removal of the carbon), when it is in the form of a granular or spongy metallic mass and during the process of forming it into balls. So great a waste of metal by oxidation seems at first sight almost incredible ; but considering the extent of surface exposed in the finely divided puddled mass, it is not at all exceptional, and is in fact almost unavoidable in a furnace of the ordinary construction, maintained as a puddling-furnace _is at a welding heat. Many attempts have been made (for example, by 62 REPORT—1868. Chenot, Clay, Renton, and others) to produce iron directly from the purer ores, by reducing the ore in the first instance to a metallic sponge, and ball- ing up this sponge, which is a loose porous mass somewhat similar to spongy puddled iron, on the bed of a furnace; but all these attempts have failed, simply on account of the great waste of iron, a waste amounting to from 25 to 50 per cent. in balling up the sponge. Indeed the loss in an ordinary pud- dling-furnace would probably be greater than 20 per cent. if the metal were not partly protected from the flame by the bath of cinder in which it lies; for in one instance in which the cinder accidentally ran out of a puddling- furnace during the balling up of the charge, leaving the iron exposed to the flame, I found the yield reduced from the average of 413 Ibs. down to 370 lbs., showing an increased waste of 43 lbs., or over 10 per cent., due to the more complete exposure of the metal to the oxidizing action of the flame. In order to realize the theoretical result, a sufficient amount of oxides must have been supplied to effect the oxidation of the silicon and carbon of the pig iron, and to form a tribasic silicate of iron (8FeO, SiO’) with the silieie acid produced. The amount of oxide required may be readily ascertained. In taking the expression Fe’ 0+, the atomic weight of which is 3x 28+4 x 8=116, while that of the three atoms of iron alone is 3 x 28= 84, it follows that ae x 46=63°5 Ibs. of cinder or oxide of iron are requisite to produce the 46 Ibs. of reduced irom which were added to the bath. There must, however, remain a sufficient quantity of fluid cinder in the bath to form with the silicon (extracted from the iron) a tribasie silicate of iron, or about 60 Ibs., making in all 124 Ibs. of fettling, which would have to be added for each charge, a quantity which is generally exceeded in practice, notwithstanding the inferior results univer- sally obtained. There remain for our consideration the sulphur and phosphorus, which being generally contained in English forge pig in the proportion of from -2 to °6 per cent. each, can hardly affect the foregoing quantitative results, although they are of great importance as affecting the quality of the metal produced. It has been suggested by Percy that the separation of these ingredients may be due to liquation. This I understand to mean that the erystals of metallic iron which form throughout the boiling mass when the metal ‘ comes to nature,” exclude foreign substances in the same way that the ice formed upon sea-water excludes the salt, and yields sweet water when remelted. According to this view, pig metal of inferior quality will really yield iron almost chemically pure, to which foreign ingredients are again added by me- chanieal admixture with the surrounding cinder, or semireduced metal. It may be safely inferred that the freedom of the metal from impurities thus taken up will mainly depend upon the temperature, which should be high, in order to ensure the perfect fluidity and complete separation of the cinder. Led by these chemical considerations, and by practical attention to the subject, extending over several years, I am brought to the conclusion that the process of puddling, as practised at present, is extremely wasteful in iron and fuel, immensely laborious, and yielding a metal only imperfectly separated from its impurities. How nearly we shall be able to approach the results indicated by the che- ON PUDDLING IRON. 63 mical reasoning here adopted, I am not prepared to say ; but that much can be accomplished by the means actually at our doors is proved by the result of the working of a puddling-furnace erected eighteen months since to my designs by the Bolton Steel and Iron Company in Lancashire. This furnace consists of a puddling-chamber of very nearly the ordinary form, which is heated, however, by means of a regenerative gas furnace, a system of which the principle is now sufficiently well established to render a very detailed description here unnecessary. The general arrangement of the furnace is shown in the accompanying illustrations. It consists of two essential parts :— The Gas-producer, in which the coal or other fuel is converted into a com- bustible gas; and The Furnace, with its “‘regenerators” or chambers for storing the waste heat of the flame, and giving it up to the incoming air or gas. Fig. 1.—Section of Gas-producer. Scale 4, inch to a foot. The Gas-producer is shown in fig. 1; it is a rectangular firebrick chamber, one side of which, 8, is inclined at an angle of from 45° to 60°, and is pro- vided with a grate, c, at its foot. The fuel, which may be of any descrip- tion, such as coal, coke, lignite, peat, or even sawdust, is filled in through a hopper, , at the top of the incline, and falls in a thick bed upon the grate. Air is admitted at the grate, and, in burning, its oxygen unites with the carbon of the fuel, forming carbonic-acid gas, which rises slowly through 64: REPORT— 1868. the ignited mass, taking up an additional equivalent of carbon, and thus forming carbonic oxide. The heat thus produced distils off carburetted hydrogen and other gases and vapours from the fuel as it descends gradually towards the grate, and the carbonic oxide already named, diluted by the inert nitrogen of the air, and by any small quantity of unreduced carbonic acid, and mixed with these gases and vapours distilled from the raw fuel, is finally led off by the gas-flue to the furnace. The ashes and clinkers that accumulate in the grate are removed at intervals of one or two days. E is a pipe for the purpose of supplying a little water to the ash-pit, to be decomposed as it evaporates and comes in contact with the incandescent fuel, thus forming some hydrogen and carbonic oxide, which serve to enrich the gas; G isa small plughole by which the state of the fire may be inspected, and the fuel moved by a bar if necessary ; and p is a sliding damper by which the gas-producer may be shut off at any time from the flue. It is necessary to maintain a slight outward pressure through the whole length of the gas-flue leading to the furnaces, in order to prevent the burn- ing of the gas in the flue through the indraught of air at crevices in the brickwork. Where the furnaces stand much higher than the gas-producers, the re- quired pressure is at once obtained; but more frequently the furnaces and gas-producers are placed nearly on the same level, and some special arrange- ment is necessary to maintain the pressure in the flue. The most simple contrivance for this purpose is the “ elevated cooling-tube.” The hot gas is carried up by a brick stack, n, to a height of eight or ten feet above the top of the gas- producer, and is led through a horizontal sheet-iron cooling-tube, z (fig. 1), from which it passes down either directly to the furnace, or into an underground brick flue. The gas rising from the producer at a temperature of about 1000° Fahr., is cooled as it passes along the overhead tube, and the descending column is consequently denser and heavier than the ascending column of the same length, and continually overbalances it. The system forms, in fact, a siphon in which the two limbs are of equal length, but the one is filled with a heavier gaseous fluid than the other. In erecting a number of gas-producers and furnaces, I generally prefer to group the producers together, leading the gas from all into one main flue, from which the several furnaces draw their supplies. The Puddling-Furnace proper is shown in figures 2, 3, and 4. Fig. 2 is a front elevation of the furnace, showing the gas-reversing valve and flues in section. Fig. 3 is a longitudinal section at A, B, c, D (fig. 4). Fig. 4 is a sectional plan at 1, m (fig. 3). The peculiarity of the regenerative gas furnace, as applied either to puddling or to any other process in which a high heat is required, consists in the utilization in the furnace of nearly the whole of the heat of combus- tion of the fuel, by heating the entering gas and air by means of the waste heat of the products of combustion after they have left the furnace, and are of no further use for the operation being carried on, The waste heat is, so to speak, intercepted on its passage to the chimney by means of masses of firebrick stacked in an open or loose manner in certain chambers, called “ regenerator chambers,” ©, E, E,, C, (fig. 3). On first lighting the furnace the gas passes in through the gas-regulating valve, B (fig. 2), and the gas-reversing valve, B’, and is led into the flue, m, and thence into the bottom of the regenerator chamber, c (fig. 3); while the ON PUDDLING IRON. 65 air enters through a corresponding “ air-reversing valve,” behind the valve, _ p Um ro uy, ; oo Noy re = J po Fy Cy NTT uy "Wim WLM MM Ws) a 89s SIA A Fig. 2.—Front Elevation of Puddling-Furnace. Seale 3; inch to a foot. B’ (fig. 2), and passes thence through the flue, n, into the regenerator cham- ber, = (fig. 3). Tae YYy Yyy ULL YL Z YY aay SS WOK LWO =] DESO Ss L VMs Si SSS SSS SS SSS SSSSsx_ss SEEM "(Fl .".. BWW Wve Fig. 5.—Longitudin n at A, B, C, D (fig. 4). NN WK Z Z| 66 REPORT—1868. The currents of gas and air, both quite cold, rise separately through the regenerator chambers, ¢ and z (fig. 3), and pass up through the flues, ¢, «, and F, F, F (fig. 4) respectively, into the furnace above, where they meet and are lighted, burning and producing a moderate heat. The products of combus- Fig. 4.—Sectional Plan at 1, m (fig. 3). tion pass away through a similar set of flues at the other end of the furnace into the regenerator chambers c, £, (fig. 3), and thence through the flues m’,N’ (fig. 2), and through the gas- and air-reversing valves into the chimney- flue, o. The waste heat is thus deposited in the upper courses of open fire- brick work filling the chambers, c,, ©, (fig. 3), so heating them up, while the lower portion and the chimney-flue are still quite cool; then, after about an hour, the reversing-valves, B’ (fig. 2) (through which the air and gas are admitted to the furnace) are reversed, by means of the levers, Pp, and the air and gas enter through those regenerator chambers, £, c, (fig. 3), that have just been heated by the waste products of combustion, and in passing up through the open brickwork they become heated, and then, on meeting and entering into combustion in the furnace, p, p, they produce a very high tem- perature, probably 500° Fahr. higher than when admitted cold; the waste heat from such higher temperature of combustion heating up the previously cold regenerator chambers, c, E, to a correspondingly higher heat. After about an hour’s work, the reversing-valves, B’ (fig. 2), are again reversed, and the air and gas enter the first pair of regenerator chambers, c, E (fig. 3), but which are now very hot, and therefore the air and gas become very hot, and enter the furnace in this state, meeting and entering into combustion, and thus producing a still higher temperature, probably 500° higher still, and again heating the second pair of regenerator chambers, c,, E,, 80 much higher, which enables them to again heat the air and gas to a still higher degree, when the valves, s' (fig. 2), are again reversed. Thus an accumulation of heat and an accession of temperature is obtained, step by step, so to speak, until the furnace is as hot as is required; for unless cold mate- rials are put in to be heated, and thus abstract heat, the temperature rises as long as the furnace holds together, and the supply of gas and air is con- tinued. The heat is at the same time so thoroughly abstracted from the pro- ducts of combustion by the regenerators, that the chimney-flue remains always quite cool. The command of the temperature of the furnace and of the quality of the flame is rendered complete by means of the gas and air re- gulating valves shown at B, in fig. 2, and by the chimney-damper. These are adjusted to any required extent of opening by the notched rods, a, rR, and 8s (fig. 2), respectively, so that, having the power of producing as high a tem- perature as can be desired, there is also the power of varying it according to the requirements in each case. The bed of the furnace, p p (fig. 3), is of the ordinary construction, formed of iron plates, and is provided with water-bridges at the ends, as shown, to a ON PUDDLING IRON. 67 protect the “fettling”’ (or oxide of iron used for lining the furnace) from being melted away. The overflow from one of the water-bridges is led into a sheet-iron tank below the bed, and then away. The evaporation from this tank keeps the bottom plates cool and preserves the cinder covering them from melting off, and the steam is carried away by a draught of air entering through two holes, 1, 1 (fig. 2), below the tap-hole, and passing off by small ventilating shafts, x, x (fig. 4), at the back of the furnace. A heating chamber, u (fig. 3), is arranged at each end of the furnace, in which the charge of pig iron may be heated to redness before it is introduced into the puddling-chamber, p p. The advantages of this furnace for puddling are, that the heat can be raised to an almost unlimited degree, that the flame can be made at will oxidizing, neutral, or reducing, without interfering with the temperature, that indraughts of air and cutting flames are avoided, and that the gas- fuel is free from ashes, dust, and other impurities which are carried into an ordinary puddling-furnace from the grate. In this last respect, the new furnace presents the same advantages as puddling with wood. The following Tables give the working results which were obtained from this furnace, as compared with the results obtained at the same time in an ordinary furnace from the same pig (the ordinary forge mixture). Regenerative Gas Furnace. Taste No. 1. Date. eda Time charged. | First ball out. ie a Yield. First shift. h. m. hs. ms: lbs. lbs. 1867. 1 Si, Zo 6 32 410 392 May 7. 2, 6 45 750: 433 396 3 S5,-8 9 9 430 410 4 9 15 LOY 7 AQ5 426 5 10 20 hie 496 430 6 11 40 12 46 A412 A412 Second shift. af 1 48 2 AZ 428 410 2 2 50 3 AT 420 414 Ss 3 56 4 53 426 418 4 on 0 Gago 432 A417 5 6-5 t 72 425 407 6 7 20 8 15 420 422 Third shift. 1 9 10 10 15 493 414 De 10 25 11 30 4292 412 3 11 35 12 40 420 420 4 12 45 2" 430. 410 5 2 10 3 10 424 418 6 3 16 4 20 420 400 68 REPORT—1868. Tanxe No. 1 (continued). Date Oe Time charged. First ball out. Rey Yield. } First shift. 1867. ney em hom. lbs. lbs. May 28. i 5 38 6 45 423 402 2 6 50 8 0 422 400 3 S46 9 38 430 390 - 9 15 10 25 426 407 5 10 35 11 45 426 420 6 11 55 Ls 430 416 Second shift. al 2 70 od 422 422 2 3. 6 4 0 424 415 3 4 5 5 18 423 424 + 5 23 6 27 423 415 5 6 33 7 46 427 420 6 7 49 8 50 420 406 Third shift. 1 10 O 11 20 420 424 2 11 25 11 33 420 410 3 12 40 1 45 423 412 4 1 50 2 58 425 420 5) 3 13 4 20 430 418 6 4 30 5 39 422 426 ewt. qrs. lbs. ewt. qrs. lbs, Potalyield ;...-.'. 182 2 2 Total charge .. 186 1 2 being at the rate of 20 ewt. 2 qrs. 2 lbs. of pig iron per ton of puddled bar. Ordinary Furnace. Taste No. 2. Weight | Weight of Weight Weight of Date. Time. |ofmetal|puddledbar|| Date. Time. | of metal puddledbar charged.| produced. charged. | produced. lbs. Ibs. AS ann wee ¢ ony Ls 1867./S &s z 424 1867. ome 4 432 May17),8 S| 2 425 |Mayl7), 8 %o| | 426 aqdod 2 dod 5 SSRQ| = 405 SORA! & 420 F Spt] sco. 4 ABO Peg Eri ib st tlm gsak) ~ | 430 ges2r) ~s | 499 HSS5| B | 488 BESS! 8 | 425 anime Ss 416 ofes| = 430 g4e8 456 e353 450 aes 410 Sans. 410 ON PUDDLING IRON, 69 MiGam char Perse weeentse sole cscecets Ree eel 484 Ibs. Mean yaclan irs fest) OPA AEE. 426 ,, or 22 ewt. 2 qrs. 20 lbs. of pig iron per ton of puddled bar. It will be observed that the ordinary furnace received charges of 484 lbs. each, and yielded on an average 426 lbs., representing a loss of 12 per cent., whereas the gas furnace received charges averaging 424 lbs., and yielded 413 lbs., representing a loss of less than 2-6 per cent. It is important to observe, moreover, that the gas furnace turned out eighteen heats in three shifis per twenty-four howrs, instead of only twelve heats per twenty-four hours, which was the limit of production in the ordinary furnace. This rate of working was attained without the employment of any arrangement for heating the pig iron before charging it into the furnace, the heating-chambers at the ends not having been used. The adoption of the plan of heating the metal beforehand (a system already extensively in use both in this country and on the Continent) effects a further saving of ten to fifteen minutes in the time required for working each charge, as well as a considerable economy in fuel. The quality of the iron produced from the gas furnace was proved de- cidedly superior to that from the ordinary furnace, being what is technically called “best best” in the one, and << best’’ in the other case, from the same pig iron of average quality. The following was the result of an analysis of an inferior English pig iron before and after being puddled in the gas furnace :— Pig Metal. Puddled Bar. EeBMOE ee alsa os ‘08 Sulphur’ 35 fe cK Fh ges 017 Phosphorus .......... 1:16 Phosphorus ........ -237 BRN ies. Ailey sl'etals we 1:97 uliearny 2 AF 2092 om Soe *200 Tron and Carbon (by Tron by difference .... 99°546 difference) .....:... 96°79 100-00 100-000 showing the extent to which foreign matters are actually removed by the process of puddling. These analyses were made a few days ago by Mr, A. Willis in my labora- tory at Birmingham. The economy of fuel was also greatly in favour of the gas furnace, but could not be accurately ascertained, because some mill-furnaces were worked from the same set of producers. Still, judging from the experience of several years in the working of regenerative gas furnaces as reheating or mill-furnaces and as glass-furnaces, the saving of fuel in puddling cannot be less than 40 to 50 per cent. in quantity, while a much cheaper quality may be used. The consumption of “ fettling”’ was, however, greater in the gas furnace, and the superior yield was naturally attributed by the forge managers to that cause, although the writer held a different opinion. The gas furnace, however, had not been provided with water-bridges ; these were subsequently added, and the furnace put to work again in February last, since which time it has been worked continuously. The result of the water-bridges has been that the amount of “ fettling”’ required is reduced to an ordinary proportion, the average quantity of red ore used being 92°6 lbs. per charge, besides the usual allowance of bulldog, ? 70 REPORT—1868. while the yield per charge of 483-3 lbs. of grey forge pig has been increased to 485 lbs. of puddled bar, as shown by the following return of a series of eighty consecutive charges in June last :— Regenerative Gas Furnace. TastE No. 3. Average per heat. No. of heats. Total charges and yields. Date. lbs. ewt. qr. lbs. Ibs. June 1868.| 80 | Pig iron charged.... 38,668=345 1 0] 483-3 Puddled bar returned 38,808=346 1 25) 485 Red ore for “fettling” 7,406= 66 0 14] 92:6 proving that the yield of puddled bar slightly exceeds the charge of pig metal (representing a saving of fully 12 per cent. over the ordinary furnace), while the superiority of quality in favour of the gas furnace is fully maintained. It is also worthy of remark that these results are obtained regularly by the ordinary puddlers of the works, and that no repairs have been necessary to the gas puddling-furnace since November last, the roof being reported to be still in excellent condition. In these investigations I have confined myself to the puddling of ordinary English forge pig, in order to avoid confusion ; but it is self-evident that the same reasoning also applies, in a modified degree, to white pig metal or refined metal, the use of which I should not, however, advocate. Water-bridges.—Regarding the water-bridges, I was desirous to ascertain the expenditure of heat at which the saving of “ fettling” and greater ease of working was effected. The water passing through the bridges was accord- ingly measured by Mr. W. Hackney (who has also furnished me with the other working data), and found to amount to 251bs. per minute, heated 40° Fahr. This represents 60,000 units of heat per hour, or a consumption not exceeding 8 lbs. to 10 lbs. of solid fuel per hour, an expenditure very much exceeded by the advantages obtained where water or cooling-cisterns are available. The labour of the puddler and of his underhand being very much shortened and facilitated by means of the furnace, I should strongly recommend the introduction of three working shifts of 8 hours each per 24 hours, each shift representing the usual number of heats, by which arrangement both the employer and the employed would be materially benefited. The labour of the puddler may be further reduced with advantage by the introduction of the mechanical “ rabble,” which has already made conside- rable progress on the Continent. By working in this manner, a regenerative gas puddling-furnace, of ordi- nary dimensions, would produce an annual yield of about 940 tons of bar iron, of superior quality, from the same weight of grey pig metal and the ordinary proportion of “ fettling.” In conclusion I may state that a considerable number of these puddling- furnaces have been erected by me abroad, and that in this country they are also being taken up by the Monkbridge Iron Company, Leeds, and a few other enterprising firms. The construction of these furnaces has been still further improved lately by the application of horizontal regenerators, to save deep excavations, and ON PUDDLING IRON. 71 by other arrangements, whereby the first cost is diminished, and the working of the furnace facilitated. Taste No. 4. Percentage of Carbon and Silicon contained in various kinds of cast and wrought iron and steel, Description. Carbon. | Silicon. Authority. per cent. | per cent, Spiegeleisen (New Jersey, U.S.) ...... conghadae 6-900 | 0:100 |Henry. * (German) ierransteopoeaetndaddeot cae 5-440 0179 |Schafhautl. a (QUUINIEES21)) BS -condcleo npgbreeioodenOgoROcenD 4323 0-997 |Fresenius. Lofsta pig iron (Dannemora, Sweden) ......... 4-809 0176 |Henry. Grey pig iron No. 1. (Tow Law) ..............- 2-795 4-414 |Riley. Grey pig iron No. 1. (Acadian Iron Co.)...... 3°500 4840 |Tookey. rSDuth Stal oedchire). renee t| 307 | 148 Woolwich Arsenal, Grey Foundry pig iron No.2. Ditto, ditto...| 3-04 1:27 Ps Grey Forge pig iron Ditto, ditto. selprens ley 1:16 £ Forge pig iron Ditto, ditto...! 3-03 0:83 i Strong Forge pig iron Ditto, ditto...! 2°81 0:57 7 Grey pig iron (Dowlais).. ..........:6s..se00ee0e 3:14 216 Riley. IGSHLCH PIF ATTOM! 5, 00 Wescncewsccndeastued. ven ons 2°95 1-96 5 White pig iron See Soddnee cata cvatiucienceteete 2°84 1-21 + Mottled pig iron (Wellingborough) ............ 2-10 211 |Woolwich Arsenal. White pig iron (Blaenavon) ..................006 2:31 1-11 |Percy. Refined iron (Bromford, 8. Staffordshire)...... 3:070 0-630 |Dick. Puddled steel, hard (K6nigshiitte) ............... 1:380 006 | Brauns. “ ,, mild (South bed Se tetocrece ‘501 106 |Parry. BRPRTANTE PAY VOOUZ) cocicr cateccccssceddcccecececseasee 1:645 ‘042 |Henry. PP HOM Heat Hes, £5), Lcctsideerddt.veaheosseas 1-2 secs |A. Willis, as Huntsman’s) for cutters............ TO” psleetates A HOM CHIBOIS cc axe ad wecnens ove ete mnie tec oT bleed does s nf Se Die steel (welding) .................065 ited ern ce e e Double Shear steel ................4. ee alt. “etek 9 Ps Quarry Drills, ini... .cssesdoddeedede “GHEE “4 a Mason’s Tools ..........62ecccseeeeee “Oil aii) othe if # SPADES: goes older weit venseaie tt 3ec rere coe. le, lessee ” 7 WRatlway DyPes) ce-cce-sesececge sts a SA tO | caress ry ¥ SEV AT Abas eegeeariar ccsaiuserssuas eae aesers 26 to 24) ...... Fe 7 Plates ce Faalet Jenet aieteececnite aves “2b jh) Ses Various. Hs very mild (melted on ’ apes sac hearth) «....... } aa ah asi | a A. Willis. Hard bar iron (South Wales) ..................08. 410 080 |Schafhautl. re pn (MlOSter gS WECM!) =. .c<..<.. seca “386 252 |Henry. - Meee (EUUSSIA hs racecacentecdaninedensecss 340 trace es 4557 Wael cI). atdbass 272 062 . Boiler plates (Russeil’s Hall, 8. Staffordshire)..| -190 144 a Armour ,, (Weardale Iron Co. bees too fea » Bucklandi.. 2 PP 9 Se eee - >» angulatus.. 37 ie 99) - a see 13 A 35. Planorbis.. :.2 ¥ 35 eae 1 Total new species.... 90 25 25 115 Species described by MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime, 43. Total species, 158. The labour of passing so many forms under review, and of superintending twenty-six plates published by the Paleontographical Society, two plates in the Philosophical Transactions, and one in the Journal of the Geological Society, may perhaps be explanatory of the impossibility of my concluding the Report on the Cretaceous Coral-fauna. The new species from the Gault, however, have been lithographed but not published ; but those from the Upper Greensand and Neocomian have not yet been drawn. There remains for a future Report the description of the fossil Corals of the Gault, Lower Greensand, and of.the Oolitic rocks. The vast Coral-remains of the Paleozoic age have not been alluded to in this Report; and although I have had the advantage of Mr. Thomson’s valuable skill in producing sections of Carboniferous corals, and also of inves- tigating large series of Devonian and Silurian forms, I can only assert that, before any satisfactory communication on these early Zoantharia can be written, much time must be occupied and much labour be undergone *. * The Grant of £50 for reporting on the British Fossil Corals has been spent, ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. viv A REPORT. The researches of Darwin, Dana, and others have been so long before the scientific world, that the external physical conditions accompanying Coral- life are universally well understood. The physico-chemical changes which take place in dead corals and influence their future fossil condition have been described ; and it is most reasonable to assert that the representatives of the existing Coral-faune flourished under the same kind of conditions, and were subjected to the same prefossil incidents and changes. Corals are either aggregated in reefs or distributed sparely over the sea- bottom. In the strata of nearly every formation, somewhere or other, aggregations of corals are found, either in great banks, or as distinct reefs hanging on to the older rocks; moreover sparely distributed solitary or simple forms are universal. In the Caribbean Sea, the Indo-Pacific, the Great Ocean, the China seas, aggregations occur and the species flourish in comparatively shallow water. In the deep water from 50 to 200 fathoms, between reefs, simple and sparely distributed species occur ; and in other seas, where there are no reefs, the sea- bottom from about 50 to 200 fathoms supports larger or smaller simple and a few compound forms. The Mediterranean, the Atlantic off the Spanish coast, the Bay of Biscay, the South-west British sea, and especially the seas between Unst and Norway are characterized by numerous simple Madreporaria and a few com- pound forms. This geographical and bathymetrical distribution must influence us in reasoning geologically upon the presence of corals in strata; and a tropical climate must not be of necessity inferred from the discovery even of fine specimens. Corals cannot migrate except by the floating away of their ova; and very slight alterations in the very definite physical conditions destroy the parent stock as well as the ova. It is not surprising therefore to find the species very much restricted in their vertical range in strata. Recent species vary greatly under slight modifications of the sea-depth, force of wave, and purity of sea- water ; and it is found that corresponding variations occurred in every age, the minute structural differences repeated over and over again in specimens from the same deposits having clearly a genetic relation to a definite type. As there are now geographical provinces of corals differing in genera, species, and in physical peculiarity, so in every formation down to the Lower Silu- rian there are evidences of areas characterized by reefs or by simple and solitary species, and the species of distant localities were, as now, different, peculiar, and occasionally identical. From those early days there have been opportunities for the migration of distant species by their ova; and it is found that the fossil species peculiar to a certain geological horizon in one part of the world are often represented by closely allied species, varieties, or identical forms in higher or lower horizons in other parts. Some few forms are very persistent ; and those which have lasted through the Tertiary ages into the present have a great geographical range, just as those which had a great vertical range in older deposits had also a great horizontal area. It is necessary, in considering the relative ages and contemporaneity of coral species, to remember that a coral reef on the side of a precipitous sub- merged mountain-top had its débris carried down the abyss for ages, and that this is enormous in amount. It must be remembered that in the course of time the distance between 78 REPORT—1868. the bottom of the reef and the top of the detritus will decrease very sensibly, and that any gradual elevation of the reef above the sea, pro- ducing its destruction, would be accompanied by a more rapid descent of débris. In after ages the upper and stony deposit would perchance be considered of different age from the marly and fine sediment below. Again, deep seas creeping over littoral areas and then over the land during the gradual subsidence of great areas would bring simple corals over littoral and terrestrial remains, the species all being really contemporaneous. On the other hand, a long-continued subsidence would equally tend to the increase of the reef and of the deep-water sediment. After the lowering of the area had been destructive to the reef, and no more detritus could fall, the usual ooze of the deep sea would gradually invade all. These suggestions will. perhaps render the occurrence of large coralliferous deposits in certain strata only, in large areas of formations, more comprehensible, and will tend to the belief that when coralliferous deposits occur at the base of a great series of uncoralliferous strata (and this is often the case) the idea of contemporaneity is not overcome by the evident succession of the deposits. The relation between such faune as the St.-Cassian and South Wales Lower Lias of the zone of Ammonites angulatus is evident; but the inter- mediate faunze of Azzarola and of the lowest zones of the Lias on the Con- tinent are less closely allied to the Welsh fauna. Again, the fauna of the Welsh Lower Lias is more closely allied to the Lower Oolitic Coral-fauna of England than are the Coral-faune of the zones of A. Bucklandi, A. raricos- tatus, and of the Middle and Upper Lias. How interesting is the affinity between the Coral-fauna of Gosau and the Miocene Coral-fauna of the Caribbean area! yet the British Chalk hardly represents any part of the Gosau fauna, and our Eocene fauna has no resemblance to it. These considerations tend to prove how vast and com- plicated the gradual migrations must have been, even of animals which could only live under very definite and limited conditions, how really con- temporaneous were the species entombed in vast consecutive deposits, how complicated the relations of the fauna have ever been, and how clearly the absence of corals from strata does not prove their absence in adjoining and equivalent areas. The notion that successive new creations of corals followed repeated destructions of faunse is not supported by a single fact; on the contrary, all the evidence disproves it. The amount of individual varia- tion, of gradual structural changes, and of decided variation amongst the Madreporaria is not without significance ; and the examination of large series of forms from all parts of the world, and from consecutive formations, im- presses the belief in the continuous evolution of new forms by variation from the old during the whole of the Coral ages. Fossil Corals from the Crag. The following authors have written upon this subject :—Searles Wood, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1844, vol. xiii. p.12. Lonsdale, Searles Wood’s Catalogue, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1844. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime, “ Mém. sur les Astraides,” Comptes Rendus de l’Acad. des Sciences, vol. xxvii. p. 496 (1868); “‘ Monog. des Turbinolides,” Ann. des Sciences Naturelles, 3rd ser. vol. ix. (1848); Hist. Nat. des Corall. 1857, Paris. R. C. Taylor, Mag. Nat. Hist. 1830, vol. iii. p. 272. G. de Fromentel, ‘ Introd. 4 l’Etude des Polyp. Foss.’ 1858. The Sclerodermic Zoantharia, or true Madreporaria, are rarely found in any of the Crags. Bryozoa abound, and thus gave the term “ Coralline ” to ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 79 the Crag. As a general rule, the most preseryable and commonest of the true corals are not found in recent seas with Bryozoa; but certain forms inhabiting the sea-bottom from the lowest spring-tide level to 200 or more fathoms are brought up by the dredge with Bryozoa. These forms are strongly represented in the Crag Coral-fauna. List of Crag Species. Sphenotrochus intermedius, Miimster, sp. Cryptangia Woodii, Ed. §- H. Flabellum Woodii, Ed. § H. Balanophyllia calyculus, Wood. Sphenotrochus intermedius is found in the Coralline Crag and in the Red Crag of England, and it has been found in the Antwerp Crag. The genus still exists, and is represented in the south-western and western British and Trish seas. Sphenotrochus M‘Andrewanus, Ed. & H., the Turbinolia Milletiana of William Thompson, from Cornwall and Arran, is closely allied to the Crag species ; and it is very evident, from the variability of these simple corals, that Sphenotrochus Milletianus (Defrance, sp.) of the Anjou and Touraine Miocene, Sphenotrochus intermedius, and Sphenotrochus M‘Andrewanus have descended from one type, and that they have been slightly modified to meet the changes in the external conditions in the later Tertiary and recent seas. Probably these Crag and recent species should be considered varieties of the Miocene form. My researches in the Australian Tertiary Coral-fauna have brought two species of Sphenotrochus to light; but they are only remotely allied to the British species. The alliance between Flabellum Woodi and F. Roissyanum of Dax and Malaga, and F”. cristatum of the Bolderberg, is not close ; and the affinity between the British Crag species and the living F. anthophyllum, Ehrenberg, of the Mediterranean and Spanish coast, and perhaps from our north-east seas, is slight. Flabellum Woodii is closely allied to F. subturbinatum, Ed. and H., of the Miocene of Plaisance, and 7. Gallapagense, from the Gallapagos Miocene. F. Woodii is found in the Coralline Crag. Cryptangia Woodii, Ed. & H.—This genus is extinct, and the second species of it is a form very like the Crag species ; it is from the Faluns, and, like the Crag species, is imbedded in a Cellepore. The septal arrangement of the species is rather abnormal, and there is an evident tendency to revert to some old type in which the quaternary arrangement prevailed. The genus is closely allied to Rhizangia and to Cylicia. The first of these is extinct, and flourished in the Lower Chalk of Gosau, in the Eocene, and in the Miocene ; and the last is recent, its species living in the South-African and Australian seas. Balanophyllia calyculus, Wood, is represented in the Southern British seas by B. regia, Gosse, to which it is closely allied. The Mediterranean species is not closely allied ; and the same may be said for the Cape-of-Good- Hope B. capensis, Verrill, and the Miocene B. cylindrica. The species is found in the Red Crag, and the specimens are usually very badly preserved about the calice. The genus is fully noticed in the report on the Fossil Corals of the Brockenhurst beds. It will thus appear that three out of the four genera of Crag corals are represented in the existing seas of our coasts by more or less closely allied species. One genus is extinct. The fine Stephanophyllia Nysti of the Black Crag of Antwerp is not found in the British Crags. 80 REPORT—1868. Judging from the conditions surrounding the existing species and their allies, it might be asserted that no very great bathymetrical or climatal changes have taken place between the deposit of the Crag and the present time. The intervention of a long glacial period is not proved by the study of the corals. But doubtless during that period migration to deep water or to the south occurred. When the cold period was succeeded by more temperate times a return of the fauna took place; and it must be remembered that two opportunities at least were thus given for variation in form. Fossil Corals from Brockenhurst. Lower OLIGocENE. Before 1866 no species of corals were known to exist in any beds between the top of the Barton series of the Eocene and the base of the “Crag.” I published in that year, in the Supplement to the British Fossil Corals, Palzontographical Society’s vol. for 1865, descriptions of thirteen species of corals from Brockenhurst in Hampshire. The species were, with the exception. of two, new to science, and indicated very different external conditions to those prevailing at the time of the deposition of the Bracklesham and Barton corals, Moreover the two species which had been described from foreign sources also indicated a very different state of things from those favourable to the life of the tiny simple Turbinolie of the London Clay and of the Barton series. The facies of the whole collection was clearly intermediate between the Eocene and the Falunian coral-faune. The species were collected from beds which are distinctly represented in White Cliff Bay, and which belong to the Middle Headon series. Overlying freshwater remains (the Lower Headon), it is evident that great marine and terrestrial changes had occurred subsequently to the estuarine conditions prevailing towards the end of the deposition of the Barton series. The genera of the corals discovered at Brockenhurst prove that the conditions inseparable from a coral-reef succeeded those favourable to the development of estuarine and freshwater species of mollusca. The existing species of such genera as Madrepora and Solenastrea are reef-dwellers, and Awopora and Litharea are represented in modern reefs by Pocillopora and Porites. Such genera as Balanophyllia and Lobopsammia were and are dwellers in from 20 to 100 or more fathoms, and are found in the deeper water, close to the reefs. A corresponding succession occurs in North Ger- many, and deep seams of fossil wood are covered with marine deposits of the same relative age as the marine bed at Brockenhurst. Both the marine deposits are covered with greater or less depths of sands and gravels. The molluscan fauna of Brockenhurst has much in common with those of the North German Lower Oligocene deposits superimposed on the fossil-wood seams of Magdeburg, Bernsberg, Aschersleben, Egeln, Helmstedt, and Latdorf ; and the British as well as the German deposits are moreover the equivalents of the “ Tongrien Inférieur.”. - The paleontology of the deposits has been sufficiently studied to determine the necessity of their separation in classificatory geology from the Eocene snd Miocene formations. As yet no satisfactory alliances have been deter- mined to exist between the Oligocene coral-fauna of North Germany and that of Brockenhurst. But imasmuch as the mollusca are closely allied, there is a great probability of the deep-water, oceanic, and reef tracts having been to the west of the North German littoral tracts. ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS, 81 List of the Species. 1. Solenastrza cellulosa, Duncan. 8. Lobopsammia cariosa, Goldfuss, sp. 2. —— Keneni, Duncan. 9. Axopora Michelini, Duncan. 3. Reussi, Duncan. 10. Litharzea Brockenhursti, Duncan. 4. gemmans, Duncan. 11. Madrepora Anglica, Duncan. 5. Beyrichi, Duncan. 12. Romeri, Duncan. 6. granulata, Duncan. 13. —— Solanderi, Defrance. 7. Balanophyllia granulata, Duncan. The species of the genus Solenastrea from Brockenhurst form a very in- teresting series, which might almost be made a subgenus. The high septal number in conjunction with the highly inclined endotheca and the defective columella characterize the group. The species described by Reuss from the Castelgomberto district, and those from Ghent and Touraine by MM. Milne- Edwards and Jules Haime, are very distinct from the Brockenhurst species. Those I have published in my ‘ West-Indian Fossil Corals,’ and a species noticed by Michelotti and Duchassaing, from St. Thomas’s, are equally remotely allied to the British forms. The recent Solenastree are world-wide—the Red Sea, the Indian Ocean, and the Caribbean Sea being their favourite localities. The Madrepore from Brockenhurst are very interesting species, for fossil forms of the genus are very rare. Madrepora Solanderi, Defrance, was known as a form from Anyert and Valmondois; but it appears to me that the correct geological age of the deposit whence it and another coral (also common to the Brockenhurst, viz. Lobopsammia cariosa) came is not free from doubt. It is not improbable that they are true Oligocene corals, especially as the last-named species is identical with Lobopsammia dilatata, Riémer, from Latdorf. _ Madrepora Anglicais a grand form, with a great trunk and short branches, equalling in size any of the most luxuriant recent species. It is allied to Madrepora crassa, Ed. & H., from the-Pacific and Southern oceans. The genus comprehends nearly 100 species now flourishing; but the fossil forms are only eight in number. The recent species are found, for the most part, in the boiling surf of the reef, in every part of the globe where the condi- tions for reefs exist. _ A.xopora is a genus which has absorbed the genus Holarwa. The species have very rudimentary septa, enormous columelle, well developed tabule, and a reticulate ceenenchyma. The species are found in the Eocene of Great Britain and France, and at Brockenhurst, and they are all closely allied. Litharewa Brockenhursti is remotely allied to the species from the Brac- kJesham beds and the French and the Javan tertiaries. The genus is extinct ; but the Brockenhurst species, although not the latest in geological age, points to Goniophora, a large recent genus of Pacific and Red-Sea corals. The species of Balanophyllia from Brockenhurst, like that from Brackles- ham, has no epitheca, but its large base, distinct costa, and very granular sur- face render it easily distinguishable. Reuss, F. Rémer, and Philippi have described species from the Lower Marine Sand of Weinheim and Latdorf ; but they are not closely allied to the species under consideration. As the genus is present in the whole of the Cainozoic coralliferous beds of Great Britain, and is represented in the existing South British and Mediterranean seas, the following Table may be useful concerning its divi- sions. . 82 REPORT—1868. BALANOPHYLLIA. Subgenus 1. Corallites with broad bases. Balanophyllia desmophyllum, Lons- DROBO. oS: Bracklesham. Eocene. —— geniculata, D’Archiac, sp... Port des Basques. of —— tenuistriata, Hd. G6 H. .... Paris basin. 23h —— granulata, Duncan ........ Brockenhurst. Oligocene. cylindrica, Michelotti, sp. .. Turin and Verona. Miocene. subcylindrica, Philippi, sp. _ Sicily. 2? Italica, Michelin, sp. ...... Astesan. Pliocene (recent). canyons, Wood 9. J... Crag. Pliocene. —— capensis, Verrill.......... Cape of Good Hope. Recent. verrucaria, Pallas, sp. .... Mediterranean. = —— Cumingii, Hd. § H. ...... Philippines. Ss —— regia, Gosse.............. South Britain. s Bairdiana, Hd. f§ H. ...... Unknown. Subgenus 2. Corallites more or less pedicellate. Gravesi, Michelin, sp....... Henouville (Oise). Eocene. sinuata, i inzequidens, | Reuss ...... Weinheim. Oligocene. fascicularis, prelonga, Michelotti, sp. .. Turin. Miocene. —— Australiensis, Duncan .... South Australia. Miocene ? ineplaris, Seguenza ...... Sicily. Pliocene. Fossil Corals from the British Eocene Formation. The following authors have written upon this subject :—Fleming, ‘ Hist. of British Animals, 1828. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime, op. cit. Lons- dale, in Dixon’s ‘ Geology of Sussex.’ J. de Carle Sowerby, Trans. Geol. Soc. vol. y. p. 136 (1834). J. 8. Bowerbank, Mag. Nat. Hist. 1840. Wetherell, Trans. Geol. Soc. 2nd ser. vol. v. (1834). The labours of these naturalists and paleontologists were collected in the great monograph of the ‘ British Fossil Corals’ by M. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime, and by P. Martin Duncan, Supp. Mon. Brit. Foss. Corals, Paleeontograph. Soc. 1866, part 1, Tertiary. In the monograph last named in the list, thirteen species were added to those noticed in the previously published monograph by MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime. The following is a complete summary of the Eocene species. 1. Turbinolia sulcata, Lamarck. 15. Trochocyathus insignis, Duncan. 2. —— Dixoni, Hd. & H. 16. Paracyathus crassus, Hd. § H. 3. Bowerbankii, Hd. § H. U7; caryophyllus, Lamarck, sp. 4. —— Fredericiana, Hd. § H. 18. brevis, Lamarck, sp, 5. —— humilis, Ed. § H. 19. —— Haimei, Duncan. 6. —— minor, Ed. & H. 20. cylindricus, Duncan. Fe firma, Ed. § H. 21. Dasmia Sowerbyi, Hd. & H. 8. Prestwichii, Hd. & H. 22. Oculina conferta, Hd. & H. 9. —— affinis, Duncan. 23. incrustans, Duncan. 10. exarata, Duncan. 24. Wetherelli, Duncan. 11. Forbesi, Duncan. 25. Diplohelia papillosa, Hd. § H. 12. Leptocyathus elegans, Ed. & H. 26. Styloceenia emarciata, Lamarck, sp. 13. Trochocyathus sinuosus, Brongniart, sp. 27. monticularia, Schweigger, sp. 14. Austeni, Duncan. 28. Astroccenia pulchella, Hd. & H. eS ss UCC —e ee ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 83 29. Stephanophyllia diseoides, Ed. & H. 34. Dendracis Lonsdalei, Duncan, 30. Balanophyllia desmophyllum, Lonsdale, 35. Porites panicea, Lonsdale. sp. 36. Litharea Websteri, Bowerbank, sp. 31. Dendrophyllia elegans, Duncan. 37. Axopora Forbesi, Duncan. 32. —— dendrophylloides, Lonsdale. 38. Parisiensis, Michelin. 33. Stereopsammia humilis, Kd. g H. Notice of the Species. Turbinolia suleata, Lamarck, is found in the Eocene deposits at Grignon, Hauteville, and Ghent, and is not found, I believe, in higher beds than the Bracklesham in England. The other species are purely British. TZ. Prest- wichti, Ed. & H., is probably the oldest form, and 7’. suleata and T. Dixont are next in age. The remaining species come from the Barton beds. With the exception of the occurrence of 7’. swlcata in the Parisian Eocene, there is little to connect these Turbinoliz with others. The genus is not represented in the great Nummulitic coral-fauna of the South of France, the North of Italy, or of Sindh. A species is found in the Eocene of Alabama; and three species, characterized by very bad specimens, were determined from forms found in the Lower Oligocene deposits of Germany. The genus is extinct. The genus Leptocyathus is one of those artificial groups which surround the great genus T’rochocyathus. It is closely allied to Stephanocyathus, Seguenza ; and indeed the only distinction between these two genera is the distribution of the pali before certain septa. Doubtless some further information will enable those interested in the classification of the Zoantharia to make the genera Leptocyathus and Stephanocyathus mere subgenera of Trochocyathus. L, elegans is a very beautiful form ; and the structure of its base is a curious instance of symmetry and simplicity of structure, producing in a coral which doubtless was a dweller in deepish water and on an oozy bottom, great per- fection of ornamentation. There is a second species, Z. Atalayensis, D’Archiac, sp., from the Eocene of Biarritz ; but there is some doubt about its genus. The Trochocyathi of the British Eocene are insignificant species of the great genus which is so fully represented in the Sindhian and European Nummulitic series. I have noticed in my ‘ Supplement to the British Fossil Corals,’ Part I., that it is doubtful if 7. sinuosus was ever found in England, and I have described two new species. One of these, 7’. Austeni, Duncan, is the representative in the Brackles- ham deposits of 7’. elongatus, Ed. & H., of the Eocene of Quartier-du-Vit (Basses Alpes) ; but 7’. insignis, Duncan, so readily distinguishable by its costal ornamentation and wavy spino-granulose septa, is very solitary as regards its affinities. The Zrochocyathi commenced in the Jurassic period, culminated in the Miocene, and are extinct, being represented by the Cary- ophyllie of the Pliocene and recent coral-faune. There are several genera of perforate corals in the British Eocene. Four genera of these belong to the Hupsammide, one to the Turbinarine, and two to the Poritide. The Eupsammian genera are :— Stephanophyllia. Dendrophyllia. Balanophyllia. Stereopsammia. The Stephanophyllie are Cyclolitoid EHupsammide, and range from the White Chalk to the Pliocene. The Cretaceous species form a group readily distinguished from the Ter- B4 REPORT—1868. tiary forms ; and these have a calicular and columellary structure which forms them into a subgroup. The Eocene species is distantly allied to S. elegans from the Miocene of Tortona. ‘The genus is extinct. The Balanophyllia, from the Bracklesham beds, is readily distinguished from the Crag species by its having no epitheca. This is one of the oldest species of the genus, whose species are found also in the Paris Eocene, and in the Nummulitic strata of Port-des-Basques. The recent species are British, South African, and Pacific (20 to 80 fathoms). The new species, Dendrophyllia elegans, nobis, is one of the most beautiful corals ever discovered. The elegant branching and gemmation, the graceful costal curvature and granulation, and the symmetrical repetition of the septal cycles render the coral an object of great interest. Its nearest ally is D. gracilis, Kd. & H., of the Chinese seas, a dweller in twenty-five fathoms water. The Miocene and Plocene species of the genus are well marked ; and the recent species are found in the Mediterranean Sea, in the sea off Cadiz and Madeira, and in the Chinese, Pacific, and Australian seas. The most vigorous species are from Cadiz and Madeira, Dendrophyllia ramea living there in twenty-five to eighty fathoms. Stereopsammia is a genus with only one species; and this was determined from the study of a very good compound corallum in the Bracklesham beds. It is interesting to note that a genus appeared in the Upper Sicilian Ter- tiaries (and has many species in the Australian, New-Zealand, and Chinese seas, besides some off Panama and in the Pacific coral-sea, &c.) which is closely allied to Stereopsammia, for its only distinction is the existence of a columella in its species. Both the genera are very erratic members of their subfamily, for the peculiar Eupsammian direction of the septa is not noticed either in Stereopsammia or in Canopsammia. The aporose condition of the lower part of the corallites of Stereopsammia, and their perforated calicular ends, taken into consideration with the pecu- liarity of the septal direction, prove that the genus links the Hupsammine amongst the perforate corals with the Aporosa. The genus Dendracis has hitherto been little known. MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime described the first species, out of the Madrepora Gervilii of Defrance, from the Hauteville beds; but no species was known to be of British growth. Whilst examining the Dixon collection in the British Museum, I found a species, D. Lonsdalei, nobis. Very recently Reusshas described :— D. seriata, Castelgomberto ; D. mammillosa, Castelgomberto; D. Haidingeri, Oberburg and Java; and D. nodosa, Oberburg. D’Achiardi has also described a species from the Castelgomberto district. Lonsdale was correct in his diagnosis of his Porites panicea; and it is a most interesting species, for it is a true Porites and a perforate coral. The form has its septa less spiculate and more lamellate than is usual in the Porites, moreover the ecenenchyma is very decided. This Eocene species has thus characteristics of the genera Porites, Astreopora, and Litharea. Reuss has described Porites nummulitica, Oberburg ; P. minuta, Castel- gomberto ; P. imerassata, Java, tertiary. - This last species is closely allied to Porites panicea. Some years since, I described a Porites from the Lower (Hippurite) Lime- stone of Jamaica. Our knowledge of the genus, therefore, extends from the Lower Chalk to the present day. The Miocene forms and the recent are the most numerous. 3 et i HeLa teen creas lar. Suppunition undor tho skin NORE ithe whole back and sides whore the injostions had been made, Uleers in tho skin, Othor orcans normal, . ' or leathor to prove shoet body in fi | of urir : if m0 ] ry The de floor of through | Ons: eurial oint ; imate ried it to It will had, and with a y ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 201 or leather straps with buckles. If the dog be a male, means must be taken to prevent the urine from reaching the sponge. ‘This is effectually done by a sheet of thin india-rubber, laced round the posterior part of the shield and body in front of the penis, so as fairly to prevent the access of a single drop of urine. The whole apparatus was removed, washed and reapplied once in the twenty-four hours. The sponge was then weighed and placed in the shield dry. At the end of the period it was removed and weighed again, to ascertain the amount of bile. ‘Two sponges are necessary for observations on a single dog, each sponge used on alternate days. They must be cleaned, after the collection of bile, with great care. It was found best to wash them in dilute hydrochloric acid, in order that they might be thoroughlydisinfected, for putrid matter soon produces decomposition of the bile. The shield should be firmly secured on the animal to prevent its being moved. ‘The Committee have in only one instance found it necessary to muzzle a dog while it wore the apparatus. The dogs were kept in large cages, the lower half of the sides and entire floor of which consisted of sheet zinc. The floor sloped to a central hole, through which the urine was collected. The dogs were mostly taken out to the open air for a few hours daily. OBSERVATIONS TO DETERMINE HOW TAR Dogs ARE SUBJECT TO THE ACTION OF Mercury. The Committee had not proceeded far with their experiments, before it became evident that a preliminary investigation was necessary, in order to determine how far dogs are capable of being influenced by mercurials. Al- though in veterinary and other works it is admitted that this animal may be salivated, although Overbeck states that by means of frictions with mer- ceurial ointment he succeeded in producing marked salivation with spongy gums in three dogs out of five *, and Murray in his experiments with large doses of calomel also produced salivation in one dog f, the Committee were of opinion that further careful observations should be made on this point. Accordingly great pains were taken by Dr. Gamgee to produce salivation in two dogs, by means of inunction of mercurial ointment, during the winter and spring of 1867. The hair of the animal was shaved from the back, and daily frictions made with the hand on the naked skin with strong mercurial ointment. In one dog a drachm of the ointment was rubbed in daily for twenty-eight days, and in another for eight days. No marked symptoms were produced, nor was their health impaired. In the first of those dogs a most elaborate series of observations on the urine was made to determine whether that secre- tion was in any way influenced. These consisted of careful analyses before and after the inunction, but with a negative result. The frictions occasioned so much trouble and loss of time, and appeared to be attended with such little result, that it was resolved to adopt the more commodious method of subcutaneous injection of a solution of corrosive sub- limate. This investigation was undertaken by Dr. W. Rutherford, who car- ried it to a successful termination, as seen in Table I. It will be seen from Table I. that of the six dogs experimented on, three had, and three had not biliary fistula established. This selection was made with a view to ascertain whether or not the existence of a biliary fistula affected the action of the mercurial. Of the six dogs, five were salivated by * Mercur und Syphilis (Berlin, 1861), pp. 110-114. fT Transactions of Med. and Phys, Society, Bombay, 1841. p. ll. 202 REPORT—1868. the drug ; of these, three (Dogs A, B, and C) were small dogs without fistula, while two (Dogs KE and F) were large strong dogs with fistule. In dogs A and B the action of the drug upon the salivary glands was inferred from the occurrence of unusual wetness of the mouth merely ; while in dogs C, E, and F a stream of saliva was observed flowing from the mouth. In the three dogs without fistule—aged 5 (Dog B), 12 (Dog A), and 15 (Dog C) months respectively,—all of them small animals, decided salivation followed the administration of 4} grains of corrosive sublimate, extending over a period of eight days, to the dog aged 5 months ; of 12+ grains, extending over a period of eighteen days, to the dog 12 months old; and of 74 grains, extending over a period of nine days, to the dog 15 months old. In the two large strong dogs (Dogs E and F) with biliary fistule, much larger quantities of the drug were required to produce well-marked salivation. 19.4, grains, extending over a period of seven days, to dog F, aged 18 months, and 192 grains, extending over a period of thirteen days, to dog KE, aged 24 months. The dog which was not salivated (Dog D) wasa retriever 6 months old, which was poisoned by 13 grain of corrosive sublimate, given in two doses during twenty hours. , In all the six dogs a discharge of mucus from the nostrils was observed during the administration of the drug ; In some cases it preceded, in others it Was coincident with decided salivation. In dog D the nasal discharge was decided, although salivation was not observed. It can hardly fail to strike anyone that the doses required to produce sali- vation in these dogs are much larger than those usually required in the case of man. The dose required in the dog is, however, perhaps not nearly so great as Table I. makes it appear; for it must be remembered that a dog cannot, like a man, tell us when it feels unusual moisture in the mouth. When, therefore, we have noted salivation as having been produced, it has only been when the salivation had become very marked, giving rise to unusual wetness of the mouth, or to a stream of saliva flowing from it. In all the dogs, excepting dog D, the appetite became much impaired, and the breath remarkably feetid. In dogs A, C, and E the mucous membrane of the mouth became ulcerated. Mere sponginess of the gums was never observed. All the dogs, with the exception of dog D, became much emaciated. During the very decided action of the drug, blood appeared in the feces of all the dogs, excepting dog E. Profuse diarrhoea was produced in all the dogs without biliary fistule ; it was slight in the little dog D, while it was entirely absent in the other two dogs with fistulz, although these, like all the other dogs, were killed by corrosive snblimate. During the exhibition of the drug, the feeces in dog A changed from a light to dark brown, brownish yellow, and greenish brown; in dog B they changed from brown to greenish brown, greenish yellow, and slate-brown ; while in dog C they hardly underwent any change in colour. In dogs D and E there was no change in the colour, while in dog F they changed from a clay to a slate-colour: this dog, like the two previous ones, had a biliary fistula. Appearances found on Dissection. In all the dogs the mucous membrane of the stomach was found healthy. In all there were numerous bright red vascular patches found on the mucous membrane of the small intestine, extending from the pylorus to the ileo-colic valve. In dog B there were patches of lymph on the inner surface of the mucous membrane of the ilium. In dogs C and F this redness was most marked in the duodenum, but the orifice of the common bile-duct was not | redder than the other portions of the duodenum. In all the dogs, except LY pete oe ili ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 203 dog B, the mucous membrane of the large intestine was streaked with bright red lines running longitudinally throughout its entire length. In all the dogs, except dog D, there was unusual vascularity of the pan- creas, but in none was there any abnormal appearance of the salivary glands. In no case did the liver present any unusual appearance. These facts show that on the dog mercury has the same action as it exerts on man. Resvits oF THE HXPpERIMENTS MADE ON Dogs witH BrrrAry Fistunm to DETERMINE THE ACTION OF Murrcury As A CHOLAGOGUE. During the two years over which the Committee’s inquiries extended, forty- one dogs were subjected to the operation for establishing a biliary fistula. Of these, four died during its performance from the effects of chloroform. In four others the operation was not proceeded with after opening the peritoneum, in consequence of the impossibility of bringing the fundus of the gall-bladder in contact with the abdominal wall. The operation was completed in thirty- three cases, but from various causes, which the Committee consider it unne- cessary to detail minutely, satisfactory observations could only be carried on in nine dogs. These have been numbered consecutively from one to nine, but it has been thought better to arrange the numerous observations made upon them according to the preparation of mercury employed. Observations with Pil. Hydrargyrt. The first dog’ (No. 1) in which a biliary fistula was successfully established by the Committee was a healthy retriever about eighteen months old, weighing 18°5 kilogrammes, for which we are indebted to Mr. Nunneley of Leeds. The operation was performed on the 29th of May, 1867. The wound in the abdominal wall healed rapidly. Shortly after the operation the faeces became clay-coloured. The general health of the animal was excellent when on the 10th of June the apparatus for collecting the bile was applied, and the obser- yations recorded in the following Table (Table II.) were commenced. As the metrical system of weights is used in all the Tables with regard to everything except the doses of drugs, it may be of service to remind the English reader that— 1 gramme= 15-434 grains, 28°34 grammes =1 ounce, 1 kilogramme = 2°2 pounds. Tasix II.—First Series of Observations on Dog 1. Daily amount of Bile secreted without Mercury. 1 2 3 4 5 6 | For each 100 Weight x * Quantity of bile For each kilo- of Amount of food, in secreted in 24 gramme of dog there caBthice of dey || dog BESmunes: hours were secreted S000; Aner ce Date. ee . secreted ico T .*, | . . . . . . . . 1K: . Fluid} Bile | Bile || Fluid| Bile | Bile || Fluid} Bile | Bile ‘Kilogs. | Water. |Milk. Bread.) Meat.) 16. |solids,| salts. || bile. |solids.| salts. || bile. |solids.| salts. } \| —- - ||——|--—— 1867. || grms.|grms.| grm. ||grms.| grm. | grm. |/grms.| grms. | grm. Junell.|| 18°5 || None. | 567 | 170°1 | 283°5 || 150°4 | 8°843 | 1:221|| 8°12 | 0478} 0°066)) 65°5 | 3°85 | 0°53 » 12. ” ” ” ” 125°0 | 8-400 | 1:355 » 1.| Frese - rs is 757 | 5:791 | 0°836|| 4-09 | 0°313] 0-045 |} 32:9 | 2:52 | 0:36 % 21.| 1 gs » ” ei 121°8 | 6°954 | 1:280 3 18.]| te cos ” ” » 115:0 | 7-290 | 1°345 » 1. ” ” » »» || 130-7 | 8-456 | 1520 DON GaN rrisibevvesachuas-eacwusunresydyattd-dedsvacatuatange 119°76} 7°622 | 1°259|} 647 | 0-412 0-068 | 52°18 | 3°32 | 0°548 Nove.—The amount of dry food consumed daily during the above period amounted to 22°5 grammes. ” » = for each kilogramme of dog amounted to 12°3 grammes. 204 REPORT-—1868. The above scries of observations was undertaken with a view to ascertain the average amount of bile secreted daily previous to the administration of mercury to the animal. It was thought necessary to collect the bile for six consecutive days before calculating its average daily amount; for, as is evident from the Table, the secretion was very inconstaut. Thus on June 15th the quantity secreted was only about a half of what it was upon the 11th. In the above Table three days (the 13th, 14th, and 16th) have been omitted, owing to a portion of the bile having been lest. ‘This resulted from slipping of the apparatus. Despite every care in its adjustment, it was some- times so shifted by the movements of the animal that the canula was dragged out of the fistula, and the bile consequently lost. The average daily amount of bile secreted during the six days was 119-76 grammes of fluid bile, 7-622 grammes of bile solids, and 1:259 gramme of bile salts*. The daily amount of food consumed during the whole period was uniform. This was due to the fact that for some days previous to the com- mencement of the bile-collections the dog was offered an excess of food; the amount consumed was estimated, and this amount was given on subsequent days, and always entirely eaten by the animal. With a view to assimilate all the Tables, a column for water is introduced, although in this case none was given, In this and all the following Tables, the amount of fiuid bile, bile solids, and salts secreted is estimated with regard to cach kilogramme-weight of the animal, and each 100 grammes of dry food consumed by it. In columns 5 and 6 of the foregoing Table these estimates are made on the days when the maxi- mum and minimum quantities of bile were secreted; and the avérage quantities given at the foot of these columns are, in this and all the subsequent Tables, estimated from the average quantities of columns 2, 3, and 4. Columns 5 and 6 have a special physiological interest, and will be afterwards referred to at length. For the present the attention of the reader need not be directed to column 5, for the experience of the Committee has shown that there is no relation between the amount of bile secreted and the weight of the animal ; the relation between the amount of food consumed and the quantity of bile secreted is not a very close one either (as the foregoing Table is sufficient to show), yet in some cases it seems to be such as to render necessary its being taken into account when the influence of any agent upon the biliary secretion is under consideration +. During all the observations on this animal, however, the same amount of food was taken daily; therefore any variation in the biliary secretion cannot be ascribed to variation in the dict, so that the relation between the sccre- tion of bile and amount of food may in this case for the present be disre- garded. On the 19th of June it was found necessary to discontinue the observations, as the pressure of the apparatus had caused ulceration of the skin over the sternum, and the fistula had assumed a very irritable appearance. The wound having healed, and the fistula become more healthy, the observations were resumed on the 28th of June, and continued for other six consecutive days. The results are given in the following Table :— * By the term bile sa/¢s in this and all subsequent Tables is meant the inorganic solids of the bile left after its incineration. t To give completeness to the Tables the absolute amount of dry food taken daily or on some particular day, together with the amount consumed per kilogramme of dog, has been given. ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON TilE BILIARY SECRETION. Taste IL1.*—Second Series of Observations on Dog 1. Bile secreted without Mercury. 205 Daily amount of 1 2 3 4 5 ‘ - - : - For each 100 Weight “ F Quantity of bile For each kilo- : of Amount of food, in secreted in 24 gramme of dog there area ther of dry dog. Brammmes: hours. were secreted See AHS Wie Date. ee) secreted “a oe A Fluid| Bile | Bile || Fluid} Bile | Bile || Fluid] Bile | Bile Kilogs.|| Water.) Milk. | Bread.| Meat.|| 13). solids,| salts. || bile. |solids.| salts. |] bile. |solids.| salts. 1867. grms. | grms. | grms. || grms.|grm. | grm. || grms.| grms.| grms. June 29.|| 16:8 None.| 567 1701 | 253°5 |) 106°2 | 3865 | 1-15 » 80.) ” ” ” ” 148°0 T T July 1. i . si 3 (Wll75 |431 | 1-116 ree oh 2 ” ” 1851 | 6°60 2°010 |} 11°01 | 0°392] 0°119 |} 80°6 | 2°87 | 0°87 Wee ad x os Fi 816 | 2°978 | 0°824|| 4°85 | 0-177] 0°049 || 85°5 | 1:29 | 0°35 » 4 ” ” ” ” 149°5 | 5°80 1615 LEER e iene st cos wees vais ncwsser'scxcesssveiseaneaace 131°31| 4:71 1°343 || 7°82 | 0:28 | 0:079 || 57-21] 2°05 | 0°58 The amount of dry food consumed daily during the above period amounted to 229°5 grammes. ” ” ” for each kilogramme of dog amounted to 13°6 grammes. * In columns 5 and 6 the maximum, minimum, and mean quantities are calculated; the last, however, are estimated from the mean quantities of column 4. + Not determined. This second series of observations was again directed to ascertain the normal secretion of bile, in the hope that the secretion would become more constant ; the Table, however, shows that this expectation was not realized, the variation in the daily quantity of bile was indeed even greater. Owing to the experience gained in this experiment, all subsequent observations directed to ascertain the normal secretion of bile previous to the administra- tion of a drug were seldom prolonged beyond four or five days. Table ITI. shows that the average amount of fluid bile secreted daily during this series of observations was slightly above the average amount secreted during those in Table II.; but it shows that there was a great diminution in the bile solids. The average quantity during the first series was 7622 grammes, during the second series only 4-71 grammes. This was entirely due to a falling off in the amount of the organic constituents of the bile; for the Tables show that during the second series the inorganic solids (bile salts) were somewhat greater in amount than they were during the first series of observations. The animal had lost weight to the extent of 1:7 kilogramme, but was nevertheless in excellent health generally, although the irritable state of the fistula rendered necessary an interrup- tion of the observations until the 8th of July. As it seemed impossible to obtain a better standard of comparison than was afforded by Table III., it was resolved to commence the administration of mercury. Tuble IV. shows the results. Five grains of Pil. Hydrargyri were given as one dose daily during eight days ; the pill was always given twenty-four hours previous to the collection of the bile. On July 11th, the apparatus having shifted, the bile escaped. On the other seven days, however, the collections were perfect, and the results show that the administration of the drug was accompanied by slight diminution (3-71 grammes) in the average quantity of fluid bile secreted daily, and a slight augmentation (0-45 gramme) in the average quantity of bile solids. This slight increase in the bile solids cannot be regarded as a proof of the power of blue pill to increase the biliary secretion, when the extreme variations of the secretion in this case are taken into account. In favour 206 REPORT—1868. of the idea it may, indeed, be alleged that on July 14th (Table IV.) more fluid and solid bile was secreted under the influence of blue pill than had been secreted on any day without it; but as a counterpart to this it can be said that on July 17th (Table IV.) the amount of fluid and solid bile was less than it had ever been on any previous day. On the whole, therefore, it may be concluded that in this case there was no evidence that the admi- nistration of blue pill affected the biliary secretion. Taste [V.*—Third Series of Observations on Dog 1. Amount of Bile secreted in twenty-four hours when 5 ers. of Pil. Hydrargyri were given daily. 1 2 3 4 5 6 For each 100 Wei it Tor each kilo- oO Amount of food, in || Quantity of bile ammes of dr grammes, 5 secreted in 24 ||8tamme of dog there food there wae Date. || 208: | hours. were secreted secreted | |Fluid | Bile | Bile || Fluid] Bile | Bi ia| Bi i 3 oy een ‘ile || Fluid} Bile | Bile Kilogs.|| Water. |Milk. Bread,| Meat, bile. |solids.| salts. || bile. |solids.| salts. |} bile. |solids.| salts. Tuly aa Wddesltuet iumual ean | grms.| grms.| grms.|| grms./grm. | grm. || grms.| grms.| grm. » 10. ” ” ” > |} 100 4:27 | 1:10 ” 11 ” ” ” ” | ” 12. ” ” ” ” 89 3°729| 1:023 » LB. ” ” ” ” 170°6| 6°19 174 “2 = 9 ” ” ” ak 8 9 ta 13°6 | 0°39 | 0°152]] 88°8 | 5:32 | 0°99 ” . ” ” ” » || 139 5°86 62 » 16. » ” ” >» | 1276 513 | 140 » 17 ” ; ” » || 67°0) 286 | O73 |] 4-46 | 0°19 | 0-042] 29:19] 1-246] 0°31 IM CAML sac canes ccraminassiteteepacatniseheneate-Ttandes as ! 127°6| 5:16 | 1:38 || 8°50 | 0344 | 0-09 |] 556 | 2°24 | 0601 Notre.—The amount of dry food consumed daily during the above period amounted to 229°5 grammes. ” ” FN for each kilogramme of dog amounted to 15°27 grammes. * In columns 5 and 6 the maximum, minimum, and mean quantities only are calculated. The last, however, are estimated from the mean quantities of column 4. The above-mentioned doses of blue pill did not purge the animal. On July 17th the observations were interrupted on account of renewed ulceration over the sternum by the pressure of the apparatus. At that date the animal was in excellent health. The observations were resumed after an interval of six days. The results are given in the following Table :— Taste V.t—Fourth Series of Observations on Dog 1. Amount of Bile secreted in twenty-four hours when 5 grs. of Pil. Hydrargyri were given daily. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ope . For each 100 Weight = = For each kilo- Amount of food, in | Quanty of bile rammes of ° grammes. + secreted in 24 gramme ofdog there|) food there tes Date. || dog | hours. were secreted deevated iy eae | _, || Fluid| Bile | Bile |] Fluid! Bile | Bile |/Fluid | Bile | Bile Kiloge. || W spa ts Bread.) Mect.!! 5,i16. |solids.| salts. || bile. |solids.| salts.|| bile. |solids.| salts. = ——~—-|-—— ---| — =|! 1867. | grms. | gms. m. || grms. | grms.| grms.|) grms. | grms. | grms. July 33.) 15 |] None.| 846] ace | 295-6 |! 931-9] 755 | Tost. * = 24. 4 rs a fi » {| 56-7] 1:61 | lost. » 25) sy 5, iu i » || 950] 286 | 0-921 oe ar | Poe a sy a » || 49:1] 173 | lost. on | hae “ 3 is » || S82} 1-41 | 0-443 28.1), ” ” ” » || 1750] 4°88 | 1°66 » 29.1) 14-9 ie cs - » |i €93! 2°64 | 0-691 + In this and all subsequent Tables the amcunt of medicine said to be given on any day was always given during the twenty-four hours previous to the bile collection of the same date. 7 ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 207 Pil. Hydrargyri was again given. Extraordinary variations occurred in the amount of bile obtained during its exhibition, and the quantities appear to show that the secretion of bile was diminished; but they are in truth ren- dered valueless by the circumstance that a considerable quantity of bile was separated by the kidneys, owing, most probably, to its free exit by the fistula having been interfered with. The animal was never purged until July 30th, when it twice passed a considerable quantity of liquid feces. Although it did not lose weight to any notable extent during the period embraced by Table V., its strength diminished. In order that the dog might rally, the observations were suspended, and a more liberal diet allowed. It grew gra- dually weaker, however, and died on the 5th of August. On dissection a layer of recent lymph was found over the whole surface of the peritoneum. The cause of the peritonitis was not evident *. Obsérvations with Calomel. The second dog (No. 2), with a biliary fistula, was a full-grown half-bred collie, weighing 15-6 kilogrammes. The operation was performed on the 5th of September, 1867, The wound healed perfectly, and collection of the bile was begun on the 20th of September. ‘The general health of the animal was, however, indifferent ; its appetite was uncertain, and its general strength feeble. When the apparatus was applied, the animal appeared to be much distressed by its weight, and by the constriction of the thorax and abdo- men, which its proper application rendered necessary. After the operation the fseces became clay-coloured. - During seven days, from September 21st to 27th inclusive, observations - were made with a view to determine the normal secretion of bile: the results are given in the following Table (Table VI.) :— Tante VI.—First Series of Observations on Dog 2. Daily amount of Bile secreted without Mercury. 1 2 3 4 5 6 For each 100 Weight p Quantity of bile For each kilo- oO Amount of food, in secreted in 24 _|/gramme of dog there Pred ther ae Say a grammes, ° (pater arciearerad ood there were Date. 4) a secreted A || Fluid | Bile | Bile || Fluid} Bile | Bile Fluid| Bile | Bile Kaloge.|| Water. Milk.| Bread.| Meat. bile. |solids.| salts. |} bile. |solids.} salts. || bile. |solids.) salts. 1867. germs. | grms.| grm. || grms,| grm. | grm. | orms, grms, | grms. Sept. 21./| 15:6 |} None. |56£ | None. | None.|/13 7:29 | L41 || 8333 | 0°467] 0°09 || 230°0 | 12°9 | 2°51 eels » [564 2 » ||.81 | 4:48 | 0°907]| he ecura tely nojted. | tate) ment in book} is barat hie es Pe ann ae =p scar cely lany foo|d ta- 94°15 | 6072} 1:205 zen.” | (24 None. |225°6| None. |None.|| 94°70) 5°750} 1:01 9 15°6 ” 282 Pn 3102 || 78°80} 5°92 | 1:25 73°9| 560] 118 ors ” 197-4 2 225 62°50| 5:70 | 1:08 | iiss Has onlly takjena litt!lemilk|/ 35°50 | 1°99 | 0-436 || 227 | 0°12 0:027 Mean for seven days ....ss.csscsssscsssestesseeeeeees || sa-s6| 531 | 1-042 || 527 | 0-34 | 0-066] | Nore.—On the 25th September the dry food consumed amounted to 1057 grammes, or 67 grms, per kilog. of dog; on the 21st, 56°4 grms., or 3°6 grms. per kilog. of dog. In this Table, as well as in several others, it will be observed that the amount of bile collected was greater on the first than on other days—a rule, however, by no means invariable. The occurrence was probably due to the canula having permitted a freer exit to the bile than the fistulous opening * For further observations on the action of Pil. Hydrargyri see Tables TX. and X, 208 REPORT—-1868. which the contraction of the recti abdominis always tended to close. At first, therefore, after the introduction of the canula, a large quantity of bile pent up in the ducts may have escaped, or the larger quantity may have been due to increased biliary secretion. The average quantity of bile secreted daily by dog 2 during the seven days embraced by Table VI. was of fluid bile 82-46 grammes, of bile solids 5°31 grammes, of bile salts 1-042 gramme. During the whole period the animal took a very variable quantity of food; on two days the amount was not accurately recorded; the average quantity of dry food consumed daily could not therefore be estimated. The biliary secretion was, when com- pared with the amount of food, extremely variable, however, as column 6 of the Table suffices to show. The general health of the animal had not materially suffered by the con- tinued application of the apparatus, although at at first occasioned so much distress. It was now decided to observe the effects of calomel. Table VII. (p. 209) gives the results. During the six days embraced by Table VIIL. calomel was given in- ternally in varying doses. The effect of the medicine upon the general health of the anjmal was very decided ; it grew daily weaker and thinner, it lost its appetite, had attacks of vomiting on October 2nd and 3rd, and died on October 5th, apparently from inanition. Purgation, foetor of the breath, or ulceration of the gums were never produced by the drug, nor was there any evidence’of salivation. On October 2nd the bile was lost, and on the 8rd, two days before the death of the animal, and when it took no food, only 2-2 grammes of bile were secreted. An average has been taken from the first four days during which the animal took food. The average quantity of fluid bile secreted during these four days was 60:02 grammes. The average quantities of bile solids and salts have not been estimated seeing that they were not ascertained on September 29th. The Table shows that under the action of the calomel less bile was secreted than there was previous to its exhibition ; but as the amount of calomel given had seriously, indeed fatally, injured the health of the animal, it was determined to try in the next case the effect of minute and frequently repeated doses. Dog 3 was a young healthy retriever, weighing 12-9 kilogrammes. The operation for biliary fistula was performed on the 13th of October, 1867. A few hours afterwards the dog pulled the india-rubber tube out of the fistula, and the external opening of the fistula closed, so that on October 15th the fistulous opening had to be reestablished by an incision. The wound in the abdominal wall healed satisfactorily, the feces were clay-coloured, and the animal was in excellent health when the collection of bile was begun, October, 26th 1867. It was decided to observe the effects of very small doses of calomel (7, of a grain) frequently repeated. The bile was col- lected on four successive days previous to, and on four consecutive days during the exhibition of the drug without any break between the two series. Table VIII., p. 209, gives the results of both series of observations. During the four days previous to the administration of the calomel the animal secreted daily on an ayerage 70°62 grammes of fluid bile, 3-792 grammes of bile solids, and 0-83 gramme of bile salts. The health of the inimal during these days was excellent. — a 209 ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. ‘Ft Wor; OpeuUr Moed SEY MoTyelNoTeO OU 4eY} ({TUO Aep oUO UO UOHV) [[VUIS OS HBA UOAIT su AmMorOU OY} TOYA PoTIMsU0d pooy Jo yuMOUTE OTT, ‘dop jo ‘dopry aod ‘sur13 g7.6 10 “suAd 6.61] 0} poyunome sup moj 481yF OY} UO ATrep poumnstoo AyHUeNb uvour oy} {Sop Jo ‘Sorry aed ‘sutzd g.0] 10 *OAOGE Sv STTId XIg || *** *9A0qe sv BTTId Uoaqano iT aAoge 8B s{[Id uadag |} “yore TOOMJod [BALM S.MOY UB TIM ‘OUT BAB OO OATS oAOM {JeuO[vo Jo uread B JO YIJTOA\-oU JurteryzUO0d yore ‘syd usAeg *UOATS SBAL [OUIO[UO aIOJog, 10-0 | G00 | 9L-¢ TIT.0 GLF-0 | 68-8 960-0 | PST-0 | 96:4 $900 | £66-0 | LPG G00-0 | 080-0 | OL-T 460-0 | 9LP-0 | 09-8 ‘soururedd [pT 0} poyunome paumnsuod pooy Aap ay} *y4ez pus ‘YILZ “YI9S 19240}99 UD—"ALON “* SUOTJBAIOSGO JO SAT.108 PUOdAS 944 JO WBA! . “ “ ee o ‘auUo NT] ‘auO NT |-auoW pag 68-0 | ZeL-8 | Ge0L 9.0 | 19-4 | 69F 98-T | 92-9 | ¢80T SLT | 615 | 6.68 oF.0 | 88.1] 98 €8.0 [261-2 [29-01 09-0 | Fo-8 | $89 160] 90-T | & | 9eT | PL-9 | TIT 6LT | 63h | 16 | P88 | “OUON | 799 “O10 J GEL ¢€ 6 ‘T ‘AON iy “ 03 ‘PO ** SUOTPBALOS { -(O oAoqe oy} JO WeoyT “ “ “ “U0 NT 6-21 “63 "86 “LG ‘96 “PO a Se ee Eee er ee bee hee eh L =) g 1 € G "WOATS SBM TOMMOTE,) Toye pue oLOZoq pojor0s oTIg{ Jo yuo Ape? *E Soy uo suoywArosqQ—'TITA CTAVY, 4 Jo ‘Sopry sod ‘sunad og.¢ 10 “sua co. )) ‘dop jo * lopLy aod soururedd G.¢ 10 ‘sourUIeAD 9.Fg “ “ “ “ “ “ W08 0} poymnome paumsuos pooy Arp oy} ‘ydag 484 WO—TLON I es *surnad p= Anup oyy ur oorng suread ZG ‘sured ZT =Aup oy} Ur soury xis surRad Z *SULBID Q= ALP OY) UL sOUTLY AMoy suIwAd Z|) + “Se 100 | 680 | 65 9F-0 | P20 | LO8-F ud nuts "sua *sq[8S |"SprTos “eT Ol | OL | PIU “suread 9= Anup OY} UL SOUT} DOTY. SUIVIO |) ZL.7 6-01! &POIT ‘surmdd g = Lup oyy ur suvead 7% ao eh ail: ‘surmid g=Aup oy) ur souny oonyy survAd Z|! 61.0 | eLP | gL “BUS | “BUS | SULLD “sqy@s |"SpIfOs) “aTIq ONE | ON | PML ‘HAATS JOUIOTVD Jo JunoUTYy | paqodoas | @10M a10Y] POoT poqoaoas a10M aaoyy dop Jo ournre.13 | Aap jo sourmmad OOT YoRe LOT L 9 1868, “HOAIS SBAL [OMLOTED WOYAl pozoroos OTT Jo Junowe {peg “zg So uo suoreaosq, -O[ Pf youa rosy g Ny O jo SOLLIG puossg—’ CO ee & ILA @TaV I, *sfep amog qsay Surmp AyQUMb uvayy 60-09 oo ore ab “ “ ‘9u0u “ P-L |I'e nae se | sagorp “ “« 29 “ an 7% “ G80 | 91-6 | ¢.cg loon) “ |g.gcg} esate | gente “Yo ITT | 69-9 | Logiaece | “ lot] Deane | Kel: aaa a ** | @L ||eett) “ jeege| be | hooey 19.0 | $9.8 9.19 || eUON| *aUONT | OPE] ‘ouoyT |] FFT |I'9z “4dlag) sons | 80009 | ssund *L98T : “sprpos| * , one | arr | prety (ONE | Pete [tre x098.A4 so Te rental *sourmmnad op Beek 7G CMBEnenuas ur ¢ 00: 0 yunour z aTtq Jo AqryuUNe F poy go qunomy = ays MA 210 j REPORT—1868. On October 30th seven pills, each containing ;4, of a grain of calomel, were given with an hour’s interval between each. On October 31st seven pills, on November Ist fourteen pills, and on November 2nd six pills were administered in the same way as above mentioned.’ The effect on the general health was very marked. Soon after the admi- nistration of the drug was begun the appetite failed, and the animal took no food of any kind during three of the four days. . The strength became rapidly exhausted, and the animal died on November 3, apparently from inanition. No salivation, foetid breath, ulceration of gums, or purgation were produced by the mcdicire. The average of the second series of observations shows that during the four days on which the calomel was given the secretion of bile was not influenced. It was almost exactly the same in the second as during the first period, thus distinctly showing that the calomel cannot be said to have affected it at all. Tt is also to be observed that although during the second four days the animal took food only once, the amount of bile secreted was on an average very nearly the same as during the first four days when it ate well. This might at first sight be considered as supporting the notion that mercury increases the biliary secretion. But were it true that in the present case the mercury had kept up the secretion notwithstanding the diminution in the food, then cer- tainly it ought to increase the secretion when a due supply of food is taken ; for it cannot be held that the influence of food is anything but highly fayour- able to the secretion. The results given in Table LX. will show that such is not the case. Dog 4 was a healthy collie, about eighteen months old, weighing 19 kilogs. The operation for biliary fistula was performed on the 19th of October, 1867. The wound in the abdominal wall healed slowly. As the fistulous opening was very irritable, the canula was not introduced. Instead of the canula and india-rubber bag previously employed, a sponge was used to collect the bile ; it was secured in a tin box below the fistulous opening. The feces became clay-coloured soon after the fistula was established. The general health of the animal was excellent. when the observations re- corded in Table IX. p. 211, were begun. The bile was collected for five consecutive days previous to the administration of mercury, in order to ascertain the average amount secreted daily. This was : of fluid bile 67-1 grammes, of bile solids 3:592 grammes, of bile salts 0-842 gramme. At the end of this period the dog was in excellent health. On November 8th the administration of mercury was begun. During the twenty-four hours previous to the collection of bile on that day, ten pills, each containing one-twelth of a grain of calomel, were given, one pill at a time, with an hour’s interval between each. On the next day twelve such pills were given. On November 10th ten grains Pil. Hydrargyri were admi- nistered in one dose. On the 11th and 12th no mercury was given. On the 13th the ten grains of Pil. Hydrargyri were repeated. On the 14th nine calo- mel pills were given as above; and on the last day of the observations the mercury was withheld. During the five days on which calomel or blue pill was administered in the above modes, the amount of: bile secreted was diminished to nearly a half of what it was in the period preceding the administration of the mereury ; and this, although nearly as much food was consumed during as before the exhi- bition of the drug. Moreover, during the second period, the average amount of bile scereted was, on the whole, greater on the days when no mercury was Ee 211 ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. ‘Sop jo oummvasopry tod ‘sum8 10.9 10 ‘SourmMAd O.9pT 07 poyUNOWL ported ysay oy} Sump poumsuod poor Sap Jo yunowes oSvroav oyg, “Sop jo ourureadopiy ded soururers g.g do ‘soururvd Z.J9T 0} poyUMoUe ported say oy} SuLIMp pournsuod pooy Arp Jo yunOUTE asv10Av IY E— ALON /uaats seat Kamo 6a0| set] s1-7z|| 220-0] 660.0 | ger |loet-o | ete-tjorce ||7r-se¢ | ro |] cee | F968 | Cnomawun shop loay ayy Jo wea *{amoar0ur ON vee ose vee wee tee wee “qsory OFS 0.CF “ “ “ “ ane cl “ smoy Arado Tid euo Suess JEewOTLo JO wad B Jo YTOMy-ou0 Surumynoo yowo ‘stpid ourNy aa * = me os 92:0 | 00-1] 8-LTx|| “ « “ « +r ‘wots ASavapAE “Ta sured OT ||“ a ‘3 ~~ ll $8.0] €8-T| O-F8x|| ue “ es lets TOALS Aamoaout On a Co oan tee PGL0 10-2 0.8¢ “ «ec “ “ ‘BL “ u90Ats Agmmoreut On vas vale “a on oe nee 72.0 1f-Z| O-Gh “ “ec “ “ tee by i “ ‘WOATS pahFavapsH ‘Tea Stead OT || 900-0 | 8h0-0/Sz2-8 {000-0} £00-0 | g9.0 || 10-0 | 90-0] GaTx|| “ “ « “ vs lor « “aAoqR su syd AATOMT, soe woe eee ee ee oo. 9¢.0 F&h.3 O-LT* “ “ “ 7 eee 6 “ smoy AroAe Tid auo ¢ euopBo jo urea v Jo YIy[aA4-on0 Surmrequoa yowo ‘uoars syd wagl| 69.0 | 119-2] F8-TS|| s¢0.0|¢2%0 | cr. || TOT | I-F] O9Lx||FSee | F9¢ || ase] F9ee || SST |/'s “AON 02.0 | SFI-Z| ST-0F || FF0-0| 9FT-0 | ecg || P80 | Z6o-¢] T-L9 || F-9Ee | 96-92 || See | FSGe [PT WRENN OSE-0 | 1GS-T |808-82 || 420-0) LIL-0 | 81-6 || PIS-0 | €@-6} oF iL ( “ 3 apes : 06-0 | 08:8] 0.6L || “ «1! gee on woays sea AmMoxOUE OIF |! ceo. gore | ee.02| 900|1¢c0| 19% || v1 | shr| ess || “ | 99 || roe] “ ig ot 18-0 | F8-8 one “ a Le € a 68-0 | #88] STL || F . Fa 988 5 suns | sunt | ‘sunt3 |) aad | tured | sunr8 || ‘urd | ‘suas | sud PE) GUL eae ee 8 ost “syqes |-sprpos| -optq || -s77us | -sprpos| -apeq || -s97es |-spryos] ‘orrq |), ; : ! ONE | OMA | PMN || Ona OTH pug ote aa pmyyy || 2?° | Pete || STEAT] “TOPE ssoTry ‘maa1d Lmoaoyy Jo yuMour poyeiges " F ‘078 3 W 34 W ATOM BLT] POO Pe he =e pice 33 Sanoy lsoudamad sop Aqp Jo sourared. WSOP J Xs ria Umberesoes Ur ‘poos jo yunoury f° QOT Yous a0y7 “OTT Wea? LOH aTiq Jo ApyULNy ; aliens L 9 g 7 $ Fa ii “WATS oFOM LASIeIPATY “[Iq PUL TOWMOTLO Joye puv oLOJoq poyouoos optg Jo yunowe Lpeq “Ff Soq. wo suorywasiosqQ—XI {TV Q2 212 REPORT—1868. given than on the other days. No purgation or any signs of specific action were produced by the mercury ; but shortly after its first administration the strength of the animal began to decline. Sores, produced by the pressure of the apparatus, formed upon the back, in consequence of which the observations were interrupted on November 15th. The appetite failed, and the animal became so much emaciated that it was killed on the 28th of November. It is evident that in this case the mercury diminished the biliary secretion, and it is remarkable that it did so without impairing the appetite, and without producing purgation. In the foregoing experiments purgation had never been produced by the mercurials while the bile was being collected ; it seemed, therefore, desirable to ascertain the effect upon the biliary secretion of purgative doses. This was done in the following experiment. Dog 5 was a strong collie, twelve months old, weighing 16-7 kilogrammes. The operation for biliary fistula was performed on the 2nd of June, 1868. The fistula became satisfactorily established, but on June 28th the dog escaped. It was reobtained on the 11th of July. The fistulous opening had closed, the dog was jaundiced, conjunctiva and skin yellow, urine loaded with bile. As the freces were, however, clay-coloured, an attempt was made to open the fundus of the gall-bladder. ‘This was found distended with a thick, gelatinous, colourless fluid like white of egg. About ten ounces of this fluid at once flowed from the opening. It was not in the least tinged with bile. The glairy fluid continued to drop from the opening for several hours, after which the bile began to flow, and continued to do so. In ten days every symptom of jaundice had disappeared, the feces were clay-coloured, and the wound was sufficiently healed to permit of observa- tions being begun. In Table X., p. 213, are recorded the results obtained before, during, and after purgative doses of calomel and Pil. Hydrargyri were given, The bile was collected perfectly on six days in order to ascertain the normal secretion. The average daily quantity during this period was 357-4 grammes of fluid bile, 13:11 grammes bile solids, and 3-12 grammes of bile salts. During the first four days the dog was in excellent health. On July 26th it was seized with a smart attack of diarrhea, On that day both the fluid and solid portions of the bile were diminished. The diarrhcea did not recur after the 26th. On the 27th the collection of bile was rejected, owing to urine having mingled with it. On the 28th it had risen toa little above the average quantity. Twenty-four hours previous to the collection of the bile on the 29th, ten grains of blue pill were administered. During the three succeeding days ten grains of calomel were given daily in one dose on each occasion twenty-four hours previous to the bile collection. The dose of blue pill and the first dose of calomel produced slight purgation, while decided purgation followed the administration of the two last doses. There was a marked diminution in the biliary secretion during this period, the average daily amount being: of fluid bile 272°67 grammes, of bile solids 7-78 grammes, of bile salts 2:06 grammes. It will be seen from the Table that this diminution is quite as marked in the solid as in the fluid bile. ‘Tae high amount which the fluid bile attained when ten grains of blue pill were given might be supposed to indicate an increase in the secretion. The variations in the amount of solid constituents of the bile are, however, those 213 ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. ‘Sop Jo ourureasopry aod soururvad ¢7.6] 10 ‘Sourmtvad g.cog sear Afvep pournstoo pooy Arp Jo unm wears oy} Tysndny 07 6g 4{np wor “Sop Jo oumvarSopry sod souuresd F-€3 Jo ‘sourmtvts g.Fgg sv ATep pouNsuod pooy Arp Jo FuNOULe UEUt 9Yy gg An ‘uals Ammotour ON |! 91.9 | 98g §-£6 ST-0 | 667-0 | P-61 || €F-2 | 6¢-L x “18.696 : a1 [hes ‘uaatd Ammodour ON |) fos | Seale “Wl sory | 11.8 8906 | LIFT |L-968] 99¢ “Soong Gatly; { sup ¢ : FL9-0 | F2E | G68 || 161-0 | 96-0 | FLT |] 908 | eL-L |L9-c2¢|)c-010 | eeLT |seer] 99¢ || 99¢T [14 340 ty ( UvoTT *uoesmd poprep $odoqe sv UAATS [aTUOTLO suLeIT OT 6.9 eres 99¢ F926 99¢ < BCL |r sny ‘uoedind poploap {aaoqe sv UeATs ToWIOTvo SUTRAS OT 68-9 | 0.6ea || crzr | bs |Lbez « ws Ite ‘noryedaind 4ysrs {axoqe su WAALS ToULOTeO sUTvAT OT TL | 1-66 || 9.906 | 6-E8T leeze « 1ST |rog “ ‘uoresind yy sts ‘Lep-04 ayiq Jo woroaT]oo 9y} OF snorsoad sanoy anoj-Aquosy woatd pid ontq sureas QT 62-6 | &0 0 ec6p| 99 6ST |/"62 sme! ‘ported oaoqe oy} dutamp waars Amoaout oy Ther. 9 ¥-60¢ eee 96-91 WEE “YyTBoY poos ur Soq 29:21 99g oe €-91 isa“ “posed suy vayraercy ase 6 eat oe | ‘BoyeIp pepwog 08-21 “ “ oot tion“ “yyTeay poos ur dog 8L-FIL 99¢}| 99g B91 jc MEEEM POOR CrzOtT 066 | FolEl] “ “« lr.9¢¢| 6206 || #9T |rPo “ “yaTeey pood ut Soc 0&1 | Stes |] “ we a :: M9T jee“ “yaeoy pood ur Bq |! 98.9 | 00.7 | 2.07 |] Z6T-0 196-0 | L9-F@ || TG-&_|90-91 | GIF} 8-906 | F926 | 99S] 99g LOT |e Ane “us | surtd | suas || “utd | ura | ‘sured || surg | ‘suas | surat “R981 SS a a a a rel | el [pene (ce pps Bel he ae *SITBS |'SPITOS) “OT |) *897BS | “SPIOS) “OTtq || “s7[Us | sprfos} ‘aztq ||, : : 5 : one | one | pmne|| ona | ota |pmnr|| one | ena | prmper|| “APT | PPP [eT tore 'sAorrsL ; pajaaoas 5 3 So ayUq SUOT}BATOSY : paqaaoes ara SATOT j sop O pica Beene A190} Op Jo oururerg} FG UL pojeaioes ut ‘p on eer ie 007 Yous 20,7 - O[LL yore 207 aTtq Jo ApiQuENy FSO M St Le SCE iia a a a a x 5 ZL 9 g v ts G I “WAATS OTM AIMoIOTT Jo sosop oatyeSmd aoe pu orogoq poyores oft Jo Junot Apreq *¢ soy wo suoHeAIsqQ—'X TTAV], 214 " REPORT—1868. which are of paramount importance in the present inquiry, and the dimi- nution of these on the 29th is unmistakeable. The bile was finally collected for two days, August 2nd and 3rd, on which no mercury was given. There was no purgation on these days, and the amount of bile secreted suddenly increased. Though the amount was not nearly so great as before mercury was given, it was nevertheless much above the last two days during its administration. Previous to the exhibition of mercury the feces were of a clay-colour, mixed with slate-coloured patches. During and on the two days after the mer- cury was given they were more uniformly slate-coloured. During the whole experiment the health of the animal was excellent, neither the diarrhcea nor the mercurial purgation seemed to affect it. This series of observations is most conclusive as to the influence of purgative doses of calomel upon the biliary secretion. Under their influence there was a steady diminution in the secretion, and the moment the administration of the drug was suspended, the secretion underwent an increase. It is important to observe that in this case purgation, whether spontaneous as on the 26th, or as the result of mercurials, diminished the secretion of bile. Other observations will be given further on (see Tables XVII., XVIII., and XIX.), which show that when induced by other drugs it likewise diminishes the biliary secretion. The amount of bile secreted by this dog was very large, greater in proportion to the weight of the animal than in any other case. At first we were inclined to suppose that this might be due to the animal being fed upon Liver; but in the case of dog 6, to be described presently, the amount secreted per kilo- gramme of dog was nearly as great, although the animal ate no liver; and the amount per 100 grammes of dry food was very much greater. In the foregoing experiment the dose of blue pill given, although it diminished the bile solids, increased that of the bile fluid. It was important to ascertain whether or not the same result would be obtained on another trial. In another dog (No. 7) ten grains of blue pill were given on one day, and fifteen grains on the day following. Slight purgation was pro- duced by the first dose, decided purgation by the second. On the day pre- ceding the administration of the mercury, the amount of fluid bile was 173-9 grammes, of bile solids 9°35 grammes. — The bile was lost on the day that the first dose of blue pill was given, but on the next day it had fallen to 119-9 grammes, and the bile solids to 7-5 grammes. On both days the animal consumed about the same quantity of food. It is therefore clear that the observation recorded in the case of dog 5 on the 29th of July cannot be held as indicating the power of blue pill to increase the fluid portion of the bile; while this observation on dog 7 only confirms the result in the case of dog 5, viz. that a purgative dose of blue pill diminishes the amount of bile solids secreted. Results of the preceding observations on the Cholagogue Action of Pil. Hydrargyri and Calomel. 1. Pil. Hydrargyri, when given in doses which did not produce purgation, caused no increase of the biliary secretion (Tables IY. and [X.). 2. Pil. Hydrargyri, when given in doses which produced purgation, dimi- nished the biliary secretion (Table X., and non-tabulated observations on dog 7). 3. Calomel, given in doses of ;1, of a grain from six to fourteen times a day, 215 ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. “Sop Jo ‘Sopry zad sourmmead FE.6T 10 ‘sourmmerd T.9gg 0} poyuNoMe pousuod pooy Axp oy} portod sry} JO sPoYM oy} Funmg—aLON r or 61-0 | 12-1 66-2 || 460-0 | ¢z-0 | F9-F || €0-T €F-9 |cT-LeT||c-ecet| 9-cae | t9¢ | 9F8 || Fle || Weoyy 16-0 982-9 “ - “ “ Tf wee re “ 11-0 |6ET-T |E9-12 || 680-0 | 22-0 | 9T-F 16.0 0-9 eS & fe oe Het its es *pyop jou *pyep jou oe “ “ “ ee rt eune “ “ “ “ wee ‘Ts “ €2-0. | TET | 29-92 |] FF0-0 | 62-0. | L6-F_ |] GeT 16.9 GET] 9-986 | $99] OFS || FLE ||'0e Ae utas | “was | sutLs || “utd | “und |-sud |] “mas | ‘sud + { “99ST “S9TBS |'SPITOS! “OTI || S9TVS |*SprTOS| “apg || “S}[BS | “BpTTOS | *aTrq |). ¥ F ; F ana | ora (pmnr|| one | an |pmurl| oma | are. [propa || °C] Beret tren) “sve aa) “sBorr 48 spin ear pocy Ae Seapets +3 ‘sanoy *SOTUTBLS oo he ap Jo sovrure 3 sop Jo ourure. FZ UL payasoes Ut ‘pooy Jo qunouLy J OOT Woua a0q -OTP yous 107 arg Jo Aqquen’ qysT9 MA L 9 g if & 3 T “HOATS SBA OFVUTTTGNG IATSOIION oL0Joq pojoroos oir Jo Junows Ape *y So([ uo suoTwALOsqG Jo SOLIeg 4SIL,J— TTX ITAV I, “Sop Jo “Sopry aod soumumress ¢.¢¢ TO ‘SouTUIRIS 10.611 “YIZT ET} WO {Sop Jo ‘Soppy aed sourmressd Zz.ZT IO ‘ommuVAD J2.29 “YITT EY} WO fSop Jo “Hoy aod somubad g1).g 10 ‘soummedd g].pT ‘WIOT PY} UO Sop Jo “SopLy aod soururess Gf.p] IO ‘BoUIUIBAT J.¢) 07 poyUNOUY poumsuoD poogz Aap ay} W46 YoUBP, UOQ—'ALON “Aup OUIRS 94} WO “W'd | JB OPLUI SBA ATI JO UOT -JO9 98e] OY} puR “WIZ oY} WO “WV Yoop.0 G 4B UOATIS SRA Ulead B JO BYIJY-IMOF JO osop AoyJOUR pure ‘YT ] 94} UO oprut SBA STIG JO UOeT[Oo ay} aeqze ATBJeIpauIUMT “Wed YOOT,0 T 4B WAALS BOM OPVUTITGNS PAISOIIOD JO UIBID B JO SYIJY-MOT *UOAIS OYLUTT[QNG PATsOAIO Jo JuMoMIy L 09-0 | 19-4 | ¢.c9 TST | 69 |8-LOT $3-9 | FOE |0-8FL SF-G_ | F9-S _ | SFL "SUL | ‘sus | ‘Sud *BZ[BS/"BPITOS) “oTT TA | TA | PM paqeanas aTaM a19T]} POOF Aap Jo sournead OOT yove x07 9 GPT-0 | 89-0 | L9-GT || LTL-0 | BLT-€ SL |/eWoNT} L.9¢ | ¢.0¢8) “ PRT-0 | 961-0 | GS-0Z || ZF6-0 | Z90-F | L-FOT || 8-966 ‘i 1.99 e 061-0 | SF8-0 | 88-04 || 696-0 | S1e-F | -90T “ |*ouoN | 9-TFT] » “ €8T-0 | S18-0 | 89-04 || PE6-0 | SET-F COT |/PUON | F-E11 L9G) ‘eto NT ‘ula | US | BTID || “LES | sued | ‘BTL | EG | NR [SD [Se aoe. | ee “8988S |SPITOS) “Tq |) "84[BS |SpITOS| “TIq |). 5 c . ona | one |prna|} oma | omer | pte || MON | Pere PATE “TWA pagodoas aa “soy, ssoururead arayy Sop jo oururead FZ Wl pajasoos Ur ‘pooy Jo yunouy aqrq Jo AqrQUeny : -O[P] youe a0¥F g v g “HOALS SVAN OPVUTT[GNY ATSOIION Ioyze puv o1ojoq pojotoos optg Jo yunowe Apeq ‘9 So wo suoTwAIOsSqQ—TX AAV], 216 REPORT—1868. and in doses of two grains from two to six times a day, did not produce pur- gation or increase the biliary secretion (Tables VII., VIII., and IX.). 4, Calomel, when given in doses which produced purgation, diminished the biliary secretion (Table X.). Observations with Corrosive Sublimate. Dog 6, a retriever, six months old, weighing 5:1 kilogrammes, was operated on for biliary fistula, February 26th, 1868. The recovery was in this case speedy and perfect. Soon after the operation the feces became clay-coloured. The health of the animal was excellent, and was not appreciably injured by the operation or the effects of the fistula. Table XI. p. 215, gives the results of the observations, with corrosive sub- limate on four consecutive days, three previous to, and one during the admi- nistration of the drug. During the three days previous to the administration of the mercury, the secretion of fluid and solid bile was remarkably constant, and this notwith- standing great variation in the amount of food taken. The mean quantity was, of fluid bile 105-4 grammes, of bile solids 4:144 grammes, of bile salts 0-948 gramme. The constancy in the secretion rendered the case a very valuable one for observing whether or not it was affected by the drug. On the fourth day two doses of 4.of a grain of corrosive sublimate were injected under the skin. The first dose was given at 1 p.m. on the 11th, immediately after the collection of bile had been made on that day. The second dose was given at 9 a.m. on the 12th, and the last collection of bile was made at 1 p.m. on the same day. The amount of fluid bile on this the fourth day was 78 grammes, of bile solids 3°178 grammes, of bile salts 0-717 gramme. Twenty hours after the first dose of the drug was given, a slight discharge of mucus from the nostrils was observed, and a patch of semisolid clay-coloured faeces mingled with a few drops of blood was found upon the floor. Two hours following the administration of the second dose, the animal was cbseryed to be exceedingly weak ; it was in a state of con- stant tremor, and staggered on attempting to walk. At 1 p.m. on the 12th, four hours after the second dose of mercury was given, the last collection of bile was made ; at that time the nasal discharge had become more marked. There Was no apparent salivation, nor was the breath foetid. The animal was last seen alive at 5.30 p.m. on the 12th, eight and a half hours after the second dose had been given. At that time there was no apparent change in its condition, further than that it had become so weak that it was no longer able to stand, unless supported. It died during the following night. In the morning (13th) a patch of liquid feces of a clay-colour was found upon the floor. Ten grammes of bile were found in the bag attached to the canula, The result of this experiment was briefly this :—12 grain corrosive subli- ° mate, given in the course of 24 hours to a dog 6 months old, caused purgation with liquid bloody faeces, nasal discharge, diminution of the biliary secretion, general tremor, and finally death. For dissection of this dog see Table I., Dog D. It will be observed that the stomach still contained a portion of undigested food. As the animal had been poisoned by the drug, it was determined to observe the effects of smaller and gradually increasing doses. It was thought that if the drug can increase the biliary secretion, we, by beginning with a very small dose and gradually increasing its strength, would certainly hit upon the amount necessary to do so ere poisonous symptoms set in ; moreover we should observe the effects of the repeated exhibition of small doses. ; ; 217 ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. ‘sop Jo “sony aad ‘suas F1.6T 10 ‘somTUTe.S 90.68 ‘YI9g 94} UO f Sop Jo ‘sopTY aod ‘sur13 ¢.g 10 ‘sourorvrd ¢.TgT 07 paytMouL YICg oUNL 04 YIgT oun WOI ATLep pounstiOD pooy Lap Jo yunowE oY —ALON ‘4soy AT[uyUapwoy x 108-0 | PIL-1 | F8-TE || FS0-0 | OE-0 | P26 10-I | 96-9 | GOST |/@-G9¢ | 96% |¢-90L] F-E9L G-6T |)" WeeTy 01-0 | OF€ |€-O8T || 8-919 | 9.646 | OF 8-919 96 - 68-6 | 11-69 adobe 16:0 | LEG | x Ge | L-E1T " 3 ¢ Ms "86 3 ee ed G.09T “ “ “ « Ms “ . 3, . Th nee eo BG nae hep es “ “ “ “ ore NS “ Te sxoo] Soq *pasvao sey vaya Gel | HEL | OFT ; baeeat’ “ROYTIVIP PIT VY “T]e4t Ata Yoo, you saop og |} +" oe sa i a OST ¢G | 0.008 ‘ a é 5 aig i ‘pHOstms puw ayy oymb soomy *yITROY ort | 949 Joe | oF liane GME | Magee joajiad ur sea Sop oy} UoKwAdosqo SutousuruT0d Jo oun; oy} FV || 6F-0 | 9¢-¢ | SPT | 9F0-0 | 62F-0 | G9-ET || 68-0 | 84-8 £96 || 9-69F | 8.946 | L9¢ gs €-61 | ‘ST oune "ATMO JOY}IM poyoloos optg Jo yunowy Ape *g So uo suorvadosqy) Jo sowtog 4sI{— ATX WAVY, ‘sop jo “sorry aed soururedd 10.¢] 10 ‘sourorerd [].FTp ‘AAIsnjour gT-9 uN wos ATrep potunsuod poo Arp Joqunowe uvopy ‘Sop Jo “Sopry aod somuread J9.¢ 10 ‘sourmmess 6.¢) “WIT 949 Uo ! Sop Jo “doppy tod sourumvas 0Z.J] oO ‘sourUIBID g.¢) 7 “YIOT PY} UO ! Sop jo “Sorry aod sourmveas 17.6] 10 ‘somMUULAT T.0¢E 04 pequnoure poo Arp oy} WY49 VUNG TO—ALONT *pojeurnyse JON % ‘sured p ‘Aq yuUNb [vjog—urwsd v Jo paryy-2uG |] 9¢.0 | 10.¢ PI0-0 | OT-0 | 16-T || OF-0 | 6-4 |09-F¢ |Ic.0L |‘ouoNT] FOG | 6gL || 9.26 \I'et “ “Aup ayy Ul 019 UreAs B Jo paryy-9uQ || | Be | =" |! T0p-0 | 29-2 |OL-e6 |I9-682 | 9-¢¢6 | FOS} 9FB " |PAT eune BEG-0 | PP-L | F-2E |) 980-0 | LTG-0 | PLP || 66-0 | 216 | BEIT |19-888 | 9-G¢e | FOG | F968 | 1F-2¢ || uvegy | ‘Surusiour ayy wr j——|———| J —_| | aan | ones |= Ulead B JO paTY}-9U0 pur ‘SuyUAAS OY} UI UIwAS uw JO YIxIS-oUGD ||" | ot | serfs | oe Hl ett | 66-4 [TLSIT|¢-916 | 9-926 | $99] 978 DTomnts ‘Aep oy) ULOOrMy UreId BJO YIXIs-auG || ** a pe oh a ee 18.0 | ILL] T-LOT||L-966 | 9-C8_| F9¢ | F-19L HST one “up oy} Ul ota Ulwad B Jo yyXIs-aUG ||“ | RE SO NS re ae alsa Pcatey Plats pajou ATlayeanjaovjoyy|| ** |ipr “Asp Sty Ur eorikg UyBIS @ JO YAKIN-oUQ |)“ |“ eats 89-0 GPP ||S-LL9 | 9-2ce | F9G | oFB || “* |ler “ “Aup oY} Ul 901g Upeas B Jo YXIS-ouQ |)" fot fo Sl aeee * RFOT||S-219 | 9-62e | F9G | 9FB a | tig eek “Aup oy} Ur aoqAg UTBAS B JO YIXIS-aUQ || 162.0 | F¢-1 0.0 IFT 9-6S1 |0-SGIT| 9-cze@ | #99] Og ||FFLE jor “ cA SEY EE OAR TO IC PEO OU) Hee os a TeT EEPT|GOTG | 9-cee | 792 | os |] “ {6 ‘UrBad BJO YIXIS-9UG || *** a any pu £6-0 LFOT||8-2L9 | 9-626 | F99 | 9FB Seg hee? lard AB 1 Rei) | USS Hiden yf cee ¢.For |l-ecet| 9-cee | too) ope || 7 ily“ “ulead BJO YIXIS-0UQ || 9T-0 | &6-0./26-2T || 20.0 | 11.0 | cre_|| 06.0 | 6st | 66 |logest| 9.cee | t9¢ | ops || cuz lo oung urad | suns | sud |) sod | -ura3 |*sunad || oad | ‘suas | ‘sun “S9sT "89788 |Sprfos) “aqtq || “sayes |sprfos} -aqrq || “syyes |-sprjos| “oprq ||, ; : , : one | ora |pmir|| one | one [penal] omer | apie | peat |) CME) PEt UTE oyeAN | “Sore *"PITOPSIULUPS OFVUIITANS SAISO.LIOY Jo Junoury a6 Rs ae aa payartoas a10M *‘sM0T, Weed ‘Bop |} red a a. peal se 2104} Sop Jo ourmmers)| 5g ur paqaaoas Ur ‘poog Jo yunoury jo O0T Yva soy So Te) Mose sto i aTiq Jo AjyUUNgy i POM ee ee ee eee eae Le |e S| ae eer re ee SP ae L 9 g ¥ g Ed 1 “MOATS SUM OPLUTTTGNG OAISOIIO) WOT pojotoos opig Jo JuNoUe Apeg ‘Jf Soq uo suoryrarasgg Jo solog puooog—]ITX ITAV I, » —— rr Oe 218 REPORT—1868. Dog 7 was a strong full-grown retriever, weighing 27-4 kilogrammes, for which we were indebted to Dr. Kelburne King, of Hull. The operation for biliary fistula was performed on the 24th of April, 1868. The healing of the wound around the fistula was so slow that observations could not be begun before the 29th of May. Table XII. p. 215, gives the results pre- vious to the administration of corrosive sublimate. During the five days embraced by Table XII., the amount of food consumed was constant. On May 31st the bile was unfortunately lost, owing to the apparatus having slipped. The average quantity secreted during the remaining four days was of fluid bile 127-15 grammes, of bile solids 6:43 grammes, of bile salts 1:03 gramme. The observations were interrupted on accoant of repairs needed in the apparatus. When resumed on the 5th of June, the dog was in excellent health. Table XIII. p. 217, gives the results of observations during the administration of small and gra- dually increasing doses of corrosive sublimate. During the first three days 1 of a grain of corrosive sublimate was injected under the skin once a day. During the next six days the same quantity was injected twice a day, and on the tenth day (June 16) the dose was increased to 3 of a grain at the second injection. During these ten days the biliary secretion underwent marked variations ; the average daily quantity was 113-8 grammes of fluid bile, 5-972 grammes of bile solids, and 0-99 gramme of bile salts. These figures show that there was a slight diminution in the biliary secretion during this period. At the same time, however, the amount of food consumed had undergone a considerable decrease, but the health of the animal had not suffered, and its weight remained almost exactly the same. On June 17, the increased dose of 4 of a grain twice a day was given. Athough these doses produced no pur- gation, foetid breath, or salivation, yet the dull eye and general drooping uneasy aspect of the animal showed that the general health was deci- dedly impaired. On that day (17th) there was a great decrease in the biliary secretion. The bile solids fell to about a third, and the fluid bile to about a fourth of what it had been on the previous day. The amount of food consumed, however, had been but slightly diminished, as compared with the previous day; but a glance at the Table wiil suffice to show that more food was consumed on the 17th than on the 11th, 13th, and 15th. On all these days at least thrice as much fluid bile, and about twice as much bile solids had been secreted. On June 18 only + of a grain was given ; and after the collection of bile on that day the observations were suspended, on account of the very marked impairment of the general health occasioned by the mercury. On that day the following is the note that was taken of the condition of the animal :—‘‘The dog looks miserable and lifeless, his _ health is evidently much impaired, there is no salivation, foetid breath, nasal discharge, or purgation.” The quantity of bile secreted on the 18th, though above that of the previous day, was nevertheless very low. The consumption of food had greatly diminished ; and it should be noticed that on the 10th the biliary secretion, instead of undergoing a still further dimi- nution, consequent on the decreased consumption of food, was, in fact, augmented. This, in our opinion, could only be attributed to the infuence of a smaller dose of the drug. The collection of the bile was in this case quite perfect on every day, with one exception (May 31), recorded in Table XII. The observations distinctly show that corrosive sublimate, given in small gradaally increasing doses, did not augment the biliary secretion. On the contrary, they point out 219 ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. uo {Sop jo ommeasopry aod somurvad J.¢ 10 ‘saurutvad J.) 01 0} paytmoure pooy Arp oy9 YQOE ATR “Sop Jo ouMUIVADOTTY od somMTVAT 6.6 TO SoTTUTEAS G.Q9e 07 paymMouE poos Arp ayy 48Te ayy uo ‘uaatd sua pooy Aap ou YI6zZ EY UO {Sop Jo ourureasopyy aod sourur F9-G IO ‘soutureas Z.FOT 07 payunoure poo Arp ayy 498g 94} Wo ‘Sop Jo aurureasopry tad aan 10-61 40 ‘soururerd §.99g 03 poywnoure poos Arp oy} 9¢ ATU UQ—saTO NT “YITBaY JueT[eoxe ur Fo || 6Z-0 | 99-T | O-TS |/90-0 |9GE-0 | 80-9 || 89-1 | e8.6 | BELT LETST . “ | o0.¢er |] 9.86 |I"te “ ‘adit, “YITVoY JuoTTaoxe ur Hog || gog.0 | PL-F | 1.62 |) -* ae | 180 | T1-¢ | 2-68 |leuont| L1H | L9¢¢! Goss || “ |rog “ “YgTeey JuoTeoxe urSog || “* | 7 * l18T0-0 [960-0 | SFT |] OF-0 | LLG | 9-1F |l'euoyr] “ “ | ¥.8cP || 9.88 Iles “ “Yy[eay Jueypooxe ui Fog |/ 96.0 | FL | SOOT |} = || €0.T | SLL | 8-FOT || P-eop | *ouoyy jauoyy] ‘ouo NT es eee “TOAVT “WgTBey quaT[eoxe ur s0q Pr wee on wee eae eee 00-T FIG 6-681 L-8ELT ee : “ 028 “ee "1G “ ‘WgTeoy gueTjaoxe ursog |/¢t.0 | 68-0 | T-z || 6z0.0 }0LT.0 | LF |! 98.0 | $0.6 | 8-0FT Il Etat | L-THT | L.9¢2| LI1¢ || ez loa 4p “MOTPBAILyS [vIyTed ToyJv pue “SULIMp OLOJOq poza100s OTL JO Juno Ajreq °* 2, 8og uo SUOTVALOSYY JO SOLO pally ]— TAX @1Avy, WOATS TOYM SUTTUYS SBA ada} oy} 4ST 949 WO tparveddesmms Jo uorRaedM pur WoyRArTEs ‘YIOT 249 WO $ Sop jo “Sopry aod ‘sun ¢.p7 10 ‘sours g.61¢ “Y99 04} WO {Sop Jo amMEISopLy sod sourUIEAS 0).97 10 ‘somMUMLAT g).Zeg 0 paymMoure pauMsuod poof Sap o49 pug AME TO—"aTON ‘sureds xIs “rub [ey0,——uread wv Jo paryy-aug || *** a “1600-0 | 800-0 | 980-T |} 0-0 [E810 | SLT |/@-Gb | Aa etoyey || OT-9T [oT “ “ep oy} UT ao1ag URIS BJO paryy-oU |) > fo fo se fos | 1018.0 | $0.6] GbL |OUON| Zr | 6961 TPST “ihe «me = | Psi Be Es Le ean | GLE-0 |SOT-T | G6F || LE0-0 | 111-0 | 29-2 |] GST-T | FLE-¢ |61-0ST || F-0GF | 8-206 |F-FSL| 6IOT || L61 ||" wVeRT “AEP oY} Ul 914 UIwIs B Jo paryy-auG|| * * Oo mee a = FPL |SIL-P |1G-LFT || F-9¢ -E8T | 6-808) TPZT eB aes ‘Rep our cory rere” Jo paryy-ouH |] | vs | ose me fom al oe oper | uae | o-eerl| Sep | -9cae |Oose! Teer || “in “SuTULOUL OY} UE pATy}-oU0 ‘SurMoAa oy} UT UTIs w Jo YIXIS-2UG || TLT-0 | $1.0 |6T-9¢ |] 0-0 | LOT-0 | co-s |] gF-0 | IL-2 | LET || L-66¢ | 9-cee |O-9Fs| TFT || 6¢-6T ||9 “ “BULLION OY} Ul pPAYy-ou0 “Gurmoad oy} UY uIwAS w JoygxIs-auG |} ss | | ss fos | oH BLT | 99-6 | O-GFT|| L686 | 96S | ¥-986] TCT soe ON aes ‘Sep oy} Uy eormg wets v Jo yyxIs-ouG || vs | ov | st foes 7 os 1 BLT | 99-8 | O-GPT||O-TFT | 9-686 | OFS] THOT ee Nie eg ‘ep Oyg Ur OdIMg TreAd G Jo YXI8-9UQ || wf oe | ons a =| ee “1188.1 | O&€ | TLPT |] 9-998 | 9:¢¢e | OFS] TET te Alc ese ‘Aup oyj UL eoLag UlEIS w Jo YIxXIs-9UG || F9z.0 | F-1 | Ges || FF0-0 | 42-0] 90-6 |] 618.0 | LLP |LP-6LT||@TSP | 9.c¢e |0.9rs| Thor || e6T |le “ep oy} UT oorag ures v yo yyxis-aug |} | vs | spss 1 os I 69.0 | 60-4 | &SIT ||PFONT] 9-60 | 0.9F8] 0.9F8 eS teee ATE “hep oy} ur ory ulead ev Jo yyxis-aug || | + ce os ee I&1 | &@F | L291 || 8-919 | 9-62% | 0-978) 0-9F8 pe [ily eee “Aep oy} Ul aig ureds B Jo yyXIs-oug || ae a oe 33 GO-T | G¢-€ | 8-ZFI || 8-919 | 9-626 | 9FB) 8-919 > 16g0 ‘Aep oY} UP eoIKg WIeIT GB Jo ypxIs-oUQ |} “| = i [ae “" t! OFT | 06- | O-LET |] 8-919 | 9.c2a | 9F8] 8-919 pea | aks “Rep on} Uy copa uyeIs e@ Jo YyxIs-oug |} vf se fs Sollee “" |] 09-1 | O&b | &SLT || 8-919 | 9.46% | 9FS] 8-919 || OL-6T ||"2z FUNG urd | ‘ured | -sursd || ‘oad | -urad | ‘sura3 || -wras | suas | -sand || “898T ‘B9TBS |SPITOS| saqrq || “89TVs |sprTOS} “eTTq || ‘sapes |-sprpos) “oyrq |]. : : ; 4 ona | ona | petal) one | one [pena |) one | arier |prapa | CCL | PPO | ATTN) TIAN | SHOTEST “UDAIS OYBUITTGNG SAIsSOIIOH JO JuMOTLY poqotoas se So ‘ajgeq ; z AJALIOS 19! " Pp pe ore Ee, omen ae jo pera cid bs ee cit ea a eaten “OTL ypweIOT || oT! JO Apqaend Pere tees a ag IS y 9 ¢ € j I “HOATS SBAA OFVTUTTGNG OATSOILON WOYA pojor9es oTIg Jo yunowe Ape’ *g SO] UO suOYVArESqG Jo solIag puovog—" AY AIAVI, 220 REPORT—1868. that so long as the general health remained good, the amount of bile was not changed, but as soon as the animal became weak, diminution of the secretion at once took place. Dog 8 was a strong mongrel collie, about five years old, weighing 19-3 kilogrammes. The operation for biliary fistula was performed on the 2nd of June, 1868. The recovery was rapid, and observations, with a view to determine the normal secretion of bile, were commenced June 17th. The results are given in Table XIV. p. 217. The bile was perfectly collected for eight days. On one day (20th) the apparatus was not applied. When the observations were commenced, the animal was in perfect health, the feces were quite white and semisolid, On the 21st it had a slight attack of diarrhcea, which had, however, disap- peared on the following day. With this exception, the health of the animal was exceedingly good during the whole period, and instead of a loss there was a slight gain in weight. The diminution of the biliary secretion on the 21st cannot be ascribed to the diarrhea, seeing that on the next day, _ when it had ceased, a still greater decrease took place. The average daily amount of bile during the above period was, of fiuid bile 180-2 grammes, of bile solids 5:96 grammes, of bile salts 1- 07 gramme. The dog’s appetite was remarkably good. It was decided that corrosive sublimate should now be given in small and gradually increasing doses as in the previous case. Table XY. p. 219, gives the results. During the first eight days 1 of a grain of corrosive sublimate was given twice a day. On July 5th and 6th 2 of a grain were given in the day. On July 7th and 8th the dose was 3 of a grain twice a day. Until July 8th the animal continued in good health; then its appetite began to fail. The average amount of bile secreted daily during the twelve days from June 27th to July 8th inclusive was, of fluid bile 150-19 grammes, of bile solids 3-374 grammes, and of bile salts 1-135 gramme, During this period the amount of fluid bile was one-sixth less than during the premercurial period ; but the diminution in the bile solids was still more marked, the average quantity not being much more than a half of what was secreted during the premercurial period. This diminution was entirely due to a de- crease in the organic solids of the bile, indeed the amount of the inorganic solids was slightly increased. On July 9th two-thirds of a grain were given, as on the two previous days. The falling off in the appetite now became more marked, and the animal looked ill. There was a great failure in the biliary secretion; fluid and solid bile were reduced to about a half of what they had been on the previous day. One-third of a grain was given upon the following day (10th). ‘This was the last dose. Symptoms of seriously deteriorated health were very apparent some hours after it was given. The animal refused almost all food; it looked very languid; its breath was foetid; there was shght salivation, and on the mucous membrane inside the upper lip there was an incipient ulcer, which experience regarding the effects of mercurials on the mouths of other dogs enabled us to recognize as mercurial. The feeces, which previous to the administration of the mercury had been white, were during the greater period of exhibition sometimes white, at other times grey, and during the two last days of a slate-colour. There never was purgation. Latterly the animal became rapidly emaciated. Up to the 6th it maintained its weight well, but during the last four days it lost 3-49 kilo- ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 22] grammes. The amount of bile secreted on the 10th was still further dimi- nished, the fluid bile being little more than a ninth of the average quantity secreted during the twelve days from June 27th to July 8th inclusive ; while the bile solids were little more than a thirtieth of the average quantity se- creted during the same period. In the case of dog 8 six grains, in that of dog 7 four grains of corro- sive sublimate were required to bring about the same result as regards the biliary secretion. This was apparently due to the fact that dog 8 was an older and a stronger dog. But although the biliary secretion held out longer against the drug in this animal, the constitutional symptoms were more marked. Thus salivation, foctid breath, and ulceration of the gums were present, while these were wanting in dog 7. This fact adds greatly to the value of the observations on dog 8 ; for it shows when mercury is given to an extent sufficient to increase the function of the salivary glands, it diminishes the biliary function of the liver. The impression produced by the drug upon the health of dog 8 was deep and lasting. Although its administration and the collection of bile were stopped on July 10th, the emaciation of the animal continued to increase rapidly. The appetite was very poor on the 14th, there was coffee-ground vomiting, blood was passed in the feces, and there was a decided muco- purulent discharge from the left nostril. The ulcer in the mouth became larger. The animal, which previous to the administration of the mercury had been so strong and vigorous, grew so weak that it could hardly walk, and it was killed July 25th. On dissection six hours after death nothing abnormal was found. The hepatic cells seemed healthy. The intestine, pancreas, and salivary glands were not unduly vascular. Results of the preceding Observations on the Cholagoque Action of Corrosive Sublimate. These two series of observations on dogs 7 and 8 so closely resembled each other, and were so perfectly carried out, that there was no possibility of fallacy. They show :— 1. That corrosive sublimate, when given in small doses, gradually in- creased in strength, does not augment the biliary secretion, but that it dimi- nishes it the moment the dose reaches a strength sufficient to deteriorate the general health. 2. That corrosive sublimate given in the above method may diminish the biliary secretion, while it does or does not produce an evident action on the salivary glands and mouth, and without producing purgation. 3. Case 6 shows that the biliary secretion is likewise diminished when this drug is given in a dose sufficient to produce purgation, The next subject which engaged our attention was the mode in which the mercury had caused a diminution of the biliary secretion in dogs 7 and 8. The experiment on dog 8 seemed strongly to point to the diminished consumption of food as the cause of the diminished biliary secretion. With a view to throw further light on this matter, we performed the following experiment on the : Influence of Partial Starvation on the Biliary Secretion. For the following experiment dog 7 was used, which had thoroughly recovered its health and strength, 222 REPORT—1868. Table XVI., p. 219, shows the results of the observations before, during, and after partial starvation. During the first two days the amount of bile fluid and solids secreted was very nearly the same. The amount of dry food consumed was also nearly alike. On the 28th, bread, milk, and water were withheld. It was intended to give the usual allowance of tripe, but as it could not be obtained, liver was given instead, On this day the amount of fluid bile fell to 1048 grammes, as compared with 140 grammes on the two previous days, but the bile solids rose to about a half more than they had previously been. This was almost wholly due to increase of the organic constituents of the bile ; for it will be seen from the Table that the bile salts (inorganic solids) were scarcely at all in- creased. July 29th 453 grammes of water were given without any dry food, The quantity of fluid bile secreted was only 41-6 grammes, less than a third of the quantity on the days previous to starvation, Tie amount of bile solids was 2:77 grammes, rather more than a half of the quantity secreted during the first period, while the inorganic constituent of the bile fell to 0-40 gramme, less than a half of the amount during the first period. On the 30th of July it was intended that the animal should return to the diet of July 27th, but the tripe was accidentally withheld, The amount of fluid bile rose on that day to 85:7 grammes, bile solids to 5-11 grammes, and bile salts to 0-87 gramme. Although the dry food consumed on this day was hardly one-fifth of what it was on July 26th, the amount of bile solids and salts was almost the same. On July 31st the partial starvation was discontinued; the animal consumed the same amount of dry food as on July 26th, with nearly a fourth more water. The fluid bile on that day reached a quantity 33-1 grammes above what it was on the 26th, when the same quantity of food was given, while the amount of bile solids and salts was nearly doubled. It is difficult to account for this marked increase in the biliary secretion when the full diet was again given. During the whole experiment the animal was in excellent health, and lost only 0-9 kilogramme in weight. The preceding observations are sufficient to show that the biliary secretion is greatly influenced by the great amount of food consumed, and it permits of the inference that diminution in the biliary secretion observed in the case of dog 8 under the influence of corrosive sublimate may have been due to impaired appetite. The same explanation cannot apply to the diminution in the biliary secretion observed in the case of dog 7 on June 17 (sce Table XIII.) ; for, as has been previously pointed out, on that day the animal took more food than it had done on many previous days on which it had secreted a larger amount of bile. On the whole, therefore, the legitimate conclusion seems to be that mercury, when administered so as to impair the general nutrition, lesseas the biliary secretion. This may result without impairment of the appetite; but when there is a diminished consumption of food, the failure in the biliary secretion is all the more marked. Conclusions regarding the Cholagogue Action of Mercury. The foregoing observations seem to us clearly to show that Pil. Hydrargyri, calomel, and corrosive sublimate, when given to dogs in either small, gradually augmented, or in large doses, do not increase the biliary secretion ; they do not even influence it so long as neither purgation nor impairment of health are produced, but they diminish it as soon as they do either or both. It may be —— UN THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 223 urged that, although we have proved this regarding dogs, it does not follow that on man these drugs will have the same action. It must be admitted that some animals are altogether insensible to remedies which produce power- ful effects on others, that different doses are often requisite to occasion similar results, and that there may be peculiarities so very decided as to render it impossible to infer what will be the action of a remedy on one animal from its influence upon another. But have we any reason to conclude that in the pre- sent instance there exists such difference in the action of mercury as to prevent any inference being drawn from the dog regarding man? All the facts with which we are acquainted show that it is legitimate to infer that the action of mercury ought to be regarded as similar in voth cases. We have demon- strated that, as regards its action upon the salivary glands, mouth, intestine, appetite, and general nutrition, the influence of mercury is the same. We there- fore infer that itis in the highest degree probable that its action on the hepatic secretion will also be the same. The only difference that there seems to be be- tween the dog and man, as regards the action of mercury, consists in the fact that in the dog larger doses are generally required to produce the same effects as those observed inman. But even here it may be argued that more marked results are required to satisfy the observer, and hence the greater dose neces- sary. These circumstances, therefore, cannot be held as affecting the conclu- sion at which we have arrived. We have not deemed it worth our while to experiment upon any other animal, for we are unable to see how such experiments could materially strengthen our position. Even though we had shown that mercury when given to a rabbit, cat, pig, donkey, or horse diminishes the biliary secretion, it might still be said that this does not apply to man. But there are several special reasonswhich render experiments on these animals either impracticable or less reliable than those on the dog. Bidder and Schmidt failed to establish biliary fistulee in cats, we therefore thought it not worth our while to spend money and time in making the attempt. Horses and donkeys are too un- wieldy for the purpose and have no gall-bladders, a peculiarity which would in all probability render it impossible to establish biliary fistulein them. In pigs. the hepatic secretion differs from that of man, inasmuch as it contains hyocholic acid, and according to Strecker no sulphur. It might, therefore, not unfairly be objected to any inferences from experiments on pigs that, inasmuch as the porcine differs from the human hepatic secretion, it could not be held as altogether probable that mercury would influence both in the same way. ‘Everything seems to show that the animals used by the Committee are those best suited for the observations they have made. In addition to the thera- peutical facts previously mentioned, which after all are the most important, there are these, that the qualitative composition of canine is the same as that of human bile, and that the dog, like man, can be fed on a flesh, vegetable, or mixed diet. In this respect they are stiperior to most others, even to the Quadrumana, which though in conformation most resembling man are vege- table feeders. So far, therefore, as direct experiment and exact observations ‘are capable of determining the influence of mercury upon the biliary secretion, ‘the Committee have no doubt that the dog is superior to the animals above “mentioned. But it may be supposed that mercurials possess some specific power of ex- citing the biliary secretion by acting on the orifice of the common bile-duct, and so stimulating the secretion through the nerves which connect it with the liver, just as pyrethrum or vinegar stimulates the salivary glands when they aie applied to the orifices of the salivary ducts. It might also be objected that, 294, REPORT—1868. inasmuch as in our experiments the common bile-duct had been divided, the nerves alluded to might have been so injured that stimulation of the orifice of the common bile-duct could no longer excite the secretion. It remains to be - shown, however, that mercurials do specially excite the orifice of the bile-duct. It is not probable, at any rate, that their influence on the biliary secretion was, in the cases of dogs 6, 7, and 8, prevented by division of hepatic nerves. In these experiments the common bile-duct was simply divided with as little injury to neighbouring parts as possible (in previous experiments a portion of the bile-duct was removed), and these animals did not suffer in the least from the shock after the operation; so that nervous injury could not have been extensive. Moreover, in the case of dog 7, the parts around the com- mon bile-duct were dissected after death, and the nerves proceeding from the solar plexus to the liver were found at some distance from the duct, and had apparently suffered no injury at the place where it had been divided. The Committee, therefore, do not attach any value to this objection. But some may say that although we have proved that mercury diminishes the biliary secretion in dogs and that in man its action will in all probability be the same, yet our experiments have been performed on animals in a state of health, and that had they been made on dogs with diseases such as those in which mercury has been supposed to increase the hepatic secretion, it would possibly, in the case of such dogs, have been increased. With such an hypo- thesis we need not seriously occupy ourselves until the objectors prove that, in any case whatever, mercury can increase the biliary secretion in man. We have. been unable to discover any facts brought to light in this or any other age which prove that mercury stimulates the biliary secretion. So far as we can make out, the notion that it does so originates in some vague statement made by Paracelsus*, or the authors of his time, as to the good effects of mercury in what he has called “‘icteritia.” But, we repeat, not only do we not know how such a notion has arisen, but we are ignorant how to make direct observations on the subject in man. We have already stated that such observations are, in the present state of physiological che- mistry, impossible (see p. 187). We do not deny the possibility of mercury being useful in some diseases of the liver; we simply say that the notion of its doing good by increasing the biliary secretion is untenable. OBSERVATIONS ON PoDOPHYLLINE AND TARAXACUM AS CHOLAGOGUES. Before concluding our observations on dogs with biliary fistule, the Com- mittee thought it would be important to try the effect of two other drugs which have been supposed to exercise a cholagogue influence on the liver, viz. podophylline and taraxacum. Observations with Podophylline. Dog 9 was a retriever, about three years old, weighing 26-6 kilogrammes, and the operation for biliary fistula was performed upon July 24, 1868, The recovery was rapid. Shortly after the operation the feces were clay- coloured. Table XVII., p. 225, shows the results of the bile collections pre- vious to, during, and after the administration of podophylline. * Paracelsus (Aur. Phil. ene) Opera Medico-Chemiea, 5 tom, 4to, Francof. 1603- 1605, De Icteritiis, vol. i. p. 329. 225 ‘sop Jo “sorry zed ‘sura8 9.¢ 10 ‘soururesS g.9g (OST 8Y} WO f Sop Jo “Sopry tod ‘sun13 g.97 10 ‘soumBAT goF “IFT 2} 10 {Sop jo ‘soyry aed ‘su13 g.97 10 ‘sourmresS gp sea Ws ysnsny uo poo Arp jo yunowe oyy—aLo NE “STB FI way stasseqg Tr 19a Suryoor Soq *wornbund asnfoug $ “WOH}DaT[OO SIY} 04 SnOrAdd sanoy FZ UaATs ourpAydopod suread g || 9.7 | @IT |0-08T || Fo.0 2-0 | FG TP-T | 88-6 | T-9¢T| ‘amo Ny Ly Be $86 |let “ 1-0 | $6 |9-6S || L0-0.| &F-0 | 68 |) 10-6 |8F-3T | g-9¢2|| « “ | 0-078 |] Lee irr “ ‘saSvssed aspey 0} SurMo poonpoaqur oq 4ou pmoo enur9 os ee ye ee PS 2 x re ue a i e pe IEE Ee ‘sadussed asyey 0} SULNO poonpoaqat aq you pmoo vnurp Ly e > a es! - se oe 2% ye ~ Me ap ~ iG lume: ‘sodussed osyey 07 JulMo paonpoajut aq you prnoa efnurg || ** “a ae se yc eS a ay 34 ay ay 5 3 ae ue 40-6 | F921 | .6PG)) - fon | COG || mache OTe 16-1 |8L-8T | S01e|| “ “| GIs || 782 [6 “qt poasoulat ts “ ‘ “ ‘ Noaog ‘ang suyead ¢ { Atoquesdp Jo yougqe qaemas v pey sey || 6z-0 | 61 |eoe || 0.0 | geo TG |] OFT |€86 | €-8FI] Z-6LET : Bh eee “YATBOY JUeTTaoxe ur So oe io A a os “jf 60-8 | 16-81 [26-966 | F-S2ET | O-TFT |9-¢2a] 9-L0¢ || 9.92 ||-'2 ny ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. “woals svat our{ydopog zayze pure oT0jaq poqosoos oft Jo yunowe ATU +) So] WO suoTPwArasq( Jo SoLIEg YIINOJ—TIT AX @TAV, ‘Sop jo “Soppy aad -stma3 ¢.) a0 ‘sourmead O-F8T “UIST 94) WO fSop Jo Sorry aad ‘sumaF 0.9 a0 ‘e.Jog ‘WITT ey uO {Sop Jo *Sopry aod ‘suad §.0T 10 ‘soururers 9.71 ‘) JsnSny uo poumsuoo pooy Lap jo Junoury—"s..0 NT ‘uOWBsnd paMorpoy yorys asoyy, | “uoyesand sonpoad you prp 41 wey eayyesmd oyj Jo uoTyRaystarurpe 8Y} POMOTIOF YOIYA UOMDaTTOo oY, | "ST “ “yamoy poos m Soq ee tee ose ee wee see C61 | 18-81 | #882 8-919 “ “ «“e nee pr Ss ‘uoynhind papwag “wor ~O9T[09 SIY} 09 snoraord smoy Fg uaatd ourMydopod suread 9 || ¢¢.0°| 1-2 | 0-28 || F0.0 | 91-0 | 1-9 || g6-0 |ooF Jeter litpgce| « i gre jer © *paaoul you ee ae : al ? a9 GOT |G99 | 6-886 |) PUN! O.TFT |9.c88 : Pe kage “uoynbind | Pepe = “WOWPaTpOo sty} OF snoraead samoy FZ woars suread F || €6-0 | GG | 6-16 || 20.0 | 0 | 62 || Get |egor | acoz 4¥-206 | “euo Ny Jowony] “ LG6 \itt “ _ PHOS sane *a0U0 paaout sfomog po ee. ca pe “" || GLB | TST | 0-182 P99 |9-F8 a ¥96 |or “ “panos 70U sjanog “woaat{oo S1q} 0} snorsoad soy FZ wears pPAydopog vursoy sureadg || Be aX ae wg “|| GB-G | 86-41 | 6-40 |/x0-F9¢ | 8-21T |0-28e 7 Be Or ee “WAALS OULDIPEUL ON “YATBOY yueTfaoxe ur Soq || *7 =H ina We mS oh LV-G | PSP | 8-G8S || 0-968] 9-68 |0-TFT 3 eta | aha Se “WAAIS oULIpETT ON “YY[BaY YUaT[ooxe ur Soq || 69:0. | 9.¢ | 66 || 20.0 | geo | Zot T6-T_ | L¥-ST |0-€16 |) 8-919 | 0-1FL |9.9FE| FOS 9-96 |") “Sny! ‘und | suid | sumed |) sud | sonad | sorad |) soma | ‘sun |-sund "8981 ‘sqres |-sprfos| -aprq || ‘syyes |-sprqos| -aprq || -sqpus |-eprpos| -aprq ||. 3 ak , ote | ena |peena|| one ate |p|) “one | ove | peng APE | Pete |r| tose a | sorry : a E H “348 SUOBATASG CO a e fe a pajamas oaaan ‘soy A gine sop eyed nots anaes 1g ||4949 Sopyoouuress|]/ 4g ur pajaazoos Un ndomomnain ‘0 DF -O[LT yore a0yp apg Jo AqQURNy SD CS aos LOLLY, FqSTOM OOL yore 1097 L 9 ’ g v g é T ‘ourAydopog Jo uoyerysturmpe on} royze pur o10FOd Poors OT Jo Junoure Ate *G So wo suorwarosqQ— TT AX TTAVy, 1868. 226 REPORT—1868. On August 7th and 8th the bile was collected to ascertain the normal secretion previous to the exhibition of the drug. On the ninth day 2 grains of Resina Podophylli (prepared by Messrs. Gardner and Ainslie, druggists, Edinburgh) were given. This amount did not produce purgation. The bile was collected 24 hours after the dose was given, and it was found that the fluid bile had risen-from 285-8 to 304-2 grammes, but the solid bile had fallen from 14:5 to 12-9 grammes. On the 10th no medicine was given. On that day the fluid bile fell somewhat, while the solid bile rose. On the 11th 4 grains of podophylline were given. Decided purgation followed. A marked diminution in the fluid and solid bile was the result—the fluid bile fell from 287 to 203-2 grammes, the bile solids from 13-31 to 10°85 grammes. On the 12th no medicine was given: the fluid bile rose to 238-2 grammes, while, strange to say, the bile solids fell to 6-62 grammes. On the 13th 6 grains of podophylline were given. Decided purgation followed. The fluid bile fell to 151°2, the bile solids to 4 grammes. On the 14th no medicine was given, and, notwithstanding the purgation, the dog was in excellent health. On the 14th the fluid bile rose to 238-4, the bile solids to 12°87 grammes. These observations clearly show that in this case podophylline, when it produced purgation, diminished the biliary secretion. This decrease cannot be accounted for by diminution in the amount of food taken. Certainly such an explanation might be advanced to account for the fall in the quan- tity secreted on the 11th, but it cannot possibly apply to the great fall upon the 13th. Little attention need be paid to the increase in the bile fluid on the 9th, when 2 grains of podophylline were given without purgation resulting ; for it was only 18-4 grammes, whereas on the 8th there had been a rise of 12°8 grammes over the quantity on the previous day, without any drug having been given ; moreover, on the 9th the bile solids fell to a decided extent. The observations recorded in Table XVIII. p. 225, were made on dog 7, after he had regained his health. : The bile was collected for five days previous to the exhibition of podo- phylline. On one of these (August 8) the dog had a smart attack of dysen- tery; on that day the solid and fluid bile was much below what it was on any other day of the period—another evidence of the lowering influence of purgation upon the biliary secretion. On August 15th 8 grains of podophylline were given; it produced profuse purgation, and so weakened the animal that it staggered when it walked. The bile was collected 24 hours after the dose was given; both fluid and solid bile had undergone a great diminution. It is curious to observe that the purgation produced by the podophylline, although it was accompanied by a diminished consumption of food, did not lessen either the fluid or solid portions of the bile to the extent effected by the attack of dysentery, although the latter was accompanied by comparatively slight depression of the general health and appetite. Throughout the observations in Table XVIII. the faeces were of a slate-colour. The observations were discontinued owing to the weakness of the animal. The observations recorded in Table XIX. p. 227, were made on dog 5 after it had regained its health. The bile was collected for two days, August 23rd and 24th, to ascertain the normal secretion. On August 25th and 26th 6 grains of Resina Podo- phylli were given ; both doses occasioned decided purgation. The effect on the biliary secretion was unequivocal. On the day preceding that on which ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 227 the first dose was given the fluid bile was 220-9 grammes, bile solids 10-42 grammes ; on the following day the fluid bile was 154-5 grammes. After the second dose the fluid bile was 150 grammes, the bile solids 1-95 gramme. The next day (27th) no medicine was given, and the fluid bile rose to 297 grammes, and the bile solids to 11-99 grammes, most conclusively showing that doses of podophylline which produce purgation diminish the fluid and solid constituents of the bile. Taste XIX.—Second Series of Observations on Dog 5. Daily amount of Bile secreted before, during, and after Podophylline and Taraxacum were given. 2. 3 4 5 Weight ¢ Quantity of bile of Amount of food, in SS ae in 24 Date. dog. gr ee hours. Observations. Pann ; || Fluid! Bile | Bile Kilogs. || Water. | Milk.) Bread. Spleen.| ites: solide | celta -}. 1868. | grms. | grms. | grms. ‘ Aug. 23.)| 147 566 | 566 | 225°6 | 906°8 || 282°3/ 11:56] 3:0 || Dog in good health, though rather lean. | Feces semisolid. ee 74S Fe P 3 » || 2209] 10-42] 2-84|) Dog in good health, though rather lean. ’ | Feces semisolid. see eH) a = = - 5 154°5| 4:20) 1°58 || 6 grains Resina Podophylli given 20 hours previous to the collection of bile. Pro- Fie purgation. » 26./) 146 rey 9 a * 150 1-95| 0°52|| 6 grains Resina Podophylli given 23 hours previous to this collection of bile. De- cided purgation. Pree (3 =e “= = = Me 297 11:99} 3:21|| No medicine given. n 28. aa a a ” 842-1 || 396 10:21| 2°42)| 60 grains solid extract of taraxacum given 24 hours before this collection of bile. No purgation. eo: 14 “A rr x 906'8 || 340 9°36 | 2-12.| 60 grains solid extract of taraxacum given 24 hours before this collection of bile. No purgation. ; nw” BO: fat a FF = id Lost. | .. ie No medicine given, SR OREH NS ho 3 Spa oie As Lost.| .. No medicine given. + Sept. 1. wee 4 _ 5 ~ ay | 317 9-42| 2-46 | No medicine given. sy 2: ve = 9 pe “2 355°5| 10°61} 3°02|| No medicine given. » 3.|| 14°38 Ps 9 re a 298 9°53 | 2°27|| No medicine given, Nore.—As the weight of the dog and the amount of food eaten by it were so constant in this case, we have not thought it necessary to calculate the amount of bile secreted per Kilogramme weight of dog, or per 100 grammes of food consumed. Observations with Extract of Taraxacum. After dog 5 had had a day’s rest from the action of podophylline, 60 grains of solid extract of taraxacum were given 24 hours previous to the collection of bile on August 28th; on that day the fluid bile rose to the extent of 99 grammes, but the bile solids fell to the extent of 1:78 gramme. Next day the same dose was repeated; the fluid bile fell to the extent of 56 grammes, the bile solids to the extent of 0-85 gramme. Neither dose produced any effect upon the bowels. After this no more medicine was given. The bile was unfortunately lost on August 30th and 31st, owing to slipping of the apparatus; on the three following days the amount of finid bile fluctuated greatly. On September 2nd it was 355-5 grammes,— a larger quantity than that secreted during the 24 hours after the second dose of the taraxacum was given; on that day also (September 2nd) the amount of bile solids secreted was greater than on either of the days on which taraxacum was given. It is therefore evident that the taraxacum did not increase the solid constituents of the bile; and it is extremely probable that the large amount of fluid bile secreted after the first dose was 228 REPORT—1868. due to other causes. On September 2nd, when no taraxacum was given, the bile rose to the extent of 38-5 grammes over the amount on the previous day, and on September 3rd it fell to the extent of 57-5 grammes without any assignable cause. On the whole, therefore, it seems that taraxacum exercised no influence upon the biliary secretion. On September 35rd the observations were discontinued, as the margins of the fistula had become much ulcerated. Taraxacum was also given to dog 7, which had been the subject of the observations recorded in Tables XII., XIII., XVI., and XVIII., which had recovered his health. Taste XX.—Fifth Series of Observations on Dog 7. Daily amount of Bile secreted before and during the administration of Extract of Taraxacum. a 1 2 3 4 5 . MEEES Agnonatiottendaan Quantity of bile G) wien 2 secreted in 24 dog. STATIN EE: hours. Date Fe | : é Observations. . p . Fluid} Bile | Bile Kilogs. || Water. | Milk.) Bread. |Tripe. || yi), |solids.| salts. 1868. grms. | grms. | grms. Aug. 26.|| 29°4 846 | 564 | 225°6 |1353°6 || 192 8°53| 2°10 || Dog in excellent health. Feces solid. 9 27.) ee ” ” » » || 176 | 10%2| 2°36 || Dog in excellent health, Feces solid. »» 28.)| 29°5 ” ” ” » || 214 | 893) 1°94]) 60 grains solid extract of taraxacum given twenty-four hours before this collection of bile. No purgation. » 29. ” » ” » || 188 9°64| 2°12|/120 grains solid extract of taraxacum given twenty-fours before this collec- tion of bile. ee 19808 lunes eerie! bs » || 151 | 999] 2-45 » Ol.|| 29°3 45 ” None. | 140 843] 1°64 Sept. 2.)| .. 652 » » |1853°6 | 212-2) 129 | 3°76 || | No medicine given. Dog in excellent »” 3.) 2972 846 5 » » || 168 | 8°04) 2-51 health. ” gil 312 A oes is "|! 951-1] 12517) 3-91 Sear o8 | aie a i“ * » || 169-4] 861] 2:61||) LO: ' “ % »» || 180°6| 8°84) 1°98 || 120 grains solid extract of taraxacum given : twenty-four hours before this collection of bile. Wo purgation. » L1.|| 31 ” ” ” » 159 9:12| 2°31]| 240 grains solid extract of taraxacum iven twenty-four hours before this col- ection of bile. Wo purgation. Dog in excellent health, After the bile had been collected for two days 60 grains of solid extract of taraxacum were given ; twenty-four hours afterwards (August 28) the fluid bile rose to the extent of 38 grammes, while the bile solids fell to the extent of 1:59 gramme. Next day (29)120 grains were given, and the fluid bile fell to the extent of 26 grammes, while the bile solids rose to the extent of 0-71 gramme as compared with the previous day. These doses had no effect upon the bowels. After this, the bile was collected for five consecutive days, on which no medicine was given; on one of these days (September 1) the bile was lost owing to slipping of the apparatus. On September 2 the fluid bile reached a figure very nearly as high as it had attained during the administration of taraxacum, and the bile solids were higher than they had ever been on any of the previous days. On September 4 the apparatus was left off owing to ulceration of the skin; on September 7 it was reapplied, and the bile was collected on the four subsequent days. The large quantities obtained (September 8) the first of these days need not be paid attention to; it was most probably due to escape of bile pent up in the bile-ducts, owing to the canula not haying been used during the previous four days. Twenty-four hours previous to the collection on the 10th, 120 grammes of solid extract of taraxacum were given; on that day the fluid bile rose to ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 229 the extent of 11:2 grammes, and the bile solids to the extent of 0:23 gramme. Next day 240 grains were given, and the fluid bile fell to the extent of 21-6 grammes, while the bile solids rose to the extent of 0-38 gramme. These doses produced no effect upon the bowels. ‘he fieces were always solid. The dog was in most excellent health when these observations were discon- tinued, The observations recorded in Table XX. show, even more conclusively than those recorded in Table XIX., that taraxacum did not influence the biliary secretion in any way whatever. Results of the Observations recorded in Tables XVII., XVIIL., XIX., and XX, 1. Doses of podophylline, varying from 2 to 8 grains, when given to dogs diminished the solid constituents of the bile, whether they produced purga- tion or not. 2. Doses which produced purgation lessened both the fluid and solid con- stituents. 3. During an attack of dysentery both the fluid and solid constituents of the bile were greatly lowered. 4, Doses of the solid extract of taraxacum, varying from 60 to 240 grains, affected neither the biliary secretion, the bowels, nor the general health of the animal. INFLUENCE oF PurGAtion upon THE Brurary Secrerron. The observations of the Committee conclusively show that purgation pro- duced by a variety of causes diminished both the fluid and solid constituents of the biliary secretion. Spontaneous diarrhoea (Table X.), dysentery, (Table XVIII.), and purgation produced by Pil. Hydrargyri (Table X., and non-tabulated observations on dog 7, see p. 214), by calomel (Table X.), by corrosive sublimate (Table XI.), and by podophylline (Tables XVIL., XYIII., and XIX.) always diminished the solid constituents of the bile, and with one exception (see July 29, Table X.) the fluid portion of the bile also. That purgation diminishes the biliary function of the liver is one of the most important facts established by the Committee. It is, however, nothing more than what might have been expected, seeing that purgation drains the portal blood from which the bile is almost entirely formed. Rexatron oF Brrrary Sucretron ro ConsumPrion oF Foon. The observations of the Committee show that the relation between the biliary secretion and the amount of food consumed is by no means such a close one as Bidder, Schmidt, Arnold, and others have supposed. On looking at the collections of bile in the healthy animal previous to the administration of drugs, it will frequently be seen that while eating the same food, and without there being any apparent disturbing cause, such as diarrhea, &c., the amount of bile was nearly a half (Tables II. and III.) and even four- fifths less (Table VIII.) than on previous and subsequent days. Further, it was frequently observed that although the amount of food consumed varied greatly the secretion of bile was remarkably constant. In Table XI. are observations which illustrate this fact. During three days of perfect health the animal secreted very nearly a constant amount of bile fluid and bile solids, although the amount of food varied greatly. Thus on the first day it took 73°7 grammes of dry food, on the second day it took 14-16, and on the third day 62:37 grammes; on these days the amount of bile secreted per 230 REPORT—1868. 100 grammes of dry food was on the first day 5-64 grammes, on the second day 30-+ grammes, and on the third day 6-9 grammes. The observations recorded in Table XVI. show, however, that the biliary secretion was in the case of dog 7 greatly influenced by the amount of dry food; it will there be seen that the amount of bile secreted was greatly diminished by starvation. It therefore appears that the biliary secretion is in some cases greatly in- fluenced by the amount of food taken, while in other cases it is not influenced at all. RELATION BETWEEN BILIARY SECRETION AND WerEIGHT or ANDMAL. The close relation supposed to exist between the amount of the biliary secretion and the size or weight of the animal has not been supported by the observations of the Committee. The amount of bile secreted for every kilo- gramme weight of dog varied greatly in different cases, as the following Table shows. Taste XXI.—Average amount of Bile secreted per Kilogramme Weight of the Dogs observed by the Committee before drugs were administered. No. of dog. | Fluid bile. | Bile solids. germs. grm Wop, Wieser 6-47 0-412 i, aia 7:82 0:28 ar Pee 527 0-34 mi iS wetarked 5°76 0-293 ir terti oe: 3°53 0°146 Bl ga nt 21:8 0-301 LA Gana 20-66 0-818 5; b (fee aes 4-64 0:23 G92 Bid, 9-24. 0305 saps eee 10:2 0°58 The foregoing Table gives the per kilogramme biliary secretion only when the dogs were healthy, and not subjected to the action of drugs. The Table shows how fallacious are the calculations which have been made re- garding the human biliary secretion, from observations upon dogs, by Bidder and Schmidt. We at one time thought that the large secretion in the case of dog 5 might be due to the fact that it ate liver instead of muscle like the other dog 9; it secreted nearly as much bile, however, when, instead of liver, it ate spleen. Moreover, such an explanation could not be offered in the case of dog 6, which secreted nearly as much bile per kilogramme as dog 5. This dog was fed on a diet the same as that given to dogs 1, 2, 3, and 4, so that no peculiarity in the nature of the diet can be alleged as the cause of the large secretion in the case of dog 6. Nor can the quantity of food it took have been the cause; for the animal secreted more bile per 100 grammes of dry food than any other dog under the observation of the Committee. Seeing, then, that in the case of dog 6 neither the food nor the size of the animal can at all account for the amount of bile secreted, we must look for the cause elsewhere. One member of the Committee sug- gested that perhaps the amount of bile secreted may have a closer relation to the size of the liver than to the size of the animal. Unfortunately this idea did not oceur until after dog 6 was killed, so that its liver was not weighed ; but there is this much to be said, that dog 6 was a young dog (six months’ old); and we know that in young animals the liver is larger in pro- ON THE ACTION OF MERCURY ON THE BILIARY SECRETION. 231 portion to the rest of the body than it is in more advanced age. To ascer- tain whether or not there be anything in this idea would require observations to be made on dogs of various sizes and ages. The biliary secretion, amount and nature of food, and weight of the animal would require to be observed for three or four days; the animal ought then to be immediately killed and its liver weighed, and calculations based on such data. It is, however, improbable that the size of the liver determines the amount of the biliary secretion; the great variation which we frequently observed in the secre- tion from day to day in the same animal is opposed to such an idea, EFF£ct oF THE Loss OF Binz vPoN THE HEALTH OF THE ANIMAL. Although an animal may live in perfect health for a considerable time without any bile passing into its alimentary canal, it would appear, from the observations of all who have experimented on the subject, that, even when a fistula has been established without accident, the health sooner or later begins to suffer. Emaciation comes on, and death results from inanition. Much depends on the strength of the animal, which, when vigorous, usually preserve their health. Dog 7, the retriever sent us by Dr. Kelburne King of Hull, had the operation for biliary fistula performed on April 24, 1868. Notwithstanding the wearing of apparatus for collecting the bile during a period of nearly two months, partial poisoning with corrosive sublimate, purgation with podophylline, and dosing with taraxacum, the animal was on the 11th of September, 1868, when our observations terminated, as strong as it was before the fistula was made ; and so far from exhibiting any signs of emacia- tion, it had gained nearly 4 kilogrammes (8-8 pounds) in weight during the five months it lived, without a drop of bile passing into the intestines. Such a case favours the view of Blondlot and Arnold, as to the inutility of the bile for the purposes of digestion. It is in itself quite sufficient to show that the entrance of bile into the alimentary canal is not essential for the health of the animal, and supports the idea that the bile is a secretion destined to be little more than a mere excretion. Errect or Muscurar Movements vpon tue Frow or tue Bizz. It was frequently observed that when the dogs were taken out of their cages, in which their movements were much circumscribed, and allowed to run about, that during the first half hour or so of their increased movement the amount of bile discharged by the fistula was greatly augmented. This was in all probability due to the bile being more rapidly expelled from the hepatic ducts by the pressure upon the liver of the contracting abdominal muscles, which must, when in action, compress the liver like a sponge, and so expel its contained fluid. This fact is valuable in serving to show that exercise may have an important influence upon the liver. It further points out, however, how utterly fallacious must the results have been had we endeavoured to estimate the daily secretion of bile from collections made during a few minutes at a time, such as were made by Bidder and Schmidt, regarding which, however, we have previously expressed our opinion. It is unnecessary to dwell upon the importance of the results which the Committee have taken so much pains to arrive at. If the refutation of a widespread error be as important as the establishment of a new truth, the practical advantage of demonstrating that mercury is not a cholagogue can- not be too highly estimated. Although in recent times the administration of 232 REPORT—1868. mercurials for hepatic diseases has greatly diminished, their employment is still very general, and in India almost universal. Recent cases demonstrate that long-continued salivation and great loss of health have been produced in the attempt to remove old abscesses or other chronic diseases of this organ, and there are few of its lesions in which it is still not thought advisable to try small or full doses of the drug. On this subject, however, it is unnecessary to dwell at present; the real question is, whether the evidence is satisfactory, or whether further re- searches are necessary. On this and many other topics connected with therapeutics, what we require are not unfounded assumptions and vague spe- culations, but positive knowledge based on unquestionable data; these we have furnished, and consider them amply sufficient to demonstrate the fallacy of the opinions everywhere prevalent as to the cholagogue action of mercury. It would be vain attempting to convey an adequate idea of the great la- bour, wearisome repetition of observations, numerous disappointments, and loathsome manipulations which have tested the zeal, endurance, and courage of Drs. Rutherford and Gamgee, on whom the entire labour of the experi- ments devolved. The difficulties and expense have been greatly increased by the want of a proper locality for carrying on such investigations, and by the necessity of combating the well-meaning but, we humbly think, mistaken notions of those who maintain that physiologists are not justified in experimenting on animals, even with the objects of determining more accurately the use of poisonous drugs and of preserving the life of man. A very different doctrine might have been expected to exist in a great University like that of Edinburgh ; but its Senatus, led astray by the reasoning, we regret to say, of an influential member of the Medical Faculty, unquestionably, by its resolutions, greatly added to the toil and annoyance of the Committee’s proceedings. On the other hand our warmest thanks are due to Mr. Nunneley of Leeds, to Dr. Kel- burne King of Hull, and Dr. Andrew Buchanan of Glasgow, for their kind assistance in forwarding animals to us. Last Report on Dredging among the Shetland Isles. By J. Gwyn Jerrreys, FR.S. Tus was my eighth expedition to the northern extremity of our seas, and occupied the whole of the summer. It was not so successful as those in some previous years, owing to the stormy state of the weather. While my friends in England, Wales, Ireland, and Scotland were enjoying calm sunshine, our climate was exactly the reverse ; and the persevering course of the wind (from north-west to south-west) prevented our doing much at sea. This part of the North Atlantic is notoriously subject to broken weather, it being the point where the warm air induced by the Gulf-stream and westerly winds meets the cold air brought down by the arctic current. The fauna of the Shetland waters, however, is by no means exhausted. Every expedition has produced novelties, not only in the Mollusca, but in all other depart- ments of marine zoology. On the present occasion I obtained, at a depth of 120 fathoms, a living specimen and a larger dead one of a fine species of Plewrotoma, P. carmata of Bivona. It was originally described as a Calabrian fossil; Jan and Bel- lardi have given it from the Upper Tertiaries of North Italy, the former un- der the name of Fusus modiolus; and Searles Wood records a single specimen ON DREDGING AMONG THE SHETLAND ISLES. 233 having been found in the Coralline and another in the Red Crag. Professor Sars and Mr. M‘Andrew dredged a few specimens off the coasts of Norway ; and the former gave some interesting particulars of the animal, which I have been able to confirm by my own observation. Although allied to P. nivalis, and found in the same locality, it has distinct eyes placed on rather prominent stalks or ommatophores, whereas P. nivalis has no eyes nor any trace of eye-stalks. On this account Sars proposed the generic name T7'yphlo- mangelia for the latter species; but it must be borne in mind that Hulima stenostoma is also eyeless, and yet is closely related to its congeners and com- panions, all of which have very conspicuous eyes. It is a somewhat remark- able coincidence that the shell of Z. stenostoma resembles a large Achatina acicula, which is in the same category as regards these so-called organs of sight. The shells of P. carinata and P. nivalis are easily distinguishable. Among the rarer and more noteworthy mollusks procured this year were the following :— Montacuta tumidula, St. Magnus Bay and near Fetlar. Described by me from the Hebrides in the Reports of the Association for 1866. M. donacina, 8. Wood. A single valve from deep water in St. Magnus Bay. Another valve had been dredged by me at Falmouth in 1839. It isa rare Coralline Crag fossil. Its nearest ally is WM. substriata. Utriculus globosus, Lovén. A small living specimen occurred this year also in St. Magnus Bay. U. expansus, Jeffr. A few young specimens again in St. Magnus Bay. Odostomia Warreni, Thompson. Never having seen this shell in a fresh and perfect state, I considered it (Brit. Conch. iv. p. 143) a variety of O. obliqua. But the discovery of live specimens in St. Magnus Bay and near Fetlar enables me to separate the two as distinct species. O. Warreni has a shorter spire and more swollen whorls than. 0. obliqua, the suture is deeper, the strize are much stronger at the base of the shell, the whole surface is covered with most delicate and close-set microscopic spiral lines, and the umbilicus is well developed and deep. The animal of 0. Warreni has a peculiar foot ; this is not plain and rounded at its extremity, as in O. obliqua, but is deeply bilobed or forked like the tail of a swallow. No other species of Odostomia, so far as I am aware, has a similar foot. One individual spun a fine gluti- nous thread from the middle of the foot, and kept itself suspended for some time from the surface of the water, with the point of the shell downwards. I found a dead specimen of O. obliqua on the same ground with O. Warreni. O. wnbilicaris, Malm. A young specimen from St. Magnus Bay, nearly globular, and thus exhibiting the same distinctive characters as the adult. Stphonodentalium Lofotense and Cadulus (or Loxoporus) subfusiformis were again found, the former being more widely distributed. Both inhabit the Mediterranean; and the latter is a Sicilian and Viennese fossil. JI had an excellent opportunity of observing them alive and in active motion. The thread-like and extensile organs by which the Solenoconchia seize their prey are unlike the tentacles of any Gastropod, and their function is quite dif- ferent. I would call these organs captacula, an appropriate word and not less classically formed than tentacula. Leda pernwla was dredged, as before, in St. Magnus Bay ; but with it was a dead and apparently semifossil valve of Tellina calcaria. I must therefore hesitate in considering the one more than the other recent or an inhabitant of the British seas at the present time. Perhaps Lamellaria prodita, Lovén, may be added to the list; but unfor- tunately the specimen was handled too roughly, and the shell was crushed to 1868. | 8 234 REPORT—1868. pieces. Its extraordinary size (considerably more than an inch in length) and the depth (110 fathoms) at which it was dredged deserve notice. Being in the south of Europe last winter I had an opportunity of examin- ing Mediterranean and Adriatic shells; and the result greatly surprised as well as interested me. The dredgings of Capt. Acton (the Commandant of the Italian navy) in the Gulf of Naples, and the extensive collections of Dr. Tiberi at Portici, General Stefanis at Naples, Herr Weinkauf from Algeria, and of Dr. Brusina at Zara, especially yielded a vast quantity of new material for a comparison of the marine testacea of the north and south of Europe. Many of the species having been described (some insufficiently) under dif- ferent names, the difficulty of identification is considerable; but there is no doubt that a remarkable concordance exists, and to a great extent, between the mollusca which inhabit the deeper parts of the Atlantic and Mediterranean seas from 62° to 36° N. lat. The littoral kinds differ much more—a cir- cumstance which may have been occasioned by climatal conditions. To ex- emplify the former proposition I subjoin a list of 76 species, usually considered northern, which are common to the North Sea and the Mediterranean, with their principal synonyms. Names of Species. Synonyms. Terebratula caput-serpentis, Linné. Argiope lunifera, Philippi ........ Terebratula cistellula, Searles Wood. Crania anomala, Miiller .......... Anomia turbinata, Pol?. Pecten septemradiatus, Mill. ...... Ostrea inflexa and O. clavata, Poli. Plavatus,'Gmelin 622% ove teeta P. Bruei, Payraudeau. Ps Destey Bion . 5.04. se adaete ts P. furtivus, Lovén. P. striatus, Mill. DP CH OS ayMs (8207-28 510 jay0 bco)0 vin ese P. imbrifer, Lov. P, vitreus, Chemnitz. .icsceccceees P. Gemellarii-filu, Biondi. PSION) GSE Gi seed erste vaio «s,s (aysi% P. pygmeeus, von Miinster. Tima Sarsiiy-Lov. ose sens eue sss Perhaps L. crassa, Forbes. L. elliptica, Jeffreys. L. subauriculata, Montagu. IPinng TUB} TAO Ak Maat ..... P. pectinata of some authors, not Mytilus phaseolinus, Ph. of Linné. Modiolaria discors, Z. Nucula nitida, G. B. Sowerby. IN, Ons Oh oe ae he Nts eR N. decipiens, Ph.; N. egeensis, orb. Leda pygmeea, v. Miinst. ATCA OplGua;? de. shh u es | hee A. Korenii, Danielssen. A. nodulosa, Mil, i.e edie ed A. scabra, Poli; A. aspera, Ph. Lepton nitidum, Turton. Montacuta ferruginosa, Mont. Lucina borealis, Z. Axinus Croulinensis, Jeffr. Cyamium minutum, Fabricius. Cardium minimum, Ph. .......... C. suecicum, Lov. Astarte sulcata, Da Costa ........ Tellina fusca, Poli. Lucinopsis undata, Pennant ...... Venus incompta, Ph. Tellina/balthien, alive sai. iit sities T. rubiginosa, Poli. T. pusilla, Ph. Scrobicularia nitida, Miill. ........ Syndesmya intermedia, Thompson. Lyons Norvegica,, Chr wast. 8 bic Pandorina coruscans, Scacchi. Thracia convexa, W. Wood........ T. yentricosa, Ph. Nevera rostrata, Spengler .......... N. attenuata, Ford. Xylophaga dorsalis, Trt. Siphonodentalium Lofotense, Sars. S. quinquangulare, Forb.........05 Dentalium variabile, Costa (Faun. Nap.), not of Deshayes ; 5. penta- gonum, Sars, ™ o- aa aL - ON DREDGING AMONG THE SHETLAND ISLES. 235 Names of Species. Synonyms, Cadulus subfusiformis, Sars. Chiton Hanleyi, Bean. C. cancellatus, G. B. Sow. @F cinereus, Desa eile eclns ee es C. asellus, Sp. Glevis; Dlont:c apie rerr ec ote C. corallinus, Risso. Tectura virginea, Miill. Propilidium ancyloides, Ford. Scissurella crispata, Flemung ...... S. aspera, Ph., var. Trochus cinerarius, Z., var. variegata. Rissoa reticulata, Mont. .......... R. Beanii, Hanley. R. cimicoides, Fork. ......+..005 R. sculpta, Forbes § Haney, not of R. Zetlandica, Mont. Philippi. : R. abyssicola, Ford. R. parva, Mont., and var. interrupta R. obscura and R. simplex, Ph. R. inconspicua, Alder. Teall sees TG Pienieleinion pot oO Om re R. Oenensis, Brusina. R, vitrea, Mont. Jeffreysia diaphana, did........... Rissoa? glabra, Ald., not of Brown. Aclis Walleri, Jeffr. Odostomia clavula, Lov. O. albella, Zov. O. wmbilicaris, Malm. O. conspicua, Ald. O. Scillee, Seacchi. O. nitidissima, Mont. Eulima bilineata, A/d. Natica catena, Da Co oe. ccc eens Probably Nerita helicina, Brocche. Velutina levigata, Penn, Cerithium metula, Lov. ......606 Mediterranean, fide Hanley. Purpura lapillus, L. Trophon Mérchi, Malm .......... Bela demersa, Tiber. Bulla utriculus, Broccht .......... B. Cranchii, Leach. Philine scabra, Mill. ...........- Bullea angustata, Biv. Aplysia punctata, Cuvier.......... A. hybrida, J. Sowerby. Spirialis retroversus, FV........... Sczea stenogyra, Ph.; oceanic. Clio pyramidata, Z...........005- Oceanic. How is this concordance to be accounted for? I have carefully read again Forbes’s elaborate essay “On the Connexion between the distribution of the existing Fauna and Flora of the British Isles, and the Geological changes which have affected their area, especially during the epoch of the Northern Drift ” (Memoirs of the Geological Survey of Great Britain, vol. i. 1846) ; but TI cannot find in it a satisfactory solution of the question. He, indeed, men- tions the continuance of some “arctic” species in the British seas, the rest haying “retired for ever,” and that certain other species which he called “ Boreal or Celtic” occurred in a fossil state in Sicily; and he states (p. 390) that “in the deepest of the regions of depth in the Aigean ” the same repre- sentation of a northern fauna as exists in our own seas is maintained, “ partly by identical and partly by representative forms.” The instances he gives do not support such a view; and I am nota believer in “ representative forms.” He evidently was not aware of the fact that boreal (not arctic) species still live in the Mediterranean. I, however, fully agree with him that at some former period (which he designates “the newer pliocene epoch”) there was an open communication between the Atlantic (according to him the “ North Seas”) and the Mediterranean, by which the fauna became diffused. I should be inclined to place the Atlantic point of communication at Bordeaux, and that of the Mediterranean at Narbonne, in the line of the Languedoc s2 235 REPoRT—1868. Canal, which extends from one coast to the other, and is very little above the present level of the sea. This communication must have been very wide ; and it remained open during the glacial epoch, which affected not only the north of Europe, but also Naples, Sicily, and probably Rhodes. Dr. Tiberi showed me a fine valve of Pecten Islandicus which had lately been fished up in the Gulf of Naples at a depth of 50 fathoms, and with it a valve of P. opercularis quite as large as northern specimens ; both the valves were in a semifossil state, and the former was covered with the same Greenland species of Spirorbis (S. cancellatus, Fabr.) as I noticed on valves of P. Islandicus dredged in the Shetland seas at depths varying from 75 to 170 fathoms. Sir Charles Lyell has.not adverted, in the last edition of his ‘ Principles of Geology,’ to the remarkable occurrence of such glacial fossils in the Shetland sea-bed, to which I called the attention of geologists in my former Reports as well as in the second volume of ‘ British Conchology,’ p. 58; and he seems to have overlooked the observations of Philippi and Seguenza on the fossils of Calabria and Sicily, when he stated (Prine, Geol. i. p. 298) that “‘ deposits filled with arctic species of marine shells are to be seen in full force on the North American continent ten or more degrees further south than in Europe.” Possibly he was misled by one of Forbes’s conclusions (Rep. Geol. Sury. p. 402), that “no glacial beds are known in Southern Europe.” This, however, was more than twenty years ago. I have myself identified from the Calabrian and Sicilian deposits several high-northern shells (e. g. Zere- bratula cranium, T. septata, Lima excavata, Mytilus modiolus, Cyprina Islan- dica, Mya truncata, var. Uddevallensis, Saxicava Norvegica, Puncturella Noa- china, Emarginula crassa, Buccinum undatum, and Natica affinis or clausa), and from the Rhodian deposits Terebratula septata and Lima Sarsit. My old companion, Mr. Waller, picked up on the beach in a small bay on the west coast of Shetland a shell of Spirula australis. It is a tropical Cephalopod, and is not unfrequently thrown up by the waves on the southern and western shores of England, Wales, and Ireland, together with exotic species of Teredo, Lanthina, and Hyalewa brought from southern latitudes. Dr. Mérch informs me that several shells of the Spirwa have this year been found in the Faroe Isles. The transport of such tropical productions to northern latitudes has been usually attributed to the Gulf-stream. It now, however, appears more probable that this is the consequence, not of the direct action and course of the Guli-stream, but of the prevalence of westerly and south-westerly winds, which waft onwards to northern latitudes, in a north- erly and north-easterly direction, the floating objects carried to a certain distance by the Gulf-stream. The direct course of the Gulf-stream has not been observed further north than about 45° N. lat.; from that point it would seem to dwindle into a north-easterly surface drift. A chart will shortly be published by the Admiralty in explanation of this view of the case; and the following papers on the subject ought to be consulted by physical geographers : —Dr. Stark «On the Temperature of the Sea around the coasts of Scotland during the years 1857 and 1858, and the bearing of the facts on the theory that the mild climate of Great Britain during winter is dependent on the Gulf-stream” (Trans. R. 8. Edin. 1859), and Capt. Thomas’s tables and re- marks in Mr. Alex. Buchan’s Report ‘“‘On the Temperature of the Sea on the Coast of Scotland” (Journ. Scottish Meteor. Soc. Oct. 1865). See also ‘Br. Conch.’ vol. i. (Introd.) pp. xeviii and xcix. T will add a short summary of the observations recorded in my Reports on Shetland dredgings and in the work last cited. 1, The bathymetrical zones have been too much divided by Risso and sub- sequent authors. There are two principal zones, littoral and submarine ; the nature of the habitat and the supply of food influence the residence and mi- ON DREDGING AMONG THE SHETLAND ISLES. 237 gration of animals, not the comparative depth of water. Psammobia costu- lata and Buccinum undatum are instances in support of this proposition. 2. Specimens or varieties of the same species are larger in the littoral and laminarian zones than in deeper water: e. g. Mactra solida and its variety elliptica, Solecurtus candidus, Pandora inequivalvis and its variety obtusa or pinna, Chiton levis, Tectura virginet, Trochus zizyphinus, Pleurotoma leevi- gata, and Philine aperta. 3. The size of North-European specimens is usually greater than that of South-European specimens of the same species, e. g. Pecten septemradiatus, P. opercularis, Lima hians, Mytilus Adriaticus, Isocardia cor, Astarte sulcata, Venus exoleta, V.lincta, Tellina balaustina, Chiton Hanley, Tectura virginea, Natica Alderi, Defrancia teres, D. purpurea, and Bulla utriculus. 4, The colour of specimens from the greatest depths is not less vivid than of those from shallow water, although each zone has colourless specimens. Venus ovata, Trochus zizyphinus, Turritella terebra, and Eulima bilineata may be mentioned as examples. This was lately confirmed by a great authority, Professor Sars, who has given* numerous instances in illustration of it, founded on his son’s dredgings at depths varying from 250 to 300 fathoms among the Loffoden Isles. The recent investigations of Dr. W. B. Carpenter and Pro- fessor Wyville Thomson in the North Atlantic, by means of the dredge, at much greater depths show also that the shells there procured (e. g. Venus ovata and Columbella haliceti) were highly coloured_and variegated. In the ‘ Bul- letin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology ’ at Harvard College, Cambridge, U.S., for 1868, will be found an interesting paper by Count L. F. Pourtales, entitled “Contributions to the Fauna of the Gulf-stream at great depths.” He says that at the greatest depths which he explored, reaching to 517 fathoms, “the prevailing colours are white, pink, sometimes playing into orange, anda pale green. Blue was only seen in a small encrusting sponge.” And he further remarks that ‘“‘ the deep-sea animals have generally well-developed eyes, larger, if anything, than those of their congeners of shallow water.” 5. Mollusca inhabiting deep water have a larger supply of oxygen for the aération of their gills than those which live in shallow water. See my account of Columbella haliceti. 6. The occurrence of the same species in the North Sea and the Mediter- ranean results partly from former geological or cosmical conditions, and partly from a communication which once existed between the Bay of Biscay and the Gulf of Lyons. 7. Oceanic or floating shells of exotic species are carried northwards by west- erly winds, and not directly by the Gulf-stream, which does not reach our coasts. 8. Land and freshwater mollusca are scarce in Shetland, owing to the scantiness of succulent vegetation for their food, and of lime for the con- struction of their shells. These are smaller than southern specimens; and the same fact is observable with respect to Shetland insects. 9. Semifossil shells of arctic species (such as Pecten Islandicus, Tellina calearia, Mya truncata, var. Uddevallensis, Molleria costulata, Trochus cinereus, and Trophon clathratus) are met with on the sea-bottom at considerable depths, and at some distance from land. The only explanation I can offer is a former elevation of the sea-bed whereon these mollusks lived (and which was probably in shallow water), its conversion into dry land, and a subsequent subsidence. Perhaps the sea-bed is still sinking. 10. Species recorded from the Coralline Crag and earlier deposits, and sup- posed to be extinct, have now been discovered living in the Shetland seas ; e. g. Limopsis aurita, Pleurotoma carinata, and Columbella haliceti. Possibly * Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhandlinger for 1868, pp. 27 & 28. 238 REPORT—1868. Trochus amabilis is another case, assuming that it originated from Margarita? maculata of Searles Wood.’ Professor Dickie has been good enough to report on some Diatoms from the insides of a quantity of Echinus Norvegicus, which were dredged at a depth of 78 fathoms about forty miles from the east coast of Shetland. He says they are chiefly Navicula didyma, Coscinodiscus eacentricus, C. minor, Acti- nocyel us undulatus, and Melosira sulcata, with fewer of M. nummuloides and Nitzschia angularis, all marine ; also a few freshwater Cocconema lanceolatum, Surirella minuta, and fragments of a Pinnularia. And he adds that long ago he recorded the occurrence of freshwater Diatomaceze mixed with marine species from the stomachs of Ascidiew taken in deep water off Aberdeen. The freshwater Diatoms must evidently have been carried by a stream into the sea, and transported by the tide to the place where they sunk to the bottem, and were swallowed by the indiscriminating Hchini and Ascidie. Diatoms inhabit the surface only of the water, and Globegerina and other Foraminifera not of a fixed or sessile nature have been observed by Major Owen and myself to float when alive within a few inches from the surface. Dr. Wallich found the microscopic organisms which he called coccospheres “ profusely in a living, or perhaps it would be more safe to say a recent, condition in material col- lected at the surface of the open seas of the tropics.” Coccospheres and free Foraminifera cover the bed of the Atlantic at enormous depths. The occur- rence, therefore, of such organisms on the floor of the ocean at such depths does not prove that they ever lived there. I should rather be inclined to believe that they dropped to the bottom of the sea when dead or after having passed through the stomachs of other animals which had fed on them. A few small fishes were caught in the dredge at depths of from 90 to 100 fathoms. Dr. Giinther reports that they belong to the undermentioned spe- cies :—Callionymus maculatus (Bonap.), Gobius Jeffreysii (Giinth.), young, Cyclopterus lumpus (L.), young, Lepadogaster bimaculatus (Penn.), and Rhombus Norvegicus (Giinth.), young. He remarks that the last-named species is new to the British fauna, having been hitherto known from the coast of Norway only. Mr. Norman will report on the Crustacea, Tunicata, Polyzoa, Hydrozoa, Echinoderms, Actinozoa, and Sponges, Dr. M‘Intosh on the Annelids, and Mr. Waller on the Foraminifera. Mollusca inhabiting the Shetland Isles and the adjacent seas. (See Tables of distribution in ‘ British Conchology,’ vols. i.—iv.) : ae Remarks as to distribution Name of Species. = a and synonymy. ae 5 = A |n MARINE. BRACHIOPODA. Terebratula cranium, Miiller ....| — | — | Vigo (M‘Andrew). caput-serpentis, Linné| — | — +Terebratella § spitzbergensis, Da- VIASOM« i6:s.stdid SAH GS REE Oa eevers — Possibly fossil. +Rhynchonella psittacea, Z. ....| — Possibly fossil. Argiope lunifera, Philippi ...... — | — | Terebratula cistellula, 8. Wood. Crania anomala, Miiller ........ — | — | Anomia turbinata, Poli. << 6| 6| 4 ON DREDGING AMONG THE SHETLAND ISLES. 239 Name of Species. CoNCHIFERA. Anomia ephippium, Z. patelliformis, Z........ Ostrea edulis, Z. ........++005- Pecten pusio, Z. 2... seers eee ee opercularis, LZ. septemradiatus, Mill. faratus, Gmelin tigrinus, Mill. tTeste, Bivona striatus, Miill........... tvitreus, Chemnitz similis, Laskey WHAKANIUS, Lie ian so = a oi Lima Sarsii, Dov............5- telliptica, Jeffreys subauriculata, Mont. ...... Loscombii, G. B. Sowerby. . Pinna rudis, L. eee vena @ ae ep elena)» eee renee Pe a Mytilus edulis, Z. modiolus, Z. Adriaticus, Lamarck.... phaseolinus, Ph........- Modiolaria marmorata, Forbes .. Gascony Liao as 16 18 17 62 5 & | | Ophiuroidea 111210000: 14 16 14a pale =p UCrinoidea .........06- 3 4 pac ae IO Gr Semin oon . 74 21 < Bt, fs AU GVONATIANS yreieyel er sielols 1 15 Uf | Actinozoa . Ctenophora...... Seer a Gk 11 1 34 = Lucernariada .......... 13 14 5 5 eeaphore jae es "hie oie'sa\|) 02 92 52 | [ PATHE CHB mete bhh s cioves stats 36 72 26 | 3 Hydrozoa .2 coerce Medusze ” 69 69 24 +104 iS) | Calycophorida ........ 1 1 1 | le Physophorida.......... 3 a Le $s Calcaxeaie tii as a‘scas nie 10 12 5 Bua) LOPEtera. sa ieem Smear teh winners & 101 177 73 83 Ae IKGPDEOSB, Mice cote ete ais 10 12 5 ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC, 258 IL. Co mparison of the Shetland Invertebrate Marine Fauna with that of other portions of the British Coast. No really satisfactory comparison can be made between the number of animals here reported on as inhabiting the Shetland Sea with those found on other portions of our coast. Unfortunately very little attention has hitherto been paid to any, except the larger and more conspicuous forms belonging to these classes. In order, however, that this comparison may be carried out as far as at present practicable, I give the following summaries of the most fully worked up local lists that I am acquainted with. CRUSTACEA. A. B D. E, F, G 8 Sa 3 nl , aaa a ort 2 3 2 ne Ss = FH £ Se jee 3 3 a qd =| 52 BB =| Bs Ss = io) Eneresy 2 a 2 a So Le! ° Lv pas = oS a n Z isa qi A (a) oF MBEHCOYULE! sss qs vse +e 18 13 16 18 23 30 PAUUTIIULED Ie cle. shaie ch aanooerev 11 11 6 5 8 8 IRONED iavel cavern sia eee sine 26 11 18 17 24 22 Stomapoda BS Cree 23 9 6 4 4 Amphipoda ....;....... 110 53 47 oa 22 Tsopoda ......escee seen 21 8 11 hwllopods .seecss +. -s 1 1 1 RIBAOCELA: ccs. s agen e oo 2 2 0 OSEAC OGD cua wlsieleis 8s sue 87 19 65 30 53 67 Copepoda ...........4:. 51 12 22 Gummi pediag ies ene selves 6 9 3 Pycnogonoidea........+. 6 10 1 362 158 196 74. 81 113 B.— Norman, “Report of Deep-Sea Dredging on the Coast of Northumberland and Durham, 1862-64. Crustacea,” Nat. Hist. Transac. Northumb. and Durham, vol. i. (1865) p. 12. C.—Norman, “Report of Committee appointed for the purpose of Exploring the Coasts of the Hebrides by means of the Dredge.—Part I1.,” British Assoc. Report, 1866, p. 193. D.—Rev. G. Gordon, “A List of the Crustaceans of the Moray Firth,” Zoologist, 1852, p. 3678; and the Ostracoda from G. 8. Brady, Trans. Linn. Soe. vol. xxyi. p. 478. E.—Kinahan, “‘ Report ‘of the Committee appointed to dredge Dublin Bay,” Brit. Assoc. Report, 1860, p. 27; and “ Report on Crustacea of the Dublin District,” Brit. Assoc. Report, 1£59, p. 262. F.—A. G. Melville, “List of Crustacea Podophthalmia of Galway Marine Districts,” Nat. Hist. Review, vol. iv. (1857) p. 151; and the Ostracoda added from Mr. G. 8. Brady’s paper in Trans. Linn. Soe. vol. xxvi. G.—G. 8S. Brady, “A Monograph of the Recent British Ostracoda,” Trans. Linn. Soc. vol. xxvi. p. 478,—this being the fullest district list given by him, 254 REPORT—1868. TUNICATA. The only catalogues for comparison with the thirty-nine Shetland Tunicata are Alder’s list of those of the Northumberland and Durham coasts (Catalogue of the Mollusca of the Northumberland and Durham Coasts, p. 101), which includes thirty species, my own very short list of sixteen observed in the Clyde district (“‘ The Mollusca of the Firth of Clyde,” Zoologist, 1857, p. 5703), and a third of twenty-one Hebridean species by Mr. Alder (Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866, p. 206). Potyzos AND Ca@LENTERATA. j H. He | K, L. | Northumber- | Shetland. land pee an Hebrides. and Durham. oes Polyzoa. Cheilostomata ........ 102 59 87 54 Cyclostomata .......... 21 12 14 10 Ctenostomata.......... 10 16 17 2 Pedicellinea’ .$3.... 73. 3 3 3 0 hophopea~ hrs srs hee: 1 0 0 0 | Actinozoa. Zoantharia !./2 266.68. 21 11 37 4 Aleyoneirisy 3. cites oly s8tle fi 4 6 Ctenophora:..:.....:.. 1 0 0 0 Lucernariada .......... 5 2 2 0 Hydrozoa. 3 Mhecaphotaenan pct 52 56 58 28 Athecata Per. mete a2 26 23 19 4 ‘‘ Naked-eyed Medusze ” 24 0 0 0 Calycophorida ........ Tt 0 0 0 IPhysop boride. crje7-hyake 1 | 0 0 0 275 | 136 | 2 108 1.—Alder, ‘“‘ Catalogue of the Zoophytes of Northumberland and Durham,” 1857, and “ Supplement ” to the same, 1862. K.—Rev. T. Hincks, “ Catalogue of the Zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall,” 1861-62. . L.—Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866, p. 199. EcHINODERMATA. M= "| N. O. RP; Q. R. | Northumber- | | Mor Shetland. land Hebrides. Orkney. | 3; +) |Dublin. : irth. and Durham. Holothuroidea ....| 14 9 9 3 1 4 Echinoidea ...... 15 10 6 t 6 5 Asteroidea........ aly 8 Sd yaa G 11 8 Ophiuroidea ...... 14 10 9 | 7 a ff Crinoidea ....:... 2 a B50) 1 nh Rul aa hie oe Bi” | a6" | ae ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 255 N.—G. Hodge, “Report of Deep-Sea Dredging on the Coasts of Northum- berland and Durham, 1862-64.—Echinodermata,” Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and Durham, vol. i. p. 42. 0.—Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866, p. 198. P.—Dr. W. B. Baikie, ‘Catalogue of the Echinodermata of Orkney,” Zoologist, 1853, p. 3811. (Several species are included in Dr. Balfour Baikie’s list for which no Orkney habitat is given ; these are here omitted.) Q.—Rev. G. Gordon, “ List of the Echinodermata hitherto met with in the Moray Firth,” Zoologist, 1853, p. 3781. R.—Kinahan, Brit. Assoc. Report, 1860, p. 31. PoRIFERA. The only local List of Sponges is one recently published by Mr. E. Parfitt, «On the Marine and Freshwater Sponges of Devonshire” (Trans. Devonshire Association for the Advancement of Science, Literature, and Art, 1868) ; it includes forty-nine marine species, while the Shetland species observed by us are eighty-three. Only eighteen of these species are as yet known to be common to these two extremities of our islands. Ii. Species added to the British Fauna during the recent Dredging. The new species which have during the past six years been discovered in Shetland have from time to time been published through various channels, a large proportion of them haying been placed in the hands of those naturalists who were engaged in bringing out works on the several branches of marine zoology. The following list of 156 species is therefore given here in order to show at a glance the additions to our fauna which have directly resulted from the investigations of the Dredging Committee. Portunus tuberculatus, Rowe. Pagurus tricarinatus, Vorman. Crangon serratus, Vorman. Sabina septemcarinata (Sabine). Lophogaster typicus, MZ. Sars. Thysanopoda Norvegica, M. Sars. Mysis inermis, Rathke. - ornata, G. O. Sars. Mysidopsis hispida, Norman. Gastrosaccus sanctus (Van Beneden). Nematopus serratus, G. O. Sars. Nannasticus binoculoides, Bate. Diastylis echinata, Bate. —— hbispinosa (Stimpson). levis, Morman. spinosa, Worman. Kroyera altamarina, B. § W. Syrrhoé hamatipes, Norman. Lilljeborgia Shetlandica, B. & W. Dexamine Vedlomensis, B. §& W. Atylus macer, Vorman. Calliopius Fingalli, B. § W. Mesamphopus cornutus, Worman. Protomedeia pectinata, Norman. Heiscladus longicaudatus, B. & W. Amphithoé albomaculata, Aréyer. Siphoncecetes typicus, Avdyer. Cyrtophium armatum, Norman. Corophium tenuicorne, Vorman. Hyperia oblivia, Kroyer (not B. & W.). Metoécus medusarum, Krdyer. Phryxus longibranchiatus, B. §& W. Cumella agilis, Vorman. Probolium serratipes, Norman. Anonyx nanus, Kroyer. nanoides, Lilljeborg. —— ampulla (Phipps). tumidus, Kroyer. Stegocephalus ampulla (Phipps). Opis leptochela, Bate §- Westw. Pontoporeia aftinis, Lindstrém. Ampelisca levigata, Lilijeborg. Cidiceros parvimanus, B. § WW. —— equicornis, Norman. CiroJana truncata, Norman. ~ Pontocypris hispida, G’. O. Sars. Cythere dubia, G. S. Brady. —— costata, Brady. —— mucronata (G. O. Sas). abyssicola (G. O. Sars). —— crenulata (G@. O. Sars). —— leioderma, Norman. Cytherura concentrica, C. B. § R. (MS.). flavescens, Brady. —— quadrata, Norman. —— navicula, Norman. 256 REPORT—1868. Sarsiella capsula, Vorman. Cytheropteron alatum, G, O. Sars. Bythocythere tenuissima, Norman. Cypridina Norvegica, Baird. Conchoécia obtusata, G. O. Sars, Polycope dentata, Brady. Cyclops nigricauda, Norman. pallidus, Worman. Amymone falcata, Norman. Cleta forcipata, Claus. Tigriopus Lilljeborgii, Norman. Thalestris Clausii, Norman. Porcellidium subrotundum, Norman. Aspidiscus fasciatus, Norman. Ascomyzon echinicola, Norman. Lichomolgus forficula, Thorell. Entorocola eruca, Norman. Notodelphys czerulea, Thorell. prasina, Thorell. Doropygus auritus, Thorell. Botachus cylindratus, Thorell. Notopterophorus papilio, Hesse. Nogagus Liitkeni, Vorman. Brachiella rostrata, Krdyer. Nymphon Stromii, Kroyer. Ascidia obliqua, Alder. rudis, Alder. —— plebeia, Alder. Polyclinum succineum, Alder. Menipea Jeftreysii, Norman. Hippothoa expansa, Norman. Membranipora sacculata, Vorman. Lepralia cruenta, Norman, laqueata, Norman. abyssicola, Morman. polita, Norman. — microstoma, Norman. —— minuta, Norman. tubulosa, Norman. Celleporella lepralioides, Norman. pygmea, Norman. Cellepora attenuata, Alder. Palmicellaria elegans, Alder. Hemeschara struma, Vorman. Eschara lorea, Alder. Hornera borealis, Bush. violacea, M. Sars. Alecto diastoporides, Norman. Rhabdopleura Normani, Allman. Thyone elegans, Norman, Spatangus meridionalis, Risso. Kchinus pictus, Vorman. Asterias Milleri, JZ. Sars. Astropecten acicularis, Norman. Archaster Parelii (Diib. & Kor.). Ophiura Sarsii, Liithken. Ophiopeltis securigera, Diib. § Kor, Zoanthus anguicoma, Norman. Cuspidella humilis, Hincks. grandis, Aincks. Obelia plicata, Hincks. Gonothyrza hyalina, Aincks. Clava diffusa, Allman. Tubiclava cornucopie, Norman. Coryne nutans, Allman. vermicularis, Hincks. Eudendrium annulatum, Norman. —— vaginatum, dlman. Perigonimus minutus, Allman. Tubularia bellis, Al/man. —— attenuata, Allman. Physophora (? borealis, Sars). Normania crassa, Bowerbank. Kcionemia compressa, Bow. Polymastia bulbosa, Bow. radiosa, Bow. Tethea spinularia, Bow. Dictyocylindrus virgultosus, Bow. Phakellia robusta, Bow. Microciona ambigua, Bove. simplicissima, Bow. Hymeraphia coronula, Bow. Hymedesmia radiata, Bow. occulta, Bow. Hymeniacidon reticulatus, Bow. —— perarmatus, Bow. —— membrana, Bow. —— paupertas, Bow. Halichondria forcipis, Bow. simplex, Bow. —— scandens, Bow. mutulus, Boz. —— inornata, Bow. —— falcula, Bow. Isodictya jugosa, Bow. —— laciniosa, Bow. Raphioderma coacervata, Bow. Oceanapia Jeffreysii (Bow.). Desmacidon Peachii, Bow. constrictus, Bow. LE Scandinavian and Aretie Species which have not been observed further south than Shetland, for the most part inhabitants of very deep water. Sabineea septemcarinata (Sabine). Lophogaster typicus, WZ. Sars. Nematopus serratus, G. O. Sars. Anonyx nanoides, Lilljeborg. ampulla (Phipps), Stegocephalus ampulla (Phipps). Pontoporeia affinis, Lindstrdm. Amphithoé albomaculata, Kroyer, Siphoncecetes typicus, Kréyer. Metoécus medusarum, Kréyer. ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. Pontocypris hispida, G. O. Sars. Macrocypris minna (Baird). Cythere costata, Brady. — mucronata (G. O. Sars). abyssicola (G. O. Sars). crenulata (G. O. Sars). Cytheropteron alatum, G. O. Sars. Cypridina Norvegica, Baird. Conchoécia obtusata, G. O. Sars. Bicellaria Alderi, Buss. Membranipora cornigera, Bush. —— rhynchota, Bush. vulnerata, Busk. Alysidota Alderi, Bush. Lepralia bella, Busk. abyssicola, Norman. —— microstoma, Norman. Lepyralia ringens, Busk, monodon, Bush. Celleporella lepralioides, Norman. Tessarodoma gracile (M. Sars). Eschara levis (Fleming). Hornera yiolacea, Sars. Defrancia truncata (Jameson). Kchinus Norvegicus, Diib. § Kor. Cidaris papillata, Leske. Archaster Parelii (Diib. § Kor.). Ophiura Sarsii, Liithken. Ophiopeltis securigera, Diib. § Kor. Astrophyton Linckii, Miill. § Trosch. Antedon Sarsii (Diib. §. Kor.). Ulocyathus arcticus, M. Sars. Lophohelia prolifera (Linn.). Primnoa lepadifera (Linn.). Wi Species which have as yet only been found in the Shetland Seas*. Pagurus tricarinatus, Norman. Probolium serratipes, Norman. CEdiceros zequicornis, Norman. Syrrhoé hamatipes, Vorman. Atylus macer, Vorman. Megamphopus cornutus, Norman. Protomedeia pectinata, Norman. Cyrtophium armatum, Morman. Corophium tenuicorne, Norman. Cirolana truncata, Norman. Cythere dubia, G. S. Brady. leioderma, Norman. Cytheridea Zetlandica, Brady. Cytherura navicula, Norman. Sarsiella capsula, Norman. Cytheropteron rectum, Brady. Bythocythere tenuissima, Norman. Polycope dentata, Brady. Amymone faleata, Norman. Porcellidium subrotundum, Norman. Aspidiscus fasciatus, Norman. Entorocola eruca, Vorman. Ascomyzon echinicola, Norman, Nogagus Liitkeni, Norman. Polyclinum succineum, Alder. Hippothoa expansa, Norman. ? Lepralia umbonata, Bush. Celleporella pygmzea, Norman. Cellepora attenuata, Alder. Eschara lorea, Alder. Hemeschara struma, Norman. ? Pustulipora orchadensis, Bush. Rhabdopleura Normani, Ad/man. Thyone elegans, Norman. Cucumaria fucicola (Forbes § Goodsir). Psolinus brevis (Forbes § G'oodsir). * Of course it will be understood that all that is meant by this expression is that we as Actinia intestinalis, Fleming. —— vermicularis, Forbes. Zoanthus anguicoma, Vorman. Sidisia Barleeii, Gray. Paracyathus Thulensis, Gosse. Cuspidella humilis, Hincks. erandis, Hincks. Obelia plicata, Hincks. Gonothyrza hyalina, Hincks. Clava diffusa, Allman. Coryne vermicularis, Hincks. nutans, Allman. Eudendrium annulatum, Vorman. vaginatum, Ad/man. Perigonimus minutus, Allman. Tubularia bellis, Al/man. attenuata, Allman. Thaumantias maculata, Forbes. globosa, Forbes. melanops, Forbes. lineata, Forbes. Trachynema rosea (Forbes). Pandea globulosa (Forbes). Tiara turrita (Forbes). Lizzia blondina, Forbes. Margelis nigritella (Forbes). Steenstrupia rubra, Forbes. KEctopleura pulchella (Forbes). Geodia Zetlandica (Johnston). Kcionemia compressa, Bow. Quasillina brevis (Bovw.). Polymastia bulbosa, Bow. Tethea spinularia, Bow. Halicnemia patera, Bow. Dictyocylindrus virgultosus, Bov. Phakellia robusta, Bow. yet know nothing whatever of the distribution of the species contained in this list. 257 258 REPORT—1868. Microciona levis, Bow. ? Halichondria Batei, Bow. —— ambigua, Bow. albula, Bow. simplicissima, Bow. inornata, Bow. Hymeraphia vermiculata, Bow. —— mutulus, Bow. coronula, Bow. falceula, Bow. Hymedesmia radiata, Bow. Isodictya varians, Bow. Zetlandica, Bow. jugosa, Bow. occulta, Bow. —— Barleei, Bow. Hymeniacidon reticulatus, Bow. —— fimbriata, Bow. perarmatus, Bow. Raphioderma coacervata, Bow. membrana, Bow. Oceanapia Jeffreysii (Bow.). aupertas, Bow. Desmacidon Peachii, Bow. Halichondria forcipis, Bow. constrictus, Bow. —— simplex, Bow. Diplodemia vesicula, Bow. scandens, Bow. Verongia Zetlandica, Bow. Ee Mediterranean Species which occur in Shetland, but have not been found at intermediate localities. Two large and conspicuous animals, Portunus tuberculatus, Roux, and Spatangus meridionalis, Risso, have been found abundantly in these dredgings at a depth from eighty to one hundred and forty fathoms. They are well known in the south of Europe, but were supposed up to the time of their discovery in Shetland not to occur north of the Mediterranean. It is not unlikely that Pagurus tricarinatus, Norman, will also prove to be a deep- water Mediterranean form. All deep-water dredging seems to establish this fact more clearly, that deep-water species have a much more extended geo- graphical range than shallow-water and littoral forms. These Mediterranean species must have made their way northwards in the abyss of the sea round the western coast of Ireland, in which locality they will doubtless at some future day be found. The classes on which it is my lot to report have been so much neglected, and our knowledge therefore of their distribution is at present so extremely limited, that it is at present impossible to draw any satisfactory conclusions as to their range; but I feel satisfied that when hereafter fuller and more accurate investigation shall have been carried on both in the Mediterranean and our own coasts, not only will the number of species common to the two extremities of Europe be found to be much greater than is now generally supposed, but also that a very large proportion of such species will prove to be forms which will be met with in the depths of the Mediterranean and of the seas to the west and north of our country, but which will be found to be absent from the channels which intersect and the shallower water which immediately surrounds our islands. Meanwhile the occurrence of Portunus tuberculatus and Spatangus meridionalis is of excessive interest, as such fine and handsome species could not haye been well over- looked, or have failed to attract attention in any portion of the sea which has been at all efficiently dredged*. The contents of the three Tables (IY., V., and VI.) added together give the * The following northern Mollusca have been identified by Mr. Jeffreys from the Mediterranean, but are not known elsewhere south of the north of Scotland or Shetland Sea:—Pecten aratus, P. vitreus, Lima Sarsii, Leda pygmea, Scissurella ecrispata, Aclis Walleri, Cerithiwm metula, &e.; the occurrence also of the following in the Mediterranean is very unexpected :—Terebratula caput-serpentis, Crania anomala, Pecten septemradiatus, Awinus Croulinensis, Chiton Hanleyi, Propilidium aneyloides, Rissoa abyssicola, Scalaria Trevelyana, Odostomia Scille, Bulla utriculus, &e, eee ee eee ee ae eee ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 259 number of Shetland species which are as yet unknown off other parts of the British coast as one hundred and forty-eight. Vat. Southern and other forms which are not as yet known to the North of Stenorhynchus longirostris (4ad.). Inachus leptochirus, Leach, Portunus holsatus (4ad.). tuberculatus, Rows. Porcellana platycheles (Pennant). Pagurus Hyndmanni, Thompson. —— ferrugineus, Norman. Galathea dispersa, Bate. Crangon trispinosus, Hailstone. Nika edulis, Risso. Hippolyte cultellata, Norman. Mysidopsis hispida, Norman. Nannasticus binoculoides, Bate. Diastylis levis, Norman. —— lamellata, Norman. spinosa, Vorman. Cumella agilis, Norman. Aphinoé serrata, Norman. gracilis, Bate. Cuma scorpioides (Montagu). Probolium monoculoides (Montagu). marinum (Bate). pollexianum (Bate). Lysianassa Audouiniana, Bate. — longicornis, Lucas. Anonyx longicornis, Bate. —— melanophthalmus, Norman. Callisoma crenata, Bate. Cidiceros parvimanus, B. § W. Monoculodes Stimpsoni, Bate. Kroyera altamarina, B. & W. Urothoé, species. Lilljeborgia Shetlandica, B.S W, Helleria coalita, Norman. Dexamine Vedlomensis, B. §& W. Atylus gibbosus, Bate. bispinosus, Bate. Pherusa.fucicola, Leach. Calliopius Ossiani (Bate) ?. Eusirus Helvetize, Bate. Gossea microdeutopa, Bate. Microdeuteropus versiculatus, Bate. Websteri, Bate. Protomedeia hirsutimana, Bate. Bathyporeia Robertsoni, Bate, Meera brevicaudata (Bate). Heiscladus longicaudatus, B.S W. Sunamphithoé hamulus, Bate. Shetland. Sunamphithoé conformata, Bate. Podocerus variegatus, Leach?. falcatus (Montagu). pelagicus (Leach). Cerapus abditus, Templeton. —— difformis (M.-Edwards). Neenia rimapalmata, Bate. excavata, Bate. Unciola planipes, Norman. Corophium longicorne (/abr.). Dulichia porrecta, Bate. Phryxus Galathez (Hesse). Cirolana spinipes, B. § W. Eurydice pulchra, Leach. Arcturus gracilis, Goodsi. Pontocypris acupunctata, G, S, Brady. Bairdia inflata (orman). complanata, Brady. Cythere quadridentata, Baird. emaciata, Brady. antiquata (Baird). acerosa, Brady. Paradoxostoma Normani, Brady. ensiforme, Brady. Cylindroleberis Mariz (Baird). Copepoda, very many. Ascidia rudis, Alder. sordida, A. & H. depressa, A. § H, plebeia, Alder. elliptica, 4. & H, Molgula citrina, A. § H. Salicornaria Johnsoni, Bush. Membranipora imbellis, Hincks. Rosselii (Audowin). Lepralia Brongniartii (Awd.). —— Hyndmanni, Johnst. —— Woodiana, Busk, —— discoidea, Bush. innominata, Couch. —— bispinosa, Johnst. collaris, Norman. —— pertusa (Esper). labrosa, Busk. —— simplex, Johnst. tubulosa, Norman. Buskia nitens, Alder. So little is known of the Scandinavian and Arctic Celenterata and Pori- fera that I have omitted these altogether from this list. ; 260 REPORT—1868. WEL. Species peculiarly characteristic of the Fauna of the Outer Haaf. The following list gives the species which impart a peculiar character to the fauna of the deep sea of Shetland, known as the “ Outer Haaf,” in a depth of 80-170 fathoms. The Molluscan inhabitants of this region are highly interesting, but it is not within my province here to speak of them. Crustacea are few in numbers, Portunus tuberculatus, Munida, two or three species of Orangon, Pandalus brevirostris, Cumacea, Ampelisca, and Epimeria tricristata being the most abundant. Echinodermata are abundant, and cer- tain species sometimes in tie most extraordinary profusion. Polyzoa and Sponges are very abundant, but of Coelenterata there are but few species; those species which do occur belong, for the most part, to the Zoantharia. Caryophyllia Smithii var. borealis is found inhabiting these depths in marvellous abundance; Zoanthus anguicoma is common, creeping over Sponges from the greatest depths, and an occasional Bulocera eques or Tuedic, or a noble Ulocyathus areticus presents itself to our admiring gaze, Very few Tunicata occur below seventy fathoms. The names which follow are of the most abundant or, at any rate, more conspicuous species; the list might, had I so wished, haye been greatly extended. Hyas coarctatus, Leach. Portunus pusillus, Leach. tuberculatus, Rowe. Ebalia tuberosa (Penn.). Atelecyclus septemdentatus (Montagz). Pagurus pubescens, Kroyer. Munida Bamffia (Penn.). Crangon Allmani, Avnahan. nanus IKrdyer. spinosus, Leach. serratus, Norman. Sabinza septemcarinata (Sabine). Hippolyte securifrons, Norman. —— cultellata, Norman. Pandalus annulicornis, Leach. —— previrostris, Rathke. Lophogaster typicus, M, Sars. Cumacea, species. Anonyx tumidus, Ardyer. Ampelisca, species. Kyoyera altamarina, B. § IV. Odius carinatus (Bate). Epimeria tricristata, Costa. Amphithoé albomaculata, Avroyer. Siphoneecetes typicus, Ar éyer. Neenia rimapalmata, Bate. Pontocypris mytiloides (Norman). Bairdia complanata, Brady. Macrocypris minna, Baird. Cythere concinna, Jones. —— angulata (G. O. Sars). —— dubia, Brady. costata, Brady. —— mucronata (G'. O. Sars). —— antiquata (Baird). Cythere Jonesii (Baird). —— abyssicola (Sars). crenulata (Sars). —— leioderma, Norman. Cytheridea papillosa, Bosquet. —— punctillata, Brady. —— subflavescens, Brady. —— Sorbyana, Jones. Eucythere declivis (Vorman). Sarsiella capsula, Vorman. Cytheropteron nodosum, Brady. —— latissimum (Norman). —— alatum, G. O. Sars. Bythocythere turgida, G. O. Sars. Cypridina Norvegica, Baird. Conchoécia obtusata, G. O. Sars. Polycope dentata, Brady. —— orbicularis, G. O. Sars. Verruca Stroémia (Miller). Alcippe lampas, Hancock. Nymphon Stromii, Kroyer. Serupocellaria inermis, Norman. Bicellaria Alderi, Bask. Flustra Barleei, Bask. Hippothoa catenularia, Jameson. —— expansa, Norman. Membranipora sacculata, Vorman. —— Dumerillii (Audowin). —— cornigera, Busk. —— rhynchota, Busk. —— Rosselii (Audowin). —— vulnerata, Bush. Lepralia crystallina, Norman. auriculata, Hass. —— hella, Busk. ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. Lepralia sinuosa, Bush. —— cruenta, Norman. ansata, Johnst. —— Woodiana, Bush. ventricosa, Hass. laqueata, Norman. abyssicola, Norman. polita, Norman. —— microstoma, Norman. —— ringens, Bush. —— monodon, Busk. Alysidota Alderi, Busk. Celleporella lepralioides, Norman. yemea, Norman. Cellepora dichotoma, Hincks. —— ramulosa, Linn. attenuata, Alder. cervicornis, Lillis §: Sol. Palmicellaria elegans, Alder. Tessarodoma gracile (Sars). Hemeschara struma, Norman. Eschara levis (#7eming). lorea, Alder. Skenei (Ellis § Sol.). Retipora Beaniana, King. Crisia eburnea, var. producta, Smtt. Hornera borealis, Busi. violacea, Sars. Idmonea Atlantica, Forbes. Tubulipora lobularis, Zassall. Alecto major, Johnst. —— compacta, Norman. diastoporides, Norman. Defrancia truncata (Jameson), Synapta digitata (Mont.), purple variety. Thyone raphanus, Dib. § Kor. Thyonidium hyalinum (Forbes). Cucumaria Hyndmanni (Thompson). Spatangus purpureus (Jliller). meridionalis, 2isso. Kehinocardium ovatum (Leske). Brissopsis lyrifera (Forbes). Toxopneustes pictus, Vorman. 261 Echinus Norvegicus, Diib. § Kor. —— Flemingii, Bell. —— esculentus, var. tenuispina, Vorman. Cidaris papillata, Leske. Cribrella sanguinolenta, var. abyssicola, Norman. Goniaster Phrygianus (Parelius). Porania palvitlas (Miller). Archaster Parelii (Diib. § Koren). Astropecten acicularis, Norman. Ophiura affinis, Liitken. —— Sarsii, Liithen. Amphiura Ballii (Thompson). Antedon Sarsii (Diib. § Kor.). Bulocera eques, Grosse. Tuedize (Johnst.). Zoanthus' anguicoma, Norman. Caryophyllea Smithii, var. Fleming. Ulocyathus arcticus, Sars. Diphasia alata, Hincks. Tubiclava cornucopiz, WVorman. Normania crassa, Bowerbank. Ecionemia compressa, Bow. Quasillina, brevis (Bov.). Polymastia spinula, Bow. Tethea cranium (Miller). Halicnemia patera, Bovw. Dictyocylindrus rugosus, Bow. Phakellia robusta, Bow. ventilabrum (Linn.). Microciona, species. Hymeraphia, species. Hymedesmia, species. Hymeniacidon lingua, Bow. —— ficus (Esper). Halichondria forcipis, Bow. Isodictya infundibuliformis (Zrnn.). laciniosa, Bow. fimbriata, Bow. Raphioderma coacervata, Bow. Oceanapia Jettreysii, Bow. Verongia Zetlandica, Bow. borealis, IX, Species especially characteristic of the Fauna of the Southern portion of the British Isles, which are wholly absent from the Shetland Seas. rom this list are excluded most of such southern forms as are rare and very local in their distribution. Achzus Cranchii, Leach. Pisa, genus. Maia squinado (Herbst). Xantho floridus (Montagu). —— tuberculatus, Bell. Pilumnus hirtellus (Zznn.). Perimela denticulata (Mont.). Portumnus latipes (Penn.). Portunus marmoreus, Leach. Portunus corrugatus (Pennant). longipes, Asso. —— arcuatus, Leach. Polybius Henslowii, Leach. Pinnotheres pisum (Penn.). veterum, Bosc. Nautilograpsus minutus (Zinn. )(= Planes Linnana, Bell), Gonoplax angulata (Fabr.). 262 Corystes cassivelaunus (Pennant). Thia polita, Leach. Dromia vulgaris, M.-Edw. Diogenes varians (Costa) (=Pagurus Dillwynii, Bate). Callianassa subterranea (Mont.). Axius stirynchus, Leach. Gebia, genus. Palinurus yulgaris, Lat. Crangon sculptus, Beil. Alpheus, genus. Typton spongicola, Costa. Athanas nitescens, Leach. Hippolyte viridis, Ozto. Paleemon serratus (Penn.). Leachii, Bell. varians, Leach. Pasiphea sivado, Ztisso. Mysis Griffithsiz, Bell. Squilla, genus. Orchestia Mediterranea, Costa. Deshayesii, Aud. Nicea Lubbockiana, Bate. Iseea Montagui, W.-Edw. Gammarella brevicaudata, M.-Edw. Meera grossimana (Jont.). semiserrata (Bate). Batei, Norman. Dryope, genus. Caprella acutifrons, Zatr’. Paranthura Costana, Bate. Bopyrus squillarum, Latr, Gyge branchialis, Cor. § Panc. (=G. Galathee, B. § W.). Tone thoracica (Montagu). Rocinela Danmoniensis, Leach. Conilera cylindracea (Mont.). Idotea linearis (Penn.). acuminata (Leach). appendiculata (Ztzsso). Dinamene, genus. Campecopea, genus. Nessa bidentata (Adams). Balanus spongicola, Brown. perforatus, Bruguiére. 7 Acasta spongites, Poli. Pyrgoma anglicum (Leach). Scrupocellaria scrupea, Busk. Notamia bursaria (Linn.). Caberea Boryi (Aud.). Flusiva papyracea, Ellis. REPORT—1868. Lepralia violacea, Johnst. —— Gattye, Lands. —— variolosa, Johnst. —— figularis, Johnst. Cecelii (Aud.). —— divisa, Norman. —— vulgaris (Moll/.). —— venusta, Vorman. armata,.incks. Cellepora edax, Bush. Eschara foliacea, Ellis & Sol. sanguinea, WVorman. Amathia lendigera (Linn.). Mimosella gracilis, Hincks. Holothuria nigra, Couch (P=H. tubu- losa, Zinn.). Echinus lividus, Zamk. Asterina gibbosa (Penn. ). Zoantharia, numerous. Sphenotrochus M‘Andrewanus, M.-Zadw. Balanophyllea regia, Gosse. Gorgonia verrucosa, Linn. Sertularia nigra, Pallas. Plumularia cristata, Lamk. —— tubulifera, Hincks. ?—— fusca, Johnst. —— pennatula (Ellis 8 Sol.). ‘obliqua (Saunders). Leuconia nivea (Johnst.). Grantia tessellata, Bow. Leucosolenia contorta, Bow. Tethea Collingsii, Bow. —— Schmidtii, Bow. Halyphysema Tumanowiczii, Bow. Ciocalypta penicillus, Bow. Dictyocylindrus fascicularis, Bow. Hymeniacidon Brettii, Bow. — albescens, Bow. — caruncula, Bow. sanguinea (Grant). aurea (Mont.). Halichondria corrugata, Bow. nigricans, Bow. Isodictya rosea, Bow. fistulosa, Bow. —— mammeata, Bow. simulans, Johnst. Desmacidon segagrophila (Johnst.). Chalina Montagui (Johnst.). limbata (Montagu). seriata (Johnst.). Enumeration of Species. Clas CRUSTACEA. There is no text-book which embraces all the orders of Crustacea, and which can be followed in this class. Even for the separate orders few guides can be found that are at all up to the standard of the present state of our knowledge of the British forms. For the Podophthalmia I have in ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 263 the main followed the arrangement of Bell’s ‘ British Stalk-eyed Crustacea ; ’ but the law of priority in nomenclature is not sufficiently attended to in that work, and it is necessary therefore, in numerous instances, to substitute the earlier names under which the species was described ; and moreover so greatly has the study of eyen these larger and better known Crustacea advanced during the last few years that, of the seventy-eight species of this subclass here recorded, no less than thirty-one are undescribed in the work referred to. In the Amphipoda and Isopoda I have followed the general arrangement of the recently published work upon ‘ The British Ses- sile-eyed Crustacea,’ by Messrs. Bate and Westwood. In the Ostracoda, two admirable guides exist in Herr G.'O. Sars’s ‘ Oversigt af Norges marine Ostracoder, 1865, and Mr. G. 8. Brady’s “ Monograph of the recent British Ostracoda” (Trans. Linn. Soc. vol. xxvi. 1868). In the Copepoda, I have derived great assistance from Dr. Claus’s ‘ Die frei-lebenden Copepoden,’ and from the smaller memoirs by the same author. Descriptions of most of the remaining species in the following catalogue must be sought in the various papers, monographs, and works which will be found referred to in the text. Order BRACHYURA. Stenorhynchus rostratus (Linn.) (S. phalangium, Penn.). 5-70 fathoms, hard ground, frequent. longirostris (Fabr.)(S.tenuirostris, Leach). Afew specimens off Balta &e. Inachus Dorsettensis (Penn.). Very rare. One specimen in 1864, and a few more in 1867. dorhynchus, Leach. Bressay Sound, off Balta, &e. leptochirus, Leach. Not rare in deep water. Hyas araneus (Linn.), Large in laminarian zone. coarctatus, Leach. The most abundant of the higher Crustacea in the Shetland seas. Eurynome aspera (Pennant). Rare. Xantho rivulosus (Risso). One young specimen dredged (1867) near the Island of Balta. Small examples have been taken in Sweden by Lovén and Goes. Cancer pagurus, Linn. Carcinus meenas (Linn.). Remarkably large. Portunus depurator (Linn.). Very rare, only two specimens. holsatus, Fabr. Frequent. pusillus, Leach. Frequent. tuberculatus, Roux, Crust. de la Méditerranée, pl. xxxii. figs. 1-5, = Portunus pustulatus, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Rept. 1861 (1862), p. 151. This fine addition to our fauna was first procured by me in 1861, and has been taken every year since. It is the most abundant of the genus in the Shetland seas, living in 80-120 fathoms. The fact of this fine Mediterranean species occurring in the deep Shetland seas, in company with many other southern forms, which are not known in intermediate localities between the Mediterranean and the most northern portion of the seas, is highly interesting. Portunus tuberculatus is distinguished by its tubercular, pustulose carapace, by the acuteness of the latero- anterior teeth, and the great size of the posterior tooth, which is double the length of the preceding ones, and by the last legs having the swim- ming-blade furnished with a raised median line. 264. REPORT—1868. Fbalia tuberosa (Pennant) (#. Pennantii, Leach). Abundant. tumefucta (Mont.) (#. Bryerii, Leach). A single specimen, 1864. Curi- ously I have not found £. Cranchiit in Shetland, though it seems widely distributed on the Scotch coast. Atelecyclus septemdentatus (Montagu), = A. heterodon, Leach. Common. Order ANOMURA. Lithodes maia (Linn.). Porcellana platycheles (Pennant). Tide-marks, Out Skerries and Lerwick. longicornis (Linn.). Common; a pretty variety with white carapace in the neighbourhood of the Out Skerries. Pagurus Bernhardus (Linn.). Prideauxii, Leach. Common, always with Adamsia. — cuanensis, Thompson. Rare, 15 fathoms. Vidlom Voe, 1861; also 5-7 miles off Balta, 40-50 fathoms, 1867. pubescens, Kroyer (P. Thompsoni, Bell). Common. A variety occurs in which the hands are entirely free from the hairs which ordinarily clothe them. —— Hyndmanm, Thompson. 3-12 fathoms; Bressay and Balta Sounds ; hard ground. —— levis, Thompson. Common on the Haddock (soft) grounds. ferrugineus, Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist. Oct. 1861, pl. xiii. figs, 1-8. Two specimens taken in Dourie Voe, 1861. —— tricarinatus, n. sp. Right chelate foot much larger than left; meta- carpus nearly smooth above, but having a few slender porrected spines on the distant margin, below (as well as succeeding joints) tuberculate ; wrist spinosely tuberculate ; hand ovate, broad, with three much raised keels, one median and two lateral, which are denticulate on the crest ; surface of hand, in the hollow between the keels, tuberculate; finger broad, flattened, having the outer margin covered with much elevated tubercles. Left hand and wrist narrow, pinched up (as in P. pubescens) into a spine-crowned keel; outer margin of hand with a row of spines. First two pair of walking legs having the upper margin spined. AIL the limbs slightly hispid, the hairs more especially developed on the left cheliped. Length 1? inch. Three examples dredged in deep water in 1867. There are two Mediterranean species to which this fine Pagurus closely approaches, Pagurus angulatus, Risso, and Pagurus meticulosus, Roux. The figures of the former would well accord with P. tricari- natus, were it not that the keels of the hand are smooth instead of strongly tuberculate; and the latter appears to differ from our Shet- land form in the more elongated hands. It is, however, not improbable that the Pagurus here described may hereafter prove to belong to one of these southern species. Order MACRURA. Galathea strigosa (Linn.). squamifera (Montagu). —— nexa, Embleton. Rare, one specimen only, near Whalsey Skerries, 1861. —— intermedia, Lilljeborg (G. Andrewsii, Kinahan). Not common. I am indebted to Prof. Lilljeborg for typical specimens of this species, which ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACDA, TUNICATA, ETC. 265 enable me to identify it with the British G. Andrewsii, and to correct an error I had fallen into in considering it, from his description, to be synonymous with G. dispersa, Bate. Galathea dispersa, Bate. Abundant. Munida Bamffia (Pennant) (M. Rondeletii, Bell). Homarus gammarus (Linn.). Crangon vulgarus, Fabr. Allmanni, Kinahan. Everywhere in deep water. It is unquestionably distinct from the last, which never occurs in deep water. fasciatus, Risso. Five specimens, 1868. nanus, Kroyer (C. bispinosus, Hailstone). 5-8 miles east of Balta, 40-50 fathoms, common; also Whalsey Skerries Haddock ground, and occasionally elsewhere. trispinosus (Hailstone). One specimen near Balta, 1863. ——- spmosus, Leach. Common. serratus, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report, 1861 (1862), p. 151=C. echi- nulatus, M. Sars, Videnskabs Selsk. Forhandl. i Christiania, 1861, p. 186. This species was discovered by Prof. Sars and myself about the same time. In 1861 two specimens were taken sixty miles east of Shetland ; it was not again. procured in Shetland until 1867, when it was met with in St. Magnus Bay, Sabina septemcarinata (Sabine). The only known British example was dredged, in company with the last, in 80—90 fathoms, in 1861. Nika edulis, Risso. Very local ; abundant in one day’s dredging, 25 miles N. by E. from Unst, 90-100 fathoms, 1863; St. Magnus Bay, 1867. Doryphorus Gordoni, Bate. Deep water, very local. Hippolyte varians, Leach (H. smaragdina, Kroyer). pusiola, Kroyer (H. Andrewsti, Kinahan, H. Barleii, Bate). Cranchit, Leach. Rare, and only the variety with the extremity of rostrum trifid (=H. mutila, Kréyer = H. Yarrellii, Thompson). pandaliformis, Bell. Very fine; abundant in the West Voe, Whalsey Skerries, 1861; also Balta, 1863, and Hillswick, 1867; always in laminarian zone. —— securifrons, Norman. Not uncommon in deep water. —— cultellata, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866 (1867), p. 200. Two specimens 40 miles east of Whalsey Skerries in 1861, then recorded as “ H. polaris.” There are certain particulars, however, in which Kroyer’s description does not accord with the British form, though an actual comparison of specimens may hereafter prove them to belong to the same species. Pandalus annulicornis, Leach. —— brevirostris, Rathke (Hippolyte Thompsoni, Bell, Pandalus Je reystt, Bate). Very common. Palemon squilla (Linn.). Tidemarks, Lerwick, rare, 1861. Order STOMAPODA. Lophogaster typicus, M. Sars, Skand. Naturf. Mote Christiania, 1856, p. 160, Christiania Universitets-program, 1862. Ctenomysis alata, Norman, Report British Association, 1861 (1862), p. 151. One specimen, Outer Haaf, Whalsey Skerries, in 1861; a second, Unst Haaf(?), 1868. This species, described by me in 1861, was the subject of a most elaborate monograph by Professor Sars in the following year. Thysanopoda norvegica, M. Sars, Om Slegten Uhysanopoda og dens norske 1868, U 266 REPORT—1868. Arter (Videnskabs Selsk. Forhandl. for 1863), p.2. Some young Thysa- nopode were taken in the surface-net at the Out Skerries in 1861; but only one specimen is sufficiently developed to enable me to feel confident that it has acquired the characters of the adult, and that one being a male, which is not separately described by Sars, I feel some doubt as to the identification, more especially as the young females differ in some respects (which may be the result of age) from Sars’s description. Mysis flewuosa (Miller)= Mysis chameleon, Bell, Brit. Crust. p. 336. Com- mon in rock-pools. —— inermis, Rathke, Beitr. zur Fauna Norw. Nov. Act. Ces.-Leop. xx. p. 20; Lilljeborg, Ofvers. af Vet. Akad. Foérhandl. 1852, p. 3; Frey u. Leuckart, Beitriige zur Kenntniss, Wirbellos. Thiere, p. 160 ; G. O. Sars, Beretning (1863) Zool. Reise i Christiania (1864), p. 16, = Mysis cornuta, Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift, Tredie Reekke, vol. i. (1861) p. 26, pl. i. fig. 3, a-y ; Goes, Crust. Decap. Podoph. Sueciz, p. 14. Antennal scale oblong, 4-5 times as long as broad, not half as long again as peduncle of upper antenns, about twice as long as the eye; apex very obliquely truncate, a spine at the external angle; outer mar- gin smooth. Rostrum distinctly produced into a triangular spine of moderate length. Eye-stalks ornamented with dendritic pigment mark- ings. Pereiopods with the propodos 4-articulate; nail well formed. Tel- son closely resembling that of M. fleauosa, the cleft slightly deeper and narrower ; 16-18 spines on each side, greatest distance between the last and penultimate spine. Fourth abdominal foot in male less slender and more evenly rounded throughout its length than that of M. flewuosa, to which, in its general character, it closely approaches ; antepenultimate joint not having any angular projection at its extremity ; its seta fully half as long as penultimate joint, which does not exceed the last joint in length. Distinguished from MW. flexuosa chiefly by its large and acuter ros- trum, and its shorter antennal scale. Rock-pools, Shetland, scarce ; also Cullercoats, Northumberland (A. M. N.), and Banff (Mr. Edward). —— spiritus, Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist. Dec. 1860, pl. viii. fig. 1; Trans. Tyneside Nat. Field Club, vol. iv. p. 329, pl. xvii. fig. 1; G. O. Sars, Beretning (1865) Zoologisk Reise ved Kysterne af Christianias og Chris- iia Stifter, 1866, p. 19. 5-8 miles off Balta, 40-50 fathoms, 1867. The following are important characteristics of this species, to distin- guish it from the next :—Antennal scale not widening from base to the spine on external margin, that spine (in both sexes) at about three- fifths of the distance from the base to the extremity. Eyes on long stalks, which project beyond sides of carapace. Inner margin of inner uropods with a dense crowded row of unequal-sized spines, so closely packed as to touch each other at their bases. Male having the sexual lobe of superior antenne much shorter than the peduncle; the fourth foot of pleon with the first three joints subequal in length, and the last joint subequal to the fourth. ornata, G. O. Sars, Beretning (1863) Zoologisk Reise i Christiania- stift. 1864, p. 18. tyes short, scarcely reaching beyond the sides of the carapace, and thick, widening at the cornea, which is somewhat kidney-shaped. Su- perior antenne with a stout peduncle, which is shorter than the pedun- cle of the inferior antenne ; flagella longer than the pereion. Inferior « ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 267 antenn having basal joint very short, triangular, the second long, the third two-thirds length of second ; flagellum long; antennal scale about one-third longer than the peduncle, widening from the base to the spine of external margin, thence narrower by a very oblique truncation to the apex; the very large spine in the middle of the external margin ; external margin below the spine naked, beyond the spine, apex, and inner margin with long plumose sete, the second joint of scale having one seta on each side and three terminal. Last joint of pereiopods 7-arti- culate. Sixth segment of pleon only slightly longer than fifth. Telson subequal in length to inner lamelle, and longer than preceding seg- ment; lateral spines 25-30; cleft moderately deep, and wide toward the extremity, the sides being only slightly convex, and the serration longer and larger than usual distally. Inner uropods furnished with long plumose sete all round, and a row of 16-19 rather long subequal spines, separated from each other on the inner margin. Outer lamelle narrow, and of nearly. equal breadth throughout, nearly half as long again as the inner. The male has the sexual lobe of the superior antenne unusually long, as long as the whole peduncle. The antennal scale is narrower than in the female, the spine nearer the apex than the base, and the breadth not greater at that point than nearer the base. The fourth foot of pleon is very long, and reaches beyond the telson; the outer branch very like that of WM. spiritus, but the third joint is much longer than either of the two first, which are subequal ; fifth joint not more than half the length of the fourth. Animal more or less tinted with yellowish or red. A specimen sent to me by Mr. Edward of Banff was of a very delicate rose-colour. Taken 5-8 miles east of Balta, in 40-50 fathoms ; and also off Sea- ham on the Durham coast (A. M. N.), Banff (Mr. Edward). Mysis vulgaris, J. VY. Thompson. In the stream which runs into Deal Voe, near Lerwick. Mysidopsis didelphys (Norman). Mysis didelphys, Tyneside Nat. Field Club, yol. v. p. 270, pl. xii. figs. 9-11; Mysidopsis didelphys, G. O. Sars, Beretning (1863) Zoologisk Reise i Christiania-stift. (1864) p.27. Rare, 5-8 miles east of Balta, 40-50 fathoms. ——? hispida, n.sp. Body hispid all over, the hispidity evident even on the peduncles of the eyes. Eye-stalks of moderate length. Carapace pro- duced into a broadly triangular rostrum of considerable length, reach- ing beyond the middle of the first joint of the superior antenne; a notch on each side of the front margin of carapace opposite the centre of the insertion of the eye. Superior antenne with peduncle twice as long as the eye-stalk ; first joint long, slender, very concave above, two following much thicker, the third double the length of the second, hispid like the body. Inferior antenne with peduncle only reaching the extremity of the penultimate joint of the superior; scale pro- duced, slenderly subulate, nearly twice as long as peduncle of superior antenne (somewhat less in ¢), two-jointed, second joint one-third total length, both margins fringed with long plumose set, the second joint having on each side four lateral at long intervals, and three terminal. Last joints of pereiopods 4-articulate, first articulation as long as the two following. Pleopods asin Mysis. Telson linguiform, long and narrow, subequal to preceding segment; sides margined with 30-35 spines, which are of equal length at first, but towards the extremity much larger spines alternate at various distances (e. g. every v2 268 REPoRT—1868. ~~ second, third, fifth, or seventh) with smaller spines, the rounded entire apex terminating in four spines, the outer pair much longer than the middle pair; on examining the telson from below, it is seen to form, for about half its length, an open tube, the opening consisting of a central slit, the margins of which are edged with small spines. Interior lamellz swollen at the base for the reception of the acoustic organ, but afterwards very narrow, slightly longer than telson. Outer lamelle remarkably long and very narrow, fully half as long again as inner pair; both margins of both pairs fringed throughout with long plumose sete ; inner margin of inner lamellz also closely beset with spines, which are of unequal size. In the male, the superior antenne have the last joint of the pedun- cle furnished with the usual lobe and dense tuft of hair. All the pleo- pods have a stout, large basal joint, which gives support to two branches, the inner of which in the last four pair is multiarticulate and setose, and gives off, close to the base, a small lateral lobe terminating in short- sete, but in the first pair the inner branch is rudimentary. The outer branch in the first three and the last pair is also multiarticulate and setose, but in the fourth pair is a more complicated organ, and consists of six joints at the base, all furnished on each side with a long plumose seta, and two branches of equal length, one slender, one-jointed, of equal thickness throughout, ciliate, the other having a much stouter basal joint and two multiarticulate ciliated filaments. A single male in 40-50 fathoms, 5-7 miles off Balta, in 1857 ; and both sexes previously sent to me by Mr. Edward from Banff. The descriptions of Mysis gracilis and M. linguura, G. O. Sars, come very near to the female of this species, but the present is at once dis- tinguished by haying the antennal scale two- and not three-jointed. Genus Gasrrosaccus, Norman. A genus of Mysidea. Female: marsupial pouch attached to last segment of pereion and first of pleon. First pleopod composed of a much elongated basal joint, and two short one-jointed branches; second to fifth pairs consisting of a single joint. Male having all the pleopods consisting of a basal joint, and two branches differently developed on the different segments, and the third pleopod the greatly developed sexual organ. Gastrosaccus sanctus (Van Ben.)=Mysis sancta, Van Beneden, Recherch. sur la Faune Litt. de Belgique, Crustacés (1861), p. 17, pl. vii. figs, 1-4 (the male), = Mysis spinifera, Goes, Crust. Decap. Podophth. marina Suecie (1863), p. 14 (the female),= Gastrosaccus sanctus, Norman, Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1867 (1868), p. 438. Female.—Sides of carapace extending much beyond the dorsal portion, which has its margin elegantly scalloped; fifth segment of pleon pro- ducing backwards on the back into a well-developed spine. Rostrum slightly produced, rounded at the extremity. Eyes cylindrical, on short peduncles. Superior antenne with greatly developed peduncles; first joint as long as two following, cylindrical, smooth; second joint half length of last, with three large spines in a longitudinal row on the outer margin ; filaments long and slender, the outer with its first joint long (equal about eleven of inner), and furnished on its inner face with a cutaceous process, apically setose, which reminds us of the lobe of the males of Mysis. Inferior antenne having peduncle reaching the last joint of peduncle of superior antenne ; scale short, subequal in length ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 269 to the penultimate joint of the peduncle, subquadrate; external margin smooth, terminating in a spine; apex obliquely truncate, not extending beyond level of the tip of the spine of outer angle; inner margin and apex with plumose sete. Mandible palp three-jointed, last two joints long, subequal, last slender, both setose. Flattened scalar basal joint of pereiopods having a naked external margin, terminating in a spine-like point. Last portion of pereiopod multiarticulate ; in last pair articula- tions thirteen in number, each with a spine on both margins, and spine- like sete on inner margin. Marsupial pouch attached to last pereiopods and first pleopods; the latter composed ofa long basal joint (closely resem- bling a thigh-bone in form), naked during its length, but having at the base a little lobe, bearing four long plumose sete, and having its expanded apex surrounded with a circlet of similar long sete, within which the two little branches in which the member terminates nestle ; these branches one-jointed, terminated by sete; one branch half the length of the other. The remaining pleopods, in the formr of a narrow scale, furnished with plumose sete. Telson cleft at the apex to about one-fifth of its length; sides furnished with 7-9 spines of great size, more especially the distal ones, which are equal in length to the cleft; cleft margined with rather long, sharp, slender serrations. Inner lamine sub- equal in length to (spines of) telson, narrow, fringed with long setx, and inner margin also with about ten slender spines ; acoustic organ unusually small. External lamine shorter than inner, rounded on apex ; outer margin having about twelve greatly developed curved spines instead of the usual plumose sete. Male.—Themale, instead of having a separate lobe to superior antenne, as in Mysis, has the first joint of external filament expanded in a similar manner to the female, but is more strongly developed. All the pleopeds composed of a large basal joint (in the first furnished with large plumose sete, in the others naked) and two branches; first, fourth, and fifth pairs with outer branch half as long again as peduncle, multiarticulate and setose: inner branch short, with widely diverging plumose sete ; second pair with both branches multiarticulate and plumose, the exter- nal branch rather more developed than the inner, the latter with a small lateral lobe at the base; third pair having outer branch of consi- derable length, consisting of four long, rounded, slender, smooth joints, the last haying two minute marginal spines, and terminating in two slender spines; inner branch shorter than first joint of outer, multiar- - ticulate and plumosely setose ; basal joint giving off a small lateral lobe. Length three-quarters of an inch. Dredged 5-8 miles east of Balta, in 40-50 fathoms; also Banff (Mr. Edward), Firth of Clyde (Mr. D. Robertson), and off the mouth of the Tees and Norfolk coast (Mr. G. 8. Brady). : Genus Nematopus, G. O. Sars. Allied to Mysis. Superior antenne having first joint of peduncle with a setiferous process on the outer margin; the last joint in male with a hirsute lobed appendage. Pereiopods very long and slender, 8-jointed, nearly fili- form, with very few hairs, terminating in a well-formed nail. No external branchiz. Marsupial pouch as in Mysis. Pleopods in female rudimentary as in Mysis, but in male well developed, two-branched ; branches multiar- ticulate; the external branch with a setiferous process on its inner margin ; in the first pair the terminal part rudimentary, and without sete. Telson 270 REPORT—1868, yery short, scarcely longer than broad, apically broadly truncate, and ter- minating in four strong spines and two plumose sete, Acoustic organ large. Nematopus serratus, G, O, Sars, Om eniSommeren 1862, Zoolog, Reise i Christ, og Trondhjems Stifter (1863), p. 43. Carapace rounded in front, not produced into a rostrum, but a spine springs from between the eyes, and bears the appearance of a rostrum. Eyes reniform, clavate, wider than long. Superior antenne with mid- dle joint of peduncle very short, first and third subequal. Antennal scale lanceolate, about half as long again as peduncle of inferior an- tenne, transversely truncate at the apex ; external margin haying 8-9 spine-like processes down the side (each similar in character to the single apical spine of the scale in Mysis flecuosa and its allies). Pereiopods remarkably long and slender, last joint terminating in a bunch of hairs. Telson not half the length of the inner laminz, no lateral spine, distally broadly truncate, and furnished with four long spines, the inner pair the more greatly developed ; in the middle between these are two plumose sete. External lamine considerably longer than inner, narrow, and of nearly equal width throughout; both margins of both pairs of laminz fringed with plumose setz, which on external margin of outer laminz are slender and short, Colour white, with a reddish spot on each side of each segment of pleon, and a band across the fourth ; sometimes also a longitu- dinal line on each side of the carapace. The very large reniform eyes are of a lovely and brilliant ruby-red. Length half an inch, Dredged on muddy bottom in 40-60 fathoms, St. Magnus Bay, 1867. Order CUMACEA. Nannasticus binoculoides, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist. 3rd ser. vol. xv. (1865) p. 87, pl. i. fig. 4. The type specimen dredged in 1863; again in surface net, Lerwick Bay, 1867, by Mr. D. Robertson. Diastylis echinata, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist. 3rd ser. yol. xy. (1865) p. 87, pl. i. fig. 1. The type specimen dredged in 1863. bispinosa (Stimpson)= Cuma bispinosa, Stimpson, Marine Invertebrata Grand Manan, p. 39; Danielssen, Reiseberetning 1 Thr. Vid, Selsk. Sknift. Bd. iy. p. 108, = Cuma cornuta, A. Boeck, Videnskabs Selsk. Forhandl. 1863, p. 190, = Diastylis bicornis, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist. 3rd ser. vol. xv. (1865) p. 84, pl. i. fig. 2, =Diastylis bispinosa, G, O. Sars, Om den aberrante Krebsdyrgruppe Cumacea og dens nordiske Arter (1864), p. 39. The first British specimen dredged in Shetland in 1863, and described by Mr. Bate under the name Diastylis bicornis. —— levis, n. sp.,=? Alauna rostrata, Goodsir, Edinb. New. Phil. Journ. vol, xxxiv. (1843) p. 130, pl. iv. figs. 1-10. Pereion, viewed laterally, elongated ovate, seen from above, widest in the middle, ovate; carapace rather longer than the free segments, dorsal margin well arched, surface only slightly hispid, wholly devoid of spines; lateral margins spined; rostrum acute, slightly bending up- wards. Last segment of pereion with the sides produced backwards into short blunt processes. Upper antennz haying last joint of peduncle as long as the first and longer than the second ; filament as long as last joint of peduncle. First feet with the first joint very long, equal, or nearly . equal, to the remaining portion of the limb; both margins furnished with plumose sete, spinose on the side; last three joints subequal. Second feet haying the fourth joint as long as the first, and longer than ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 271 the last two combined, Telson subequal to the long peduncle of lateral appendages, lageniform, gradually tapering from near the base to the extremity, about twelve spines on each side; terminal spines not larger than preceding. Lateral appendages with long and slender peduncle, with about 25-30 spines on the inner margin ; inner ramus not half so long as peduncle ; first joint equalling in length the two others; inner margin furnished with spines of similar character to those of peduncle, eight on first joint, three on second, four on last; the spines are peculiar, having a minute cilium springing from them at half their length: outer ramus longer than inner, ending in 3-4 long spine-like sete; margins almost naked, only having very few scattered sete. Male wholly deyoid of spiny armature on cephalothorax and pleon, First joints of first and second legs spinose. ‘Telson with fewer (about - eight) and much more slender lateral spines, and the terminal spines considerably larger than the others, Lateral appendages nearly as in 2, but the branches longer, the inner more than half length of the peduncle. Length half an inch. This seems to be the commonest species in our seas. It is nearly allied to D. Rathkii, but the cephalothorax is shorter and more tumid, and free from spines. Shetland and Durham coast (A. M. N), Moray Firth (Mr. T, Edward). Diastylis lamellata, Norman, Brit. Assoc, Report, 1866 (1867), p. 200. Two specimens, St. Magnus Bay. spinosa, n, sp, Male.—Pereion, viewed laterally and dorsally elongated ovate; carapace toothed in the latero-anterior margin, and having a crested line passing from behind, yery near to and subparallel with the inferior margin, which curving round in front meets the crest which comes from the opposite side at a short distance behind the rostrum; this crest, throughout the greater part of its length, is composed of little flat plates, which lie close against each other; in front, however, the line is broken up into distinct and separate spines. Rostrum with rows of small spines on each side; a slight central carina on the carapace, Segments of pereion smooth, not spined; last segment produced backwards laterally into much produced and acute processes. Pleon having each of the first five segments furnished with three more or less developed longitudinal rows of spines on the back, and two at the edges of the underside; the hin- dermost spine of each row the most developed. Sixth segment un- spined. Superior antenne much developed; peduncle long, last joint x furnished with a dense brush of auditory cilia; filaments long. First joint of last gnathopods and of all the pereiopods with strong spines. First pereiopods with the antepenultimate joint extending beyond the rostrum; penultimate joint equal in length to third and fourth com- bined, last joint subequal to fourth. Second pereiopods having first joint strongly spined, second very short, fourth long and unusually slender. First pleopods with basal joint and two very unequal branches ; second with two branches of nearly equal length, but one with more numerous and much longer plumose sete than the other; infero-posteal margin of second segment of pleon with a row of (six) long plumose sete; plu- mose sete under the third and fourth segments. Telson suddenly bent downwards at a short distance from the base, gradually attenuated, much produced, but not as long as the long peduncle of uropods ; twelve pairs of long, slender, lateral spines; terminal spines rather stouter. Inner margin of peduncle of uropods with numerous spines, with closely REPORT—1868. ciliated margins; inner ramus subequal in length to outer, with inner margin of first joint spined, and clothed with dense short fur, of two fol- lowing joints spined, the last with seven spines, which are more developed distally ; outer ramus suddenly contracted in width on the inner margin at a short distance from the base; inner margin smooth (except quite at distal extremity, where there are two or three-spine-like sete); outer margin with spine-like (annulated?) sets, and a row of similar sete pas- sing down the back, and ultimately passing obliquely to the distal extremity of the inner margin. Length half an inch. Only the male is known to me. One specimen, Shetland, 1863, and a second received from Mr. Edward of Banff. Eudorella truncatula (Bate)= Eudora truncatula, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist. N.S. vol. xvii. (1856) p. 457, pl. xiv. fig. 3; G. O. Sars, Om den aberrante Krebsdyrgruppe Cumacea (1864), p. 61, = Hudorella truncatula, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866 (1867), p. 197, note. Haddock Ground, near the Out Skerries, in 1861. Lamprops rosea (Norman)= Vaunthompsonia rosea, Norman, Trans. Tyneside Nat. Field Club, vol. v. (1863) p. 271, pl. xiii. fig. 1-3 (the female), = Cyrianassa elegans, id. ib. p. 275, pl. xiv. fig. 1-6 {the male), = Lamprops rosea, G. O. Sars, Om Cumacea, p. 64. St. Magnus Bay, rare. Cumella agilis, n. sp. Male.—Pereion longer than pleon, five segments un- covered by carapace. Carapace longer than free segments of pereion, much deeper in front than behind ; no distinct rostrum ; anterior margin deeply concave at the side; infero-anteal corner produced and toothed ; teeth 2-3; surface of carapace smooth. Inferior antenne not so long as pereion; second joint of peduncle with a dense tuft of hair above, third joint also hispid. All pereiopods, except last, furnished with a palp of unusual structure, which has a second joint which is longer than the first, and slender, not setose ; then several (? five) very short setiferous joints which, combined, do not equal more than one-third length of second joint. First joint of Ist to 4th-pairs of pereiopods monstrously developed, long, and very massive, while the remaining portion of the limb is very slender ; first pair short, scarcely reaching extremity of the head; first joint with a long slender spine at the extremity of the hinder margin, fourth joint equalling in length the two following; third and fourth pereiopods with 2nd to 6th joints not equalling length of first; no whip-sete; sixth joint in form of a long slender nail. No pleopods. Tel- _son rudimentary, widely truncate at extremity. Uropods with peduncle longer than rami, a few scattered spines on inner margin ; inner ramus uniarticulate, longer and mueh stouter than the outer, with ten spines on inner margin, increasing in size distally ; outer ramus two-jointed, ter- minating in a long slender spine, with a minute spine on each side of it, no other spines or setee. Length scarcely more than an eighth of an inch. Taken abundantly (only males) in the surface-net at night in Balta Sound, 1863 (A. M. N.); and by similar means in Lerwick Bay and Kirkwall, 1867 (Mr. D. Robertson). Lphinoé serrata, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report, 1866 (1867), p. 201. One specimen in 70-80 fathoms, sand, Outer Haaf, Out Skerries, 1861, and again in St. Magnus Bay, 30-60 fathoms, 1867. gracilis, Bate= Venilia gracilis, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist. 2nd ser. vol. xvii. (1856) p. 460, pl. xvi. fig. 7, = Cyrianassa gracilis, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist. 2nd ser. vol. xviii. (1856) p. 187, Rare, near Balta Sound, 1863, in towing-net, —_—- yo ee ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 273 The genus Cyrianassa is founded on the male of Jphinoé. The genus is characterized (chiefly) by having the pereion very long, five segments uncovered by carapace, and its posterior segments scarcely deeper than those of pleon ; the last four pereiopods in both sexes without a palp ; the telson rudimentary ; the uropods with both branches biarticulate, the inner strongly spined: and in the male by having the first five seg- ments of pleon furnished with well-developed biramous pleopods. I am by no means certain that the present species is not the male of IJphinoé trispinosa. Undoubted males of that species resemble the J. gracilis very closely, except that they have 2-3 spines on carapace, and the pleopods have not the long plumose sete which adorn those of the latter species. It is possible, however, that the development of these sete may depend upon age, and that the presence or absence of the small darsal spines may not constitute more than varietal distinction. Future observation must be left to clear up this point. Cuma scorpioides, Bate, Ann. Nat. Hist. 2nd ser. vol. xvii. (1856) p. 456, pl. xiv. fig. 2, =? Cancer scorpioides, Montagu, Linn. Trans. vol. ix. Taken in Balta Sound in 1863. Known by its strong angular and keeled carapace. Only four segments of pereion are exposed, and the penultimate and the antepenultimate of these are raised into a rounded rib across the back. The uropods have both branches two-jointed, and only half as long as peduncle, subequal to each other, inner with nume- rous short blunt spines, but the two distal ones of each joint long, outer with plumose sete on the inner margin; peduncle without spines or setee, but minutely serrulate on inner margin. The male, as in [phinoé, has five well-deyeloped pairs of pleopods. Order AMPHIPODA. Talitrus locusta (Linn.). Orchestia littorea (Montagu). Probolium monoculoides (Montagu)=Montagua monoculoides, Bate & West- wood. Bressay Sound, and 5-8 miles off Balta, 50 fathoms. Costa’s genus Probolium (Ricerche sui Crostacei Amfipodi del regno di Napoli, 1853, p. 199) is synonymous with, and has precedence of, Bate’s Mon- tagua, which was established in 1855. —— marinum (Bate)= Montagua marina, Bate & Westwood. 5-8 miles east of Balta,.50 fathoms, and on the Skerries Outer Haaf, in 70-80 fathoms. — Alderi (Bate) = Montagua Alderi, B. & W. A single specimen of what I consider a variety of this species taken in Lerwick Bay. It dif- fers from the ordinary form in having the hand of the second gnatho- pods longer, being more than twice as long as broad, and in the palm being less oblique, crenately toothed throughout (instead of in part only), and the projecting tooth-like process bounding the palm of smaller size. —— serratipes, n.sp. Antenne rather short. Second gnathopods with the metacarpus posteally produced into a small tooth-lhke process; wrist produced below into an elongated lobe, which stretches along the pos- terior margin of the hand (atter the manner of the genus Monoculodes) to half its length, and terminates in two or three sete; hand of large size, elongated, of somewhat unusual form, widest in the middle, from which point the posterior margin gently slopes towards the anterior 274 REPORT—1868. - margin, both towards the base and towards the finger, at this point the elongated lobe of the wrist terminates and the palm begins; this is gently arched, sloping away to the base of the claws, with the margin denticulately serrated throughout (no spines or larger teeth); finger as long as the palm, slender, curved correspondingly to the palm, First and second pereiopods slender, propodos and nail long. Last pereiopods having the metacarpus infero-posteally produced (as is usual in the genus) to half the length of the wrist ; no portion of the limb serrated. Length one-twelfth of an inch, One specimen, dredged in about 50 fathoms in St. Magnus Bay, 1867, Probolium polyprion, Costa, agrees with the present species in having a serrated palm to the second gnathopods, but differs in the form of the band, and the presence of spines at the distal extremity of the palm, in the wrist not being produced, and in the anterior margin of the last pair of pereiopods being serrated. Probolium pollexianum (Bate)= Montagua pollewiana, Bate & Westwood. 5-8 miles east of Balta in 50 fathoms; apparently rare in Shetland, one specimen only haying been found, Lysianassa Coste, M.-Edwards, Scarce. —— Audoumiana, Bate. A specimen taken among Laminaria, 3—5 fathoms, Out Skerries Harbour, in 1861, and then submitted to Mr. Bate, was considered by him to be a “ black-eyed variety” of this species. longicornis, Lucas. One specimen, 20-25 miles north of Burrafirth Lighthouse in 1863. Anonyx longicornis, Bate. A few specimens, deep water, St. Magnus Bay. This species is recognized instantly by the peculiar dorsal and lateral angles of the body, and the curious hooded form of the large first joint of the superior antenne. — serratus, A. Boeck, Forhandl. ved de Skand. Naturs. 8 de Méde, 1860, p. 641; Liljeborg, Crustac. Lysianassina of Norway and Sweden, 1865, p- 29. Anonyx Edwardsii, Bate & Westwood, Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. vol. i. page 94 (but not A. Edwardsii of Kroyer), Dredged in Vidlom Voe, and between tide-marks at Lerwick in 1861. — Holbollii, Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidsskr. 2 Rekke, Bd. ii. p. 8; Voyage Scand. Crustac. pl. xv. figs. 1, a-s; Lilleborg, Crust. Lysianassina of Sweden and Norway, p. 31; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gamma- ridea, p. 43 (but not A. Holbéllii of Bate and other British authors), = Anonyx denticulatus, Bate & Westwood, Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. vol. i. p. 101. Common, Bressay Sound, 15 fathoms; Bressay Sound, 7 fathoms ; off Balta, 50 fathoms ; Balta Sound and St. Magnus Bay. gulosus, Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidssk. Anden Rekke, 1 Bd. p. 611; Voy- age en Scandinavie, pl. xiv, fig. 2; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gamm. p- 44; Lilljeborg, Crust. Amphip. Lysianassina, p. 24, =Lysianassa gulosa, Goes, Crust. Amphip. maris Spetsbergiam alluentis, p. 4, = Anonyx Holbillii, Bate & Westwood, Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. vol. i. p. 104 (but not A. Holbéllii of Kroyer). : 2-5 fathoms, Out Skerries Harbour, among Laminaria, 1861. nanus, Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidsskr. 2 Rekke, 2 Bd. p. 30; Lilljeborg, Crust. Amphip. Lysianassina, p. 28. Dredged in deep water, St. Magnus Bay, 1867. New to Britain. I have received it also from Mr. D. Robertson, who took it in the surface net in the Firth of Clyde; and from Mr. Laughrin from Polperro, where it would seem to be remarkably abundant, ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 275 Anonyx nanordes, Lilljeborg, Crust, Amphip. Lysianassina, p. 28, pl. iii. figs. 32-34, =? Anonyx nanus?, Bruzelius, Skand, Amph. Gammaridea, p. 42. Another addition to our fauna, procured in 1867, in shallow water, in Bressay and Balta Sounds, among Laminaria. —— plautus, Kroyer. Mr. Spence Bate doubtfully referred to this species an Anonyx from the laminarian zone in the Out Skerries Harbour, procured in 1861, longipes, Bate. A. longipes, Bate & Westwood, British Sessile-eyed Crust. vol. i, p. 113, the female, =A, ampulla, Bate & Westwood, l. c. p. 116, the male (but not A. ampulla of Kroyer), =A. longipes, Lillje- borg, Crust. Amphip. Lysianassina, p. 23, pl. iii. figs, 23-31, Prof. Lilljeborg is unquestionably right in considering the A, ampulla of the ‘ British Sessile-eyed Crustacea’ to be the male of A. longipes. I have taken both sexes in Balta Sound and in St. Magnus Bay. The true A, ampulla of Kroyer is the next species which is now added for the first time to our fauna. -——— ampulla (Phipps). Cancer ampulla, Phipps, Voyage towards the North Pole, 1775, p. 191, pl. xii. fig, 2, = Q Anonya lagena, Kroyer, Grénlands Amphipoder, p. 237, pl, i. fig, 1; M.-Edwards, Hist, Nat. des Crustac, vol. ii. p, 21; Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust. p. 77, pl. xii. fig. 7; Gdes, Crust. Amphip, maris Spetsber, alluentis, p. 2,=¢ Anonya appendiculosa, Kroyer, Gronlands Amphipoder, p. 240, pl, i. fig. 2; M.-Edwards, Hist. Nat. des Crust. iii, p. 21, =Anonyx ampulla. Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidsskr. Anden Rekke, Bd. i. p. 578; Voyage en Scandinavie, pl, xiii, fig. 2; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gamm, p- 39; Lilljeborg, Cryst. Lysianassina of Norway and Sweden, p. 23 (but not A. ampulla of Cat, Amphip, Crust. Brit. Mus. nor of Sessile-eyed Crus- tacea). This Anonyw, the specimens agreeing in all respects with Spitzber- gen examples, received from Prof. Loyén, except that they are not more than a quarter the size, was procured on the Out Skerries Middle Haaf, in 1861. It occurred in hundreds upon a fish which had been brought up dead on a fisherman’s long line, It would appear to be one of the scavengers of the seas; for Gies also writes of it, “Ad Spetsbergiam inter algas, praesertim fundo arenoso et argillaceo profunditate orgyarum trium usque ad sexaginta copia stupenda, eo ut, si perite ac prudenter in captura versaris, hos pelagi voracissimos vespellones molibus milliariis cadavere avium vel phocarum brevi e fundo elicere potes.” The contour of this Anonysx is peculiarly rounded and smooth, by which character it may, without microscopic examination of the limbs, be distinguished from longipes. It is now first added to our fauna. tumidus, Kroyer, Naturhistorisk Tidsskr, Anden Rekke, Bd. ii, p. 16; Voyage en Scandinavie, pl. xvi. fig. 2; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 41; Spence Bate, Cat. Amphip. Brit. Mus, p. 73; Lillje- borg, Crust. Amphip. Lysianassina, p. 32, pl. iv. fig, 51; Heller, Amphip. des adriatischen Meeres, p. 25, pl. iii. fig. 6-12, = Lysianassina twmda, Goes, Crust. Amphip. maris Spetsbergiam alluentis, p. 2. A single specimen taken in the branchial sac of an Ascidian in 1863, and many more in 1867, living in a fine undescribed sponge, Raphio- derma coacervata of this Report, which was dredged 25-30 miles N.N.W. of Burrafirth Lighthouse in 170 fathoms. melanophthalmus, Norman, Brit, Assoc, Report, 1866 (1867), p, 201. One, 5-8 miles off Balta, in 50 fathoms, 1867. 276 REPORT—1868. Acidostoma obesum (Bate), =Anonyx obesus, B, & W., Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. vol. i. p. 98, = Acidostoma obesum, Lilljeborg, Crust. Lysianassina, p. 34, pl. v. fig. 53-65. St. Magnus Bay, in deep water. Callisoma crenata, Bate. Out Skerries, Middle Haaf, 40 fathoms; off Isle of Balta, 40-50 fathoms ; St. Magnus Bay. Stegocephalus ampulla (Phipps), Cancer ampulla, Phipps, Voyage toward the North Pole, 1774, p. 191, pl. xii. fig. 3, =Stegocephalus inflatus, Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidsskr. Forste Rekke, Bd.i. p. 150; Bruzelius, Skand. Am- phip. Gammarid. p. 38, =Stegocephalus ampulla, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Brit. Mus. p. 63, pl. x. fig. 2; Goes, Crust. Amphip. maris Spetsberg. alluentis, p. 5. A female laden with eggs was dredged in 1867 in St. Magnus Bay, in about 50 fathoms. It was not quite a quarter of an inch in length, a pigmy compared with its giant brethren from Spitzbergen, with which, however, it agrees closely in all particulars. This arctic species is a very interesting addition to the British fauna. Opis leptochela, Bate & West. MS. “Shetland, received from Mr. Jeffreys,” Bate in litt. A species not yet described. Pontoporeia affinis, Lindstrom, Ofvers. af K. Vet. Akad. Forh, 1855, p. 63 ; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 48; Bate, Cat. Amphip. Brit. Mus. p. 83, pl. xiv. fig. 2. “Shetland, from Mr. Jeffreys,” Bate in litt. Ampelisca equicornis, Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 82, pl. iv. fig. 15. Superior antenne much longer than peduncle of inferior; third joint half length of first, and scarely more than one-fourth of second. In- ferior antennee with last two joints of peduncle subequal, both pairs of antenne fringed with long hairs, and speckled with crimson throughout, a stain of the same colour at the joints of the peduncle; nail of first two pairs of pereiopoda longer than the two preceding joints combined. Last pereiopods haying the posterior lobe of the basos produced down- wards to the distal extremity of following joint, rounded inferiorly ; meros not posteally produced ; propodos and nail broad and flat. Infero- posteal angle of third segment of pleon not produced. Last uropods much longer than preceding pairs, branches nearly as long again as peduncle. Telson cleft almost to the base, reaching one-third the length of the branches of last uropods. Generally a conspicuous hump on the back of the fourth segment of pleon, and a hollow in the back of the sixth. A common species in our seas. Shetland, Skye, Northumber- land and Durham coasts, Guernsey. — tenuicornis, Lilleborg, Ofvers. af Kong. Vet. Akad. Férhand. 1855, p- 123; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 84; Bate, Cat. Crust. Amphip. Brit. Mus. p. 96. Head produced, obliquely truncate in front, the antenne attached to the oblique truncation and directed downwards. Superior antenne about equal in length to peduncle of inferior; second joint of peduncle much more slender than first; third joint scarcely differing in size or length from the joints of the filament, rather more than half length of second. Inferior antennz with last two joints subequal, very long and slender; filament very long and slender; antenne speckled with red. Nail of first two pairs of pereiopoda longer than two preceding joints combined. Last pereiopods having the posterior lobe of the basos pro- duced downwards to the distal extremity of the following joint, rounded inferiorly ; meros not posteally produced; propodos and nail ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 210 not very broad or much flattened. Infero-posteal angle of third seg- ment of pleon not produced. Last uropods much longer than preceding pairs; branches about half as long again as peduncle. Telson cleft nearly to the base, equal in length to the penultimate uropods, and reaching to one-third the length of the rami of the last pair. A smaller species than the last, distinguished by the oblique truncation of the extremity of the head, and by the slenderness of the antennz, and their great difference in length. It is usually prettily painted with lilac or rose-colour about the lower parts. Shetland, Skye, Guernsey (A.M.N.), and Aberdeenshire (Mr. Dawson). I have had the opportunity, through the kindness of Professor Lovén, of comparing the individuals here de- scribed of this species and of A. levigata with Bohuslin examples, and thus am enabled to speak positively as to their identity. Ampelisca carinata, Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 87, pl. 4. fig. 16; Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 371, = Ampelisca Gaimardi, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 91; Bate and Westwood, Brit. Ses- sile-eyed Crust. p. 127 (but not A. Gaimardi of Kréyer and Bruzelius). Head vertically truncate. Superior antenne a little longer than pedunele of inferior; peduncle reaching middle of penultimate joint of peduncle of inferior ; second joint scarcely longer than first; third joint about one-third as long as second; lower side of whole peduncle beset with numerous transverse tufts of short hair; first joint of filament * larger than usual, looking more like a joint of the peduncle, furnished below with a banch of (? auditory) sete. Inferior antenne extremely long, equalling whole length of animal; upper margin of peduncle clothed with transverse rows of tufted hair, similar to those on lower side of superior antennz ; last joint nearly half as long again as penul- timate ; filament very slender. Nails of first two pairs of pereiopoda not longer than two preceding joints combined. Two last segments of pleon (fifth and sixth are coalesced into one) elevated dorsally into very con- spicuous humps, In other respects agreeing closely with A. equicornis, of which species I strongly suspect that it is the male. Shetland (A. M. N.); Kirkwall Bay, Orkney (Mr. D. Robertson); Aberdeenshire coast (Mr. Dawson). The species described by British authors as A. Giaimardi is unques- tionably the A. carinata of Bruzelius; the true A. Gaimardi, according to that author’s characters, differs from all British forms in the structure of the last uropods and telson. ‘ Pedes abdominis ultimi paris duo paria antecedentia haud superantes. Appendix caudalis brevis, lata, parum fissa.” —— levigata, Lilljeborg, Ofvers. af Kong. Vetensk. Akad. Forhandl. 1855, p. 123; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 84; Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust.eBrit.. Mus. p. 96. Head much produced, squarely truncated in front. Superior antenn very short, not reaching end of penultimate joint of peduncle of inferior ; second joint of peduncle half as long again as first, third joint closely resembling joints of filament, which are only about six. Inferior an- tenn with a very long peduncle, the last joint distinctly shorter than preceding. First and second pereiopods haying the nails very long, con- siderably longer than the two preceding joints combined. Last perelopods having the posterior lobe of the basos produced downwards to the distal extremity of the following joint, truncate inferiorly, and closely fringed with long plumose seti; meros produced backwards and downwards 278 REPORT—1868. into a rounded lobe of considerable size, fringed with plumose sete ; carpus antero-distally bearing a circlet of strong spines; propodos much flattened and expanded. Third segment of pleon having the posterior margin waved, and produced backwards at the infero-posteal angle into an acute hastate point. Telson cleft almost to the base, having a row of spine-like hairs down middle of each portion, reaching to the middle of the branches of the last uropods, which are much longer than the preceding pairs. Balta Sound and St. Magnus Bay, Shetland (A. M.N); Kirkwall Bay, Orkney (Mr. D. Robertson); Aberdeenshire (Mr. Dawson). [Ampelisea macrocephala, Lilljeborg, Ofversigt af Kong. Vetensk. Akad. Forhandl. 1852, p. 7, and 1855, p. 137; Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p.85; Bate, Cat. Crust. Amphip. Brit. Mus. p. 94, agrees with A. levigata in having the infero-posteal angle of the third seg- ment of the pleon produced backwards into a spine-like point, but differs in that the meros of the last pereiopods has no posterior lobe. Thave dredged it in the Sound of Skye. The Ampelisca Belliana of Bate appears to be referable to this species. ] Phowus Holbolli, Kroyer. Out Skerries Harbour, 3-5 fathoms; St. Magnus Bay. = ilaiaite Kroyer. Balta Sound, St. Magnus Bay; Outer Haaf, 3-90 fathoms. Gidiceros parvimanus, Bate & Westwood. The type specimens were procured in 1861, in 70-90 fathoms, sixty miles east of Shetland; and I have since found it in other directions on the Haaf, and very abundantly on the soft muddy ground of St. Magnus Bay. —— equicornis, n. sp. Rostrum extending beyond the first joint of upper antenne. Upper antenne having the three joints of the peduncle of nearly equal length, each more slender than preceding; filament equal the length of last two joints of peduncle, composed of five long articu- lations. Lower antenne slender but short; peduncle exceeding the length of that of superior by nearly the last joint, which is equal in length to the penultimate ; filament very slender, 4-5 jointed, equal in length to the last joint of peduncle. First gnathopods with wrists in- feriorly produced into a wide rounded lobe reaching forwards to the commencement of the palm; hand obovate, widest in the centre where the palm commences, which is very oblique; finger slender, simple, as long as palm. Second gnathopods very like the first, but the hand slightly larger, and rather more elongated. All the pereiopods with very long and nearly straight nails, which about equal the propodos in length ; propodos much longer than carpus. Penultimate pereiopods with a row of sete down the middle of the basos. Last pereiopods with the basos small, elongated, pear-shaped, equally produced anteally and posteally ; both margins with small cilia, the hinder margin also crenated; the last four joints all greatly produced, and each longer than the basos; the whole limb very long. Length about one-fourth of aninch. A single specimen from St. Magnus Bay, in 30-60 fathoms, 1867. @. cequicornis comes near to (@. brevicalear of Goes; but his figures represent the hands narrower in proportion to the wrists than in the present species, and there are other slight points of difference. He does not describe or figure the last pereiopods, which are the most characteristic organs in i. equicornis. Genus Syrruol, Goes. Head produced into a rostrum. Eyes like those of @diceros. Upper an- ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 279 tenne with a secondary appendage. Mandible having a three-jointed palp. Gnathopods not subchelate. Telson squamiform, deeply cleft. Syrrhoé hamatipes, n. sp. None of the segments of pleon serrated or toothed. Superior antenne with a smooth round peduncle, reaching the middle of the penultimate joint of the inferior, the first joint nearly as long as two following combined, which are subequal to each other, the last rather the shorter; filament rather longer than peduncle, composed of 7-8 long slender articulations; secondary appendage two-jointed. In- ferior antennz with a long peduncle, last joint rather longer than the first, and two-thirds as long as second; filament shorter than peduncle, 7-jointed, joints very long and slender. Gnathopods not subchelate, almost identical in structure ; wrist with subparallel margins, of nearly equal breadth throughout; hand much narrower than and about two- thirds the length of wrist, which it resembles in form ; posterior margins of both wrist and hand with numerous plumose sete; anterior margin with two or three such sete ; finger two-thirds length of hand, only very slightly curved, not capable of being closed with the hand. Pereio- pods with meros and carpus of equal length ; propodos rather more than half length of carpus and much narrower; nail small, bent at right angles to propodos, and having a little spine at half its length ; two spines project forwards from the extremity of the propodos, which are as long as the nail. Last pereiopods short, having the basos greatly pro- duced backwards and downwards into a membranaceous lobe, which ex- tends to the distal extremity of the meros; meros and carpus subequal in length, both very wide and flat, the latter slightly tapering distally ; both margins fringed with plumose sete, and the carpus terminating in such sete of considerable length and extending beyond the nail; pro- podos styliform, much shorter than and scarcely a quarter as broad as the carpus ; nail (similar to those of preceding pereiopods) slender, small, bent at right angles to the propodos, and having a little spine at half its length. Last uropods two-branched; branches subequal, lanceolate. Telson squamiform, not long, cleft to the base. Length one-fourth of an inch. One specimen, dredged in St. Magnus Bay, 1867. I place this species provisionally in the genus Syrrhoé; the head having been crushed, I am unable to speak with precision respecting the eyes and rostrum. Monoculodes carinatus, Bate= diceros affinis, Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 93, pl. iv. fig. 18. St. Magnus Bay, 1867. Male and female; the antenne much longer in the former, as is also the case with Gdiceros parvimanus. —— Stimpsoni, Bate. Sixty miles east of Shetland, in 70-90 fathoms, one specimen, 1861. Kréyera altamarina, Bate & Westwood. The type, taken sixty miles east of Shetland in 1861; also 5-8 miles east of Balta, in 40-50 fathoms, 1867. Urothoé marinus, Bate. Balta Sound; 5-8 miles east of Balta, and St. Mag- nus Bay, 5-60 fathoms. elegans, Bate. In the same localities as the last; also on the Out Skerries Haaf, in 60-70 fathoms. Bairdii, Bate. St. Magnus Bay. , Lilljeborgia Shetlandica, Bate & Westw. The types were dredged in 40 fathoms, one mile north of Whalsey Lighthouse, and in 2-5 fathoms in Out Skerries Harbour in 1861, Iphimedia obesa, Rathke, Widely distributed, 2-50 fathoms. 280 REPORT—1868. Odius carinatus (Bate). Otus carinatus, Bate & Westw. Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. p. 224. Very rare; two specimens only, in 70-80 fathoms, sixty miles east of Shetland, 1861. The type was taken by Mr. Barlee in his last expedition to the Shetland Islands. The name Otus being preoccupied, Lilljeborg has substituted that of Odius for this genus (Lilljeborg, Crust. Amphip. Lysianas. p. 19). Helleria coalita, Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist. 4th ser, vol. 11, (Dec. 1868) p. 418. Surface-net, Lerwick (Mr. D. Robertson). Epimeria tricristaia, Costa, Ricerche sui Crostacei Amfipodi del regno di Napoli (1853), p. 197, pl. ii. fig. 2, = Acanthonotus Owenii, Bate, Brit. Assoc. Rep. 1855, p. 58; Bate and Westwood, Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. p- 232. Common in deep water. This species is well described and figured by Costa, whose name must be adopted, since the specific name is four years prior to that of Bate; and as regards the genus, Acantho- notus being preoccupied among the Fishes, and Vertwmnus only a MS. title, we must also take that of the Italian naturalist. Dexamine spinosa (Montagu). Out Skerries Harbour, Lerwick and Balta Sounds, among Laminariz, always in shallow water. tenwicornis, Rathke. In similar localities to the last. —— Vedlomensis, Bate & Westwood. The type taken in Vidlom Voe in 1861, since dredged in St. Magnus Bay, 60 fathoms; and 5-8 miles off Balta, 40-50 fathoms. Atylus Swammerdanut (M.-Edwards) = Amphithoé compressa, Lilljeborg, Ofvers. af K. Vet. Akad. Forhandl. 1852, p. 8. Bressay Sound and Hillswick, among seaweeds. gibbosus, Bate. An interesting species on account of the peculiar cha- racter of the carpi of the pereiopoda. It appears constantly to live parasitic in sponges (Halichondria panacea chiefly) between tide-marks and in shallow water. Abundant in Burrafirth Caves, also Balta Sound, Out Skerries Harbour, &c. bispinosus, Bate. St. Magnus Bay, in 50 fathoms. —— macer,n.sp. Pleon haying the posterior margin of the first five seg- ments serrated right across the back, with a larger central hastate tooth, which increases in size from the first to the fourth segment, where it attains its greatest development. All the members of the body unusually long and slender; pereiopods excessively long and delicate ; basos of posterior pairs narrow; meros and carpus both yery long, the former the longer, and both longer than the long propodos; nail very slender (half as long as propodos), with a single seta beyond the middle of the inner margin. Uropods very long, the last pair with peduncle and rami subequal, the whole organ as long as four segments of pleon (7. é. third to sixth). First gnathopods the longer, second the stouter ; in both pairs the hand shorter than wrist, and the palm undefined. Telson deeply sulcated. Length a quarter of an inch. St. Magnus Bay, muddy bottom, 60 fathoms, 1867. The eye in this species is situated unusually low down and opposite the base of the inferior an- tenne ; the antennee are broken off in my specimens. The slenderness of the anterior pereiopods is very remarkable. Pherusa bicuspis (Kréyer). Amphithoé bicuspis, Kréyer, Gronlands Amphip. p. 273, pl. ii. fig. 10. Balta Sound, 5 fathoms; and Bressay Sound, 3-7 fathoms. — fucicola, Leach. Out Skerries Harbour, 3-5 fathoms, 1861. Calliopius Ossiani (Bate). One mile north of Whalsey Lighthouse, 40 fa- ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 281 thoms; forty miles east of Whalsey Skerries, 70-90 fathoms. The name Calliope being preoccupied, Lilljeborg has changed the title of this genus to Calliopius. Calliopius Fingalli (Bate & Westw.). The type specimen found in 1861. Eusirus Helvetie, Bate=Husirus bidens, Heller, Amphip. des adriatischen Meeres, p. 32, pl. iii. fig. 19. Five to eight miles east of Balta, in 40-50 fathoms, sand, 1867. Thighs of last three pereiopods strongly serrated behind; first two segments of pleon dorsally produced into a central © tooth; hinder margin of third segment of pleon serrated en the side, lower serrations directed upwards, upper serrations directed downwards ; all the uropods subequal in length; telson reaching to the middle of the rami of the last pair. Leucothoé furina (Savigny). St. Magnus Bay and Balta Sound. —— articulosa (Montagu). In branchial sac and water-passages of Ascidia mentula and A. venosa. This species and Anonyx tumidus are the two Amphipoda which, with a number of Copepoda, constitute the crustacean parasites of the Ascidiade. Gossea microdeutopa, Bate. Found in 1861; the exact habitat forgotten. Aora gracilis, Bate= Autonoé punctata, Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 24, pl. i. fig. 3. Common in shallow water in all the Voes, among Laminarie. The female differs widely from the male in the structure of the first gnathopods. In these organs the meros is not abnormal (as in male), the wrist subquadrate, slightly widening distally, posteriorly fringed with sete, and a tuft of setz on the side; propodos broadly ovate, with tufts of sete on both margins; palm undefined, except by the presence of a spine with which the finger when closed impinges ; finger strong, half length of hand, serrate on the inner margin, with a small cilium in each serration. I believe, judging from specimens named for me by Mr. Bate, and the figure and description which represent an animal ‘* sparingly scattered with black dots,” that the Microdeuteropus anvomalus of Bate and Westwood, p. 293 (not of Rathke), is the female of this species; but the females of this and of the next species are so very much alike as to be almost undistinguishable. Microdeuteropus anomalus (Rathke). Gammarus anomalus, Nova Acta Leop. 1843, p. 63, pl. iv. fig. 7, =Autonoé anomala, Bruzelius, Skand. Amphip. Gammarid. p. 25, pl. i. fig. 4 (but scarcely Microdeutopus anomalus, Bate & Westwood, Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. p. 289), =MWicrodeutopus gryllotalpa, Bate & Westwood, J. ¢. p. 289 (but not of Costa). The figure in the ‘ Brit. Sessile-eyed Crustacea’ of Microdeutopus gryl- lotalpa represents the young male of this species; in the adult male the strong tooth-like process of the carpus of the first gnathopods is itself furnished with a secondary (lateral) tooth ; and the hand is much nar- rower at the base than at the apex, the posterior margin being concave ; this state is well represented by Bruzelius, pl. i. fig. 4,d. The female is extremely like that of the last species, and is sufficiently well repre- sented at p. 293, Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust.; though, for reasons already stated, I incline to think that that figure really is drawn from the female of Aora. This species is most certainly not the Microdeutopus gryllo- talpa of Costa (Ricerche sui Crostacei Amfip. del regno di Napoli, p. 231, pl. iv. fig. 10), which, from the four teeth of the carpus, seems to be closely allied to, if not identical with the Autonoé grandimana of Bruzelius. Dredged in 70-90 fathoms, about forty miles east of the Out Skerries, 1861. 1868, x 282 rnrEpoRtT—1868. Microdeuteropus versiculatus, Bate, The figures given of this species repre- sent the female. The male differs greatly in the structure of the first gnathopods ; these have the carpus very large, ovate, and very broad, infero-posteally produced into a simple tooth-like process, which reaches forward to not quite half the length of the hand; hand as wide or wider at the extremity than at the base; posterior margin convex, undulated ; finger internally serrated, serrations very few, three to five only, Rare in Shetland; 70-80 fathoms, Outer Haaf, —— Websteri, Bate. Bate and Westwood’s figure represents the male. Specimens from Bressay Sound have a deep brown broad band across the pereion; and in company with them were other specimens similarly marked, and agreeing in general characters, but with gnathopods of totally different structure. These I take to be the females. They so closely resemble the females of Aora gracilis and Microdeuteropus ano- malus that one description would suffice for all. Also taken among Laminariz in St. Magnus Bay and on the Haaf. I question whether there are sufficient grounds for separating the genus Aora from Miero- deuteropus. We haye seen that the females of two are almost undis- tinguishable ; and if Aora be divided from Microdeuteropus because the tooth-like projection proceeds from the meros and not the carpus, M. Websterti must in justice have a similar distinction conferred upon it, because in that species the tooth-like projection does not spring from either meros or carpus, but from the hand. Genus Mzcampuorvs, n. g.* Antennee slender (imperfect), the insertion of the lower so much behind that of the upper that the end of the third joint of the peduncle is only on a level with the end of the head. First segment of pereion produced forwards and downwards on each side into a remarkable horn-shaped process. Both pair of gnathopods greatly developed, of equal size, and subchelate. First three pereiopods short, last two much longer, Telson tubular. Megamphopus cornutus, n, sp. (species typica). Head produced greatly be- yond the origin of the inferior antenne ; eye round, black, immediately behind the base of the superior antenne, and thus greatly in advance of the origin of inferior antenne. Superior antenne slender, first joint very much thicker than but only about half the length of second, sub- equal in length to last; (there is perhaps a very minute secondary appendage, one-jointed, not half length of first joint of filament; but as the filaments of the antenne are imperfect, I cannot speak with cer- tainty on the point, all I am confident of is that if there is a secondary appendage it is excessively minute). Inferior antenne with the distal extremity of the third joint only reaching the extremity of the head ; fourth joimt twice as long as third, and last joint rather longer than fourth; filament subequal in length to last joint of peduncle, com- posed of eight long articulations. First segment of pereion produced forward and downwards into a curious horn-like process, the form of the side of the segment and its process reminding one strongly of the side of a wheelbarrow and its handle. First gnathopeds greatly deve- loped; basos long and slender, two following joints short; carpus long, nearly four times as long as broad, anterior margin straight, naked, posterior margin gently convex, with little tufts of sets, distally pro- duced into a short blunt process which curves backwards; propodos * Méyas, great; dugdw, both; weds, a foot. ee a a ee ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACBA, TUNICATA, ETC, 283 not quite so long as carpus, ovate; palm continuous with the hand, with a row of about eight strong spines; finger gently curved, shutting closely against the hand, which it nearly equals in length. Second gnathopods in general character very like the first, but the propodos somewhat broader and longer (as long as carpus), with two or three Jongitudinal rows of hairs in place of the spines of the first pair, and the finger only about half its length. Basos of the anterior pairs of perelopods of somewhat twisted form, the front margin armed with several (5-6) strong spines. All the uropods subequal in length, bear- ing the same general characters as in the genus Microdeuteropus. Telson tubular. Length a third of an inch. A single specimen pro- cured in 1863. Protomedeia pectinata,n.sp. Superior antenne with second joint of peduncle subequal in length to but much more slender than first, last joint two- thirds length of second; filament slightly longer than peduncle, con- sisting of about ten long articulations ; secondary appendage two-jointed, scarcely longer than first articulation of filament. Inferior antennz subpediform, short; filament not longer than last joint of peduncle. First gnathopods having basos fringed anteriorly with a few scattered long sete; ischium having a postero-distal dense tuft of long sete ; meros, carpus, and propodos all posteriorly thickly clothed with rather long sete, the last two subequal in length, the propodos oblong, sub- parallel sided, twice as long as broad, distally truncate ; finger strong, much longer than the truncated extremity of propodos, not internally serrate (asin Q ot Microdeuteropus versiculatus, which this species re- sembles in general structure of first gnathopods), but furnished with a single large spine on the inner edge near the apex. Second gnathopods haying basos long (equal in leng th to four succeeding joints), posteriorly straight, anteriorly convex, and furnished with two rows (one on edge and the other a little within it) of very long slender sete, arranged in a comb-like manner; ischium and meros narrower than carpus; carpus narrow, only slightly widening distally ; propedos subequal in length to carpus, lanceolate, tapering from base to distal extremity, both margins fringed with long sets, those of the anterior side the longer; finger long, narrow, of equal thickness throughout, more than half as long as propodos, not unguiculate, nor capable of being bent back upon the pro- podos; the blunt distal extremity terminated by two or three sete. First pereiopods not having the meros anteriorly produced ; finger very long and slender, subequal to propodos, and much longer than carpus. Last pereiopods with hinder margin of basos not serrated, furnished with a row of distant sete, which take their origin from some little distance within the margin. Telson and uropods closely resembling in structure those of the species of Microdeuteropus. A single specimen (a female?) dredged in St. Magnus Bay, 1867. —— (?) W hitei, Bate. Five to eight miles off the island of Balta, 40-50 fathoms, and in Balta Sound, about 7 fathoms. This species is certainly no Protomedeia; the squamate, double telson separates it from that genus. I believe it to be the female of Lillje- borgia Shetlandica; at any rate the male of the present species most closely resembles the drawing and description of that species in all respects except that the basos of the last pereiopods is not so distinctly serrated as figured. Unfortunately my type specimens of Lilljeborgia Shetlandica have been mislaid ; and for the present it will be better to x2 284. REPORT— 1868. keep the species apart, notwithstanding a yery strong suspicion that they will hereafter prove to be the same. Protomedeia hirsutimana, Bate. Unst Haaf, 90-100 fathoms, and 5-8 miles east of Balta, 40-50 fathoms. The posterior portion of the body, un- known to Mr. Bate, has some very remarkable characters. The last three pereiopods successively increase in length, the apex of the palm is truncate, the finger is short, strong, and bifid, and takes its origin from one-half only of the end of the propodos, while from the other half spring several long, spine-like sete. First and second uropods sub- equal in length; the first with the branches furnished with the usually formed spines ; the second of most unusual and remarkable character, excessively strong and massive, the branches furnished on their upper edge with two rows of immensely strong, but very short, stout, blunt spines; last uropods shorter than preceding pairs; branches subequal to peduncle, each bearing about three strong spines and terminating in a tuft of sete. Telson tubular. The extraordinarily massive and immensely strong spined second uropods have no parallel, as far as I am aware, among the known species of Amphipoda. Bathyporeia pilosa, Lindstrom. Forty miles east of Out Skerries, 70-90 fathoms ; 5-8 miles east of Balta, 40-50 fathoms; Balta Sound, 5-7 fathoms. —— Robertsoni, Bate. “Two specimens have been dredged by our friend Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys in the Shetlands” (Bate and Westwood). Melita obtusata (Montagu) = Melita proxima, Bate & Westw. Brit. Sessile- eyed Crust. p. 344 (the more common variety of male), = Megamera Alderi, Bate & Westwood, p. 407 (the female). St. Magnus Bay, off Balta, Outer Haaf, &e. Melita prowima is the common form of the male, and Megamara Alderi is the female. The variety of the male with a central dorsal tooth on the second and third segments of pleon is far less common, and is the typical Melita obtusata (Mont.); one specimen of this variety has occurred to me in Shetland, and other specimens show scarcely visible rudimentary teeth on those segments. Mera longimana (Leach)=Megamera longimana, Bate & Westw., the male = Megamera othonis, Bate & Westw., the female. St. Magnus Bay, both sexes. brevicaudata (Bate)=Megamera brevicaudata, B. & W. A specimen determined by Mr. Bate, dredged in 4 fathoms, Bressay Sound, 1861. Lurystheus erythrophthalmus (Lilljeborg). 5-8 miles off Balta, 40-50 fathoms. Amathilla Sabini (Leach), Tide-pools, frequent. Gammarus marinus, Leach. Between tide-marks. —— campylops, Leach. “Our friend the late Mr. Barlee sent us some from the Shetlands” (Bate and Westwood). —— locusta, Linn. pulex, Linn. Heiscladus longicaudatus, B. & W. The type specimens were taken in 1861, in 2-5 fathoms, Out Skerries Harbour; also St. Magnus Bay, and Balta and Bressay Sounds. Amphithoé rubricata (Montagu). —— littorina, Bate. —— albomaculata, Kroyer. The only known British specimen, dredged in 1861, sixty miles east of Shetland, in 70-90 fathoms. ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 285 Sunamphithoé hamulus, Bate. Out Skerries Harbour, 2-5 fathoms, 1861 ; Hillswick, among Laminariz, 1867. conformata, Bate. ‘Sent to us by the late Mr. Barlee, who took it off the Shetlands” (B. & W.). Podocerus pulchellus (Leach). Among T'ubularia indivisa, in the caves of Burrafirth ; and among Laminariz at Hillswick. —— variegatus, Leach. One mile north of Whalsey Lighthouse, in 40 fa- thoms; and in the Burrafirth caves. capillatus, Rathke. Among Tubularia indivisa, in Halse Hellyer, Bur- rafirth; among Laminarie, Hillswick; Out Skerries Harbour, 3-5 fathoms; and one mile north of Whalsey Lighthouse, in 40 fathoms. I question whether B. and W.’s figure of the entire animal represents, as they suppose, the immature state of this Podocerus; but the figures of the gnathopod and superior antennz illustrate the strongly marked features of the mature P. capillatus. faleatus (Montagu). Out Skerries Harbour, 3-5 fathoms; Burrafirth caves; Bressay and Balta Sounds. —— pelagicus(Leach). With the last, of which I believe it to be the female. [have never met with a male pelagicus, nor a female faleatus. The two forms occur in company, and the structural differences seem confined to the exact form of the hand of the gnathopods, organs which seem gene- rally to differ among the Amphipoda according to the sex. Cerapus abditus, Templeton. Balta Sound and Hillswick. difformis (M.-Edwards) ¢ ,= Dercothoé punctatus, M.-Kdwards, 9. Vid- lom Voe; off Baltaand St. Magnus Bay. Dercothoé punctatus is unques- tionably the female of C. difformis, not of C. abditus. The form which B. and W. figure as the female of C. difformis is probably a variety of the male. Siphonecetes typicus, Kroyer. The first British specimen, dredged in 1861, sixty miles east of Shetland, in 70-90 fathoms; also 5-8 miles east of Balta, 40-50 fathoms, 1867. Nenia rimapalmata, Bate. St. Magnus Bay, and 5-8 miles east of Balta ; 40 miles east of Whalsey Lighthouse, 70-90 fathoms. -—— excavata, Bate. Off Balta, and in St. Magnus Bay. Cyrtophium armatum, n. sp. Body strongly tuberculated; head with a central tubercle ; first segment of pereion with two tubercles, one behind the other, all the remaining segments of pereion and first two of pleon having a transversely placed pair of tubercles, one on each side of the back, the tubercles of the last segment of pereion and of the first two of pleon much larger than the others. First gnathopods with wrist and hand subequal in length, the former wider at the base than at the distal extremity, with many sete on sides and posterior margin, but none on the anterior margin; the latter subtriangular, widest in the middle (at, the commencement of the palm), sloping thence equally to the base and to the origin of the finger, anterior margin gently convex, dorsal margin, sides, and palm bearing many sete ; finger not quite as long as the palm, strong, with a slightly bifid extremity. Second gnathopods with basos antero-distally produced into a strong spine-formed process; ischium, meros, and carpus all very short, and subequal in length, the meros on the posterior side running out into a very large spine-formed lobe; hand very large, obovate, very broad; palm half its length, bearing a few small sete; finger very large and strong, well arched, inner margin simple. Pereiopods with the basos not at all expanded, nor wider than 286 REPORT— 1868. the following joints; nails strong, scimitar-shaped, the entire limbs almost naked (having only a very few short scte upon them). Length one-fifth of an inch. A single female dredged in 100-110 fathoms, twenty-five miles N. by W. from Burrafirth Lighthouse, in 1867. ‘The specimen is imperfect, having lost antenne, &e. Thesixth and seventh segments of the pereion appear to be coalesced. It approaches Latma- tophilus tuberculatus of Bruzelius, but is much more strongly tubercu- lated, and the gnathopods of different structure, the first smaller, the second larger, the hand broader, and the basos spined, Unciola planipes, Norman, Nat. Hist. Trans. of Northumberland and Durham, vol, i. (1865) p. 14, pl. vii. figs. 9-18. Balta Sound, 5-7 fathoms. Many specimens. Corophium longicorne (Fabricius). ‘Some specimens, which we take to be the young of this species, we find in the collection sent to us by the Rev. A. M. Norman, taken in from two to five fathoms, in Outer Sker- ries Harbour, Shetlands” (B. and W.). —— crassicorne, Bruzelius, the male,=Corophium Bonelli, Bate & Westw. Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. vol. i. p. 497 (? Corophiwm Bonellii, M.-Kd- wards), the female. Very abundant, in 2-5 fathoms, Out Skerries Har- bour. The OC. Bonellii of Bate and Westwood is unquestionably the female of C. crassicorne; the female of C. longicorne (which B, and W. thought C. Bonelliit might be) is quite different. —— tenuicorne, n. sp. Two females, dredged in St. Magnus Bay, resem- bling in general characters the same sex of longicorne and crassi- corne, but distinguished as follows. Superior antenne slender, longer than the inferior; first joint cylindrical (not expanded), peduncle with two or three spines on inner edge ; second joint longer than first, slender, third not half as long as second; filament composed of six long joints, the terminal one bearing a number of long tentaculiform sete. Inferior antenne with penultimate joint of peduncle cylindrical (not expanded), inner edge with two or three articulated spines about the centre, and a single long, slender, articulated spine at the distal termination; last joint about two-thirds as long as the penultimate, bearing two spines on the middle of the inner side; filament unusually pediform, consisting of a long, stout articulation (more than half as long as the last joint of the peduncle) and a strong terminal nail. Finger of gnathopods bidentate at the apex. Nail of pereiopods longer than carpus and propodos com- bined. First and second uropods terminating in long slender spines, which are more than half as long as their rami; last uropods having the branch longer than its peduncle, not wide, three times as long as broad, tipped with long sete, but having no sete on the inner and outer mar- gins. Length about one-fifth of an inch. The specimens procured are females laden with eges; the male is unknown to me. Hyperia galba (Montagu), Bate & West. Brit. Sessile-eyed Crust. vol. ii. p. 12, the female, = Lestrigonus Kinahani, Bate & Westw. l.c¢. p. 8, the male,=? Lestrigonus exulans, l.c. p. 5, the young male,=? Hyperia medusarum, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 295, pl. xlix. fig. 1, the young female (but not Metoécus medusarum, Kroyer). In Aurelia, open sea, twenty-five miles N. by W. of Unst. I believe that the above four so-called species are the different sexes and periods of growth of one. The specific points will be found in the structure of the gnathopods (as accurately deseribed by B. and W. under Lestrigonus exulans) and of the uropods, which have the rami of all three ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC, 287 pairs wide in the middle but narrowed at the base, and mucronate at the terminations; the inner margins of the rami of the first pair, and the inner margin of the outer ramus, and both margins of the inner ramus of the last two pairs, are elegantly serrated. Hyperia oblivia, Kréyer, Gronlands Amphipoder, p. 298, pl. iv. fig. 19 (but not H. oblivia, Bate & Westw. vol. ii. p. 16). Filaments of both antenne consisting of only a single joint. First gnathopods with wrist and hand subequal, the former spined posteriorly, not at all produced distally ; hand slightly tapering, palm serrate distally, finger two-thirds as long as hand. Second gnathopods with meros sheath-formed, tipped with * spine-like sete and overlapping carpus; carpus greatly produced dis- tally into a lobe which reaches nearly to the extremity of the hand ; finger straight, two-thirds as long as hand. Pereiopoda, last three pair much longer and more slender than in H. galba; carpus and propodos both very long, the latter the longer, both with small distant spines on the hinder margin, and the whole hinder edge of the propodos micro- scopically pectinate. Rami of all the uropods lanceolate (not widening in the middle), gradually tapering to the end (not mucronate as in H. galba) ; the general serrated character of the margins of the rami agrees with H. galba, except that the external margin of the inner ramus of the second pair is not serrated. The male differs from the female, as in the last two species, in having the antenne very long and slender. ; A female from an Aurelia, and males taken living free in the towing- net. It has also been sent to me by Mr. Edward from Banff; and Mr. G. 8. Brady has procured both sexes in some numbers off the mouth of the Tees in the towing-net. Bate and Westwood’s “ H. oblivia,” which has not the propodos of the gnathopods at all produced, cannot be Kriyer’s species nor that here deseribed*. Gées takes Kroyer’s Lestrigonus exulans to be the male of H. oblivia ; and as far as the description and figures go, it may be the male either of that or of H. galba; but the short pereiopoda of ZL. exulans and L. Kinahani of Bate will not agree with the male of H. olivia. Metoécus medusarum, Kroyer, Gronlands Amphip. p. 288, pl. iii. fig. 15 (not Hyperia medusarum, Bate, Cat. Amphip. Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 295). Female antennz very short; filaments of both pair one-jointed. Both gna- thopods nearly alike, short, distinctly chelate, and of peculiar structure ; meros produced into a large sleeve-shaped process, postero-distally tipped with sete, which fits round the basal portion of the carpus; carpus postero-distally produced into a large lobe, which extends as far as the extremity of the propodos, with which and with the finger it forms a regular chelate organ; propodos slightly tapering from the base to the extremity; its inner margin, the inner margin of the small finger, and the inner margin of the thumb-used lobe of the carpus all denticulately serrated ; hand and wrist wholly free from hairs or spines. Pereiopods of moderate length; earpus and propodos subequal, their inner margins microscopically pectinate. All the uropods having the inner margin of outer ramus, and both margins of inner ramus serrated. The male differs from the female in having very long antenne. A female found in a Medusa in Shetland in 1867; and a male has been sent to me by Mr. T. Edward from Banff. The Hyperia medusarum of Bate bears no resemblance to Kriyer’s * T would propose for it the name of H. gracilipes. 288 REPORT—1868. “species, to which it is referred, the gnathopods being of entirely dif- ferent structure. Phronima sedentaria (Forskaal). ‘The only specimen of this species which we have seen as a native of the British coast is one in the British Museum, taken by Dr. Fleming on the 3rd of November, 1809, at Bur- ray, in Zetland, amongst rejectamenta of the sea. Other specimens from the Shetland Islands were obtained by the late Dr. Johnston, and exhibited by him before the Berwickshire Naturalists’ Club in 1855. —Proceedings, vol. ii. p. 212.” (B. and W.) Dulichia porrecta, Bate. St. Magnus Bay, 40-60 fathoms. Proto pedata (Abildgaard). Out Skerries Harbour, 2-5 fathoms; Bressay Sound, among Laminaria; St. Magnus Bay, very abundant, 40-60 fathoms. Goodseri, Bate. Out Skerries Harbour and St. Magnus Bay; much scarcer than the last. } Caprella linearis (Linn.). Very abundant in Halse Hellyer, Burrafirth, among T'ubularia indivisa and sponges. lobata (Miller). With the last, but scarce. —— hystrix, Kroyer. Caves at Burrafirth, 1863. Order ISOPODA. Tanais Dulongii, B. & W. St. Magnus Bay, rare. Paratanais rigidus, Bate & Westw. St. Magnus Bay, 1867, Anceus maxillaris (Montagu). Frequent. —— Kdwardii, Bate. 15-20 fathoms; Vidlom Voe. Phryxus abdominalis (Kroyer). On the abdomen of Hippolyte Cranchii, var. pusiola. —— longibranchiatus, Bate & Westw. ‘ Our specimens of this species were forwarded to us from Shetland by Mr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys” (B. and W.). —— Galathee (Hesse). Under carapace of Galathea dispersa. Aiga monophthalma, Johnston. One fine specimen procured in 1861. Cirolana spinipes, Bate & Westw. Haddock ground, near Whalsey Skerries, and in St. Magnus Bay; not uncommon. ——— truncata, u. sp. Head much wider than long; greatest width in the centre, at the projection of the eyes, narrower behind and in front, which is slightly tridentate. Superior antenne suddenly bent in a remarkable way at aright angle at the junction of first and second joints of the peduncle; third joint of peduncle much narrower and shorter than the second ; filament consisting of only about four joints, the first twice as long as last joint of peduncle, and longer than the rest of the filament. Inferior antenne very long and slender. Telson as broad as long; mar- gins crenulated, distally truncate and denticulate; the two external teeth on each side larger than the intermediate ones. Last uropeds having both branches truncate at the extremity. Dredged in 40-60 fathoms, muddy bottom, in St. Magnus Bay, 1867. Eurydice pulchra, Leach. St. Magnus Bay. Jera albifrons, Leach. Tide-marks, under stones, common. Leptaspidia brevipes, Bate & Westwood. St. Magnus Bay, 40-60 fathoms ; 5-8 miles east of Balta, 40-50 fathoms. Janira maculosa, Leach. Frequent, between tide-marks, and dredged. Limnoria lignorum (Rathke). In a piece of wood between tide-marks, near Lerwick, 1861. ON THE SHETLAND CRUSTACEA, TUNICATA, ETC. 289 Arcturus longicornis (Sowerby). Common. gracilis (Goodsir). 5-8 miles off Balta, 40-50 fathoms. Idotea tricuspidata, Desmarest. Spheroma Prideauxianum, Leach. =3rd mag.* ......|White ......... 2) 1 12 a.m.|Ibid ...............,=2nd mag.* ....../White ......... L5j|About 5 BOTbId ........o00006|°AS large aS Alseccassecvesenees p-m cricket-ball.’ 15 About 5 30London ......... As bright as Jupiter|.....ssseeeesereee p-m. (then visible). 1810 55 p.m. Hawkhurst =2nd mag.x ....../Yellow ...... (Kent). 1811 5 p.m.|Ibid ......... veeees| = 2nd mag.x ......| Yellowish 18/1110. pM pids secnvassy tee of eee sae ne .../Orange yellow, 18)11 30 p.m.\Tbid......... seoose]=OId MAG.% aeeee- MEMOW eens. 18/11 34 p.m.|Ibid...eeeeseeeees|—3rd mage ......[Yellow ss... 18/11 44 pm. Ibid fee eeeeeeeeene = 3rd mag.* eeeoee White seeeenees 1 18}11 55 p.m. [bid ..ssccesseeeee|= 3rd Mages eevee. (VElOW ssa rf EBTOVS4: psrt\ [bid secesusetecse: = sh Mapk.. +605 White ....... oe Duration. Motion remar-|Apparent path as} kably equal andslow. Not more than 3 seconds while in sight. ae Pleiades ar ¢ Aldebaran. Disappeared below « Ceti.) {Two or three seconds. 1°8 second ... 1 second ...... 0:4 second . 1:2 second .. . Quick; about 1 second. aoe eeenee ee eeenee 0:9 second ,. ...{L°2 second ... 0°8 second ... 1 sec., slow... 0°6 second ... 0°5 second \0°8 second ... 15 second ... ef Coté ‘Appeared first near ..|From 0, halfway tal .|From ¢ to 6 Urse Position, or Altitude and Azimuth. in the annexed)! sketch. the square Ursa Major. From ¢ Cephei to) o Draconis. From @ to 7 Gemi- norum. e Aurige. From. Z Draconis) to B Urse noris. From about laris to near th head of Lynx (Stars just b ginning to b visible. ) Fy A little north of due east. Majoris. # From a Pegasi t6 w Piscium, First appeared at | Cygni. mY From 4 (¢ Muse g Arietis) — Pleiades. = From 7 Piscium to 2 (@ Am dromede, a F gasi). ...(From. v to ¢ An dromede. From 7 Cephei n Lyre. er eaeeee | for half a second. ; Left no streak B Burst with sparks. a. no} visible streak. Left . ae at the middle of | its course. Left no Left a broad yellow train | for 5 seconds. Left no streak ee tera e eee see eeeee weeel® sown eeteelen see e meres nseeee ae eeeeeee Peete ereartoreneeee weal emote roees ee eeesereeeeeanenee slewenee sleneeeeeeeeeerernenees .|Almost perpendicularly, Preyer eee thus— \Fell almost perpendicu- larly. Orionis. aleeeeeeeoereecereeeseeese serene Peete eee ew renee eenee . Directed from near 7|....... no report heard. Oe POO e re reseeeonateseernseser Id. Seema eereeeeeeeetereeeeereeee Id. Id. Seen by several persons standing near together, | who called each other’s attention to it; no re-| port heard. Path not rectilinear eee Id. see ee ee eeeee Id. Directed from « Cygni.. seen eeeneeee Directed from Cassio- peia. Deemer er er ee eereesesesetnee | Directed from v Orionis .|Nine meteors Brightest in the middle of its course. ween ew weeeeee aaeeee POP erererereteteneneee Brightest in the middle of its course. in one hour ; clear sky ; moon half-full; one observer. W. .|A.S. Herschel. Id. .. (Id. Id. _ A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 351 | Lace, i ‘, - Direction ; noting also _ |Appearance ; Train, if any,| Length of | whether Horizontal ‘i and its Duration. Path. Perpendicular, or Remarks. Observer. Inclined. 7 ane eh _ jResembled the magnesium|Half the di-|Directed, in its apparent Beginning of the me-|A. Finch. 4 light, as seen in balloons} stance be-| path, exactly from the teor’s flight not seen.) a. onanight equally moon-| tween the} moon. Course slightly; The moon’s place too| | light; disappeared with-| moon and undulating. distant to be drawn | out bursting ; left a train) « Ceti. in the same figure. | on its course. So brilliant was the 4 light as completely a to overpower that of the full moon in a cloudless sky. , Burst into several pieces./About 30°.../Inclined thus— .........,Seen in twilight; 1st/\Communicated Left no streak. mag. stars just visible;/by A.S. Herschel. A. 8. Herschel. Communicated by A.S. Herschel. B. Davis. Date. 1867. Oct. 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 REPORT—1 Hour. hm ll 6 11 20 20 15 16 24 27 36 44 10 11 36 41 43 p-m. p.m. a.m. p.m. p.m. p.m, Place of P Observation. AU gc Hawkhurst =Ist mag... (Kent). IDId s oecccsessees|==OFd MAS ses... Ubidte-seeesivenenas|—— 2G Mag: teens Iileyis MAAR Ssnehopaar 5: —— ON MAGE lee ens bid canes. sels Wacise =drd mag * ...... si dite pmceneeneneee =drd mag.* ...... JNoyteler ase Beoratitar =2nd mag.* ...... Dbids.cs=.. Saves pt: =Ist mag ...... hide. vase. Sasste =3drd mag.* ...... MBId feeauineuescies = 2nd mag.x ...... Ibid v-o[==2nd mag.xX ...00. Wey ergeconcnracous =2nd mag.x ...... MDI eines secceeses/=1St MAB.%.cceceeee Nb1d eesiesmscevaaves =2nd mag.x ...... Wid issen sss cesunse =2nd mag.x ...... Nbidv eee. eee cpununoe =Ist mag.x...... one Ibid ......+++...002/= 1st Magee. .ees (bidii:. as Seceau sts Brighter than Ist nag.* bide AanbuodeCE Brighter than Ist mag.* [bid ica. dope snesee =2nd mag.* ...... Thid ..........0.../=2nd mag.* v.06. lipides BoD00305 =3rd mag.* ...... 868. White White Orange Yellow White White . White White . White . White White White White . White White White eee eoer Wihite ys. dcs 0c White ... wearers eee eeee see eeeee Pe eeeeres Yellow .....000. se eeeeee see eeeee ++++/0°5 second ./0°6 second Duration. 2 seconds; very slow motion. 1:4 second .. 0°5 second ... 0:4 second ... 0-7 second 0°6 second .., --/0°8 second ... 0°5 second .. 0°8 second 0°5 second ... 0°5 second ... 0°4 second ... 0°6 second ... 1'5 sec.; very, slow speed. 1 second 0°8 second ... 1 second ..,.... 1 second ...... 1 second ,,.... 0:2 second ... .|From 4 (u, X) Ho- .. From y to 61 Ceti.) .|Disappeared at ...(Erom e Musee to! ...(From 7 Urs Ma-| Position, or Altitude and Azimuth. From @ to « Cygnij — norum to f La-| — certe. Centre of path ati 6 Cassiopeiz. From yp to g Pe- gasi. From m Custodis| to w Cephei. Disappeared at ¢ Cygni. ‘From x Piscium to | g Pegasi. (0, €) Persei. 7 Andromede. joris to « Draconis From ¢ Urs Mi-) noris to ~ Dra-| conis, and ha f as far further. Centre of path 2° north of Pleiades.| From & Lyncis to} M Camelopardi. From p Persei to + (6, « Cassiopeiz). In head of Aries... From N_ Came-| lopardi to y) Ursa = Minoris, and 8° further. | From h Lacerte to p Cygni From 3 (8, o) An- dromede to 4 (y Pegasi, a La-| certz). | From 7 Piscium to g Pegasi. From 7 Cygni to & Vulpecule. 23 - > | _|Drew a train of red sparks Left a streak for 1 second Left a streak for 1 second Left no streak Left a streak for 14 second)... Left a streak for 3 a second Left a streak for 3a second Left a broad pale streak Left a streak for 2 seconds ‘Left a streak for 3. second]|++++++++es000.- Left a streak for 2 seconds|+++++++++++++ Appearance ; Train, if any, seconds. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. and its Duration. 3° long; gradually ; streak. disappeared left no for 2 seconds. tent eneneee Fee eerereseses Path. course, eft a bright streak for 2 seconds. FPR meee rere nneeesesesens eft a streak for 1 second|-++.. ta bright streak for 2 Very short... course. ’ a bright streak for 3)........... Seconds. seft a broad streak for 3). seconds. r a streak for 2 seconds sere eereereoees Length of Very short Soe errr rs Deere eeeens Course?from ¢Honorum. | -|Directed from y Gemi- ../From » Orionis .|From feet of Gemini ... ..|From feet of Gemini ... ..|From feet of Gemini ... 353 Direction; noting also whether Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Inclined. —_— Gemini. ‘Directed from r Tarandi TOOR Peer seers eeeeeeeeeene Directed from v Orionis Gemini. Directed from o norum. Directed from feet of Gemini. Ho- norum. see eeeee From »v Orionis Directed from 8 Tauri..| Directed from y Orionis From y Orionis ......... H eee teeta eeenee From head of Orion ... From head of Orion ... |Directed from feet of, Directed from feet of)... eeleweee THe d eee ee eereee rer eeeees Remarks. —_—- TTOOR eee reece eeesesenesssnes Oeereceseees Cee rs eereseee Orr rr Poon eee SOOO OOOO Onn nen Vigivie 98 /0's dei iateivin.e ad wieis.e sy wwlecce |Another, almost simul- taneously with it, in |_ the same path. . Principal Radiant-space, on the nights of the 18th and 19th, a circle of 2° or 3° radius round y Orionis. TT POOO Oe eee eres oeeteeeeeeenes Brightest in the middle of its course; directed from feet of Gemini. PP eee ee Seer ee eeenee |Almost stationary ...... Another, from Orion, more to E., soon after it. Clear sky; half moon... Three other small meteors, from Orion, in 15 seconds. Three other = small meteors, from Orion, about this time. Ce eee errr et aeerereeeeees Ieaee Id. Id. Id. Id. Id. Id. Id. Observer. —_—_—_—_— .|A. S. Herschel. 354 REPORT—1868. Date Hour Placa ‘ot Apparent Size Colour 3 i Observation. PP E 7 1867.|h m Oct. 20)10 52 p.m. Hawkhurst =Srd MAag.x ...00+ White .......4. (Kent). 201055) sp.mt-|[bid!<.c...-..c0--- =2nd mag.x ...... | White ......... 20/10 56 p.m. |[bid ......cossereee == 1 Sf MAGI, |. 22s4-]/VW MICE cosue occu» 20/10 57 p.m.|[bid..... AGH SY, =Srd Mag,X ...ve| White ,.cseors. 20/11 3 p.m. |[bid .......e0ceeeee| == OFA MAG. seeeee WiKItes cosnces 20/11 7 p.m. [Ibid ....cccecveeeee Brighter than Ist/White ......... mag.* 2011 UL pm,Ubid sc ccsseioer sss =2nd mag. ws... Wikite aecesses 20/11 18 p.m.|Ibid .......00..066.,=2md mag.* ...... Wihitie iadesevs- 20/11 15 p.m. |[bid .....ss0ece0.0./—=Srd MAg.x ..s00e| White ...s00e0 20/11 17 p.m.|Inid .........0ee0.. =2nd mag.* ......|White veces QO UION Gp msilbidcsssscseesaees: =3rd mag.x ...... White Secs. .05: 20/11 45 p.m.|Ibid ........0. Soret {= USh MAGS ose se Yellowish white ; train and sparks orange - red and yellow. 20/11 50 pimi|Tbid i aergeseenc esse =Ist mag.x ...... WVGTEC. eaves: 29/About 9 30/Glasgow, Scot-|Half apparent di-| Yellow and red p.m. land. ameter of the moon. Position, or Duration. Altitude and Azimuth. O-6second ...\From 4 (», Ceti to ~ Pi- scium, and 4° further. 1-2 second ...,From 4 (o, p) Per-| sei to $ (@ Tri anguli, « Arietis),} and half as far} further. From 4 (8, ¢) to B Orionis. a | From 6 Andro- mede to 4 (p, B 08 second ... 1 second ...... 0:5 second . 5° further. ...|From 3 (2, Ceti, ph Piscium) to Piscium. 1*1 second 0°7 second ... Draconis. From a Tarandi to 8 Cephei, and 4° further. || 1 0°8 second ... 0'6 second .../From conis. 0-‘7second ...\From 29 Urse Majoris to $ ( 6) Urse noris, and further. j 06 second ...\From « Cassio peie to 0 Ce phei. Slow speed;From 9 to & 1:2 second. | certz. é Eridani. | ‘Lessthan1sec..At altitude abo 45°, in the N.! - A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. . ‘|Appearance ; Train, if any,| Length of and its Duration. _|Left a streak for 14 second = } Left a streak for 14 second _|Left a streak for 4 a second a : ‘Left a streak for 1 second). : _ |Left a broad bright streak for 34 seconds. ; Left a streak for 2 seconds “ILeft a streak for 2 seconds ; eft a streak for 1 second a | | eft a streak for 13 second ‘Left a streak for 1 second i |Began and ended small. | A brilliant orange - yellow train and red sparks, 3° long, fol- _ lowed the nucleus, and | remained visible half a |. second. eft a streak for 23 seconds ‘ ucleus elongated ; front _ part bright yellow, fol- ——— ——. Path. ee eeeeeeeseses seen eeeeeeeeees I Aerr hoddos Sere eee eeeeeens see eeeeeeeesees see ee ee eteeeres Aoeeect dias as setae eae | lowed by red streamers | and sparks, f .../From yv Orionis Direction ; noting also whether Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Inclined. Directed from » Orionis From near vy Orionis ... From » Orionis ......... | From y Orionis . From near » Orionis ... From feet of Gemini ... From Orion eee eee eee From Radiant LH,, in Hydra. From belt of Orion From Radiant, in Cas- siopeia, ene ences ....\Curved path, thus ;— of’ a “A asl seeeeeee Remarks, From Auriga ..ccoosssase|seesereerees Coenen eeeeane seneneee Deeeeeene saeneeee TORR e eee e eee teen eee see eee POPP eee PEO bree saneae a eeteeeeeeneee Pee ee eee ere sees SOP e ee eee eP Oe tere eeeeeeresene PreeeeUUOeS ESSEC eC Terre No other meteor seen in the last interval; moon rising; clear sky. Peer ee eee ee POP eres esarnssrees It appeared largest and brightest when turn- ing, when it gave off, numbers of red sparks. Id. Id. Directed from w Cephei|From Radiant in Orion|Id. Id. Id. Id. +. fd. Id. ~ 9) 355 Observer. ../A. S. Herschel. G. Haley and W. Miller. 3 Date. 1867. Nov.13 14 14 1 ~ ] ~ 1 o 19 Dec.22 1868. Jan. —_ ~ and 6 a.m.| vatory, Toronto, (local time).| Canada. Between 4 |Dudley Observa- 5 am.and| tory, Albany, 5 54 am.}| New York, (local time).| U.S.A. Between 1 |Newhaven, Con- 10 a.m.and| necticut, U.S.A. 5 30 a.m. (local time). Between 1 |Nassau, N. P., 32a.m.and| Bahamas, W. 5 34 am.| Indies. (local time). Between 1 |Cape of Good) Star-shower.....00». Star-shower....+++«. Star-shower.....+... Bright meteors ... 52a.m.and| Hope Obser- 3 34a.m.| vatory, South (local time). Africa. 10 20 p.m.|Birmingham .../=3rd mag.* ...... 5 55 p.m.|Ibid ........e000,—4th, 2nd, 4th, Ist mag. stars. 7 27 a.m.|Ropley (Hamp-|About three times shire). as bright as Ju- piter appears at; its brightest. About 7 30)Hawkhurst Large meteor ...... a.m. (Kent). 56 REPORT—1868. Place of : Hour. Ohana: Apparent Size. Colour. hm Between 10\Cape of Good/Bright meteors ....Orange and 45 p.m. Hope, South green, &c, and day-| Africa. break on the 14th. Between 1 |Magnetic Obser- Star-Shower....ccccclecssseee Bscooanings Fee eeeeeerereeerer eee e eee eee eenees Orange and green, &c. Dull blue, white, blue, white. Pale straw colour. White ......00 Duration. eer ee enereseeeeee SO e ee eeeeeeeewene COO r eee eee eee eeens eaten ee eee fetes 0°5 second . Slow _ speed ; 2°5 seconds. \5 seconds...... About 2 secs. Position, or Altitude and Azimuth. Seer ee ee ne eeeseenareee From 7 Andro-} mede to « Pegasi. Disappeared at an| altitude of about} 30°, due east. | above the ho- Centre} of streak about 35° east from} . magnetic 8. } ' A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 357 = a < ka Direction; noting also _|Appearance ; Train, if any, Length of | whether Horizontal, and its Duration. Path. Perpendicular, or Remarks. Observer. Inclined. | Nine meteors observed ...|............06 ‘tettesseceseeevercesseeeeesee Bright moonlight, hazy|G. W. H. Mac- in E. lear, R.A.S., ‘ Monthly Notices,’ vol. XXviii. p. 52. 2267 meteors seen in five}.........s00.. seeseeceeceveeeceeeseeeeeeeees/Maximum number |Americen Journ. hours. counted in10 minutes! of Science, by four observers, 430! Second Series, meteors, between 4%) vol. xly. p. 84. 10™ and 4" 20™ a.m. 1301 meteors observed in Trneteeeeeeeeeel seceeeeessecccesseseseseesees| Maximum of frequency| Ibid. pp. 87-89. one hour and fifty-one 4 at 4" 31™ a.m., viz. minutes. 47 in one minute; five observers, of whom two were con- tinually on the watch. About 5000 meteors ‘ob-!..,.,. Soae apc Ae ARES eee > seevereeeeee{ Maximum frequency 43/[bid. pp. 78-82. served in five hours. meteors in one minute | for one observer, at | 4> 35™ a.m.; strong moonlight ; clear sky. 1040 meteors observed in|............... ‘ececeeeetesessesceeevererees Maximum frequency 15 R.A.S. ‘Monthly one hour. per minute for one] Notices,’ vol. ‘ observer, at 45 25") xxviii. p. 54. a.m. ~ Seen also at Trinidad, 1600 me- teors, between 25 a.m. and daybreak; and at Martinique. meteors observed ....4.|.....500-.s000elecse seccdsnavassavcvecersses Bright moonlight; sky|G. W. H. Mac- clear. lear, Ibid. p. 53. MUIR een seen csacastscccncslecseccodesceces From Radiant A,, ....../Sky clear at 104 p-m. ;| W. H. Wood. one meteor in 30 mi- nutes; sky overcast on the nights of the 20th and 21st. ‘| sevecesseesessevcveeresseeeeessSHOWed two minimalld. and two maxima of size, with correspond- ing changes of colour and brilliancy. (Oc i asahteee eft a luminous streak,|.....,......... teeeeeseeeerseesereseasesecesleseseeeesrieessstessssserseres(Ae Harding, Which remained visible ‘The Globe,’ twenty minutes. (See Jan. 3. Appendix for its de- Scription.) sappeared BUAGU AM Veleccesestoeccceclicccox evs Spococesocooc seoonee-(Seen in twilight. The)Communicated Left a broad white Streak resembled albyA.S. Herschel. streak like a_ bright cloud lighted up by | silvery cloud. the rising sun. 358 appoRr- 1 RES. : = Black Ate m > eed or ate. our. : Apparent Size. olour. uration. ltitude and Observation. ea 1868.| h m Jan. 1)About 7 30)/Hurstpierpoint |Very large ......-.. owllilleascsesesee|+senveaenscsaMmanpRaHiCeh Bt | (GiSHgam a.m. (Sussex). peared at a point) 10° above the horizon, 15° east} from south, 1)About 7 30|Woodford, Salis-\Large fireball ......)..creesecers veeess|oeescsneseo Rian First appeared i a.m. bury. the east; it. ther shot across to wards the south 1/About 7 30/Shirley Warren,|Size of a common)White ......++- Less than 30/About 10° or 15% am. Southampton.| rocket seen a seconds. above the E.S. quarter of a mile to S.S.E. how off. rizon. Centre a the path exactly§ over the spol where the su was about to rise 1/About 7 30/St. Helens, Isle/Large meteor ...... Rainbow vestnresr snes ..|Began in S.S.E a.m. of Wight. colours. and ended in thi south. 1} 7 30 a.m.|Freshwater, Isle|Apparent size Off-.+++++++ sorenees Moved rather|Passed from N.E of Wight. the full moon. slowly. to S.W., abow 35° above th horizon, an disappeared clouds, whi were about 10 rizon l\Evening .../Birmingham ...|,.......seeessceees 1g OS, ea eae Micon ae 1/10 25 p.m.|Hawkhurst =8rd mag.x ......|White ......... 1-4 second ..,/Commenced (Kent). to Castor. 111 29 p.m, [bid ......s60..006.,= 2nd mag.* ...... White i000... 0-6 second ...|From « Draconis 1 (K, M) Cau 7 A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 359 Direction ; noting also | ‘Appearance; Train, if any,| Length of | whether Horizontal, ‘a . and its Duration. y Path. Perpendicular, or Remarks. Observer, dae Inclined. ————— ——___._. ——— | i a | {Like a Roman-candle-ball.|.......... ++++-|E. to W.; nearly hori-/Bearing of the point of A. R. Wallace, m7 Burst, and left two zontal. disappearance (in the} .‘ Daily Tele- _ patches of vapour, form- direction of Wolson-| graph,’ Jan. 2. _ Ing a single horizontal bury Hill) by Ord- streak of smoke, which nance Map. Altitude floated eastward and by a trigononetrical persisted more than half observation. Proba- an hour. ble error of the po- sition not more than one degree. MUM eOCKEE.. Left! ...,..csseceseelocdeioccessseocses ccc seek sedabasepiiececereverssecsbesel ht. O. Muy The a white streaming light, , Standard,’ which remained in sight Jan, 3. for full a quarter of an hour. Rocket-like. Disappeared].........00+00. steneeeueeesssevnessenessgners|seettereesssssssessecressereeel By L, Wollaston, without bursting, and ‘Morning left a narrow light—tail Advertiser,’ _ behind it through the Jan. 3. whole of its course. (See Appendix for de- scription.) Resembled a comet, leav-/.sssssseseeselecssssseessessesearsecacese.(Eroduced a great light| The Standard,’ ~ ing in its wake a bright in the sky. Jan. 3, Stream of light, which remained visible for half ‘b | Saree Side: a PTY From a broad straight|H. M. W., ‘The before it disappeared, line the streak as-| Times,’ Jan. 2. but left a broad trail sumed the form of of white light 60° in a zigzag wave, com- length ; which was not posed of several "yet overpowered by the parts, which appeared sunlight at 85 5™ a.m. to the eye to be about three times as long k as they were broad ; He: no report heard. Bees. cties, ee Beebe ieee (Cot eeceatead sessveeesseeeseesceeseeeeeens Overcast 5 night of the|W. H. Wood. wa I 2nd clear; an occa- sional watch kept, but no meteors seen. Bitevesbov'vcrcviscecseceseeecs-(LO” soeseieee(Directed from y Ge-|Two other small meteors|A. S, Herschel. a minorum. at 108 40™ and 105 ; 50™ p.m., in Orion and Canis Minor. meleus with sparks ; left|........ssssee+|eeeseseseseseeeseseeeseseeeess(EOur meteors in 1 hour ;|Id. nO streak. sky 2 clear; no moon; anit one observer. On the 2nd, sky clear till 92 p-™.; no meteors seen, 360 REPORT—1868. ‘ ——— ae - Dat H Place of . . Position, ox ate. our. OWsercativn. Apparent Size. Colour. Duration. Altitude and Azimuth. 1868.;/h m s i Jan. 12) 4 45 p.m.|Selkirk, Scotland|Large meteor ......).....+++ poaseen bal cae cetieaeater ....(Ended its course} exactly at the | apparent place of Venus. 1 23\Evening |Sale, Victoria,|Large meteor s....)..ecceeensereeeees Several secs,,.|In the N........ (local time). S. Australia. 23/About 8 0/Glasgow ...... ..|About equal to White ..........24 seconds ...|Im the S. .s++s.sese0)/ p-m. Venus at its brightest. 29\From 4 30 Bergamo, Italy... Various SIZES seecesleseee seeeeere a eeeelteerereeeneeer Ae OO am. till daybreak. 30| 6 49 56 |Dantzig ........./Very large andGreen ........./2 seconds ... From 3 Orionis (in) p-tn. bright meteor. the S.S.E.) toi] (D.M.T.) Sirius (8° above), the horizon, 46%) 8' E. from S.). 30|About7p.m.|Breslau ......++-|Half apparent di-/Bluish green...|1 sec. while in/In the N.E. From) {Breslau ameter of the| sight. _« Urs Majors) time). moon; well de- towards 6 Leonis,) fined disk. disappearing 4° or 5° above th horizon. ; 30!About 6 45|[bid.........6.../Apparent diameter Red, — tinged)2 or 3 seconds; In the N.E., pm. of the full moon,, with yellow.| slow speed.| scending (Breslau a __considerabli time). height to th horizon. 30\Evening ...|Ragendorf, Large meteor; 2 or|Red; the train) or 5 seconds |First appeared nea Hungary. 3x Q. of many co- « Draconis, and: lours. passed between e, © Urse Ma joris towards th horizon. 30) 6 55 p.m.jOfen ss... Half apparent di-/At first red,/5 or 6 seconds| FromCorona, acro (0. M.T.) _ameter of the| then green- B Urs Minor moon. ish blue, and between then white. and 6 Aurig towards the he rizon. Feb. 15/11 33 p.m.|London .......4./= @ Leomis ....4....| White sosssseerecererreeserseeees a= From 135°+ to 120 +1 A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. Appearance; Train, if any, and its Duration. —_——$ Burst with sparks at dis- appearance. Left a luminous line in its wake; burst into in- numerable brightly coloured particles at disappearance. Disappeared, and then re-|. appeared again, further on, almost like another meteor. Sixty meteors mapped in two hours, and seventy others counted before daybreak. Burst with a scattering sparks in all directions. Left a mo- mentary streak, which appeared to consist of sparks where the meteor burst. Dazzling at first; form undistinguishable ; fol- lowed at last by a small red train. Disappeared without bursting. Pear-shaped, round below,|. and ending in a point. At first a small shoot- ing-star; it became a| large fire between e and Z Urs, and pro- ceeded thence to the ho- rizon, scattering sparks on its course. A large fireball . Dall train, and streamers from the nucleus. HASH [Fh ceccek Path. Peers r eee eeeres Oe terrae eeeeee seeeeeoeseoeend About 17°... | Length of | 361 ; Direction ; noting also | whether Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Inclined. la ee meee eeresecere rt eben reeenee Described an are of a segment of a circle. SP e eee er ee eserves esse eset Oe seit \Wastoubyetsnsececeuecouese Vertically down, from S.W. by W. to N.E. by E. ‘Quite vertically down... head. Remarks. Another large meteor, seen at Ardrossan on an early Sunday evening in the same month, disappeared in the direction of Lochwinnoch (North Ayrshire). seeeene Pe eee ee eres eteseresens Clear sky Peer ee ee beeenes Pretty distinct Radiant- point, in Corona; at a=233°, d= + 26° (G. V.S.). The brilliancy of the meteor was very uni- form throughout. [A shower of stones fell at Pultusk, see Ap- pendix II.] Passed behind a cloud, which it lighted up brilliantly from N. to E., and reappeared as a red fireball falling nearly to the ho- rizon. (See Appen- dix II.). Lighted up all objects with a dazzling light. Illuminated the clouds near the horizon for one second with a light like red fire. iN. to S., passing over-|[‘‘Corona” not yet risen. A different meteor from the preceding one. | Inclined downwards to|A smaller meteor from right. satne Radiant at 11" 40™ p.m. Observer. W. Brown. ‘Melbourne Post.’ P. Innes. M. Zezioli. Communicated by G. V. Schia- parelli. — Kayser. Note by J. G. Galle. — V. Sichart. Note by J. G. Galle. ‘ Schlesische Zei- tung,’ Jan. 31. —Schuh. Note by J. G. Galle. f. Schenk. Note by J. G. Galle. T. Crumplen. aE 20 362 REPORT—1868. Place of Position, or Date.| Hour. Observahion. Apparent Size. Colour. Duration. Paes 1868.|h m ¥ Feb. 16/About 9 30/Annesley Bay, |? Large meteor .../The light |..... seeesecscnses cdececccccccccessscerece p-m. Red Sea. shown was (local time). greenish blue. 19/About 8 10 Birmingham .../=Jst mag.%...... ~- \Pale blu. s.scclienevane secoseeees/From 7, towards! | p-m. a Hydre. TOWOPS2” pa |Ubid .2..0c-. eee — Shama re eesne Ruddy ........./1 second ......|From y Persei, half- | way to y Andro-| mede, 20|Between | [Manchester ......|.......cceseccceesreceee Dull red ....../Moderate From near « Urse|) 10 30 and speed. Majoris to near} | 11 30 p.m. « Cephei. 25/10 13 p.m.|Birmingham ...|=1st mag.x ...... Deep blue ...|0°5 second ... poe Z to 3 (8, y)} eporis. Mar.14| 9 20 p.m./Ibid....... =e = 1s capeel BL sesecess [0°75 SECOND... a— = : peli * From 54° +27° 15/About 10 15 Camberwell, Very bright shoot-|............ss-r.|+«« seeeeeecces p.m. London. ing-star. 28) 7 40 p.m.\Cumbray (Scot-|Half apparent di-/Yellow ......|1 second, very Disappeared : land). ameter of the quick the horizon moon. 29' 9 13 p.m./Birmingham .../=Ist mag* ...... Blue ....+....{0°5 second .../From « pons to | <— — 154° + 8° 29) (9) 414 pros pid ss-ceeosaneee es =38rd, then > Ist/Reddish _yel-|2 seconds......|From o to omicrom ‘ mag.* low. Leonis. Apr.10/Between |Manchester....... =14 mag.x ...... White ........./Slow motion... Centre of path near 10 30 and and below omi 11 30 p.m.| cron Herculis. 10)Between ‘jIbid ............ fo1| ORO DAP 3s laess ss] ULL te seasans 0 10 30 and 11 30 p.m. 1]/Between “VUbid’....+....-.7-. == Tage | eeceres White ss.sc 6.0. 10 30 and 11 30 p.m. Ul)Between 4 |lbithessessotscoeees 14 mage oo... White ......-+/Quick motion |From « Lyncis to} 10 30 and J Geminorum. 11 30 p.m. 12/Between —|Tbid ..<.....c.«+« .(=3rd map® [Dull .....02. secesecesceeeeese./Oentre of path neg 10 30 and pe Herculis. 11 30 p.m. 12\Between —_| bid .ee.....0ece.s =2nd mag.* ....../White ........-,Quick motion |From y Leonis Mi 10 30 and noris to \ Leonis, 11 30 p.m. and 3° further. | 6 Ls/Between —IIbid .......000--005/= 14 Mage ve... White .....,...|Slow motion.../Near @ Herculis .. 1 10 30 and } j11 30 p.m. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS, 363 Direction ; noting also Appearance; Train, if any,| Length of | whether Horizontal , and its Duration. Path. Perpendicular, or , Hemarks, Observer. | Inclined. Tt gradually lightened up,|.........ccce0e|ec..eeeee ARLE Cone Pen ...../ The sky was cloudy and J. P. Maclear. till everything around so overcast that no- was shown nearly as thing could be dis- clearly as if it were day, tinguished. There then it quickly faded. was a low rumbling sound at the same time like thunder. Be isa sssaeerersecseeseevesseerss/seeeeeeesaceeee/ From Radiant My, ; ...\Intercepted view.........,W- H. Wood. Pegeck teereecceseseesccsseseeseee/sereeeesseesees From Radiant M, ......|Rate of appearance, one Id. meteor in 30 minutes : elear sky. On the nights of the 20th, 21st, 22nd, and 23rd sky overcast. Intermittent light; va-|:+++e+esseee From Radiant ?B, orjOne meteor only in one'R. P. Greg. nished once in its course. Si ec hour; clear sky ; one Left no train. observer. eke Metra ...0.0s..05 ap] BOOSCOC aecnees From Radiant tp asesses Sidon ssesieccs wesccccceeece ---|W. H. Wood. ReUSSsnwASusssessssscseoecccnceas|"74eeeeeeee> From Radiant S,......00e/0¢% seveseeeeecetsseseesesee Ld Left a long streak of light|+:++++seeeeeeee| . eesesesanene senecseveene|*tteeteeeeebeeeseseeeeesesees COMMuUNIcated er ar 4, by T. Crumplen, Globular ; no sparks ; dis-|-+++++++++++... From E. to W., inclining)Seen in bright twilight. James Thomson. appeared gradually. Left downwards, thus— Communicated no train. by A.S. Herschel. Increased from a second to|+sesreseesseeee From Radiant AG Aree seneeececvecescesesscceseseres|W, FH, Wood. a first mag. star. Left a smoky train on its|+++.++++++++++-|From Radiant S,......... No other meteors seen|fd. on this night. ane a vie/2°ss-0-0e00es/Directed from « Lyrae,.,|from Radiant Q H,,...[R. P. Greg. the eeeeeceeeseeeesees(tereeresereeees/ From Radiant M,, ; seescrnenccccence ool TC. RUMEN cies 05s e's 00s paxqeassevscces Pron, Radiant Mz, jt; 2 avme| bid! <2 -secusesersnet =Ist mag.+, then) White, then Lo—ord mag.* red. Duration. 2 second ...... ) "leew neve weet eanseee ..-|Much 2°5 seconds... ....| From 200°+40° .| From 268°+282° Position, or Altitude and Azimuth. From 7» Ursee Ma- joris to 13° beyond and above 7, v, ¢ Herculis, a= O0= From 217°+52° to 233 +23 to 1863428 to 260 +204 From near 9 Urs Majoris; shot through Comex Berenices. From @ Virginis to 3 (6 Virginis, 0 Crateris), Quick motion 2 secs.; moved slowly and leisurely. than the preceding meteor. sete e eee enee seeeee saetee Hee eeeeeeres 0°2 second ... 1 second ...... 0°75 second... swifter/From near @ Her- Between 6 Libre and Corona; near a Serpentis. Disappeared 5° above the E.S.E. horizon, com- mencing 12° W. of thesame point. culis to 3 (A Her- culis, y Lyre), and a few de- grees further. Began 15°, and|_ ended 8° above 9 Urse Majoris. Disappeared _ be- tween #6 and y Urs Minoris. From 4 (1, «) Cygni, halfway to 7 Lyre. From ~ Herculis to Cygni. From B_ Herculis to « Ophiuchi. 2 seconds Disappeared at a Equulei. | {Increased from a second.... magnitude star to the A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. Appearance; Train, if any, and its Deration. Left a very luminous-broad train, tapering at the ends. Left a very bright, long,|--+++++++-+- tapering train. HOO eee eeeaeeneeee seeeee Left a train on its whole course. brightness of Jupiter, became pear - shaped; sil- yery white fringed with anterior crescent blue. FORO e ewe reat ensee Globular ; train. Left a bright train on its _ whole course. eft a very luminous train 7° or 8° long. Seen eee eeeseres Yo train or sparks .... ert white; globular; iminishing soon after] the middle of its course’ toa dull red spark. SPOR eee Oboe esas left a slight}. old | eneee ike) serene Fete ee eeeeee ZAP Hee erererenes Length of Path. Short paths teres wees ... Downwards to left .|Downwards to right eens) 367 Direction; noting also whether Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Inclined. —_—_— eee eee eee ere ee ey feet e ewes a From an apparently new} Radiant-point near « Serpentis, viz. S Z.. . Directed from near y Virginis. ../from a Radiant near) » Urs Majoris. Perpendiculatly down... wees From Radiant 8 G, eee From Radiant W... Directed from Lyre...) be weeel rene Remarks. | _—_ Two maxima of bright-| ness. Appeared to go out in the middle of its course. see teeseeeeee ere er ey Lees ...Another small meteor, at 10" 31" p.m., with long flight downw ards) to E.S.E. ; ; apparently | from @ Lyre. |A small meteor from a Lyre, whilst record-) ing this. .....No other shooting-star| in 20 minutes. Left a smoky streak 15°; long for 4 a second. No other meteor in one hour. Night of the 13th overcast. Similar shooting-stars to these were ob- served at abont the same time last | year. No meteors seen in the south between 9" 54™ and 105 28™ 30? p.m. Six shooting-stars seen between 9" 50™ and 102 39™ p.m.; after: wards overcast. Moved along a line drawn from a Coronx. PUPP Cee ee ee eee ee eee ee seen eeeeennee |W. H. Wood. tal Observer. T. Crum plen. Id. Id. W. H. Wood. R. P. Greg. T. Crumplen. Id. A. S. Herschel. | Id, REPORT—1868. Colour. White .......6- Bright white... seeeee [White ....0... White ....... fe White ......... Bluish white... ... [White ....0008 White as Vega Lyre. Dull, misty ... Dull, misty ... White ......... Very white ... |White ........- White White White Peeeeeeee Duration. 1 second ...... 1°5 second ... 1 second 0°8 second ... 2°35 seconds... 1 second ...... 0°8 sec. ; rapid Slow speed; 1 second. Rapid; 0°3 sec. 2 seconds...... Pee eee eeeeenene Very rapid ... Very rapid ... Quick motion 0°6 second ... 0°6 second ... 0-6 second ... 0°5 second ... ———_§ Centre of path at From e Cephei to From 8 Draconis to] _ From 3 (a, 0) to 4 From 34 (6 Cygni, Commenced at @ From a Capricorni) From o Coron From Centre of path at} ../From H Draconis} 368 Place of . Date.| Iour. Glsewacon Apparent Size. 1868./h m_ s May 2012 25 a.m.|Birmingham .../=3rd mag.* ....+ 2012 33 a.m.|[bid ............0- =Ist mag.x ..... 20:12 33 30 |[hid .........+.0e.: = Ist MAG. %eeeseeeee a.m. 2012 35 am.|[bid ..|=2nd mag.x ..... 20/12 45 a.m.|[bid........+ voves|==OF MAG. .e00e 20} 1 6 a.m. |Ibid .......00.-.4+ =Ist mage sass. 20) 1 47 a.m.|tbid eee [= 2nd MAK ...00- 20/10 45 p.m.|[bid .,...c....eeee- =2nd mag.* ...... 20,11 20 p.m_|Ibid ......+0000+++-|=Sirlus .....-4. 25:10 13 p.m./Witham (Essex)|Large meteor ...... (or?26) 2510 35 p.m.|Birmingham ...|Much larger and brighter than Venus. 27\Between _|Manchester...... =2nd mag.t ...... 10 55 and ‘11 20 p.m. 27. Between |[bid....... cesseeee/=Ord Mag.ex ,..... 10 55 and 11 20 p.m. 27,Between |[bid............+-/—=2nd mag.* ...... 10 55 and 11 20 p.m. 27, Between ‘|[bid,..........+06 =Ist mag.x ...... 10 55 and \11 20 p.m. 2711 5 p.m.)/Hawkhurst =3rd mag.* ...... (Kent). 2711 15 p.m.|[bid............+../ =2nd mag.% ...... 28\12 14 a.m.|[bid ...............,—=2nd Mag.x ...... 28/02 17 asm: [bid vaseadearsscost =drd mage* 4... Position, or Altitude and Azimuth. p Lyre. 4 (o Cassiopeix, « Andromedz). 33 Cygni. (6, «) Urse Mi-| | noris. 0 Sagitte) to s Vulpecule, and 3° further. Ophiuchi. to « Aquarii. “2= =— to 260°+40° | a= o= From 106°+ 70° to 11] +55 Venaticorum to} B Leonis. n Herculis. to 6 Cephei. noris. One flash at a Delphini; th other at « Ca: pricorni. | | } H | and its Duration. Brightest at the middle of its course. Left no streak. Brightest)......... at the middle of its course. POP e tere reer ra eees POPP e esate tere eee sereseseesssess an inverted rocket. No train or rightest at the middle of ‘its path. Wo stationary flashes ... \ Appearance ; Train, if any, SOP e erate reeeeresenes seeeeene eee |Brightest at first; faded | gradually till it disap- ppeared descending, like|.. ee] See eeeeneeeee See eeeseseeenee Path. LO casanee eter eeeeees reer ey eee eneeereee weeee ween eewenee on Pere reser eanes Length of Atl teen ee oe eee teeeessenee .|Directed from @ Lyre. Peele eee eeeeeeeere eens eeeees tl eeeererevceessesesreenee A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS, ” 369 whether Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Inclined. conis. peared. Brightest at middle of its|.c-...seccs...[escseeceeees sesvsswadedsevecus|stacesvashiavsoapcsessenccts : - course. Grew brighter, and then)...............|...0.. OpUSE ore sandaceites CCOCCOOCCOSCEE CE Sea ae eas _ faded gradually, - Poniatovii. TOPCO O erro terres sseseeeees From Radiant D G, ..|From Radiant DG, ...|. From Radiant W. Vrom Radiant S G, or S Z, in Serpens. AHO OR eee reer eeereeeenngssseee eee ee ences eaeeee Direction ; noting also Directed from y Dra- Directed from o Tauri ..../Ten meteors in 45 mi- Remarks, ..|Curved in last part of its course, ee OC eee ee ceneeeeEseceescess None of themeteors seen on this nightleft streaks, The larger ones bright white. One changed to red at last, Observer. W. H. Wood. Id, Id. -\Ud. Id. Id. Id. tee eeeeee SPOR ee eer r rere esseees nutes. Fine clear sky. A splendid meteor. Be- ginning and end of its path not seen. Strong moonlight. eee err JE W. B., Id. Id, ‘The Times,’ May 28. W. H. Wood. ....{R. P. Greg. d. Joe Ancocecchcer eee eases as poninoadcoctoorperberrrcctr dea Beass oseesesevecerssesesesnees|L d. d. steseseeecerestereeseseseenss[As 9. Herschel, Padetene es cee secenecesseseseees (Ue SOR t eee ee eee hd ey Id. Almost simultaneous ...|Id. 370 Date. Hour. hemes 12 39 am. 1868. May 28 June 5/10 11 p.m. 9 50 p.m. Place of Observation. Hawkhurst (Kent). Birmingham Radcliffe Obser- vatory, Oxford. 13} 9 15 p.m. 1811 59 p.m. 19/12 1 am. 1912 9 am. 19/12 20 am. 19 (or ? 26) About 10 p-m. 19)11 50 p.m. 26/10 43 p.m. 26/11 15 p.m. 11 15 30 p-m. 10 15 p.m. Hawkhurst (Kent). Manchester ...... setae ene tenes Hastings (Sussex). Manchester Hawkhurst (Kent). [bidiesessavne«ssieee Birmingham ... sa(=ord, then —Jst REPORT—-1868. Apparent Size. eer =2nd mag.% ... mag.* Large meteor (?); 5° in length, and 1° in breadth. +» |= 18t MAL Heeeeeeese Brighter than Ve- nus appears at its brightest. =I1st MAgG.x....0000- = Ist mag.*.... =1} mag.x weeeee =I1st mag.x As large, but not so. bright as Venus. =2nd mage oe. = 2nd mag. =2nd mag.% =8rd, then = Ist mag.* Colour. White, then red. Dull yellow... White . White White . White . Bluish white... White ... Dull orange yellow. White ....000. White ....00... INVINICE) weoveness Wihte scenws 1 Dull yellow... Duration. 3°5 secs. ; slow speed. 2 seconds ; slow. .|Nearly four'First minutes. 5 or 6 seconds (observer counted slowly up to 27). 2°5 seconds ... 0°75 second... 1 second ...... 0-5 second ... Moved quite slowly. 0°75 second... About 1 sec... About 1 sec... 4 second ...... 2 seconds...... Position, or Altitude and Azimuth. —— From Z Coronz to Q Cephei. a o= From 197°-++18° to Arcturus. situated 4 little west of Po laris. Thence passed just be4 low a, B Ursa Majoris, on @ course directly; west, to near thé ht. W. horizon. From altitude 25° due S., to aly titude 20°, S.E by 8. (Position: measured fron bearings, on th spot.) From near Lacert to » Draconis. — Close to y Urs Majoris. Close to B Andro: mede. { Above the N. horizon, n Come Berenice In the N.E., at a altitude of abo 252. From 7 Cygni to Cephei. From o Cygni te » Cephei. Centre at 4% Urs Minoris, Persei). From H to C Can lopardi. From 6 Urse J joris to <=20 o6=+44°, ise A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 371 : Direction; noting also Xppearance; Train, ifany,| Length of | whether Horizontal, and its Duration. Path. Perpendicular, or Remarks. Obsetver L—C—= Inclined. Bright white in the first!............ ++/Course slightly undu-/Rate of appearancelA. S. Herschel. $ of its course; then lating. “Seven meteors per red, drawing a tail of hour. Moon set at ‘red sparks. 11°30". Clear sky; ind one observer. ee soescvee|eoeovsnscee-ees(Ftom Radiant Y,, id Leo|Full moon, Night of|W. H. Wood. otf the 20th clear; no meteors: of the 21st overcast ; of the 22nd ; fine; no meteors. 2 The month fine, but é, ; , in| _.|, barren in meteors. , . , White cloud; like aj-+.........../When near Leo, itlA thick haze all the|‘The Times, comet, or the smoke of turned somewhat night, and mock-moon| June 15 and a railway train faintly Southwards, to near} at 13" 40™, Another July 2 2 illuminated by twilight. Regulus ; and then} meteor, on the 24th! communicated On starting into motion, northwards again. of June, was recorded] byW. H.Wood it left on its whole by Mr. Allnatt, at| and R. Main, course a train broader Frant, in Sussex. than itself, which re- mained visible after the meteor had disappeared. : seed | “8, a slight train of,.........-..++./Nearly horizontallyfrom No stars yet visible in|T. Humphreys. ke behind it at last, W. to E. the twilight. First] Communicated disappeared without seen reflected in still] byA.S.Hersche!. ursting. water, and directly ; afterwards skirting the tops of some trees. The observer counted twenty-seven while it was in sight MERA P20 snssasac.|.+0+d0enesstereesssesvescecslevesccce, ttevesssseneeseses( Ree P. Greg, thout a nucleus, : @ momentary train...|2° ......... Directed from iyRasteas sey. zenteceee ececscssoreroal NC, a Radiant W ?. BAIN vs6...00.10.,./4° ssee00...[Directed from UrsalFrom Radiant Noy 30 Or|id. Minor. Bae. Peereeesssseeeteeeseceeesesss/2 eoereseesee./Perpendicularly down ;From Radiant M G, ?,..{Id. i directed from Ursa Major. : ar. Disappeared {20° or 30°\From E. to W.; nearly|The last, or one before|Communicated out bursting; left horizontal. the last. Friday even-| byA.S.Herschel. ‘ain or sparks. ing in June. Bs... 5.00... (O° essere occ. 5. From Radiant MG, ...!No meteors from Ra-|R. P. Greg. = diant Q,,,, in Co- rona, seen in four he evenings. disappeared gra-|...............|From Radiant Weeesescesleee-s-secee ssseeeteeeseceresee|Ae Se Herschel, Jeft no streak. or sparks left.../10° ........./e Urse to y Persei.|...... Shonodanudachoc Oo Id. Radiant Ng, ,,. alc or sparks left...|6°..........+./From Radiant MG, ...lecsssesssssesesseadiecasens,, (1d. MMR AEEAK: ,.....|.0cecececcecoslecccee: BME cs asceseaneee Rate of frequency one| WV. H. Wood. ed: meteor per hour.) - ; Clear sky. 372 REPORT—1868. Pl f Position, or Date.| Hour. Ol sore Apparent Size. Colour. Duration. Altitude and | Bh Azimuth. 1868.| h m July 20/Between Manchester .../=1st mag.* «+++. ‘White ........./3 Second ..,... Just above B A 12 15 and dromedz. 12 30 a.m. 2011 3 p.m.|Birmingham ... =2nd mag. we... Blie: Gavecsaus 0°3 second ... a= o—— From 220°+44° to 205 +36 21\Between |Manchester ...,=2nd mag.% ...... White ........./0°75 second ...|Near y Cassiopeiz 12 0 and 12 20 am. 21/11 31 p.m.|Birmingham ...|=1st Maget ser. White .........|0°5 second .,.|From @ Cygni a Lyre, and further. 21/11 37 p.m.|[bid .......seeeee: =2nd mag.* ...... Ruddy .........|0°5 second ...|From 2 Cygni to Delphini 23\Between |Manchester ...|Brighter than a/Dull ....(L second ...... 4° below a Pega' 11 50 p.m. Ist mag.x and 12 20 a.m., 24th. 25\10 12 p.m.|Birmingham .../=Ist mag*...eee-|White «+++. 15 second ... a= b= From 263°+ 9° to 257 —12 ; 28112 5 acm. [Did vressssseoereee| = SITIUS seees veers White ........ 3 seconds..,.../From 7 to y Peg 98/12 36 am.|[bid ........ceeeee4] = 2nd Mage see. Blue anneaeees 0°25 second ...|From 7 to « Peg 2811 55 p.m.|[Did ....eseeeerees =3rd mag.* «+... Dull white ...\0°75 second...|From jp to Bootis. 28)11 58 p.m.|[bid .....-....+ =drd mag.* «..+ Ble | ee.netsee 0-25 second...|From £8 Bodtis a= Oo= to 210°+43 29/11 31 p.m.|Manchester...... == Mars: cepcesesnees Bluish white...|2 second ......|About 1° aboy Urse Majoris 30\10 45 p.m:.|[bid .....+...-.00e = 2nd mag.* ...... Bluish white...|0°75 second...|Passed 5° Di ; Polaris. Aug. 4|11 4 p.m.|Birmingham ... =Sirius .....00 wee.| White ....00.-. 0°5 second .,.|/From « Cassio to mede. 5| 9 53 p.m.jLondon ......0- = 2nd mag.* ...... Bluish white...|0°75 second ...|From 1° above @ Cygni. 5/10 2 p.m.|Ibid ........ee- Larger than 21 .../Chieflyorange,|..... rorsncds .....|Disappeared ne : varied. Ophiuchi. 5/10 10 p.m.|[bid ............4-- &% LTH... cccecnoe~ White like @].......0+6 devout Disappeared Lyre, then above a An pale ae) mede. + A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. ii he Appearance ; Train, if any, and its Duration. Left MOMTAIN .......0.0.0..- “ ME TIO train ........00000.. ‘ Mee atrain ............... eft a white train on its whole course. eft a train BeWecainsveads. panded as a misty flash of light. Length of —_—_—_————— | short ee eeeeeeseneee PRP tes ecesesrerenesereresesien rr q . BRWOSP USS ese rscccvesees Ferrer ereenees* lht visible for 2 secs., enthrough fine clouds. ft a white train 20° long. fta train 20° long ......|.sessccsssevees ba train 10° long .......|.cesssssseeeees Sty appearance, like a Short . HPD Eee er eseeeesesnseen Stee ee eee serene a 12° or 15° whether Horizontal, Draco. ...|Directed from Lacerta. One other meteor re- From Radiant BG or QG,. .. From Radiant B,, inOn the 15th the sky was| Cygnus. peiz. ..|From Radiant T, ..... peie. Cygnus. Perseus. conis. (Radiant A,,). From Radiant N,,, in Cassiopeia. PPP Peer ere re Perr ey On a line from y Aquile to Z Ophiuchi. y =. a broken streak of 5° Deeaalaacscr On a line from Polaris to 3° above a Andro- mede, Direction; noting also From Radiant Bs, in/Rate of frequency one Directed from e Cassio- : Directed from ¢ Cassio- On the 16th and 17th From Radiant A,,; in|, From Radiant Q, G,.,... Directed from y Dra- Directed from 7 Persei and 2nd magnitudes, from this Radiant, or from B,, or N,,. meteor per hour. corded in this in- terval ; from Radiant A, or T clear; no seen. meteor -|Seven other meteors in the interval; from Radiants A,,, B,, N,,. Three meteors in the same interval on the 24th; from Radiants 1. the sky was cloudy, except overhead; no meteor seen. was clear;—no me- teor seen. A marked absence of meteors during the month. p.m. Afterwards two meteors in 40 minutes. Id. 873 Perpendicular, or Remarks. Observer. Inclined. Directed from « Cygni/Two other meteors, Ist/R. P. Greg. W. H. Wood. R. P. Greg. W. H. Wood. R. P. Greg. W. H. Wood. From Radiant B,, inOn the 29th the sky/Id. Wasidsavidauesvspeastceveleos .[Id. Overcast till 115 30™/Id. gust shower; moon- light ; sky much over- cast. ststteeaesereesesteasseseesese Re P, Greg tsteseetsseeseressserssseeess| We He Wood. A meteor of the Au-IT, Crumplen, AOC OOoE steceeesecesseessesee| Ie Tretereeeseuentessseeerveesees ids DOW, Jun. 374 REPORT—1868. Place of Position, or Date.| Hour. Ob : Apparent Size. Colour. Duration. Altitude and servation. re zimuth. ——— = —_—_——____—_—_— |_| —— 1868.) h m s Aug. 8| 9 49 p.m. Birmingham = 2nd, then >/Blue, white,|2°5 seconds... a= 6 lst, and then) dark. From 180°+65 = 3rd mag.* to p. Serpenti 8\Between |Whitby (York-;=1st mag.* .--... White ........./0°75 second...!Appeared first 10 30 and shire). below 6 Ari ll 0O p.m. 8/10 33 p.m.|Birmingham .../ Brighter than Ist|Yellow........./0°5 second .../From p Pisciw mag.*. wards 6 Cet 9) 0 22 am.\[bid .......---- = Sirius cca eee Dark blue; |1°5 second ... oe then brilliant From 275°+7 blue. to » Herculi 9|Between |Whitby (York-|Brighterthan Sirius Reddish ; blu-|2 seconds......|Centre of pat 10 0 and | shire). ish - white (a, B) Ceph 11 30 p.m. sparks. 9110 5 25 |Highfield House]=2nd mag.¥ «.-+4.)-+r++-+"* eccadsasoleenaonescsseeuaec) Onn Seam p.m. Observatory, crossed ¢€ Beeston. Til. 9110 6 p.m.|Birmingham ...|=1st mag.*......-.. White ........./0°5 second ...|From 4 (¢, gasi_ to quarii. 9110 12 40 |Highfield House}......... dP stlececccncesorssctocleavesecnseeain .../Passed 5° p.m. Observatory, Delphinus. Beeston. 9110 13 p.m.|Birmingham ...|=Ist mag.*.......-- Green ......- 0:3 second .../From to 0 91017 2 |Highfield House/Twice as bright as Intense blue... Very rapid ...|Commenced p.m. Observatory, a lst mag.* Pegasi. Beeston. 9110 18 p.m. Ibid .........c-+ =Ist mag.x ee Green .....0++ 0:3 second ...|From »Andr to 353° 9/10 21 p.m.|Airth, Falkirk |=Srd mag-% «..... Whitish ...... 1:25 sec.;slow|/From 4° (Scotland). speed. B Pegasi (a, B) pele. 9110 46 p.m. Highfield House| Brighter than Ist/Blue ...cereeslecasecees seseeeee-| Appeared Observatory, mag.*. under P Beeston. and pas: ; tween 0, Majoris. hyp pile A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 375 2 Direction ; noting also pearance; Train, if any,| Length of | whether Horizontal, and its Duration. Path. Perpendicular, or Remarks. Observer. Inclined. |At first equal 2nd mag-'80° ......... nitude star ; it then dis- appeared; and on reap- pearing became brighter than a Ist magnitude star. It then decreased to a 3rd magnitude star, at the same time changing its Ursa Major. t ————$—_—_._____ From Radiant V, in|From between 3 and € —————_ W. H. Wood. Bootis to the end of its flight it appeared as a cloudy falling cinder. . colours. Left a train 30° long > for 14 second. uct & momentary streak... 4°......+++.../Directed from y Persei./Three meteors in 30)R. P. Greg. From Radiant A,,. minutes from about the Radiant A,,; one ‘ from the direction of " e Cassiopeiz. Mereeeeceseesreecsesseeeeees../More than/From Radiant A,,, in|Fourteen meteors in) W. H. Wood. ¥ 10°. (In-} Perseus. two hours. Clear tercepted sky ; one observer, view.) BGDDEATEH, 2S 2. |...cisceccescss Directed from e Cassio-/The meteor showed in-|Id. 2nd magnitude star; peie. termittent light. then disappeared, and ppeared as bright irius. Left a train. ee 20° ......+.|Directed from 3 Cas-/Fourteen Ist, 2nd, and|R. P. Greg. 3 Siopeiz. The Ra-| 38rd magnitude me- diant on this night} teors recorded in well defined, 3° or} 12 30", Moon set- 4° from y Persei, ting ; sky beautifully towards Ursa Major,| clear: on the night and slightly lower! of the 10th cloudy, down, at 11" p.m. with slight rain. EE eee ae Scuamasaxaieee sseeseeseee|[See Appendix I.] ..,.../E. J. Lowe. a eeeseeeerereesisesserseesseseseeceesesoeeeee| LLdentical with the last]|W. H. Wood. ee .-. Directed from 5° above [See Appendix I.] ...... E. J. Lowe. x Cassiopeiz. a +++++-,|Directed from ¢ Cassio-|[Identical with the last] W. H. Wood. ‘ peiz. a long Streak ...... Eo Peas Directed from a point Some cloud afterwards|E. J. Lowe. 4 : 5° above x Cassio-| for 20 minutes, o. peiz. .|Directed from y Persei eee eet eteeaee 0 OCS Zoo .|From Radiant T, in Pe- gasus. ee eeeeee long streak ...).., .|Directed from a point near and above Cas- siopeia. [Identical with the last.|W. H. Wood. See Appendix I.] For a meteor moving F, Howlett. from east to west, the motion was extremely slow. [See Appendix I.] ....../E. J. Lowe. p-m.| Hawkhurst 11 33 p.m. REPORT—1868. Place of Observation. Birmingham ... .|Airth, Falkirk, Scotland. Highfield House Observatory, Beeston. Birmingham ... ./London ..... PPE .| Hawkhurst (Kent). Observatory, Beeston. JLondon ........- (Kent). Highfield House Birmingham ... .|Winchfield =3rd mag.* ......| White (Hants). Highfield House|6 X 2f ......sseseeee Biue Observatory, Beeston. Winchfield UE crsnsesancse sees Bluish white... (Hants). | Birmingham ...|= Sirius sereeesesees Orange Hawkhurst (Kent). Winchfield (Hants). 11 35 p.m.)Hawkhurst (Kent). Winchfield (Hants). =3rd mag.x .....| Birmingham ... = Ist mag.x..seceeee Apparent Size. Colour. = Ist mag.#......... Yellow ...... =Sirius .........---|/Orange yellow =2nd mag.% ...... Colourless =Ist mag.%.......+.,Yellow ..... =2nd MAag.x ...ceeleccsecneee eooee = 22 MAg.# ....seeee ie wauuheseducaeees =2nd mag.x ...++ |White ......2.. =a Aquilte .........Jsereceeeeeenees seeleeeeee wee eeeeee es he =2nd mag.x, then White, then = Sirius. green. =2nd mag.x ...... ‘Yellow see = Ist Mag.¥....0+06- White ........- =2Nd MATH ceoeralacccrneess Ppp 00 ‘ ...{(Commenced at From 4° below Shot across Drac een seeeeeeeenee eens From Polaris to From y Aquilz From @ Lyre t In sword handle Commenced at .|Passed betwee’ Position, or Altitude and Azimuth. Camelopardi. and 2 Cassiope to 10° below P laris. ; Draconis. d Antinoi. Ophiuchi. Perseus. Capricorni. Herculis and Ophiuchi. Shot across gasus into phinus. From 10° belo Aquile, fell d the Milky W, Shot across phinus into From 6 to4 Pegasi. Shot across y conis towar Herculis. First appeare Draconis, under e, an appeared Herculis. Whit cocoseve: [coats cue ceeceveeepencenaay aCe | : A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 377 a Direction; noting also Appearance; Train, ifany,| Length of whether Horizontal, a ; and its Duration. Path. Perpendicular, or emi Observer. Inclined. i aren i= sine rece | Leftatrain .............../25° ........./Powards ( Urse Ma-|[Identical with the last], W. H. Wood. “a joris. Let MPPMECTISE TAIN ...000]eeescccccsseces|occeccessvostes pesceweheetert Nine Ist-,2nd-, and 3rd-F. Howlett. in magnitude meteors recorded in fifty mi- nutes by two ob- servers. Night of the 10th very cloudy. A few bright meteors ; seen. ME ena detects ce-c Ty 143 36 5. 9 144 |) M., Pe.| 2,1 41 31 6. 9 29 Of) Pa, B. | 2,3 82 41 ile 9 BS DipleM., Pa.) 1,3 97 39 8. 9 5919" | Pa, B. | 2, 3 180 77 Sy 9 LEO: A ME Bl As ot 67 18 10. 11 10 41 44 | Pa, Le} 1, 2 36° 25 ne ll 11 55 49 | Pa,Pe.| 2,3 55 37 12. 12 958 2 | Pa, Le.| 2,2 40 14 * The apparent point of disappearance is regarded as correctly observed at Pekeloh by Height in B. 8. Dr. Heis, and at Gottingen by M. Borgen; the apparent flight having been recorded as much longer at the former place than at the latter. The great discrepancy of the heights of a meteor, so differently inferred by different computers from the same observations, may, in this way, frequently be accounted for. + Printed 10% 59™ 95 in the ‘ Astronomische Nachrichten.’ A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 387 Lippstadt (Li.), Miinster (M.), Papenburg (Pa.), and Pekeloh (Pe.). The position of Blumenthal is E. long. 7° 48':3, N. lat. 53°11'; and of Leer, E. long. 13° 41'-5*, N. lat. 53°15’. The positions of the remaining stations, with a map, are already given in former Reports (for 1863, p. 323; and 1865, p. 125).. II. Aérorites, Lance Mrrzors, AnD STAR-SHOWERS. a. AWROLITES. 1. Knyahinya, 1866, June 9, 48 56™ p.n. (local time). Second Report of Dr. Haidinger, with maps, drawings of the stone, and tinted plate of the meteor( Vienna Acad. Sitzungsbericht, vol. liv. pt. 2, Oct. 11, 1866).—In addition to the brilliant fireball, whose light in broad day was like that of a faint flash of reddish lightning, and which was chiefly visible at a distance from the place of fall (Eperies, Rakamaz, &e.; see Report for 1866, p- 133), the following unusual phenomena attended the stonefall. Nearly simultaneously with the appearance of a small bluish cloud in the air over Sztricsava, near Knyahinya, there was heard at that place, and for many miles round, a sharp report, like that of a six-pounder cannon, followed for ten minutes by a rumbling sound like that of water boiling, the rumbling of a cart on a pavement, or of stones striking together. Three or four minutes after the first report stones were seen to fall at various places over an extent of area measuring from N.N.E. to $.8.W. about 9 miles in length, and about 33 miles in breadth from W.N.W. to E.S.E. The stones when picked up were lukewarm, as if shone upon by the sun‘, or even as warm as if taken freshly from an oven. One, of the size of a plum, which fell upon a linen cloth, did not singe it. The smaller stones did not penetrate the earth more thana few inches, or lay upon the surface. One of moderate size, which fell through a tree at the door of the inn at Knyahinya, broke from it a branch half an inch in thickness; and ten such branches were broken by a larger stone, in its fall through an apple-tree, beneath which it was found. Many other stones were seen to fall. That which weighed 73 lbs. (Austrian) penetrated the firm sandstone-earth of the district to a depth of 2 feet. About 100 paces from it, three weeks after the occurrence, was found a hole 4 feet wide and 43 feet deep, round which the earth had been scattered to a distance of 30 yards. On sounding the hole a firm stone was discovered at a depth of 11 feet below the surface. The aérolite was exhumed. It was found to be broken across, and, with the remaining pieces discovered in the same hole, weighed about 300 kilogrammes (660 Ibs. English). The direction of pene- tration was from N. 31° E., altitude 63°. Its position, a league N.E. from Knyahinya, occupies the extreme N.N.E. corner of the general area of the fall. Another very large stone is said to have fallen about two miles 8.W. from Knyahinya, which could not be discovered. Since the fall of an aérolite related by Pliny to have taken place at Hgospotamos, about 465 B.c., which was a full waggon-load, this is the largest fragment of an aérolite (not inclu- ding masses of meteoric iron) on record. The following, according to Dr. Haidinger, are the weights (avoirdupois) of the largest recorded specimens of other aérolites, viz. Ensisheim, 280 Ibs.; Juvenas, 240 lbs.; New Concord, 103 Ibs.; Parnallee, 130 lbs. The two large and two smaller pieces into * Printed 52° 6'5 in the ‘ Astronomische Nachrichten,’ 7. ¢. 32° 65 E. long. from Ferro. + And no, as stated in Dr. Haidinger’s first report, but. corrected by later communica- tions, “ice- cold.” 388 REPORT—1868. which the stone was fractured by the fall are placed in the Geological Museum at Vienna, together with a number of smaller aérolites of the same fall, some of which are perfect specimens of the stones. Up to the 24th of September, 1866, fragments of which the following are the numbers and weights (Austrian) had been collected on the site of the fall: — lbs. MPinAOTNE LAW ye aie ass Rene 5G vue Cenex <2 Selene 550 5 fragments, of 733, 30, 17, 14, 6 Ibs., together ........ 1403 20 re of between 2lbs. and4lbs. ,, ........ 60 50 or 60 ,, of smaller weights ns aga is ae 100 Total, about 80 fragments, weighing .......... 8503 Dr. Haidinger estimates that, on a moderate allowance for those which fell undiscovered, at least 1000 aérolites fell, and that the whole mass must have weighed not less than 8 or 10 cwts. 2. Pultusk, Poland, 1868, Jan. 30, 6" 50™ p.m. (local time). Report of Dr. J. G. Galle on the fall, and on the meteor’s path in space (Abhandlung der schlesischen Gesellschaft fiir vaterl. Cultur, March 4, 1868). —aA great shower of aérolites took place near Pultusk, 25 miles N. from Warsaw, over a space four and a half miles in length, from Obryte (E. long. 20° 47', N. lat. 52° 42’) to Siele (KE. long. 20° 38’ 30", N. lat. 52° 47'), in a direction from $.8.W. to N.N.E., and only one mile in breadth. The largest aérolite, weighing 10 Ibs., was found at Makoff, the extreme N.N.E. point of the space of fall. Those found at Siele weighed between 3 lbs. and 4 lbs. ; and the remaining stones, becoming gradually less towards the 8.8.W., weighed on the average 2 lbs., 11b., and 3 lb., as far as Obryte, where aéro- lites of the smallest size only fell, of weights not exceeding } 1b. The direc- tion and manner of their distribution, it will be seen shortly, coincides nearly, but not quite, with the direction of the meteor’s course. The stones are shaped like splintered fragments of a larger mass, rounded at the edges and coated over with a dull, brown or black crust, glittermg here and there with grains of metallic iron. In the interior of one perfect aérolite was found a solid piece of metallic iron of the size of a cubic inch. ‘Ten seconds before the heavy report which accompanied the stonefall at Sielc, and 33 minutes before the sound of the report was heard at Warsaw, an intensely brilliant fireball exploded over the neighbourhood, with such dazzling brightness that it was seen as far as Miillrose (230 B. 8. miles), and at Frankfort on the Oder (415 miles from the place of fall). Although the sky was overcast, and even the moon’s light was darkened by a snowfall, the illu- minating power of the meteor at the latter place was so intense that the light of the gas-lamps in the streets was overpowered. At Weringerode, on the Harz Mountains (also 415 miles from the place of fall), the windows and the outline of a house a mile off could be plainly distinguished by its light, which lasted five seconds, although the meteor there shone at a very small altitude above the horizon. ‘The meteor appeared first as a small shooting-star, gra- dually increasing in splendour and changing from a star to a conical form, scattering sparks, and leaving a train of carmine colour on its course, until, from a bluish bolide of ordinary appearance, it became a well-defined fireball of red colour, and burst into a shower of sparks, which descended vertically over Sielc. Dr. Galle estimates the height of the explosion at 25 miles above the earth ; A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 389 and this agrees with the interval between the light and the report at War- saw (although not quite so well with that observed at Sielc). From this point the aérolites descended vertically upon Siele with such slight velocity that none of the stones were buried in the ground. A flight of 115 miles in about 62 seconds, descending from a height of 160 or 185 miles at first ap~ pearance, nearly represents, according to the observations at Breslau and Dantzig, the meteor’s real path. The point of radiation ( Piscium) is only 23° from the point opposite to the “ apex of the earth’s way.” The relative velocity of the meteor with respect to the earth, depending on the duration of its flicht, 62 seconds, which is a mean result of twenty-six independent observa- tions, is 17 miles per second; so that the meteor appears, in its real orbit in space, to have pursued and overtaken the earth directly in its path, with an inclination to the latter of only 11°, and with a real progressive velocity in its course of 35 B.S. miles per second. The following, according to Dr. Galle, are the hyperbolic elements of the orbit of the meteorite, which cannot be reduced within the limits of the para- bolic form, unless by nearly doubling the assumed time of the meteor’s dura- tion, or by supposing its apparent path at Dantzig to be diminished by nearly one half (from 38° to 20°), a supposition which is not by any means easily reconcilable with the remaining observations :— Perihelion Passage, 1868, Jan. 22°5. TROT OE PECMC NON ee a ate win ot aa tyes ahs 116° GME. ON-MD” to Pa oak ait oo’ Ae dea t> 310° HGH MARIO, "ey ye ss) oiim Hey sleteiche okt 6° Low pariiehion, dist. < (ys oe a cits = 9-9841 Dog: = MAIO AMIR S25 s «a 9g gs ss 3 9:8778 CER GEICUEY os axis c om, op 019 ane yen os, cts 2:277 Motion direct. A change of the assumed velocity, Dr. Galle adds, would principally affect the excentricity and 4 major axis, without sensibly altering the values of the remaining elements of the orbit. Report of Dr. Haidinger on the stonefall (Vienna Acad. Sitzungsbericht, vol. lyii. pt. 2. March 1868).—The site of the shower of aérolites, of which the three largest stones weighed respectively 2 lbs., 4 lbs., and 10 Ibs., is between Ostrolenka and Pultusk, forty miles N.E.from Warsaw. The small- est of the three large stones is in the Mineralogical Museum at Vienna. It is an equilateral wedge, 2 or 3 inches wide, and 3 or 4 inches long; its faces marked with circular depressions, and glazed over with a thin dull-black crust. In its structure it coincides with Partsch’s group of Eichstidt, Barbotan, Timochin, Zebrak, and Gross-Dwina, to which may now be added Zerkon and Bustee, all of which have large contents of iron and a high specific gra- vity, 3°55-3°70 ; that of the Sielc aérolites is 3-66. Their substance is tu- faceous, grey or brown, containing darker spherules intimately admixed with iron and a small quantity of Troilite. A polished section exhibited black lines, with a fine thread of metallic iron running in them, which apparently represent the planes of friction, fissure, or striation not uncommonly met with in terrestrial rocks. Many other stones were picked up on the site of the fall; and the shower of aérolites is supposed by Dr. Haidinger and by Dr. Galle to have entered the atmosphere as a swarm of separate stones, like those aérolitic showers which fell at Barbotan, L’Aigle, Stannern, Orgueil, and Knyahinya. 390 REPORT—1868. 3. Villa Nova, Casale, Piedmont, 1868, February 29th, 11” a.m. (local time). Note by P. F. Denza (Bullettino Meteorologico del Coll. R. Alberto di Moncallieri, Turin).—A mass of fire, surrounded by cloud, moving with great velocity, was seen at a considerable height above Villa Nova (E. long. 8° 27’, N. lat. 45° 8’) near Casale. It was followed by two violent detonations, at an interval of a few seconds, and by a prolonged report, like rapid file-firing, which was heard as far as Alessandria, seventeen English miles from Casale. Three stones reached the ground, each of which struck the earth with a heavy sound. The locality of the fall is between Villa Nova and La Mota dei Conti (E. long. 8° 30’). The largest of the stones, weighing about 153 Ibs. avoird. fell north of Villa Nova, and buried itself in the ground to a depth of 14 inches. The second, weighing nearly 3 lbs., struck the earth a mile and a half from the first, a few feet from a peasant, at whose feet it buried itself in the earth to a depth of 20 inches. The third, which was probably 3 lb. or ? Ib. in weight, struck the ground close to a lady, who witnessed its descent, two miles from the spot where the second stone descended; and it was broken in pieces by the’ fall. The second stone presents in its outline a series of sinuosities, while the largest stone is bounded on three faces by plane surfaces, meeting each other at right angles. Its entire surface is coated with a yellowish bronze-coloured glaze, resulting from external fusion of its substance, which is also found on one face of each of the broken fragments of the smallest stone. The freshly fractured surfaces exhibit the interior structure of the aérolite, whitish, and granular in its texture, like fine-grained granite, wherein the microscope re- veals throughout a number of bright metallic specks. The stones are strongly attracted by the magnet. ‘Their specific gravity is 3°6. This is the third shower of aérolites that has occurred in the vicinity of Casale during the last interval of fifty years. A large meteor was observed on the Adriatic coast on the morning of the aérolitic fall, and another large fireball on the evening of the same day at Alessandria. b. Large Meteor of the Ist January, 1868, 7° 27" a.m. (See Catalogue.) At Ropley, Hampshire.—The appearance of the streak is thus described by Mr. A. Harding :—*‘ The meteor left behind it a luminous train which appeared as a streak of silver in the sky, disjointed about 12° from the point of starting; and in the latter portion two bright spots were visible, the first nearly round, and the second pear-shaped, the tail being still produced about 1° beyond the latter spot. About two minutes after its appearance the for- mer part of the train took a wavy motion, which continued for five minutes, when a cloud intercepted the view. Fifteen minutes after the appearance of the meteor the cloud cleared away, and the streak apparently was as bright as ever; but the cloud again interposed; and when the streak was again seen, at forty-seven minutes past seven, it was perceptibly fading, having lasted fully twenty minutes. At this time the sky became overcast, prevent- ing my seeing the final disappearance of this magnificent meteor.” At Southampton.—Appearance of the streak, as described by Mr. F. L. Wollaston :—“ At 7" 30™ a.m. there was a perfectly clear sky, except a few clouds very low on the horizon; a slight breath of air, just enough to show its direction by the smoke of chimneys, coming from about N.E. On the dis- appearance of the meteor there was a narrow line of light throughout the whole of its course. The greater part of this disappeared within a few mi- nutes; but small portions, gradually disappearing, remained, assuming the appearance of very narrow, thin, white clouds. One very short part (say, —_—_ a st i A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 391 about one-thirtieth of the whole course) was visible for forty minutes, until 8" 10™, when it disappeared immediately over, and in consequence of the in- creasing light from, the sun. This short part had been very slowly moving during those forty minutes in an easterly direction, and therefore against the wind as it blew on the surface here.” c. STAR-SHOWERS. 1. The August Meteors in 1867. The August meteoric shower, in 1867, was more irregular in the time and place of its appearance, as remarked by M. Quetelet, than it appears to have been observed in any previous year. A great scarcity of meteors about mid- night on the night of the 10th was observed at many places, and especially in ‘Ttaly—at Milan by Prof. Schiaparelli, at Palermo by Prof. Cacciatore, and at Varallo, in Piedmont, by Prof. Calderini. The following are the numbers counted by the latter observer, watching alone, the sky being perfectly clear, and the moon uniformly bright throughout the time of the observations :— Numbers of meteors observed at Varallo in the hours ending 10 1 if ie pp 1867. P.M. P.M. P.M. AM, A.M. Paes a te OSG 22 OR ae Oe. 9 080 ert Orto 1h Lb +i Foy ste Sais 38h O* Caen Seton SOUS! en ALA TT. 20) do ay od ot, 5* Two great maxima, however, appear to have occurred—one on the morning of the 11th, and another on the morning of the 12th. The first maximum is recorded by Prof. Ragona in the following Table of observations at Modena, continued to a late hour on the morning of the 11th :— Numbers of meteors counted at Modena by four observers, in the hours ending 112 {Oh js On . 3h 4h 1867. P.M. P.M. AM. A.M. A.M. A.M. Beenie tO (Goyette AT SON Wid DBE aimee Pee to: LOMB > 2B OBR A ae TT) oak Le oe pe LOMO ThA ©. Sis Her 590s | BOL AW ee 2.2 OFF A great abundance of meteors towards three o’clock a.m., on both morn- ings of the 11th and 12th, was also noted by Father Parnisetti, Prof. Porrati, and their assistants at Alessandria, a group of ten or twelve meteors, on the morning of the 12th, sometimes appearing together in one minute. The sky was perfectly clear throughout the observations. Numbers of meteors observed at Alessandria, by four observers ¢. Number of Hourly Turin M. T. Interval. meteors number of from to counted. meteors. 1867. h m hm hm August 9 110 am 2 10 am 1 0 79 79 - 10 Wb; ae Chemie 2° "5 225 108 a Ll 1150) 44 334 ,, 1 44. 262 151 edits Dy, Wiens? Sa ae 1 28 269 184 parle sscc & Gre a 4.00 5 0 44 45 61 * Counted in half an hour. After this time observations were discontinued on account of the scarcity of the meteors. + Counted in half an hour. ¢ This and the previous Tables are taken from the pamphlet by Father F. Denza, ‘Le Stelle Cadenti di Agosto osservyate in Piemonte nel 1867,’ 12mo, Turin, 1867. 392 REPORT—1868. “ At Florence.—Professor Donati reports (Bullettino Meteorologico, Sep- tember 1867) the following results of observations on the number and time of maximum frequency of the meteors. Number of meteors seen during the hour ending at No. of Date, (Florence M. T.) oe Observers. 1867. 1) 0 (ea TS HN ne 2h 3b 4h August. | P.M. | P.M. | P.M. | AM. | AM. [| A.M. | A.M. seria he | 85. | “a5 | 299 9| Jor "sei "BO aay 3 10toll | 32 48 39 50 | 122 | 160 | 106 557 4 11 to 12 27 27 30 34 53 94 86 351 3 12 to 13 6 24 12 14 18 28 28 130 2 13 to 14 3 6 6 6 9 if 10 47 1 Total 1322 meteors; 972 conformable. “The maximum deduced from this Table was from two to three o’clock on the morning of the 11th of August.” (Prof. H. A. Newton, in Silliman’s Journal, 2nd ser. vol. xliv. p. 427.) Radiant-region of the shower.—The area of radiation of the August me- teors, as shown by Prof. Twining, appears to undergo changes of its position on successive days ; and the same may perhaps also occur in successive years. According to the observations of Mr. R. P. Greg in 1866 and 1867, con- firmed by those of Mr. W. H. Wood, the radiant-region in those years ap- peared to be elongated, or to advance during the shower from near e Cassio- peie to near @ Persei, the meteors from the former radiant-point appearing to Mr. Greg to be swifter than the rest. A gradual passage from the radiant N,, at the foot of Cassiopeia’s chair, commencing in July, to that for the 10th of August in Perseus, A,,, is possibly an explanation of the peculiar feature, that meteors from the direction of Cassiopeia are visible as early as the 16th and 17th of July, moving very swiftly, and leaving very persistent streaks. At Winchendon, Mass., U.S.A., Mr. F. W. Russell reports that on the 7th of August, 1867, between 9" 45" and 10" 45™ p.m. there were observed “eight meteors, all from a radiant near e and 6 Cassiopeie.” The radiant gradually passed down into Perseus ; and on the 11th it was at R. A. 47° 45’, N. P. D. 31°; while on the 12th it was at R. A. 50°, N. P. D. 33°, “ having moved towards p Persei, and a little towards a also. Moreover the area seemed elliptical, the major axis being in declination, and with a ratio to the minor axis of 5:2.” (Ibid.) 2. The November Meteoric Shower in 1867. The ‘ Zeitschrift der dsterreichischen Gesellschaft fiir Meteorologie,’ vol. iii. No. 3, contains the following announcement of the appearance of the Novem- ber meteoric shower of 1867 in Europe :—‘ Some interesting observations on this subject appear in Heis’s ‘ Wochenschrift fiir Astronomie.’ At Vegesack* Dr. C. Behrmann kept watch himself, almost in vain, throughout the whole night until 7" a.m. ; the bright moonlight, and a thick fog which rose up late in the night, prevented him from observing more than a few shooting-stars, which came from the constellation Leo. A friend, however, of Dr. Behrmann, whose attention had been directed to the expected return of the phenomenon, saw the sky at 8" a.m., on the morning of the 14th, quite overspread with meteors, whose appearance in the increasing twilight and in the thick fog was * N. lat. 53° 11', E. long. 8° 40’; near Bremen, on the Weser, in Hanoyer. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. , 398 like small swarms of gnats. They seemed to start from a point in the south, and emanated thence in all directions. He even saw some crossing in front of the sun’s disk when it was still low upon the horizon. Other persons, to whom it was pointed out, also witnessed the phenomenon. It appears to have been most brilliant at about 8" 30" a.m.; after 9" a.w. nothing further was perceived. « ¢ At Calmav* in Sweden,’ according to the ‘ Ostsee Zeitung,’ ‘ an un- usually brilliant star-shower was observed; early in the morning, the Cal- marsund was lighted up by thousands of falling meteors.’ ” Among the preparations for the display in 1867, a partially successful attempt was made, on the occasion of this return of the November meteors, by M. W. de Fonvielle to surmount the clouds, and to view the shower, at Paris, in Mr. Giffard’s “ captive balloon.” Although the experiment was not carried out on the night of the 13th—14th of November, a still more adven- turous voyage, in a free balloon filled with pure hydrogen gas, and lent by Mr. Giffard for the purpose, was commenced at Paris, under the guidance of the same practical observer, M. de Fonvielle, accompanied by M. Jules Go- dard as aéronaut, and M. A. V. Weyenberch, shortly before midnight on the following evening, and terminated at daybreak on the coast of Bel- gium. A star-chart, a telescope, a barometer, and other instruments for observation were taken up; and although the height attained did not exceed a few thousand feet, a clear atmosphere was reached, and observations were obtained of several shooting-stars not visible to observers on the earth’s surface. Although the attempt to establish a floating observatory for observing the meteoric display on the morning of the 14th of November last was obliged to be abandoned, yet the experiment of the following night successfully proved that the hindrance of clouds to the observation of shooting-stars can be re- moyed by means of balloon ascents on rare and important occasions of their appearance. scents in balloons for scientific purposes, if arranged to take place by night on the periodical star-shower dates of the 10th of August and 14th of November, might, on account of the extensive horizon visible from such a great elevation, be the means of tracing to their origin in distant me- teors the unaccountable flashes of light “like distant lightning” which, however clear and fine the weather may be, are so often visible during the appearance of a meteoric shower. III. Papers pearrmne on Mereoric Astronomy. Among the discussions of interest in this branch of observation, the pro- bable connexion of comets and shower-meteors was first reduced nearly to a certainty by the publication of M. G. V. Schiaparelli’s letters to Father rey in the Bullettino Meteorologico del Collegio Romano, vol. v. Nos. 8, men, 12. In the first letter, M. Schiaparelli communicates some observations on the August meteors of the years 1863 and 1866, made at Milan, to which (in a later letter) he applies the name of “ Perseids” from the constellation which usually contains their centre of divergence. A comparison of the ayerage horary increase in the frequency of meteors, throughout the year, from even- ing until daybreak, with a mathematical formula for the same variation in terms of their velocity, leads M. Schiaparelli in his opening letter to con- * N. lat. 56° 39', E. long. 16° 20'; opposite to the Island of Oland ; not far from Carl- scrona, at the southern extremity of Sweden. 1868, 25 394, REPORT—1868. clude that the real average velocity of shooting-stars in their native orbits round the sun is not far (1-447) from that of comets moving in parabolic orbits, which is greater than the earth’s mean orbital velocity at the same distance from the sun in the proportion of 1:414:1. In the second letter the origin of meteoric currents is discussed, of which more than fifty can be traced which have their points of radiation in the northern hemisphere, and it is shown, by their various inclinations to the ecliptic, and occasional retrograde motions, that shower-meteors rather re- semble comets than planetary bodies indigenous to the solar system. Should the meteoric groups come to the sun from stellar space, then, since the August meteors have been frequently observed since the date of their first recorded appearance, in the year a.p. 830, they must compose streams of enor- mous length. Supposing a cosmical cloud of meteoric bodies, of the sun’s size, to be moving in space transversely to its distance of, say, 20,000 times the earth’s distance from the sun, with a velocity relatively to the sun of 100 yards per minute, in its approach to the sun it would pass near enough to encounter the earth, and its orbit could not then be distinguished from a parabola. It will be deformed in its course into a parabolic stream, requiring four months and a half to pass through its perihelion. At the middle of that time its depth at that point will be only 100 yards, its width twenty- three miles, and its density 400 million times its original density, while its two extremities will reach in both directions almost up to the orbit of the earth. A nebula subtending, under the same initial circumstances as the last, 1' of arc would occupy more than 225 years in passing through its perihelion. Its depth would then be 36, and its width 13,800 miles. Its density would be increased in the same proportion as before ; and its length along the para- bolic orbit would reach, on both sides, four times the distance of Neptune from the sun. If the apparent diameter of the nebula were at first equal to that of the sun, it would occupy seven thousand years in passing through its perihelion. In this way meteoric currents, enduring, like that of August, for hundreds or even for thousands of years can be‘accounted for, whether their motion may be direct or retrograde, or at whatever obliquities they are in- clined to the ecliptic. In the third letter the origin of the November meteors is considered, and a summary is given of the new theory of shooting-stars. From the known weight of aérolites, and.the absence of any solid residues on the occurrence of even the greatest star-showers, the small mass of shoot- ing-stars may be certainly inferred. The grains of olivine disseminated in meteorites, regarded by M. Daubrée as forming a kind of ‘ universal scoria” (see post), may not impossibly compose their nuclei, whose weight, at the most, can rarely exceed a few grains. At the earth’s distance from the sun a swarm of such particles a few feet apart would be broken up by the sun’s attraction into a stream in which each particle would pursue an independent orbit. Even in the densest meteoric showers the meteoric bodies are some scores of miles asunder, corresponding to thousands of miles apart in the distant nebula. The sun’s attraction must, accordingly, gradually deform all meteor-clouds circulating within the solar system into a continuous stream or closed ving; and, on this account, the November star-shower is a recent group, derived from regions beyond the solar system. : The new theory of shooting-stars is contained in the following proposi- lons :— «I. Matter exists in space in every degree of subdivision. Masses of the first class are isolated stars, or stars collected together in groups. Those of — A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 395 the second class are clusters of small stars (or ‘ star-dust” of Herschel), in which class are many resolvable nebula. The next class are smaller bodies, which become visible as comets when they approach the sun. The last class of bodies, in the smallest state of subdivision, are cosmical clouds, composed of bodies no larger than we can handle or carry on the earth. “TI. The last class of bodies may have originated from local concentra- tions in space, in the same way that chemical substances crystallize from their solutions. The appearance of the process of crystallization leads to the con- jecture that this mode of concentration is more frequent and general than the process by which larger masses have collected. ‘The space occupied by the cosmical clouds may, accordingly, constitute a large part of the intrastellar regions. “II. The motions of such clouds relatively to the visible bodies of the universe are comparable to those ofthe fixed stars, and probably attributable to the same causes. When a cosmical cloud enters the sphere of the sun’s attraction, it can only become visible to us when its orbit about the sun is an ellipse of very great excentricity. “TV. Whatever may be the shape and size of a cosmical cloud, it can rarely enter the central parts of the solar system without being transformed into a parabolic current, which may occupy years, centuries, or thousands of years in completing its perihelion passage, in the form of a stream extremely narrow in comparison with its length. Of such streams those which the earth encounters in its annual revolution present themselves as a shower of shooting-stars diverging from a common centre of radiation. “V, The number of meteoric currents traversing the solar system in all directions is probably very great. The extreme rarity of their materials permits them to intersect each other mutually without disturbance. They may gradually shift and change their form, like rivers which slowly change their bed. They may be interrupted, so as to become double or multiple. The November meteors are probably such a current in process of formation. “VI. Cosmical clouds haying short periods of revolution round the sun, which have been assumed to explain the appearances of shooting-stars, can- not exist permanently without violating the laws of universal gravitation. «VII. The materials of parabolic currents, after passing through their perihelion, return to space in a state of greater dispersion than before their perihelion passage. In particular cases, as when the current meets with a planet, such great perturbations of some of the meteors may arise as to di- vert them from the general track, into special orbits. Such meteors may, from that time, be properly called sporadic. _ YVIII. Shooting-stars and other like celestial bodies, which in the last century were regarded as atmospheric, which Olbers and Laplace first main- _ tained might be projected from the moon, and which afterwards came to be regarded as planetary bodies, are in reality bodies of the same class as the fixed stars; and the name of falling stars, applied to them, simply expresses the real truth. They bear the same relation to comets which the planetoids etween Mars and Jupiter bear to the larger planets, the smallness of we asses, in both cases, being compensated for by the greatness of their number. _ IX. Since it may certainly be assumed that shooting-stars, bolides, and _aérolites only differ from each other in their comparative size, we may conclude that the substances fallen from the sky are samples of those of which the ‘Stellar universe is composed ; and since in such masses no new chemical ele- “ment has been discovered, hitherto unknown upon the earth, the similarity of composition of all the visible bodies of the universe, already rendered pro- 242 : " 5 396 REPORT—1868. bable by researches with the spectroscope, acquires a new argument of cre- dibility.” In the fourth letter M. Schiaparelli traces a connexion between the ele- ments of the orbits of the “ Perseids,” or of the long elliptic current of me- teoric bodies which produce the August meteors, and those of the orbit cal- culated by Oppolzer for the Comet III. 1862. The following comparion shows that the two orbits are nearly identical. The Perseids, 1866. Comet ITI. 1862. Perihelion passage ...... July 23:62 1862 Aug. 22:9 Passage through the @.. Aug. 10°75 Longitude of perihelion . . 343° 38' 344° 41’ Maomerimdex0l Qs. «eve 138° 16 137° 27' inclination 2% Si4..Gh, 2A 64° 3' 66° 25' Perihelion distance...... 0:9643 0:9626 Motion’. 2 s4[2.4%). 98 42.. retrograde. retrograde. Period of revolution 108 113 (Stimpfer.) In the same letter M. Schiaparelli gives the elements of the elliptic orbit of the November meteors, assuming their period to be 33°3 years. The average real velocity of meteors found by M. Schiaparelli in his first letter is nearly confirmed, from his own observations, by Prof. Wolf, of Ziirich, who, using the same formula of calculation, finds for its value 1:51, M. Schia- parelli’s result from nine similar series of observations to those of Prof. Wolf being 1-477. (Les Mondes, 2nd. ser. vol. xiii. p. 24.) The publication of M. Schiaparelli’s last letter was anticipated by Father Secchi in his description of the November shower of meteors in 1866 (see Les Mondes, 2nd ser, vol. xii. p. 647, 20th Dec. 1866), the fourth letter only appearing in the monthly Number of the Bullettino Meteorologico for the 3lst of December, 1866, and the former letters in the Numbers for the pre- vious months. At a meeting of the Société Scientifique de France on the 14th of January, 1867, and in a subsequent paper in the ‘Comptes Rendus’ (January 21st), M. Le Verrier announced the introduction of the November meteoric group into its present orbit to have been probably effected by the planet Uranus ; within a short distance of whose orbit the aphelion of the long elliptic orbit of the meteors, with a period of 33-25 years, must be situated; and the meteors themselves must nearly have encountered the planet in the year a.p. 126. Before that time their orbit may have been either within or beyond the re- gions of the planetary orbits. M. Le Verrier adds that “there is nothing to oblige us to suppose that the group did not originally belong to the solar system.” In later letters * M. Schiaparelli suggests that either of the two planets Saturn or Jupiter, rather than Uranus (on account of the comparatively small sphere of attraction of the latter planet being more calculated to dis- perse than to deflect a group of meteoroids from a very long elliptic into an elliptic orbit of the short period of 33-25 years), may have been instrumental in bringing the November meteors into their present close proximity to the earth. It should, however, be observed that the meteoric group does not pass so near the orbits, nor remain so long in the neighbourhood of either of those planets, as it approaches to the planet Uranus, partly in consequence of the inclina- tion of the orbit to the plane of the ecliptic, and partly because of the more rapid motion of the meteors near the sun than at the point of their more dis- tant appulse with the latter planet f. * Les Mondes, 2nd ser. vol. xiii. p. 251. t Sir J. Herschel’s ‘ Outlines of Astronomy,’ 9th Edition (1868), Note to Art. 902. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 397 A remarkable discovery was made shortly after these announcements, on the publication (Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 1624) by Oppolzer, of the _ corrected elements of the Comet I. 1866, that the orbit of the comet coin- cides almost perfectly with the long elliptic orbit of the November meteors haying a period of 33-25 years. The note of Mr. Peters, dated January the 29th, is in the same No. 1624 of the ‘ Astronomische Nachrichten ;’ and those of Oppolzer and Schiaparelli, announcing the same discovery, are in an imme- diately following Number (1626) of the same Journal. In ‘ Les Mondes’ for the 21st of February (2nd ser. vol. xiii. p. 287), and in Father Secchi’s Bullettino Meteorologico for the last day of February 1867 (vol. vi. No. 2), there appeared additional letters of M. Schiaparelli on the subject of this second newly found connexion between comets and meteoric showers. In that addressed to ‘ Les Mondes’ *, a convincing comparison of the ele- ments ot the two orbits is thus given by M. Schiaparelli, viz. :— Elements of the Orbits of the November Meteors, and of Comet I. (1866.) 1866. Passage through the 9........ Noy. 13:57 3 ce perihelion. . Noy. 10-092 Jan. 11:160 Long. of the perihelion........ 56° 25'-9 60° 28':0 » ee ly A SEs ds dan stoicls 231° 28'-2 231° 26!-1 WIARTON. 15 5 ake "p Si s)alinym apart > « 17° 44'°5 17° 18"1 Perihelion distance .......... 0:9873 0-9765 RPERETIGIGY ats pgiale tack <9 0 09046 0-9054 BemiaAxiIS MAjOr.., «6.6 0k soar 10-340 10°324 Periodic time of revolution .... 33-250 yrs. 33°176 yrs. . TR A oe eer San eee retrograde. retrograde. To establish the reality of this resemblance, it was desirable to place beyond a doubt the assumed correctness of the long elliptic orbit of the November meteors with a periodic time of 33-25 years. The researches of Professor Adams, with this object in view, which appeared in the ‘ Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society ’ for March 1867, are thus noticed by Prof. H. A. Newton +, by whom the importance of this inquiry was first pointed out, in a paper noticed in these Reports (for 1864, p. 96) on “ the original accounts of the displays in former times of the November Star-showers, and the pro- bable orbit of the group of bodies around the Sun.’ “It was shown some time ago (this Journal, IT. xxxviii. 57) that the pe- riodic time of the November meteors must be one of five accurately determined periods. These five periods were 180-0 days, 185-4 days, 354-6 days, 376°6 days, and 33°25 years. The longitude of the node was also shown to increase with respect to the ecliptic 1’-711 in a year, which is equivalent to a procession with respect to the fixed stars of 29' in a cycle of 33-25 years. It was also suggested that by computing the secular motion of the node for each one of the five possible orbits, and by comparing it with the observed motion, we have an apparently simple means of deciding which of the five orbits is the true one. “Soon after the remarkable display of the meteors in November of last _ year {, Prof. Adams undertook the examination of this question. Taking _ first the orbit corresponding to a periodic time of 354:6 days, he found that the action of Jupiter produces an annual increase of the longitude of the node equal to 6”, and that of Venus an annual increase equal to 5”. The action * Dated at Milan, the 2nd of February. t American Journal of Science, 2nd ser. vol. xliv. p. 127. [t 1866, Nov. 13-14.] 398 REPORT—1868. of the earth was not so easily computed, owing to the intersection of the two orbits. An approximate solution applicable to this case showed, however, an annual increase of the longitude of the node of about 10” due to this cause. The whole computed procession of the node was therefore about 21” a year, or 12’ in the cycle of 33°25 years. ‘The periodic time 376-6 days gives a result not widely different from the above, while in the two smaller orbits there would be a much smaller motion. Hence these four orbits, out of the five possible ones, are incompatible with the observed motion of the node. ‘«‘ Computing, then, the effect of the perturbing action of the planets upon the group, supposing it to have a periodic time of 33:25 years, Prof. Adams found that Jupiter increases the longitude of the node 20' in one revolution, that Saturn increases it 7', and Uranus increases it 1’; the other planets produce hardly any sensible effect; so that the entire calculated increase of the lon- gitude of the node in the period of 33°25 years is about 28’. The observed increase during the same time is 29’. This remarkable accordance between the results of theory and observation appears to leave no doubt as to the cor- rectness of the period of 33°25 years.” Supposing a meteor-current to be the regular concomitant of a comet, whose presence on the same orbit with the comet can only be perceived at a point of encounter with the earth, a list of those comets whose orbits most nearly approach the orbit of the earth, was prepared by Dr. Weiss, of Vienna, (Astron. Nachrichten, No. 1632). The distance of such a comet from the sun in the ecliptic (r), at the place of its ascending (§) or descending node (8), is nearly equal to the earth’s distance (supposed unity) from the sun at the instant of its nodal passage through the plane of the comet’s orbit. The following list contains the data thus obtained by Dr. Weiss. Date of Nodal Comet. Node. r. Remarks. Shower. passage. Jan. 1-4JJan. 3.) II. 1792 8 0-983 1- 4. 4.) IV. 1860 8 | 0:985 18-20. 18. 1672 8 1:046 18-20. 20.) I. 1840 R 0-948 28. 26. 1092 8 0-977 Feb. 13-14./Feb. 13.) IV. 1854 3 0-973 13-14. 14.| IV. 1858 3 0-973 Mar. 5-10.)Mar. 8.| III. 1854 8 1-025 5-10. 8. 1490 9} 0:960 5-10. 13. 1683 8 1:047 16-20. 16. 1763 3 1:020 16-20. 16.| IV. 1862 83 0-982 Apr. 16-25.|Apr. 16.) I. 1830 8 0-923 16-25. 1% 837] 8 1:026 | Very uncertain orbit. 16-25. 20.;' I. 1861 8 1:003 | P = 415 years. 16-25. 22.| II. 1748 3 0-886 16-25. 24,| ITT. 1790 8 1-052 May 18-26.) — —_— _ — July 27-30.|July 27.| Il. 1737 8 9:995 Aug. 7-13.|Aug. 9.| IT. 1852 8 1:025 7-13. 9.| IIT. 1862 8 1:019 | P= 113 years. 16-20. 19.| II. 1862 8 1-039 5 am aa A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 899 TABLE (continued), Date of Nodal Comet. Node. nr. Remarks. Shower. passage. Sept. 1-5.) — — — — 16-25.|\Sept. 16] I. 1790] @ 1:058 | Very uncertain orbit. 16-25. 18. 1763 | 3 0-974 Oct. 16-26.\Oct. 16. IV. 1864 | 9 1-045 16-26. 18. ties |S 0-972 16-26. 20. 1739 | 8 1-073 16-26. 21. 1097 | 8 0-944 16-26. 24. 1366 | 8% 1-048 Nov. 14.|Nov. 13 I. 1866 | 9 — |P= 83-18 years. 28. 26.) I. 17664 8 0°853 28. 28. Biela 3 1004 |P = 66 years. 28. 29, I. 1743 | 8 0-881 Dec. 6-13.\Dec. 9.) IV. 1819 8 0°3815 |P=4°'8 years. On calculating, in the next place, the point of radiation which a meteoric shower would appear to have, if it moved in the same orbit as Biela’s comet, Prof. D’Arrest, of Copenhagen, found (Astron. Nachrichten, No. 1633) that it agrees very closely with that of the December star-shower, whose maximum still oceurs on the 12th of December, but of which the first symptoms can be distinguished as early as the 29th of November. The earth now crosses the orbit of Biela’s comet on the latter, but in the last century on the former date. The great shower of meteors seen by Brandes on the night of the 6th of December, 1798, may very possibly have been connected with the periodical reappearance of this comet in the following year, which must have passed close to the same point of the earth’s orbit in the month of May 1799. From the elements of Comet I. 1861, Dr. Galle, of Breslau (Astron. Nach- richten, No. 1635) determined the radiant-point which the cometary particles would appear to have if, on the date of the earth’s passage near its orbit (the 20th of April), they were to encounter the earth as meteors, and found for its apparent place long. 267°-2, N. lat. 57°-0, about seven degrees from the place (in R. A. 277°5, N. Decl. 34°-6) observed by Mr. Herschel in 1864, or (in R. A. 27892, N. Decl. 34°'5) by Prof. Karlinski* at Cracow, in 1867, as the position of the radiant-point of the great star-shower of the 20th of April, already noted by Herrick, in 1839, as haying its point of radia- tion near aLyre. Assuming that the meteors, like the comet, have a periodic time of 415 years, Dr. Galle gives the following very similar ele- ments of their orbits— Meteors of April 20. Comet T. 1861. Longitude of perihelion .. 236° —s._ .... . se se 243° Longitude of § .......: SO ears aati Rioishe ay atb - 30° Enclination! . 0) fl eed) BOan ty adit 80° Perihelion distance ...... aE? (5 da a 0:9204 PPROGTILTICIDY <- s. «el eue saya 8)s s DS. clannets apeis 0:9835 Semiaxis major ........ ERD} dy Gomrereie-~hchcthc 50°72 Periodi¢: time = .5.) .is. 2. 415 years. ........ 415 years. MTIQee Sates tke ee se directs) BU. direct. _ * Dr. Galle, in ‘ Astronomische Nachrichten.’ See Astronomical Register for July 1867, _ yol. y. p. 160. 4.00 REPORT—1868. —as indicating very probably a physical connexion between this comet and the current of the April meteors. Two recently discovered periodical comets being thus pretty certainly shown to be connected with the material currents which give rise to the August and November meteors, and two others being very probably identified with the meteor-currents of April and December, the community of origin (frequently believed by writers of late years to exist) between shooting-stars and comets appears to be conclusively established. To assist the observation of luminous meteors, a first catalogue of shooting- stars observed in Italy during the years 1866-67 was published at Milan in July of last year, by M. Schiaparelli. The principal object being to ascer- tain the positions of their radiant-points, certain nights of the year were named beforehand by M. Schiaparelli for simultaneous observations, in order to multiply, as far as possible, the number of separate meteors recorded by observers cooperating to register their tracks at distant stations on a single night. The first portion of the catalogue consists, almost entirely, of 572 observations of meteors, made by M. G. Zezioli, assistant director of the telegraph-office ,at Bergamo, between the 26th of April and the 10th of July, 1867. Number of 2, : copies. Names. Addresses to which the Meteor-Atlas t was sent. Red- | Yellow- ruled. | ruled. Prof. J. C. Adams...... The Observatory, Cambridge .........:..s00.-000 al) cic 1 G. B. Airy, Esq. .. ....Royal Observatory, Greenwich, London, 8.E. ...| 1 Dr. G. von Boguslawski|Stettin, Prussia ........:...cccessecseeresconseedessessecs if Prof. E. W. Brayley...|London Institution, Finsbury Circus, London, B.C. 1 C. Brooke, Esq. .........|16 Fitzroy Square, London, W. ...........0ss-+-00 1 Dr. O. Buchner......... Universitat, Giessen, Prussia .......cccssces.eseeeees 1 Prof. Challis ............|The University, Cambridge .............csecsseeeesees 1 M. Coulvier-Gravier * |Observatoire du Luxembourg, Paris, France...... th T. Crumplen, Esq. .../18 Eaton Street, Regent’s Park, London, N.W....; 1 P. F. Denza, B...... ...;Osservatorio del Coll. R. A., Moncalieri, Turin, Piedin Otiharesss aregerscs.-casosed svceseeee deus eetes 1 Dr. J. G. Galle .........|Sternwarte, Breslau, Prussia..............s0seeseseeees 1 Jas. Glaisher, Hsq. .../Royal Observatory, Greenwich, London, 8.B. ...) 2 1 R. P. Greg, Esq. .......0utwood Lodge, Prestwich, Manchester............ 1 2 Dr. W. von Haidinger |K. k. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien, Austria} 1 Prof. EH. Heis............|Sternwarte, Miinster, Prussia ............ss0s.ssee0e- = if A. 8. Herschel, Esq. ...;Andersonian Institution, Glasgow, Scotland ...... 1 i M. Le Verrier ...,..... Directeur de l’Observatoire, Paris, France......... 1 K. J. Lowe, Esq. ......|The Observatory, Beeston, Notts...........2.0cc0000 i! Mir SB ViegMiarsh: <..... 309 Market Street, Philadelphia, U.S. America...) 1 Prof, J. H. Neumayer |Frankenthal, Palatinat, Prussia ............00...00.. 1 Prof. H. A. Newton .../Yale College, Newhaven, Conn., U. 8. America As. 1 Prof. J. Phillips ...... Mifséuim Worse, |Oxford> 6... tetecstak es ashe gee-caoees 1 M. Ad. Quetelet ...... Dir. de l’Observatoire, Bruxelles, Belgium......... aS 1 The Royal Society...... Burlington House, Piccadilly, London, 8.W....... 1 R. Astron. Society...... Somerset House, Strand, London, W.C............. 1 Prof. G. V. Schiaparelli Osservatorio del Coll. di Brera, Milano, Italy ...| ... 1 Dr. J. F. Schmidt...... The Observatory, Athens, Greece..............00..00. 1 Padre Secchi ............ |Osservatorio del Coll. Romano, Roma, Italy ..... 1 Prof. A. C. Twining .../Yale College, Newhaven, Conn., U.S. America...| ... W. H. Wood, Esq. ..,|1 Geelong Terrace, Friston Street, Birmingham 1 Total ...... eos... 8D Copies. * Now succeeded by M. Chapelas. 401 A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 4st] 8,tofeuMayy pu stazT oag ‘aro dstemary w.toyNOS OTT} 07 Suozaq Apradoad sry stqy wr pepuput ‘q pue ‘yaoday sty} Jo cop ‘d ye SJUVIPBI WLOT]NOS Fo ‘(H) ‘Zo “os “ % g syutod-querpet ony, x JIMS Toqzea ‘opr stoojour £9 “gq yt poyouuoa ATquqorg “SOOM ()[ Satmpuo { ATAOTS oAout SLOa}aPT *(Z) AMOS ou Te f aTqnop osTe puv oUTY ot} YITA ssouvApE JULTpeyy { ‘Tady oyur Apquqoad sonuruoo $ peuyop Tam querpuyy ‘yomnb saoajeyy § ““Zg Jo xo “Hg Jo quauoouawMOd ATqQTSSOg “SUOTVAMESGO URITRIT WoOaZ f pourayuoo ATqeqoad stozy Jo “W ‘ZY JO YUsusUWMMOD ! payraUy pue peuyop [Joa yuLIpery ‘WJIMS pus ‘OUIT} OF} YIM Sutouvape yuerpea §(* ‘yE=—z2) ‘N'Y yA-uh “6G “UPL ‘QOST ‘ouNSieg ye uees sIOdJUE QET {Toe pue Toavdergy Aq paqraoseq ‘COWVULMEXS JayANy sattmbay ** A YYLAN payoouuoa sdey -tad Fsdoaqzout oFuv] seats ATTeMOISvo0O fesnyrp pur poyeSuoz soqqea querpey “YSIFUPA ‘S.LO9}JoUE a9VTp seutrayut Aq AayyZe80} payouuoo osye pur foury oy} TIA Suwouvape Atqeq -oad SCT-OT “GX “GOST PUL TE-OERT “wypyy “poyeSuoza pur osnyrp querpryy ‘S109}IUL OGART [LUOISLQO SOALN “TE-cg uLP-eoyE (-“PL=<) FORT ‘toysoyoueyy FORT “4smuppae pT E98T “woltoury “g *0 [[VUs SLO9}9FT “FT “Qo ‘Voy ‘aejodumono § pauyap [Jaa pute [peus worse uerpey FE ULL FOST “wpe “stop Jo © “PE fyuerpea afqnop ao ura, ‘yay % 03 spueqxa A[quqoag “stayy Jo Ff tyr ‘FE 99. ‘TORT “wayyy = ‘asuyip “payesuoyo qyueiperyy “MONVSysoAUT sormbort uLIpeyy “ZC-QFERT wou {ported avadk-Zy vB ATQuqorg aS SS ee ee eee (‘jeuorstaoad Ayuo sv popaefer oq 07 are suoTpRATOSqo eso, “A'N) ‘syarwureyy 68 | O6T 8 | 0G Og | OST €&6 | 8& €6 | LEG er | O¢ og | €L GG ST $9 | S&Z 6L | OFT 61 CFT OOT | T&T OS | GLI 86 | 6&T OG =| 8ar GE | GG 6E | FE GF | 8& OG | LSI 6G | GLI G OT 0L | 89 ia) 1G ° io} ‘CaN VU ‘(098T) aoud onary, srursar, 4 stole, asaq le stiolepy wsiq 9 atadoissey 1 Typnrydg 2 ‘9 Tasag 0 appa Ey IOUITL OoT auortoy A sttoleyy @sig 0 stuoay ¢ aapAty 9 stoudy wv syuvapen?y a SI[Notayy a ToIyLU A souRD staejog laney, 2 aradorssen 9 “STLOT]RT[AISMORD s,opog jo sieyg pox Aq uerpeyy Jo aovtd oyeurrxoiddy *g 8 cL “SOUL NT OATOULISICT “Toa (7,) £ omosae FT (FT) £(49) sang “TAT” ZL ‘ON eee pg ater eG Avy —cg “ady Og Tady-g “rey @ Td y—¢@ “aeyl Be Gabe dear Sten eatte * Grey RTE oa 11-6 ‘qoq * 96-F “WH oe genon sTep (4) 0G “MeIW-Tg ‘ure oreo cointe i “ad y-OT “qa “OT “aey-g “ure oe” @ goer “DBP ester ep sete Qe 7 cmep "9G “4294-06 9 iy 6 api- “* oT ‘Sny-ge Ame cere e -Biy—y Ap 404: REPORT—1868. Mr. Greg having undertaken the projection of M. Zezioli’s observations on the appropriate gnomonic star-charts of the British Association, several new radiants were discovered, and the positions and durations of old ones were found to be confirmed, and of others to require only inconsiderable cor- rections, of which the shortness of the nights and the consequent scarcity of meteor-observations in England during the summer months had hitherto prevented the determination with precision. The preceding list of radiant-points of the northern hemisphere, corrected and enlarged, by means of the additional observations, from that formerly printed in these Reports (for 1864, p. 99), is extracted from a new edition of the Atlas of plane-perspective Meteor-charts (for 1868) of the Luminous- Meteor Committee of the British Association, which will, this year, be offered for sale by members of the Committee, at the price of lithographing copies of the Atlas, or of single charts, according to the wants and occasional require- ments of observers *. Besides the observations of shooting-stars now mentioned, which M. Schiaparelli has lately published in the Milan ‘ Ephemeris of Astronomy,’ three memoirs on shooting-stars observed in Piedmont during the August and November star-showers of 1866-67, by Father F. Denza, Director of the Observatory at Moncalieri, near Turin, contain useful abstracts of obser- vations, and notices of recent papers on meteoric astronomy, together with instructions for future systematic observations of meteors at various stations in Piedmont. The following list of radiant-points in the southern hemisphere (p. 405), compiled by Professor Heis from nearly 2000 observations of shooting-stars made by Dr. Neumayer at the Flagstaff Observatory at Melbourne, is taken from the Table at the end of the third of Father Denza’s memoirs +. No great star-shower was recorded by Dr. Neumayer as having been seen at Melbourne during the period of five years (1858-63) in which the observa- tions were carried on. Professor Heis regards the observations discussed and reduced in this list as of peculiar importance, on account of the care with which the apparent paths and the apparent size, colour, duration, &c. of the meteors were recorded. Thirty-five new radiant-points are developed in the southern hemisphere, and the positions of four previously established radiant-points (S,, 05 426) are corroborated, by the observations, and are included in the southern list. Some of the radiant groups sufficiently resemble those obtained by Professor Heis as the result of his own indefatigable labours in the northern hemisphere, or those assigned for the same hemisphere by Mr. Greg, so as to make in these cases a further investigation of especial interest. * The sale of the maps, at a rather higher price (owing to the expense of drawing three new charts and relithographing the ol! plates for the new edition of the Atlas) than would make them accessible to the majority of observers, was this year begun at Norwich, by the agents (Messrs. Taylor and Francis) for the sale of the volumes of these Reports. Four copies of the Atlas were thus sold to members of the Association at Norwich; and the remaining sixteen copies struck off for the occasion of the Meeting, to represent this edition of the Atlas, are kept on hand for the use of British and foreign observers, for whom . the price is reduced to 25s. for a single copy. The Committee are unable to offer copies to observers at a lower price, on account of the large number of copies of the Meteor-Atlas which were last year sent, gratis, to the foregoing destinations (see the list on p. 400). + Le Stelle Cadenti osservate in Piemonte. Del P. Francesco Denza, B., Memorie 1, 2, 3. Torino, 1867-68. { The original memoir of Drs. Heis and Neumayer, “On Meteors in the Southern Hemisphere ” (4to, Mannheim, 1867), is extracted from Dr. G. Neumayer’s “ Discussion of the Meteorological and Magnetical Observations made at the Flagstaff Observatory at Mel- bourne.” A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 405 List of Radiant-points of Meteoric Showers in the Southern Hemisphere. By Drs. Heis and Neumayer. Ref Position. Greek or Roman ‘Riot Month. Constellation. =| 7] literal Remarks. oh R. A. | N.Decl.| designations. | ° ° } 1.| January...) Canis Major ...... 105 ae |b 2. ey Argo Navis ......... 145 S220) Mae 3.| February | Puppis Argo ...... LOSS a lige eto years: +. - Contaurus ......... 174 —52 | As. 5. 3 Leo Major ......... 174 | +16 |S,. 6.| March ...| Argo Navis ......... 125 Sots) a1 te Ce . lydra, 2i,.2.aeeccad 174 =—30 | A,. 8. 5 Centaurus ......... 192 = Stel WE ERM odes accis es *Not=(H) of 9. % WiteOm seer eh stercs Ue Se 3 isis Greg’s list ; EO: |PApril ....., Centaurus’; ......... 194 —30 | H,*. see below, Hel’: 33 Telescopium 280 —38""| A,. No. 27. 12. Ba 1. TOL Pear Re eer ee 126 42 13. “fs Coma Berenices ...|_ 185 +22 |S,. 14...) May « ...0+. DUS 3. 8.8 pisos 212 —49 | H.* 1d. - INOYINIA Jos,3tccses0s0. 248 —46 | A,. 16. ¥ Vie ee i ee a 17. | June Scorpius crests ee: 253 Sai | Ae 18. Fe Sagittarius ......... 269 —ll j0,, 19. 57 Capricornus.,....... 305 in Mae att ceca s sac NR err ee =U of Heis : 33. a Hridanws),......ass 50 —4 |W. and Greg. 34. 8 Thars he: MeSeeea AP on 307 —47 | Y3. 35.| November | Cetus ............... 22 —35 | X,. 36. % @olumbar <.52..<-s00, 90 —34 |Q,. 37.| December | Columba ............ 8 | —37 |Q,. 38. . PATOON gona at cuae ¢aies 115 —38 |T. 39. 9 Antlia Pneumatica| 148 —34 | A). The radiants @,,, in the southern list correspond very nearly in time and place with the radiants WG, QG of the northern hemisphere ; and the new group of southern radiants, 3,,,, ,, closely adjoins the group T,,,,,,, and the radiant U of the older list, making it to appear probable that these radiant-points are common to both hemispheres of the globe. _ &,, June, in Capricornus ... &,, July, in Delphinus ...... ‘Y,, August, in Grus _ 2), August, in Aquarius =,, September, in Aquarius =,, October, in Pisces......... a= o= SOD =n 7 305 + 5 Son ceeuod 325 —38 337 —10 346 — 3 347 —11 ez oO ie} May 14-June 20, in Delphinus 312 +21 June l—Aug. 17, in Aquila ... 294 4 ;: July 2—Aug. 8, in Pisc. Austr. 338 —28 June 20—Aug. 24, in Pegasus... 838 +13 Aug. 22-Nov. 5, in Pegasus... 0 +14 Sept. 6—Noy. 23, in Cetus ...... 17 —10 a= The radiant (H) determined independently in 1865 (see Report, pp. 104, 123) is 406 REPORT—1868, | well corroborated by two radiant-points in Prof. Heis’s list, Y, and 3,, being almost intermediate in position, and a little earlier in date of its appearance, with respect to each of them. It may, accordingly, be regarded as the com- meucement of either of those showers, or even as the starting-point of a whole series of showers Y, 3, T, U which have their centres of divergence, in autumn, in the vicinity of the equator. The new radiant-points X,, , (the latter in the constellation Cetus), in October and November, are also not impossibly allied appearances, and the latter, perhaps, a continuation of the last radiant of the group U, near 6 Ceti. Among the radiant-points in the new list which (like that of the November meteors in the northern hemisphere) lie closest to the tangential apex of the earth’s way, two especially may be noticed in the southern hemisphere, viz. Position of tangential point. = = sh é= A,, April, in Telescopium ......... 280° —38° 296° —21° } For the middle of A,, December, in Antlia Pneum.... 148 —34 175 +2 the month. The central positions of the radiant groups in the southern hemisphere for the different months shows a total number of 15 separate groups; and of the meteors mapped about 627 appear to be sensibly conformable to them. The following is a brief classification of the list :— Designa-| Gantral Number of No.| tion of siti re Constellation. Months. meteors group. 5 Lah pe mapped. a= b= le ie 115 —34 | Argo Navis ...| Dec., Jan., Feb., March, April 100 2: A 162 —40 | Antlia Pneum. | Dec., Jan., Feb., March ...... 73 3. H 206 —37 | Centaurus ...... March, April, May ............ 83 4. A 266 —41 | Telescopium ...} April, May, June, July, Aug. 61 5. cH 305 — 1 | Aquila ......... dupe, PULy ee cosas tecas hese 27 6. 6) 264 —17 | Ophiuchus.....| June, July ............20cs.seeeees 26 ae II 354 —46 | Phenix ......... GULLY.) Esccseneesssocys0-cemeemeeee 30 8. 5) 50 —85 | Octans ......... ORM) Poetics evses* -oepeeteree esse 13 uh = 342 — 8 | Aquarius ...... August, September, October 43 10. AG 315 —40 | Microscopium | August, September, October 59 11. ® 340 —30 | Piscis Austr. ...| September ..................5..... 14 12. x 16"—35"| Cétusl:..cue-0-..: October, November ............ 24 13. Vv 50 — 4 | Eridanus ...... groban feiss Ave: 5 oe erreete ee 13 14. Q 86. —35 | Columba. ”....... November, December ......... 33 15. Ss 188 +13 | Virgo)............ February, March, April, May 28 Total 627 Of these groups the greater number are either near the equator or else near the parallel of the declination of the zenith at Melbourne, about 38° 8, decli- nation. Only one radiant-point, viz. P, in July, is found in the vicinity of the South Pole of the heavens ; while, on the contrary, in the northern he- misphere a large proportion of the radiant-points visible throughout the year are either situated very near to the North Pole of the heavens, or are cireum- polar. Were a series of meteor-observations in the southern hemisphere to be continued over as great a number of years as that which has been carried out in the northern hemisphere, it is probable that the number of radiant-points discovered would not only be increased, but also be found distributed more uniformly over the sky than those which have now been assigned to it, and whose positions are indicated in the present list. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 407 No star-showers were observed at Melbourne during the epochs (for the northern hemisphere) of the 2nd of January, 19th—21st of April, 18th of Octo- ber, 13th-14th of November, and 3rd—18th of December, during the five- year period of the observations, from 1858 to 1862. The months of June, July, and August are regarded by Dr. Neumayer as particularly rich, with respect to the hourly frequency of meteors. Many fine meteors were seen on board of the frigate ‘ Novara,’ on the voyage from Funchal to Rio Janeiro, between the 27th of July and the 2nd of August, 1857. An unusual number of meteors was also seen at Melbourne towards the end of February and be- tween the 8th and 17th of May in the year 1859. A notable number of shooting-stars and fireballs was seen at Victoria on the night of June 12-13, 1861. A great number were also seen by M. Poey at Havannah, on the nights of the 27th and 28th of July 1862. Maxima of frequency of shooting- stars, in various years of the interval from 1858 to 1862, were observed at Melbourne on the following dates :—Jan. 28—Feb. 2, Mar, 12-15, May 8-17, June 3-14, July 27—-Aug. 2, Aug. 5-7, Oct. 25, Dec. 6, 12, 18, and 25. The ayerage hourly frequency, for the different months of the year, given in the memoir, differs in a very small degree from the results of the Melbourne observations as formerly stated in these Reports*. Particular accounts of several large meteors recorded in the southern con- tinent of Australia are included in the memoir, which have either been de- seribed in these Reports, or for which the original memoir must be consulted for special details of their description. “Notes and Reflections on the Astronomical Theory of Falling Stars,” by G. V. Schiaparellif.—In continuation of his former letters to Father Secchi on the orbits and probable origin of luminous meteors, Professor Schiaparelli last year resumed the subject, in a memoir read before the Flo- rentine Academy of Sciences, containing additional notes and mathematical . considerations of importance on the astronomical theory of shooting-stars. According to the best received hypothesis which existed before the dis- covery of their connexion with comets, the sun was regarded as surrounded by a series of meteoric rings, one of which, that of the November meteors§, returning once in a cycle of about 33-25 years, contains a principal group of meteors collected in one portion of its circumference, the remaining portions of the annulus being either nearly free from or totally devoid of meteors. Star- showers of annual occurrence like that of the 10th of August, present the phenomenon of a nearly continuous stream of meteors, varying only slightly in density in its different parts; while those which appear, at uncertain intervals of years, on the 2nd of January and 20th of April, must form a discontinuous stream of meteoric bodies, consisting of meteor groups irregu- larly distributed along its length, and separated from each other by inter- vening gaps. Finally, those isolated appearances described in catalogues as ereat star-showers of former times, which are not known to have returned, and the modern star-showers of the 12th of December, including, perhaps, ‘among its appearances the great display of meteors observed by Brandes on _ * Report for 1865, p. 182. + See Report for 1866, p. 127. _ ¢ Memorie della Societa Italiana delle Scienze, 3rd ser. vol.i.pt.1. 4to, Florence, 1867. _ § The term “Leonids,” if applied to this shower as radiating from some point in the mstellation Leo, may, not improperly, be used to distinguish it from other meteors appear- simultaneously with it, as Professor Schiaparelli has applied the term “ Perseids ” to icate the meteors of the 10th of August which radiate from some point in the constel- lation Perseus. Mme. Scarpellini has employed the word “ uranatmi” (sidereal exhala- tions) to designate shower-meteors generally. 408 REPORT—1868. the 6th of December 1798, of which no former record appears to be pre- served, must rather have been temporarily, and, in the latter case, recently introduced into the solar system from without. The real form and extent, and the mode of the production, of meteoric rings would thus remain uncertain, if the recent discovery of their affinity with periodic comets had not to some extent revealed their history, and removed, at length, one chief obscurity from the theory of meteor rigs— that is to say, their frequent retrograde motions, and great obliquities to the ecliptic, of which the nebular hypothesis of Laplace, when it is attempted to be applied to explain their origin, can give no account. The two principal meteoric showers, of August and November, and pro- bably also those of April and December, having been recently identified in their orbits with the orbits of certain periodic comets, one of which performs its revolution, with a periodic time of upwards of 400 years, in an orbit ex- tending, at its greatest distance, twice as far as the furthest planet, Neptune, from the sun, the community of origin of comets and shower-meteors, at first suspected, now appears to be finally established. It is stated in the first chapter of Professor Schiaparelli’s memoir as the new astronomical theory of luminous meteors, about to be further developed and applied to the explana- tion of their phenomena. In the second and third chapters some points of the theory of the atmo- spherical origin of meteors are regarded as requiring special consideration and discussion. Deviations from uniform motion, such as crooked paths * and changes of velocity, regarded by M. Coulvier-Gravier as the effects of violent air-currents, are shown to arise from the resistance of the air to the original motion of the meteors. The diurnal variation of frequency, noticed by M. Coulvier Gravier, and the similar annual variation, also observed by him, by Dr. Schmidt, Dr. Wolf, and by others, together with the variations of the average direction of meteors throughout the day, or year, are shown to have no direct connexion with meteorological changes, but to correspond to the varying altitude and azimuth of the apex of the earth’s way, from which the greater number of meteors are directed. Formule for calculating the amount of these periodical variations led Prof. Schiaparelli, in his first letter to Father Secchi, to regard the real velocity of meteors as identical with that of bodies revolving in parabolic orbits round the sun. They were similarly investigated and employed by Professor Newton in pointing out the resemblance of the orbits of shooting-stars to those of comets. A popular account of the phenomena of meteoric variations is given at the conclusion of the chapter, by supposing a ‘‘ meteoric sun,” or central radiant-point of shooting-stars, to be situated at the apex of the earth’s way—whose rising and setting produce a meteoric morning and evening, and its culminations a meteoric noon and night, siw hours before the corresponding changes of the sun. A meteoric spring and autumn, summer and winter are a consequence of the varying declination (or meridian altitude) of the same “meteoric sun,” and accordingly follow three months after the corresponding tropical seasons of the year. * Of meteors with decidedly crooked paths, M. Coulvier-Gravier reckons that about three such meteors are visible in every thousand. Meteors with decidedly serpentine flights were only observed by him three or four times in the course of many years. M. Schiaparelli further suggests that the helix, or spiral curve in which small strips of card, 2 inches long and 4 inch wide, descend through the air when let fall from a height, combined with the foreshortening and exaggerating effects of perspective, faithfully represents all the peculiari- ties of curyed and retarded flight occasionally observed in shooting-stars. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 409 In the fourth and fifth chapters, the positions of all the known radiant- points of the northern hemisphere, with respect to the terrestrial apex, are projected by Prof. Schiaparelli on a single planisphere, having the pole of the ecliptic at the centre, and the sun and anthelion, and the apex and anti- apex, at the four points of the ecliptic, in the border of the planisphere. It thus appears that, owing to the generally low position of the sun beneath the horizon during the time of the observations, no radiant-points within 60°, and only twelve radiant-points within 90° of the sun have been observed, the remaining thirty-nine radiant-points belonging to the anti-solar hemisphere, a large portion of which, at night, was in the observer’s view throughout the time. On the other hand, thirty-one points of radiation of shower- meteors are found within 90° of the apex, and only twenty occur within 90° of the anti-apex of the earth’s way*, although the apex was seldom seen above, and the anti-apex was rarely hidden below the horizon during the observations. The practical results of observation, therefore, confirm the supposition that the apex of the earth’s way is also an apex of concentration of meteoric showers, and that consequently the “resultant,” or average flight of meteors, taken collectively throughout the whole year, is from the direction of that apex. N y v H Projection of Radiant-points of the northern hemisphere (see Report for 1864, pp. 99, 100), showing their relative positions with respect to the circle of the ecliptic and to the apex of the earth’s way. By G. V. Schiaparelli. * The proportion derived from theory is 43:8, or 54:1. The practical difference of the result may be accounted for by the large preponderance of evening observations. 2F 410 REPORT—1868. No trace of conformity to the ecliptic, or other signs of connexion of the radiant-points with each other or with great circles of the sky, can be de- tected, which would materially facilitate precise calculation of the diurnal and annual variations, if certain other elements of abundance of the meteors of particular showers were satisfactorily determined. Allowing for the effects of the earth’s velocity in its orbit, in assembling the apparent positions of the radiant-points of shower-meteors about that point of the ecliptic towards which the earth moves, and for the greater chances of vision of small comets when moving in direct orbits nearly coin- ciding with the ecliptic plane, than of those whose orbits are more inclined, or retrograde, Prof. Schiaparelli considers that both comets and meteors are distributed without any preponderance towards the plane of the ecliptic, and that they exhibit no prevailing tendency towards a direct rather than towards a retrograde motion in their orbits. The real mean velocity of shooting-stars may be determined from that of comets in their orbits, at their points of intersection with the orbit of the earth, which is 25°70 B. S. miles per second; while that of the earth in its orbit is only 18:18 miles per second*, Adding and subtracting these num- bers, the greatest and least mean relative velocities of meteors which en- counter the earth (respectively, moving to meet it directly, or to overtake it), no account being taken of the earth’s attraction, are 43°88 and 7:52 miles per second. The effect of the earth’s attraction is greater in the latter case than in the former (in the proportion of 5:1), and increases the mean greatest and least relative velocities of shooting-stars respectively to 44-43 and 10-23 miles per second, which are to each other in the proportion of 4:34:1. Supposing, then, that the whole vis viva of meteors is converted into heat and light, the heat developed on the surface of those which move to meet the earth directly is greater than that developed by meteors which directly overtake it, in the proportion of 19:1. It follows that the light and also the number of meteors in the former case visible to the naked eye will be proportionately greater than those in the latter; and should two meteorites of exactly equal masses penetrate the atmosphere, one of them moving from the direction of the apex of the earth’s way with the mean maximum velocity of meteors relatively to the earth, and the other from the opposite direction with the mean minimum velocity, the former meteorite may be totally volatilized, while the latter may reach the earth with a por- tion of its substance unconsumed, and may produce an aérolitic fall. In this manner Prof. Schiaparelli accounts for a fact which may at least be regarded as pretty well established t, that the greater number of aérolitic falls take place in the afternoon and evening hours of the day, although meteoric phenomena, generally, are then least vivid or abundant, because at that time, which corresponds to meteoric night, the anti-apew of the earth’s way is at its highest point above the visible horizon, and the meteoric showers which then make their appearance are for the most part moving in direct orbits, so as to overtake the earth with the minimum meteoric speed. Although no aérolites are precipitated from the meteor-currents of the « Perseids” and “ Leonids,” the elongations of whose radiant-points from the * Taking for the amount of the solar parallax its new value, 8'-95. The velocity both of the earth and of particular meteors may differ sensibly from the mean value. Thus, for Biela’s comet, whose periodic time of revolution is 6-7 years, the elliptic velocity at the point where it crosses the earth’s orbit is 1-14th part less than that of a parabolic orbit, or about 23:9 B.S. miles per second. The real velocity of the November meteors at the same _ point in their orbits is about 25-07 miles per second. + See these Reports for 1860, p.117.—Table to Mr. Greg’s Catalogue of Aérolites. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 41] apex of the earth’s way are only 38° and 10° respectively, yet other circum- apical meteoric streams may give rise to aérolitic falls. The annual varia- tion of frequency of aérolites is not nearly so marked as the corresponding law of their diurnal variation * ; and this would actually be the case, if the materials of a few meteor-currents near the apex should, occasionally, produce aérolitic falls, The sixth chapter contains some propositions relative to the effects of the earth’s motion, and of its attraction, during its appulse with meteoric currents. Supposing D to be the real density or number of meteors per minute of a shower of shooting-stars which would fall on a single horizon exposed ver- tically to it were the carth at rest, z the apparent zenith-distance, and ¢ the apparent elongation of the radiant-point of the shower from the apex of the earth’s way, then, considering the real velocity of meteors to be that of bodies moving in parabolic orbits, and t6 be unaffected by the earth’s attrac- tion, the apparent density d, or the number of meteors actually observed per minute, is given by the formula d=D cos z/3+ WV 2 cose, and will generally depend on the apparent angular distance of the radiant- point from the zenith of the observer, and from the apex of the earth’s way. The frequency of the meteors will be greatest when the radiant-point coin- cides with the apex of the earth’s way, and when both points are in the observer’s zenith}. Applying the formula to calculate the real density of the meteors in the great shower of the 13th and 14th of November 1866, from the apparent density (123 meteors per minute) as observed at Green- wich, making z=65°, e=10°, the value of D, or the real density of the stream for the observers of the shower at Greenwich, is found to be 171 meteors per minute. The effect of the earth’s motion through the swarm, in increasing the frequency of the meteors, was thus much more than counter- balanced by the low position of the radiant-point, tending to reduce their _ apparent number. Had the latter point been in the zenith, the number of meteors recorded in a minute would have been 291, instead of 123, as ob- _ served, and would greatly have increased the splendour of the display. The effect of the earth’s attraction cannot always be neglected, as it de- flects the parallel courses of the meteors into hyperbolic curves, And those meteors are most deflected which just graze the earth’s atmosphere, and which overtake it with the slowest speed from the direction of the anti-apex ; _ the total deflection in this case, on leaving the sphere of the earth’s attrac- tion, is 34° 40’ ; meteors so diverted from their original course become truly _ sporadic, and their radiant-region must speedily grow diffuse; but in the case of a meteor-current arriving from the direction of the apex, the total _ deyiation cannot exceed 1° 24': while for meteor-currents having their apparent points of divergence midway between these points, or situated 90° _ from the apex, the greatest possible deviation is 7°56’. As the meteors of the 13th-14th of November diverge nearly from the apex of the earth’s way, and a second deflection of the same meteors to the utmost extent of 1° 28' is very unlikely to take place, the great accuracy of divergence of the meteors of this shower from a well-defined radiant-point is readily explained. __ * See the Table in the above Report for 1860, p. 116. __ t For in that case cose=cos z=1. ; _ } See an important article by Prof. Twining in reference to the influence of the earth’s _ attraction on “'The August Meteors,” in the American Journal of Science for November 1861, vol. xxxii. 22 412 REPORT—1868. Meteors which penetrate the atmosphere are deflected downwards ; and the apparent position of their radiant-point is deflected upwards to an extent depending on its zenith-distance, by the same cause, termed by Prof. Schia- parelli the zenithal attraction—which follows a law very similar to that of atmospheric refraction, in displacing the apparent position of the radiant- point upwards, towards the observer’s zenith. The apparent displacement disappears at the zenith, and reaches its greatest value at the horizon, where it may amount in extreme cases to 17° 20'; so that a radiant-point may change its apparent place in the sky (from the effects of the earth’s attrac- tion alone) 34° 40' in twelve hours, between the times of its rising above the horizon in the east point and setting below it in the west. A correction for zenithal attraction is therefore necessary to be applied to the observed posi- tions of all radiant-points whose elongation is greater than 90° from the apex of the earth’s way; and formule for its calculation, in every case, are given at pp. 56, 57 of the memoir. The seventh chapter gives an account of the perturbations produced by the earth and the other planets on meteoric swarms with which they come in contact, or which pass in their immediate neighbourhood. Meteors moving in parabolic orbits, which overtake the earth with the least possible relative velocity, may, under the most favourable circumstances, be diverted into ellipses of periodic times varying from 4} to 120 years or upwards, according as they just graze the earth’s atmosphere, or pass at a distance of ten or more earth’s radii from its centre. The greatest effect, however, of the earth’s attraction on meteors of the November shower is no greater than would alter their periodic time from its present value to 28°67, or to 49-92 years in opposite cases. Since such effects can rarely accumulate, the No- vember meteors can never be diverted into open orbits by the earth’s attrac- tion, but will continue to circulate in ellipses, intersecting the earth’s orbit, as at present, with little variation, about the earth’s place on the 14th of November. With regard to their introduction into the solar system, it is shown that, on account of the very small difference (;7,4 part of the whole) which must exist between the semiaxes major of the foremost and rearmost members of the meteoric group, supposing it to have reached its present extension in its orbit since the year a.p, 902, its actual diameter, if introduced into the solar system by the planet Uranus, could not have exceeded 168 miles. Should its diameter before encountering Uranus have been as much as 600 miles, it must have revolved previously in an ellipse with a periodic time of not more than fifty years, which is as inconceivable as that it should have always continued to revolve without any disturbance in its present course. Should the planets Jupiter or Saturn have effected a diversion of the group from along elliptic or parabolic orbit into its present path, the possible limits of its original dimensions are much wider, but are still confined to a few earth’s radii, supposing that the present track of the group could have brought them sufficiently near to those planets to fall within the extreme boundaries of their attractions—that is to say, within 10:19 radii of the globe of Saturn from its centre, or within 27:27 radii from the centre of the planet Jupiter. The results of this chapter accordingly tend to confirm the opinion urged by Faye*, that the group of the November meteors must have originally formed part of the nucleus of Tempel’s comet. The eighth chapter treats of the transformation of materials occupying the celestial spaces into meteoric currents. The hypothesis of Sir W. Herschel * Comptes Rendus, vol. liv. p. 553 e¢ seq. ¢ a 1 A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 413 regarding the concentration of an original nebulous matter* into celestial bodies of the various forms and characters visible in the universe, when ap- plied to the case of shooting-stars, has brought to light the following con- clusions, viz. (1) the production of meteoric streams, (2) the affinity of their orbits with those of comets, (3) the presence of comets in them forming an in- tegrant part of certain meteor-currents. Many important considerations are here, accordingly, introduced. In the first place, in the opinion of Faye, meteor-currents may arise from the dispersion of the nucleus of comets, which Laplace regarded as small portions of the nebulous matter of Herschel overtaken by the sun’s attraction in spacet. Meteoric clouds Professor Schiaparelli considers to be of exactly the same origin but at the same time of greater extent and tenuity than the nuclei of comets, and, finally, that they assume the form of meteoric currents when (under the influence of the sun’s attraction) they approach the interior portion of the solar system. A few general calculations, at the outset, are therefore given, to show what relations the dimensions and the du- ration of the perihelion passage of the meteoric currents must bear to the original extent and distance of the meteoric clouds, on the supposition that the mutual attractions of their particles may be neglected. It may, how- ever, be shown that if two gravitating spheres, composed of uncohering par- ticles, are placed close together, one of them incomparably smaller than the other, and revolving round it in an orbit, the attraction of the larger sphere will overcome the mutual attraction, and distribute the particles of the smaller sphere in the form of a current along its orbit, unless the smaller sphere has at least twice the density of the larger one. Supposing the sun’s mass to be extended into a sphere of the same radius as the earth’s orbit, it will contain 2:3 grains weight of matter per cubic yard, which is the density of common air at a barometric pressure of about 1, part of an inch (00337 in.) of mercury. Twice this density is therefore the least density which a come- tary body can have at the earth’s distance from the sun, without undergoing gradual deformation by the sun’s attraction into an elongated current. In the case of meteoric clouds, which are of extreme tenuity, and have no nu- cleus, or only such a small nucleus as the November meteors appear to pos- sess in Tempel’s comet, the deformation is certain to take place; but in the case of certain comets which appear to possess a nucleus of considerable density, their parts may remain connected throughout their perihelion pas- sage, or at least will not be permanently separated until they approach within a certain distance from the sun. The first steps of deformation of the group of the November meteors may accordingly not have commenced until they were deflected into their present orbit by the forcible attraction of one of the superior planets ; and a part of the same group appears still to retain its ori- ginal compact form in the gaseous mass of Tempel’s comett. In this view, comets and meteoric showers are portions of the nebulous matter in space in two different states of condensation (comets or meteors), which may either arise together or apart, according to the tenuity of the mat- * “ Astronomical Observations relating to the Construction of the Heavens,” Phil, Trans. for 1811. + The occasional smallness of comets may be gathered from a singular observation by Jahn (Astronomische Nachrichten, vol. xxiii. p. 237) of a comet with three tails, which, on the 3rd of July, 1845, described an are of nearly 40° in about 26 minutes, during which it remained visible. This comet must have passed very close to the earth, and must have been of very small dimensions. (Schiaparelli’s Memoir, p. 106.) { The nucleus of this comet was shown to consist of ignited gas, with the spectroscope, by Mr. Huggins (Proceedings of the Royal Society, vol. xv. p. 6, Jan. 11, 1866). 414 REPORT—1868. ter which produced them. Such differences are observed in the nebulw, of which some are resolvable and others not resolvable in the telescope ; and a similar distinction is shown to exist in the nebulz by the spectroscope. Comets with two or more nuclei, sometimes resembling a congeries of stars, have not uncommonly been observed. Of such observations several descriptions, illustrated by engravings (see fig. 1), are cited, for the details of which the reader is referred to the original memoir (p. 94-101). The ex- traordinary comet of 1652, witnessed by Hevelius (fig. 2), consisted of a disk of pale light of the apparent diameter of the full moon, with hardly any perceptible tail, and, in the telescope, it appeared filled with points of light. A large proportion of shooting-stars are, in fact, telescopic ; and a display of diffused light is said sometimes to accompany a meteoric shower. Fig. 1. Dec .20. =F wy SS a = — at =m 1. Nucleus of the large comet of the year 1618, observed with a telescope by Cysatus. 2. Comet of the year 1652, as observed and drawn, on the 27th of December, by Hevelius. How, then, can the tAn of Anaxagoras, or the nebulous matter of Herschel become condensed into bodies of such various characters, except it be from a state of highly heated vapour, gradually undergoing a process of cooling and condensing of its parts? Groups of more or less comminuted particles, or compact nuclei would thus result, according as the original form of the heated cloud was that of a filament or thin extended disk, or a sphere. Not only the various features of star-showers and comets, but even the mine- ralogical structure of aérolites, whose crystals appear to have been deposited from a heated vapour, to have been broken up, and to have, in some cases, again undergone metamorphism by heat, before they were finally consoli- dated, appear to be explained on this:supposition. The theory of Faye, that they are developed from the nuclei, and of Secchi, that they are the remnants of the tails, and of Erman, that they are particles detached from comets by a resisting medium, are not so immediately referable to the known laws of gravitation as the hypothesis that all classes of luminous meteors, like comets themselves, are drawn towards the sun by its attraction from the regions of intrastellar space, which the telescope declares to be empty, but which, in all probability, are strewed with cosmical clouds, containing in one order of phenomena both meteoroids and comets. The ninth and tenth chapters of the memoir conclude with some further notices and reviews of recent opinions regarding the connexion between comets and shooting-stars, and demonstrations concerning a certain luminosity of A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 415 the zodiacal light completely surrounding the ecliptic, termed by German astronomers the Gegenschein, of which M. Schiaparelli has himself frequently corroborated the appearance at Milan. It will be sufficient to notice, in closing the present abstract, that the result of the investigation is not favour- able to the assumption that the outer portion of the zodiacal light consists of solid bodies, shining by borrowed light which they reflect to us from the sun. “Synthesis of Meteorites.” By M. Daubrée (Comptes Rendus, 1866, Jan. > 29-March 19, vol. Lxii. pp. 200, 269, 660).—By the help of a high heat*, —————ee in one of the gas-manufactory furnaces of Vaugirard, supplied with gas-coke, M. Daubrée succeeded in liquifying the intractable materials of upwards of thirty different aérolitic falls. After solidifying, the fused mass was found to consist of a vitrified slag in the case of the three unique meteorites of Juvenast, Jonzac, and Stannern, which differ from the ordinary type of aérolites in the presence of alumina. The magnesian or common type of aérolites, on the other hand, separates on cooling into two distinct and regu- larly crystallized minerals, one of which forms a pellicle of square-based, octahedral, or occasionally lamellar crystals, and is peridot, or protosilicate of magnesia. The meteorite of Chassigny consists entirely of this mineral, with a small percentage of chrome-iron ore. The other mineral, of which the meteorite of Bishopville is almost entirely~composed, is enstatite, or bisilicate of magnesia. It crosses the centre of the mass, apparently on ac- count of its greater fusibility, in groups of long square prisms, of very per- fect form, and generally in one direction. The crucibles being lined with charcoal to preserve the contents from contact with the air, a portion of the iron contained as silicate is reduced; and the silica set free, combining with a portion of the peridot, thereby increases the quantity of enstatite. The ease with which these two minerals crystallize from the liquid state makes it probable, as supposed by Mr. Sorby, that the confused mass of very small broken and imperfect crystals of which the magnesian aérolites consist must have been deposited by sublimation, like flour of sulphur, from a state of heated vapour. In order to test the affinity of terrestrial rocks with aérolites in this re- spect, several magnesian silicates were fused, and those which gave results most similar to those of aérolites were found to be,—1°, Peridot from the basalts of Langeac (Haute Loire); 2°, Peridotic hypersthene from Labrador ; 3°, and especially, Lherzolite (a mineral found at many places in the Pyrenees) from Prades, consisting of a mixture of the magnesian minerals of peridot, enstatite, and pyroxene. The result of fusion of these rocks, in the pre- sence of charcoal, is exactly similar to that of aérolites: the two magnesian silicates contained in them crystallize separately ; and the reduced iron ex- tracted from the mass contains a proportion of nickel, which, as shown by Stromeyer, is present, with phosphates (found by G. Rose, and by M. C. St.- Claire Deville in Vesuvian lavas), as well as chromite, in most of the basic rocks which spring from a source below the granite. A phosphate (apatite) was also found by Rammelsberg, together with titanium, in the rare aluminic meteorite of Juvenas; but the presence of titanium in meteorites of the com- mon or magnesian type was first discovered by M. Daubrée, in the course of his experimental fusions of the meteorites of Montréjau and Aumale. Several attempts to imitate meteoric iron by fusion were partially suc- cessful, as in the liquefaction and reduction of lherzolite and the peridot of * The heat of melting platinum was employed throughout the experiments. + In the case of Juvenas, the mass, on solidifying, is porous and full of air-bubbles, as if gas were disengaged from the meteorite at a high heat. 416 REPORT—1868. Langeac. The fusion of iron alloyed with nickel and phosphuret of iron produced reticulated figures on the etched sections, which, although not so regular as those of Widmanstiatten, were yet perfectly distinct. The forma- tion of small spherules of bisilicate was also repeatedly noticed in the re- sults of terrestrial fusions, which are abundant in certain aérolites; while the graphitic-looking friction-planes met with in many meteorites could be perfectly imitated, by rubbing together fragments of the reduced iron-bear- ing residue of the fusion of terrestrial rocks. The serpentine or hydrated class of magnesian rocks were next submitted to experiment—first, in crucibles lined with calcined magnesia, and afterwards alone. The result in the first case is a perfectly crystalline peridot, and in the second case a group of mixed crystals of peridot and enstatite. When the crucibles are lined with charcoal, the resulting mass contains a highly nickeliferous metallic iron*. Most of the serpentines also contain chromite, which was first pointed out by Laugier as an ingredient of the most constant and regular occurrence in meteorites. Serpentine, basaltic peridot, and lherzolite may accordingly be regarded as the chief terrestrial rocks of a meteoric type. With granite and gneiss, the two staple foundations of the earth’s crust, meteorites have no features in common,—neither orthose, felspar, mica, quartz (the meteoric iron of To- luca, according to G. Rose, alone excepted), tourmaline, nor any of the com- mon granitic silicates being found in them. But they agree closely with those basic rocks whose origin is deeper-seated than the granite, and which only reach the surface in volcanic eruptions. They consist most largely of peridot, which is, perhaps, only entirely absent from the three aluminiferous meteorites already mentioned. Its great specific gravity and general distri- bution in volcanic rocks, its avidity for silica (directly opposed to granite as the most basic of all the known silicates), and. lastly, its abundant occur- rence in aérolites appear to constitute the character of peridot as the true “ universal scoria.” Inasmuch as carbon, in the form of graphite, is rarely found in meteoric iron, it could not be the reducing agent to which aérolites appear to owe their low degree of oxidation; while their reduction by hydrogen would give rise to the formation of water and of hydrates, which are only known to exist, as M. Wohler has shown, in the carbonaceous meteorites of Orgueil, Kaba, and Cold Bokkeveldt. To explain the presence of such ingredients as metallic iron and unoxidized sulphur and phosphorus in meteorites, a process of oxidation of the original substances may, on the contrary, be supposed to have taken place, which was either incomplete on account of a deficiency of oxygen, or otherwise imperfect by reason of some interruption arising in its action. In order to submit the effects of such a process to experiment, un- oxidized siliciuret of iron was heated in a crucible, in contact with calcined magnesia, with a very slight access of air. Silica was thus produced, and it combined with the calcined magnesia in the form of peridot, while the iren was left in a metallic state. In another experiment, an alloy of iron con- taining 9 per cent. of nickel, with sulphuret and phosphuret of iron, silica, and magnesia, were heated together in a Schloesing’s gas-furnace, with the same precaution as before of admitting a slight access of air. The resulting peridot was olive-coloured, containing iron, and was without a trace of nickel, exactly as it is found enclosed in the meteoric irons of Pallas and Atacama, * The chemical analyses in this and the following experiments were conducted by M. Stanislas Meunier, the assistant in the geological laboratory of the Paris Museum of Natural History. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 417 The remaining metallic iron was more rich in nickel than before, and con- tained, besides, the sulphuret of iron combined together with the phosphuret, in the form of the triple phosphuret of iron, nickel, and magnesium (disco- vered in meteorites by Berzelius), which was separated from the iron by acid in metallic-looking grains. A synthesis of the chief ingredients of aérolites being thus found possible without the use of reducing agents, M. Daubrée is finally disposed to adopt the opinion that aérolites originally underwent a process of scorification, accompanied by incomplete oxidation, or a species of natural cupellation*, in which the substances having most avidity for oxygen were first completely oxidized, and the less chemically active elements and metals remained partly in the uncombined state, or alloyed with each other. The complete analogy, which this view presents to the generally received opinion regarding the formation, by oxidation, of the earth’s crust, recommends its unreserved adoption as the description of a cosmical process only differing from that recognized on the earth by its particular degree of completeness or duration. The highly oxidized materials, the absence of metallic iron, and the con- version of phosphurets and sulphurets in the earth’s crust into phosphates and sulphates, may be considered to have resulted from the same process of scorification, accompanied by a far more advanced oxidation than that con- cerned in the formation and metamorphoses of meteorites. In a later reprint of the same paper; M. Daubrée gives the following Table of the specific gravities of eruptive rocks and basalts, showing the su- perior gravity of peridot to all of them, closely approaching the ordinary specific gravity (3°35) of aérolites ;— Granite...... 2:64-2:76 Basalt...... 2-9-3:1 Trachyte .... 2:62-2:88 Enstatite... 3°303 Porphyrite... 2°76 Lherzolite .. 3:25-3:33 Diabase. .... 2:66-2:88 Peridot .... 3:33-3°35 Continuing his researches on the composition of aérolites t, a new classi- fication of aérolites, founded on the amount and mode of distribution of metallic iron in them, was suggested. The process adopted for this classifi- cation was proposed by M. 8. Meunier, and resembles that commonly em- ployed in the extraction of metallic gold from its matrix in quartz rocks. A fragment of the aérolite, supported by an iron wire, is heated to redness in a current of carbonic acid gas, and while still red-hot it is suddenly chilled by plunging into mercury. The siliceous portions of the aérolite are then easily crushed out from the interstices of the iron, and the mode of distribu- tion of the latter is most clearly distinguished: 1°, when the mass of iron is solid, the meteorite is termed a Siderite ; 2°, when it forms a continuous net- work in which the siliceous matter is included or interlaced, the meteorite is a Syssiderite ; 3°, when the iron forms separate grains, or is discontinuous, “as generally occurs in aérolites, the meteorite is a sporado-siderite; 4°, Cryptosiderites are those which exhibit a total absence or only very doubtful traces of metallic iron. In the Syssiderites of Pallas and Atacama the siliceous parts are discontinuous; but in that of Rittergriin they form, like the iron itself, a continuous mass, interwoven with the iron, * An expression used by M. Elie de Beaumont to describe the same process as it is supposed to have originally operated on the earth (Bulletin de la Société Géologique de la France, 1847, 2nd ser. vol, iv. p. 1326), + Ibid. 2nd ser. vol. xxiii. p. 408, March 5, 1866. } Comptes Rendus, vol. lxv. pp. 60, 148 (July 22, 1867). 418 REPORT—1868. On Spherules in Meteorites (Note by Mr. H. C. Sorby).—“ The small glo- bules of iron thrown off in the Bessemer process have a structure more like that of the globules in meteorites than any that I have ever seen. I do not know any concretion in terrestrial rocks like them. The Bessemer globules are thus S: whilst the concretions in rocks are thus OP: and, as you see, the former is just the character of those in meteorites.”—( Letter to Mr. Greg ; Sheffield, June 23rd, 1866.) “ Meteors, Aérolites, and Falling-stars.” By Dr. T. L. Pareson *.—A recapitulation of known facts and theories, rather than a work of original re- search, this little volume yet contains a mass of interesting information, and of observations, not hitherto brought together into one book. The following passage, briefly abstracted from pp. 172-178 of the work, conveys the ingenious opinion of the author on the early history of aérolites, fireballs, and shooting- stars, ascribing to them a community of origin with the earth, as supported by the then existing results of astronomical, and chemical researches on aéro- lites and falling-stars, made known in the previous pages of the work. «The chemical portion of this interesting problem has been completely solved; aérolites are shown to be of the nature of the earth. Andif we combine for a moment the planetary theory [of aérolites] and the fact that the large aérolites fall generally during the day, whilst the large bolides (either silent or detonating) appear usually soon after sunset, and shooting-stars (espe- cially the November and August swarms) always in the nightt, we are forcibly drawn to the conclusion that our earth circulates round the sun in or near a continuous cloud of its own dust (matter thrown from it during the earlier periods of its existence), and that this dust is distributed in such a manner that its larger fragments circulate inside the earth’s orbit (v. A. 8. Herschel, ‘ Intellectual Observer,’ April 1865) and gradually decrease in size as they extend beyond this orbit ; hence the phenomena of aérolites, bolides, and shooting-stars...... If in future years extended observations enforce upon us the truth of the assumption that meteoroids are really the dust of the earth, fragments of the earth’s mass thrown from it in early years (when volcanic action was intense, probably long after the moon was separated from it), which myriads of fragments have continued ever since to circulate along or near to the earth’s path, then I shall be satisfied to have originated this theory.” a this was written, the remarkable and probably more correct theory of the cometary and ewvtra-planetary origin of meteors, advanced by M. Schiaparelli, has been favourably received by astronomers and meteorologists. ‘ Meteoric Astronomy; a Treatise on Shooting-stars, Fireballs, and Aéro- lites.’ By Daniel Kirkwood, LL.D., Professor of Mathematics in Washington and Jefferson College, U. 8.t This treatise is a somewhat more condensed and scientific work than the last. In the first two chapters the history and character of the ring of the November meteors are described at length, and the recent theory of M. Schiaparelli on the August and other meteoric rings is specially noticed. The * Lovell Reeve and Co., London, 1867. + The greatest rate of frequency of shooting-stars, occurring in the morning hours of the night, or, on the average of the whole year, between 3 o'clock and 6 o’clock A.m., is here referred to. } Tribner and Co., London, 1867. =a A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 419 third chapter contains a catalogue of stonefalls, in chronological order ; and the 4th-11th chapters, discussions of various questions in the theory of meteors, such as :—the relative number of meteoric falls during the different parts of the day, or year; the coexistence of different forms of meteoric matter in the same rings; meteoric dust; the stability of the solar system, and the hypo- thesis of a resisting medium; the extent of the atmosphere as indicated by meteors ; the chemical and mechanical theories of solar heat; and the ex- planation of temporary and variable stars by the revolution round them of meteoric rings. In the 12th chapter, the rings of Saturn are regarded as examples of such formations, the principal gap or interval between them being thus especially accounted for. The 13th chapter treats of the zone of asteroids ; and in the concluding chapter of the work the Nebular Hypothesis is represented as giving an intelligible explanation of the origin of meteoric streams *. A condensation of nebulous matter, “it is thus seen, accounts satisfactorily for the origin of comets, aérolites, fireballs, shooting-stars, and meteoric rings.” In summing up the result of his conclusions (pp. 120-122), Dr. Kirkman cites the recent calculations of Leverrier and Schiaparelli on the remarkable connexion observed to exist between Tempel’s comet (I. 1866) and the group of the November meteors; of which group the comet appears to con- stitute the nucleus. The probable periodic time (about 105 years) of the August meteoric ring is also noticed, the similarity of its elements to those of the orbit of the third comet of 1862, and the remarkable circumstance, first pointed out by Schiaparelli, that a nebulous mass drawn into the solar system from without will be deformed in its approach, so as to pass the sun in a very narrow stream, and that if it returns in an elliptic orbit it will, after a certain number of revolutions, be converted into a continuous ring of material substance. The aérolitic epoch of the 27th—30th of November may, perhaps, be produced by such a ring connected with Biela’s comet, near the orbit of which the earth annually passes at about that date. With regard to aérolites, it is observed that they are more frequent (1) by day than by night, (2) in the afternoon than in the forenoon, (3) when the earth is in aphelion than when it is in perihelion. The first of these conditions is accounted for by the difference in the num- ‘ber of observers. The second indicates that the orbital motion of aérolites is generally direct; and the third is dependent on the greater length of the day in the apheliac than in the periheliac portion of the year. The asteroidal space between Mars and Jupiter is not impossibly a wide meteoric zone in which the largest aggregations are visible to us as the minor planets. The zodiacal light may also be regarded as an immense swarm of meteor aste- roids; and, finally, the meteoric theory of solar light and heat is included in the treatise as a consequence of the same form of the nebular hypothesis. * At p. 30, speaking of the radiant-point of the 19th-20th of April meteoric shower, Dr. Kirkwood states, on Mr. Greg’s authority, that it is about Corona. This mistaken estimate of its position, from an imperfect view of the phenomenon on the night of the 20th of April, 1863, was given by Mr. A. 8. Herschel in a lecture delivered a few days later, at the Royal Institution, in London. The position of the radiant-point was more accurately determined in the following year (see these Reports for 1864, p. 98), and it was then found to coincide with the place assigned to it by Herrick, in 1839, “ near # Lyre.” REPORT—1868. Meteors observed at Cambridge Observatory, August 8th, 1868. Angular - |Direction ~ |by Clock- a, 8 face, or » Ps Y-| Position- circle. True Greenwich vation. 10 18 18 10 30 38 10 37 30 10 46 18 10 49 48 corrected for Index- Near to y Androme- dz, from a little above y Persei to y Andromedz. 45 86 |Under clouds 51 36 |Train 268 9 237 21 ing a and dromedzx to 2. From e Pegasi Observer. Mrs. Adams. From 6 Urse Mino-|T. Adams. ris to y. Just above a Ophi- uchi and a Her- culis towards Co- ona. rona. Seen through clouds |Kad 17 6 |Short train 21 6 From 6 Aquilz From a Cephei Chall Recorded by Prof.|Prof. Challis. 10 16 13 10 21 53 10 24 8 10 25 43 10 33 31 10 33 51 10 53 54 10 35 55 10 38 35 10 41 7 10 42 9 10 43 1 10 43 54 Halfway betweenArc- turus and Cor. Car. 30 52 164 31 Train; a little above a, and a little be- low 6 Ursee Maj. Towards Urse Ma- joris, from between B and e. From a to e Cygni... In Ursa Maj.; small Ditto ; ditto Ditto; ditto From a Ophiuchi ... Mrs. Adams. Prof. Adams, Mrs. Adams. Prof. Adams. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 421 oe oe a ee ee es eee See ee See vi Angular True Zenith- : i Magni- i ay Greenwich ae distance No. tae A oc*"/Mean Time| SOTTEC corrected Notes. Observer. ace, or for Index- ind 4 >: |Position-| of Obser- ror, _ |for Index- vation. error. circle. hm s omy Oo 4 18. B 4n 10 45 87 | 350 55 C4522. iy | peek H. G. 19. [ey | ee LO 48yS5 1 AAS) Me eh From ¢ Cygni to/Mrs. Adams. slightly west of Delphinus ;_ good train. seal ee 5jb 10 52 35 24 49 Do tea ee See ress ee H. G. 21. y 165° + | 10 55 53 57 37 SGMGH YD Bitte. Prof. Adams. ON eee zh 10,56: 12 We. c8 || eee ett a Aquile ...|H. G. 23. a 4h 11,45, 52") 353° 48 O46 ra Neha feos... ees: Id. 24, Y 5h 1S a le ae epscce Sheitly to left of a/Mrs, Adams. i Arietis. w) 625. B 72 | 11 11 14) 204.37 67 46 [Short train ............ Had. ADs | (ae 23h ll 14 25 | 244 55 34 16 |Fine train; remained|Had. visible some time in Cassiopeia. 27. MN olaa dee TPL 30) 5 (Eee ea eee RE or oat So Be Ead. J 5) «28. 6B [22 or 2245) 11 21 57 | 256 25 ADY22 \ rane’ .;. eae. Ead. ) 29. 7 eld mee Sl hal acacia crcoam lamers From a little below/Kad. ; Polaris, very little below « Draconis. DEON vowene. | sccece LS i sted Nite 28s «see. (From a little above|Ead. Polaris to Z Urs. Bil B 112° | 11 8117] 343 55 ye ae De Naa ene ad a Prof. Adams. TESS Y 5h 11 34 34 59 16 At eee eee H. G. oe 33. Y 5h Il 37 51 45 37 oT sa | (ete eee ET Te Mert | ...... ih 11 41 27 |} 350 49 AAS AG) S (PRMIES, ABAOS SUN H. G. | ASS MAD: AOrie een Ae || Lees Malik a, & foes. Mrs. Adams. | a WU SSS aa Sneed Gre, 2 | Me a Td. | 37. Y 25° | 11 45 54] 190 1 SO Siem» WOE Prof. Adams. E38. B 4h 11 47 20 17 43 60752 |Prain. 2-2, H. T Boe Wess... Qh 11 50 49} 117 13 60 16 [Very slow ............ ee Adams. | = 6h 11 54 23 68 49 GAs LONO|RW Wat ett. Mrs. Adams. Peel ||) ‘seeses 8h Lea ADb) puke tock, salliinhn reed Over n Urse ......... Ead. EEE) aceses) , |i 0Sud-a% UL 56) B40 |\enrck xedvaz tail ie ae, From 6 Ursz, line|Had. joining a and fs. oS, |e 5h 11 57 4] 182 31 GaEAG rE ieee zo. ecexy ad gh 11 59 10 Ole 30 22 |Short train ............ Ead. 5gh 12 13) od 169 43 DOTA IER ewe Ead. 1035 | 12 5 46] 210 25 26T4AGS GB eR oes TF Prof. Adams. 82h 12 6389] 147 25 G2 CL Ohay) Fak Wi SA. a Id. 255° | 12 749) 113 37 G4I46 A Drains oon, Mrs. Adams. 7h 12 916] 159 25 6928 wilRebyess. . ocesec cs Ead. gb 12 10 29} 122 31 GOMAGE NN eG ccc teascctehe Prof. Adams. bh ogo f| 12 16 84] 78 1 | 6246 |... eet Su 220°, | 12.92 “7 | 102 31 68 40 |A very fine train ...|Id. bh 93° } gov2a060"l Hopes IM @arBA Kloot, {sax ae Mrs, Adams. 5h 12 27 38 22 31 62A1Gi a, Queen se. eae H. G. 284° | 12 28 30] 202 31 27,10, ,| Drain yee =. ea. < cas Prof. Adams. avsees 7 ied 9 eles 62 40 ucavecaesuea eee Mrs. Adams. B Tun 12 38 32 153 31 AWAD clove dd. seskes eld. Had. Y qe 12 42 57| 168 37 BHF 22S ek, See ecneeene eee Prof, Adams. bok be Rese hl) 46 HD alin zit ere «se. |Wanished at a An-|Id. dromede; came a from a point mid- way between Cas- siopeia and a An- dromedz. 422 . REPORT—1868. TaBLE (continued). Angular : ACE True : Zenith- Magni- eh Greenwich Sey distance No. | tude, A pen Mean Time fo Ind corrected Notes. Observer. , r Index- a, B, y. Postion: of Obser- were. tor Index- Sevele. vation. ; error. h m 8s fe} i ° i GON Se.c0% 8b TZ SOM ssseszece | | ~*25cea08 Across a Lyre ...... Prof, Adams. ets teeces 3h LOMA os oosec ||| ieaseve Through Z Ursz...... Id. 62. Y “an Het 0 Gh) | ececrceceoe li lemctoce From below a Aquile|H. G. ma 4! 3... {apne } 13°45 | P1287 | |b408.)| ae pees Prof, Adams. 64. B 6B 153819 83 13 69'40 ||"Train «.fit...... ces H. G. (104 9 kee ee ees as USISMRO! MWocscenten | | Aystseeta | ol Mb feteessneatecuaes Prof. Adams. OGs | bs3s 8h NEUSE. | | ee Near Polaris ......... Id. 67 83h 13 1458 | 169 55 DHLG | |) Mey eesteeent sence Id 68. Y 246° | ISA) 177 55 3B.'DB! || ey tecs.wexekeoeees Id 69 Y 638 13 25 37 70 55 DONDE”) || Pheacdec eens 3 Td OS eats 83h VSR20N8Gi) Che Geo |e Beet | ihe Row satea neces Id 78 eee 83h SME ORSO) |) occcccess fll cicecese |i uke ssesessecsnnmes Td. 7A. || ease 64 EOL ADO GW cccsectg Piliccoess:. || Gib Kanseoeseutn- ome Td. 73. Siete) vec ee TSiSD°O4 | teestecen P| cess Very bright .....:... Mrs, Adams. Observations of Shooting-stars made at the Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford, on the nights of August 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th, 12th, and 13th. Communicated by the Radcliffe Observer. The times noted (when seconds are inserted) are within a few seconds of Greenwich mean solar time. August 8th.— G. M.T. hm s At 9 24 O A train seen in Cassiopeia, moving from north to south; but the body of the meteor was not seen. 9 41 O A meteor appeared close under Polaris; direction from east to west. 10 0 O One, of the 2nd mag., in Cassiopeix, moving towards the north. 1113 0 (2nd mag.) From Polaris, by 8 Ursee Minoris ; a train. 11 37 O From a Persei, downwards. 11 52 O From Polaris to north horizon. The sky was overcast after these observations. August 9th.—The sky was blackly overcast nearly all the night, with the exception of a small portion in the north, where some of the stars of Ursa Major were visible, the clear sky extending as far as Arcturus in the west. At 10 30 0 A meteor equal to a star of the Ist mag., of a red colour, moving from a little to the west of 7 Urs Majoris to Arcturus; a train. 11 3 0 (4th mag.) From 6 Urs Minoris to north horizon. 11 8 O (ist mag.) ,, a point somewhat near Capella (which could not be seen for clouds), towards the north horizon, of a yellowish colour. 1116 0 (2nd mag.) White; from 6 Urse Majoris, westward ; motion very rapid. At 11" 20", the sky became quite overcast. August 10th.—Mr. Lucas began to watch about 9 o’clock, and continued to observe till 13" 20", when clouds came up. In the first three-quarters of an hour no meteor was seen. , A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 423 G.M.T. b hm s _ At 94910 (4th mag.) From n Pegasi to \ Pegasi. i: 9 5215 (5thmag.) ,, a Andromede to south-east horizon. Seep Oly Yshe.vezts-es » 7 Pegasi to south-east horizon (seen by Mr. Main). 4 SS Baa sre » 7 Pegasi, downwards (seen by Mr. Main). 9 57 50 (5thmag.) ,, y Cassiopeiz, southwards, in the direction of the Milky Way. : 10 235 (4thmag.) ,, y Andromedz, upwards, towards the south; a train. cere (1st mag.) In Perseus (time not noted), seen by Mr. Main. BF ate ass cese.es (1st mag.) Near a Aquile (time not noted), seen by Mr. Main. | HOt Oc cseccevese From Z Urs Majoris, westward ; a train. Manele CO! ec ceee.cesasss Through Cassiopeia, north-east to south-west. 10 31 50 (5th mag.) From Sagitta, in direction north-west. 10 33 40 (5thmag.) ,, the cluster in Perseus (y), southwards. 10 37 O (6thmag.) ,, Cassiopeia, southwards. Meee O! scl ssccescst Two meteors, through Perseus, westwards; seen by Mr. Main. 10 39 50 (6th mag.) From y Persei to Cassiopeia. 10 41 O (6thmag.) ,, Capella, upwards. ; MOREA) cee set conse A meteor appeared for an instant below 6B Andromedz, and disappeared at the same place, having no apparent motion. WOES ESOL csascaseaca. From Cassiopeia towards the south-west (downwards) ; seen by Mr. Main. a Oe eseee » Polaris to 8 Urse Minoris. 10 53 O (2nd mag.) White; from 6 Draconis, westward; a train. HORoas O's .cocccsenes From Cassiopeia, through Ursa Major; train; Mr. Main. HOH Oo Aah! », | Cassiopeia to Capella; a train; Mr. Main. MOE VO) sescacavecce Two from Polaris, downwards. 10 56 O (2nd mag.) From Cassiopeia to Pegasus; a train. MO, OR » h Urs Majoris to 8 Urse Majoris. MPO icecesacncs North of Jupiter, southwards (Mr. Main). ATOM 8S. ccs wesc From Perseus, south-east (Mr. Main). 1s See ae » Perseus, south-east (Mr. Main). ! [Tp 7-950 a ae » Perseus to Andromeda (Mr. Main). 11 14 20 (1st mag.) ,, 6 Persei to Aries (Mr. Main). 11 16 50 (1st mag.) ,, Perseus to a Ursee Majoris; a train. METS MO? 22. te. » ditto ditto. 11 19 40 (2ndmag.) ,, a Urs Majoris, towards north-west horizon. BELO" 50 9 lives tec. » & Draconis, towards north-west horizon. TGA lets) | » y Andromedz, towards east horizon. OP Oe csccscecee » a Arietis, towards Jupiter (Mr. Main). 1 QUT Serene », PB Persei, northwards (Mr. Main). ey Os 205 eeeatcaes » a@ Persei to a Urse Majoris. 11 43 10 (2nd mag.) ,, ($8 Ursx Minoris to Canes Venatici. MIP 44 40 © eed es.. » @ Coronz to west horizon. 0! | cscesccvcss » a Ophiuchi to west horizon. 12 10 20 (2ndmag.) ,, Polaris to 6 Urse Majoris; a train. 12 16 50 (2ndmag.) ,, (6 Draconis to a Coronz; a train. 12 21 20 ............ Midway between 1 Urs Majoris and a Coron to west horizon. AD 20) (12. s..00ca0 From y Urs Minoris to a Coron, 12 27 20 (4thmag.) ,, 7 Draconis to a Coron. 12 28 20 (2ndmag.) ,, 7 Persei, downwards. WF 80) 20) 96. .Jecesneas » [8 Ursx Minoris, towards a Corone. 12 34 20 (4thmag.) ,, 1 Draconis, towards Corona. 20 SY North of Capella, in a line with a Persei, towards north-east horizon. WAVAG 2D. waeeii lies From y Andromedz to the Moon. 12 49 0 (4th mag.) Below the Pole, in a line with Cassiopeia, to a Urse Majoris. 12 57 O (5th mag.) From o Urse Majoris to 8 Ursx Majoris. ara O) tise. buicys!: .) » Capella, downwards. LS) BDA », [ Persei, downwards. RAO: Shscc.c cate » € Cassiopeiz to a Persei. About 11 o’clock some streamers (probably auroral) were seen by Mr. _ Main, at an altitude of about 35° above the north horizon. They were at 424. REPORT—1868. first mixed up with the Milky Way, but were seen to drift to the west of it in a few minutes, and then they gradually disappeared. Several flashes of lightning were seen between 11" and 12, a little above the north horizon. No clouds were seen in that part of the sky at the time. August 11th.—The sky was quite overcast till 9", when it suddenly cleared and became intensely bright. At 9° 4", a bright white meteor was seen to come from behind a cloud near the north horizon, very near Capella, which was at that time hidden by the cloud; it took a direction towards 6 Aurige. G.M.T. hm s At 919 O (2nd mag.) From 12 Canum Venaticorum to e Virginis. 9 25 0 (4th mag.) Under the Pole, westwards. 9 35 40 (1st mag.) From a Capricorni, eastward ; a train. 940 0 (8rdmag.) ,, between o and h Urs Majoris to « Urs Majoris. 941 5 (l1stmag.) ,, Polaris to 6 Bootis. 953 0 (2ndmag.) ., Polaris to } Urs Majoris. OBO Ohm sesetes sacs of », Ophbiuchus, westward. acts ghee tame eisee > es », Aquarius, southward. caseaeest tl ense sere sce 5, Polaris to Cassiopeia (Mr. Main). 1013 0 (5thmag.) ,, a Aquarii to a Capricorni. 1013 0 (lstmag.) ,, a Aquilx, in the direction of the Milky Way, towards the south-west. 10-13) ~ 0: settee kt. » y Urse Minoris to e Bootis (Mr. Main). 10 29 O (2ndmag.) ,, Sagitta, towards the south-west. 10 48 45 (2ndmag.) ,, y Cassiopeie to a Lyre; a long train. 10 53 55 (2ndmag.) ,, (3 Draconis to a Ophiuchi; a long train. 10 56 O (4thmag.) ,, a Cephei to a Lyre. 10 59 O (4thmag.) ,, a Andromede to y Pegasi. 11 1115 (2ndmag.) ,, £ Persei to a point a little below a Arietis. 11 138 25 (2nd mag.) ,, y Cassiopeis to a Cygni; a long train. 11 16 40 (2nd mag.) ,, Draconis to a Ophiuchi; a long train. by 25 (0: A... ..gtees » Polaris to a Draconis. 11 39 O (4thmag.) ,, $8 Andromedz to a point a little to the east of a An- dromede. 11538 5 (Istmag.) ,, alittle to the west of Polaris, past a Lyre to Aquila; a long train. 1112 8 (4thmag.) ,, 1 Draconis to Hercules. NOMS: © secccvetente ,, Aquila, towards the south-west. A thick haze came on after this; only the large stars remained visible. The observations throughout were made by Mr. Lucas, except in cases in which they are denoted as being made by Mr. Main. August 12th.—Thickly overcast till 10" 45", when the clouds cleared away, leaving a little haze for some time, through which only the larger stars were visible. As the haze disappeared, clouds gradually spread over the sky again. At about 115, a cloud, lying in a great circle, extended from the south-east horizon, passing a little to the south of Jupiter under Pegasi, and by n Urse Majoris to the north-west horizon. It slowly travelled northwards till it reached Capella, when it gradually faded away. While passing Andromeda, its width nearly filled the space between a and 6 Andromede. The follow- ing meteors were seen afterwards :— At 1117 0 (lst mag.) White; from 7 Lyre, in a south-west direction to the Milky Way; a train. 11 20 0 (2nd mag.) From Aquarius to a Capricorni; a train. 11 22 0 (3rdmag.) ,, 6 Aquilz, in a south-westerly direction. 11 388 0 (Istmag.) ,, Draconis to a Ophiuchi; a long train. 11 42 0 (8rdmag.) ,, a Aquil, in a south-easterly direction. 11 52 0 (4thmag.) ,, Polaris to a Draconis. A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 425 August 13th.—A strict watch was not kept to-night; but the following meteors were seen by Mr. Lucas :— (3rd mag.) A very little to the east of Jupiter, southward. (5th mag.) From a Persei, eastward. (5th mag.) ,, a point between ¢ and a Pegasi, southward. G. M.T. hm s At 10 49 0 (2nd mag.) From Polaris to » Ursee Majoris. 10 49 0 (8rd mag.) ,, Cassiopeia, southwards. - 1050 O (Ist mag.) ,, below a Pegasi to a Capricorni. 10 54 0 (2ndmag.) ,, Sagitta to a Aquile. 11 0 O (istmag.) ,, a Andromede, past a Pegasi; a train. 11 29 0 (8rdmag.) ,, A Bootis to y Bootis (Mr. Quirling). 11 35 0 (2ndmag.) ,, 8 Pegasi to a Aquarii; a train. 1l 37 O (4thmag.) ,, a Pegasi, in a south-easterly direction. 1143 O (5thmag.) ,, Jupiter, southwards. 1149 O (4thmag.) ,, e Bootis, towards south horizon (Mr. Quirling). 11 49 O (5thmag.) ,, y Pegasi, southward. 11 54 0 (2ndmag.) ,, a Andromede to y Pegasi (Mr. Quirling). 1159 O (4thmag.) ,, £8 Pegasi to Capella. 12 6 O (1st mag.) ,, below Jupiter to east horizon; motion slow; a train. 1211 O (5thmag.) ,, a Pegasi, southward; very rapid motion. 1318 O (8rdmag.) ,, a Pegasi to a point between a Andromede and y Pegas (Mr. Quirling). 13 20 0 (4thmag.) ,, £6 Arietis, northward, passing a Arietis; a train. 0 0 0 Rosert Mary, Radcliffe Observatory, Oxford, August 15th, 1868. Dear Guatsner,—Enclosed is a list of meteors seen this evening; there were some twenty others (very small), which are not included. The meteors were most abundant between 102 p.m. and 10° 15™ p.m., and there were several points of convergence ; one in sword-handle of Perseus, and another slightly north of, and above Cassiopeia, accounted for most of the meteors. The paths were very short, of all meteors seen near these points; those meteors in Ursa Major, Ursa Minor, and in south and south-west had yery long paths. All were blue or colourless, mostly intensely blue, and nearly all had streaks, were very rapid in their movements, and vanished instantaneously. During the last few days there have been several large meteors each evening between 9°15" p.m. and 10°15" p.m. From11"p.m., clouds and moonlight interfered much with the observations. The meteor at 9" 58™ 50° was very remarkable. Believe me, Yours very truly, E, J. Lowe. Highfield House, Aug. 10, 1868. P.S. Evening of 10th cloudy; 11th, from 6" 4.m., thunder-storms and the breaking up of the drought, 2 inches of rain having fallen to-day. From 11" p.m., stars for a time, but I saw no meteors.—E. J. L. Meteors seen at Highfield House, August 9th, 1868. hm s 9 32 10 G. M.T. Started 1° north of a Cygni, passing 1° south of Vega, and ending at x Lyrzx. Intense blue ; long streak left, which faded rapidly. Size of Vega; moved rapidly. 9 35 15 » From a Cygni, through ¢ Cygni, to 8 Delphini; very small ; colour- less; rapid. The direction almost at right angle to the last. 1868. 26 426 REPORT— 1868. hms 9 36 10 G.M.T. Started at Polaris, and moved to within 20’ of » Urse Majoris. Very rapid; Ist-mag. star; pale blue; exceedingly long streak. (Conyergent-point Cassiopeia.) 942 0 » From p Cassiopeix to y Andromedx ; equal 2nd-mag. star ; rapid ; blue. 9 46 50 . From é to near y Cassiopeiz ; between these two stars, but not ex- tending to either ; very small and rapid; blue. (Convergent-point sword-handle of Perseus.) 949 3 »» Second mag. star; long streak. From the star No. 43 Andromedz (24° above 6 Andromedz), and ended 3° below a Andromede. (Convyergent-point sword-handle of Perseus.) 9 52 4 » Crossing 6 Andromede to y Pegasi; equal 3rd-mag. star; rapid ; long pale blue streak. (Convergent-point sword-handle of Perseus.) 56 40 » From p Cassiopeix, across Andromeda, to south; small. 56 42 » From just below the last, and in same direction ; both equal 3rd- mag. star, with faint streaks. (Point of convergence of both 3° above sword-handle of Perseus.) 9 58 50 » Im sword-handle of Perseus, a meteor appeared and disappeared without moving, like a blue flash of distant lightning, not more than 40' in diameter. Lio le) 10 0 0 = Rapid; across a Pegasi, down towards south horizon. 10! “5°25 » From e Pegasi, across e Aquarii; equal 2nd-mag. star; long blue [=B.*10" 6™] streak ; very rapid. 10 6 30 ay Small; across Pisces, moving from north to south. 10 6 50 » From slightly north of a Cygni across 7 Pegasi; long streak. 10 8 30 » Passed just above 7 Pegasi towards south ; very rapid ; long streak. (Convergent-point above and north of Cassiopeia.) 10 10 40 », Across y Cygni, from direction of a point 5° above x Cassiopeiz. 10 12 40 » 9 below Delphinus. (Convergent-point 5° above y Cassiopeiz.) [=B.108 13™] 10 18 55 » dustabove 7 Pegasi, downwards towards south. (Same convergent- point.as the last). Large and long streak; blue. 1017 2 », Bqual twice a Ist-mag. star; intense blue; long streak; very rapid; [50s tony from z Pegasi, down towards south. (Convergent-point same as last.) (Some cloud for twenty minutes.) 10 45 40 » Moved from north of Prasepe towards north horizon; very short path. 10 46 O » From Cassiopeia, passed under Polaris, passing between 6 and ¢ [?=B. 105 4737] Ursx Majoris; above size of Ist-mag. star ; blue; very long streak. (Convergent-point above Cassiopeia.) 10 56 20 ss Equal Ist-mag. star; very blue streak; from 30° above north hori- zon, falling nearly perpendicularly down, slightly inclining west. (Convergent-point sword-handle of Perseus.) Ji Tro » From under Polaris, across Ursa Major, from direction of sword- handle of Perseus. : 11 3 45 » A very large globe meteor (six times the size of Jupiter) ; blue; from 10° below a Aquilx; fell down the Milky Way, leaving a long train of separate sparks, which lingered after the meteor had vanished. (H. L. P. Lowe.) (More clouds of phosphorescent cirri.) 11 56 40 » From a Cygni, perpendicularly down, to near west-south-west ho- rizon ; duration only 3". 12 0 2 » Equal 2nd-mag. star; colourless; crossing Draco, from the direc- [?=B. 122 2™] tion of Cassiopeia. 13 43 35 Equal Ist-mag. star; from Altair, towards south horizon, with a long blue train, * Meteors marked thus, B., are regarded as identical with meteors simultaneously observed at Birmingham (see Catalogue); and their real heights are recorded in the Table of Appendix I, A CATALOGUE OF OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 427 Notes on August Meteors, 1868, at Winchfield, Hants. Time. August 9th. m 8 10 35 0 11 21 30 August 10th. 10 9 O |= Jupiter 10 11 EpIter.5.|-.| 76) 76 66] 70] 5°38] 85 68 | 67| po] 73 es J i 53) 56) 48) 974 A? See a Me a a 57| 49 | 48] 70 58) 55] 43 | 64 60 | 5°5 | 4:0 | 64 64] 6:0 |] 4°95 | 68 8°5 7 Le) v4 8-1 10°6 68 72 Aug. | Sept.| Oct. | Noy. | Dec. 8-7 | 838 | 110 | 1173 | 7°8 ss | a4 jaa 9°5 | 85 | ars |ir2 | 7°7 vs) #5 xv fsa | 7 876" | 8'3" ey ler me Oy iors 10'4. | 86 | 11°3 | 10°0 | 8-4 85} 74 | 109 [IIS | 9°3 7°83 | Sea \x0"6) | 13590) sez 8-6 | 66 |12°8 | 12-0 | 98 | go 8°5 * This gauge is 60 ft. above the ground. A Taste ILa.—Scornann. Monthly percentage of Annual Rainfall. (Mean Values. Stations arranged in 5-in. groups according to their annual fall.) Name of District. = 324 23 od ws BS 2s oS es od wa 443 2 #3 oS oS 2S oS oS Number of stations. Declennia b * The returns from these stations seem very singular ! .| Apr. PrrRiop 69 59 a9) Monthly percentage of Annual Fall. May. ‘June. | J uly. 183)0-39, 185,0-59. 9°2 Aug. Sept. - | Dee. 440 REPORT— 1868. Tasie II 6.—IRenanp. Monthly percentage of Annual Rainfall. (Mean Values. Stations arranged in 5-in. groups according to their annual fall.) [Returns before 1840 too few for use in this manner. | Monthly percentage of Annual Fall. Limiting Amounts. Name of District. Number Jan. | Feb. | Mar.| Apr. | May.|June. | July.| Aug. | Sept.| Oct. | Nov. | Dec. ; of stations. | | | DecrenniaAL |PzERriop| 1840-49. 20-25 * eh) 777), Gray 5:28 G95) 8:21)! 7:8a)) 8:6) || e028) Saxe) raeRe eos nea 25-30 ae 2. | 9:2| 68 | 64 || 69 | 7°4)| 6:8) gx || 96) || 7°7) | rxtx, \ito:9; | S-8 30-35 “in I.}|//10°x) | 7278) 733) 6:2) |) G:2p | 8°2)]) grou) 8 x1) FeAb Lov Moi lore 35-40 | «. | 1 | 94] 74] 56 | 70} 59) 71) 94] 98] 7°7 | 124 | 9°7 | 86 DecennijAL |PErRionp| 185)0-59. 20-25 Bic 2.1 93] 5°5 | 62] 79 | 8x |10°3 | go] 84) 8:0] 96} 9:7) So Im } 25-30 ls Z|, 97831 '5°3/ || 16708), 8:81) S70! || OF8.)| 976) |-7°7 1 Nazon |g on eo amore 30-35 sas 2, |\\tur5 (80) |. G7 | Sr | Gro) || 7°77 || 8°52) | 7-2 “SESS Alias: 35-40 = 3: | 15:2) ||,.6:9 | 6:8]. 7°5 || 6°3°||.8°4 | 82. || 89) 7-48) (gt2 | 8:6 ligo:G * The number of stations in Ireland is so small, that their arrangement into districts has not been attempted. OY Bal Ohi England and Wales.—During the first two of these decennial periods (Table II.) the returns are not very numerous; so that the effect of this grouping is scarcely so manifest as in the period 1850-59. In the period 1830-39, only one return is available for the group “55 to 60 in.,” and none at all for higher amounts. Nevertheless a comparison of the values : from that station with those from the “20 to 25-in.” group shows de- ' cidedly the tendency to a winter maximum in the former, and a summer maximum in the latter. In looking down the tabulations for 1840-49 and 1850-59, the gradual drawing of the larger percentages from the middle to the right-hand columns as the annual fall in each district increases, is evident ata glance; and in the groups for the highest amounts, the maximum is ‘ found to have passed on to the January column, and at some places even the February value is much increased. It is.much to be regretted that the rain-gauges were so unevenly distributed over the country that it is almost useless to attempt the intercomparison of groups of similar value in the different districts. There appears, however, at first sight reason for believing that, in groups of the same actual annual rain- fall, the maximum monthly proportion occurs rather later in the year in the eastern districts than in the western. Another peculiarity shown by these Tables is this ; the period of minimum monthly fall also advances to a later period of the year the greater the annual rainfall, though to a less extent than the maximum. In places where the fall is small, the minimum is usually found in February or March, whilst in Font an ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 441 those where it is large the minimum is in May. The deficit of two or three days in February should be allowed for, and we shall then find the true mi- nimum is usually in March, especially as that month contains thirty-one days. One more feature is to be noticed ; for it is impossible in the limited space which is here available to do more than point out the principal peculiarities in so large a work. It is this:—at stations where the annual rainfall is large, the maximum monthly fall is a more decided maximum, and the mi- nimum a more decided minimum than at stations where the amount is small— in fact the greater the total yearly fall the greater the monthly range. The above statements will be rendered more clear by the following dia- gram (fig. 4), in which the curves for the 20 to 25-in. and 70 to 75-in. groups for the period 1850-59 are shown. This particular period is chosen because the larger number of returns give more satisfactorily the variations which, however, are clearly discernible in all the periods yet examined. Fig. 4. Exeranp anp Watts. (Western District.) JEMAMITTAS O E MAD (N.B. The 70 to 75-in. curve has been chosen in preference to the (ex- ceptional) 125 to 130-in., as it is obtained from more than one station, and may be better compared with other returns.) The first six months of the year are repeated after December, in order that the complete curve for all parts of the year may be seen more readily. Scotland.—In considering the registers from the Scotch stations (Table Ila.), we are obliged to speak with some reserve, as the number of reports received from that country for the period under discussion is very small. During 1830-39, the first three groups are represented only in the eastern, and the last three only in the western districts. In those cases alone where the number of reports is insufficient to furnish reliable mean values, is a summer maximum shown at all; the tendency is to an autumnal excess at stations with small annual falls. The winter maximum at wet stations is, however, very decided. In the following diagram (fig. 5) the “20 to 25-in.” curve for the eastern district, and the “70 to 75-in.” curve for the western (1850-59) are shown. Although the latter is obtained from but one station, it agrees so well with the other higher groups, that it may be presumed to represent very approximately the true average. 1868. 24 442 REPORT—1868. Fig. 5. Scortanp. (Eastern curve 20 to 25 in.; MAMWISTASONDIF™M 10)nn The variation in the minimum monthly value (if there is any variation at all) cannot be well determined from the Tables. Ireland.—The returns from Ireland are still fewer than those from Scot- land, and the range in the values of the mean annual falls is very limited. Still the prevalence of a slight summer maximum and February minimum at the station with little rain, but a winter maximum and May minimum at those with little rain is traceable—though with far less distinctness than the corresponding extremes in either the Scotch or English tabulations. The following diagram (fig. 6) gives the “‘ 20 to 25-in.” and “ 35 to 40-in.” curves for the period 1850-59. To recapitulate brietly, we find that in England and Wales the following rules are generally observed in the distribution of rain during the different months of the year :— * « First.—If we take an average of a considerable number of years of the rainfall at various stations, we find that not only do the mean annual amounts vary, but the monthly percentages of those amounts also vary considerably. * British Rainfall, 1867. ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 443 * Secondly.—That (with some exceptions) the time of year when the max- imum monthly amount occurs, changes with the variations in the mean annual rainfall ; stations where little falls haying their maximum in summer, but those where the fall is large having theirs in the winter-months. « Thirdly.—That, so far as the present investigation has proceeded, these laws hold good in all three districts into which we have supposed England and Wales to be divided. “ Fourthly.—That at stations where the rainfall is very large, the minimum monthly fall occurs about two months later in the year, and the maximum about six months later than at those of small amount; and that in the former case, these periods of extremes are more clearly defined than in the latter.” In Scotland a summer maximum is not generally found, but an autumn preponderance is noticed at the drier stations, and a very decided winter’ maximum at the wet stations. The month of minimum does not appear to vary much. In Ireland the returns are not sufficiently numerous to give very reliable results. It will be seen from the foregoing remarks, that not at all the stations are these rules observable ; were it so, a small number of returns would suffice to show them as well as a large. But the exceptions are few, and may be often arranged in groups—thus giving hope of discovering the causes of the changes we have been speaking of. This, however, is a part of the work which at present has scarcely been entered on, and it would be premature to attempt assigning any reasons for the phenomena we are noticing until they have been more thoroughly and minutely examined. That there are more causes than one seems certain. An attempt has been made to discover whether the same relative monthly values are found at the same station in all decennial periods; but very little has yet been done in this direction, though it is hoped it will be completed in the forthcoming year. It is likely that averages of a larger number of years than ten will give more satisfactory results than the present decennial ar- rangement ; but this, too, must be left for the future to prove. A correction will be necessary for the height of gauges above ground when the work of more minute examination commences, as that to some extent affects the monthly values. The whole investigation must be considered as still in its infancy, and some modification of the views here stated may be requisite as we advance. It seems, however, scarcely right to withhold what is so apparent, because we are not acquainted with every particular we wish for. Rather, should the publication of what is here offered, with a caution as to its being too freely depended on, either excite wholesome criticism, or in any way stimulate the work of collecting and properly examining rainfall records, much good will have been done to this branch of Meteorology. Meanwhile no pains must be spared in conducting, if possible, to a successful issue, the present investiga- tion into the monthly distribution of rain over these Islands. Some preliminary steps have been taken towards approximately determin- ing the correction applicable to such of the returns previously referred to as have been obtained from gauges at any height above the ground. It is known to many persons that the deficient amount of rain collected in gauges elevated above the ground varies with the time of year. Of course if the deficiency was constant, the monthly falls would bear the same relation to one another as if the gauge had been placed on the ground; but this is not the case ; the deficiency is not uniformly distributed throughout the year, 2H 2 444, REPORT—-1868. but is far greater in winter than in summer, and therefore the restlt of attempting to deduce the relative fall in different months from elevated gauges must fail, unless we can determine the correction required. This we have essayed to do by examining the results of the various gauges at different heights at the Royal Observatory Greenwich, as well as the experimental sets at Calne, Rotherham, &c. The results are embodied in the three follow- ing Tables. The construction and mode of using of these Tables is so obvious as to require no explanation beyond the headings of the columns and the examples given. It should, however, be mentioned that the values herein given are not assumed as perfectly correct, but rather as types of more de- tailed ones to be subsequently compiled. Greenwich, 1862-65. Totals and per cent. of Ground Fall. Ground gauge. 10 feet. 22 feet. 38 feet. 51 feet. 3 a) js 3 jes 26 |se es |sd = aq jag FS aa (n= fav lps = Wh = Diag be = bye |; Ste Shp n> Year. 5 5 S55 5 S65 5 S65 6 (955 | 8 |8m=| § |e hs} 8 [5&5] g@ |e bs < 4s | 4 0es | 4 eS [ogee January ............ 8°70 8:52 | 98 6-48 74 614] 71 4°98 57 February ......... 3°51 3°18 | 9g 2°70,\|) 097 2°25 | 63 "72 | 49 Mareh ............ 7°58 7°52 N99 6:23, 082 5°30).| 0x Agee 2577, Aygo ee caeseeseer ong 4°42 4°40 | 100 3°36 | 87 3°51 79 2°91 66 Misiva Ra sacuticce tenes 10°47 |10°35 | 99 9°37 | 9° 8°53] 81 718 | 69 CULT rade aderectcebice 9°17 9°03 | 98 7 fad Ay tac 7°61 83 6°66 | 73 SRIy posta eersces 5714 4°96 | 96 4°34.| 84 4°34 | 84 3°57 | 69 ATU PUB 2 zs53- aoe -E 10°08 9°83 | 98 8°93 | 88 8°43 | 84 636 | 68 September ......... 7 52 741 | 98 613 | 81 6716 | 82 5:36, | e770 October. «....s<:..02 12°86 |12°43} 97 |10°55 | 82 9°76 | 76 8°36 | 65 November ......... 7°56 a TON Os Saznl 7O 522 | 69 #309 57 December ......... 4°07 3°37 | 95 2°65 65 te iy 58 189 | 46 IMIGANSI ce -tjeansusly maeees | 97°0 80°3 75°1 62°3 Calne. ‘ Rotherham. - 1 foot.| 20 feet. | 1 foot.| 10 feet. 20 feet. 25 feet. Year. Amount Arioant| Pas cent Amount Amount/Per cent] m unt Per cent!Amount Per cent —— | January ......... 3°36 | 3°00 | 89 ‘tik be ae . He Pe ee February ...... Bigs 1270 | 87 1°88 | 1°63 87 1°56 | 83 1°45 78 (Marchis «3.22.5 3°27 | 2°79 | 85 go | 138 | 73 128 | 68 128 | 68 shy OY el IRAN ie 3°23 | 2°93] 91 270.|| 2:391| 89 | 2:32 | 86 | 220)| se Myosin scp es 1'79 | 1°74] 97 ZAg.| 220) Or 2°16 | 89 2°18 | 90 SUNG ii0v..i0c0s2]) 2°19 || 2a ge 2°02 | 1°88 | 93 1°87 | 93 1°84 | 91 July veves.cicect 4] a QO Sees Oor fanos: 2°27 | 2°13 | 94 2°09 | 92 2°06 | 91 August ......... 3°02 | 2°96 | 98 R225) A514 |. 98 3°09 | 96 3°21 | 99 September ...... 1°79, | 3°71 | ‘96 2034 92) | “OS 189 | 93 189 | 93 October™.-c--..8 2°86 | 2°72 | 95 2°08 | 190 | 91 1°86 | 89 1°83 | 88 November ...... 1227 /EX28O) il) ge: 274 367) ||\".90 64.| 86 63] 85 December ...... 1:67] 1°53} 92 | 1°53 | 1732 | 86 | 1:28 | Sq. | a25 ]) 8x | Mieamise ck. .225-, ay cc vee Bot | Pa e 35 S077 Wes 87'°2| ose 85°38 ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 445 Altitude Correction. Factors to be multiplied into the mean annual correction. Greenwich. Calne. |” Rotherham. Year. 10 ft. | 22 ft. | 38 ft. [61 ft. | 20 f. | 10 £t. | 20 ft. | 25 ft. MUEIY 8k Iga 7 g specifiedin| objects above Remarks on position, &c. 5 Ss Eg Il | Scale- Grainne previous mouth of rain- 2 5 A Sj | point. “| column. gauge. mF in. in. in. 4:99 ‘OI 50 correct. |E.N.H. House 42°.| On lawn, clear except as noted ; |243. 4°99 ‘I 500 —‘oo1 8.W. Trees 30°. no better position available. 5°02 2 995 correct. Gauge had been tested before 5°01 or) 1500 —*002 erection. M 5:003| ‘5 2485 —‘oor iE 498 oT 498 COMPECHA Hou. schenocevare sseee..| Clear good position; grounds level |244. * 5:00 “2 998 —‘ool and not very much wooded. 5°01 ‘3 1500 mice: 5'O1 “4 1990 = Ook M 5:000| °5 2480 correct. 7°98 ‘I 1258 +:oo1 S.W. Trees 31°. | On level lawn, but rather sheltered |245. 80x +2, 2550 —‘ool 8. Fir 35°. by trees, especially in H. $00 3 3800 +-oo1 N.E. House 18°. S00 | “4 5050 +:002 E. Trees 30°: fog) 6350 correct. ry eee 2 ae +-oro |N.N.E. Tree 60°. | Ona slope to 8.S.E., in a garden |246. ; 3°00 om, 350 +:004 N.E. Tree 45°. containing and surrounded by 3°00 oa 530 +:003 | W.S.W. Tree 42°.| a good many trees. 2°99 “4 700 +:008 | M 3000] °5 gio —‘oIo } 5°03 I 500 —‘oor /|W.S.W.House57°.| On the edgo of the South Terrace, |247. ‘ 499 “2, 1000 —‘oor |N.W. House 55°.| from which the fall isabout 7 ft.; i 5700 3 1500 —‘oo2 | N.E. House 45°. the gauge is therefore open to s00 | “4 2000 —'003 the full sweep of the southerly | M s1005| °5 2500 —'003 winds, and sheltered from all northerly ones. The house stands on an eminence, com- manding all the surrounding country. aoe |- “* 1380 bane 1 These two gauges stand close Ae moe | >? 255° — together on the lawn in front 8:02 | 3 3850 Setian: of the Vyne, but so distant 798 | 4 ee esc from it as to be quite unin- 7995 : z as penal [ fluenced by the house, or, in- BM 3°00 , : deed, by anything, as there 9: 3°01 ef 349 + Ses are neither trees nor buildings 3°01 3 53° iis near. Surrounding country 3700 4 lox “hideg gently undulating. 3°005] °5 920 O54: J ; 502 ‘I 500 —‘oor W. Tree 46°. | Ingently undulating country near |250. 5*00 “2 1000 —"'0oI the banks of a stream; position 5700 3 1490 correct. fair, except as noted in previous 5:01 “4 1980 +:002 column. M s: . 2480 +:oo1 ce a has Carmects (7-..--vaccq70e CLOSE This and the subsequent eleven |251. 23°95 ‘I 11425 correct. gauges are in a portion of grass 24°08 15 | 17140 —‘oo1 land containing 400 square feet, 23°94 | “2 | 22850 —‘oo1 inclosed only by an iron two- 23°995 rail fence. ‘There is not even a 12" : 2850 correct. bush within 30 feet, and no tree |252. I 2 5780 —*002 within 100 feet. The ground is 4 8568 correct. quite level. The enclosure is 4 =| 11435 correct. marked N. on the plan given at a) 14280 | correct. page 454. 448 REPORT—1868. EXAMINATION OF Height of gauge. COUNTY. Station. OWNER. oO > 8, Maker’s name. Observer. S hove Above ground.| °° Reference number Date of examination. Construction Time of reading. level. | HAMPSHIRE. VII. | Casella ........ ee+-| Q a.m. 209 StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield. COL. WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. n n w HAMPSHIRE. X. | Casella StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield. COL. WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. ZoAwAUo Te. tors :oul HAMPSHIRE. ...........|..X...| Casellanens oii ga.m. 255.| Aug. 12. HAMPSHIRE. X. | Negretti & Zambraj 9 a.m. StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield.| with COL. WARD. flange. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. 256. Aug. 12. HAMPSHIRE. VII. | Casella StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield. COL. WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. teeeereeeses g a.m. 257. HAMPSHIRE. XII. | Casella ....,.......| 9 a.m. StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield. COL. WARD. ; The Rev. C. H. Griffith. 258.) Aug. 12. HAMPSHIRE. XII. | Casella StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield. COL. WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. Aug. 13. 259. HAMPSHIRE. XII. | Casella ...........|9 a.m. StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield.| with COL. WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. flange. HAMPSHIRE. XII. | Casella StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield. COL, WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. 260: Aug. 1g. 0 HH AMPSHIRH. -. /.| XX0T. | Casella’ 4....3...ae g a.m. HAMPSHIRE. XII. | Casella .........00 gam. Strathfield Turgis Rectory, Wir chfield. COL. WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. HAMPSHIRE. XII. | Casella StrathfieldTurgis Rectory, Winchfield. COL. WARD. The Rev. C. H. Griffith. Sten asco ete g a.m. 263.) Aug. 25. HAMPSHIRE. X. | Anonymous ...... 6p.m. Strathfieldsaye. DUKE OF WELLINGTON. Mr. Beil. ? ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 449 _ RAIN-GAUGES (continued). ¢ —| q We Rey Equivalents of | Error at | Azimuth and an- 3 aye. water. scale-point,| gular elevation of , $4 | 83254 |——__|specified in| _ objects above Remarks on position, &c. a {= Il | Scale- | Guins, | previous | mouth of rain- kes }A = | point ‘| column. gauge. m4 in. in. in. 10°00 aE 2525 correct. 253 fl 9°98 2 5050 correct. | 10°02 53) 7575 correct. 1 o°00 | “4 | 10100 | correct. | M 10000] -5 | 12650 —‘oor 8:00 is 1270 correct. 254. 2 2540 correct. £3 3810 correct. ‘4 5075 correct. 5 6350 correct. I 1270 CORERGHIEY | canta: scamgeee ase The same glass is used for both |255. *2, 2540 correct. No. 255 and No. 254. Pa 3810 correct. *4 5°75 correct. i 6350 correct, au 640 correct. 256. 2 1275 correct. 4 1915 correct. “4 2555 correct. 5 3190 correct. ‘I 715 correct. 257: 2 1430 correct. @) 2140 correct. *4 2360 correct. 5 3580 —‘ool ‘I 495 correct. 258. 2 99° correct. 23 1490 —‘oo1 4 1985 correct. :5 2480 correct. 1 495 GORLECH Ail Seeteeueorean sees The same glass is used for both |259. 2 990 correct. No. 259 and No. 258, 23 1490 — ‘ool "4. 1985 correct. 25 2480 correct. 1 320 —"oo1 260. £2 635 correct. 3 955 —‘oor 4 1270 correct. 55 1590 —‘0o1 ‘I 79 correct. 261. "2 160 correct. "3 238 +:oo1 "4 318 +002 5 400 +002 ‘I 20 —"ool 262. 2 39 +7003 3 58 +"007 ‘4 78 +'008 me 98 +:007 ‘ol 130 correct. | E.S.E. Wall 18°. | In the gardens at Strathfieldsaye |263. I re aes —a good position. 3810 correct. 5 6320 +:002 450 REPORT—1868. TABLES OF MONTHLY RAI ENGLAND AND WALES. Div.II.—-S.E Division I.—MipieEseEx. CountrIEs. Miwpi sex. Surrey. Brittany Dunsfold, P Hammer- Camden Upper A Height of : PP Hampstead. | House, Mill F Rain-gauge smith. Town. Clapton. P Hill! Hendon. Godalming. above ——_—— Ground ...... 1 ft. 0 in. O ft. 4 in. 2 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. O in. 1 ft. O in, 0 ft. 6 in. Sea-level...... 12 ft. 100 ft. 90 ft. 360 ft. 420 ft. 166 ft. 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January ...... 3°80] 249] 3°90] 2°81] 4°82) 2°55] 4°33] 3°12] 3°24 2°5] February ...| 3°66) 1°42] 3°72] 1°44] 4°08| 1°70} 3°44| 1°57] 3°67 1°38 March ...... 2°16| 2°37| 1°69] 2°48] 40} 1°76) 1°59] 187] 1°82 22 ANDYAL oo s0- one 1°73| 1°82] 1°76) 2°36] 2°30] 2°23] 1°87| 2°54] I°90 214 1h 7a naeeeeae Brow esau 208) |. orc keny| ar 8i| “2-135 2 Anew laay I"4 WMO! vecrene- 3°64.| 1°30] 3:798| 1:22) 3°53) x21) 4°76'| “1°44 |' 3:28 1°54 PIDULY;, ovnossess °86| 3°63) I9] 4°30] 2°26] 3°93] 1°83] 420] 3°24 4°34 August ...... 2°82] 2°42| 2°76] 2°63] 2°84) 2°25] 2°64) 2°80] 2°52 2°35 September...) 3°70] 2°33] 3°89] 2°23] 3°09] 210] 4°56] 246] 4:23 1°88 October ...... 2A) 5277 || 2°32 || x:92] 2°53] 20x |, 2°19) 2-480 Egg 2°51 November ...| 1°43 80] 1°73 °86| 1°80 26) 1°85 *92| 2°18 “56 December ...| 1°77] 1:40] 2°63] 1°59] 2°50] 2°39] 2°71] 1°84] 2°60 14 Totals ...... 30°62 | 23°99 | 31°60] 26:29] 32°32 | 24°57| 33°90] 28°08] 31°97 24°8, Division II.—Sovrn-Eastern Covntizs (continued), Kent (continued). Wasr Sussex. River Hill, Acol, Sidcup. Aldwick, Brighton ie Tunbridge. | Sevenoaks. Margate. Foots Cray. Bognor. |Water Work above aes eS eee Ground ...... 1 ft. 0 in. 9 ft. O in. 1 ft. Oin. 0 ft. 7 in. 0 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. O in. Sea-level...... 125 ft. 520 ft. GOAT | \etampanre.- 8 ft. 90 ft. 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 18674 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January ...... 4°57| 3°13| 2°99] 2°04] 3°23] 1°76|| 424] 2°78] 4:30 February ... 433} 148] 3°5r] rr] 3°92] r14]] 4:04) 152) 4°49 March ...... 1°56| 2°88) 2°35] 2:26) 1°50) 2°62} 1°54) 2°94) 2°07 PANDA sc seies6 se 2'44| 3116] 192] 3129] 2°57] 2°22|| Toq] 417) 1°77 IWC Wepeascne 165| 1°57] 113] 436] 3°69] 1°89 *70| 169] °70 June ......... 2°46| 182] 2°44] 2°84] 3°54] 1°30|| 195|. 1°48] 2°32 SUV cvosece ss 2°14] 3°29] 3°42] 240] 1°74) 5°18]) 61) 248) 2°57 August ...... 2°46| 2°36] 317] 129]. 2°13] 2°34|| 1°56] 2°32] 2°23 September 7°38| 1°92] 3°52] 129] 4°56] 1°45|| 4°55] 140] Grog October ...... 162] 3°24 42| 1°43] 1°47] 189i] 139] 2°65] 241 November ... 2°33 S52) eel) rey eens *79|| x40] 1°26] 2°24 December ... 2°02| 3°08] 149] 1°67) 41754) 41°65)/ 181 82) “2:79 Totals ...... 34°96 | 2645] 28°46| 23:20] 31°04] 24°23 || 25°83 | 22°51] 33°68} 29° ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. Zz 7ALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 451 Be ENGLAND AND WALES. > Division I1.—Sovrn-Eastern Countries (continued). s Surrey (continued). Kent. Weybridge Bagshot Kew 8. Fields, acae Horton Park,| Linton Park, Heath. Park. Observatory. | Wandsworth. ; Hythe. Staplehurst. ft. 6 in. 1 ft. 1 in. 1 ft. 3in. 1 ft. O in. 2 ft 2 in. 1 ft. 4 in. 0 ft. 6 in. | 150 ft. 230 ft. 15 a | I re 16 ft. 350 ft. 200 ft. 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. 1867. in in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 341) 3°27) 2°39) 3°43) 2:21) 3°63] 3°30|/ 4°88] 3°75] 430] 3:4] 3°83] 3°05 E45} 4099) U59} 3°39) 125] 440] 1°53]) 3°95) 166) 4:71] I50| 4°55] 1°53 2°42} 1°84) 2°69/ 123] 41°98] 1°57] 1°96]] 3°00] 2°95| 2°73] 3:22] 2:27 3°42 210) 1°75| 2°40) 1:72| 169) 90] 2°35]/ 2°00] x51] 129] 1°67] 2:09] 1°67 P17} 2°93) 145] 1°32) 322) 2°48] x60/| x12} 2°57|/ 3114] 3°49 81) 2°35 59) 199} 144) 4°02] 1°36) 3°50} 2°05]| 2°66] 117] 2745] 1°30] 3:40 85 443) 188) 3°26] 3:20) 3°61] 125| 4°85|| 2°55| 3°62] 2°84) 447] 2°73 4°53 3°23] 2°62] 2°03] 2°31] 2°06] 2°75] 280]] 4:24 92| 4°46) 12] 2°15] 3°55 2103) 423) 230) 3°59) 2°26) 3°55| 2°30]/ G13] 422] 541) 1°34] 4:25] 1°43 2°08) 1°38] 196] 1°63] 1°62] 2:15] 1°93 84] 2°67) 114) 2°73] 1°38] 2°65 68} 1°31 "25, 127 *78| 1°47 ‘60 |} 2°88) 2:23|/ 2°94] 1°99] 1°89] 1:26 137| 2°06] 1°77] 170] 129] 1°95| 1°44]] 2°70| 2°64 2°33| 2°5r| 147) 2°42 7°98 25°96 | 29°35| 23°53] 26°81 | 21°33| 30°30] 26°71|| 36°95 26°91] 35°74| 28°38] 30°82] 26-71 Division I1.—Sourn-Eastexn Counties (continued). Wesr Sussex (continued). Chichester | Bleak House,| Dale Park, Battle Chilgrove, Bt. Erbe it Museum. Hastings. Arundel. : Chichester. H Se, orsham. 0 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. 3in. 4 ft. O in. 1 ft. 3 in O ft. 6 in. 1 ft. 6 in. 20 ft. 80 ft. AIS Tien | Ree eaar cee 284 ft. 300 ft. 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 615) 3°32) 500] 3°68| 828] 2°61) 5°33] 442] 4°78] 3°65] 4°94] 3°54 478| 177} 3°71] 1°86] 5°44] 2°77] 5:02] 2:20] 4:49] 2°66] ‘4°00 I'51 183] 3°08] 2°39] 3°08] 120] 3°54| 2:23] 3°81] 1°79] 2°05| 2°02] 2-40 VIO; 155] 220) 2°51] 71} 3°93] 2°21! 2°35] 4°58] 2°06] 1°45]. 2°28 96] 168} r04| 3:14] 108} 2°14] rog] 3°66] 1°43] 4140] ror 1°50 Igo] 195] 1°78 71] 2°95} 2°28) 31°77] 3°55] 2°94] 1°85] 2°76] 2:38 177| 4°03} 186) 3°77| 212) §5°67| 2°05] 4:06] 199} 4°76| 1°36] 4°96 2°31) 3°21] 2°33] 96) 2°77) 3°20] 3°25] 3°75] 3°24] 3°41] 361] 2°73 6°18] 1°92} 6:20 "60! 8:15) 2:01) 6°62} 1°89] 8:08) 2°24] 8:26] 2-25 143] 3°17] 147) 2°74| 1°52] 3°54] 1°72] 3°56/ r50/ 2°82} 160] 47x 187} 141] 2°18 85] 2°70} Igo} 2°90] 2:00] 2°10] 3703} 1°70 "94. Igo "96| 187) 2°18) 3°20] 2°06| 280] 2:00] 2°74] 31°55] 2°38] 1°07 23°79 | 32°18| 28°05 | 32°03 | 26°08| 4r*12| 33°65) 36°99| 33°25] 36°66 29°48 | 33°09] 25°67 452 REPORT—1868. ENGLAND AND WALES. Division II.—Sourn-Easrern Countries (continued). | West Sussex (continued). || Hast Sussex. HAnpsuire. + Petworth E St. Lawrence, Ryde, Osborne, aes Rectory. Uckfield. || 7.16 of Wight. | Isle of Wight. |Isle of Wight.) Fareham. above Ground ...... 2 ft. O in. 6 ft. O in. 1 ft. Oin. 7 ft. 0in O ft. 6 in 0 ft. 2 in Sea-level...... 170 ft. 200 ft. 200 ft. 15 ft 172 ft. 20 ft. 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 186 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January ...... 555] 4xr|| 622] 3°15]) 3°78| 3°49 5°96] 4:45| 448| 3:72] S41] 28 February 5754| 2°39|] 435] 470]] 317) 18x 5°63| 2'29| 4°88| 2°26] 522) 36 March ...... 2°44| 3:20]| 1°95] 3°02|| 2°50] 3°94] 2°45] 3°63) 2°20 2°78| 3°08] 3°4 PADIS fF e090 181| 2°6r]}| 125] 2°24|/ 2°37] 1°34) 1°59] 2°22) 1°52 1°82] 1°46) 2% Risy: s.5..+3.- 1:06 | 2°05 77o| 2°07|| ‘81| 2°30 °86| 1°73| 1°20] 3°93] 3°29) ag MMUC 24.0600. 2°84| 2°07|| 2°77) 41°87|| 151 ‘97| 2°08| 145] 1°64] w62| 2°68] 2° LLY? <.aenine- 194| 5°27|| 2°83] 5:25|| °83] 2°44) 159 3°48] 5x] 3°71|) 2103)) Sim August ...... 2°34] 2°40]| 2°07 1°96|| 2°23] 2°75) 2°31 2°36| 2°60] 2°52) 2°75) 35) September... 6°91] 2°05|| 612/ 2°33 649| 1°60] 7°62] 2°:21| 8:66) 2°16) 7°70 20 October ...... 94| 3°59|| 1°61] 3°41 1°35| 3°77| 166] 3:42] 160} 3°56) 241 13) November...) 1°75] 127|| 189] 1°41 1°54] 1°85] 1°97] 1°56] 1°90 “80| 2°77| “Tae December ...| 2°45] 410}|} 2°03| 2°07|| 2°02 *98| 2°60 *76| 1°98 80| 2°65] 1G Totals ...... 35°57| 3211 | 33°79 30°48 || 28°60| 27°24| 36°32] 29°56) 34°17 27°68 | 39°45 | 30°9 Division I1I.—Sovrm Mrprayp Countrzs (continued). HErtForDSHIRE (continued). Oxrorp. NortTHAMprTon. BrpForD | i Radcliffe Alth Welling- B gaan of Hitchin. Observatory, | Banbury. i ae b ibe ong Cardingto ain-gauge Oxford. above —_—_—_—_—__—£ Ground ...... 2 ft. 0 in Oft.8in. | 7 ft. Oin. 3 ft. 4 in. 0 ft. 8 in 0 ft. Oin Sea-level...... 240 ft. 210 ft. 345 ft. S10 te Pa 100 ft. 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867. 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 186 hey ae tae (Ga tae | ae || ae |! see ||| Se) (ae January ...... 3°63| 3ror|| 2°87] 2°58] 2°57] 3°03]/ 2°34) 2°49 2°40] 2°23]| 2°50] 2 February ...| 3°28| 145|| 2°88| 1°53) 2°30) 2°31|| 2°59) 125 2°94) ‘2°55 || 2555) oe March occa: 128| 2°46|| 1°66] 2°88) 1°33] 3°17|| 114] 2°09] P't7 2°74.|| 1°20] 24 PAPEL dora 1°65| 2°06|| 2°04] 2°60) 1°52) 2°31 108| 2°56| 1:06) 1°87]; 160) 2 TRYi5 sos ce; 2- 104] 3°03|| 166] 2°50| 217] 3°02 r6r| 2°91) 3°51] 3°01 || 31°34) 2 June ......... 2°61 "85 || 3:20] 1°93] 2746| 1°80 1°66| 1°85] 2°06] 1'24]/ 2°25) 1 Tulys «os0 2-6r| 4:24|| 2°03| 3°92] 2°08| 2°17]| 3:01] 2°50) 2°60 2°89 || 2°75] 3 August ...... 3'16| 186|| 2°95| 2°39] 3°52] 2°75|| 570° 2°68| 3°74| 2°41] 3°37) 2 September 2°63| 1°86|| 5°66] 162} 5°63} 179)| 449 1°36| 3°72| 187/| 3°50) 1 October ...... r54| 1°78|| 2:10] 281] 2°06] 2°94|| 193) 2°21) 174 225 ii) © '99'|| “ Moyanhen..| 2°68| :6x|| 3754) .°95| 2-72| | .°57| Daa be 40] ose 1-62 December ...|_ 1°89| 1°56|| 2°03| 1°43] 188] 1°56|| 180) 2°00 1'67| 2°00}| 2°30 Totals....... 27°00] 24°77 || 30°62 | 27°14] 29°23 | 26-42 || 28°59 24°38 | 26°44] 24°13 || 26°88 ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. ENGLAND AND WALES. 453 Dyrvision ITI.—Sourn Miptanp Counttrs. Hampsuire (continued). Berksuire. HERTFORDSHIRE. Liss, Long Berkhemp- Belborne. Petersfield. | Aldershot. Wittenham. stead. Royston. 4 ft. Oin. 0 ft. Sin 6 ft. O in. 1 ft. 0 in. 1 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. 6 in. 05) 25 a Ol earings 33l ft. 170 ft. 370 ft. 266 ft. 86 1866. | 1867.| 1866. | 1867.| 1866. | 1867. || 1866.| 1867.] 1866. 1867. | 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. |] in. in. in. in. in. in. 556| 480] 6:23] 4-11 6°63} 2°81] 4°98 2°92|| 3°83] 3°42] 4°32] 3°73 2°89] 2°78 #32) 218) 5°47) 2°54) 6°37) 2°07| 3°87/ x78 || 3°32] 3°57] 3°71] 1°82 2°78) 112 2°46) 2°69/ 2°72) 3:10] 2°30 3°12) 1°72/ 2°98/! 1°76] 2:47] 99] 2°71 1°34| 2°00 224) 2°23| 3128) 321] 2:70 1°36) arr] 2°13]/ 1°76] 2:41] 180 2°85| 164] 2°13 : "74| 156) 1°66] 147] 345 E'Z0)|| 23°77 ‘77| 2°20] 1°76] 2°88) 1°62] 3:60 132/ 2°84) 398) 2°53] 1°98 2°91) 1°34|) 3°774 W'58) 4:32) mgr) ar7 81 478) 1°38) 4°82) 2-98| 525! 2-22] 3-94|| 269| 4:97] 185] 4°66| a47 3°39 179| 2°66) 243] 3:05] 3:02] 2:52] 495|| 2°77| 2°63] 3°46| 2°02 2°77| 1°79 319) 6°52) 2°65] 742} 3:19] 4:81 196| 5°69| 1°62] 512] 1°89] 3:20 2°73 301} 166/ 3°68] 174 4°20} 1°46] 2°38|| 194] 2°94] 1°31 2°17/ 1°44] 2°38 80] 2°08] 1°06 2°39] 1°34] 1°66 "35 || or 5a “30 [| 025315 “75| 1°82 ‘47 143| 3°08! 149] 4:25] 1:28] 2:08 1°73 1°85] 2°34) 2°81] 1°94 2°34| 1°66 paz | 28:96 37°48 | 32°73| 43°83| 31°07 31°64 | 24°57 || 31°69) 28°46] 34°80] 28°73| 26-48] 24°86 Division 11T.—Soum “Mivranp Counts Division TV.—Eastrrn Covnttes. (continued). Camprince. Essex. Mid-level , : Ashdon Sluice, Epping ha goats 3 Dunmow. = Sosa Rectory, Outwell. ‘ , i Linton. 6 ft. Oin 1 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. 3in. 3 ft. Oin. 1 ft. Oin. 300 ft. 220 ft. 234 ft. 300 ft. 300 ft. 1867.} 1866. | 1867.| 1866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866. 1867.| 1866.| 1867. 3 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 3°90} 2°40} 2°75) 2°30) 2°20) 2°77] 2°80] 2°62] 2:73] 2-40 375 | 2245 | e261 88 | 3°43] 1°32] 3°68} 1:64] 2-72 1°23 | 178) 2°50| 339] 2°17] 342] 2°07| 345 2°23] 1°43] 491 2°05) 225) 1°77) 144) 85) m71| 2:31] 2°35] 3:88) 2:06 130| 3°60] 102] 2:61] 1°62 2°79| 120] 3°55 74] 3730 | 3°75| 345) 2°80) "94) 2°93] 128] 198] Bo] 3°53] -14| 125) 4°35) 162} 2°52| 2:05] 2:91] 2°94 2°93| 212] 2°21 2°55| 2°50) 2°44] 1°56] 3°23] 2°34] 3:06 185] 3°24] 2°65 425) 2°25) 3°04) rx6) 3°55) 31°85] 3°56] 194] 3°05] 2°46 2°10| 1°95 60] I'50] 103] 2°43 *40| 2°28 "94| 2°68 125 975 || Gt370 15 | P2937 *62| 2°48 *59| Ig “61 195} 1°65] 194] 2°07] 2:29] 1°85 2°47] 227) 2°43] 227. imMmiiLitaa oc ES eee eee | 21°46 29°88 | 2710 | 23°68 | 19°30 | 27°97| 23°94) 28°33| 25:05 | 26:72] 24°22 454. REPORT—1868. ENGLAND AND WALES. Division [V.—Easrern Countries (continued). SUFFOLK. Norrouk. . . Geldeston, Egmere, ae e Grundisburgh.| Culford. Hegel Cossey Fakenham, | Holkham. above Ground ...... 4 ft. 1 in 1 ft. 6 in 1 ft. 4 in. 1 ft. 0 in 4 ft. 0 in. 0 ft. Oin. BREETOVEN So veme|) ..ccainach- | ensdenupane rs SE aay | Bare 150 ft. 39 ft. 1866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867.|| 1866.| 1867.) 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.} 1866.| 186 in. in. in, in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January ...... 2°61) 2°56) 2°48] 2°73|| 2°07) 2°75] 2°65] 3°90] 2:10] 4:00] 2°40 . February 413] 1°50] 3°59] 1°82]! 3°96] 4716] 4°15] 1°23] 4:02 *71| 2°98 March ...... 0748 |/ 9u°99)|) Gx30 |, 174.7 || BryT)|) <3*g8'| 2173)! ax°52|b apr |) een eee J\ Tier ee Shee 1°79| 2°05] 1°85] 3°17|| 1°38] 2°08] 1754] 2:27] 1°89] 2°58] 1°00 May ..ci2-5.: 2°40] 3°73] 1°66{ 2°65) 1°52] 32x] 1°84] 2°87] 146] 419] 1°47 Pune isace. 2°30 69} 3°42 "73, || 2°73 "45 | 2°90 *94.| 2°62 *83| 2°05 Gply i2es.5.- 2°45) 2°91] 2°25] 4°49|| 2°96] 3°26] 2°03] 3°03] 1°38] 4:99] 2°18 August ...... 2°35| 108] 3°39] 1°49 a°36] .1°03| «1°22)| =1°83)| sg°59 | 9546)! @or7 September 3°90] 1°30] 3:01] 2°63]/ 3:09] 41°72] 2°44] 2°68] 3°62! 2°27| 2:90 October ...... 45| 2°57 *54| 2°48 "567 | (2°57 | oEor | 22°50 *90)|| 2.32 *g0 November ...) 2°44 *79| 2°66 "95 || 3°06 "83 | 23°34) >m7e6,| S375)| aar7)| ageap December ...| 2°70| 2°01] 2°58} 2°66|| 2:45| 1798) 2°62] 2°99] 2°78| 3°87| 2°00 Totals ...... 29°00 | 23°18) 28°73] 27°27 || 26°86) 22°42] 26°87] 26°81] 29°71] 29°70] 2540] 25°6 Division V.—Sovrn- Western Counties (continued). Devon (continued). j . High Wick, Broad- Height of I sere 2 Newton Rare id Dawlish. hembury, ee eee? cara Bushel. de Honiton. bee above aS Ground ...... O ft. 4 in. 1 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. 6 in. O ft. 8 in. 1 ft. 6in. 0 ft. 10 in. Sea-level...... 240 ft. 250 ft. 200 ft. 62 ft. 400 ft. 450 ft. ; 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866.| 1867. | 1866.) 1867.} 1866. 67 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January ...... 8°48) 7°53] 677) 5°98] 507) 7°73] 711] 5°54] 4°92] 4°62] 7°63] 572i February 618) 5°32] 5°94) 329] 3°71] 3°14) 3°43] 2°84| goo! 2°94] 4°79| 4°0 March ...... 4°23| 7°74] 457] 7°71] 4°55| 10°22] 4°02] 6°69] 3-41] 4°96| 4-42 56) april 222.2... 2°90| 3°35] 2°46] 3°33] 2°96) 2:16] 2°33] 2°52] 2:44] 2:70] 2:22] 4 ‘ Wiay «sets. 3°58] 568) 260] S51] 2:91} 540] 3°05] 6318] 1°77] 2°92] 2°77| 37m JUNE ...0:-.-- 2°58| 50] 1°24 “49 76 “33 "99 *63|) x21] 1°72) 223) om MINLY: eee ee 1-22 158] 1'06/| 214] 1-91 ao) 3°50} 146) 3°86) 149) 3°79]) 1°35) 3:20] 81] 451] x25] 3°78|| x-50 5°49 p40} 2°00) 2°85| 2:26] 2°52] 3:07|| 2-05 2°05) 3°34] 2°17] 2°48] 2:24]! 5:25] 1:30 Bo] 245] 7°31] 2:14] 6:65 1°92 || 8:90] 1°72] 9°34] 2°93] 7°39| 1°81 10°87| 3°80 51 3°46] 1°70] 3:10] 2°07] 2°83] 2:60 3°46} 2:09] 2:94] 2°20] 2:80 2°55| 5°40 5 70] 225) 1°35) 2°31] 15 || ars 94; 2°50] 1°72] 1°99] 1°54]] 3°03] 2°86 65] 116] 3:00] 150! 2°87 165 || 3:10] 103] 2°97| 1°59] 2°68 Igt || 5:09] 2°55 6 29°87 | 35°85 | 29°66) 33°90] 30°28|/ 34°39| 28:05] 40°37] 35°16] 34:77] 30°45 52°95| 46°80 Division V.—Sovrn-Wesrern Countries (continued). Devon (continued). Cornwauu. I Biel T Bee eatin: Barnstaple. Helston. Penzance. pone Pee, Truro. 1 ft. lin. 0 tt. 6 in. 5 ft. Oin. 2 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. Oin. 40 ft. Oin. 321 ft. 31 ft. 115 ft. 94 ft. 100 ft. 56 ft. 1866. | 1867.| 1866. | 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. 1866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 5°58| 7°63] 5°44| 5°89|| 6:30] 512] 7°05} 5:57] 610] 7:80 6-92| 6-74 4°94) 4°03) 4°56] 3°57]/ 4:02] 3-70] 5°65] 3°52] 4:00 3°32} 541) 3°37 3°13) 319) 3°23; 3°22) 4:15] 5:70] 3°76] 514] 4:40] 6:20 4°63| 5°44 m37| 415) 3°46) 3°49)] 3°91) 3°24| 4°22/ 3°12! 400] 3°80] 3-94! 3-46 130] 3°39] F'05/ 2°63)| 164) 3°68] 2:10] 2°84] 2:74 3°50} 2°45] 3°53 2°06} 318} 2°48] 1:02]! 2:20] T:08 2°45 35) 3°45]} Yoo] 327] 1:13 1°83] 4°53| 260] 3°73 97) 3°78} 96} gro} 1°53] 3°50] +85] 3-81 me) | 99) area) \4eG7) 35) 4°80] aig! g:g0! 851 46g lee can 872] 2:22] 7:07] 2:19]] 7°67 92] 715) 128) 7-70] 1:95 788] 1°33 2°05] 7°53) 2%3| 7'12]/ 2°01! 4:92] 2°00] 5:16] 3-80 5°53| 2°63] 5°70 3°46} 1°37] gor] 108]! igo] rar! 3°36 1°37] 3°20! 1°50/ 3°06] 1°39 65] s:00] 2°64] 5°00] 3°16|| gor 3°44) 5°00} 3°52| 4°50} 2°90] 5:04] 2:90 6-25] 43°68 | 43°78) 43°02] 39°34) 42°95] 38:34] 48°50 37°06| 50°32) 41°85] 50°77] 39°79 456 REPORT—1868. ENGLAND AND WALES. Division V.—Sovru-Western Counriss (continued).' Cornwa.u (continued). | SomERSET. 7 Treharrock _ || Fulland’s | Long Sutton, Height of Bodmin. House, Roscarrock. School, near Rain-gauge Wadebridge. || Taunton. Langport. above Janne RE Ground ...... 2 ft. 6 in. 3 ft. Gin, 3 ft. O in. 1 ft. 4 in. 0 ft. 7 in. Sea-level...... 25 ft. 300 ft. HOR! ||... |) Seales 1866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. || 1866.) 1867.| 1866. | 1867. 1866. | 1 in. in. in. in. in. in. in in. in. in 4 January ...... 9'27| 8:01| 5°36) 5°47) 634) 5°34]| 4 82| 4°85) 485) 415 a February ...| 4°75| 3°99] 4°46] 3°16) 4°43) 3°24|| 4°00 1°39| 3°62] 2°00 4 March ...... 440] 4°96] 3°91] 2°88] 3°56] 3°83]! 3°39 3°81| 2°54] 3°76 5 April ......00. 221) 4°53| 141] 3°33] 128] 3°28)| 91 1°83] 2°03] 1°51 44 May sinc... 2°44| 3°98| 2°00] 2°56] 161) 2°74]| 1°64 2°87| 196] 1°63 24 JUNE 2.2000... 2°49| 1763| 2°90] 1°38] 2°78) 1°38) 77| 139| 2°28) 102 24 BIOLY: cp-taese- 200} 511) 1°76] 5°12) 1°45) 470)! 1°79) 3°35 r18| 3°53 5 August ...... 6:49| 31°61] 688] 4759} 6:07] 1°36|| 1°68) 147] 239) 1°74 25 September...} 9°05} 1°62} 7°45| 191 7°63| 171\| 687| 1°66) 657) 1°71 I October ...... 3°10| 7°42| 2°28] 7707] 2°00) 6-44/| 1 89| 3°38] 2°01] 2°89 5 November ...| 3°75) 1°48] 3°29 *98| 3°36 "93 || 1°14 “Sr || (e752) weaese I December ...| 5°22| 3°66) 4°75] 2°67] 4°75 2°67 || 2°06) 1°49] 2°05) 1°35 3 Totals ...... 55°17 | 47°91 | 46°45 | 38°12] 45°26| 37°62 || 31°96| 28°80] 33°00] 26°60) 52°09 Division VI.—West Miprayp Countres (continucd). Worcester (continued). Warwick. Lark Hill, Orleton, || Height of |West Malvern. Worcester. Tenbury. Rugby. Birmingham.| Wigsto Rain gauge ahove Ground ......). 1 ft. 3in. 1 ft. Oin. 0 ft. 9 in. 2 ft. 4 in. 0 ft. 10 in. Sea-level...... 900 ft. 157 ft. 200 ft. 384 ft. 340 ft. 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.) 1866.) 1867. 1866. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January......,| 2°08] 3°14 2°08| 3°69] 3°00] 3°33|| 2°95] 3°09) 222) 3°77 February ...| 2°86] 2°23] 2°50] 1°74) 3:02) 2°13), 2°58| 1°42] 2°57] 1°60 March ...... 189| 4°13] 1°41] 3°65] 2°30 3°84|| 1:22] 2°57] 2°07] 5°66 April. ..2.4..| args, E89} eee a7 | gr Gy) geo 4 23) R97 | ae 2°43 May ......., go] 3°02| 2°57] 2°00 -94| 2°24/| 1°39] 2°39) 116 "95 UNE jose ek - 3°63 EGG (MGaLsi| pe4T | 95° 79)|, | #1420))|\ 52233) Gesu ess 180 PAULL S tates 1°34) 3:21] 359] 3°59] 2:16) 2°96|) 3°74 2°46| 2°10] 2°49 August ...... 3°82| 240] 3°70] Ig] 2°98] 2°19 4°08] 3°43] 407] 2°49 September...| 5°33} 2°68] 5:40] 2°86) 668] 1°79 6:20] 3°49] 6:20] 3°59 October ...... 2°99| 2°01] 2°64] 2°33] 2°66) 3:20]) 1°97 2°69} 2°57| 2°85 November ...} 1°47] 1°85] 1°25| 4128] 1°66] 1719 1°74 “49)| °273'5 ||| er | December ...) 1°72] 1°07| 1°74] 1°23] 1°74| 1°60 1°87| 1786] r90] 2°40 | Totals ...... 29°38 | 28°59| 29°45 | 27°43| 34°62| 29°27] 29°90) 29°51 | 32°20} 31°04 29°83 ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. ENGLAND AND WALES. 457 "—t.- UNTIES Division VI.—Wesr Mrptanp Covnttss. nued). ERSET : intied). GuLoucerstTEr. SHROPSHIRE. WoRCESTER. 2aston Clifto rer t Park House, Boe Hengoed, Northwick ryoir pees irencester. | Gloucester. afi Oswestry. Park. | Shifnall. Oin. 0 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. 2 in. 3ft.6in. || 4 ft. Gin 6 ft. O in. 1 ft. 6 in ft. 192 ft. 446 ft. 50 ft. 450 ft Agi tes ||" aiseaecnee 1867. 1867. | 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. || 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. || 1866.| 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. | in. in. in. in. in. in. 3°68 487| 413) 5°00} 2°75] 337)) 194) 3:21] 4°75] S‘oq|| 2°84] 2°24 1°99 271} 4°04] 2:00] 2:11] 1°68|/ 2°03] 1°63] 4°32] 2°90]| 2°95] 2°47 2°56 4°86} 1°40] 3°49] 2°07] 2°58|| 1°76] 2-91] 2°42] 3°15]| 211] 3°52 3°13 SAX || 2°15) § 3°33 °75| 5°56 or74.)| “oan | Fom)|) $gr8z s oemw | saa 1°82 2°52 S78, 2598 *ot| 2°12]/ 1°47] 1°93] 216! 3°56 *99| 1°81 1°87 2°07] 4°15] 188) 2754 -76|| 3:31] 4-21] 4:08| 1°46]| 3°47] 2°09 3°81 2°73| 2°10] 4:29] 1°48] 1°46]] 31:27] 2°89] 1:46] 2°59/| 27°55] 2°28 2°05 205| (4754)|| 2:57) 3°22 |' (1360'||| ‘450)]| $2-20)|| “4°40| “r'227||) 220) aay 2°03 L°34))| 7:10))) * 1:66.) ~6'26)|/ C x8x 5°40| 1:22] 8-or}| 2:00]/ 877) 1:94 3°62 3°64.| 2°95) 3°50) © 2°g\| © 2546)) © 2°37] 3°05 |) “x°98'| 4°69) -~2239'1/9 aay 1°08 2°20 || 2'02)| Tt05| 1-32,| T25)|| © J:49|| “1-08'| °3°3x | 2:46)|| *2-aie eed 1°52 1s 3:45 2:01) 1°68.) “rexx || * 65) 2-89) (2°72. ‘1789 |p" 2eg) | eae 29°16 33°97 | 37°97| 33°70| 27°12 | 21°76 | 29°93) 25'43| 40°53| 33°78 | 34'59| 25°98 Division VII.—Norrn Mipranp Counties (continued). xESTER (continued). Linco. mton. [Belvoir Castle.| Lincoln, {Market Rasen.'Gainsborough.| Brigg. Grimsby. 8in. 1 ft. O in. 3 ft. 6 in 3 ft. 6 in. 3 ft. 6 in. 3 ft. Gin. 15 ft. Oin. 20 it. 237 ft. 26 ft. 100 ft. 76 ft. 16 ft. 42 ft. 1867.| 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.) 1867.| 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. Ge) 1°50} 3°12 °83| 1:96] 1°36] 3°47) 105] 31°72] 148) 2°05) 1°88) 1°57 E42) 2°09] 1°73|| 160] 31744] 200) 1°73] 1°77 46} 189] 1°34] 2°20} I-10 PamiO || 1:64.| 2:90|| 1700} 1°37) 1°76) 2:08 *59| 1:69) 1:50] +2764.) 148 bay 270) AC} 2°41 *94| 3°26] 2°05] 2°07] 1°65] 2°00 790] 2°79) .1:mG! 2742 I-g2| 1:24| 2°90]| rar] 3:02] 15} 2°58) x18] 1°67) 124) 1°59] 1°31) 2°07 176] 3:12) 185|} 2°74) 164] 3°51] 1°76] 2°89] 166) 348) 41°31) 3:49) 1°33 188] 3:21] 2°70|| 2714] 1:99] 2°64] 2°87] 2°34] 217] 3°94] 237] 2756] 2:67 241) 4°73| 2°65|| 3°58] 2:12] 3°61] 2°63] 2:38] 2°87] 249) 385] 2:49) 1-49 341] 4°54] 1°93|| 3°54] r6r| 639] 136] 3°25] 1°46) 3°69] 1°94] 3°79) 2°07 2°39| 2'44| 2°20|| 2°06] 2:04] 3:09] 2°61] 240} 1°55] 2°36) 1°96 1°68| 1°90 “61| 2°00 ‘Ag \t 1:85) Vass | 23 19)| | 1746 007 83) 2°94 *78| 2°64] 1:06 249| 1°48] 2°20|/ 113] 1°86] 2-01 82 97) © 1°58 | 1:98) Ve2gh 1°54) \eeaao7 26°21 | 29°39| 27°06 || 22°62) 23°46| 32°76| 25°44} 22°24| 19°66| 27°89 22°85| 26°22) 21°58 1868. PAT 458 REPORT—1868. ENGLAND AND WALES. Division VII.—Norra Mipranp Covnrins (continued). Lincoun (continued). Norrincuam. Dersy. Height of |New Holland.|| Welbeck. Derby. Chesterfield. |Comb’s Moss. Chapebaenele Rain-gauge | rith. above | 1 ee Ground ...... 3 ft. 6 in. 3ft.10in. || 5 ft. Oin. 3 ft. 6 in. 3 ft. 6 in. 3 ft. 6 in. Sea-level...... 18 ft. 80 ft. 180 ft. 248 ft. 1669 fb. 963 ft. 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867. || 1866.| 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. : January ...... Ti30i|| sata r°03| 1°88 160] 2:91] 2°49] 2°77) 6:03) 3°68) 5°42 ee February ...| 1:90} “89|| 2°39) 125|/ 2:25) 195) 3°30] 2°53] 4°98] 3:97| 474) 463 March ........ 790’) | 0°69'|]\ $4793] 427401]! 9x:72'|) pa:a9)|) 41:22')) <2707)|\ 266" Rate eet Apr! 5.55.2. 766) 2:23]! 31:32] 3:04|| 305] 3°42| 1:29] 2°98] 1:86] 8:65] 1°39) 6:44 Lee Gee I'm7| 1°56 265) 99795 '||-oas75 1! 91573 72) 2:68 .2:t0 || y:9n 1°87 | 1°93 June ,......- 3°39) T17|| 3°40] 2°25]] 4:3r| 2°38] 3°79] 210] 6:27] 2°54] 5°19] 2°25 duly ..........| 2°22] 2°§3|/ 3:04] 3°39]] 2:41] 1°92] 2°94| 3:19] 6°43] 5:52] 4°07! 4°83 August ...... 2°50) 1°44]) 3°24] 93°31 |] 6°56] 4:21] 3°38] 3°79] 6:02] 3°08] 5:47] 2°52 September...| 3:90] 4171]] 3°83] 2:10] 4:79| 2:86) 4°51| 2°72| 7:92] 3796] 6°36) 2:92 October ...... 2°02} 1°50]| 2°84] 2°021) 2°95] 3°30] 2°93| 2756] 5:02] 5°39] 37°04] 4°75 November ...| 2°96] 1°29]| 2:07 *89 |} 3°06 *95| 2:78 80] 9122] 2°82) - 710] 1°34 December...) 1°51] 2°18]/ 1°56] agri] 2:22] 1°65] 2°02] 1°89] 5:05] 4°88] 4°79] 5°34)m Totals ...... 24°84.| 20°54 || 26°68] 26°39 || 34°47| 29°37] 31°37| 30°08 | 63°56| 48°95] 52°29] 43°51] Division VITI.—Norru-Wesrern Counties (continued). Div. IX.—Yorxsuire, LAncasuire (continued). Yorx.—West Ripina. Broomhall Heicht of | South Shore, Caton, Holker, Redmires, hed Blackpool. | Stonyhurst. | yoncaster. Cartmel. pee Sheffield, above a Fe a a Ground ...... 1 ft. 8 in. 1 ft. 3 in. Tft19 me 4 ft. 8 in, 2 ft. O in. 4ft.Oin. | Sea-level...... 29 ft. 381 ft. 120 ft. 15 ft. 337 ft. 1100 ft. 1866. | 1867.| 1866. | 1867.) 1866.| 1867.| 1866. | 1867.} 1866.| 1867.| 1866. | 1867.| in in in. in. in in in in. in. in. in. in. January ...... 4°I0| 3°00} 6°30] 445} 5:90! 4:40] 5°69| 5°21] 2°78! 3°00] 3°96 February ...) 3°25] 195] 5:24] 4°35| 421| 3°37| 4:26| 2°85] 3°36] 269] 4-67 March .......). 2°05| 4x08} 2°52] 3°45] 2°84| 1°86| 2°96] 41°71] 2°03| 2°50| 2°66 Ss *80| 2°90] 10] 5°93 85) 4:15] 3°38] 4:23] 141] goo| 2712 Lh ae 1°15 |, 2°05 2:07] s°70| 3°52] 2:56) 1°38) 2-05 "92| 2°65] 1°35 Pimie Stk: :5;.. 3°12 80} 487] 274] 425) 3148] 2°75] 160} 418] 2°52] 5:80 SJ eee 3°15] 4°15| 6:20] 5:43] 4°51| 3°37] 2°73] 4°89] 4:00] 3°76] 4°64 August ...... 3°55| 985) 645) 13%1| 5:29] ©3°28 |). 5°78 | g'20) 19:50 2-ga)leeacoo September...) 6:97] 2°60] 9:72] 4:94 8°35] 3°73] 874| 4°36] 4:87] 246) 5°53 October ...... 2°30!) 5°57| 2°94] 5°36] 2°63] 4:72] 2°64) 4°94] 2°98] 2°84] 3:29 November...) 552} 1:04] g*44| 2°16| 6°68 1°39] 7°07| 188] 3°52] 1:09] 4°93 December ...) 3°95] 4:05] 8:40] 5:22| 5°78) 3:53] 612] 4:06] 301| 212! 4°78 Totals ...:.. 39°91 | 31°04) 64°95] 47°04| 52°71 | 38°34] 51°50] 41°07] 36°16 32°36 | 47°73 i ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 459 if a ENGLAND AND WALES. Division VILI.—Norru-Wesrern Covnrtts. I | Cnesnire. LANCASHIRE, : / = i aes Bolton-le- Rufford, Howick, Macclesfield. | Quarry Bank. || Manchester. | Waterhouses. ‘Miass Grmakibe: Presto ! ; 5 ; i? Ed i 5 3 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. 8 in. 2 ft. '7 in. 3 ft. 6 in. 3 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. 8 in. O ft. 6 in. 539 ft. 295 ft. 106 ft. 345 ft. 286 ft. 38 ft. 72 ft. | 1866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867. || 1866.) 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. | 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. in. in. in. Thet | iy in, in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. } 255) 3°92) 2°96) 3°13) 325) 3°27] 3°95] 3°61} 5°63] 4:95] 3°98] 3°32] 4°50] 3°40 B16) 241/ 2°84) 2°84|| 2:98] 2°93] 3:43] 3°28] 523] 3°70] 3°43] 2°02] 3:30] ars 259) U2r) 2°24) 165)) 217) 145] 31°54) 1754] 2°83] I'74| 240] 108] 2°50] 100 104) 3°52] 35] 3°87 30} 4°32] 48] 5°32] 72) 5°65) 63) 3°50) Bo! 3°80 Baer Si | #41| 2°10 1254) 1°95] 3°74) © 2°36) 9:07 | 1°82) 1935] 9°27). Tea) vregR 413] 166) 503) 1°74) 3°98) 159] 4:73] 1°76 S24) 1930] 4°15} 194). 3°65.) « 1°05 356) 488) 3°35) 5°66) 4:31} 4:28) 344] 54x] go8| 664) 4:78) ars] 4755] 3°25 $35) 171) 448) 1°34) 512) 141! 4:47| 1°86) 688] 1°67] 4:22] 1:76] 5:00] 2:20 58x} 2°95) 5°99] 2°87]] 7713] 2°99] 7:30] 2:41] 8:66] 4:93] 6:88] arx8 6:90| 2°70 220) 3°63) 213) 4'41/| 2°52) 3°98] 2°33] 4:20] 3°52] 5°77| 248] 516] 2°45] 5790 B77) 829) 4:71) 1°72)| 5°72) 2°43} 5°72 216) 7°74) 2°47) 4:88] 2:00] 5:80 2°05 P4t) 3°77) 3°04) 3°57)) 4°15!) 3°98] 4°52] 3°73] G60] 4:63] 4:00] 3°03] 4:80} 3°50 40°70 31°66 | 38°53 | 34°90 || 43°17) 34°58 | 43°65| 37°64] S920) 45°27! 42°58] 30-41] 45°65 32°65 | Division [X.—Yorxsure (continued). Yor«k.—West Ripine (continued). Penistone. Longwood, Saddleworth. Hudderaticld. Wakefield. Well Head, Halifax. Ovenden Moor. ° 4 ft. 6 in. 600 ft. 5 ft. Oin. 640 ft. 4 ft. O in. put: 0 ft. 11 in. 487 ft. O ft. 10 in. 1375 ft. . | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866.| 1867. in. 2°O1 2°34 2°65 3°63 2°00 2°53 3°95 2°10 17 2°66 1°36 2°06 in. 4°31 3°85 1°48 1°70 1°75 5°52 4°72 2°51 123 2°01 2°75 2°16 2°08 2°99 | 25°46] 41°85 | 28:46 in. in. 3°62 3°43 2°63 oS 445 1°82 6°57 2°88 2°69 4°56 2°44 1°36 in. 414 5718 1°50 2°48 I'79 5°69 | 4°05 | 6:03 702 2°79 6-99 6°00 53°66 41°60} 44°81 2°10 1°65 2°21 3°89 2°40 1°83 3°07 3°39 1°96 1°38 1°22 2°54) 2°14 in. 475 5°22 1866. | 1867. in. 6:00 5°00 1-24 1°70 "96 “49 4°46 4°54 6°15 2°43 5°64, 5°66, 31°70} 32°74] 27°20| 43'24| 30°94] 57°20 2°40 6°80 3°10 2°50 4°72 2°00 a9 3°80 *60 3°40 43°80 212 460 REPORT—1868. ENGLAND AND WALES. Division [IX.—Yorxsutre (continued). Yorrn.—West Rivine (continued). W. W. Office F Height of | Manor Road, oe York. Harrogate. Settle. eee Rain-gauge Holbeck. RECE: ipton. above pa | EEE ee Ground ...... 0 ft. O in. 0 ft. O in. Oft.G6in. | Oft.6in. | 40ft.0im, | 3 ft. Oin. Sea-leyel...... 95 ft. 340 ft. 50 ft. 420 ft. 498 ft. 750 ft. 1866. | 1867. | 1866.| 1867.| 1866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. | 1866. | 1867. in. in. in, in, in. in. in, in. in, in. in, in. January ...... 2:81) (2726) 3:90] 12°23) | 1-64.) ©9723 | 4:86 9 at92| e792 | 4-67) sro nm gens February ...| 3°20] 1°93] 2°84| 1°96] 2°50) 3117] 4°41] 2°40] 5°51] 4°08] 9154 7°56 March ...... 146| 2°09] 340] 1°88] 1°35] 1°44] 1°76] 2°54] 2°03] 1°74] 3°60] 3°46 PAT fees. -- 1335 || Bp32 |) 1:20] 2°59] © Ta! Pgrr) © 1:57) 3°84.) woz |) 74s eecen ee AY [eens *59| 1°90 WO} Te A7 SRO ike | oats || faa. *66| 3:24) 392] 2°42 JUNE .....000. 3°30] © 1:52) 3°07| 1°66) 2°51] ) 2765) 4:39] x°79| ~3°85 || “T:A9) 03:46) sone SRV ae Saeapaeer A°95\. 327| 4°61) 3°47) 2:91) B40] 3:94) 3:28) s:-60l)egio5 |) S2ai! Gos August ...... 3°55| 2°63] 3°62) 2°62) 3°06] 4°34] 3:25] 3°30] 4°31 194:| 5°33:| e865 September...) 4°51] 2°05] 5°37| 1°84] 4:04] 1°75] Grr] 1°85] 8:25] 2°98] 1119] 5°27 October ...... 225) 7:84.) 2°39|° 1°75) 1:87) T4r| 2°52) 2°37 | (azo Pgs AA ll waco November...) 4:10] 1°27] 4°25 i5)) 2-80) Sr Oil Pilger o|| Were 7 51| 143) 9°45] “799 December ..| 2°80} 2°04] 2°20] 2°35] 13°75] 13°72] 2°88] 2:47] 672] 3°41] 10°05| 2°94 Totals ...... 34°57 | 26°02 | 35°55] 25°70| 25°71 | 25716] 39°44] 30°23] 5617] 35°26] 75°97] 54°68 Division X.—Norrnern Covuntins (continued). Duruam (continued). NorrHuMBERLAND., Height of | Sunderland. || Allenheads. Bywell. North Shields.) Deadwater. ecg Rain-gauge cas ine above pie Ground ...... 1 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. Sin. 0 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. Oin, 0 ft. O in. Oft.4in. | Searlevel......) 85 ft. 360 ft. 87 ft. toa, |" eee 277 tt. 1866. | 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.) 1867.| 1866.| 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | in, in. in. in. in. in, in. in. in. in. in. in. | January ...... 113] 4°78|| 6°81} Gro} 2°57] 4:07]} 51! 3°61] 8:40] 700] 5°50] 540% February ...) 143 '60|| 6:29] 400] 249|/ 1°31] 1°78 *82| Goo] 3°00] 3°59| 247i March waeack 2°83] 2°31|| 3°25 || gro] 2°58) 3°26) 247] 169) 3°50] 3°10) 2:25), 1° 5am 2) ould paneeneee 221} yxog|| 4°32| 6°73] 3°09] 2°93] 31:47| 1°88) 3°10] 4°40) 2°67) 3°37 ED as Rae Teor Mae 5 7 1°63] 2°46 *86} 2°16) 1°14.|) 2°32.) *2700!|) “3°Od)| =r 30) hea DUNO Feiss... 2'04| 1°66|} 2°81) 29) 1°65) 1°44] 1°67] 1°49] 2°00) 2°50) 2°82) 13m) JS eee 104.| 3°69 || 4°52] Gros| 3°26] 2°53] 3°70] 3°20] 6:20] 5°00] 418) 3°3gm August ...... 2°24.) 2°18 |) 5°33| 2°42 | 3°82) 2°54] 3°24] 2°35] Stools 5-roll 9:20)" oa September...) 3:66] 2:24|] 6:96] 2°65] 3:24] 2°07] 3°60] 1°85] 6:00] 3:00] 5:02] 2°36 October ...... 87) x05 || 2°16) 3°25\|| “aro6)) 2°93)) 57-4) a07.| 3*001| Acco) Neo) eee November ...| 2:00 *62)| 5°64) = g-22)|) or36 “S77 genes *98| 5:20] 2°00] 4°88 "42 December...) 1°68) x61|| 7:17] 4:18] 2°21] 3:04] 2°05| 2°34] 5:00] 3°40] 4°44] 17T Totals ...... 22°14) 24°50 || 56°89} 49°45] 29°19| 27°55] 26°43] 23°60] 55:40] 45°50/ 41°83 28°53 ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES, ENGLAND AND WALES. Division IX.—Yorxsu1e (continued). 461 , Div. X.—NoxrrunrnCo.’s, Yorr.—Hast Rivina. Yorr.—Norru Riprine. Dornan. Beverle Holme, on Beadlam Stubb House. Road, H a Spalding Malton. Grange Scarborough. | Darlington. Winatonon , i Moor. ; : 3 ft. 10 in. 3ft.0in. || 1 ft. Oi. O ft. 6 in. 1 ft. 0 in 4 ft. 0 in. Oft. 9in. 11 ft. 30 ft. 73 ft. 192 ft. 180 ft 140 ft. 458 ft. 1866. 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. er: 2°84] 145] 2°24 3110] 2°47] 3°93} 165) 441} 347| 5°50] 2°64] 2° BetigG| E09] 2°02] 3°23 Tow}, 2°90) 1:24) 1376 “Sx 1°59) 186] 2°16 mye 0:86| 1:62) 1:67 077| 248) 165|/ 389] x524 3°78] 4:60] 2:30 85) 245 "94.| 3°13 3°86) 15] 3°78] 2:2r| 1764 2°69) 3:92] 2:24 133 147 ‘or| 128 | Ho7| i637) wy igh}... 2524 TOP sige 67 340] 3138] 2°63] 2°09} 1°89] 2°22] 1°53] 2255] 384] 2°87| 2:63) 2°72 : ; Zor} 3°50 435] 416] 3°28] 3°50] 442] 594) 411] 3°73 : 3°03] 4°07 | 3°37| 413/ 425] 5°86) 240] 3°62) 451] 2°67 3°89] 2°15 | 2°28) 3°95| 2°51] 3°42] 260] 7:24) 260] 4°33 2:50) 1572 169] 2°53) 92|| 2:80) 3:29) 2769) mes) wire 2350}| 12377 E27 |t 226) 182) oz 89] 192] Ig] 1°99 TEQ5) 2595 2°49| 2°49] Ig} 2°14] 2°37] 170] 4°30] 2°26 430° 26°55 | 26°80 29°06 | 32°01 | 28°34) 31'44| 29°33] 38°71 | 40'79| 29°33] 20°65 Division X.—Norruern Countiss (continued), NorTHUMS.’D CUMBERLAND. (continued). ‘Lilburn Whinfell Tower, emacdte, Seathwaite. Hall, Keswick. Cockermouth. Ba poe Alnwick. — Cockermouth. neces 6 ft. O in. 0 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. Oin. 2 ft. 0 in. 1 ft. Oin. 0 ft. Gin, 0 ft. 7 in. | 290 ft. 330 ft. 492 ft. 266 ft. 270 ft. 158 ft. 310 ft. 66, 1867. || 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867.] 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866.] 1867.| 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 474 || 19°09} 8°65 | 25°99| 15°66] 9°69] 5°12] 10°65] 5°97] 8°56) 4:30] 10°43] 4°88 "82 |) 14°54| 11°52| 19°17] 17°05] 6°08} 3°66] 6:99] 5°70] 4:44] 3°32] 5°72] 4°53 2°32) 7°92) 6°75| 13°05] 832] 3°83] 2°37] soz) 3°51] 2°44) 1°53] 3°39] 2°73 2°44 || 4°84.) 12°87) 5°97] 16:92) 1°89] 5°52) 2°85} 710] 300] 4°72] 2°09] 5°35 177|| 3°40] 2°84) 5:06] 5:25) 2:00] 2°38] 104] 2°89] 1°96] 1°59] 1°89] 2°27 ESO} 5°70! 3°34) 6°57) 4°90) 2°724| 165) 2°38] 41°74) 2°48] 1:60) 2:52,) 1-62 517|| 560] 830/ 1118) 1043] 4°36) 4:77] S700] 617] 4°51] 3°37] 5°33] 4:25 1°55 || 10°86] 6°83} 12°69) 13°05) 5°37] 427] 710] 2°59] 3°45] 3°67] 5°30] 250 1°62 || 17°83) 9°85) 21°35] 12°47| 911] 627] 7°96] 435] 6:91} 5:05] 8:20] 5:25 1'24 || 7°69| 10°97] 9°62| 13°67) 3°58] 5°53] 3°57] 640] 2°55] 431] 2°95] 4°68 26 || 14°04] 1°71} 23°08] 2°55] 7°97 84] 8:95 *92| 6:89] ror] 7°87 36 3°18 || 19°60] 7°14] 25°39] 13°04] 6°88] 4°35] 9°30] 4:80] 5:58] 3°88 6:90| 4'or ro6 | 26°61 |/131-11 | 91°27 17912 |133°31 | 63°48 | 46°73] 7o°Sx| 52°14 50°77] 38°35] 62°53 462 REPORT—1868. ENGLAND AND WALES. Division X.—Norrnern Counties (continued), CumBERLAND (continued). WESTMORELAND. . F Scaleby, | Lesketh How,} The How, Edenhall, tee as Carlisle. | Reson Ambleside. | Troutbeck. Penrith. above Sho Ground ......| 3 ft.0in. | Oft.8in. | 4f.6in. | 3ft.Oin, | 1ft2in. | 1ft. in. Sea-level...... 28 ft. 120 ft. 149 ft. 200 ft. 470 ft. 320 ft. ? 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January ...... 4°69] 2°53] 3°64) 3°63]] 7°33] 6°56] 13°90] 10°78] 12°40] 12°14] 5°28] 1°50 February 3°42} 201] 3°20) 2°14]/ 6°16} 5°23] 10°92| 11°55] 9°51] 11°66) 3°75] 2°60 March ...... 1°39 *63| 1°86 81] 3°53] 2:1] 6°94] 3°97] 5°75] 5:43] 1°85| 3-70 jou a eae *84.| 2°80 94.) 4°07]|| 161} 5°76) 2°97] g'o1| 3°21] 13°53] 3x60} 3°86 May =...:.-:..| 1°37) 2°18] 1°30|- 2°02! 1°86] 2742) 2°36| 3°46] 1°93] 4:02] 1-35) 1775 JUNC... i.5:.. 226) 1304 184) 14a yon) 227) 9:82) T7972] 3°55) Tees Poe July ......... 3°60} 2°77| 3°42] 3°47|| 3°17| 3°79] 426] 4°39| 4°50] 4°06] 3:15] 4°10 August ...... 3°55| 2°61] 3°97) 3135|| 5°22) 349] 7°97| 591| 6°53] 4°48] 3°45] 2°40 September...) 5°31] 3°84] 514] 2°93]] 9°77] 5:22] 13°93| 645] 1448] 644! 517] 2:70 October ...... 2°07} 2°98] 1°70] 2°70]| 2°92] Stoo] 4°95| 9°74] §93| 663) 1°85} 2°50 November ...| 4°33 *92| 3°90 20 |} 8°39 °67} 13°78| 1°62] 15:00 9a > 4°97 | FLO December . 3°99] 2°01} 3°39] 2°33|/ 7°42] 4°89] 14701] 7°96] 1590] G94] 3°88}| 2'ra Totals ...... 36°76 | 26:48 | 34°30) 27°06 || 60°39] 47°31] 99°31] 76°56] 98'69| 77°83] 36°75 27°90 Division XI.—Monmovrn, Waxes, anp THe Isianvs (continued,) PEMBROKE. CanDIGAn. BRECKNOCK. Rapnor. Height of Pembroke Haverford- || Pen-y-Maes, Cefnfaes, Harn ds uge Dock. west. SAInpaeee, ||. RedaEceen Hay. Rhayader. above ies eee 4 ft. Oin 2 ft. Oin. 5ft.Oin, | 4 ft. Oin. 1 ft. Oin. 2 ft. Oin. ea-level...... 30 ft. 60 ft. 420 ft. 885 ft. 400 ft. 880 ft. 186 | 1867.) 1866. | 1867. || 1866.) 1867.| 1866.} 1867. | 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. | in. in. in. in. January 5°44 7900 77 BE 7°76| 568] 10°75] 7°78]} gor] 4°73 7°42| 4°96 February 3°83 } 541) 5°97|| 5°57| 2°79] 5°22] 4°50|| 4°26| 2°56]! (6'o3 |) 3°53 ee seca 42 =) 539) S6Sit $30) 2°89] 5:31] 1°73]] 3°81] 4°23]) (9°93 4:09 pr (thee See Ree 2'o2)|. 2°21] 7°78|) 135] 4°67 "98 | 8:03 || 2°45] 3°22 ]] 1°33] 5°93 Mey coher arte 155} 8 1°36] 4714 83) 274) 2eg| w23 fas f4c14|) x18] 3°46) JUNG ....3.... 1°93] 3°97 71] 4:09 "75| 894] 149 i 66} 3°87 “55 ff SWY 5 -s 202. r6g|) a 156} 3'0rl} x59] 514! 3°03] G10l] 1°53] 3°21] 2-4r| 4°53 aot orate 2'45| 5 500] 3°45|| 3°97] 3°36] 5-7 3°15} 329] 1°53] azz] 12q|) September .../ 792] | gtsx| 3°54 /] 10°54] 3°26| 8:13] 6-03|] 638! 1°93|| 698] 2-96] aor aeaet 245| 3 2°74; 8:54|| 2°33] Bax] 3:25| 7°83]] 223] 4:39\| 3:34] 5°33 overnber ...] 4°06] 524| 2°21 || 4°03 *95| $108] 3°74] > 1°75 74|| 4°86] 149 December ...) 5:09 4°68} 3°73] 3°50] 4°39] 633] goo] 2°36] 31°95]] 5°69] 2°95 Lah ial a ails Eee | ae Totals ...... Pe 53 54°97 | 55°87 || 50°86] 42°63] 64°74) 56°6r | 36°65) 32°68 | 5105) 40°96 7 ] ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 463 atc ENGLAND AND WALES. Division X. Division XI1.—Monmovru, Wats, anv tne Istanps | (continued). ; 2 ; hee ‘Wesraonn- Monmovuru | GLAMORGAN, CARMARTHEN | LAND (cont.). . ate . ' Appleb: Abercarn Blaina, | Abergavenn | Swansea. || Carmarthen.| Rhydwen 4 ae z g Tredegar. 8 y: wall : TO 61 ft. O in. 1 ft. O in. 0 ft. 9 in. 1 ft. 3 in. | 16 ft. Oin. O ft. 5in. 1 ft. Oin. 449 ft. 450 ft. 1100 ft. 220 ft. 30 ft. 78 ft. 150 ft. | 1866. | 1867.} 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. | 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867.) 1866.| 1867. | in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. a. 6°60) 4°85] 8:92] 7°95| 8:96] 8:32} 5:86] Goo|| 4:22] 412]/ 5°59] 5:17] 7°38] 6°53 YW 32u) 2°34) 7°07) 4:28) 7°42] 542] 4°07] 2°83]/ 3°32] 2°51]} 4°76] 3:12] 411) 5°44 } 166) 241] 3°84} 5°34] 4°37) 4°91) 413] 445] 2°67] 2°56] 4°82) 337] 4°93] 4°30 | 197) 447] 3°30] 5°03) 3°43] 5°58) 2°21/ 3:00] 3143} 3°60)) 185) 4°48) 163) 5°64 *86| 218] r:06| 4°70] 1°80} 6:00 S777 |.) eae 766) 3704)| 128] 3190] rr) 2:89 Powe r60) 3°59| 1:46) 4:73) 144) 3°26 "76 || 2:25) 1:07 |) 4535 66] 2°33 45 275) 4552] :1°62| 5713] 2:08) 3°86| 1:27] 3:20 89 | 1°87 *95| 2°31 Bi | 20s 4°64) 2°93] 4°51] 1°76) 425] 1°85] 2°70 *8r|| 3°58) rgr|| Goo} 250] 441] 1°94 §77| 2°60] 13°39| 3°31) 9°84) 3°95| 7°81} 179] 8:37) 2°05)| 7°92} 340] 7°86) 3°72 173) 3°55) 3°74| 520] 2°92) 637] 2°74] 427i! 353] 5°50|| 2°31) 7°03] 2°33) 7°72 3°46 BGG) 34a] ai2| 3:25] 2:°35| -2:36| aro4g|)) 0538] 275m]! 4°36) 2°52) 4567) room 447| 241] G00) 2°76) 5°77| 81) 243) 1°43]| 2°91) 2°36|| 4:05) 4°58) 4:23] 3°79 96) 34°55| 60°45] 48°04] 58:22] 51°86) 38°61 | 34°83 || 33°20] 32°13 || 48°24] 42°04] 46°00] 46°06 Division XI,—Monmovrn, Waxzs, AND THE IsLANDs (continued). Furnt. Denzicu. || Merioneru. CARNARVON. Isnz or May. : Maes-y-dre, Brithdin, |/Plas Brereton,| Llanfairfe- || epee. Holywell. Llandudno. Dolgelly. Carnarvon. chan. Calf. of Mans 1ft. Oin 5 ft. Oin. 0 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. Oi. 1 ft. Oin. O ft. 8in. 0 ft. 10 in. 268 ft. 400 ft. 99 ft. 500 ft. 25 ft. 150 ft. 325 ft. 1867.| 1866.) 1867. || 1866.| 1867. || 1866.) 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866. | 1867. || 1866.) 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 2°87 *39| 2°30} 3°60] 3°62|/ 10°60] 6:go0|| 6:12) 5°09) 5°79) 421 2°93] 3°85 1°36] 3130] 4156]] 3:15] 1°75]! 4°06] 2°13]] 3°64] 1°99] 4°39] 2°26]] 2°04 "89 2°29 *63| xro|| 1°73] 2°02|| 5°86] 34x]| 2°72] 2°28] 3:74] 2°77]| 169) 1°53 B46 |) 1°42.|) 62°70 AG | OGRE || ar N S| FZ ae TOF! ee t85 "57| 4°16 63] 1754 183) 140| 3744|| 1:50] z6r}} 3°97] 3°31] 2:01] 1742] 2°56) 1°67 *63,| emg 73| 3°48| “6rl| 3°86) -39]]. 5:23] -95]] 5°37] °76) 480] 53/1 2°59) °36 449| 2°34] 4°24|| 1°75] 5°26]) 2°68) 760] °85| 3°63) 199] 5732|| 168) 3°73 Ir] 3°54) r08|| 289} r26)) 5°85 93 || 3708]. 2:09] 2°45] 4:20 ]| 2°28) 1°97 134] 5°55| 3°74] 516) 2°30|/ 8'96| 3°53]) 7°97| 3°77) 666) 2'59|| 2°26), 1°64 3°999| 147] 3°68) 210] 4:97) 3°08] g'91|| 2°74] 5°35] 2°08) 5°71|| 143) 2°77 107) 3:4r| 1754|| 4:22| 4m:12|/ 668) 1°74]/ 3°83] 169] 4°37] -1747]] 3:26 82 2°97| 2:00] 2°78|| 3°15) 4:°54]1 5°59| G11!) 3°92] 3°68] 4:13] 2°96|| 222) 2°27 : | ee & ee | 27°41 | 26°93) 24°77 || 33°55| 31°98 || 61-71) 53°64] 42°69) 35°60) 43°53] 34°86 || 23°64 | 21°92 464, REPORT—1868. ENGLAND AND WALES, SCOTLAND. Division XI.—Mownmovrn, Waxes, anp tHE Istanps (continued). Istz or Man (continued). Cuannet Isnanbs. Wiceron, | : ; Millbrook, 8. Cairn, ere * Douglas. | Point of Ayr. Guernsey. Jersey. Alderney. Stranraer. above H Sees hae Ground ......! Qt. 3in. 3ft.4in. || 12f.0in. | Off. Gin. | 10ft.Oin. | Oft. 4in. Sea-level...... So acseaaes 27 ft. ? 204 ft. 50 ft. 48 ft. 209 ft. 1867. | 1866. | 1867. | 1866.| 1867. || 1866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January ...| 8:20] 4°60/ 3°82] r70|| 7:91] 5:48] 4x] 4°46) 4cr1 446] 635] 4°35) February ...) 5:20! 4°30] 2°77] m15]| 5°78] 2:21] 3°30] 2°97] 3°30] 2°97] 3°60] 3°35 March 7. .2.. 3°49} 3°40] 3°00] I'09g]| 2749} G44] 2°67] 5715] 2°67] Sas] 4:40] 2°15) PANT Bets. tee 1°30] 5°50 "44| 3°02|| 2°17] 2°07) 1°72) 2°00] 1°72| 2:00] 1°70] 6°60)| ” AVIV: thentes «Ae Tao] ‘"2'80)}| a'27) (2°67 || 2°46) 2723) ater) 1:65) a:20| an6R ps5 | eaaeRy dit 5 Ae 2°70 60] 2749 °36|| 1°61 83] 2°05] 112] 2705] iz]. 3°05| 180}|% Sinha Bee ss| 2°70) 3°10] 2°42] 4°97/| 1°63} 418] 1°77] 4°56] 1°77] 4°56] 4°35| 5°70 August ...... 3°80] 3°50] 2°66] 2°90// 3°76] 106] 3°68] 1°66] 3°68] 1°66] 5:50] 4°65 September ..... 6°70] 3°50] 4°47] 2°26|| 9°39] 3°91] 7°76] 1°07] 7°76] 1°07] 5°80] 5705 October ...... 2°90] 5:90] 1°56] 3°78|| 1:29] 4°29 82] 4°93 82] 4°93] 3°10| 6°00 November ...| 7°40 *g0| 3°86 "56 || 2°70 89] 2°49] 2°69] 2:49] 2°69] 6:00] 2°65 December ...} 7°50] 5°50] 343] 2°39|| 3°23| 3°48] 3°51] 2°31] 3°51] 2°31 Totals ...... 52°80] 43°60 | 32°19 | 26°85 | 44°42) 37°07] 35°09| 34°57] 35°09| 34°57] 50°r0 50°85 Division XIII.—Sovrn-Eastrrn Covntizs (continued), Height of | Thirlestane. || — Yester. East Linton. || Glencorse. Inveresk, | Charlotte-sq., Rain-gauge | Edinburgh. BERWICK. | HADDINGTON. Epinpuren. above | Ground ...... Oft.3in. || 1ft. Oin. O ft. 3in. O ft. 6 in. 2 ft. Oin. O ft. 6 in. Sea-level......) 558 ft. || 425 ft. 90 ft. 787 ft. 60 ft. 230 ft. 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867.) 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in/+ || in. in. in. in. in. i January ...) 4°50] 6:70/] 3:45]-3:75| 2°06] 4:37 || 4:28 2°14) 4°03] 2°49 February ...) 3°80] 1°65/| ©3°80| 2°35] 2°30 "70 || 4°60 3°14.| 27g0)/9Rst50 March’ ’...... 77990| 160}} 2°60] 4717] 2:18] 12 1°80 2°c8| 180] 1°85 LN al ae See 1°20) 2°60}, 2°20/° 340] roo] x'19|) 2:20} . 189] 23°35)|) ea-ay Ne eee “75 | ° 1°80 || = 9x89 5) $2277 68} xr44|| 2co| & 150} 2°85] 41°50 UU |p aec. o- . 1°50\| “x50 |||" 2:26) 2igez0 84] x44|| x25] 3 T°o2 | laso-memear Jt) Selene Z270)|| S20) |eeene 6:25] 3°96] 6:96|| 4:80 a A52.| 16:23) earan August ...... 3°60] r0o|} 2°60) 4°50] 2°16 996 ||, 3°75 Ob; 3°58 | 2:44) 2298 September ...! 2:40] 2°00]] 3°65) 2:15 2°04 "95 || 3°65 2°69] 149] 2°45 October ...... 2°30 1°50 | cid OHNE Mas 1°08 =7.3)|| SETcco B°10)|| 12732)| (hares Noyember ...| 2°90 S5O)||esnTOll ee er 1°98 °2g)i|, -13355 2°57 *63)|| Seiya December ...) 3°10] 2°20]| 3°27| 2°05| 1:22] 1-01 || Gis 2°75 otels” 23 | 36°65 | 27°25 | 21°50| 21°31 || 38°53 4 ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES, SCOTLAND. _ Division XIT.—Sournern Covnziss (continued), Division XIII.—Sovru- Eastern Counties. 465 Kiegcuppricur. DvmMEries. SELKIRE. PEEBLES. | | ve Slogarie. : Bowhill | N. Al le Ross. |o, 4 eDouelas,|| Cargen Drumlanrig. | Wanlockhead. Selkirk. ‘Esk Reservoir, g Penicuick. Mem. | Of.Gin. | Of.3in. |... Oft.4in. | 4f.0in. || Oft. Gin. 130 ft. 800 ft. 80 ft. 191 ft 1330 ft. 537 ft. 1150 ft. 866. | 1867.| 1866.| 1867. | 1866.| 1867. | 1866.) 1867. | 1866.| 1867.] 1866. 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. Beye eoels in. | 6°54 || 9°64] 4:00] 10°50] 7°80] 13°06] 6:23] 6:38] 3°65|) 5x0] 415 4°85)) 4°43) 2°36| 5°50] 7°90] 5°36} 6:43] 460) 1°97]! 4°55] 3°45 3°35 || 3°34] 234] 340) 410] 436) 349] 1°89) 2743]] 2°05} 1:05 6°66|| 1:28) 3764] 170] 850] 3°36] 626] 10} 2:88] 2:30] 4:25 POA he9O il) 97 || oI50 || -3°8o} | airg2)) «agg |) asa | 2egg | aces cere 2:62 ||) 2:46 2:06) 2°50| 2°50| 2°48) 3:74] | a350| | 157 Tes Sit eZee 409 || 3°54) 3°02] 2°50} S40} 3°33) 44o] 316) 518|| 3°75] 5x0 4°79 || 3°54} 2°56) 4°10) 400} 6°66) 4:43] 3°65] 3°68)| 3°35] 2°05 4°02 || 644] 3°96] 6°70] 4:00} 7°85] 613] 3°76] 1:96]} 2°85) 2:70 662 || 3°50} 3°71] 3°50] 5°80] 4:71| 7°87] 1°79] 2°97]|| 2°25] 2°45 125) 568) 46) 440} r10| 4°86] 59} 40] 25] 3°95} 75 4°22 || 4°96] 2:02] 5°90| 3°60] 834] 613] 2745] 2°25] 4:50] 2:70 | 51°92 || 50°17 | 31°10) §2°20) 58°50) 66"89| 58°65] 33°19] 31°38)| 38°95] 33°50 Division XIV.—Sovurn-Western Counties. Lanark. Ayr. Auchinraith Glasgow atlts Hill End : Auchendrane, Hamilton. Observatory. Bailliestown. House, Shotts. Gree Ayr. 4ft.9in. | Oft.Oin, | Of. 3in. | 7f.Oin. | Oft.Gin, | 2ft. 3im. 150 ft. 200 ft. 230 ft. 620 ft. 15 ft. 94 ft. -| 1866. | 1867.) 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867 1866. | 1867.| 1866.} 1867. in: | in. | in. fin. | in. | im | in. | in, ff in, | in, | im | im 4°33| 285) 7°61] 3°98] 6°76] 4°18] 446] 1'98|| 10°30] 3°60] 8°30] 4:28 3°79| 2°93} 616) 343) 529] 3°39) 3°16] 318) 5:08] 3°60/ 5:30] 3°94 1505) 1°02) isor| —nr6n,| x65) -1:38) 199 “91 6:18] 2°30] 2:13) 1-07 3300 | 63925 | GAG) . 5512) |5167 | §:3m|' E20) 3t27.1) | xjeo |) 5a78 77| 4°64 1:28] 2°00] 1°36] 3°46] 4181) 34r] 1°65) 2°50/! 31°85] 2:20] 94] 1°58 1:82| 1:60| 2:22] 2:30] 249] 2°72) 119] 2°70]] 2°35] 2:20] 2:17] 3:22 3°75| 442] 4:00) 4°78) 5°31] 5°97) 3°93] 3°34|| 3°65] 5°70] 3°32] 5°48 3°50] 2°72) 545] 5°13} 4°50] 446! 3°74] 3°39] 5°03] 3°00] 4°86] 3:20 3°84] 2°83) 5°67) 3°73} 629) 4:23] 4°37] 3°35|) 5°50] 3°50] 5°91] 4°33 160} 3°63]: 3°07] 4°65] 2°58] 481] 1°94] 3°08]| 2°60] 5:23) 2°65) 538 2°94} °78| 4°39| 1:26) 4°82| 1°55} 3°52) 68!) G90) 2°48) 6137) 1:09 4°78| 2°04] Gor| 4°88] 619] 3°50] 440 ciel 5°20] 3°00] 6°32] 410 1°87) 34°19 | 29°77] 49°34] 44°33| 49°32| 45°41 | 34°89] 31°03 | 55°64] 42°59| 49°84) 4211 4.66 REPORT—1868. SCOTLAND. Division XTV.—Sovru-Wesrern Counrizs (continued). Division XV.—Westr Mipianp Counties. Ayr (continued). RENFREW. Dumpartox. ls - Mansfield, | Nither Place, | Wilbarchan, : Balloch Arddarock, | Geeence Largs. | Mearns. Paisley. Greenock. Castle. Loch Long. above Ground ...... 0 ft. 6 in, Oft. Sin. Off. Sin. | Oft.6in. | Oft.4in, | 1ft. Oin. Sea-level...... 30 ft. | 850 ft. 350 ft. 50 ft. 90 ft. 80 ft. 1866. | 1867. || 1866. | 1867.] 1866.| 1867.| 1866. | 1867.] 1866.| 1867.| 1866.] 186 in. in. |} in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January...... goo} 3°70}; 8°38! 4°63] 12°20] 6°50] 12°55] 8:93] 9'22| 4°76] 14°00] 73 February ...| 5°30] 3°60]] 5°25} 6:12] 8:05} Groo| 9°54] 631] 7°78] 4°83] 9°44] 875 March. <..%.:}- 3°90| 2°70 || 2°25) 1°98| 2:80] 9:40) 415| 2°93] 3°20) 2°60) ~Goq eae Aipial s.268.2.. 1°99] 7°30|| 50]. 700] 2:20| 790] 2:45|- Sro] x84) 630) Fon eo May 3205.4. I'7o| 3°40 187) 9°12| a80) ~9°-75| a'9g7| 412} 150) ibe] 2°50) iaae DUBE: ..ae22 25: 2°60} 210]/ 2°00| 1°38| 3:00] 2°60] 4°50] 2°72] 2°84] 372) 2:09)) 9 35ge Dili eae ate 2°76| Z'go|| 5°75| 5712] ago] B90 | 3°85) 5:57 Aragil § som) ps6 eau August ...... 620} a40]| 5:00] 4°63) 6:90] 5:40] 7:25) 4:42) 7°97| 5195) 1o'd7| 5am September...| 5°60] 3°50|| 6°50} 5:25| 8:70] 6°30] 8:04] 5:12] 6:00] 4°93] IO'IO| 575) October ...... 430| 4°90|| 3°25] G00] 6:00] 7°30) 5:27] 7°82] 421] 5750] 4°81) 38 November :..} 5:00] 1:60]/ 5°38] 162] 7°55| I40}] 5°62] 184) 5°66) 2:20] gf00| ash December...) 6°50) 3:90] 7°12) 4°50] 1o'50/ 5°70) 9'72| 4°62] 7°63) 4°31) 12‘98| 6m Totals ...... 54°70| 44°00 || 54°25] 50°75| 74'20| 60°15] 73°91| 62°44} 61°59] 50°00} 89°35] 70° Division XV.—West Miptanp Counts (continued), ARGYLL (continued). + Kilmory, . Inverar its bid ld : ay ate i Castle Toward. Tatbellplieud. Fladda. Guntissh Lismore. Hynish above Ground ...... 4 ft. Oin Oft. 4 in, 0 ft. 6 in. 0 ft. Oin. 3 ft. 4in. 0 ft. Oin Sea-level...... 80 ft 100 ft. 20 ft. ? 30 ft. STH | Lae 1866. | 1867. | 1866.} 1867. | 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.| 1866.) 1867. | 1866 ; in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. January...... 10°26] 5°52| 10°90] 6°50] 11°50] 7°30| 12°00] 8:00] 7°88} 4:86] 15°47 February ...| 5°88] §:91| 8:20] 7°60] 640] 7°90} 6:00] 8:00] 5:13] §:0r| 8°03 March ...... 3°82| 12°93] 430] 2:10] 7°50| 90] 4:00] 3°00] 2°80 85 | 5°61 2/04! ee 180] 7°22) 2°50] g'I0| 2°40] 11°00} 3°00] g'00| 1°72] 6°06] 3-or GIVE a caacteo ne 2°04) 4°36] 1°80] 3:70] 2°90) 3:00] 00} roo] 1°69] 2°97] 1°86 OMe ..5 829280 2°42| 2°64! 3°10} 2°80] 480] 4:30] 3700] 400] 1°45] 2°33] 2°37 DO 2 ae 3°69] 3:66) 340] 4:10] 510] 3°30] 3°00] 3°00] 310] 3:90] 2°82 August ...... 8°34] 4°23] 640] 4°30] 8:90|?25°50| 8:00] 6:00] 641] §19| 3°60 September... 7°30] 5°52] 8:60] 5°50] g'90|?11°50| ro°00| 5*00| 831] 43:42| 7:08 October ...... 3°83| 7°89] 5°80] 9°60] 6'90|?15°80] 5:00] 10'0O| 4°13] 714) 4°88 November... 5°84] 1°33} 7:10] 3:70] 8:90] 6:70! 8:00] 3:00] 4°53] r2r 9°28 December ...| 8:63] 4°82] 11°30] 6-80] 10°60] g10| 14°00| 8:00} 6°68 3°44] 14°71 Totals ..:... 63°85] 55°03] 73°40| 65:20] 85:80 |107°309| 77°00] 68:00] 53°83] 46°38] 78-72 SCOTLAND. ON THE RAINFALL IN THE BRITISH ISLES. 467 Division XV.—Wust Mintanp Covnrtes (continued). Srreyina, Bure. ARGYLL. olmaise, Devaar, Rhinns of | M‘Arthur’s eee See Lomionds || Plaga oonebaltawsi| Islay. ta |) ‘1 ft. 0 in. 0 ft. 6 in. 3 ft. 6in 3 ft. 4 in. 3 ft. Oin, 0 ft. 4in. 1 f¢. 3in. | ‘12 ft. 1800 ft. 55 ft 70 ft. 74 ft. 106 ft. 90 ft. 1867. | 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867. || 1866. 1867. | 1866.) 1867.| 1866.| 1867.) 1866.| 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 4°80| rr10]) & .|| 6:97| 1°44|| 9°67! 4:21 5°22] 3°18] 12°50] 5°80] 13°40] 7°40 50] 3°80} 4:20] | % z 4°36] 3°70|) 5°39] 4°57] 3°94] 2°92] 870] 7:90] 8:60] 8:20 a 150) 8:90//°S Bil 2°38] 320]} 2°80] 2:26] 2:0] rit 4°00} 1'90| 5*00| 2°10 2 G00} 5:20] } wm’ r29| 6°34)|| 1°37] 5°39 95} 3°93] 2°50] 9120] 2°68] 10°30 | +80 3°60} 2°30] g10|] 144] 2°86 1°89] 2°16 1°99| 2°15] 290] 3°60] 2:50). 9°52 eo) 220) 5°50) 420]| 3:02] 2*00|/ 2:46] 2°67| 1:67, 186] 2°60] 3°50] 3°45). 22 460) 3°60] 560] 7:30 || 2°04] 5°56|) 2°86) 3°68) 2:29) 2°86] 5:70] 4°30] 4:20] 3°80 PSO] 3°50| 13°20/ 8:90|/ 4°96| 320] 5°86) 2°65] 3°55] 3°18] g20| 5°30] goo] 422 B7°| 2°80) 13°80} 9°60]; 5:40] 4°99|/ 648] 3°53| 4:21] 1°42! 9°90] 4°80] g20] 715 M59} 5°00} 7°90] 14°60|| r8r} 5°35 1°79| 6°68} 2:91] 5°31] 4°40] 11°40] 6°30] 11°94 p20] TIO} B50) 3'10/| 4:90] 00] 5°08] 2°52] 5°38] rr2| 8:00] 2*60| 8-30 3.30 BO) 3°50) 13°90/ 7°30]! 6°59] 2°94 || 6:02] 4°53] §5'10| 2°74| 11°00] 7°20] 13°38] 8:40 | —— —— |__| | ry ree ——| #50} 40°40 |100°10 44°16 | 40°58 || 51°67/ 44°85] 38°71] 31°78] 80°60} 67°50} 86:01] 72°55 . XV.—(continued). Division XVI.—Easr Miprayp Countiss. Arayiu (continued), CLACKMANNAN, Kiyross. Firr. Peru. . | | rran Ardnamur- || Loch Leven Nookton | Kippenross, h Eil. chan. Dollar. | Sluice. Leven. | Dunblane. Deanston. é : ) | d 3 ft. Gin, O ft. 4in. 0 ft. 10 in. O ft. 6 in. O ft. 4 in. Oft. 2in. 82 ft. ? UTOmatae || a catsactetees 80 ft. 100 ft. 130 ft. 1866. | 1867.} 1866. | 1867. | 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866. 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. |] in. in. in. in. in. in. 8°23} 3°507 3°85| 4'03|) 3°30} goo] 2°80] grr | 5°60} 3°30] 6:96} gros 3°67) 3°49} 640} 3°88) 430) 180! 410) 1°62|| 5*10| 2°70] s:91| 4:27 2°78 71} 3°78) 2:10) 3°60} 130]| 2°02] 3118) 2°70 *"7®.| 2°75)| 2"a7 120) 580} 381) 5°75) 2180] 3°30]] 145] 2°83 140} 3°90] 2:11] 5°53 1°37] 1°86 *85) 3°38|| roo] 390] 50] 4:47 40} 210] rrr} 3°89 1°39| 2:21) 2°58) 3:14] 2:00] aol] 1°35] 196 *g0| 0700] 2°58] 2:20 4°25) 2°75) 404) 4°79) 3°20) 4°70)| 2°87) 649] 1°30] 3:00] 3:27] 4:18 3°99} 3°34] 6°33) 5°38) 4°30) gr00|) 3°42) 2°04] 4:20/ 3-20] 614] 4-48 Gor|| gol wah] 3951 4ra| Se 2°79 | | ee 1°50] 140} 5°89] 4°72 4:18| 640) 3°96] 5°26 3°30| 3°20 | 189] 1°99 | 2°10 3°20} 3°28] 4°33, 77!|. LG gsi] aaqill | 3:00 *30]/ 2°12 | 43 | 2°50 "904 3°95) daz 756| 3°19] 6710) 1°62)) 3°80] 1°70!| 2:94 144 | SIS) | a7) } 6 a7 gta 799° 5rco) 37°45 : "76 || 32°80} 25°70] 49°72] 44°15 eo Ms» | 468 Height of Rain-gauge above Ground Sea-level...... January February ... Division XVI.,—East Mipianp Covntins (continued). REPORT—1868, SCOTLAND, Prrtu (continued). September ... October ...... November ... December ... Totals Loch Katrine.|Auchterarder. pai As a Trinity Gask.|Scone Palace.| Stanley. O ft. 6 in. 2 ft. 3 in. 0 ft. 5 in. O ft. 1 in. 2 ft. 6 in. 1 ft. Oin. 830 ft. 162 ft. 463 ft. 133 ft. 80 ft. 200 ft. 1866. | 1867.) 1866.| 1867.| 1866.} 1867.| 1866.) 1867.| 1866. | 1867.| 1866. | 1867. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in. 12°60} 6-10] 3°35) 3°60] 14°95] 5°75] 510) 5°86] 3°68] 4:03) 3°65) 3°83 1x50} 820] 3:45] 2°70] 11°05] 9°65] 3:90] 2°66] ep . I'70| 3°08] 2°05) SE50| Biz0'] +2780} | 2:35) | 8:67) eu0}) 3175 | 2:20 ia 1:76| 2776) 297 5°70| 10°60) 260) 4:60} 580} 9752] 2:20) 3°46) 25 176| 1:06) 2:80) go} 4:00] 65} 3:40] 160] 3°30/ 80] 3°77] BS | 3°50] °53| 3°23 3°70| 3°20) 2°00] 2°55| 3°92] 3:20] 2°00] 3°50) Be *33| a7 | ome Mietive cechweaes 3°49| 3°90]. 1°53] 2°03] 2°20) 2°80] 2°61] 1°47|| 2°25] 31:86| 364) 2% August ...... 4°43) 2°00] 2:25] 180} 2:80] Ifo] 2°96] 2:24]1 3:06] 2:02] 310] ZF September... 4°33] 150] 2:40| 2°50] 3°00] 440] 3:01] 1°93|| 2:90] 3°63| 2°98] 48 October ...... I'20| 4°80] 1°42] 3°90] 3°50] 5°20] 2°62] 4:65|| 40] 496) 13x] 5%g November...) 5°85 *g90] 5°35] 10] Io7o0| 2°00] 704] 2°46]| 5°66 *98| 7°57| 2°5 December ...| 2°42] 140} 6°30| 340] 6°80] 3°80] 4°61} 3°86|| 3°34] 4°96] 4752 47 Totals ...... 38°46] 32°60] 28°35] 27°16) 48-10) 38°80] 38°85 28°04 | 26°28 | 24°68 | 37°18 | 34°7 Division XX.—Munsrer (continued). pets 3 LErnstEr Kerry. Warerrorp, | CLARE. QuzEn’s Cc ; ‘ Height of Valentia. Waterford. Portlaw. Killaloe. Ennis. ‘| Portarlingt Rain-gauge i above —_ J Ground setae 2 ft. Oin, 4 ft. O in. 20 ft. O in. 5 ft. O in. 2 {t. 6 in. 1 ft. 1 ing Sea-level...... 30 ft. 60 ft. 50 ft. 128 ft. 35 ft. 236 ft | 1866. | 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867. || 1866.| 1867.| 1866.| 1867.} 1866.) 186 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. in, in. in. in. in, January Saute 7°64) 5°62]) 5:47] 9°55] zor) 3°81|| 663] 3°32) 719] 3:50] 9:72) ae February ...| 4°39] 4°87]|| 2°70| 2°93) 3°22] 3°55|| 5*51| 5:21] 3°94] 4259 3°00| 2% March ......] 5°07] 3°45]] 3°51] 4:71| 4:47] 5°67|] 3°85| 3°06] 2°76] ao 2°92] @ BAAR wg icaies 3°52} 4°97|| 2°41] 3°03] 2°66] 3°55]| 2°05] 643] 219] 349] 1°64) 2% VEY sseeavse: 2°28] 3°07|| 128} 5:19] 1°34] §°30|| 3°05] 3°45| 1°83] 830% I:79) 3 DELO nae LE Sp a a Calculated. Observed. Difference. Calculated. Observed. Difference. (1) (2) (1)—(2) (1) (2) (1)—(2) 10°9849 10°9688 +o'o16r 98166 9°3427 —o'0261 10°5382 105528 —o'0146 9°8354 9'8278 +0'0076 10°0146 10°0059 +0°'0087 9°9348 9°9300 4+0°0048 94882 94898 —o'o0o16 10'0573 100630 —0'0057 91314 91350 — 070036 10°1567 10°1549 +o'o018 g 1141 91095 +0°0046 10°2547 10°2565 —o'oo018 9°3896 93920 — 070024 10°3529 10°3448 -+0°0081 98195 98203 —0'0008 104185 10°4312 —0'0127 10°3658 10°3630 +0'0028 10°4357 10°4260 +0°0097 10°9264 10°9284 —0'0020 10°4499 10°4515 —o'0016 112698 11'2707 —0*0009 10°4696 10°4.704. —o0'0008 11'2642 11°2602 +0'0040 10°4270 10°4348 —o'0078 10°9573 10°9627 —0°0054 10°3790 10°3569 +0'0221 10°4766 10°4723 +0°9043 IO"41I4 10°4368 —0'0254 9°9446 99460 —o'0014 10°4014 10°3937 +0°0077 9°4472 9°4479 —0'0007 10°3101 10°2850 +0°0251 91166 9°1163 +0°0003 10°2987 10°3500 —0'0513 91059 91028 +0°0031 10°3189 10°2643 +0°0546 9°3910 9°3987 —0'0077 10°2291 10°2642 —0'0351 9°8357 98248 -+o'o109 10°1271 10°1163 +o0'0108 10°3834 10°3934 —o'oI0o 10°0589 10'0606 —0*'0017 10°9362 10°9320 +0'0042 9°9363 9°9238 +0°0125 11°2746 I1‘2701 00045 9°8322 9'8620 —o0'0298 112714 11°2833 —o'ollg 98190 9°7823 +0'0367 20. In the averages for any one of the §, K, L, M, N, O tides explained above, the influence of each of the others is nearly eliminated because of the greatness of the number of periods (roughly 360 and 720) of each in the series of observed heights included in the summations. The choice of the approximate period 369° 3", as explained above (§ 16), makes «as little as possible of the mutual influence of the two largest tides, the lunar and solar semidiurnal tides, in the two averagings performed to determine these two tides. But the incommensurability of the periods renders it impossible to altogether escape, in the direct synthesis for any one tide, the influence of the others. Accordingly, the coefficients A,, B,, &c., shown above, are to be regarded as first approximations in the mathematical solution of the problem. The next step followed was to find corrections upon each summation for the influence of the tides determined by the other summations, these corrections, for a second approximation, being calculated on the supposition that the first approximate values of A,, B,, A,, &c., already found, are correct. An auxiliary Table (see § 15, above) for performing this process has been formed, and must be printed with rules for its use along with the other Tables; and therefore it is sufficient at present to state the results for Ramsgate 1864. The corrections thus formed are to be subtracted from the values of A,, A,, &e., to first approximation, and are as follows :— 21. Table of Corrections of the 6 x 16 Coefficients A,, B,, &e. 8 K L M N O (y—n) (y) (y-8e-4@) (y-9) (y—-3e+3a) (y—20) A, —"0025 —"o002 —"0021 +:0087 Ors —"0032 B, +0015 +0001 —"0050 —*0003 +-0032 +°0056 A, —oo18 —'0313 +:0065 —*0009 +:0093 —"o188 B, —"o104 +'0105 —'0338 +0033 +cor1or —"0008 A, +*0009 +0087 —*0074. —"0025 —"ooor —*0063 13% — "0004. —*0074. +0152 —"ools +'0044. -+"0032 502 REPORT—1868. Table of Corrections of the 6 x 16 Coefficients A,, B,, &c. (continued). K L M N O (y—) (vy) (y-30-3@) (y-9) (y-$e+30) (y—20) A, —*0005 +0043 +0067 —‘oool +0015 —*0046 B; —"0013 +'0026 —"0041 —"0013 +'0016 —"0003 A, +°0105 —‘o1or +°0037 + "0009 —"0052 + ‘0024 B, —"o184 +°0075 +0020 —‘ooI4 +:0088 —‘o1og A, —'0198 +oo12z —‘oorr — ‘0007 —"0004. —'0097 B, — ‘0042 +0009 +0017 + °Oo17 —"0020 —*0067 AY —*0030 +°'0039 —"O145 —*0002 +:0021 +:0086 B, —*0035 +'0042 +0014 —"‘oolo —'0031 —"0103 A, +0002 — "0009 —"0431 + "0005 + "0008 +°0029 B, -+-*oool +0064 +°0362 —‘Ool4 —‘oolo —*0030 Values of A,, A,, &c., to second Approximation. 8 K L M N O (y—7) (y) (y-0-3e) (7-9) (y-$0+4%) (y—20) A, +0'0256 —0°2050 —0'0284 +0'0136 +0'0332 —0'2931 5, —0'0270 —0°0237 —0'0070 —0°0055 +0°'0016 +0'0631 A, +1°5616 —0'4227 —0'2341 —4°3167 +0°8098 —o'0716 Is +1°0027 —o'0166 +0°3007 +4 5004 —0°7443 -+o°0001 A, +0°0077 —o'0050 —0'0022 —o'01l3 —0'0007 —o’oo1o B, +0°0008 +0°0089 —0'0059 +0°0423 +0°0067 +0°0046 AN, +0°0300 —o’oI70 —0'°0524. —0°5442 —o*o1og +0°0076 B, -+0°0022 —0'0047 —o0'0886 —o'0865 —0'0138 +0°0037 A, —O'OIOS -+0°0050 —o'0060 +0°0023 -+-0°0039 —o"0002 B, +0°0213 —0°0003 +0°0026 +0°0033 —0'0036 +0°0035 A, +0'0215 —0'0020 —0°0039 —O'lI2§ —0'0283 +0°0035 Bs +o'o110 +o0'0018 —o'0096 —O'li3I —0°0004. +0'0107 A, +0°0038 —0*0009 +0°0089 +0°0023 —0°0042 +oo116 B, +o0'0081 —0'0053 -+0°0029 —o'0021 +0'0027 +0°0019 A, +0'0009 +0°'0067 +o'ooro +0'0290 +0'0040 —0'0086 B, +0'0027 — 0°0097 —0'0050 — 00402 -+-0°0009 +0°0103 ‘A. 10°1988 10°1989 10°1843 I0°1g992 10°1853 IO°I1971 22. The values A,, B, in columns § and M express the mean solar semi- diurnal and mean lunar semidiurnal tides. A,, B, of column K express the lunar declinational semidiurnal tide. A,, B, of columns L and N express two constituents of the lunar elliptic semidiurnal tide. A,, B, of column O express zero tolerably well*. A,, B, of columns K and O express the two constituents of the lunar diurnal tide. é A,, B, of column § express one constituent of the solar elliptie diurnal tide. A,, B, of column M express one constituent of the lunar elliptic diurnal tide t. A,, B, of columns L and N possibly depend on the elliptic lunar diurnal tides, but will no doubt be found a better approximation to zero when * There being no theoretical tide of the period corresponding to them. _ t Being the resultant of the two corresponding angular velocities y—o+m and y—o—@, inasmuch as for a single year the effect of the +m may be neglected. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 5038 calculated by the average of several years. There is no tide corresponding strictly to them. A,, B, are, as they ought to be, very good approximations to zero in all the columns except M. Their values in this column constitute, probably, a genuine expression of the ter-diurnal lunar tide {not included in the pre- ceding general schedule (§ 2) but referred to in § 3], investigated by Laplace as depending on the fourth power of the moon’s parallax. A,, B, express shallow-water tides* derived from the lunar semidiurnal tide, according to precisely the same dynamical principle as that by which Helmholtz has explained the over-tones generated in very loud sounds, even when the source of the sound is a simple harmonic motion. There ought to be no sensible tide expressed by A, and B, in column L, and the comparative largeness of these numbers is probably an accident, owing either to errors of observation or the imperfection of the system of combination adopted, or a chance concurrence of disturbance due to wind &e. A,, B, in almost every column approximate remarkably well to zero; and even their greatest values (those of column §$) express merely a deviation of =, of a foot (or 0-3 of an inch) on each side of the mean level. A,, B, may be considered as insensible for every column except M, for which they express, as they ought to do, an undoubtedly genuine shallow water tide, being the second harmonic (as it were overtone) of the lunar semidiurnal tide. A,, B, are very good approximations to zero in all the columns. A,, B, in column M express probably.a genuine, though very small, shallow-water tide, the third harmonic of the lunar semidiurnal tide. There is a very good approximation to zero in all of the other columns. 23. It is interesting, with reference to the mode of reduction which has been adopted, to remark to how nearly zero the comparatively large values of A., B, in column O, and A,, B, in column L of the first approxima- tion are reduced by the corrections found in the second approximation, explained above. Selecting from the preceding Table the coefficients which are each probably a genuine tide, and applying the proper correction (Everett, Roy. Soc. Edin. Trans. 1860) to take account of the circumstance that the mean height for each hour has been virtually taken for the height at the middle of the hour, we have the following, according to notation of § 2. Ss) K L M N O (y—n) (y) (y-ke-3e) (y-0) (y-$e+3a) (y—2c) R, 0'0373 0°2070 BE che O'OI45 bd 0°3008 €, 313° 28"9 )©=— 186° 362 x 337° 589 eee 167° 51"0 R, 1°8772 0°4279 0°3856 6°3078 1°1126 €, 32° 42"2 182° 14"g9 127° 53"7 133° 48'4 «317° 246 pee beoe Brafeya 0°0448 Jeysrs ofe\ ako €, aSor sores are 104° 57'°4 A600 : R, 070315 fees o°1078 0°5771 &4 4 11"4 vane 239° 24"7 189° 1"'9 R, 0'0268 door ne O'1771 €, Da ae Dope goles 225° 8'°3 R, eOee Bice Aetoc 9"0599 €, Sich sia ae wists 305° 513 * Tt is this term that makes the whole resultant tide rise faster than it falls, as is _ generally observed in estuaries, and other localities separated from the oceans by con- siderable spaces of shallow water. 504 REPORT—1868. 24, The shallow-water tides referred to above depend on the rise and fall of the tide, amounting to some sensible part of the whole depth of the water, or, which comes to the same, the horizontal velocity of the water being sensible in comparison with the velocity of propagation of a long wave, through some considerable portion of the sea which sensibly influences the tides at the point of observation. Helmholtz’s explanation of compound sounds, according to which two sounds, each a simple harmonic, having mt, nt for their arguments, give rise, if loud enough, to sounds having for their arguments (m-+n)t, (m—n)t, suggest that the compound action of the solar and lunar semidiurnal tides, must give rise to shallow-water tides whose arguments are 2(¢—y)t and 2(2y—n—<)t. It is intended with the least possible delay to perform averagings with a view to determine these tides*, The great influence of the British Channel, and the large extent of it through which the shallow-water condition specified above is fulfilled, makes it probable that the new tidal constituents now anticipated will be found sensible. 25, The step next undertaken has been to find mean solar daily averages, and to purify these of lunar-diurnal and semidiurnal influence; and in a few days more I hope to determine the lunar fortnightly declinational and the solar semiannual tides; also the annual variation indicated by Mr. Ebenezer Maclean’s calculations ($ 10), and of the 2(¢—») luni-solar fort- nightly shallow-water tide suggested (§ 24) by Helmholtz’s theory of com- pound sounds. This work is now in progress?. 26. Observations made every quarter hour during several periods within four days at a station in the Fiji Islands, supplied to me through the kind- ness of Lieut. Hope, R.N., have been partially reduced, by a rigorous appli- cation of the method of least squares. This somewhat laborious process has been undertaken not only for the sake of the results to be obtained, which, considering the chaotic mass of statements constituting our present informa- tion regarding tides in the Pacific, we may regard as not without value in themselves, but also to show how much may be done by applying the harmonic analysis to a very short series of observations such as may be made in the course of a few days in any part of the world by surveying officers. I expect to be able in the present case to obtain somewhat accurate deter- minations of the mean lunar semidiurnal, the mean solar semidiurnal, the lunar diurnal, and the solar diurnal tides, each of which is probably sensible in the series of observed heights which have been supplied; but it has been necessary to defer this work to allow the full reduction of the Ramsgate 1864 series to be pushed on as far as possible towards completion before the present Meeting of the British Association. 27. The work requisite to obtain the results stated above has been, as may readily be conceived, very heavy; but a large part of it is available for other years and other places. It has been almost all performed by Mr. E. Roberts, who has devoted himself to it with most satisfactory zeal, ability, and perseverance, in intervals of his laborious duties for the Nautical * [Note added Dec. 1868.] This has now been done by Mr. Roberts for the 2(¢—m) (or synodie fortnightly) tide, and a very notable result has been obtained (see § 28 below); but as yet I cannot feel much confidence in it, because the period is that of the spring to neap and back to spring tides, and the Ramsgate instrument did not work well through the longer ranges (the buoy, for instance, sometimes rested on the bottom, and the failing curve-register was supplied by guess). The calculation xecessari/y includes instrumental errors depending on the gauge not working equally well through long and short ranges. + Mr. Roberts has since completed it. For results see § 28 below. [Note added Dec. 1868.] TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 505 Almanac Office. It is to be hoped that arrangements may be made to allow him to give his whole time to a continuance of the work during the ensuing year, with assistant calculators working by aid of printed tables according to methods which by the experience now gained may be put into the form of convenient practical rules. Thus, while Mr. Roberts may work out proper methods for short or irregular series of observations, others may be employed to deduce results from tide-gauge diagrams of other British ports, and from the admirable series of recorded heights (every quarter hour) for Brest and other French ports which have been shown to me in the Hydrographic Office in Paris through the kindness of MM. Liouville and Delaunay, and Admiral Paris, and which may be had, it is hoped, on application by the Committee. [Conclusion of Report up to Aug. 19, 1868.] Supplementary Report by Mr, Rozerts. 28. In the determination of the lunar monthly and solar annual (elliptic) tides, the lunar fortnightly and solar semiannual (declinational) tides alluded to above (§$ 25), and the luni-solar fortnightly shallow-water (synodic) tide (§ 24), let h be the height above the mean of the solar daily averages purified of lunar-diurnal and semidiurnal influence, then h=+A cos ot +B sin ot +C cos 2ot +D sin 2ot +C’ cos 2(o—n)¢ +D’sin 2(o—n)¢ +E cos nt +F sin n¢ +G cos 2nt +H sin 2n¢ Multiplying the value of h for each day by the respective values of cos ct, sin ot, cos 2at, sin 2ot, &c., calculated from 1864, Jan. 8'11"30™ as era of reckoning, for which <=0, and adding, we form the following equations :— feet. f+ 1r7o= 4181754 + 152B 4+ 27440 + 3:31D +4 2:75C' + 3'96D' 7 + 418E — o54F + 424Q@ — iH +558 = + 524 +183:25B — 338C + 1°73D — 4020’ + 1'99D' | + 673E + o25F + 686G + o5oH P4317 = + 244A — 3°38B 41837170 + o88D + 0650’ + og2D! , — r5oH — oroF — 2151G — o19H + 507 = + 331A + 173B + o88C +4181°33D + o'920' — o'72D' ’ + 305H — oo8F + 306G — o17H —150o2 = + 275A — 4o2B + o65C + o(92D +183:19C’ + o'97D! —- r6égsH — or1F — 1170G — o22H — 924 = + 396A + 1'99B + o'92C — o72D + 970’ +181°81D! a ei , + 325HE — o1roK + 3266 — o20H — 641 = + 418A + 673B — 150C + 305D — 168C’ + 3:25)! A ‘ +182'43H + otooKk — o14G + o0oH —2218 = — os4A + o25B — o10C — o08D — o1rC’ — orr0D! + oooH +182°57F — ocooG — ono 39 = 424A + 6@86B — 17510 + 3:06D — 1700’ + 3:26D! Fr pe ; — oH — oookF +182'43G + oooH +1304 = — wi1A + o50B — o19C — o17D — 0°22C' o'20D! + oooH — oooFk + ooG +182°57H ‘These equations, solved by successive approximations, give the following values of the coefficients :— 1868. 2M 506 REPORT—1868. feet. ae Bia: } the coefficients for the lunar monthly tide (elliptic). R= 0'0316 e=69° 47’ (5°30 mean solar days). e “ Pewee } the coefficients for the lunar fortnightly tide (declinational). R= 0'0331 6=56° 50’ (2°16 mean solar days). eee ge, hes x vacet } the coefficients for the luni-solar fortnightly shallow-water tide (synodic). = 00960 e=211° 56’ (8°69 mean solar days). F =—0'1216 R= o1270 e=253° 12’ (256°89 mean solar days). ee } the coefficients for the solar annual tide (elliptic and meteorological). G =+0'0225 | the coefficients for the solar semiannual tide (declinational and meteoro- H =+0'0713 logical ?). R= 0'0748 e=72° 29! (36°77 mean solar days). 29. The following Tables exhibit the comparative times of maximum of each of the preceding tides, and the times of maximum attraction to which each, if genuine and astronomical, is due. Lunar monthly tide. Solar annual tide. Maximum Moon Maximum Sun height in height in caer ea Nee i (calculation). apogee, 1864. Jan. 13 19 1863. Dec. 28 3 1864. Sept. 21 1864. July 2 Feb. 10 2 1864. Jan. 24 9g Mar. g 10 Feb. 20 9 April 4 18 Mar. 18 20 May 2 1 April 15 14 29 9 May 13 9 June 25 17 June 10 3 ree 3 . ae q a Solar semiannual tide. Sept. 15 16 I 12 _eomem Bie — ight ination, Nort Oct. 1340 Sept 27 17 (caleutation). be South (N. & S.)e Nov. 9 8 Oct. 25 6 d a Dec. 6 15 Nov. 22 1 1864. Feb. 14 1863. Dec. 22 8. 1865. Jan. 2 23 Dec. 19 21 Aug. 15 1864. June 21 N. Lunar fortnightly tide. Maximum Moon at Maximum Moon at height maximum declination, height maximum declination, (calculation). North and South (N.& S.). (calculation). North and South (N. & S.). 1864. d h 1864. d h ial 1864. d h 1864. d h Be 7 Jan. 10 15 Jan. 620 8. 21 3 July 19 21 July 16 6 §&. 20 16 24. 7 19 17. N.2 © Aug. 2 13 29 oO N,20 12 Feb. 6 23 Heb, 3 «78. 20 53 16 5 Aug. 12 17 8.20 4 20 15 16 o N.20 48 29 21 25 6 N.19 59 Mar. 5 7 Mar. 116 §&. 20 38 Sept. 12 13 Sept. 9 1 8. 19 50 18 23 14 7 “N, 20 32 oa) 5 21 13 N.19 46 April 1 14 28 23 8. 20.25 Oct. 9 20 Oct. 6 7 S. 19 40 15 6 Aprilio 16 N.20 22 DVO 18 22 N. 19 39 28 22 25 ssw ZOurG Nov. 6 4 Noy.. 2 12 “S. 19/38 May 12 14 May 8 x N.20 19 Ig 20 15 28. JN. aprsg 26 6 22 10 §&. 20 20 Dec. 3 12 29 19 8S. 19 40 June 8 22 June 4.10 N.20 21 nop wee Dec. 12 18 N,19 41 22 1 18 19 8. 20 20 30 20 27 5 8. 19 40 qy ia 4 ony un qy EF | _ -_ N A pn oO »n oO TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 507 Synodie fortnightly tide. Maximum Moon’s phase, Maximum Moon’s phase, height New and Full height New and Full (calculation). (N. & F.). (calculation). (N. & F.,. 1864. d h.- 1864. d h 1864. d h 1864. d h Jan. 17 4 Jan. 8 20 N. July 27 3 July 18 19 F. gE 22 23 10 EF. Aug. 10 21 Augr oS agi. Feb. 15 17 Keb. 7 GN. 25 16 ig Zui Mer. I 11 22) 5H. Sept. 9g 10 Ti Toon: 16 6 Mar. 7 16 N. 24 4 Sept.15 9 F. a2. 6 22,32 K, Oct. 8 23 30 11 N, April 14. 18 April 6 2N. Bg iy Oct. 14.18 F. 29 13 a0 1g F. Nov. 7 11 30 — aN: May.14 7 May 5 12 N. 22 6 Nov. 13 6 F. 4 29 1 ar (aie Dec. 7 © 28 19 N. - June 12 20 June 4 oN. 21 19 Dee. 12 19 F. . 27 14 19 11 F. 1865. duly 12 9 July 3 12 N. Jam. "543 28g IN. 30. For the sake of comparison between the calculated heights and the heights given by the diagram sheets, one day has been selected at random, and the heights computed from the results obtained, neglecting all tides whose maximum effect did not exceed 1 inch (-083 of a foot). The following are the results :— Heights Heights Calculated from Calculated from heights. diagram. Difference. heights, diagram. Difference. Cc [e) - Cc oO -0O 1864. h ft. ft. ft. 1864. h ft. ft. ft. Aug. 18 o 19°06 19°05 -+oror | Aug. 18 12 13°95 18°7 +025 I 17°96 17°65 +031 nie) 18°69 18°55 +or14 2 15°04 14°6 +044. 14, 16°58 16°65 —0'07 3 1r'lo 10'9 +020 15 13°00 13° —oa'lo 4 6°93 73 0°37 16 8°86 9°55 —o'bg 5 3°63 4°45 —o'82 17 5°18 6°05 —o'87 6 1°65 2°4 —0'75 18 2°84 3°6 —0'76 7 1°25 I°5 —0'25 19 I*90 2°45 —0'55 8 3°09 2°45 +0°64 20 2°96 2°9 0-06 9 7:28 6°15 +113 21 6°40 5°65 +075 10 12°58 12'I +048 22 11°41 10°45 --o'96 II 16°92 17°6 —0'68 23 16°38 16°95 —0'57 It will be noticed that the largest differences are about the times of half- tide, and which can be accounted for by the diagram sheets not answering to the times as shown by the clock, a discrepancy of only five minutes (a very _ probable amount for the Ramsgate diagrams) causing at these times a differ- ence in heights of 6 inches. The barometer has probably been higher than the average on the day selected. 31. A series of tide-records, taken near the entrance of the George’s Docks, Liverpool, has been supplied, on application, by the kindness of the Board of the Mersey Dock Estate. The heights through about twelve hours each, during three interruptions in the tide curve (caused by the accidental stopping of the clock), have been inferred from the tide-diagrams of the self- registering tide-gauge at Helbre Island at the mouth of the Dee. This series promises to give as good determinations as can probably be obtained from the diagrams of a self-registering tide-gauge, the sheets having apparently been ost carefully stretched round the drum, and the apparatus watched from | Ume to time. 82. The diagram sheets are divided into quarter hours and quarter feet, d the heights have been read off for each quarter hour, although in the reductions at present in hand the height at each integral mean solar hour has 2m 2 . 508 REPORT—1868. alone been used, tables similar to those described above (§ 14) not having at present been adapted to quarter-hour observations. 33. The periods chosen are the same length as those used in the Ramsgate series, and the observations have been dealt with in every way similarly to those of Ramsgate already described. ‘The observations extend from Sep- tember 1857 to September 1858. The datum-line is 12 feet below the level of the sill of George’s Dock. 34. The following are the values of A,, B,, &c. for Liverpool to first ap- proximation, to which point the analysis has at this time been completed :— 8 K L M N O (y—n) (y) (y-8e-3@) (y-2) (y-ge+3~) (y—20) A, +o'0198 —o'1806 —0'01 34 —0'0222 —0'c065 +o'106r B, +0°0463 +0°3380 +0°0186 —0°0237 —o'0488 —0'4206 A, +3°1645 +0°8899 +0'3639 — 61277 —0'6508 +0°2528 B, +0825 = 07690 — 04247, +-7°3394 = +7183, 01766 A, +o'0062 +o'0164. —oO’ollt +0'0773 — 00095 +0'0084 B, +0'0304 +0'0123 —o'0148 -0'0607 --o'0199 +0'0294 A, 070515 -+-o°0130 +o'0189 —0'6502 —0'0500 — 070095 B, —0'0400 +0:0199 +o0'0980 —0'0866 + 0'0342 +oo115 A. —0°0045 +0'0033 +0'0188 +oro141 --o'001§ —O'OIl5 B, +0'0085 —0'0014 +oro150 +o0'0120 +0'0128 —0'0073 A, —0°0090 —o'0048 +0'0048 —0°0784 +0'0036 —0°0227 B, —0'0066 +0'0054. +0'0126 +0°1497 070075 —o'0190 le —0°0022 —o'coo6 —0'0047 +o0'0172 +070085 +0'0134 B, —0°0027 —0'0058 +o0'0016 —0'0004. —0'0207 —0'O175 A, 00002 —0°0045 —0'0778 —0°0503 +0'0113 —o'O122 B, —0°0059 —0°003I -+-0'0607 — 0°01 42 0'0135 +o'0169 A, 16°7192 16°7129 16°7189 16°7215 16°7198 16°7072 Series calculated with these terms agree closely with the original sets of means, the greatest difference being only 0-073 of a foot. 35. Professor Fuller having applied to W. Parkes, Esq., M. Inst. C.E., for a set of tide observations of any port in India, that gentleman has kindly placed at the disposal of, the Committee, for analysis, a series of personal tide observations taken at Bombay from January 29, 1867 to June 4, 1867. The heights were observed at successive intervals of ten minutes, and were taken under the superintendence of Mr. Ormiston, C.E. A few breaks of short duration in the observations have been supplied from a curve plotted for each day of interrupted observation. The datum-line is 72 feet below the level of the Town Hall datum. 36. The observations were not used as they were given, but heights for each quarter hour, the heights for the fifteen and forty-five minutes past each hour being interpolated. Tables similar to those previously described (§ 14), but adapted for the reduction. of observations taken for every quarter hour, have been made for a period of 127 days. It is intended to extend these Tables to the same length as those adapted for the hourly observations, by the use of which it is expected that a much less laborious process will suffice for correcting the first approximations of A,, B,, &c. than that by the use of the second set of Tables ($ 15). (The observations of Liverpool may here- after be reduced by the aid of these proposed quarter-hour Tables should it appear probable that better results than those now being obtained from the hourly observations may be expected.) TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 509 37. The following are the values of A,, B,, &c. for Bombay to first approxi- mations, to which point the analysis has at this time been completed :— 8 K L M N oO (y—1) (y) (y-4e-4~) (y-2) (y—-$e+45%) (y—20) A, —0'4488 —1'0522 +0°0168 +0'0713 —0'0380 +0'0777 B, +0°6221 —04854 —0'2350 —o'0782 —o'O412 —6°5523 A, +1°8245 —o'8071 —o'2669 +4°3095 +0'7291 —oroorr B, +0475 = +0°3340 9 —o'1679 = —0'2053 = 06429 = 071524. A, —0°0059 —0°0270 +o0'0172 —0°0475 +0'0132 +o'0l43 B, —0'0079 +o'0113 +0'0024 —0'0664 +or0081 +0°0185 A, -+0°0056 +0°0075 —0'0366 +o'1008 +0'0064 070000 B, —0°0215 +o'0061 —0'0284 +o'ol12 00026 — 070042 A, +0'0067 —o'0048 +0'0003 -+0'0003 —0'0029 +0°006r B, —0'0096 —o0°0066 —o'0108 —o'o102 +0'0123 —0°0034. A, +0'0045 —0'0051 +ororrr -+-oroorg —0°'0029 —0'0031 B, +0'0006 —O°OOI7 -+-0°0070 —0'0234. +0°0093 —o°004.1 A, —0°0005 —0°0026 —o'o108 +0'0049 -+o'o021 —o'0061 B, —o'0041 —0°0005 + 0°0041 +0°0060 -+o'0050 0'0054. A, —0'0036 +0'0013 +0'0078 —0'00l3 -+-070048 —0'0036 B, —o'oo1o —o*ooor +-0'0002 —O°0013 +o'0018 -+0'0029 A, 8:2004 82017 82015 82054. $:2010 $:1970 The series computed from these terms agree to a’ remarkable extent with the series from which they were deduced. 38. The observations taken at Ngaloa, in the Fiji Islands, mentioned at § 26, have not at present been completely reduced, the computations being still in the same state as at the date of the Meeting of the British Association, but will again be shortly taken up. 39. Before closing this Report it may not perhaps be inappropriate to refer to a few among the innumerable benefits that may be anticipated from a better knowledge of the laws of the tides. Among the scientific results which are likely to be deduced from the foregoing system of analysis of tide-obser- vations, are an evaluation of the mass of the moon, definite information regarding the rigidity of the earth, an approximation to the depth of the sea from the observed velocities of tide-waves, and the retardation of the earth’s rotation due to tidal friction. Physical geography will probably gain some knowledge as to the amount of water-surface in the hitherto unexplored districts of the Arctic and Antarctic regions, and more reliable information with respect to the origin, direction, and progress of tide-currents over the surface of the oceans. The effect of atmospheric pressure will be estimated, and also an approximation due to the effect of wind on the height of the tide from the simultaneously observed direction and force of the wind at different ports. And the practical benefits to be derived from an accurate knowledge of the height of the tide at any time are certainly very great. Among them may be mentioned the navigation of large ships over shoals and bars, the docking, undocking, launching, and hauling up of vessels, and the floating off of stranded ships, and the working of small craft,—all operations in preparing for which a more or less exact foreknowledge of the tidal move-. ments is required. The preservation of property, and the protection of un- finished works from the overflowing of rivers at very high tides, and engi- oe works carried on between high and low water, may be powerfully aided. 510 REPORT—1868, From tide-observations made at considerable intervals, and reduced in the manner followed above, some approximation to the secular changes (caused by the widening or narrowing, the deepening or filling up of rivers) can to some extent be estimated, and embankments or other protections carried out at those places where the tide is making encroachments, and a surer foundation afforded for the reclamation of land. There can be no doubt that in all these operations every advance towards more perfect knowledge of the tidal movements will be accompanied by an economy of time and labour which in the aggregate must be very considerable. 40. It may here be mentioned that there now appears to be a considerable difference in the spring-range of the tide in the Thames at the London Docks (amounting to 13 inches in twenty-five years), caused, it is supposed, by the remoyal of obstructions, extensive dredging, and the construction of the em- bankment. In the Admiralty Tide-tables the heights of high water have been augmented by the apportioned amount, but no correction has been applied to the times of high water, which are also probably different. It is to be hoped that the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty may be pleased to direct that new determinations of the tides in the Thames and other places be made with a view of obtaining the requisite foundation for more extensive tide-tables than those now published, and supplying to the mariner more accurate and complete knowledge of the tides along our coasts. Report of the Committee for the purpose of investigating the rate of Increase of Underground Temperature downwards in various Loca- lities, of Dry Land and under Water. Drawn up by Professor Everert, at the request of the Committee, consisting of Sir W1LL1aM Tuomson, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. E. W. Briyney, F.R.8., F.G.S., Principal Forsus, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. Ancurpatp Guixie, F.R.S., F.G.8., Mr. James Guaisuer, F.R.S., Rev. Dr. Granam, Mr. Freemine Jenkin, C.L., F.R.S., Sir Coartus Lyewz, Bart., LL.D., F.R.S., My. J. Cterx Maxwettz, Mr. Guorcz Maw, F.L.S., F.G.S., Prof. Puituirs, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. Punertiy, F.R.S., F.G.S., Professor Ramsay, F.R.S., F.G.S., Mr. Batrour Srewart, LL.D., F.R.S., Mr. G. J. Symons, Professor James Toomson, C.E., Pro- fessor Younc, M.D., F.R.S.E., and Professor Everert, D.C.L., F.RS.E., Secretary. Tue following Circular, issued to the Committee in November 1867, explains the plan of procedure proposed, and the progress made in the investigation up to that time :— Srr,—No Meeting of the Committee has yet been held ; and as the Members are scattered over the country, it appears undesirable to wait for a Meeting. I therefore take this opportunity of laying before vou the suggestions of Sir W. Thomson and myself with regard to the system of observation which should be adopted, and shall be glad to receive any suggestions of your own in reply. The object of investigation is the rate at which, in various localities, the temperature of the earth increases in going downwards, at depths sufficiently great to render the annual range of temperature insensible. ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE. 511 The annual range of temperature diminishes in the ratio of 2 or 3 to 1 for every 10 feet of descent, and becomes reduced to a tenth of a degree Fahr. at depths of from 50 to 80 feet in this climate,—these results being derived from observations extending to 25 feet of depth, made at Greenwich and at three localities in Edinburgh. A great boring or excavation, such as a mine, necessarily produces much disturbance of the normal temperature in its neighbourhood, and therefore, while observations in mines ought not to be neglected, we think the efforts of the Committee should be chiefly directed towards finding the temperatures at various depths in smaller borings, such as are usually made preliminary to mining-operations. As these are often carried to depths of from 300 to 600 feet, they will furnish very measurable differences of temperature at different depths in the same boring. It is suggested that observations should be made at every 50th foot of depth. E A method which has been used by Angstrém will probably be found most convenient. It consists in enclosing a thermometer in a large glass bottle of water, letting it down to the point where the temperature is to be taken, leaving it in that position long enough to ensure that its temperature shall not differ sensibly from that of the soil nearest to it, then drawing it quickly up and reading off the thermometer before time is allowed for any sensible variation in its temperature. It would probably be found advisable to use two pistons or plugs (two bags of sand might answer the purpose), one above and the other below the bottle, to check currents of air or of water. The thermoelectric method might also be followed with great advantage. Two wires, one of iron and the other of copper, insulated by gutta percha or some other covering as in submarine cables, and connected at their ends, might be let down, so as to bring their lower junction to the point where the temperature is to be taken, their upper junction being immersed in a basin of water, and the circuit completed through a galvanometer. The tempera- ture of the water in the basin might then be altered till the galvanometer gave zero indication. An extremely accurate determination of the tempera- ture at various depths could in this way be obtained with great ease and expedition, when the apparatus had once been prepared; but the method by water-bottle, though requiring more time for the observations, will probably be in general preferred on account of its simplicity. Currents of water in a boring will render it unsuitable for our purpose ; but water free from currents will but little affect the accuracy of observa- tion. Every Member of the Committee is requested to find out borings, in his _ own neighbourhood or elsewhere, that would be suitable for the investigation, and also to state whether he could undertake to make the observations him- self, the thermometers or other apparatus required being supplied by the Committee. Sir Wm. Thomson has already ordered from Casella two thermometers _ suitable for the water-bottle method, and expects to have them almost imme- — _ diately for trial; they are spirit thermometers, with Fahrenheit scales, and _ are to be accurate toa tenth of a degree. Your reply at your earliest convenience, with any suggestions you may eve tovoffer, will oblige Your obedient Servant, J.D, Evrrert, Queen’s College, Belfast, Nov. 16, 1867. Secretary to the Committee. 512 REPORT—1868. The only observations yet taken in answer to the above invitation were made near Glasgow by Sir W. Thomson, from whose recent paper on Geo- logical Time (Trans. Geol. Soc. Glasgow, vol. ii. part 1) the following para- graph (§ 29) may now be quoted. «« All sound naturalists agree that we cannot derive accurate knowledge of underground temperature from mines. But every bore that is made for the purpose of testing minerals gives an opportunity of observation. If a bore is made, and is left for two or three days, it will take the temperature of the surrounding strata. Let down a thermometer into it, take proper means for ascertaining its indications, draw it up, and you have the measure of the temperature at each depth. There are most abundant opportunities for geo- thermic surveys in this locality, by the numerous bores made with a view to testing minerals, and which have been left, either for a time or perma- nently, without being made the centre of a shaft. Through the kindness of Mr. Campbell, of Blythswood, several bores in the neighbourhood of his house have been put at the disposal of the Committee of the British Associa- tion, to which I have referred. In one of these bores very accurate observa- tions have been made, showing an increase of temperature downwards, but which is not exactly the same in all the strata, the difference being no doubt due to different thermal conductivities of their different substances. I need not specify minutely the numbers ; but I may say, in a general way, that the average increase is almost exactly 1, of a degree Fahrenheit per foot of descent; which agrees with the estimate generally admitted as a rough average for the rate of increase of underground temperature in other lo- calities. «Another bore has been put at the disposal of the Committee, and the investigation of it is to be commenced immediately, so that [ hope in the course of a few days some accurate results will be got. It has been selected because the mining engineer states in his report that the coal has been very much burned or charred, showing the effect of heat ; and it becomes an in- teresting question, Are there any remains of that heat that charred the coal in ancient times, or has it passed off so long ago that the strata are now not sensibly warmer on account of it?” The following report of these observations has been sent by Sir W. Thomson to the Secretary of the Committee :— The operations were commenced in December last, with a spirit thermo- meter by Casella, having a stem 14 in. long, divided to tenths of a degree, and ranging from 39° to 61° Fahr.; it has a bulb 33 in. long by 1 in. diameter, is enclosed in an outer tube, nearly filled with spirit, and hermetically sealed; a protecting case of strong tin covered the whole; and to this case a stout copper wire was attached for lowering it in the bore. Before commencing the operations, the thermometer, thus mounted, was left in a vessel of water until the temperature remained unchanged ; it was then plunged into another vessel whose temperature differed by about 10° Fahr. from the former, and an interval of more than a minute elapsed before any change of reading could be observed ; it was also ascertained that it could be raised from a depth of 60 fathoms and a reading taken within this time. The following observations were then made at Blythswood, about five miles west of Glasgow, during December and January, in a bore (No. 1) 60 fathoms deep, and filled with water to a constant depth of about 2 fathoms from the surface :— ‘i i ie ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE. 513 Depth. Temperature. Mean Temp. Difference per foot. 347 ft. «B65 il BAT bites Visio 53-69 Ss 53-72 °. 300 52°77 001979 i, BPD eweeece. 52:76 . " 52-80 001967 a 2 ed saree cease D a 0-01800 180 50-49 tp 2 ; safer beeserapet 120 49-20 0-02133 ry rc 49-29 ik 49-20 002117 60 47-95 . ieee \ (ies 47-95 In all the observations taken with this thermometer, it was allowed to remain a day or two at least at each depth before being raised. The thermometer was next removed to a second bore, at a short distance from the former, which was originally 95 fathoms deep, but had become filled up with sediment 45 fathoms, leaving only 50 fathoms free. Observa- tions were made from early in March till the middle of April; the results from the greatest depths were pretty constant, but towards the surface they varied from time to time, occasioned in all probability by a constant flow of surface-water into the pipe, which found an escape at some unknown depth. The weather was generally wet, and there was always more or less entering the pipe, affected by the temperature of the air. It is considered that the thermometer acted very satisfactorily at the depths at which it was used; but it is doubtful if its indications could be relied on for considerably greater depths, on account of the time taken to wind it up; and the speed could not be safely increased, particularly if the bore has rough projections on its sides. An instance of this occurred in the middle of April. While raising the thermometer with considerable velocity, it stuck, and would neither move up nor down; it had to be left till means were got to detach it gently from the obstruction; and when brought to the surface, the upper part of its strong casing was half torn away, but the thermometer itself quite safe. With the view of obviating this difficulty, and of observing more rapidly, trials were being made at bore No. 1 with a thermo-electric junction of in- sulated copper and iron wire, let down to various depths, and the other junction placed in a vessel of water, which was heated or cooled, till a gal- vanometer showed no current, when the temperature was taken. Small discrepancies existed between the results thus obtained and those previously _ got directly with the thermometer ; but there has not been time hitherto to ascertain their cause. The chief difficulties to be overcome were the want of a steady stand for the galvanometer (one of Sir Wm. Thomson’s delicate mirror galvanometers), and the means of obtaining sufficient darkness to be able to read it. A third method has been tried, which promises to give satisfactory results, Two of Phillips’s maximum thermometers were furnished by Casella; but unfortunately on the second day of trial they met with an accident, and had to be returned to London to be repaired, and have only just now been re- 514 REPORT—1868. ceived. . They will, it is expected, be tried soon at several bores in the neighbourhood of Glasgow, one of which is 174 fathoms deep, and at about half that depth passes through 18 fathoms of greenstone. Several small hardy maximum thermometers, suited for rough work, are being constructed by Casella, and are to be had from him by any of the Members of Committee, or by parties recommended by them. Members of Committee are earnestly requested to cooperate energetically in the work. The arrangements now made for the supply of suitable thermo- meters will allow useful results to be easily obtained in great abundance, from every variety of situation where available bores exist, at small expense, and without much expenditure of time. Changes of the Moon’s Surface. By Baron Von Mivier. [A Communication ordered to be printed in extenso. | Tue earliest idea of the heavenly bodies was that they were simply accesso- ries of the earth, and existing only on her account. The course of astrono- mical discovery compelled these notions to give place to another view, that these heavenly bodies were independent spheres; from this naturally sprang a desire to learn more of these distant worlds. This desire can be accom- plished in part by means of the sight which the telescope gives of the sur- face of the heavenly bodies; and our own satellite in particular presents such a “ wealth of objects” that the most diligent efforts of the observer of the present day will fall far short of the representation of them all; and much, very much, must remain for his successors to accomplish. But though Riccioli more than 200 years ago attached to his ‘ Grimaldi’s Almanack’ of the Moon the superscription ‘ Nec homines vivere, nec plants erescere pos- sunt,’ and all subsequent observers must agree with him, yet there were not a few who sought to maintain a contrary opinion. In short, inhabitants of the moon have been sought for—Selenites, as Helvetius first called them. Gruithuysen hoped to see them when they might happen to be passing in a great mass through some mountain defile (wood-roads was his own word) ; and if they themselves could not be perceived, he was reluctant to abandon the hope that at least their buildings and similar works might be observed. But it is superfluous to dwell on a subject which rests upon such chimerical notions. ‘he changes which we meet with in the moon have been brought about by natural power far greater and more marked than all the artificial works we have been able to execute, and these changes are still working ; and since it cannot be doubted that with our present instruments it would be possible to perceive from the moon events such as some yolcanic eruptions, and the raising of a new island out of the depths of the sea, so may we take a hint to discover, if possible, such events in the moon, and to explain analogously anything seen or supposed to be seen there. First, let us con- sider the volcanoes of which Sir W. Herschel speaks. That renowned inquirer expresses himself with all possible caution; he plainly states that he makes use of the word only because there must be some term of designation, and that he aimed at nothing less than a definite explanation. Notwithstanding this caution, however, many authors have spoken of burning volcanoes in the moon as an undoubted fact, and with a reference to Herschel’s remarks. Her- schel was the only one at that time who possessed such resources, and it had long been usual to receive all his observations without the proof which no ON THE CHANGES OF THE MOON’S SURFACE. 515 one but himself was able to give. These volcanoes we now know were the strong shining Ring-mountains, Aristarchus, Copernicus, and Kepler, which he perceived on the dark part of the moon, and which every one who pos- sesses a telescope of sufficient power may also see at the approach of every first quarter of the moon. They always appear the same, with the excep- tion of the small variations caused by libration; and I have never missed them even in total eclipses, finding them even then bright and distinct enough to convince me by measurement that they were identical with those well-known Ring-mountains. This also would not have escaped the notice of Herschel, if the important and varied undertakings, of which he alone was capable, had left him time to attend more especially to the moon. Schréter, of Lilienthal, put forward to occupy the field left free by Herschel. With telescopes of dimensions little less than Herschel’s, he observed zealously and attentively the surface of the moon, and his “ Selenotopographical fragments” for a long time excited general attention, though they are now almost for- gotten ; in fact, it cannot be denied that he mainly promoted the science by gaining Harding and Bessel to astronomical pursuits, and providing them with means to dedicate themselves entirely to its service; for his instru- ments, which for a long time had crowded up the Gottingen Observatory, have after a close examination by Gauss been pronounced almost useless, and the telescopic mirrors which were presented to the Cabinet des Physiques are all that now remain. The observations were never collected, neither were his data offered to others for the purpose of being reduced to mean librations : and besides, he paid too little attention to the advice of his renowned friend Olbers ; he would discover variations on the moon’s surface, without found- ing on them a moon map, for he expressly declared that he regarded them as useless. My endeavours to obtain from his sketches a connected picture of the moon, or at least of a part of it, were in vain; and Bessel has shown the inaccuracy of his measuring-apparatus by giving in one design of Schroter 42" and in another 89" for one and the same distance. Kunowsky has proved that all these variations which he pointed out were mere illusions. If we desire to arrive at unmistakeable conclusions respecting physical changes on the moon’s surface, it is imperatively necessary to bear in mind the optical variations, which may consist (1) In displacement by libration. (2) In the different illumination by the sun. (3) In the changeable transparency of our atmosphere. (1) Mountains situated nearer the centre than the edge of the moon’s disk in appearance are but little affected by libration; the nearer the edge the more they are affected. In such a position a crater might be easily concealed by one of its sides, so that one might suppose it only a mountain; whilst by a libration, which removes it further from the edge, this concealment does not take place, and we get a sight of the crater, ¢. g. that of Schréter’s newly de- scribed crater in the Ring-mountain. evel is probably so to be explained, (2) Mountain-walls throw shadows as long only as the angle of the incli- nation is greater than the height of the sun above their horizon ; and more- over in places situated far from the centre of the moon, the shadow of a declivity is to our view concealed by the declivity itself; but the smaller mountains are only to be recognized by their shadows, and a whitish shadow- less spot may always be circular and sharply defined without our being able to distinguish whether here a crater, a mountain, or neither is exhibited. Most of the moon-mountains demand of us repeated observations if we would gain a right judgment respecting them. 516 REPORT—1868. (3) Also, without either clouds or fog being distinctly observed, the trans- parency of our atmosphere is very different according to time and place, and little faint projecting forms may easily become alternately visible or invisible without adducing any other cause than the changeable diaphanism of our atmosphere. This alternation is most conspicuous in the so-called “ rillen” (furrows), which, with few exceptions, are scarcely visible. I could point out many places which under the most favourable circumstance, of the air, appear streaked by numerous little rills, while at another time nothing, or nothing notable of them, is to be seen. An exception must be made only in the case of those which are so wide that we can perceive their shadows, as the rills near Huyghens and Aristarchus. Schmidt at Athens, who published a pam- phlet exclusively on the rills of the moon’s surface, has made the same remark. Again the green colour of some of the moon’s landscapes is scarcely visible ; it generally appears only when the moon is either quite or nearly full, therefore all the shadows are wanting. At that time, under favourable circumstances, the greatest part of the Mare Serenitatis appears of a uniform green colour, with a defined edge towards its blackish-grey margins. At other times these edges are observed, which are, however, but a lighter grey separated by a darker; but it is more difficult to distinguish clearly this green in Mare Crisium and Mare Humorum from the grey. Hitherto telescopes of large dimensions have not been employed, or at least not continuously, for the moon, for which we can find sufficient reason. If gigantic instruments are to manifest their full power on these objects, not only occasionally, but in an unbroken succession of nights, it is a matter of necessity that they be not placed in Northern or Central Europe, and espe- cially not in the lower regions of the atmosphere. Also they must admit of . a lighter and speedier manipulation, that it may be possible to direct them to all parts of the celestial vault. For double stars and nebulous spots, it may suffice that the tube is movable only in or near the meridian ; but this is by no means a sufficient condition for the moon, and we have never expected that Lord Rosse’s telescope would advance our moon knowledge. It is not here exclusively the question, in the first instance, of the utmost magnifying power; but quite different, and more difficult conditions must be realized. We have learned, through the meritorious labours of Piazzi Smith, the unex- pectedly great superiority which the Peak of Teneriffe offers to astronomical observations ; and we can adduce the experiences of others, which unite in proving that the highest possible stations in a tropical, or at least subtropical country are to be fixed upon as the most fit for observations of extreme deli- cacy. In Italy, Dominique Cassini had seen spots on the disk of Venus ; in Paris, though employing a more powerful instrument, he failed. I myself in Dorpat, and Lamont in Munich, have sought in vain for these spots which De Vico and Secchi found in Rome, and made use of for the determination of that planet’s rotation. In South America, Humboldt could see stars in the Great Bear which in Europe he in vain sought, although the constellation has a much greater altitude. Neither would Lassell have changed his residence to Malta, had he not been aware of the great difference between the two climates: where the shadows of the trees can plainly be perceived by Venus’s light, there also more can be attained for the moon than in our northern climate. But in order to observe our satellite uninterruptedly and successfully, it must be possible to turn our instrument to every part of the heavens. We must be able to observe the first visible sickle in the W. or NW. after the new moon, and in the same manner the last in the E. A telescope which ON THE CHANGES OF THE MOON’S SURFACE. 517 does not admit of this casy change of position may serve for other astrono- mical purposes ; for examinations of the moon’s surface it is useless. For even the largest refractors means may be devised to effect this ; but the great reflectors are mostly too unwieldly. Mechanics must contrive in this respect new means that the observer may be placed in a position to manage the great instrument in any direction that may be desired without extreme fatigue. For, besides that only under these circumstances all the moon’s phases can be used, it is often necessary to keep an object in view for many successive hours, in order to catch all its peculiarities. But, lastly, the carrying out completely the representation of an extensive moon landscape, or even of the whole visible hemisphere, is so comprehensive a task that it cannot be ex- pected from a single individual. W. Struvé, when he had set up the Dorpat refractor, thus expressed himself :—‘“ He who would delineate the moon with this telescope, must relinquish every other astronomical work ; for the details would be too many.” And it must be taken into consideration that the map- ping forms but a part of the labour here demanded, and that extended calcu- lations of the most varied kind must be made before and during the mapping; and thus we arrive at the conclusion that the greatest labour of an indivi- dual cannot suffice, but many must participate in the work. If, however, anything is to be gained by such united observation, the globe of the moon must be arranged by degrees of latitude, for only in this manner would its every phase be used by all employed,—a long and troublesome method, so that it might appear to many that the results would not be worth the trou- ble; but if we wish to become fully acquainted with the natural proportions of our satellite, we have no other choice. What has lately been observed in the crater Linné proves at all events that there real changes have taken place, and that too under circumstances even visible to us. Since Linné (by my work commenced thirty-eight years since) formed a chief point in the trigo- nometrical chain, I was enabled to give the proportionately exact infor- mation, which was desired from me on different sides. The occurrence of perceptible changes is therefore for the first time proved ; but equally remark- able is the circumstance that these events are rare ; for in seven years’ occu- pation with the moon’s surface I never met with such before, neither have Lohrmann and other careful observers of that time. Since, then, no doubt can be entertained that in such a case everything depends on being able to criticise how such an object appeared formerly, so might a possibly exhaustive representation and description of all the objects visible to us on the moon’s surface be the fundamental conditions of further intellectual advance. Photography will be able in many respects to facilitate the labours of which we have above spoken; undoubtedly our incipient hopes went much further ; but Uranology must rejoice in this new resource ; never- theless photographic representations of the moon cannot arrive at the details which an experienced eye and a large telescope can obtain; and in this case everything depends on the most exact representation of these delicate details. For the greater ring-mountains, plateaux, and chains of mountains belong to an epoch of formation very long past, and the present time does not dare to hope to perceive any changes in its general configuration ; and yet an occur- rence of which we are able to obtain knowledge is of the utmost importance. The crater Linné, which has hitherto offered the only authentic example of an admitted change, shows a diameter of 1:4 geographical miles, or six English miles ; and it appears to us only under an angle of 53 seconds. We can hardly dare to expect still greater and more extensive occurrences, and a considerable time will elapse before one will be able to give a comparative 518 REPORT—1868. combination of these perceived relations. My eye, which has undergone an operation for cataract, will no longer permit me to make accurate and special continuous observations; yet on the 10th of May, 1867, I attempted an observation of the crater Linné in the heliometer of the Observatory at Bonn. I found it shaped exactly, and with the same throw of shadow, as I remem- ber to have seen it in 1831. The event, of whatever nature it may have been, must have passed away without leaving any trace observable by me. I de- sire now to recommend to moon-observers a hitherto little considered subject, and one formerly very erroneously interpreted—the “ straits” of light which only show themselves in high sun illumination ; they make a show on Heye- lius’s map, and even much later, as Montes, Myconius, Eryx, Crates, Hereus, Sepher, and Seir, while still nothing is certain about them but that they are by no means elevations. Ridges of only 50 feet high are yet to be recognized through their shadow near the light edges, whilst these straits never show the smallest shadow, and vanish in the vicinity of the light edges. Their effect is that we perceive in the full moon but very little of what is seen in the quadratures, and especially near the light edges. Most probably it is only a very great capability of reflection of the ground by the high position of the sun and referrible to internal causes. They proceed in a radiating manner from single bright ring-mountains, especially from Tycho, Copernicus, Kepler, Byrgius, Aristarchus, and Olbers; from some other ring-mountains only single straits are proceeding on one side, as with Menelaus and Proclus. By a superficial observation they may easily be confounded with the moun- tain veins, and so much the more as these latter have often their origin at ring-mountains; but an attentive observer will easily remark essential dif- ferences between both appearances. I have endeavoured in my moon map to represent them; other observers (with the exception of those early ones who have explained them erroneously) have not come to my knowledge—I mean as to whether they have made research respecting changes which may occur in them. ‘The easiest to observe is the light strait which divides the M. Sere- nitatis almost equally in halves; still there is another circumstance which recommends it to a closer inquiry, viz. because it is visible almost up to the light edge. I have sometimes still observed traces of the N.W. part of the strait when that of the S.E. was yet covered in night, since none of the other straits admitted so long a visibility; I have examined it several times for traces of shadow, but never perceived the smallest. Lastly, I would point out the rills of the moon’s surface as objects whose visibility probably does not de- pend only on our atmosphere, but is to be referred to real changes; thus I have sought for two long years in vain for the 8.W. continuation of the Ariadseus rill (though its existence came to my knowledge from other quarters) till it came unexpectedly to my view in 1833—certainly a most delicate object. It will always be advisable to observe on the same evening, not merely a single rill, but many somewhat similar ones; for, as the earth’s atmosphere must exercise a like effect upon them all, so would a perceptible variation present us with a hint for further investigations. Wishes and propositions, with the recollections of former years, are all which I am now able to offer. May they be an inducement to younger and more vigorous observers to draw new and fructifying facts to the light of our science! and may our satellite, after the monstrous fables which for almost the space of many thousand years have gained credence respecting it, now begin, not only by its course, but also by its natural constitution, to permit us to pierce deeper into the secrets of the fabric of the universe! ON POLYATOMIC CYANIDES. 519 Report on Polyatomic Cyanides. By Tuomas Fairuey. I. Cyanororm. I wave spent many months and much material in endeayours to obtain this body in a pure state by the action of potassium-cyanide on chloroform. By heating these substances along with a considerable quantity of alcohol, a very dark-coloured liquid and mass are obtained, often containing free ammonia. On filtering the warm liquid and distilling off the alcohol, a small portion of very dark-coloured residue is left. The alcohol which passes over contains generally ammonia, hydrocyanic acid, and unaltered chloroform; but the amount of chloroform so obtained I have always found to be much less than that originally employed in the experiment. The same results are obtained whether the materials are heated in well-closed soda-water bottles, or in a flask connected with a reversed Liebig’s condenser. From the residue I have sought to isolate pure cyanoform. I have employed all the methods applied by Dr. Maxwell Simpson and others for the purification of cyanides, as well as other plans thought of by myself, but without success. On one occasion the residues from many operations had been collected and extracted with ether. Some quantity of this ethereal extract was obtained and carefully examined. The result was that it was found to consist in great measure of amylic alcohol, and other substances which were, I believe, impurities in the alcohol employed. A portion of residue obtained as above haying been tested and found free from alkaline cyanides, was heated with sodium. The product contained sodium-cyanide, as proved by the formation of prussian blue fromit. Boiled with caustic potash, ammonia is evolved, and the liquid, when neutralized, precipitates ferric chloride; whether this precipitate contains any new acid I did not make many attempts to ascertain. The hydrogenation of the crude residue gave as final results, chiefly ammonium-salts, but I did not make many experiments on a material which I knew was of uncertain composition. Two other methods for obtaining cyanoform I have thought of, and made preparations for. One is the action of potassium or other cyanides on bromoform, a small quantity of which I have prepared. The other is to form the nitrite of dichloracetic acid, and to act on it with cyanide of potassium. Ihave made experiments in this direction, but I am not yet able to report on them. II, CyanipE or Ernyiene. T have prepared this body from chloride of ethylene, by Maxwell Simp- _son’s process. Attempts to hydrogenize it gave results which did not agree with one another, but from which I have obtained chiefly succinic acid and salts of ammonia. The experiments made with this body showed the impor- tance of paying particular attention to the strength of acid and proportions of materials used. , III. Cyanogen &c. T have resumed experiments on the hydrogenation of this body, as it is the most convenient of these biatomic cyanides. When aqueous solutions and very dilute acid is used to act on the granulated tin, the products are oxalic acid, ammonia, and a small quantity of a base which gives a very deliquescent chloride. In two experiments which gave these results, the acid 520 REPORT—1868. was added at intervals during a fortnight, so that altogether it amounted to about five per cent. of the hquid. I have passed cyanogen and hydrogen, both perfectly dry, over platinum- black heated to 130°C. The tube containing the platinum was not connected till the hydrogen had been passed for about half an hour through the appa- ratus and drying tubes, and till the cyanogen was given off freely. ‘The hydrogen was dried by passing over five feet of pumice-stone soaked with sulphuric acid. The two gases were mixed in a three-necked Woulfe’s bottle, before passing over the platinum. They next passed into an empty bulb apparatus, and then into dilute acid (HCl). On making the connections, dense fumes filled that part of the apparatus next theacid. After some time a small quantity of liquid condensed in the empty bulb apparatus next the platinum. This was found to be strongly alkaline, and was neutralized with hydrochloric acid, and filtered repeatedly from a brown deposit which sepa- rated on standing. The determination of the platinum in the platinum-salt gave a result corresponding pretty closely to that which would be given by the platinum-salts of ethylenediamine or methylamine. The quantity of platinum-salt (a little over a decigramme) was, however, too small to give a sufficiently reliable percentage. The platinum-black soon changes, and loses its power. Water then gives with it a very dark-coloured solution, which I have not much examined. In order to obtain perfectly definite results in the hydrogenation of cyanogen and other cyanides, I have recently adopted the plan of estimating the amount of metal dissolved, and of the hydrogen or other gases evolved, from perfectly known quantities of materials, making each experiment as perfectly quanti- tative as possible. The experiments which I have made, and those which I am now carrying on, make me confident of being soon able to clear up the difficulties which I have worked at so long unsuccessfully. Note on the Solubility of Cyanogen in Sulphuric Acid.—Cyanogen dissolves readily in strong sulphuric acid, and is evolved in great measure unchanged on addition of water. The solution of cyanogen in sulphuric acid produces a beautiful purple colour with cuprous cyanide. Note on the preparation of Olefiant Gas.—Wohler recommended to add sand to the mixture of sulphuric acid and alcohol to prevent frothing. The objection to this is that the flasks used are very apt to break, by a part of the bottom becoming dry, and the liquid afterwards running down on it. I have found that pumice-stone in small pieces prevents frothing equally well, or better, and since it floats on the liquid, there is much less risk of breakage. — 2 NOTICES AND ABSTRACTS : MISCELLANEOUS COMMUNICATIONS TO THE SECTIONS. MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS. Address by Professor Tynpatt, LL.D., F.R.S., §c., President of the Section. THE celebrated Fichte, in his lectures on the “ Vocation of the Scholar,” insisted on a culture for the scholar which should not be one-sided, but all-sided. His intellectual nature was to expand spherically and not in a single direction. In one direction, however, Fichte required that the scholar should apply himself directly to nature, become a creator of knowledge, and thus repay by original labours of his own the immense debt he owed to the labours of others. It was these which enabled him to supplement the knowledge derived from his own re- searches, so as to render his culture rounded and not one-sided. Fichte’s idea is to some extent illustrated by the constitution and the labours of the British Association. We have here a body of men engaged in the pursuit of Natural Knowledge, but variously engaged. While sympathizing with each of its departments, and supplementing his culture by knowledge drawn from all of _ them, each student amongst us selects one subject for the exercise of his own original faculty—one line along which he may carry the light of his private intel- ligence a little way into the darkness by which all knowledge is surrounded. ‘Thus, the geologist faces the rocks; the biologist fronts the conditions and pheno- mena of life; the astronomer stellar masses and motions; the mathematician the properties of space and number; the chemist pursues his atoms, while the physi- cal investigator has his own large field in optical, thermal, electrical, acoustical, and other phenomena. The British Association, then, faces nature on all sides and pushes knowledge centrifugally outwards, while through circumstance or natural bent each of its working members takes up a certain line of research in which he aspires to be an original producer, being content in all other directions to accept instruction from his fellow men. The sum of our labours constitutes what Fichte might call the sphere of natural knowledge. In the meetings of the Association it is found necessary to resolve this sphere into its component parts, which take concrete form under the respective letters of our Sections. This Section (A) is called the Mathematical and Physical Section. Mathematics and physics have been long accustomed to coalesce, and hence this grouping. For while mathematics, as a product of the human mind, is self-sustaining and _nobl self-rewarding, while the pure mathematician may never trouble his mind wit considerations regarding the phenomena of the material universe, still the form of reasoning which he employs, the power which the organization of that reason- ing confers, the applicability of his abstract conceptions to actual phenomena, render his science one of the most potent instruments in the solution of natural . 1868, 2 REPORT—1868. problems. Indeed without mathematics, expressed or implied, our knowledge of physical science would be friable in the extreme. Side by side with the mathematical method we have the method of experiment. Here, from a starting-point furnished by his own researches or those of others, the investigator proceeds by combining intuition and verification. He ponders the knowledge he possesses and tries to push it further, he guesses and checks his guess, he conjectures and confirms or explodes his conjecture. These guesses and conjectures are by no means leaps in the dark; for knowledge once gained casts a faint light beyond its own immediate boundaries. There is no discovery so limited as not to illuminate something beyond itself. The force of intellectual penetration into this penumbral region which surrounds actual knowledge is not dependent upon method, but is proportional to the genius of the investigator. There is, however, no genius so gifted as not to need control and verification. The pro- foundest minds know best that Nature’s ways are not at all times their ways, and that the brightest flashes in the world of thought are incomplete until they have been proved to have their counterparts in the world of fact. The vocation of the true experimentalist is the incessant correction and realization of his insight; his ex- periments finally constituting a body, of which his purified intuitions are, as it were, the soul. Partly through mathematical and partly through experimental research, physi- cal science has of late years assumed a momentous position in the world. Both in a material and in an intellectual point of view it has produced, and it is destined to produce, immense changes,—vast social ameliorations, and vast alterations in the popular conception of the origin, rule, and governance of things. Miracles are wrought by science in the physical world, while philosophy is forsaking its ancient metaphysical channels and pursuing those opened or indicated by scientific re- search. This must become more and more the case as philosophic writers become more deeply imbued with the methods of science, better acquainted with the facts whee cee men have won, and with the great theories which they have ela- orated, If you look at the face of a watch, you see the hour- and minute-hands, and possibly also a second-hand, moving over the graduated dial. Why do these hands move? and why are their relative motions such as they are observed to be? These questions cannot be answered without opening the watch, mastering its various arts, and ascertaining their relationship to each other. When this is done, we find that the observed motion of the hands follows of necessity from the inner me- chanism of the watch when acted upon by the force invested in the spring. This motion of the hands may be called a phenomenon of art, but the case is similar with the phenomena of nature. These also have their inner mechanism, and their store of force to set that mechanism going. The ultimate problem of physical science is to reveal this mechanism, to discern this store, and to show that from the combined action of both the phenomena of which they constitute the basis must of necessity flow. I thought that an attempt to give you even a brief and sketchy illustration of the manner in which scientific thinkers regard this problem would not be uninteresting to you on the present occasion ; more especially as it will give me occasion to say a word or two on the tendencies and limits of modern science, to point out the region which men of science claim as their own, and where it ismere waste of time to op- pose their advance, and also to define, if possible, the bourn between this and that other region to which the questionings and yearnings of the scientific intellect are directed in vain. But here your tolerance will be needed. It was the American Emerson, I think, who said that it is hardly possible to state any truth strongly without apparent in- jury to some other truth. Under the circumstances, the proper course appears to be to state both truths strongly, and allow each its fair share in the formation of the resultant conviction. For truth is often of a dual character, taking the form of a magnet with two poles; and many of the differences which agitate the thinking part of mankind are to be traced to the exclusiveness with which different parties affirm one half of the duality in forgetfulness of the other half. But this waiting for the statement of the two sides of a question implies patience. It implies a reso- TRANSACTIONS OF THE SECTIONS, 3 lution to suppress indignation if the statement of the one half should clash with our convictions, and not to suffer ourselyes to be unduly elated if the half-statement should chime in with our views. It implies a determination to wait calmly for the statement of the whole, before we pronounce judgment either in theform of ac- quiescence or dissent. This premised, let us enter upon our task. There have been writers who affirmed ‘that the pyramids of Egypt were the productions of nature ; and in his early youth Alexander von Humboldt wrote an essay with the express object of refuting this notion. We now regard the pyramids as the work of men’s hands, aided probably by machinery of which no record remains. We picture to ourselves the swarming workers toiling at those vast erections, lifting the inert stones, and, guided by the yolition, the skill, and possibly at times by the whip of the architect, placing the stones in their proper positions. The blocks in this case were moved by a power external to themselves, and the final form of the pyramid expressed the thought of its human builder. Let us pass from this illustration of building power to another of a different kind. When a solution of common salt is slowly evaporated, the water which holds the salt in solution disappears, but the salt itself remains behind. Ata certain stage of concentration the Salt can no longer retain the liquid form ; its particles, or mole- cules, as they are called, begin to deposit themselves as minute solids, so minute, indeed, as to defy all microscopic power. As evaporation continues solidification goes on, and we finally obtain, through the clustering together of innumerable molecules, a finite mass of salt of a definite form. What is this form? It some- times seems a mimicry of the architecture of Egypt. We have little pyramids built by the salt, terrace above terrace from base to apex, forming thus a series of steps resembling those up which the Egyptian traveller is dragged by his guides, The human mind is as little disposed to look at these pyramidal salt-crystals with- out further question, as to look at the pyramids of Egypt without inquiring whence they came. How, then, are those salt-pyramids built up ? Guided by analogy, you may suppose that, swarming among the constituent molecules of the salt, there is an invisible population, guided and coerced hy some inyisible master, and placing the atomic blocks in their positions. This, however, is not the scientific idea, nor do I think your good sense will accept it as a likely one. The scientific idea is that the molecules act upon each other without the in- teryention of slave labour; that they attract each other and repel each other at cer- tain definite points, and in certain definite directions ; and that the pyramidal form is the result of this play of attraction and repulsion. While, then, the blocks of Egypt were laid down by a power external to themselves, these molecular blocks of salt are self-posited, being fixed in their places by the forces with which they act upon each other. - I take common salt as an illustration because it is so familiar to us all; but al- most any other substance would answer my purpose equally well. In fact, through- out inorganic nature, we have this formative power, as Fichte would call it—this structural energy ready to come into play, and build the ultimate particles of matter into definite shapes. It is present everywhere. The ice of our wintersand of our polar regions is its handywork, and so equally are the quartz, felspar, and mica of our rocks. Our chalk-beds are for the most part composed of minute shells, which are also the product of structural energy ; but behind the shell, as a whole, lies the result of another and more subtle formative act. These shells are built up of little crystals of calc-spar, and to form these the structural force had to deal with the intangible molecules of carbonate of lime. This tendency on the part of matter to organize itself, to grow into shape, to assume definite forms in obe- dience to the definite action of force, is, as I have said, all-pervading. It is in the ground on which you tread, in the water you drink, in the air you breathe. Incipient life, in fact, manifests itself throughout the whole of what we call inor- ganic nature. The forms of minerals resulting from this play of forces are various. and exhibit different degrees of complexity. Men of science avail themselves of all possible means of exploring this molecular architecture. For this purpose they employ in tum as agents of exploration, light, heat, magnetism, electricity, and sound. 1* 4 REPORT—1868. Polarized light is especially useful and powerful here. A beam of such light, when sent in among the molecules of a crystal, is acted on by them, and from this action we infer with more or less of clearness the manner in which the molecules are arranged. The difference, for example, between the inner structure of a plate of rock-salt and a plate of crystallized sugar or sugar-candy is thus strikingly revealed. These differences may be made to display themselves in phenomena of colour of great splendour, the play of molecular force being so regulated as to remove certain of the coloured constituents of white light, and to leave others with increased in- tensity behind. And now let us pass from what we are accustomed to regard as a dead mineral to a living grain of corn. When ?t is examined by polarized light, chromatic phe- nomena similar to those noticed in crystals are observed. And why? Because the architecture of the grain resembles in some degree the architecture of the crystal. In the corn the molecules are also set in definite positions, from which they act upon the light. But what has built together the molecules of the com? I have already said regarding crystalline architecture that you may, if you please, con- sider the atoms and molecules to be placed in position by a power external to themselves. The same hypothesis is open to you now. But if in the case of erystals you have rejected this notion of an external architect, I think you are bound to reject it now, and to conclude that the molecules of the corn are self-posited by the forces with which they act upon each other. It would be poor philosophy to invoke an external agent in the one case and to reject it in the other. Instead of cutting our grain of corn into thin slices and subjecting it to the action of polarized light, let us place it in the earth and subject it to a certain degree of warmth. In other words, let the molecules, both of the corn and of the surrounding earth, be kept in a state of agitation ; for warmth, as most of you know, is, in the eye of science, tremulous molecular motion. Under these circumstances, the grain and the substances which surround it interact, and a molecular architecture is the result of this interaction. A bud is formed ; this bud reaches the surface, where it is exposed to the sun’s rays, which are also to be regarded as a kind of vibratory motion. And as the common motion of heat with which the grain and the sub- stances surrounding it were first endowed, enabled the grain and these substances to coalesce, so the specific motion of the sun’s rays now enables the green bud to feed upon the carbonic acid and the aqueous vapour of the air, appropriating those constituents of both for which the blade has an elective attraction, and permitting the other constituent to resume its place in the air. Thus forces are active at the root, forces are active in the blade, the matter of the earth and the matter of the atmosphere are drawn towards the plant, and the plant augments in size. We have in succession the bud, the stalk, the ear, the full corn in the ear. For the forces here at play act in a cycle which is completed by the production of grains similar to that with which the process began. Now there is nothing in this process which necessarily eludes the power of mind as we know it. An intellect the same in kind as our own would, if only suffi- ciently expanded, be able to follow the whole process from beginning to end. No entirely new intellectual faculty would be needed for this purpose. The duly ex- panded mind would see in the process and its consummation an instance of the play of molecular force. It would see every molecule placed in its position by the spe- cific attractions and repulsions exerted between it and other molecules. Nay, given the grain and its environment, an intellect the same in kind as our own, but suffi- ciently expanded, might trace out @ prior? every step of the process, and by the application of mechanical principles would be able to demonstrate that the cycle of actions must end, as it is seen to end, in the reproduction of forms like that with which the operation began. A similar necessity rules here to that which rules the planets in their circuits round the sun. You will notice that I am stating my truth strongly, as at the beginning we agreed it should be stated. But I must go still further, and affirm that in the eye of science the animal body is just as much the product of molecular force as the stalk and ear of corn, or as the crystal or salt of sugar. Many of its parts are obviously mechanical. Take the human heart, for example, with its exquisite system of valves, or take the eye or the hand. Animal heat, moreover, is the same in kind TRANSACTIONS OF THE SECTIONS. 5 as the heat of a fire, being produced by the same chemical process. Animal mo- tion, too, is as directly derived from the food of the animal, as the motion of Trevethyck’s walking-engine from the fuel in its furnace. As regards matter, the animal body creates nothing; as regards force, it creates nothing. Which of you by taking thought can add one cubit to his stature? All that has been said regard- ing the plant may be restated with regard to the animal. Every particle that enters into the composition of a muscle, a nerve, or a bone, has been placed in its osition by molecular force. And unless the existence of law in these matters be enied, and the element of caprice introduced, we must conclude that, given the relation of any molecule of the body to its environment, its position in the body might be predicted. Our difficulty is not with the guality of the problem, but with its complexity; and this difficulty might be met by the simple expansion of the faculties which man now possesses. Given this expansion, and given the necessary molecular data, and the chick might be deduced as rigorously and as logically from the egg as the existence of Neptune was deduced from the disturbances of Uranus, or as conical refraction was deduced from the undulatory theory of light. You seeI am not mincing matters, but avowing nakedly what many scientific thinkers more or less distinctly believe. The formation of a crystal, a plant, or an animal, is in their eyesa purely mechanical problem, which differs from the pro- blems of ordinary mechanics in the smallness of the masses and the complexity of the processes involved. Here you have one half of our dual truth ; let us now glance at the other half. Associated with this wonderful mechanism of the animal body we have phenomena no less certain than those of physics, but between which and the mechanism we discern no necessary connexion. A man, for example, can say I feel, I think, I love; but how does consciousness infuse itself into the problem ? The human brain is said to be the organ of thought and feeling ; when we are hurt the brain feels it, when we ponder it is the brain that thinks, when our passions or affections are excited it is through the instrumentality of the brain. Let us endeavour to be a little more precise here. [ hardly imagine that any profound scientific thinker, who has reflected upon the subject, exists who would not admit the extreme probability of the hypothesis, that for every fact of conscious- ness, whether in the domain of sense, of thought, or of emotion, a certain definite molecular condition is set up in the brain; that this relation of physics to con- sciousness is invariable, so that, given the state of the brain, the corresponding thought or feeling might be inferred; or given the thought or feeling, the corre- sponding state of the brain might be inferred. But how inferred? It is at bottom not a case of logical inference at all, but of empirical association. You may reply that many of the inferences of science are of this character; the inference, for example, that an electric current of a given direction will deflect a magnetic needle in a definite way; but the cases differ in this, that the passage from the current to the needle, if not demonstrable, is thinkable, and that we entertain no doubt as to the final mechanical solution of the problem; but the passage from the physics of the brain to the corresponding facts of consciousness is unthinkable, Granted that a definite thought, and a definite molecular action in the brain occur simultaneously ; we do not possess the intellectual organ, nor apparently any rudi- ment of the organ, which would enable us to pass by a process of reasoning from the one phenomenon to the other. They appear together, but we do not know why. Were our minds and senses so expanded, strengthened, and illuminated as to enable us to see and feel the very molecules of the brain; were we capable of following all their motions, all their groupings, all their electric discharges, if such there be; and were we intimately acquainted with the corresponding states of thought and feeling, we should be as far as ever from the solution of the problem, “ How are these physical processes connected with the facts of consciousness ?” The chasm between the two classes of phenomena would still remain intellectually impassable. Let the consciousness of Jove, for example, be associated with a right- handed spiral motion of the molecules of the brain, and the consciousness of hate with a left-handed spiral motion. We should then know when we love that the motion is in one direction, and when we hate that the motion is in the other; but the “ wy?” would still remain unanswered. In affirming that the growth of the body is mechanical, and that thought, as 6 REPORT—1868, exercised by us, has its correlative in the physics of the brain, I think the position of the “ Materialist” is stated as far as that position is a tenable one. I think the materialist will be able finally to maintain this position against all attacks; but I do not think, as the human mind is at present constituted, that he can pass beyond it. Ido not think he is entitled to say that his molecular groupings and his molecular motions explain everything. In reality they explain nothing. The ut- most he can affirm is the association of two classes of phenomena, of whose real bond of union he is in absolute ignorance. The problem of the connexion of body and soul is as insoluble in its modern form as it was in the prescientific ages. Phosphorus is known to enter into the composition of the human brain, and a courageous writer has exclaimed, in his trenchant German, “ Ohne Phosphor kein Gedanke.” That may or may not be the case; but eyen if we knew it to be the case, the knowledge would not lighten our darkness. On both sides of the zone here assigned to the materialist he is equally helpless. If you ask him whence is this “ matter’ of which we have been discoursing, who or what divided it into molecules, who or what impressed upon them this necessity of running into organic forms, he has no answer. Science also is mute in reply to these questions. But if the materialist is confounded and science rendered dumb, who else is en- titled to answer? To whom has the secret been revealed? Let us lower our heads and acknowledge our ignorance one and all. Perhaps the mystery may resolve itself into knowledge at some future day. The process of things upon this earth has been one of amelioration. It is a long way from the Iguanodon and his contemporaries, to the President and Members of the British Association. And whether we regard the improvement from the scientific or from the theological point of view, as the result of progressive development, or as the result of suc- cessive exhibitions of creative energy, neither view entitles us to assume that man’s present faculties end the series,—that the process of amelioration stops at him. A time may therefore come when this ultra-scientific region by which we are now enfolded may offer itself to terrestrial, if not to human investigation. ‘Two- thirds of the rays emitted by the sun fail to arouse in the eye the sense of vision. The rays exist, but the visual organ requisite for their translation into light does not exist. And so from this region of darkness and mystery which surrounds us, rays may now be darting which require but the development of the proper intel- lectual organs to translate them into knowledge as far surpassing ours as ours does that of the wallowing reptiles which once held possession of this planet. Mean- while the mystery is not without its uses. It certainly may be made a power in the human soul; but it is a power which has feeling, not knowledge, for its base. It may be, and will be, and we hope is turned to account, both in steadying and strengthening the intellect, and in rescuing man from that littleness to which, in the struggle for existence, or for precedence in the world, he is continually prone. On the Necessity for State Intervention to secure the Progress of Physical Science. By Lieut.-Col. A. Srranen, F.R.S., Government Inspector of Scientific In- struments, India Department. The author pointed out that physical science, like literature and the fine arts, requires to be taught, to be extended, and to be exhibited; that the necessity for teaching science in schools and universities is now generally admitted; that the results of science are very fully exhibited in all civilized communities; but that the provision for extending the boundaries of scientific knowledge in England is inadequate and unsystematic. After enumerating some of the institutions, national and corporate, in which certain branches of science are cultivated, the author re- marked that these are too limited in their objects, their scope, and their number to collect the data, and to push on with the necessary promptitude the investigations of which we stand in need. The paper urges that the period is gone by when science generally can be cultivated with simple and primitive means; and that the required researches of the present day need for their successful prosecution buildings expressly constructed for the purpose, extensive and costly appliances, and the continuous employment of the highest skill. It is evident that these re- TRANSACTIONS OF THE SECTIONS. a quirements cannot be met by private enterprise and munificence, or even by corpo- rate bodies supported by private contributions. These postulates being admitted, it follows of necessity that the resources of the State alone can adequately supply the existing want; and that unless these are so employed the progress of scientific knowledge and discovery must become slower and slower. Without entering into premature details, the paper proposes that there should be established a system of national institutions for the sole purpose of advan- cing science by practical research, quite apart from teaching it; that such insti- tutions, provided with extensive appliances and skilled operators, should be pre- sided over by a governing body constituted with reference solely to the scientific eminence of its members, or, which would be better, by a single chief, directly responsible to a Minister of State, as now proposed for the British Museum. That this body or chief should direct the labours of the Executive into such fields as they may deem most worthy of being explored; and that they should also have the power of sanctioning experiments and investigations proposed by any person un- connected with them, thus rendering the institution as much as possible accessible to the scientific public, and to persons whose objects, manufacturing or other, re- quire for their promotion physical data which they may possess neither the skill nor the appliances to obtain. Publication of results should also be duly provided for. The paper observes that such institutions would form a consultative body to which the State would resort for that advice and assistance which is now sought to be obtained by the very costly and not always very satisfactory expedient of special commissions. The advantages which the nation derives from the results of science, cultivated even as it is at present, desultorily and inefficiently, would be enormously multiplied by the introduction of the principle of continuity in re- search, and by the employment of the highest skill and the most perfect appliances. Systematic investigation conducted in the comprehensive manner proposed must prove directly remunerative, whether applied to strictly State purposes, or whether utilized in the public works, the manufactures, and the general necessities of the nation. The objections that may be urged against the present proposal are then touched on. The chief of these are :—First, that such State institutions would tend to chill eet enterprise. The reply is, that in certain departments of science the State as long been compelled to intervene. National observatories, surveys, and museums are instanced. These rather tend to stimulate than to restrain the private cultiva- tion of science. But it is assumed, as the very foundation of the present paper, that private scientific enterprise, great as it is in England, does not satisfy the present demands for physical data and laws; and therefore, if State intervention may be expected to satisfy those demands, the risk of discouraging the present insufficient agency must be incurred. And it is maintained that the tendency of progressive civilization must be to supersede individual effort. Secondly, that such a system as that proposed would bring with it abuses and jobbery. Let this be admitted with regard to science in common with every human organization. Every oo and every branch of the public service suffers from the inevitable evil. ut in spite of obvious corruption and favouritism, we still keep up an army, a navy, and a parliament. The greatest care must be taken to exclude abuses ; and those that will undoubtedly gain admission must be considered as part of the price paid for the advantages obtained. There are no grounds for imputing to science any special capacity for corruption. Thirdly, that the amount of work to be done may not prove sufficient for the continuous employment of very extensive establishments. The paper, however, assumes the contrary; its limits do not admit of the discussion of this objection, which would be submitted for the opinions of the men most eminent in physical research. After a brief recapitulation, the paper concludes thus :— “ Kyery visitor to this Congress of Science receives a printed paper, in which he is told that “¢The objects of the British Association are to give a stronger impulse and more systematic direction to scientific inquiry,’ and ‘to remove any disadvan- tages of a public kind which-impede its progress,’ 8 REPORT—1868. “ These words define, as precisely asif they had been written for the express urpose, the aims of the present proposal. It is for this powerful and enlightened Bo y to consider whether such an investigation of the subject shall be instituted as may serve to direct and impel public opinion in a channel which the educated classes of Englishmen seem now disposed to enter—insisting on the value and the comparatively backward condition of physical research, and indicating the means best fitted to place at man’s disposal, systematically and promptly, the intellectual pee and the material riches which a bounteous Providence has created for is use. MatHeEemarics. A historical Note on Lagrange’s Theorem. By W. Barrett Davis. On a new Correction to be applied to observations made with Hadley’s Sextant. By T. Doxson. Résumé of Experiments on Rigidity. By Professor J. D. Everurt, D.C.L. After pointing out the relations which connect Young’s modulus of elasticity, simple rigidity, resistance to cubic compression, and the ratio of lateral contrac- tion to longitudinal extension, in isotropic substances, which relations are such that if any two of these coefficients are given the other two can be inferred, the author proceeded to describe the method by which he had determined experimentally the values of the two first-mentioned coefficients, and had hence derived the values of the other two. The method consisted in applying a given couple to bend and twist alternately one and the same portion of a cylindrical rod. The especial object of investigation was the coefficient called ‘ Poisson’s ratio,” that is to say, the ratio which the lateral contraction of a rod bears to its longitudinal extension when it is forcibly lengthened within the limits of elasticity, which ratio was erroneously sup- posed by Poisson to have the constant value + for all substances. In order to determine the value of this coefficient for any particular isotropic substance, it was only necessary to compare the amounts of bending and twisting aeened in a given portion of a cylindrical rod by couples of equal moment. et T denote the amount of twisting, F the amount of bending, and o Poisson’s : TT ratio, then c= F- if In this way the following values of o had been found for one specimen of each of the undermentioned substances :—flint-glass, ‘229; drawn brass, -469; drawn steel, ‘310; wrought iron, ‘275; cast iron, ‘267; copper, ‘378. Examples of Ocular Demonstration of Geometrical Propositions. By Axrravur GEARING. The object of this communication was to demonstrate the possibility of any given geometrical form or forms being reduced to any other required geometrical figure without loss of material, and of equal area to the given number of contained counterparts. As tests for instrumental measurements and as discipline for the hand of the artist, the series suggested exact and interesting exercises in practical geometry, and might be used in the economy of adjusting materials. The examples (above 50 in number) comprise the reduction of regular polygons of any number of sides to squares and other figures with the same identical number of counterparts, each figure having some special distinction. The whole series could be cut out in paper, and a given figure made into another figure, thus constituting by ocular demon- stration an additional means of testing great geometrical truths as a pleasing ex- perimental exercise. ———— TRANSACTIONS OF THE SECTIONS. 9 On the Chances of Success or Failure of Candidates for three-cornered or four-cornered Constituencies. By KR. B. Harwarn, M.A. This paper discussed some of the consequences involved in the system of voting now in force for constituencies returning three or four representatives, by which no voter can yote for more than two candidates in the one case or for more than three in the other. Suppose a majority of M voters to bring forward three candiates A, B, C, while the minority of m voters bring forward two, and that, of the majority M, x vote for B and C, y for C and A, and z for A and B; then, supposing that each of the M voters gives both his votes, rs pert gt Ad ONE pica ca ome beeen CIs) The event of the success of A may be denoted by A, and the corresponding condi- tion is y+2> m; the event of his failure by a, and the condition is y+zm, z+r